2017 Regulation Syllabus
Uploaded by
M.Ashwini M.Ashwini2017 Regulation Syllabus
Uploaded by
M.Ashwini M.AshwiniANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:
The graduates after completion of the degree will be able to
1. Apply knowledge in emerging and varied areas of Aerospace Engineering for higher studies,
research, employment and product development.
2. Communicate their skills and have a sense of responsibility to protect the environment and
have ethical conduct towards their profession and commitment to serve the society.
3. Exhibit managerial skills and leadership qualities while understanding the need for lifelong
learning to be competent professionals
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:
a. Ability to solve the engineering problems of mathematics, science and engineering
b. An engineering acumen in identifying, formulating, analyzing and solving complex
engineering problems.
c. Developing processes, solutions to the problems which are safe socially, culturally and
environmentally.
d. Ability to model, analyze and simulate operations of aircraft components and parts.
e. Capability of exhibiting sound theoretical and practical knowledge in core domains like
aircraft structures, aerodynamics and propulsion and are able to solve problems related to
airflow over fixed and rotary wing aircrafts.
f. Understanding of the impact of engineering solutions in a global, economic, environmental,
and societal context
g. An ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic
constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety,
manufacturability, and sustainability.
h. Commitment to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms as prescribed by the
Aviation bodies such as DGCA .
i. Ability to work in team and have practical exposure in modeling of UAV, hovercrafts.
j. Ability to communicate effectively with the aerospace community using reports,
presentations and documentations.
k. Ability to manage the projects in various aerospace fields of structure, propulsion, avionics.
l. A readiness to engage in lifelong learning and understanding of contemporary issues in
aviation industry.
PEO / PO Mapping
PEO / a b c d e f g h i j k l
PO Type your te
1
2
3
1
Semester Course wise PO mapping
Course Title a b c d e f g h i j k l
Communicative English
Engineering Mathematics I
SEMESTER I
Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
Problem Solving and Python
Programming
Engineering Graphics
Problem Solving and Python
Programming Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
YEAR I
Technical English
Engineering Mathematics II
Materials Science
SEMESTER II
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
Environmental Science and
Engineering
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
Laboratory
Transforms and Partial Differential
SEMESTER III
Equations
YEAR II
Manufacturing Technology
Aero Engineering Thermodynamics
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Strength of Materials for Mechanical
Engineers
2
Elements of Aeronautical Engineering
Strength of Materials and Fluid
Mechanics & Machinery Laboratory
Thermodynamics Laboratory
Interpersonal Skills / Listening &
Speaking
Numerical Methods
Aerodynamics - I
Aircraft Systems and Instruments
SEMESTER IV
Mechanics of Machines
Aircraft Structures - I
Propulsion - I
Computer Aided Machine Drawing
Aerodynamics Laboratory
Flight Dynamics
Aircraft Structures - II
SEMESTER V
Aerodynamics - II
Propulsion - II
Control Engineering
Open Elective - I
YEAR III
Aircraft Structures Laboratory
Propulsion Laboratory
Professional Communication
Finite Element Methods
SEM VI
Experimental Aerodynamics
Composite Materials and Structures
3
Experimental Stress Analysis
Aircraft Design
Professional Elective – I
Aero Engine and Airframe Laboratory
Computer Aided Simulation Laboratory
Aircraft Design Project - I
Total Quality Management
Avionics
Computational Fluid Dynamics
SEMESTER VII
Open Elective - II
Professional Elective – II
Professional Elective – III
Flight Integration Systems and Control
Laboratory
YEAR IV
Aircraft Systems Laboratory
Aircraft Design Project - II
Professional Elective – IV
SEMESTER VIII
Professional Elective – V
Project Work
4
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python ES
4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics - II BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BE8253 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
6. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
TOTAL 30 20 2 8 25
5
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Transforms and Partial BS
MA8353 4 4 0 0 4
Differential Equations
2. ME8392 Manufacturing Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. Aero Engineering PC
AE8301 3 3 0 0 3
Thermodynamics
4. Fluid Mechanics and ES
CE8394 4 4 0 0 4
Machinery
5. Strength of Materials for ES
CE8395 3 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Engineers
6. Elements of Aeronautical PC
AE8302 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICAL
7. CE8381 Strength of Materials and ES
Fluid Mechanics & 4 0 0 4 2
Machinery Laboratory
8. AE8311 Thermodynamics PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening EEC
2 0 0 2 1
& Speaking
TOTAL 30 20 0 10 25
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. AE8401 Aerodynamics - I PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. AE8402 Aircraft Systems and PC 3
3 0 0 3
Instruments
4. PR8451 Mechanics of Machines PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. AE8403 Aircraft Structures - I PC 5 3 2 0 4
6. AE8404 Propulsion - I PC 5 3 2 0 4
PRACTICAL
7. ME8381 Computer Aided Machine PC
4 0 0 4 2
Drawing
8. AE8411 Aerodynamics Laboratory PC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 29 19 4 8 24
6
SEMESTER V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. AE8501 Flight Dynamics PC 5 3 2 0 4
2. AE8502 Aircraft Structures - II PC 5 3 2 0 4
3. AE8503 Aerodynamics - II PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. AE8504 Propulsion - II PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. AE8505 Control Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective - I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. AE8511 Aircraft Structures PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. AE8512 Propulsion Laboratory PC 2 0 0 2 1
9. HS8581 Professional EEC 2
0 0 2 1
Communication
TOTAL 30 18 4 8 24
SEMESTER VI
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. AE8601 Finite Element Methods PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. AE8602 Experimental Aerodynamics PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. AE8603 Composite Materials and PC 3
3 0 0 3
Structures
4. AE8604 Aircraft Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. AE8605 Experimental Stress Analysis PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective – I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. AE8611 Aero Engine and Airframe PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. AE8612 Computer Aided Simulation PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. AE8613 Aircraft Design Project - I EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 28 18 0 10 23
SEMESTER VII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. GE8077 Total Quality Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
2. AE8751 Avionics PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. ME8093 Computational Fluid PC
3 3 0 0 3
Dynamics
4. Open Elective - II OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective – III PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. AE8711 Aircraft Systems Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. AE8712 Flight Integration Systems PC
4 0 0 4 2
and Control Laboratory
9. AE8713 Aircraft Design Project - II EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 28 18 0 10 23
7
SEMESTER VIII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. AE8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16
TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR AWARD OF THE DEGREE = 185
8
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
GE8291 Environmental Science and
3. HS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. GE8077 Total Quality Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
BASIC SCIENCE (BS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics I BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
Physics and Chemistry
4. BS8161 BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics II BS 4 4 0 0 4
6. PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
Transforms and Partial
7. MA8353 Differential Equations BS 4 4 0 0 4
8. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
1. ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
GE8161 Problem Solving and Python
3. ES 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
Basic Electrical, Electronics
4. BE8253 and Instrumentation ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
GE8261 Engineering Practices
6. ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics
7. and Instrumentation ES 4 0 0 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
Fluid Mechanics and
8. CE8394 ES 4 4 0 0 4
Machinery
Strength of Materials for
9. CE8395 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Engineers
Strength of Materials and
10. CE8381 Fluid Mechanics and ES 4 0 0 4 2
Machinery Laboratory
9
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. ME8392 Manufacturing Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
Aero Engineering
2. AE8301 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Thermodynamics
Elements of Aeronautical
3. AE8302 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. AE8311 Thermodynamics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
5. AE8401 Aerodynamics - I PC 3 3 0 0 3
Aircraft Systems and
6. AE8402 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Instruments
7. PR8451 Mechanics of Machines PC 3 3 0 0 3
8. AE8403 Aircraft Structures - I PC 5 3 2 0 4
9. AE8404 Propulsion - I PC 5 3 2 0 4
ME8381 Computer Aided Machine PC
10. 4 0 0 4 2
Drawing
11. AE8411 Aerodynamics Laboratory PC 2 0 0 2 1
12. AE8501 Flight Dynamics PC 5 3 2 0 4
13. AE8502 Aircraft Structures - II PC 5 3 2 0 4
14. AE8503 Aerodynamics - II PC 3 3 0 0 3
15. AE8504 Propulsion - II PC 3 3 0 0 3
16. AE8505 Control Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
AE8511 Aircraft Structures
17. PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
18. AE8512 Propulsion Laboratory PC 2 0 0 2 1
19. AE8601 Finite Element Methods PC 3 3 0 0 3
20. AE8602 Experimental Aerodynamics PC 3 3 0 0 3
AE8603 Composite Materials and
21. PC 3 3 0 0 3
Structures
22. AE8604 Aircraft Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
AE8611 Aero Engine and Airframe
23. PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
Computer Aided Simulation
24. AE8612 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
25. AE8751 Avionics PC 3 3 0 0 3
Computational Fluid
26. ME8093 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Dynamics
27. AE8605 Experimental Stress Analysis PC 3 3 0 0 3
28. AE8711 Aircraft Systems Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
Flight Integration Systems
29. AE8712 PC 4 0 0 4 2
and Control Laboratory
10
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES FOR B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER VI, ELECTIVE – I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. PR8072 New Product Development PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. AE8001 Space Mechanics PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. AE8002 Aircraft General Engineering PE
3 3 0 0 3
and Maintenance Practices
4. AE8003 Heat Transfer PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano PE
3 3 0 0 3
Science
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVES– II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AE8004 Helicopter Theory PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. AE8005 Aero Engine Maintenance
PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Repair
3. AE8006 UAV Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. AE8007 Aircraft Materials PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. AE8008 Vibration and Elements of PE 3
3 0 0 3
Aeroelasticity
6. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVES – III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AE8009 Airframe Maintenance and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Repair
2. AE8010 Fatigue and Fracture PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. PR8071 Lean Six Sigma PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. ME8097 Non Destructive Testing and PE
3 3 0 0 3
Evaluation
5. GE8072 Foundation Skills in
Integrated Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
6. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVES – IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AE8011 Hypersonic Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. AE8012 Wind Tunnel Techniques PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. AE8013 Rockets and Missiles PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. AE8014 Structural Dynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. AE8015 Industrial Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
11
SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVES – V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. PR8491 Computer Integrated PE
3 3 0 0 3
Manufacturing
2. AE8016 Flight Instrumentation PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. AE8017 Theory of Elasticity PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. AE8018 Air Traffic Control and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Planning
5. MG8591 Principles of Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8076 Professional Ethics in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
Interpersonal EEC 2
1. HS8381 0 0 2 1
Skills/Listening & Speaking
Professional EEC 2
2. HS8581 0 0 2 1
Communication
3. AE8613 Aircraft Design Project - I EEC 2 0 0 2 1
4. AE8713 Aircraft Design Project - II EEC 2 0 0 2 1
5. AE8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
SUMMARY
B.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
Credits Percentage
SL. Credits per semester
Subject Area Total %
NO.
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 Humanities Sciences 4 7 0 0 0 0 3 0 14 7.57
2 Basic Sciences 12 7 4 4 0 0 0 0 27 14.59
3 Engineering Sciences 9 11 9 0 0 0 0 0 29 15.14
4 Professional Core 0 0 11 20 20 19 10 0 80 43.24
5 Professional Elective 0 0 0 0 0 3 6 6 15 8.11
6 Open Elective 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 0 6 3.24
7 Employability Enhancement
- - 1 0 1 1 1 10 14 8.11
Courses
Total 25 25 25 24 24 23 23 16 185
8 Non Credit/Mandatory
12
L T P C
HS8151
COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH 4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology
students.
To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& 12
FRIENDS
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short
narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic
conversations. Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave-
Language development – prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing meanings
of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure-
use of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening
to longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources.
Speaking- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development- degrees
of comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single word
substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines Writing-
letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email- Listening-
listening to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them. Speaking-
speaking about oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development- Tenses- simple
present-simple past- present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary development-
synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing
an outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-
fixed and semi-fixed expressions
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
13
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Course book for Undergraduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient Black Swan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES
1 Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,
2011.
2 Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning , USA: 2007
3 Redston, Chris & Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4 Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business
English. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5 Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books:
2013
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of
undetermined multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by
parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by
partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
14
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar
coordinates, in addition to change of order and change of variables.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions
and integration by parts.
Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent
improper integrals.
Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8,
3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
15
L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform
and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in
beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance
angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical
fibers - fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity - Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through
compound media (series and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances
- coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures -
crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of
imperfections in plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth
techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of
materials and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal
growth techniques.
16
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage
Learning, 2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and
water treatment techniques.
To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single
and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and
fuel cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external
treatment – Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse
Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption
isotherm – contact theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir -
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement.
Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic
promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis
– Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum -
manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane
number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power
alcohol and biodiesel. Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific
values- theoretical calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition
temperature - explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
17
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission
and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder
reactor - solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and
supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid
battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for
further learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT, LTD,
New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
To read and write simple Python programs.
To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
To define Python functions and call them.
To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation
(pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies
for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a
card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
modules and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments;
Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables,
distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
18
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort,
insertion sort, mergesort, histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
Decompose a Python program into functions.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated
for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd., 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
19
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views
of objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of
objects.
project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50 th
Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore,
2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
20
5. N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T PC
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Use functions for structuring Python programs.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
21
BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in
optics, thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)
22
L T P C
HS8251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester Engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering
and technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations , participate in group
discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their
areas of specialisation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts
from journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking –
describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in
a text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-
vocabularyused in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal passive
voice, numerical adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking –
introduction to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical,
practice in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary
Development- sequence words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of presentations-
Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job application – cover
letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and issue based essays-
-Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development-
clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and
survey-Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course learners will be able to:
Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
Write reports and winning job applications.
23
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice. Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary reading.
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be
used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigen
values and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of
a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
mapping – Mapping by functions w z c, cz, 1 , z 2 - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s
series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and
unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
24
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of the
following topics and their applications:
Eigen values and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s theorems
and their verification.
Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C
(Common to courses offered in Faculty of Mechanical
PH8251
Engineering 3 0 0 3
Except B.E. Materials Science and Engineering )
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the essential principles of materials science for mechanical and related
engineering applications.
UNIT I PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Solid solutions - Hume Rothery's rules – the phase rule - single component system - one-
component system of iron - binary phase diagrams - isomorphous systems - the tie-line rule - the
lever rule - application to isomorphous system - eutectic phase diagram - peritectic phase diagram
- other invariant reactions – free energy composition curves for binary systems - microstructural
change during cooling.
UNIT II FERROUS ALLOYS 9
The iron-carbon equilibrium diagram - phases, invariant reactions - microstructure of slowly cooled
steels - eutectoid steel, hypo and hypereutectoid steels - effect of alloying elements on the Fe-C
system - diffusion in solids - Fick's laws - phase transformations - T-T-T-diagram for eutectoid
steel – pearlitic, baintic and martensitic transformations - tempering of martensite – steels –
stainless steels – cast irons.
25
UNIT III MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9
Tensile test - plastic deformation mechanisms - slip and twinning - role of dislocations in slip -
strengthening methods - strain hardening - refinement of the grain size - solid solution
strengthening - precipitation hardening - creep resistance - creep curves - mechanisms of creep -
creep-resistant materials - fracture - the Griffith criterion - critical stress intensity factor and its
determination - fatigue failure - fatigue tests - methods of increasing fatigue life - hardness -
Rockwell and Brinell hardness - Knoop and Vickers microhardness.
UNIT IV MAGNETIC, DIELECTRIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Ferromagnetism – domain theory – types of energy – hysteresis – hard and soft magnetic
materials – ferrites - dielectric materials – types of polarization – Langevin-Debye equation –
frequency effects on polarization - dielectric breakdown – insulating materials – Ferroelectric
materials - superconducting materials and their properties.
UNIT V NEW MATERIALS 9
Ceramics – types and applications – composites: classification, role of matrix and reinforcement,
processing of fiber reinforced plastics – metallic glasses: types , glass forming ability of alloys,
melt spinning process, applications - shape memory alloys: phases, shape memory effect,
pseudoelastic effect, NiTi alloy, applications – nanomaterials: preparation (bottom up and top
down approaches), properties and applications – carbon nanotubes: types.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will have knowledge on the various phase diagrams and their applications
the students will acquire knowledge on Fe-Fe3C phase diagram, various microstructures
and alloys
the students will get knowledge on mechanical properties of materials and their
measurement
the students will gain knowledge on magnetic, dielectric and superconducting properties of
materials
the students will understand the basics of ceramics, composites and nanomaterials.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Balasubramaniam, R. “Callister's Materials Science and Engineering”. Wiley India Pvt.
Ltd., 2014.
2. Raghavan, V. “Physical Metallurgy: Principles and Practice”. PHI Learning, 2015.
3. Raghavan, V. “Materials Science and Engineering : A First course”. PHI Learning, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. Askeland, D. “Materials Science and Engineering”. Brooks/Cole, 2010.
2. Smith, W.F., Hashemi, J. & Prakash, R. “Materials Science and Engineering”. Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
3. Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2009.
BE8253 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T PC
ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
• Electric circuit laws, single and three phase circuits and wiring
• Working principles of Electrical Machines
• Working principle of Various electronic devices and measuring instruments
26
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9
Basic circuit components - Ohms Law - Kirchoff’s Law – Instantaneous Power – Inductors -
Capacitors – Independent and Dependent Sources - steady state solution of DC circuits - Nodal
analysis, Mesh analysis- Thevinin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem, Maximum Power transfer
theorem- Linearity and Superposition Theorem.
UNIT II AC CIRCUITS 9
Introduction to AC circuits – waveforms and RMS value – power and power factor, single phase
and three-phase balanced circuits – Three phase loads - housing wiring, industrial wiring,
materials of wiring
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Principles of operation and characteristics of ; DC machines, Transformers (single and three
phase ) ,Synchronous machines , three phase and single phase induction motors.
UNIT IV ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS 9
Types of Materials – Silicon & Germanium- N type and P type materials – PN Junction –Forward
and Reverse Bias –Semiconductor Diodes –Bipolar Junction Transistor – Characteristics – Field
Effect Transistors – Transistor Biasing –Introduction to operational Amplifier –Inverting Amplifier –
Non Inverting Amplifier –DAC – ADC .
UNIT V MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION 9
Introduction to transducers - Classification of Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive,
Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall effect and Mechanical - ,Classification of
instruments - Types of indicating Instruments - multimeters –Oscilloscopes- – three-phase power
measurements– instrument transformers (CT and PT )
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
Understand electric circuits and working principles of electrical machines
Understand the concepts of various electronic devices
Choose appropriate instruments for electrical measurement for a specific application
TEXT BOOKS
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, ”Electrical Machines “Basic Electrical and Electronics
Engineering”, McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016
2. Leonard S Bobrow, “ Foundations of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2013
3. Thereja .B.L., “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.,
2008
REFERENCES
1. A.E.Fitzgerald, David E Higginbotham and Arvin Grabel, “Basic Electrical Engineering”,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, 2009
2. Allan S Moris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elseveir, First Indian Edition,
2006
3. Del Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007
4. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology”, Elsevier, First Indian Edition, 2006
5. N K De, Dipu Sarkar, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Universities Press (India)Private Limited
2016
6. Rajendra Prasad, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006
27
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the nature and facts about environment.
To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and
waste management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive
use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national
and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field
study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes,
etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems –
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,
case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land
degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field
study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy –
water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental
organization- environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –
28
wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act –
Wildlife protection act – Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is
an important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge
on the following after completing the course.
Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India PVT,
LTD, Delhi, 2014.
GE8292 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop capacity to predict the effect of force and motion in the course of carrying out
the design functions of engineering.
UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Parallelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Vector operations of forces -
additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces – rectangular components –
Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent
systems of forces – Principle of transmissibility .
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 9+6
Free body diagram – Types of supports –Action and reaction forces –stable equilibrium –
Moments and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial
representation of moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem
– Single equivalent force -Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid
bodies in three dimensions
29
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 9+6
Centroids and centre of mass – Centroids of lines and areas - Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow section by using standard
formula –Theorems of Pappus - Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular,
triangular areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using
standard formula – Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Principal moments of
inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of inertia-Mass moment of inertia –mass moment of inertia
for prismatic, cylindrical and spherical solids from first principle – Relation to area moments of
inertia.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion
- Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation– Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT V FRICTION AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 9+6
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilibrium analysis of simple systems with sliding friction
–wedge friction-. Rolling resistance -Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and
acceleration – General Plane motion of simple rigid bodies such as cylinder, disc/wheel and
sphere.
TOTAL : 45+30=75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
illustrate the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
analyse the rigid body in equilibrium
evaluate the properties of surfaces and solids
calculate dynamic forces exerted in rigid body
determine the friction and the effects by the laws of friction
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer, F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi (2004).
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics”, Oxford University Press (2010)
REFERENCES:
1. Bhavikatti, S.S and Rajashekarappa, K.G., “Engineering Mechanics”, New Age International
(P) Limited Publishers, 1998.
2. Hibbeller, R.C and Ashok Gupta, “Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics”, 11th
Edition, Pearson Education 2010.
3. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao. G., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education 2006.
4. Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G., “ Engineering Mechanics- Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics-
Volume 2”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,1993.
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G., “Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”,
3rd Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
30
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
Welding:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
31
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC
circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement
of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
32
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
BE8261 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T PC
ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students in performing various tests on electrical drives, sensors and circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Load test on separately excited DC generator
2. Load test on Single phase Transformer
3. Load test on Induction motor
4. Verification of Circuit Laws
5. Verification of Circuit Theorems
6. Measurement of three phase power
7. Load test on DC shunt motor.
8. Diode based application circuits
9. Transistor based application circuits
10. Study of CRO and measurement of AC signals
11. Characteristics of LVDT
12. Calibration of Rotometer
13. RTD and Thermistor
Minimum of 10 Experiments to be carried out :-
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to determine the speed characteristic of different electrical machines
Ability to design simple circuits involving diodes and transistors
Ability to use operational amplifiers
33
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 D. C. Motor Generator Set 2
2 D.C. Shunt Motor 2
3 Single Phase Transformer 2
4 Single Phase Induction Motor 2
5 Ammeter A.C and D.C 20
6 Voltmeters A.C and D.C 20
7. Watt meters LPF and UPF 4
8. Resistors & Breadboards -
9. Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes 4
10. Dual Regulated power supplies 6
11. A.C. Signal Generators 4
12. Transistors (BJT, JFET) -
MA8353 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering
apart from its use in solving boundary value problems.
To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used
in various situations.
To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of
situations.
To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential
equations that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for
discrete time systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential
equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-
homogeneous types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic
analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state
solution of two dimensional equation of heat conduction.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem –
Parseval’s identity.
34
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial fraction and residues) –
Initial and final value theorems - Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations –
Solution of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in
engineering applications.
Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations
would provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of
engineering.
Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by
using Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. B.V Ramana.., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2016.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
3. G. James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
4. L.C Andrews, L.C and Shivamoggi, B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
5. N.P. Bali. and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 9 th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
6. R.C. Wylie, and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
ME8392 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The automobile components such as piston, connecting rod, crankshaft, engine block, front
axle, frame, body etc., are manufactured by various types of production processes involving
casting, welding, machining, metal forming, power metallurgy etc.
UNIT I CASTING 8
Casting types, procedure to make sand mould, types of core making, moulding tools, machine
moulding, special moulding processes – CO2 moulding; shell moulding, investment mounding,
permanent mould casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting, continuous casting, casting
defects.
35
UNIT II WELDING 8
Classification of welding processes. Principles of Oxy-acetylene gas welding. A.C metal arc
welding, resistance welding, submerged arc welding, tungsten inert gas welding, metal inert gas
welding, plasma arc welding, thermit welding, electron beam welding, laser beam welding, defects
in welding, soldering and brazing.
UNIT III MACHINING 13
General principles (with schematic diagrams only) of working and commonly performed operations
in the following machines: Lathe, Shaper, Planer, Horizontal milling machine, Universal drilling
machine, Cylindrical grinding machine, Capstan and Turret lathe. Basics of CNC machines.
General principles and applications of the following processes: Abrasive jet machining, Ultrasonic
machining, Electric discharge machining, Electro chemical machining, Plasma arc machining,
Electron beam machining and Laser beam machining.
UNIT IV FORMING AND SHAPING OF PLASTICS 7
Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes – Moulding of
Thermoplastics – Working principles and typical applications of - Injection moulding – Plunger and
screw machines – Blow moulding – Rotational moulding – Film blowing – Extrusion - Typical
industrial applications – Thermoforming – Processing of Thermosets – Working principles and
typical applications - Compression moulding – Transfer moulding – Bonding of Thermoplastics –
Fusion and solvent methods – Induction and Ultrasonic methods
UNIT V METAL FORMING AND POWDER METALLURGY 9
Principles and applications of the following processes: Forging, Rolling, Extrusion, Wire drawing
and Spinning, Powder metallurgy – Principal steps involved advantages, disadvantages and
limitations of powder metallurgy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The Students can able to use different manufacturing process and use this in industry for
component production
TEXT BOOKS
1. Hajra Choudhury, “Elements of Workshop Technology”, Vol. I and II, Media Promoters and
Publishers Pvt., Ltd., Mumbai, 2005.
2. Nagendra Parashar B.S. and Mittal R.K., “Elements of Manufacturing Processes”, Prentice-
Hall of India Private Limited, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Adithan. M and Gupta. A.B., “Manufacturing Technology”, New Age, 2006.
2. “H.M.T. Production Technology – Handbook”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3. Jain. R.K. and S.C. Gupta, “Production Technology”, Khanna Publishers. 16th Edition,2001.
4. Roy. A. Linberg, “Process and Materials of Manufacture”, PHI, 2000.
5. Serope Kalpajian, Steven R.Schmid, “Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials”,
Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, Inc. 2007.
AE8301 AERO ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Aero Thermodynamics study includes quantitative analysis of machine and processes for
transformation of energy and between work and heat.
Laws of thermodynamics would be able to quantify through measurement of related
properties, to these energies and their interactions.
To develop basic concept of air cycle, gas turbine engines and heat transfer.
36
UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPT AND FIRST LAW 9
Concept of continuum, macroscopic approach, thermodynamic systems – closed, open and
isolated. Property, state, path and process, quasi-static process, work, internal energy, enthalpy,
specific heat capacities and heat transfer, SFEE, application of SFEE to jet engine components,
First law of thermodynamics, relation between pressure, volume and temperature for various
processes, Zeroth law of thermodynamics.
UNIT II SECOND LAW AND ENTROPY 9
Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin Planck and Clausius statements of second law.
Reversibility and Irreversibility, Thermal reservoir, Carnot theorem. Carnot cycle, Reversed Carnot
cycle, efficiency, COP, Thermodynamic temperature scale - Clausius inequality, Concept of
entropy, Entropy change for various processes. Mixing of fluids.
UNIT III AIR STANDARD CYCLES 8
Otto, Diesel, Dual, Ericsson, Atkinson, Stirling and Brayton cycles - air standard efficiency - mean
effective pressure.
UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF VAPOUR POWER CYCLES 9
Properties of pure substances – solid, liquid and vapour phases, phase rule, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s
diagrams, p-v-T surfaces, thermodynamic properties of steam - calculations of work done and heat
transfer in non-flow and flow processes - standard Rankine cycle, Reheat and Regeneration cycle.
Heat rate, Specific steam consumption, Tonne of refrigeration.
UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION AND HEAT TRANSFER 10
Classification of jet engines - basic jet propulsion arrangement – Engine station number, thrust
equation – Specific thrust, SFC, TSFC, specific impulse, actual cycles, isentropic efficiencies of jet
engine components, polytropic efficiency, conduction in parallel, radial and composite wall, basics
of convective and radiation heat transfer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Able to relate laws of thermodynamics to jet engine components.
Understands principle operation of piston engine and jet engines.
Able to identify efficient cycle of air and jet engines.
Capable to illustrate condition of working medium.
Eligible to recognize and calculate heat transfer in complex systems involving several heat
transfer mechanisms.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Rathakrishnan E., “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, Prentice-Hall India, 2005.
3. Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A. Boles, “Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach”
McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 7thedition 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Arora C.P, “ Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Holman.J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Merala C, Pother, Craig W, Somerton, “Thermodynamics for Engineers”, Schaum Outline
Series,Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Ramalingam K.K. “Thermodynamics”, Sci-Tech Publications, 2006
5. Venwylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987
37
CE8394 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The properties of fluids and concept of control volume are studied
The applications of the conservation laws to flow through pipes are studied.
To understand the importance of dimensional analysis
To understand the importance of various types of flow in pumps.
To understand the importance of various types of flow in turbines.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 12
Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mass density, specific weight, specific volume,
specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility, vapor pressure, surface tension and capillarity. Flow
characteristics – concept of control volume - application of continuity equation, energy
equation and momentum equation.
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 12
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli-
Boundary layer concepts – types of boundary layer thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation –
friction factor- Moody diagram- commercial pipes- minor losses – Flow through pipes in series
and parallel.
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12
Need for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similitude –types of
similitude - Dimensionless parameters- application of dimensionless parameters – Model
analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 12
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various efficiencies–
velocity components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps–
working principle - work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump-
working principle – Rotary pumps –classification.
UNIT V TURBINES 12
Classification of turbines – heads and efficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed
flow turbines. Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work done
by water on the runner – draft tube. Specific speed - unit quantities – performance curves for
turbines – governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Apply mathematical knowledge to predict the properties and characteristics of a fluid.
Can analyse and calculate major and minor losses associated with pipe flow in piping
networks.
Can mathematically predict the nature of physical quantities
Can critically analyse the performance of pumps
Can critically analyse the performance of turbines.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House, New
Delhi 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Graebel. W.P, "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 2011
2. Kumar K. L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New
Delhi 2016
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, 2011.
4. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co. 2010
38
CE8395 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS FOR MECHANICAL
ENGINEERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of stress, strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
To study the concept of shearing force and bending moment due to external loads in
determinate beams and their effect on stresses.
To determine stresses and deformation in circular shafts and helical spring due to torsion.
To compute slopes and deflections in determinate beams by various methods.
To study the stresses and deformations induced in thin and thick shells.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains – Stresses
on inclined planes – principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stress.
UNIT II TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams –
Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple bending–
bending stress distribution – Load carrying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched beams –
Shear stress distribution.
UNIT III TORSION 9
Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs, carriage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of
slopes and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwell’s reciprocal
theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9
Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure circumferential and longitudinal stresses
and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal pressure –
Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
Understand the concepts of stress and strain in simple and compound bars, the importance
of principal stresses and principal planes.
Understand the load transferring mechanism in beams and stress distribution due to
shearing force and bending moment.
Apply basic equation of simple torsion in designing of shafts and helical spring
Calculate the slope and deflection in beams using different methods.
Analyze and design thin and thick shells for the applied internal and external pressures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 2007
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
39
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002
2. Ferdinand P. Been, Russell Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, 2013
4. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Press, Oxford Higher Education
Series, 2010.
AE8302 ELEMENTS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Understand the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
Study the different component systems and functions
Understand the basic properties and principles behind the flight
Study the different structures & construction
Study the various types of power plants used in aircrafts
UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8
Balloon flight-ornithopers-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.
UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10
Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.
UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9
Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.
UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPULSION 9
Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust
production- Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
UNIT V BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9
General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learn the history of aircraft & developments over the years
Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
Understand the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
An ability to differentiate the types of fuselage and constructions.
Different types of Engines and principles of Rocket
40
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.
REFERENCE
1. Kermode, A.C. Flight without Formulae, Pearson Education; Eleven edition, 2011
CE8381 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND FLUID MECHANICS L T P C
& MACHINERY LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To study the mechanical properties of materials when subjected to different types of
loading.
To verify the principles studied in Fluid Mechanics theory by performing experiments
in lab.
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild steel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminum rods
3. Torsion test on mild steel rod
4. Impact test on metal specimen
5. Hardness test on metals - Brinnell and Rockwell Hardness Number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Compression test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge
9. Effect of hardening- Improvement in hardness and impact resistance of steels.
10. Tempering- Improvement Mechanical properties Comparison
(i) Unhardened specimen
(ii) Quenched Specimen and
(iii) Quenched and tempered specimen.
11. Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and
(ii) Hardened and tempered samples.
OUTCOME:
Ability to perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on
Solid materials.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Universal Tensile Testing machine with double 1 shear attachment – 1
40 Ton Capacity
2 Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) 1
3 Impact Testing Machine (300 J Capacity) 1
4 Brinell Hardness Testing Machine 1
5 Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine 1
6 Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads (2500 N) 1
7 Metallurgical Microscopes 3
8 Muffle Furnace (800 C) 1
41
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINES LABORATORY 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter.
2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.
3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter.
4. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal
pump / submergible pump
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on Solid
materials.
Use the measurement equipments for flow measurement.
Perform test on different fluid machinery.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Orifice meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton wheel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
AE8311 THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To enhance the basic knowledge in applied thermodynamics
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Performance test on a 4-stroke engine
2. Valve timing of a 4 – stroke engine and port timing of a 2 stroke engine
3. Determination of effectiveness of a parallel flow heat exchanger
4. Determination of effectiveness of a counter flow heat exchanger
5. Determination of heating value of a fuel
6. Determination of specific heat of solid
7. Determination of thermal conductivity of solid.
8. Determination of thermal resistance of a composite wall.
9. COP test on a vapour compression refrigeration test rig
10. COP test on a vapour compression air-conditioning test rig
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
42
OUTCOMES:
Ability to perform test on diesel/petrol engine
Ability to explain the characteristics of the diesel/Petrol engine
Ability to determine the properties of the fuels.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Qty Experiment
Sl.No Details of Equipments
Req. No.
1. 4 stroke twin cylinder diesel engine 1 1
2. Cut section model of 4 stroke diesel engine and cut 1 2
section model of 2 stroke petrol engine
3. Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger test rig 1 3,4
4. Bomb Calorimeter 1 5
5. Vapour compression refrigeration test rig 1 9
6. Vapour compression air-conditioning test rig 1 10
7. Conductive heat transfer set up 1 7
8. Composite wall 1 8
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING & SPEAKING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage in
specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation -
pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a complete
idea as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over a
wide range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute informal
talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer - accept -
decline - take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group
discussion - summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to and
participating in conversations - persuade.
43
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions
in academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
Listen and respond appropriately.
Participate in group discussions
Make effective presentations
Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University
Press, Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford:
2010
REFERENCES
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014.
3. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
MA8491 NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals in real life
situations.
To acquaint the student with understanding of numerical techniques of differentiation and
integration which plays an important role in engineering and technology disciplines.
To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
To understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving various types of
partial differential equations.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 12
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton
Raphson method - Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting -
Gauss Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a
matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 12
Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange's interpolation – Newton’s divided difference
interpolation – Cubic Splines - Difference operators and relations - Interpolation with equal
intervals - Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae.
44
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using
Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule – Romberg’s Method - Two point and three point Gaussian
quadrature formulae – Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Single step methods - Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge - Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods - Milne’s and
Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.
UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Finite difference methods for solving second order two - point linear boundary value problems -
Finite difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations
on rectangular domain – One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and implicit (Crank
Nicholson) methods – One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand the basic concepts and techniques of solving algebraic and transcendental
equations.
Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation and error approximations in various
intervals in real life situations.
Apply the numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. Brian Bradie, "A Friendly Introduction to Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Gerald. C. F. and Wheatley. P. O., "Applied Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, 6 th
Edition, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Mathews, J.H. "Numerical Methods for Mathematics, Science and Engineering", 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1992.
4. Sankara Rao. K., "Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers", Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Sastry, S.S, "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 5 th Edition,
2015
45
AE8401 AERODYNAMICS - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of mass, momentum and energy conservation relating to
aerodynamics.
To make the student understand the concept of vorticity, irrotationality, theory of airfoils
and wing sections.
To introduce the basics of viscous flow.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO LOW SPEED FLOW 9
Euler equation, incompressible bernoulli’s equation. circulation and vorticity, green’s lemma and
stoke’s theorem, barotropic flow, kelvin’s theorem, streamline, stream function, irrotational flow,
potential function, equipontential lines, elementary flows and their combinations.
UNIT II TWO DIMENSIONAL INVISCID INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW 9
Ideal Flow over a circular cylinder, D’Alembert’s paradox, magnus effect, Kutta joukowski’s
theorem, starting vortex, kutta condition, real flow over smooth and rough cylinder.
UNIT III AIRFOIL THEORY 9
Cauchy-riemann relations, complex potential, methodology of conformal transformation, kutta-
joukowski transformation and its applications, thin airfoil theory and its applications.
UNIT IV SUBSONIC WING THEORY 9
Vortex filament, biot and savart law, bound vortex and trailing vortex, horse shoe vortex, lifting line
theory and its limitations.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY 9
Boundary layer and boundary layer thickness, displacement thickness, momentum thickness,
energy thickness, shape parameter, boundary layer equations for a steady, two dimensional
incompressible flow, boundary layer growth over a flat plate, critical reynolds number, blasius
solution, basics of turbulent flow.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
An ability to apply airfoil theory to predict airfoil performance
Analyze and optimize wing performance
A knowledge of incompressible flow
A knowledge of subsonic wing theory
Apply propeller theory to predict blade performance
An exposure to Boundary layer theory
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., "Fundamentals of Aerodynamics", McGraw Hill Book Co., 2010
2. Houghton, E.L., and Caruthers, N.B., "Aerodynamics for Engineering students", Edward
Arnold Publishers Ltd., London, 1989.
REFERENCES:
1. Clancey, L J.," Aerodynamics", Pitman, 1986
2. John J Bertin., "Aerodynamics for Engineers", Pearson Education Inc, 2002
3. Kuethe, A.M and Chow, C.Y, “Foundations of Aerodynamics”, Fifth Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2000.
4. Milne Thomson, L.H., "Theoretical Aerodynamics", Macmillan, 1985
46
AE8402 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS AND INSTRUMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge of the hydraulic and pneumatic systems components and types of
instruments and its operation including navigational instruments to the students
UNIT I AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS 9
Hydraulic systems – Study of typical systems – components – Hydraulic systems controllers –
Modes of operation – Pneumatic systems – Working principles – Typical Pneumatic Power system
– Brake system – Components, Landing Gear Systems – Classification – Shock absorbers –
Retractive mechanism.
UNIT II AIRPLANE CONTROL SYSTEMS 10
Conventional Systems – Power assisted and fully powered flight controls – Power actuated
systems – Engine control systems – Push pull rod system – operating principles – Modern control
systems – Digital fly by wire systems – Auto pilot system, Active Control Technology.
UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS 9
Piston and Jet Engines- Fuel systems – Components - Multi-engine fuel systems, lubricating
systems – Starting and Ignition systems.
UNIT IV AIRCONDITIONING AND PRESSURIZING SYSTEM 8
Basic Air Cycle systems – Vapour Cycle Systems, Boot-strap air cycle system – Evaporative
vapour cycle systems – Evaporation air cycle systems – Oxygen systems – Fire extinguishing
system and smoke detection system, Deicing and anti-icing system.
UNIT V AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS 9
Flight Instruments and Navigation Instruments – Accelerometers, Air speed Indicators – Mach
Meters – Altimeters - Gyroscopic Instruments– Principles and operation – Study of various types of
engine instruments – Tachometers – Temperature and Pressure gauges.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Compare the features of various flight control systems.
Describe the principle and working of different aircraft systems.
Analyze the performance of various aircraft engine systems.
Acquire and interpret data from various aircraft instruments.
Identify the various cockpit controls.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mekinley, J.L. and R.D. Bent, Aircraft Power Plants, McGraw Hill 1993.
2. Pallet, E.H.J. Aircraft Instruments & Principles, Pitman & Co 1993.
REFERENCES
1. Handbooks of Airframe and Power plant Mechanics, US dept. of Transportation, Federal,
Aviation Administration, the English Book Store, New Delhi, 1995.
2. McKinley, J.L. and Bent R.D. Aircraft Maintenance & Repair, McGraw Hill, 1993.
3. Teager, S, “Aircraft Gas Turbine technology, McGraw Hill 1997.
47
PR8451 MECHANICS OF MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the principles in the formation of mechanisms and their kinematics.
To understand the effect of friction in different machine elements.
To understand the importance of balancing and vibration.
UNIT I KINEMATICS OF MACHINES 9
Mechanisms – Terminology and definitions – kinematics inversions of 4 bar and slide crank chain
– kinematics analysis in simple mechanisms – velocity and acceleration polygons – Cam and
followers – classifications – displacement diagrams - layout of plate cam profiles – derivatives of
followers motion
UNIT II GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Spur gear – law of toothed gearing – involute gearing – Interchangeable gears – Gear tooth action
interference and undercutting – nonstandard teeth – gear trains – parallel axis gears trains –
epicyclic gear trains.
UNIT III FRICTION 9
Types of friction – Friction Drives -friction in screw threads – bearings – Friction clutches – Belt
drives
UNIT IV BALANCING and MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 9
Static and Dynamic balancing – Balancing of revolving and reciprocating masses – Balancing
machines -Balancing a single cylinder engine – Balancing of Multi-cylinder inline, V-engines –
Partial balancing in engines- Governors and Gyroscopic effects.
UNIT V VIBRATION 9
Free, forced and damped vibrations of single degree of freedom systems – force transmitted to
supports – vibration Isolation – vibration absorption – torsional vibration of shafts – single and
multirotor systems – geared shafts – critical speed of shafts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Student will be able to
Understand the principles in the formation of mechanisms and their kinematics.
Understand the construction features of Gears and Gear Trains.
Understand the effect of friction in different machine elements.
Understand the importance of balancing.
Understand the importance of Governors and Gyroscopic effects.
Understand the importance of vibration.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ambekar A.G.,Mechanism and Machine Theory‖ Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007
2. Shigley J.E., Pennock G.R and Uicker J.J., ―Theory of Machines and Mechanisms‖, Oxford
University Press, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Ghosh.A, and A.K.Mallick, ―Theory and Machine ‖, Affiliated East-West Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
1988.
2. Ramamurthi. V., "Mechanisms of Machine", Narosa Publishing House, 2005.
3. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipatti R.V. ―Mechanisms and Machines ‖, Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,
1998.
4. Robert L.Norton, "Design of Machinery", McGraw-Hill, 2012.
5. Thomas Bevan, ―Theory of Machines‖, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2010.
48
AE8403 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES - I L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the students an understanding on the linear static analysis of determinate and
indeterminate aircraft structural components.
To provide the design process using different failure theories.
UNIT I STATICALLY DETERMINATE & INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES 9+6
Plane truss analysis – method of joints – method of sections – method of shear – 3-D trusses –
principle of super position, Clapeyron’s 3 moment equation and moment distribution method for
indeterminate beams.
UNIT II ENERGY METHODS 9+6
Strain Energy in axial, bending, torsion and shear loadings. Castigliano’s theorems and their
applications. Energy theorems – dummy load & unit load methods – energy methods applied to
statically determinate and indeterminate beams, frames, rings & trusses.
UNIT III COLUMNS 9+6
Euler’s column curve – inelastic buckling – effect of initial curvature – Southwell plot – columns
with eccentricity – use of energy methods – theory of beam columns – beam columns with
different end conditions – stresses in beam columns.
UNIT IV FAILURE THEORIES 9+6
Ductile and brittle materials – maximum principal stress theory - maximum principal strain theory -
maximum shear stress theory - distortion energy theory – octahedral shear stress theory.
UNIT V INDUCED STRESSES 9+6
Thermal stresses – impact loading – Fatigue – Creep - Stress Relaxation
TOTAL :75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to perform linear static analysis of determinate and indeterminate aircraft structural
components
Ability to design the component using different theories of failure
Calculate the response of statically indeterminate structures under various loading
conditions.
Calculate the reactions of structures using strain energy concept.
Create a structure to carry the given load.
Examine the structural failures using failure theories
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ‘Mechanics of Materials’ by James M. Gere & Barry J Goodno, cengage Learning Custom
Publishing; 8th edition, 2012.
2. Megson T M G, `Aircraft Structures for Engineering students’ Butterworth-Heinemann
publisher, 5th edition, 2012.
3. N.C. Pandya, C.S. Shah, “Elements of Machine Design”, Charotar Publishing House, 15th
edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Bruhn E F, ‘Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures’, Tri-State Off-set Company, USA,
1985
2. Donaldson, B.K., ‘Analysis of Aircraft Structures - An Introduction’ Cambridge University Press
publishers, 2 nd edition , 2008
3. Peery, D.J., and Azar, J.J., Aircraft Structures, 2nd edition, McGraw – Hill, N.Y., 1999.
49
AE8404 PROPULSION – I L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVE:
To establish fundamental approach and application of jet engine components. Also
analysis of flow phenomenon and estimation of thrust developed by jet engine.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF AIR BREATHING ENGINES 9+6
Operating principles of piston engines – thermal efficiency calculations – classification of piston
engines - illustration of working of gas turbine engines – factors affecting thrust – methods of thrust
augmentation – performance parameters of jet engines.
UNIT II JET ENGINE INTAKES AND EXHAUST NOZZLES 9+6
Ram effect, Internal flow and Stall in subsonic inlets – relation between minimum area ratio and
eternal deceleration ratio – diffuser performance – modes of operation - supersonic inlets –
starting problem on supersonic inlets – shock swallowing by area variation – real flow through
nozzles and nozzle efficiency – losses in nozzles – ejector and variable area nozzles - interaction
of nozzle flow with adjacent surfaces – thrust reversal.
UNIT III JET ENGINE COMBUSTION CHAMBERS 9+6
Chemistry of combustion, Combustion equations, Combustion process, classification of
combustion chambers – combustion chamber performance – effect of operating variables on
performance – flame stabilization, Cooling process, Materials, Aircraft fuels, HHV, LHV, Orsat
apparatus
UNIT IV JET ENGINE COMPRESSORS 9+6
Euler’s turbo machinery equation, Principle operation of centrifugal compressor, Principle
operation of axial flow compressor– Work done and pressure rise – velocity diagrams – degree of
reaction – free vortex and constant reaction designs of axial flow compressor – performance
parameters axial flow compressors– stage efficiency.
UNIT V JET ENGINE TURBINES 9+6
Principle of operation of axial flow turbines– limitations of radial flow turbines- Work done and
pressure rise – Velocity diagrams – degree of reaction – constant nozzle angle designs –
performance parameters of axial flow turbine– turbine blade cooling methods – stage efficiency
calculations – basic blade profile design considerations – matching of compressor and turbine
TOTAL :75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To be able to apply control volume and momentum equation to estimate the forces
produced by aircraft propulsion systems
To be able to describe the principal figures of merit for aircraft engine
To be able to describe the principal design parameters and constraints that set the
performance of gas turbine engines.
To apply ideal and actual cycle analysis to a gas turbine engine to relate thrust and fuel
burn to component performance parameters.
Understanding the workings of multistage compressor or turbine, and to be able to use
velocity triangles and the Euler Turbine Equation to estimate the performance of a
compressor or turbine stage.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Hill, P.G. & Peterson, C.R. “Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Propulsion” Pearson education
(2009)
50
REFERENCES:
1. Cohen, H. Rogers, G.F.C. and Saravanamuttoo, H.I.H. “Gas Turbine Theory”, Pearson
Education Canada; 6th edition, 2008.
2. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”, Standard
Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition 2014.
3. Oates, G.C., “Aero thermodynamics of Aircraft Engine Components”, AIAA Education Series,
New York, 1985.
4. “Rolls Royce Jet Engine”, Rolls Royce; 4th revised edition, 1986.
ME8381 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand and interpret drawings of machine components
To prepare assembly drawings both manually and using standard CAD packages
To familiarize the students with Indian Standards on drawing practices and standard
components
To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
UNIT I DRAWING STANDARDS & FITS AND TOLERANCES 12
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints,
keys, fasteners – Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like
bolts, nuts, screws, keys etc. - Limits, Fits – Tolerancing of individual dimensions – Specification
of Fits – Preparation of production drawings and reading of part and assembly drawings, basic
principles of geometric dimensioning & tolerancing.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO 2D DRAFTING 16
Drawing, Editing, Dimensioning, Layering, Hatching, Block, Array, Detailing,
Detailed drawing.
Bearings - Bush bearing, Plummer block
Valves – Safety and non-return valves.
UNIT III 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING AND ASSEMBLY 32
Sketcher - Datum planes – Protrusion – Holes - Part modeling – Extrusion – Revolve –
Sweep – Loft – Blend – Fillet - Pattern – Chamfer - Round - Mirror – Section - Assembly
Couplings – Flange, Universal, Oldham’s, Muff, Gear couplings
Joints – Knuckle, Gib & cotter, strap, sleeve & cotter joints
Engine parts – Piston, connecting rod, cross-head (vertical and horizontal), stuffing box,
multi-plate clutch
Miscellaneous machine components – Screw jack, machine vice, tail stock, chuck,
vane and gear pump
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
Note: 25% of assembly drawings must be done manually and remaining 75% of assembly
drawings must be done by using any CAD software. The above tasks can be performed manually
and using standard commercial 2D / 3D CAD software
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Follow the drawing standards, Fits and Tolerances
CO2 Re-create part drawings, sectional views and assembly drawings as per standards
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Machine Drawing”, 22nd Edition, Subhas Stores Books
Corner, Bangalore, 2013
51
REFERENCES:
1. Junnarkar, N.D., “Machine Drawing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004
2. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, 48th Edition, Charotar Publishers,2013
3. N. Siddeshwar, P. Kanniah, V.V.S. Sastri, ”Machine Drawing” , published by Tata McGraw
Hill,2006
4. S. Trymbaka Murthy, “A Text Book of Computer Aided Machine Drawing”, CBS Publishers,
New Delhi, 2007
AE8411 AERODYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVE:
To predict different aerodynamic propulsion used in aero application
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of a subsonic Wind tunnel.
2. Determination of lift for the given airfoil section.
3. Pressure distribution over a smooth circular cylinder.
4. Pressure distribution over a rough circular cylinder.
5. Pressure distribution over a symmetric aerofoil.
6. Pressure distribution over a cambered aerofoil.
7. Force measurement using wind tunnel balancing set up.
8. Flow over a flat plate at different angles of incidence.
9. Flow visualization studies in low speed flows over cylinders.
10. Flow visualization studies in low speed flows over airfoil with different angle of incidence.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Describe the fundamental aerodynamic and geometrical properties related to external flows
over airfoils, wings, and bluff bodies.
Calculate the aerodynamic forces and moments experienced by airfoils, wings and bluff
bodies.
Use thin aerofoil theory to evaluate the performance of thin airfoils and the effects of angle
of attack and camber.
Use wind tunnel instrumentation to measure flow velocity and lift and drag.
Visualize the flow and pressure distribution over 2D and 3D bodies by water flow and
smoke methods.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.
Name of the Equipment Quantity Experiment No.
No.
1 Subsonic Wind tunnel 1 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Models(aerofoil, rough and smooth
2 2 5,6,7,8,9,10
cylinder , flat plate)
Angle of incidence changing
3 8,10
mechanism 1 No.
4 Multi tube Manometer 1 No. 2,3,4,5,6
5 Pitot-Static Tubes 1 No. 1
Cylinder models (Rough and
6 3,4
Smooth) 2 Nos.
Wind Tunnel balances (3 or 6 7
7
components) 1 No.
8 Smoke Generator 1 No. 8,9,10
9 Water flow channel 1 No. 8,9,10
52
AE8501 FLIGHT DYNAMICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVE:
To study the performance of airplanes under various operating conditions and the static and
dynamic response of aircraft for both voluntary and involuntary changes in flight conditions
UNIT I CRUISING FLIGHT PERFORMANCE 9+6
Forces and moments acting on a flight vehicle - Equation of motion of a rigid flight vehicle -
Different types of drag –estimation of parasite drag co-efficient by proper area method- Drag polar
of vehicles from low speed to high speeds - Variation of thrust, power with velocity and altitudes for
air breathing engines . Performance of airplane in level flight - Power available and power required
curves. Maximum speed in level flight - Conditions for minimum drag and power required
UNIT II MANOEUVERING FLIGHT PERFORMANCE 9+6
Range and endurance - Climbing and gliding flight (Maximum rate of climb and steepest angle of
climb, minimum rate of sink and shallowest angle of glide) – Takeoff and landing - Turning
performance (Turning rate turn radius). Bank angle and load factor – limitations on turn - V-n
diagram and load factor.
UNIT III STATIC LONGITUDINAL STABILITY 9+6
Degree of freedom of rigid bodies in space - Static and dynamic stability - Purpose of controls in
airplanes -Inherently stable and marginal stable airplanes – Static, Longitudinal stability - Stick
fixed stability - Basic equilibrium equation - Stability criterion - Effects of fuselage and nacelle -
Influence of CG location - Power effects - Stick fixed neutral point - Stick free stability-Hinge
moment coefficient - Stick free neutral points-Symmetric maneuvers - Stick force gradients - Stick
force per 'g' - Aerodynamic balancing.
UNIT IV LATERAL AND DIRECTIONAL STABILITY 9+6
Dihedral effect - Lateral control - Coupling between rolling and yawing moments - Adverse yaw
effects - Aileron reversal - Static directional stability - Weather cocking effect - Rudder
requirements - One engine inoperative condition - Rudder lock.
UNIT V DYNAMIC STABILITY 9+6
Introduction to dynamic longitudinal stability: - Modes of stability, effect of freeing the stick - Brief
description of lateral and directional. dynamic stability - Spiral, divergence, Dutch roll, auto rotation
and spin.
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Know about the forces and moments that are acting on an aircraft, the different types of
drag, drag polar, ISA, variation of thrust, power, SFC with velocity and altitude.
Have understanding about performance in level flight, minimum drag and power
required, climbing, gliding and turning flight, v-n diagram and load factor.
Knowledge about degrees of stability, stick fixed and stick free stability, stability criteria,
effect of fuselage and CG location, stick forces, aerodynamic balancing.
Understanding about lateral control, rolling and yawing moments, static directional
stability, rudder and aileron control requirements and rudder lock.
Understanding about dynamic longitudinal stability, stability derivatives, modes and
stability criterion, lateral and directional dynamic stability.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mc Cornick. W., “Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight Mechanics”, John Wiley, NY, 1979.
2. Nelson, R.C. “Flight Stability and Automatic Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2004.
3. Perkins, C.D., and Hage, R.E., “Airplane Performance stability and Control”, John Wiley &
Son:, Inc, NY, 1988.
53
REFERENCES :
1. Babister, A.W., “Aircraft Dynamic Stability and Response”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1980.
2. Dommasch, D.O., Sherby, S.S., and Connolly, T.F., “Aeroplane Aero dynamics”, Third Edition,
Issac Pitman, London, 1981.
3. Etkin, B., “Dynamics of Flight Stability and Control”, Edn. 2, John Wiley, NY, 1982.
4. Mc Cornick B. W, “Aerodynamics, Aeronautics and Flight Mechanics”, John Wiley, NY, 1995.
AE8502 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES - II L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the behavior of loads experience of aircraft indigenous components.
To provide the students adopt with various methods for analysis of aircraft wings and
fuselage.
To provide conception design of major aircraft structural components.
To provide the better understate the low weight structures.
UNIT I UNSYMMETRICAL BENDING 9+6
Bending of symmetric beams subject to skew loads - bending stresses in beams of unsymmetrical
sections – generalized k-method, neutral axis method, principal axis method, Advantages and
Disadvantages of three methods.
UNIT II SHEAR FLOW IN OPEN SECTIONS 9+6
Thin walled beams – concept of shear flow – the shear centre and its determination – shear flow
distribution in symmetrical and unsymmetrical thin-walled sections – structural idealization – shear
flow variation in idealized sections-Applications of shear flow calculations.
UNIT III SHEAR FLOW IN CLOSED SECTIONS 9+6
Bredt - Batho theory – single-cell and multi-cell tubes subject to torsion – shear flow distribution in
thin-walled single & multi-cell structures subject to combined bending and torsion – with walls
effective and ineffective in bending-Importance of shear flow & shear center determination.
UNIT IV BUCKLING OF PLATES 9+6
Bending of thin plates - local buckling stress of thin walled sections – crippling strength estimation-
thin skin stringer panel-effective skin width –inter rivet buckling-skin stringer panel-Integrally
stiffened panels-cutouts- Lightly loaded beams.
UNIT V STRESS ANALYSIS OF WING AND FUSELAGE 9+6
Aircraft loads- classification – the V-n diagram – shear force and bending moment distribution over
the aircraft wing and fuselage – shear flow in thin-webbed beams with parallel and non-parallel
flanges – complete tension field beams – semi-tension field beam theory.
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to understand loads acting an aircraft.
Ability to identify& resolve the structural design& its limitations .
Ability to improvise distribution their loads on aircraft member with safer limits.
Ability to understand the design of low weight to high strength panel member.
Ability to analyze the aircraft real structural components such as wings and fuselage.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bruhn. E.H., "Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicles Structures", Tri-state off-set Company,
USA, 1985.
2. Megson T M G , "Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students", Elsevier Ltd, 2012
3. Michael Chun-Yung Niu, “Airframe structural Design ”,Conmilit Press Ltd,1998
54
REFERENCES:
1. Howard D Curtis, "Fundamentals of Aircraft Structural Analysis", WCB-McGraw Hill, 1997
2. Rivello, R.M., "Theory and Analysis of Flight Structures", McGraw Hill, 1993.
3. Peery, D.J., and Azar, J.J., "Aircraft Structures", 2nd edition, McGraw – Hill, N.Y., 1999
AE8503 AERODYNAMICS – II L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the concepts of compressibility,
• To make the student understand the theory behind the formation of shocks and expansion
fans in Supersonic flows.
• To introduce the methodology of measurements in Supersonic flows.
UNIT I ONE DIMENSIONAL COMPRESSIBLE FLOW 10
Energy, Momentum, continuity and state equations, velocity of sound, adiabatic steady state flow
equations, Flow through convergent- divergent passage, Performance under various back
pressures.
UNIT II NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 12
Prandtl equation and Rankine – Hugonoit relation, Normal shock equations, Pitot static tube,
corrections for subsonic and supersonic flows, Oblique shocks and corresponding equations,
Hodograph and pressure turning angle, shock polar, flow past wedges and concave corners,
strong, weak and detached shocks,
UNIT III EXPANSION WAVES AND METHOD OF CHARACTERISTICS 8
Flow past convex corners, Expansion hodograph, Reflection and interaction of shocks and
expansion, waves. Method of Characteristics Two dimensional supersonic nozzle contours.
Rayleigh and Fanno Flows.
UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF MOTION FOR STEADY
COMPRESSIBLE FLOWS 7
Small perturbation potential theory, solutions for supersonic flows, Mach waves and Mach angles,
Prandtl-Glauert rule - affine transformation relations for subsonic flows, Linearised two dimensional
supersonic flow theory - Lift, drag, pitching moment and center of pressure of supersonic profiles.
UNIT V TRANSONIC FLOW OVER WING 8
Lower and upper critical Mach numbers, Lift and drag, divergence, shock induced separation,
Characteristics of swept wings, Effects of thickness, camber and aspect ratio of wings, Transonic
area rule. Introduction to Hypersonic Aerodynamics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Calculate the compressible flow through a duct of varying cross section.
Use quasi one-dimensional theory to analyze compressible flow problems.
Estimate fluid properties in Rayleigh and Fanno type flows.
Estimate the properties across normal and oblique shock waves.
Predict the properties of hypersonic flows.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson Jr., D., – “Modern compressible flows”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1999.
2. L.J. Clancy, “Aerodynamics” Sterling Book House, 2006
55
REFERENCES
1. Rathakrishnan, E., “Gas Dynamics”, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2017.
2. Shapiro, A.H., “Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid Flow”, Ronald Press,
1982.
3. Zucrow, M.J. and Anderson, J.D., “Elements of gas dynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co.,New
York, 1989.
AE8504 PROPULSION – II L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To impart make students understand theory in non air-breathing and hypersonic propulsion
methods to students so that they are familiar with various propulsion technologies
associated with space launch vehicles, missiles and space probes.
UNIT I RAMJET AND SCRAMJET PROPULSION 8
Operating principle of Ramjet engine – combustion in Ramjet engine- ramjet performance and
sample ramjet design calculations - Introduction to hypersonic air breathing propulsion, hypersonic
vehicles and supersonic combustion- need for supersonic combustion for hypersonic propulsion –
salient features of scramjet engine and its applications for hypersonic vehicles – problems
associated with supersonic combustion – engine/airframe integration aspects of hypersonic
vehicles – various types scramjet combustors – fuel injection schemes in scramjet combustors.
UNIT II CHEMICAL ROCKET PROPULSION 9
Operating principle – specific impulse of a rocket – internal ballistics – performance characteristics
of rockets – simple rocket design problems – types of igniters- Rocket nozzle classification -
preliminary concepts in nozzle-less propulsion – air augmented rockets – pulse rocket motors –
static testing of rockets & instrumentation –safety considerations
UNIT III SOLID ROCKET PROPULSION 10
Salient features of solid propellant rockets – selection criteria of solid propellants – estimation of
solid propellant adiabatic flame temperature - propellant grain design considerations – erosive
burning in solid propellant rockets – combustion instability – strand burner and T-burner –
applications and advantages of solid propellant rockets.
UNIT IV LIQUID AND HYBRID ROCKET PROPULSION 10
Salient features of liquid propellant rockets – selection of liquid propellants – various feed systems
and injectors for liquid propellant rockets -thrust control and cooling in liquid propellant rockets and
the associated heat transfer problems – combustion instability in liquid propellant rockets –
peculiar problems associated with operation of cryogenic engines - Introduction to hybrid rocket
propulsion – standard and reverse hybrid systems- combustion mechanism in hybrid propellant
rockets – applications and limitations
UNIT V ADVANCED PROPULSION SYSTEMS 8
Electric rocket propulsion– types of electric propulsion techniques - Ion propulsion – Nuclear
rocket – comparison of performance of these propulsion systems with chemical rocket propulsion
systems – future applications of electric propulsion systems - Solar sail – current scenario of
advanced propulsion projects worldwide.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Understanding ramjet and hypersonic air breathing propulsion systems.
To get familiarity in rocket propulsion systems.
Knowing the applications and principles of liquid and solid-liquid propulsion systems.
To gain knowledge about the advanced propulsion technique used for interplanetary
mission.
56
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mathur, M.L., and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”, Standard
Publishers and Distributors, Delhi, 2014.
2. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 8th Edition,
2010.
REFERENCE:
1. Robert G. Jahn, “Physics of Electric Propulsion”, Dover Publications, 2006.
AE8505 CONTROL ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the mathematical modeling of systems, open loop and closed loop systems and
analyses in time domain and frequency domain.
To impart the knowledge on the concept of stability and various methods to analyze stability in
both time and frequency domain.
To introduce sampled data control system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical review, Simple pneumatic, hydraulic and thermal systems, Series and parallel system,
Analogies, mechanical and electrical components, Development of flight control systems.
UNIT II OPEN AND CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 9
Feedback control systems – Control system components - Block diagram representation of control
systems, Reduction of block diagrams, Signal flow graphs, Output to input ratios.
UNIT III CHARACTERISTIC EQUATION AND FUNCTIONS 9
Laplace transformation, Response of systems to different inputs viz., Step impulse, pulse,
parabolic and sinusoidal inputs, Time response of first and second order systems, steady state
errors and error constants of unity feedback circuit.
UNIT IV CONCEPT OF STABILITY 9
Necessary and sufficient conditions, Routh-Hurwitz criteria of stability, Root locus and Bode
techniques, Concept and construction, frequency response.
UNIT V SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS 9
Z-Transforms Introduction to digital control system, Digital Controllers and Digital PID controllers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to apply mathematical knowledge to model the systems and analyse the frequency
domain
Ability to check the stability of the both time and frequency domain
Ability to solve simple pneumatic, hydraulic and thermal systems, Mechanical and
electrical component analogies based problems.
Ability to solve the Block diagram representation of control systems, Reduction of block
diagrams, Signal flow graph and problems based on it.
Ability to understand the digital control system, Digital Controllers and Digital PID
Controllers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Azzo, J.J.D. and C.H. Houpis Feed back control system analysis and synthesis, McGraw-Hill
international 3rs Edition, 1998.
2. OGATO, Modern Control Engineering, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
57
REFERENCES:
1. Houpis, C.H. and Lamont, G.B. "Digital control Systems", McGraw Hill Book co., New York,
U.S.A. 1995.
2. Kuo, B.C. "Automatic control systems", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998.
3. Naresh K Sinha, "Control Systems", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 1998.
AE8511 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students understand the behavior of aircraft structural components under
different loading conditions.
To provide the Principle involved in photo elasticity and its applications in stress analysis
for composite laminates.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Deflection of Beams
2. Verification of superposition theorem
3. Verification of Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem
4. Buckling load estimation of slender eccentric columns
5. Determination of flexural rigidity of composite beams
6. Unsymmetrical Bending of a Cantilever Beam
7. Combined bending and Torsion of a Hollow Circular Tube
8. Material Fringe Constant of a Photo elastic Models
9. Shear Centre of a Channel Section
10. Free Vibration of a Cantilever Beam
11. Forced Vibration of a cantilever Beam
12. Fabrication of a Composite Laminate.
13. Determination of Elastic constants for a Composite Tensile Specimen.
14. Determination of Elastic constants for a Composite Flexural Specimen.
15. Tension field beam
Any 10 experiments can be chosen
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course
students can understand the behavior of materials subjected to various types of loadings
Students will be in a position to fabricate a composite laminates.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl. Experiment
Name of the Equipment Quantity
No. No.
1 100 kN Universal Testing Machine 1 13,14
Beams with weight hangers and dial
2 6 1,2,3
gauges
3 Column set up with dial gauges 2 4
4 Photo elasticity set up 1 8
5 Vibration set up with accessories 1 10,11
6 Wagner beam 1 15
7 Unsymmetrical bending set up 1 6
Set up for combined bending and
8 1 7
torsion
58
AE8512 PROPULSION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
To explore practically components of aircraft piston and gas turbine engines and their
working principles.
To impart practical knowledge of flow phenomenon of subsonic and supersonic jets.
To determine practically thrust developed by rocket propellants.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of aircraft piston and gas turbine engines
2. Velocity profiles of free jets.
3. Velocity profiles of wall jets.
4. Wall pressure measurements of a subsonic diffusers and ramjet ducts.
5. Flame stabilization studies using conical and hemispherical flame holders.
6. Cascade testing of compressor blades.
7. Velocity and pressure measurements high speed jets.
8. Wall Pressure measurements of supersonic nozzle.
9. Flow visualization of supersonic flow.
10. Study experiments
TOTAL:30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Capable to identify components and information of piston and gas turbine engine.
Able to analyze behavior of flow through ducts and jet engine components.
Ability to visualize flow phenomenon in supersonic flow.
Recognizes performance parameters of rocket propellants.
To be able to distinguish subsonic and supersonic flow characteristics.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.No. Name of the Equipment Quantity Experiment No.
1 Jet engine 1 1
2 Piston engine 1 1
3 Jet facility with compressor and storage tank 1 2,3,,8,9,10
4 Multitube manometer 3 2,3,4,6,8,9
5 Wind tunnel 1 6
6 0-5 bar pressure transducer with pressure indicator 8 8,9
OR
DSA pressure scanner 1
7 Ramjet facility 1 4
8 Conical flame holder model 1 5
9 Hemispherical flame holder model 1 5
10 Water flow channel 1 5
11 Compressor blade set 1 6
12 Schlieren or Shadowgraph set up 1 10
13 Convergent nozzle 1 8
14 Convergent divergent nozzle 1 7,8,9,10
15 Thruster with load cells 1 7
59
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: The course aims to:
Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employable Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the topic –
answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute
presentations
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics
- brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-term
career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2. Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,
2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
60
AE8601 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give exposure various methods of solution and in particular the finite element method.
Gives exposure to the formulation and the procedure of the finite element method and its
application to varieties of problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Review of various approximate methods – variational approach and weighted residual approach-
application to structural mechanics problems. finite difference methods- governing equation and
convergence criteria of finite element method.
UNIT II DISCRETE ELEMENTS 10
Bar elements, uniform section, mechanical and thermal loading, varying section, 2D and 3D truss
element. Beam element - problems for various loadings and boundary conditions – 2D and 3D
Frame elements - longitudinal and lateral vibration. Use of local and natural coordinates.
UNIT III CONTINUUM ELEMENTS 8
Plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric problems. Derivation of element matrices for constant
and linear strain triangular elements and axisymmetric element.
UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS 9
Definitions, Shape function for 4, 8 and 9 nodal quadrilateral elements, stiffness matrix and
consistent load vector, evaluation of element matrices using numerical integration.
UNIT V FIELD PROBLEM AND METHODS OF SOLUTIONS 10
Heat transfer problems, steady state fin problems, derivation of element matrices for two
dimensional problems, torsion problems. bandwidth- elimination method and method of
factorization for solving simultaneous algebraic equations – Features of software packages,
sources of error.
TOTAL (L:45): 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Write flow chart of finite element steps and understand the convergence of the problem
Solve stiffness matrix for bar, beam and frame problems using suitable boundary condition.
Plane stress and plane strain condition are used to understand 2d structures.
Modelling of 2d and 3d structures using isoparametric elements
Apply the concepts of finite element methods to solve fluid flow and heat transfer problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reddy J.N., "An Introduction to Finite Element Method", McGraw Hill, third edition, 2005.
2. Tirupathi.R. Chandrapatha and Ashok D. Belegundu, "Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering", Prentice Hall India, Fourth edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Bathe, K.J. and Wilson, E.L., "Numerical Methods in Finite Elements Analysis", Prentice Hall of
India, 1985.
2. Krishnamurthy, C.S., "Finite Element Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.
3. Rao. S.S., "Finite Element Methods in Engineering," Butterworth and Heinemann, 2001.
61
AE8602 EXPERIMENTAL AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide extensive treatment of the operating principles and limitations of pressure and
temperature measurements. To cover both operating and application procedures of hot
wire anemometer. To describe flow visualization techniques and to highlight in depth
discussion of analog methods.
UNIT I BASIC MEASUREMENTS IN FLUID MECHANICS 7
Objective of experimental studies – Fluid mechanics measurements – Properties of fluids –
Measuring instruments – Performance terms associated with measurement systems – Direct
measurements - Analogue methods – Flow visualization – Components of measuring systems –
Importance of model studies.
UNIT II WIND TUNNEL MEASUREMENTS 10
Characteristic features, operation and performance of low speed, transonic, supersonic and
special tunnels - Power losses in a wind tunnel – Instrumentation and calibration of wind tunnels –
Turbulence- Wind tunnel balance – Wire balance – Strut-type – Platform-type – Yoke-type –
Pyramid type – Strain gauge balance – Balance calibration.
UNIT III FLOW VISUALIZATION AND ANALOGUE METHODS 9
Visualization techniques – Smoke tunnel – Hele-Shaw apparatus - Interferometer –
Fringe-Displacement method – Schlieren system – Shadowgraph - Hydraulic analogy – Hydraulic
jumps – Electrolytic tank.
UNIT IV PRESSURE, VELOCITY AND TEMPERATUREMEASUREMENTS 9
Pitot - static tube characteristics - Velocity measurements - Hot-wire anemometry – Constant
current and Constant temperature Hot-Wire anemometer – Pressure measurement techniques -
Pressure transducers – Temperature measurements.
UNIT V SPECIAL FLOWS AND UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS 10
Experiments on Taylor-Proudman theorem and Ekman layer – Measurements in boundary layers -
Data acquisition and processing – Signal conditioning – Uncertainty analysis – Estimation of
measurement errors – External estimate of the error – Internal estimate of the error – Uncertainty
calculation - Uses of uncertainty analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Knowledge on measurement techniques in aerodynamic flow.
Acquiring basics of wind tunnel measurement systems
Specific instruments for flow parameter measurement like pressure, velocity.
Use measurement techniques involved in Aerodynamic testing.
Analyze the model measurements, Lift and drag measurements through various
techniques and testing of different models.
Apply the Wind tunnel boundary corrections and Scale effects
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rathakrishnan, E., “Instrumentation, Measurements, and Experiments in Fluids,” CRC Press –
Taylor & Francis, 2007.
2. Robert B Northrop, “Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements”,
Second Edition, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradsaw "Experimental Fluid Mechanics", Elsevier, 2nd edition, 1970.
2. Pope, A., and Goin, L., "High Speed Wind Tunnel Testing", John Wiley, 1985.
62
AE 8603 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the student understand the analysis of composite laminates under different
loading conditions and different environmental conditions.
UNIT I MICROMECHANICS 10
Introduction - advantages and application of composite materials – types of reinforcements and
matrices - micro mechanics – mechanics of materials approach, elasticity approach- bounding
techniques – fiber volume ratio – mass fraction – density of composites. effect of voids in
composites.
UNIT II MACROMECHANICS 10
Generalized Hooke’s Law - elastic constants for anisotropic, orthotropic and isotropic materials -
macro mechanics – stress-strain relations with respect to natural axis, arbitrary axis –
determination of in plane strengths of a lamina - experimental characterization of lamina. failure
theories of a lamina. hygrothermal effects on lamina.
UNIT III LAMINATED PLATE THEORY 10
Governing differential equation for a laminate. stress – strain relations for a laminate. different
types of laminates. in plane and flexural constants of a laminate. hygrothermal stresses and
strains in a laminate. failure analysis of a laminate. impact resistance and interlaminar stresses.
netting analysis
UNIT IV FABRICATION PROCESS AND REPAIR METHODS 8
Various open and closed mould processes, manufacture of fibers, importance of repair and
different types of repair techniques in composites – autoclave and non-autoclave methods.
UNIT V SANDWICH CONSTRUCTIONS 7
Basic design concepts of sandwich construction - materials used for sandwich construction -
failure modes of sandwich panels - bending stress and shear flow in composite beams.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Understanding the mechanics of composite materials
Ability to analyse the laminated composites for various loading eases
Knowledge gained in manufacture of composites.
Should analyze sandwich and laminated plates
Should be able to construct and analysis different composite technique
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Autar K Kaw, ‘Mechanics of Composite Materials’, CRC Press, 2nd edition, 2005.
2. Isaac M. Daniel & Ori Ishai , "Mechanics of Composite Materials," OUP USA publishers,
2ndedition, 2005.
3. Madhujit Mukhopadhyay, Mechanics of Composite Materials and Structures, University
Press, 2004
REFERENCES:
1. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman, L.J., "Analysis and Performance of Fibre Composites," John
Wiley & Sons, 3rd edition, July 2006.
2. Allen Baker, Composite Materials for Aircraft Structures, AIAA Series, 2ndEdition, 2004.
3. Calcote, L R. “The Analysis of laminated Composite Structures”, Von – Nostrand Reinhold
Company, New York 1998.
4. Lubing, Handbook on Advanced Plastics and Fibre Glass, Von Nostran Reinhold Co., New
York, 1989.
5. Michael F. Ashley, “Material Selection in Mechanical Design”, 5th edition, Butterworth-Heiner,
2016
63
AE8604 AIRCRAFT DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the student understand the choice of the selection of design parameters, Fixing
the geometry and to investigate the performance and stability characteristics of airplanes.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
State of art in airplane design, Purpose and scope of airplane design, Classification of airplanes
based on purpose and configuration. Factors affecting configuration, Merits of different plane
layouts. Stages in Airplane design. Designing for manufacturability, Maintenance, Operational
costs, Interactive designs.
UNIT II PRELIMINARY DESIGN PROCEDURE 9
Data collection and 3-view drawings,· their purpose, weight estimation, Weight equation method –
Development & procedures for evaluation of component weights. Weight fractions for various
segments of mission. Choice of wind loading and thrust. Loading .
UNIT III POWER PLANT SELECTION 10
Choices available, comparative merits, Location of power plants, Functions dictating the locations.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF WING, FUSELAGE AND EMPHANAGE 10
Selection of aerofoil. Selection of Wing parameters, selection of sweep, Effect of Aspect ratio,
Wing Design and Airworthiness requirements, V-n diagram, loads, Structural features. Elements
of fuselage design, Loads on fuselage, Fuselage Design. Fuselage and tail sizing. Determination
of tail surface areas, Tail design, Structural features, Check for nose wheel lift off.
UNIT V DESIGN OF LANDING GEAR AND CONTROL SURFACE 10
Landing Gear Design, Loads on landing gear, Preliminary landing gear design. Elements of
Computer Aided and Design, Special consideration in configuration lay-out, Performance
estimation.Stability aspects on the design of control surface.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
• Initiate the preliminary design of an aircraft starting from data collection to satisfy mission
specifications;
• To get familiarized with the estimation of geometric and design parameters of an airplane
• Understanding the procedure involved in weight estimation, power plant selection,
estimation of the performance parameters, stability aspects, design of structural
components of the airplane, stability of structural elements, estimation of critical loads etc.
• Initiate the design of a system, component, or process to meet requirements for aircraft
systems;
• Complete the design of an aircraft to a level of sufficient detail to demonstrate that it
satisfies given mission specifications
• Work in a multidisciplinary environment involving the integration of engineering practices in
such subjects as aerodynamics, structures, propulsion, and flight mechanics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raymer, D.P. Aircraft conceptual Design, AIAA series, 5th edition, 2012.
2. Torenbeck, E. Synthesis of Subsonic Airplane Design, Delft University Press, U.K. 1986.
.
REFERENCE:
1. Kuechemann, D, “ The Aerodynamic Design of Aircraft, American Institute of Aeronautics
publishers, 2012
64
AE8605 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the various experimental techniques involved for measuring displacements,
stresses, strains in structural components.
UNIT I EXTENSOMETERS AND DISPLACEMENT SENSORS 8
Principles of measurements, Accuracy, Sensitivity and range of measurements, Mechanical,
Optical, Acoustical and Electrical extensometers and their uses, Advantages and disadvantages,
Capacitance gauges, Laser displacement sensors.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE STRAIN GAUGES 12
Principle of operation and requirements, Types and their uses, Materials for strain gauges,
Calibration and temperature compensation, cross sensitivity, Wheatstone bridge and
potentiometer circuits for static and dynamic strain measurements, strain indicators, Rosette
analysis, stress gauges, load cells, Data acquisition, six component balance.
UNIT III PHOTOELASTICITY 11
Two dimensional photo elasticity, Photo elastic materials, Concept of light - photoelastic effects,
stress optic law, Transmission photoelasticity, Jones calculus, plane and circular polariscopes,
Interpretation of fringe pattern, Calibration of photoelastic materials, Compensation and separation
techniques, Introduction to three dimensional photo elasticity.
UNIT IV BRITTLE COATING AND MOIRE TECHNIQUES 7
Relation between stresses in coating and specimen, use of failure theories in brittle coating, Moire
method of strain analysis.
UNIT V NON – DESTRUCTIVE TESTING 7
Fundamentals of NDT, Acoustic Emission Technique, Radiography, Thermography, Ultrasonics,
Eddy Current testing, Fluorescent Penetrant Testing,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Knowledge of stress and strain measurements in loaded components.
Acquiring information's the usage of strain gauges and photo elastic techniques of
measurement .
Formulate and solve general three dimensional problems of stress-strain analysis
especially fundamental problems of elasticity.
Analyze the strain gauge data under various loading condition by using gauge rosette
method.
Experimentally evaluate the location and size of defect in solid and composite materials
by using various Non-destructive Testing methods.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dally, J.W., and Riley, W.F., "Experimental Stress Analysis", McGraw Hill Inc., New York 1998.
2. Srinath, L.S., Raghava, M.R., Lingaiah, K., Garagesha, G., Pant B., and Ramachandra, K.,
"Experimental Stress Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Sadhu Singh, "Experimental Stress Analysis", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Durelli. A.J., "Applied Stress Analysis", Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1970
2. Hetenyi, M., "Hand book of Experimental Stress Analysis", John Wiley and Sons Inc., New
York, 1972.
3. Max Mark Frocht, "Photo Elasticity", John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, 1968
4. Pollock A.A., Acoustic Emission in Acoustics and Vibration Progress, Ed. Stephens R.W.B.,
Chapman and Hall,1993.
5. Ramesh, K., Digital Photoelasticity, Springer, New York, 2000.
65
AE8611 AERO ENGINE AND AIRFRAME LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the knowledge of the maintenance and repair procedures followed for
overhaul of aero engines.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Dismantling and reassembling of an aircraft piston engine.
2. Study of Camshaft operation, firing order and magneto, valve timing
3. Study of lubrication and cooling system
4. Study of auxiliary systems, pumps and carburetor
5. Aircraft wood gluing-single & double scarf joints
6. Welded single & double V-joints.
7. Fabric & Riveted Patch repairs
8. Tube bending and flaring
9. Sheet metal forming
10. Preparation of glass epoxy of composite laminates and specimens.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to maintain and repair the aero engines.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl. No Equipments Qty
1 Aircraft Piston engines 1
2 Set of basic tools for dismantling and assembly 1 set
3 NDT equipment 1 set
4 Micrometers, depth gauges, vernier calipers 2 sets
5 Valve timing disc 1
6 Shear cutter pedestal type 1
7 Drilling Machine 1
8 Bench Vices 1
9 Radius Bend bars 1
10 Pipe Flaring Tools 1
11 Welding machine 1
12 Glass fibre, epoxy resin 1
13 Strain gauges and strain indicator 1
AE8612 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students familiarize with computational fluid dynamics and structural analysis
software tools. By employing these tools for Aerospace applications students will have an
opportunity to expose themselves to simulation software.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Grid independence study and convergence test using any simple case like pipe flow,
diffuser flow, flow over a cylinder, aero foil etc.
2. Simulation of flow over backward facing step.
3. Simulation of Karman vortex trail (vortex shedding) using circular cylinder.
4. External flow simulation of subsonic and supersonic aero foils.
5. Internal flow simulation of subsonic, sonic and supersonic flow through a CD nozzle.
6. Structural analysis of bar, beam and truss.
7. Structural analysis of tapered wing.
8. Structural analysis of fuselage structure.
9. Analysis of composite laminate structures.
10. Heat transfer analysis of structures.
66
OUTCOMES:
Ability to Mesh various geometries and to do grid independence study.
Simulate and analyze fluid flow for internal and external flow problems.
Analyze the basic mechanism of different structural elements behavior.
Analyze the variation of mechanical properties over a composite beam.
Analyze the apparent stress distribution over structural component
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.No Equipments Qty
1 Internal server (or) Work station 1
2 Computers 30
3 Standard Modelling and analysis packages 30 licenses
4 UPS 1
5 Printer 1
AE8613 AIRCRAFT DESIGN PROJECT - I L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVE:
To make the student work in groups and understand the Concepts involved in
Aerodynamic design, Performance analysis and stability aspects of different types of
airplanes
1. Comparative studies of different types of airplanes and their specifications and
performance details with reference to the design work under taken.
2. Preliminary weight estimation, Selection of design parameters, power plant selection,
aerofoil selection, fixing the geometry of Wing, tail, control surfaces Landing gear selection.
3. Preparation of layout drawing, construction of balance and three view diagrams of the
airplane under consideration.
4. Drag estimation, Performance calculations, Stability analysis and V-n diagram.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the Aircraft Design Project I students will be in a position to design
aircraft and demonstrate the performance of the design.
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran
and Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction,
Customer complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier
partnership - Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
67
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts,
Methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason
to bench mark, Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss
function - TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001—Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe
and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
4. ISO 9001-2015 standards
AE8751 AVIONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data buses
To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9
Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – integrated avionics and weapon
systems – typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to digital computer and
memories.
UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9
Avionics system architecture – data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420 – ARINC – 629.
UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9
Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen – Direct
voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.
68
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9
Radio navigation – ADF, DME, VOR, LORAN, DECCA, OMEGA, ILS, MLS – Inertial Navigation
Systems (INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation systems – GPS.
UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9
Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach Number, Total air temperature,
Mach warning, Altitude warning – Auto pilot – Basic principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to built Digital avionics architecture
Ability to Design Navigation system
Ability to design and perform analysis on air system.
Integrate avionics systems using data buses.
Analyze the performance of various cockpit display technologies.
Design autopilot for small aircrafts using MATLAB
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Albert Helfrick.D., "Principles of Avionics", Avionics Communications Inc., 2004
2. Collinson.R.P.G. "Introduction to Avionics", Chapman and Hall, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., "Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical", Longman Group
UK Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Pallet.E.H.J., "Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems", Pearsons, Indian edition 2011.
3. Spitzer, C.R. "Digital Avionics Systems", Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,U.S.A. 1993.
4. Spitzer. C.R. "The Avionics Hand Book", CRC Press, 2000
ME8093 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows
To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and heat
transfer
To enable the students to understand the various discretization methods, solution
procedures and turbulence modeling.
To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat
transfer by using high speed computers.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 9
Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity,
Momentum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions
– Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations –
Mathematical behaviour of PDEs on CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE AND FINITE VOLUME METHODS FOR DIFFUSION 9
Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and
second order accuracy – Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three
-dimensional diffusion problems –Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes –
Example problems on elliptic and parabolic equations – Use of Finite Difference and Finite
Volume methods.
69
UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 9
Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes
properties of discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness,
Hybrid, Power-law, QUICK Schemes.
UNIT IV FLOW FIELD ANALYSIS 9
Finite volume methods -Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity
equation – Staggered grid – Momentum equations – Pressure and Velocity corrections –
Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants – PISO Algorithms.
UNIT V TURBULENCE MODELS AND MESH GENERATION 9
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low
Reynolds number models – Structured Grid generation – Unstructured Grid generation – Mesh
refinement – Adaptive mesh – Software tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Derive the governing equations and boundary conditions for Fluid dynamics
CO2 Analyze Finite difference and Finite volume method for Diffusion
CO3 Analyze Finite volume method for Convective diffusion
CO4 Analyze Flow field problems
CO5 Explain the Turbulence models and Mesh generation techniques
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., "Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer", Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2017.
2. Versteeg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., "An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics:
The finite volume Method", Pearson Education Ltd, Second Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Anil W. Date "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics" Cambridge University Press,
2005.
2. Chung, T.J. "Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge University, Press, 2002.
3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Press, 2005
4. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., "Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Patankar, S.V. "Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow", Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,
2004
AE8711 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students “ON HAND” experience in maintenance of various air frame systems
in aircraft and rectification of common snags.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Aircraft “Jacking Up” procedure
2. Aircraft “Levelling” procedure
3. Control System “Rigging check” procedure
4. Aircraft “Symmetry Check” procedure
5. “Flow test” to assess of filter element clogging
6. “Pressure Test” To assess hydraulic External/Internal Leakage
7. “Functional Test” to adjust operating pressure
8. “Pressure Test” procedure on fuel system components
9. “Brake Torque Load Test” on wheel brake units
10. Maintenance and rectification of snags in hydraulic and fuel systems.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
70
OUTCOME:
Ability to understand to procedure involved in maintenance of various air frame systems
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. Items Quantity Experiment No.
1. Serviceable aircraft with all above systems 1 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
2. Hydraulic Jacks (Screw Jack) 5 1,2,4,8
3. Trestle adjustable 5 1,2,4,8
4. Spirit Level 2 8
5. Levelling Boards 2 8
6. Cable Tensiometer 1 8
7. Adjustable Spirit Level 1 8
8. Plumb Bob 1 8
AE8712 FLIGHT INTEGRATION SYSTEMS AND CONTROL LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
This laboratory is to train students, to study about basic digital electronics circuits, various
microprocessor applications in Control surface, Displays fault tolerant computers, to study the
stability analysis and design using MATLAB.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Addition/Subtraction of 8 bit and 16 bit data for control surface deflection.
2. Sorting of Data in Ascending & Descending order for voting mechanism.
3. Sum of a given series with and without carry for identifying flap data.
4. Greatest in a given series & Multi-byte addition in BCD mode.
5. Addition/Subtraction of binary numbers using adder and Subtractor circuits.
6. Multiplexer & Demultiplexer Circuits
7. Encoder and Decoder circuits.
8. Stability analysis using Root locus, Bode plot techniques.
9. Design of lead, lag and lead –lag compensator for aircraft dynamics.
10. Performance Improvement of Aircraft Dynamics by Pole placement technique.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand digital electronics circuits.
Ability to use microprocessor in Flight control
Ability to perform stability analysis
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Experiment
S.No Details of Equipments Quantity
Nos.
1. Microprocessor 8085 Kit 10 1,2,3,4
2. Adder/Subtractor Binary bits Kit 10 5
3. Encoder Kit 10 7
4. Decoder Kit 10 7
5. Multiplexer Kit 10 6
6. Demultiplexer Kit 10 6
7. computers 10 8,9,10
8. Regulated power supply 10 5,6,7
9. Standard Mathematical analysis - 8,9,10
software
71
AE8713 AIRCRAFT DESIGN PROJECT - II L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
Each group of students is assigned to continue the structural design part of the airplane. The
following are the assignments are to be carried out.
1. Preliminary design of an aircraft wing – Shrenck’s curve, structural load distribution, shear
force, bending moment and torque diagrams
2. Detailed design of an aircraft wing – Design of spars and stringers, bending stress and
shear flow calculations – buckling analysis of wing panels
3. Preliminary design of an aircraft fuselage – load distribution on an aircraft fuselage
4. Detailed design of an aircraft fuselage – design of bulkheads and longerons – bending
stress and shear flow calculations – buckling analysis of fuselage panels
5. Design of control surfaces - balancing and maneuvering loads on the tail plane and aileron,
rudder loads
6. Design of wing-root attachment
7. Landing gear design
8. Preparation of a detailed design report with CAD drawings
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of Aircraft design project II the students will be in a position to design
aircraft wings, fuselage, loading gears etc., and also able to angle the design in terms of
structural point of view.
AE8811 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVE:
To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature
review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project
reports and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a
minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the
Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is
evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal
examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On Completion of the project work students will be in a position to take up any challenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.
72
PR8072 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
This course aims at introducing the students to the basic concepts of engineering design
and product development with focus on the front end processes.
At the end of this course the student is expected to demonstrate an understanding of the
overview of all the product development processes and knowledge of concept generation
and selection tools.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for developing products – the importance of engineering design – types of design –the
design process – relevance of product lifecycle issues in design –designing to codes and
standards- societal considerations in engineering design –generic product development process –
various phases of product development-planning for products –establishing markets- market
segments- relevance of market research
UNIT II CUSTOMER NEEDS 9
Identifying customer needs –voice of customer –customer populations- hierarchy of human needs-
need gathering methods – affinity diagrams – needs importance- establishing engineering
characteristics-competitive benchmarking- quality function deployment- house of quality- product
design specification-case studies
UNIT III CREATIVE THINKING 9
Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods- generating design
concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical decomposition –
functional representation –morphological methods-TRIZ- axiomatic design
UNIT IV DECISION MAKING AND PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9
Decision making –decision theory –utility theory –decision trees –concept evaluation methods –
Pugh concept selection method- weighted decision matrix –analytic hierarchy process –
introduction to embodiment design –product architecture – types of modular architecture –steps in
developing product architecture
UNIT V DESIGN AND COST ANALYSIS 9
Industrial design – human factors design –user friendly design – design for serviceability – design
for environment – prototyping and testing – cost evaluation –categories of cost – overhead costs –
activity based costing –methods of developing cost estimates – manufacturing cost –value
analysis in costing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, “Product Design and Development “,
4th Edition, 2009, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN-10-007-14679-9
2. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2015, Pearson Education,ISBN
9788177588217
REFERENCES
1. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, 2009, ISBN 978-0-470-22596-7.
2. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,
4th Edition, 2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9.
3. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage
Learning, 2010, ISBN 0495668141
73
AE8001 SPACE MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce concepts of satellite injection and satellite perturbations, trajectory
computation for interplanetary travel and flight of ballistic missiles based on the
fundamental concepts of orbital mechanics.
UNIT I SPACE ENVIRONMENT 8
Peculiarities of space environment and its description– effect of space environment on materials of
spacecraft structure and astronauts- manned space missions – effect on satellite life time
UNIT II BASIC CONCEPTS AND THE GENERAL N- BODY PROBLEM 10
The solar system – reference frames and coordinate systems – terminology related to the celestial
sphere and its associated concepts – Kepler’s laws of planetary motion and proof of the laws –
Newton’s universal law of gravitation - the many body problem - Lagrange-Jacobi identity – the
circular restricted three body problem – libration points – the general N-body problem – two body
problem – relations between position and time.
UNIT III SATELLITE INJECTION AND SATELLITE PERTURBATIONS 10
General aspects of satellite injection – satellite orbit transfer – various cases – orbit deviations due
to injection errors – special and general perturbations – Cowell’s method and Encke’s method –
method of variations of orbital elements – general perturbations approach.
UNIT IV INTERPLANETARY TRAJECTORIES 8
Two-dimensional interplanetary trajectories – fast interplanetary trajectories – three dimensional
interplanetary trajectories – launch of interplanetary spacecraft – trajectory estimation about the
target planet – concept of sphere of influence – Lambert’s theorem
UNIT V BALLISTIC MISSILE TRAJECTORIES 9
Introduction to ballistic missile trajectories – boost phase – the ballistic phase – trajectory
geometry – optimal flights – time of flight – re-entry phase – the position of impact point – influence
coefficients.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to perform satellite injection, satellite perturbations and trajectory control
Apply orbital mechanics to control ballistic missile.
Estimate the trajectory/orbit of a space vehicle or a satellite in a suitable coordinate
system.
Calculate the delta-v required for transferring a spacecraft from one orbit to another.
Perform orbit perturbation analysis for satellite orbits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cornelisse, J.W., “Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”, J.W. Freeman & Co.,Ltd, London,
1982
2. Parker, E.R., “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, Mc.Graw Hill Book Co. Inc., 1982.
REFERENCE:
1. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 5 th Edition,
1993.
74
AE8002 AIRCRAFT GENERAL ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE L T P C
PRACTICES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE
To teach the students about the basic concepts of aircraft general engineering and
maintenance practices.
UNIT I AIRCRAFT GROUND HANDLING AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 9
Mooring, jacking, leveling and towing operations – Preparation – Equipment – precautions –
Engine starting procedures – Piston engine, turboprops and turbojets – Engine fire extinguishing –
Ground power unit.
UNIT II GROUND SERVICING OF VARIOUS SUB SYSTEMS 9
Air conditioning and pressurization – Oxygen and oil systems – Ground units and their
maintenance.
UNIT III MAINTENANCE OF SAFETY AND AIRCRAFT SYSTEM PROCESSES 9
Shop safety – Environmental cleanliness – Precautions- Hand tools – Precision instruments –
Special tools and equipments in an airplane maintenance shop – Identifiation terminology
UNIT IV INSPECTION 9
Process – Purpose – Types – Inspection intervals – Techniques – Checklist – Special inspection –
Publications, bulletins, various manuals – FAR Air worthiness directives – Type certificate Data
sheets – ATA Specifications
UNIT V AIRCRAFT HARDWARE, MATERIALS, SYSTEM PROCESSES 9
Specification and correct use of various aircraft hardware (i.e. nuts, bolts, rivets, screws) –
American and British systems of specifications – Threads, gears, bearings, – Drills, tapes and
reamers – Identification of all types of fluid line fittings. Materials, metallic and non-metallic
Plumbing connectors – Cables – Swaging procedures, tests, Advantages of swaging over splicing.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Knowledge in various ground support system for aircraft operations
Ability to carryout ground servicing of critical aircraft systems
Knowledge in specifications standards of aircraft hardware systems.
Grasp the ground handling procedures and types of equipments with special maintenance
Ability to do shop safety, Environment cleanliness in an aircraft materials shop
Understand the FAA airworthiness regulations and the checklist involved in each inspection
of aircraft
TEXT BOOK
1. Kroes Watkins Delp, "Aircraft Maintenance and Repair", McGraw Hill, New York, 1993
REFERENCES
1. A&P Mechanics, "Aircraft Hand Book", F A A Himalayan Book House, New Delhi, 1996
2. A&P Mechanics," General Hand Book", F A A Himalayan Bok House, New Delhi, 1996
75
AE8003 HEAT TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge on various modes of heat transfer and methods of solving problems.
Also to give exposure to numerical methods employed to solve heat transfer problems.
UNIT I CONDUCTION 8
Governing equation in cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates. 1-D steady state heat
conduction with and without heat generation. composite wall- electrical analogy – critical thickness
of insulation – heat transfer from extended surface – effect of temperature on conductivity- 1-D
transient analysis
UNIT II CONVECTION 12
Review of basic equations of fluid flow – dimensional analysis- forced convection – laminar flow
over flat plate and flow through pipes-flow across tube banks. turbulent flow over flat plate and flow
through pipes – free convection – heat transfer from vertical plate using integral method –
empirical relations - types of heat exchangers – overall heat transfer coefficient – LMTD and NTU
methods of analysis.
UNIT III RADIATION 9
Basic definitions – concept of black body - laws of black body radiation-radiation between black
surfaces – radiation heat exchange between grey surfaces – radiation shielding – shape factor-
electrical network analogy in thermal radiation systems.
UNIT IV NUMERICAL METHODS IN HEAT TRANSFER 12
1-D and 2-D steady and unsteady state heat conduction – composite walls-heat generation-
variable thermal conductivity- extended surfaces analysis using finite difference method-
Convective heat transfer- Stream function - vorticity method- creeping flow analysis-convection-
diffusion 1-D, 2-D analysis using finite difference approximation. Numerical methods applicable to
radiation heat transfer.
UNIT V HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS IN AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 4
Heat transfer problems in gas turbines, rocket thrust chambers- aerodynamic heating – ablative
heat transfer
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand the difference between various modes of Heat Transfer and the Resistance
Concept used in Heat Conduction.
Learn to use the basic methods in Conduction. Understand the concept of Lump Parameter
analysis and when it is applicable and earn the concepts of boundary layer.
Learn to apply various correlation used in Convective Heat Transfer and Understand the
concepts of Black Body, Grey Body, View factor, Radiation shielding.
Design/size Heat Exchanger and understand the concept of Mass transfer, its types & laws
associated with it.
Learn to apply various technique used for high speed flow heat transfer.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Holman,J.P., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill Book Co.,Inc., New York, Sixth Edition,1991.
2. Sachdeva,S.C., "Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer", Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi,1981.
3. Yunus,A.Cengel, "Heat Transfet-A Practical Approach", Tata McGraw Hill, Second edition,
2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Lienhard,J.H., A Heat Transfer Text Book, Prentice Hall Inc., 1981.
76
2. Mathur,M. and Sharma,R.P., Gas Turbine and Jet and Rocket Propulsion, Standard
Publishers, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Sutton,G.P., Rocket Propulsion Elements,John Wiley and Sons, Fifth Edition, 1986.
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from
WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological
Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act
of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition
and IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS
1. S.V. Satakar, Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002.
2. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
3. Prabuddha Ganguli, ”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
77
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-
ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties:
Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-
growth, laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications-
Nanometal oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques-
AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines,
Targetted drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro
Mechanical Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition,
Nanoparticles for sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,“The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure, Theory,
Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
2. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
78
AE8004 HELICOPTER THEORY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the student familiarize with the principles involved in helicopters and to study the
performance and stability aspects of Helicopter under different operating conditions.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Helicopter as an aircraft, Basic features, Layout, Generation of lift, Main rotor, Gearbox, tail rotor,
power plant, considerations on blade, flapping and feathering, Rotor controls and various types of
rotor, Blade loading, Effect of solidity, profile drag, compressibility etc., Blade area required,
number of Blades, Blade form, Power losses, Rotor efficiency.
UNIT II AERODYNAMICS OF ROTOR BLADE 9
Aerofoil characteristics in forward flight, Hovering and Vortex ring state, Blade stall, maximum lift of
the helicopter calculation of Induced Power, High speed limitations; parasite drag, power loading,
ground effect.
UNIT III POWER PLANTS AND FLIGHT PERFORMANCE 9
Piston engines, Gas turbines, Ramjet principle, Comparative performance, Horsepower required,
Range and Endurance, Rate of Climb, Best Climbing speed, Ceiling in vertical climb, Autorotation.
UNIT IV STABILITY AND CONTROL 9
Physical description of effects of disturbances, Stick fixed Longitudinal and lateral dynamic
stability, lateral stability characteristics, control response. Differences between stability and control
of airplane and helicopter.
UNIT V ROTOR VIBRATIONS 9
Dynamic model of the rotor, Motion of the rigid blades, flapping motion, lagging motion, feathering
motion, Properties of vibrating system, phenomenon of vibration, fuselage response, vibration
absorbers, Measurement of vibration in flight. Rotor Blade Design: General considerations, Airfoil
selection, Blade construction, Materials, Factors affecting weight and cost, Design conditions,
Stress analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To perform the Aerodynamics calculation of Rotor blade
To perform stability and control characteristics of Helicopter
To perform and control Rotor vibration
Apply Momentum and simple blade element theories to helicopter’s rotor blades.
Analyze the power requirements in forward flight and associated stability problems of
helicopter.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John Fay, "The Helicopter and How It Flies", Himalayan Books 1995
2. Lalit Gupta, "Helicopter Engineering", Himalayan Books New Delhi 1996
REFERENCES:
1. Joseph Schafer, "Basic Helicopter Maintenance", Jeppesen 1980
2. R W Prouty, Helicopter Aerodynamics, Phillips Pub Co, 1993.
79
AE8005 AERO ENGINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students to familiarize with the Aircraft engine maintenance procedure and
practice.
Must have knowledge of basics of Aeronautics and engine components.
UNIT I PISTON ENGINES 9
Carburation and Fuel injection systems for small and large engines - Ignition system components -
spark plug detail - Engine operating conditions at various altitudes – Engine power measurements
– Classification of engine lubricants and fuels – Induction, Exhaust and cooling system -
Maintenance and inspection check to be carried out.Inspection and maintenance and trouble
shooting - Inspection of all engine components - Daily and routine checks - Overhaul procedures -
Compression testing of cylinders - Special inspection schedules - Engine fuel, control and exhaust
systems - Engine mount and super charger - Checks and inspection procedures.
UNIT II PROPELLERS 9
Propeller theory - operation, construction assembly and installation - Pitch change mechanism-
Propeller axially system- Damage and repair criteria - General Inspection procedures - Checks on
constant speed propellers - Pitch setting, Propeller Balancing, Blade cuffs, Governor/Propeller
operating conditions – Damage and repair criteria.
UNIT III JET ENGINES 9
Types of jet engines – Fundamental principles – Bearings and seals - Inlets - compressors-
turbines-exhaust section – classification and types of lubrication and fuels- Materials used - Details
of control, starting around running and operating procedures – Inspection and Maintenance-
permissible limits of damage and repair criteria of engine components- internal inspection of
engines- compressor washing- field balancing of compressor fans- Component maintenance
procedures - Systems maintenance procedures - use of instruments for online maintenance -
Special inspection procedures-Foreign Object Damage - Blade damage .
UNIT IV TESTING AND INSPECTION 9
Symptoms of failure - Fault diagnostics - Case studies of different engine systems - Rectification
during testing equipments for overhaul: Tools and equipments requirements for various checks
and alignment during overhauling - Tools for inspection - Tools for safety and for visual inspection
- Methods and instruments for non destructive testing techniques - Equipment for replacement of
parts and their repair. Engine testing: Engine testing procedures and schedule preparation - Online
maintenance.
UNIT V OVERHAULING 9
Engine Overhaul - Overhaul procedures - Inspections and cleaning of components - Repairs
schedules for overhaul - Balancing of Gas turbine components. Trouble Shooting: Procedures for
trouble shooting - Condition monitoring of the engine on ground and at altitude - engine health
monitoring and corrective methods.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Apply maintenance procedure to Aircraft Engines
Identify the engine components and faults
Apply non destructive testing procedures to identify the defects
Apply overhauling procedure to new engines
TEXT BOOK:
1. Kroes & Wild, "Aircraft Power plants ", 7th Edition - McGraw Hill, New York, 1994.
REFERENCES:
1. Turbomeca, " Gas Turbine Engines ", The English Book Store ", New Delhi, 1993.
2. United Technologies Pratt & Whitney, "The Aircraft Gas turbine Engine and its Operation”, The
English Book Store, New Delhi.
80
AE8006 UAV SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students to understand the basic concepts of UAV systems design.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO UAV 9
History of UAV –classification – Introduction to Unmanned Aircraft Systems--models and
prototypes – System Composition-applications
UNIT II THE DESIGN OF UAV SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Design and Selection of the System- Aerodynamics and Airframe Configurations-
Characteristics of Aircraft Types- Design Standards and Regulatory Aspects-UK,USA and Europe-
Design for Stealth--control surfaces-specifications.
UNIT III AVIONICS HARDWARE 9
Autopilot – AGL-pressure sensors-servos-accelerometer –gyros-actuators- power supply-
processor, integration, installation, configuration, and testing
UNIT IV COMMUNICATION PAYLOADS AND CONTROLS 9
Payloads-Telemetry-tracking-Aerial photography-controls-PID feedback-radio control frequency
range –modems-memory system-simulation-ground test-analysis-trouble shooting
UNIT V THE DEVELOPMENT OF UAV SYSTEMS 9
Waypoints navigation-ground control software- System Ground Testing- System In-flight Testing-
Future Prospects and Challenges-Case Studies – Mini and Micro UAVs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to design UAV system
Ability to identify different hardware for UAV
Prepare preliminary design requirements for an unmanned aerial vehicle.
Perform system testing for unmanned aerial vehicles.
Integrate various systems of unmanned aerial vehicle.
Design micro aerial vehicle systems by considering practical limitations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul G Fahlstrom, Thomas J Gleason, “Introduction to UAV Systems”, UAV Systems, Inc,
1998
2. Reg Austin “Unmanned Aircraft Systems UAV design, development and deployment”, Wiley,
2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Dr. Armand J. Chaput, “Design of Unmanned Air Vehicle Systems”, Lockheed Martin
Aeronautics Company, 2001
2. Kimon P. Valavanis, “Advances in Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: State of the Art and the Road to
Autonomy”, Springer, 2007
3. Robert C. Nelson, Flight Stability and Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1998.
81
AE8007 AIRCRAFT MATERIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the types of mechanical behaviour of materials for aircraft applications
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF AEROSPACE MATERIALS 9
Structure of solid materials – Atomic structure of materials – crystal structure – miller indices –
density – packing factor – space lattices – x-ray diffraction – imperfection in crystals – physical
metallurgy - general requirements of materials for aerospace applications
UNIT II MECHANICAL BEHAVIOUR OF MATERIALS 9
Linear and non linear elastic properties – Yielding, strain hardening, fracture, Bauchinger’s effect –
Notch effect testing and flaw detection of materials and components – creep and fatigue -
comparative study of metals, ceramics plastics and composites.
UNIT III CORROSION & HEAT TREATMENT OF METALS AND ALLOYS 10
Types of corrosion – effect of corrosion on mechanical properties – stress corrosion cracking –
corrosion resistance materials used for space vehicles heat treatment of carbon steels –
aluminium alloys, magnesium alloys and titanium alloys – effect of alloying treatment, heat
resistance alloys – tool and die steels, magnetic alloys,
UNIT IV CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES 9
Introduction – powder metallurgy - modern ceramic materials – cermets - cutting tools – glass
ceramic –production of semi fabricated forms - plastics and rubber – carbon/carbon composites,
fabrication processes involved in metal matrix composites - shape memory alloys – applications in
aerospace vehicle design, open and close mould processes.
UNIT V HIGH TEMPERATURE MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION 8
Classification, production and characteristics – methods and testing – determination of mechanical
and thermal properties of materials at elevated temperatures – application of these materials in
thermal protection systems of aerospace vehicles – super alloys – high temperature material
characterization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Role of corrosion and heat treatment processes of aircraft materials
Knowledge in usage of composite materials in aircraft component design.
Exposure to high temperature materials for space applications
Provide the necessary mathematical knowledge that are needed in understanding their
significance and operation.
TEXT BOOK
1. Titterton.G., ”Aircraft Materials and Processes", V Edition, Pitman Publishing Co., 1995.
REFERENCES
1. Martin, J.W., "Engineering Materials, Their properties and Applications", Wykedham
Publications (London) Ltd., 1987.
2. Raghavan.V., "Materials Science and Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1993.
3. Van Vlack.L.H., "Materials Science for Engineers", Addison Wesley, 1985.
82
AE8008 VIBRATION AND ELEMENTS OF AEROELASTICITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the effect of time dependent forces on mechanical systems and to get the natural
characteristics of system with more degree of freedom systems.
To study the aeroelastic effects of aircraft wing.
UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 10
Introduction to simple harmonic motion, D’Alembert’s principle, free vibrations – damped vibrations
– forced vibrations, with and without damping – support excitation – transmissibility - vibration
measuring instruments.
UNIT II MULTI DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 10
Two degrees of freedom systems - static and dynamic couplings - vibration absorber- Multi degree
of freedom systems - principal co-ordinates - principal modes and orthogonal conditions - Eigen
value problems - Hamilton’s principle - Lagrangean equations and application.
UNIT III CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 8
Vibration of elastic bodies - vibration of strings – longitudinal, lateral and torsional vibrations
UNIT IV APPROXIMATE METHODS 9
Approximate methods - Rayleigh’s method - Dunkerley’s method – Rayleigh-Ritz method, matrix
iteration method.
UNIT V ELEMENTS OF AEROELASTICITY 8
Vibration due to coupling of bending and torsion - aeroelastic problems - Collars triangle - wing
divergence - aileron control reversal – flutter – buffeting. – elements of servo elasticity
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Gaining understanding of single and multi degree vibrating systems
Ability to use numerical techniques for vibration problems
Knowledge acquired in aero elasticity and fluttering.
Differentiate types of vibrations according to dampness and particle motion.
Solve Rayleigh and Holzer method to find natural frequency of an object.
Understand the formation of Aileron reversal, flutter and wing divergence.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grover. G.K., “Mechanical Vibrations”, 7th Edition, Nem Chand Brothers, Roorkee, India, 2003
2. Leonard Meirovitch, "Elements of Vibration Analysis". McGraw Hill International Edition,2007
3. Thomson W T, ‘Theory of Vibration with Application’ - CBS Publishers, 1990.
REFERENCES:
1. Bisplinghoff R.L., Ashely H and Hogman R.L., "Aeroelasticity", Addision Wesley Publication,
New Tork, 1983.
2. Den Hartog, "Mechanical Vibrations" Crastre Press, 2008.
3. TSE. F.S., Morse, I.F., Hinkle, R.T., "Mechanical Vibrations" – Prentice Hall, New York, 1984.
4. William W Seto, "Mechanical Vibrations" – McGraw Hill, Schaum Series.
5. William Weaver, Stephen P. Timoshenko, Donovan H. Yound, Donovan H. Young. ‘Vibration
Problems in Engineering’ – John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2001
83
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of
caste, class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of
Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community
based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community,
Panchayati Raj Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-
holders- Institutional Processess and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster
Management Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as
dams, embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and
Scenarios in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology
and local resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes
and legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
84
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
2. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers,
New Delhi, 2010.
3. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
AE8009 AIRFRAME MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students to understand the Airframe components and the tools used to
maintain the components. Defect investigation, methods to carry out investigation and the
detailed maintenance and practice procedures.
UNIT I MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 9
Equipments used in welding shop and their maintenance - Ensuring quality welds - Welding jigs
and fixtures - Soldering and brazing – laser welding.
Sheet metal repair and maintenance: Selection of materials; Repair schemes; Fabrication of
replacement patches; Tools - power/hand; Repair techniques; Peening - Close tolerance
fasteners; Sealing compounds; forming/shaping; Calculation of weight of completed repair; Effect
of weight - change on surrounding structure. Sheet metal inspection - N.D.T. Testing. Riveted
repair design - Damage investigation - Reverse engineering.
UNIT II PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES IN AIRCRAFT 9
Review of types of plastics used in airplanes - Maintenance and repair of plastic components -
Repair of cracks and holes - various repairs schemes - Scopes.
Cleaning of fibre reinforced plastic (FRP) materials prior to repair; Break test - Repair Schemes;
FRP/honeycomb sandwich materials; laminated FRP structural members and skin panels;
Tools/equipment; Vacuum-bag process. Special precautions – Autoclaves
UNIT III AIRCRAFT JACKING, ASSEMBLY AND RIGGING 9
Airplane jacking and weighing and C.G. Location. Balancing of control surfaces - Inspection
maintenance. Helicopter flight controls. Tracking and balancing of main rotor.
UNIT IV REVIEW OF HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM 10
Trouble shooting and maintenance practices - Service and inspection - Inspection and
maintenance of landing gear systems. - Inspection and maintenance of air-conditioning and
pressurization system, water and waste system. Installation and maintenance of Instruments -
handling - Testing - Inspection. Inspection and maintenance of auxiliary systems - Rain removal
system - Position and warning system - Auxiliary Power Units (APUs).
UNIT V SAFETY PRACTICES 8
Hazardous materials storage and handling, Aircraft furnishing practices - Equipments. Trouble
shooting. Theory and practices.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
85
OUTCOMES:
Students who successfully complete this course will be able to:
Identify and apply the principles of function and safe operation to aircraft as per FAA
Understand general airframe structural repairs, the structural repair manual and structural
control programme.
Understand the nature of airframe structural component inspection, corrosion repair and
non-destructive inspection
Understand aircraft component disassembly, reassembly and troubleshooting
Know about aircraft adhesives, sealants, bonding techniques, repair procedures and the
types and detection of defects in aircraft composite materials
Identify, install, inspect, fabricate and repair aircraft sheet metal and synthetic, material
structures.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Kroes, Watkins, Delp, "Aircraft Maintenance and Repair", McGraw Hill, New York, 1992.
REFERENCES:
1. Brimm D.J. Bogges H.E., "Aircraft Maintenance", Pitman Publishing corp., New York, 1940.
2. Delp. Bent and Mckinely “Aircraft Maintenance Repair”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1987.
3. Larry Reithmeir, "Aircraft Repair Manual", Palamar Books, Marquette, 1992.
AE8010 FATIGUE AND FRACTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the basic concepts involved in fatigue analysis and to study the importance of
fracture mechanics in aerospace applications.
UNIT I FATIGUE OF STRUCTURES 7
S.N. curves - Endurance limits - Effect of mean stress, Goodman, Gerber and Soderberg relations
and diagrams - Notches and stress concentrations - Neuber’s stress concentration factors - Plastic
stress concentration factors - Notched S.N. curves – Fatigue of composite materials.
UNIT II STATISTICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE BEHAVIOUR 10
Low cycle and high cycle fatigue - Coffin - Manson’s relation - Transition life - cyclic strain
hardening and softening - Analysis of load histories - Cycle counting techniques -Cumulative
damage - Miner’s theory - Other theories.
UNIT III PHYSICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE 10
Phase in fatigue life - Crack initiation - Crack growth - Final Fracture - Dislocations - fatigue
fracture surfaces.
UNIT IV FRACTURE MECHANICS 10
Strength of cracked bodies - Potential energy and surface energy - Griffith’s theory - Irwin - Orwin
extension of Griffith’s theory to ductile materials - stress analysis of “cracked bodies - Effect of
thickness on fracture toughness” - stress intensity factors for typical ‘geometries.
UNIT V FATIGUE DESIGN AND TESTING 8
Safe life and Fail-safe design philosophies - Importance of Fracture Mechanics in aerospace
structures - Application to composite materials and structures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to apply mathematical knowledge to define fatigue behaviors
Ability to perform fatigue design
86
Ability to analyse the fracture due to fatigue
Analyze for cumulative damage due to fatigue.
Analyze for crack initiation & crack growth.
Analyze damage tolerant structures
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Barrois W, Ripely, E.L., “Fatigue of aircraft structure," Pergamon press. Oxford, 1983.
2. Prasanth Kumar, "Elements of fracture mechanics", Wheeter publication, 1999.
REFERENCES:
1. Kare Hellan ,’Introduction to Fracture Mechanics’, McGraw Hill, Singapore,1985
2. Knott, J.F., “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics,” - Buterworth & Co., Ltd., London, 1983.
3. Sih C.G., “Mechanics of fracture.” Vol - I, Sijthoff and w Noordhoff International Publishing Co.,
Netherlands, 1989.
PR8071 LEAN SIX SIGMA L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To gain insights about the importance of lean manufacturing and six sigma practices.
UNIT I LEAN & SIX SIGMA BACKGROUND AND FUNDAMENTALS 9
Historical Overview – Definition of quality – What is six sigma -TQM and Six sigma - lean
manufacturing and six sigma- six sigma and process tolerance – Six sigma and cultural changes –
six sigma capability – six sigma need assessments - implications of quality levels, Cost of Poor
Quality (COPQ), Cost of Doing Nothing – assessment questions
UNIT II THE SCOPE OF TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Tools for definition – IPO diagram, SIPOC diagram, Flow diagram, CTQ Tree, Project Charter –
Tools for measurement – Check sheets, Histograms, Run Charts, Scatter Diagrams, Cause and
effect diagram, Pareto charts, Control charts, Flow process charts, Process Capability
Measurement, Tools for analysis – Process Mapping, Regression analysis, RU/CS analysis,
SWOT, PESTLE, Five Whys, interrelationship diagram, overall equipment effectiveness,
TRIZ innovative problem solving – Tools for improvement – Affinity diagram, Normal group
technique, SMED, 5S, mistake proofing, Value stream Mapping, forced field analysis –
Tools for control – Gantt chart, Activity network diagram, Radar chart, PDCA cycle, Milestone
tracker diagram, Earned value management.
UNIT III SIX SIGMA METHODOLOGIES 9
Design For Six Sigma (DFSS),Design For Six Sigma Method - Failure Mode Effect
Analysis (FMEA), FMEA process - Risk Priority Number (RPN)- Six Sigma and Leadership,
committed leadership – Change Acceleration Process (CAP)- Developing communication plan –
Stakeholder.
UNIT IV SIX SIGMA IMPLEMENTATION AND CHALLENGES 9
Tools for implementation – Supplier Input Process Output Customer (SIPOC) – Quality Function
Deployment or House of Quality (QFD) – alternative approach –implementation –
leadership training, close communication system, project selection – project management
and team – champion training – customer quality index – challenges – program failure,
CPQ vs six sigma, structure the deployment of six sigma – cultural challenge – customer/internal
metrics.
87
UNIT V EVALUATION AND CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT METHODS 9
Evaluation strategy – the economics of six sigma quality, Return on six Sigma (ROSS), ROI , poor
project estimates – continuous improvement – lean manufacturing – value, customer focus,
Perfection, focus on waste, overproduction – waiting, inventory in process (IIP), processing waste,
transportation, motion, making defective products, underutilizing people – Kaizen – 5S.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course student can able to
Understand the fundamentals of Lean and Six sigma.
Understand the tools and techniques used in analysis.
Understand the six sigma methodologies.
Understand the implementation and challenges in six sigma.
Understand the evaluation and continuous improvement methods.
REFERENCES:
1. Forrest W. Breyfogle, III, James M. Cupello, Becki Meadows, Managing Six Sigma:A Practical
2. Fred Soleimannejed , Six Sigma, Basic Steps and Implementation, Author House, 2004
Guide to Understanding, Assessing, and Implementing the Strategy That Yields Bottom-Line
Success, John Wiley & Sons, 2000 .
3. James P. Womack, Daniel T.Jones, Lean Thinking, Free Press Business, 2003
4. Michael L.George, David Rownalds, Bill Kastle, What is Lean Six Sigma, McGraw – Hill 2003
5. Thomas Pyzdek, The Six Sigma Handbook, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
ME8097 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND EVALUATION L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVE:
To study and understand the various Non Destructive Evaluation and Testing methods,
theory and their industrial applications.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 9
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the
detection of manufacturing defects as well as material characterisation. Relative merits and
limitations, Various physical characteristics of materials and their applications in NDT., Visual
inspection – Unaided and aided.
UNIT II SURFACE NDE METHODS 9
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants,
developers, advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of
results. Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation
methods, Interpretation and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of
demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 9
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for
applying liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors,
Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents,
Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation,
Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
88
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 9
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam
and angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array
Ultrasound, Time of Flight Diffraction. Acoustic Emission Technique –Principle, AE parameters,
Applications
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 9
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use
of filters and screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films -
graininess, density, speed, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts,
Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed
Tomography
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of NDT
CO2 Discuss the different methods of NDE
CO3 Explain the concept of Thermography and Eddy current testing
CO4 Explain the concept of Ultrasonic Testing and Acoustic Emission
CO5 Explain the concept of Radiography
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”,
Narosa Publishing House, 2014.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New
Age International Publishers, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook,”Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society
of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.
2. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbook,Vol.
1, Leak Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing
Vol. 4, Radiographic Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission
Testing, Vol. 7, Ultrasonic Testing
3. Charles, J. Hellier,“ Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York 2001.
4. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Edition
New Jersey, 2005
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
89
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
90
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights;
collective / Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National
and State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational
Institutions, Social Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
REFERENCES:
1. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
2. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
AE8011 HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce fundamental concepts and features peculiar to hypersonic flow to students to
familiarize them with the aerodynamical aspects of hypersonic vehicles and the general
hypersonic flow theory.
91
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS 9
Introduction to hypersonic aerodynamics – differences between hypersonic aerodynamics and
supersonic aerodynamics - concept of thin shock layers and entropy layers – hypersonic flight
paths – hypersonic similarity parameters – shock wave and expansion wave relations of inviscid
hypersonic flows.
UNIT II SIMPLE SOLUTION METHODS FOR HYPERSONIC
INVISCID FLOWS 9
Local surface inclination methods – Newtonian theory – modified Newtonian law – tangent wedge
and tangent cone and shock expansion methods – approximate methods - hypersonic small
disturbance theory – thin shock layer theory.
UNIT III VISCOUS HYPERSONIC FLOW THEORY 9
Boundary layer equations for hypersonic flow – hypersonic boundary layers – self similar and non
self similar boundary layers – solution methods for non self similar boundary layers – aerodynamic
heating and its adverse effects on airframe.
UNIT IV VISCOUS INTERACTIONS IN HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9
Introduction to the concept of viscous interaction in hypersonic flows - Strong and weak viscous
interactions - hypersonic viscous interaction similarity parameter – introduction to shock wave
boundary layer interactions.
UNIT V HIGH TEMPERATURE EFFECTS in HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9
Nature of high temperature flows – chemical effects in air – real and perfect gases – Gibb’s free
energy and entropy - chemically reacting boundary layers – recombination and dissociation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Knowledge in basics of hypersonic and supersonic aerodynamics
Acquiring knowledge in theory of hypersonic flow.
Understanding of boundary layers of hypersonic flow and viscous interaction
Role of chemical and temperature effects in hypersonic flow.
TEXT BOOK:
1. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics”, Mc.Graw hill
Series, New York, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. John D. Anderson. Jr., “Modern Compressible flow with historical Perspective”, Mc.Graw Hill
Publishing Company, New York, 1996.
2. John T. Bertin, “Hypersonic Aerothermodynamics”, published by AIAA Inc., Washington.D.C.,
1994.
AE8012 WIND TUNNEL TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE
• The students are exposed to various types and techniques of Aerodynamic data generation
on aerospace vehicle configurations in the aerospace industry.
UNIT I LOW SPEED WIND TUNNELS 10
Classification –non-dimensional numbers-types of similarities - Layout of open circuit and closed
circuit subsonic wind tunnels – design parameters-energy ratio - HP calculations - Calibration
methods.
92
UNIT II HIGH SPEED WIND TUNNELS 9
Blow down, in draft and induction tunnel layouts and their design features -Transonic, and
supersonic tunnels- peculiar features of these tunnels and operational difficulties - sample design
calculations and calibration methods.
UNIT III SPECIAL WIND TUNNEL TECHNIQUES 8
Types of Special Wind Tunnels – Hypersonic, Gun and Shock Tunnels – Design features and
calibration methods- Intake tests – store carriage and separation tests - wind tunnel model design
for these tests
UNIT IV WIND TUNNEL INSTRUMENTATION 10
Instrumentation and sensors required for both steady and unsteady measurements – Force
measurements using three component and six component balances – calibration of measuring
instruments – error estimation and uncertainty analysis.
UNIT V FLOW VISUALIZATION and NON-INTRUSIVE FLOW DIAGNOSTICS 8
Smoke and Tuft grid techniques – Dye injection special techniques – Oil flow visualization and
PSP techniques - Optical methods of flow visualization – PIV and Laser Doppler techniques –
Image processing and data deduction
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to use various techniques of Aerodynamic data generation.
Understand the working principle of Blow down, In draft tunnels and their specifications
Knowledge about horizontal buoyancy, flow angularities while carrying out calibration
Understand the working principle of component axis balance and internal balances
Ability to carry out the smoke and tuft flow visualisation procedures in WT testing
TEXT BOOKS:
1. NAL-UNI Lecture Series 12:" Experimental Aerodynamics", NAL SP 98 01 April 1998
2. Rae, W.H. and Pope, A., "Low Speed Wind Tunnel Testing", John Wiley Publication, 1984.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradsaw "Experimental Fluid Mechanics".
2. Lecture course on Advanced Flow diagnostic techniques 17-19 September 2008 NAL,
Bangalore
3. Pope, A., and Goin, L., "High Speed Wind Tunnel Testing", John Wiley, 1985.
4. Rathakrishnan, E., “Instrumentation, Measurements, and Experiments in Fluids,” CRC Press –
Taylor & Francis, 2007.
5. Short term course on Flow visualization techniques, NAL , 2009
AE8013 ROCKETS AND MISSILES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE
• To give revelation on basic concepts of rocket motion, rocket aerodynamics, staging &
control of rockets, materials and propulsion systems of rockets and missiles to students to
augment their knowledge in the region of rockets and missile flight.
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF ROCKETS AND MISSILES 6
History of rockets and missiles, Various methods of classification of missiles and rockets – Basic
aerodynamic characteristics of surface to surface, surface to air, air to surface and air to air
missiles – Examples of various Indian space launch vehicles and missiles – Current status of
Indian rocket and missile programme.
93
UNIT II ROCKET MOTION IN FREE SPACE AND GRAVITATIONAL FIELD 10
One Dimensional and Two Dimensional rocket Motions in Free Space and Homogeneous
Gravitational Fields – description of Vertical, Inclined and Gravity Turn Trajectories –
Determination of range and Altitude, Simple Approximations to Burnout Velocity and altitude-
estimation of culmination time and altitude.
UNIT III AERODYNAMICS OF ROCKETS AND MISSILES 10
Airframe Components of Rockets and Missiles – Forces Acting on a Missile While Passing
Through Atmosphere – Classification of Missiles – methods of Describing Aerodynamic Forces
and Moments – Lateral Aerodynamic Moment – Lateral Damping Moment and Longitudinal
Moment of a Rocket – lift and Drag Forces – Drag Estimation.
UNIT IV STAGING AND CONTROL OF ROCKETS AND MISSILES 10
Multistaging of rockets and ballistic missiles – Multistage Vehicle Optimization – Stage Separation
Dynamics – Stage Separation Techniques in atmosphere and in space, Introduction to
aerodynamic and jet control methods – various types of aerodynamic control methods for tactical
and short range missiles- aerodynamic characteristics - various types of rocket thrust vector
control methods.
UNIT V ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS AND MATERIALS FOR ROCKETS AND
MISSILES 9
Ignition System in rockets – types of Igniters– Design Consideration of liquid Rocket Combustion
Chamber, Injector Propellant Feed Lines, Valves, Propellant Tanks Outlet and propellant feed
Systems – Propellant Slash and Propellant Hammer – Elimination of Geysering Effect in Missiles –
Selection of Materials – Special Requirements of Materials to Perform under Adverse Conditions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To be able to know about the current scenario of rockets and missiles.
To gain knowledge about the trajectory motion of rockets and missiles.
Gaining information on aerodynamic characteristics of rockets and missiles.
To expand the ability to design the staging and control of own rockets.
Basic knowledge about the propulsion systems and materials used in rockets and missiles.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Cornelisse, J.W., “Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”, J.W., Freeman & Co. Ltd.,
London, 1982.
2. Sutton, G.P., et al., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1993.
REFERENCES
1. Mathur, M., and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbines and Jet and Rocket Propulsion”,
Standard Publishers, New Delhi 1998.
2. Parker, E.R., “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, McGraw-Hill Book Co. Inc., 1982.
AE8014 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the effect of periodic and a periodic forces on mechanical systems with matrix
approach and also to get the natural characteristics of large sized problems using approximate
methods.
94
UNIT I FORCE DEFLECTION PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURES 9
Constraints and Generalized coordinates – Virtual work and generalized forces – Force –
Deflection influence functions – stiffness and flexibility methods.
UNIT II PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMICS 9
Free and forced vibrations of systems with finite degrees of freedom – Response to periodic
excitation – Impulse Response Function – Convolution Integral
UNIT III NATURAL MODES OF VIBRATION 9
Equations of motion for Multi degree of freedom Systems - Solution of Eigen value problems –
Normal coordinates and orthogonality Conditions. Modal Analysis.
UNIT IV ENERGY METHODS 9
Rayleigh’s principle – Rayleigh – Ritz method – Coupled natural modes – Effect of rotary inertia
and shear on lateral vibrations of beams – Natural vibrations of plates.
UNIT V APPROXIMATE METHODS 9
Approximate methods of evaluating the Eigen frequencies and eigen vectors by reduced,
subspace, Lanczos, Power, Matrix condensation and QR methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Knowing various options of mathematical modeling of structures
Method of evaluating the response of structures under various dynamically loaded conditions
Knowledge in natural modes of vibration of structures
Gaining knowledge in numerical and approxite methods of evaluating natural modes of
vibration.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hurty. W.C. and M.F. Rubinstein, “Dynamics of Structures”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi 1987.
2. Tse. F.S., Morse. I.E. and Hinkle. H.T., “Mechanical Vibrations: Theory and Applications” ,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Ramamurthi. V., “Mechanical Vibration Practice and Noise Control” Narosa Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd, 2008
2. Timoshenko. S.P., and D.H. Young, “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John Willey & Sons
Inc., 1984.
3. Vierck. R.K., “Vibration Analysis”, 2nd Edition, Thomas Y. Crowell & Co Harper & Row
Publishers, New York, U.S.A. 1989.
AE8015 INDUSTRIAL AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To familiarize the learner with non-aeronautical uses of aerodynamics such as road
vehicle, building aerodynamics and problems of flow induced vibrations.
UNIT I ATMOSPHERE 9
Types of winds, Causes of variation of winds, Atmospheric boundary layer, Effect of terrain on
gradient height, Structure of turbulent flows.
95
UNIT II WIND ENERGY COLLECTORS 9
Horizontal axis and vertical axis machines, Power coefficient, Betz coefficient by momentum
theory.
UNIT III VEHICLE AERODYNAMICS 9
Power requirements and drag coefficients of automobiles, Effects of cut back angle, Aerodynamics
of trains and Hovercraft.
UNIT IV BUILDING AERODYNAMICS 9
Pressure distribution on low rise buildings, wind forces on buildings. Environmental winds in city
blocks, Special problems of tall buildings, Building codes, Building ventilation and architectural
aerodynamics.
UNIT V FLOW INDUCED VIBRATIONS 9
Effects of Reynolds number on wake formation of bluff shapes, Vortex induced vibrations,
Galloping and stall flutter.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Use of aerodynamics for non- aerodynamics such as vehicle, building.
Solve the problems and able to analyse vibrations during flow
Identify the Atmospheric boundary layer and applications of wind energy collectors.
Analyze the aerodynamics of road vehicles, buildings and problems of flow induced
vibrations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Sovran (Ed), “Aerodynamics and drag mechanisms of bluff bodies and Road vehicles”,
Plenum press, New York, 1978.
2. Sachs. P., “Winds forces in Engineering”, Pergamon Press, 1978.
REFERENCES:
1. Blevins. R.D., “Flow Induced Vibrations”, Van Nostrand, 1990.
2. Calvent. N.G., “Wind Power Principles”, Charles Griffin & Co., London, 1979.
PR8491 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz.,
Design, Proper planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Brief introduction to CAD and CAM – Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control- Introduction
to CAD/CAM – Concurrent Engineering-CIM concepts – Computerised elements of CIM system –
Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of Production
Performance – Simple problems – Manufacturing Control – Simple Problems – Basic Elements of
an Automated system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time Production.
UNIT II PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL AND COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS
PLANNING 9
Process planning – Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Process Planning – Aggregate Production Planning and the Master Production Schedule –
Material Requirement planning – Capacity Planning- Control Systems-Shop Floor Control-
Inventory Control – Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planning-II (MRP-II) & Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) - Simple Problems.
96
UNIT III CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Families – Parts Classification and coding – Simple Problems in
Opitz Part Coding system – Production flow Analysis – Cellular Manufacturing – Composite part
concept – Machine cell design and layout – Quantitative analysis in Cellular Manufacturing – Rank
Order Clustering Method - Arranging Machines in a GT cell – Hollier Method – Simple Problems.
UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND AUTOMATED
GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS) 9
Types of Flexibility - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Application & Benefits – FMS Planning and
Control– Quantitative analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System
(AGVS) – AGVS Application – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 9
Robot Anatomy and Related Attributes – Classification of Robots- Robot Control systems – End
Effectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability - Industrial Robot
Applications – Robot Part Programming – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability – Simple Problems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Student will be able to
Describe about the classical production system, the components of CIM .
Explain the concept of Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP) and Material
Requirements Planning (MRP)
Illustrate the cellular manufacturing using Rank order, Clustering and Hollier method
Explain Flexible Manufacturing system and applications of Automated Guided Vehicles in
the implementation of CIM..
Describe the configurations of Industrial Robots, and their part programming.
Understand the use of computers in various Manufacturing support systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell.P.Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
2. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S.and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Gideon Halevi and Roland Weill, “Principles of Process Planning – A Logical Approach”
Chapman & Hall, London, 1995.
2. Kant Vajpayee S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India, 2003.
3. Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, 2000.
AE8016 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I MEASUREMENT SCIENCE AND DISPLAYS 9
Instrumentation brief review-Concept of measurement-Errors and error estimation- Functional
elements of an instrument system –Transducers - classification - Static and dynamic
characteristics- calibration - classification of aircraft instruments - Instrument displays panels and
cockpit layout.
UNIT II AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS AND SYNCHRO TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Air data instruments-airspeed, altitude, Vertical speed indicators. Static Air temperature, Angle of
attack measurement, Synchronous data transmission system
97
UNIT III GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS 9
Gyroscope and its properties, gyro system, Gyro horizon, Direction gyro-direction indicator, Rate
gyro-rate of turn and slip indicator, Turn coordinator, acceleration and turning errors.
UNIT IV AIRCRAFT COMPASS SYSTEMS &FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Direct reading compass, magnetic heading reference system-detector element, monitored
gyroscope system, DGU, RMI, deviation compensator. FMS- Flight planning-flight path
optimization-operational modes-4D flight management
UNIT V POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTS 9
Pressure measurement, temperature measurement, fuel quantity measurement, engine power and
control instruments-measurement of RPM, manifold pressure, torque, exhaust gas temperature,
EPR, fuel flow, engine vibration, monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand the available basic concepts of Flight instruments to the engineers.
Understand the necessary knowledge that are needed in significance and operations of Flight
instruments.
The students will also have an exposure to various topics such as measurement concepts, air
data sensors and measurements, Flight Management Systems, and other instruments
pertaining to Gyroscopic measurements and Engine data measurements
Student will be able to deploy these skills effectively in understanding and analyzing the
instrumentation methods in avionics engineering.
REFERENCES:
1. Doeblin.E.O, “Measurement Systems Application and Design”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
2. HarryL.Stilz, “Aerospace Telemetry”, Vol I to IV, Prentice-Hall Space Technology Series.
3. Murthy, D.V.S., “Transducers and Measurements”, McGraw-Hill, 1995
4. Pallet, E.H.J. “Aircraft Instruments & Integrated systems”, Longman Scientific and Technical,
McGraw-Hill, 1992.
AE8017 THEORY OF ELASTICITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the student understand the elastic behavior of different structural components
under various loadings and boundary conditions.
UNIT I BASIC EQUATIONS OF ELASTICITY 9
Definition of Stress and Strain: Stress - Strain relationships - Equations of Equilibrium,
Compatibility equations, Boundary Conditions, Saint Venant’s principle - Principal Stresses, Stress
Ellipsoid - Stress invariants
UNIT II PLANE STRESS AND PLANE STRAIN PROBLEMS 9
Airy’s stress function, Bi-harmonic equations, Polynomial solutions, Simple two dimensional
problems in Cartesian coordinates like bending of cantilever and simply supported beams.
UNIT III POLAR COORDINATES 9
Equations of equilibrium, Strain - displacement relations, Stress – strain relations, Airy’s stress
function, Axi – symmetric problems, Introduction to Dunder’s table, Curved beam analysis, Lame’s,
Kirsch, Michell’s and Boussinesque problems – Rotating discs.
98
UNIT IV TORSION 9
Navier’s theory, St. Venant’s theory, Prandtl’s theory on torsion, semi- inverse method and
applications to shafts of circular, elliptical, equilateral triangular and rectangular sections.
Membrane Analogy.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS 9
Classical plate theory – Assumptions – Governing equations – Boundary conditions – Navier’s
method of solution for simply supported rectangular plates – Levy’s method of solution for
rectangular plates under different boundary conditions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to use mathematical knowledge to solve problem related to structural elasticity.
Identify stress-strain relation in 3D, principal stress and principal strain.
Analyze a structure using Elasticity concepts.
Use analytical techniques to predict deformation, internal force and failure of simple solids and
structural components.
Solve aerospace-relevant problems in plane strain and plane stress in Cartesian and polar
coordinates.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ansel C Ugural and Saul K Fenster, "Advanced Strength and Applied Elasticity", 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
2. Bhaskar, K., and Varadan, T. K., "Theory of Isotropic/Orthotropic Elasticity", CRC Press USA,
2009.
3. Timoshenko, S., and Goodier, T.N., "Theory of Elasticity", McGraw – Hill Ltd., Tokyo, 1990.
REFERENCES:
1. Barber, J. R., "Elasticity", Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004
2. Sokolnikoff, I. S., "Mathematical Theory of Elasticity", McGraw – Hill, New York, 1978.
3. Volterra & J.H. Caines, "Advanced Strength of Materials", Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1991
4. Wang, C. T., "Applied Elasticity", McGraw – Hill Co., New York, 1993.
AE8018 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PLANNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the procedure of the formation of aerodrome and its design and air traffic control.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9
Objectives of air traffic control systems - Parts of ATC services – Scope and Provision of ATCs –
VFR & IFR operations – Classification of ATS air spaces – Various kinds of separation – Altimeter
setting procedures – Establishment, designation and identification of units providing ATS –
Division of responsibility of control.
UNIT II AIR TRAFFIC SYSTEMS 9
Area control service, assignment of cruising levels - minimum flight altitude - ATS routes and
significant points – RNAV and RNP – Vertical, lateral and longitudinal separations based on time /
distance –ATC clearances – Flight plans – position report
UNIT III FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEMS 10
Radar service, Basic radar terminology – Identification procedures using primary / secondary radar
– performance checks – use of radar in area and approach control services – assurance control
and co-ordination between radar / non radar control – emergencies – Flight information and
advisory service – Alerting service – Co-ordination and emergency procedures – Rules of the air.
99
UNIT IV AERODROME DATA 9
Aerodrome data - Basic terminology – Aerodrome reference code – Aerodrome reference point –
Aerodrome elevation – Aerodrome reference temperature – Instrument runway, physical
Characteristics; length of primary / secondary runway – Width of runways – Minimum distance
between parallel runways etc. – obstacles restriction.
UNIT V NAVIGATION AND OTHER SERVICES 8
Visual aids for navigation Wind direction indicator – Landing direction indicator – Location and
characteristics of signal area – Markings, general requirements – Various markings – Lights,
general requirements – Aerodrome beacon, identification beacon – Simple approach lighting
system and various lighting systems – VASI & PAPI - Visual aids for denoting obstacles; object to
be marked and lighter – Emergency and other services.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understanding the requirement of air traffic control systems and types of air traffic control
system.
Knowledge in flight information systems and rules of air traffic systems.
Knowledge indirection indicator systems for air navigation.
TEXT BOOK
1. AIP (India) Vol. I & II, “The English Book Store”, 17-1, Connaught Place, New Delhi.
REFERENCES
1. “Aircraft Manual (India) Volume I”, latest Edition – The English Book Store, 17-1, Connaught
Place, New Delhi.
2. “PANS – RAC – ICAO DOC 4444”, Latest Edition, The English Book Store, 17-1, Connaught
Place, New Delhi.
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions
and principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an
organization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of
managers - managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human
relations , system and contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole
proprietorship, partnership, company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization
culture and Environment – Current trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives –
setting objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools
and Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management ,
Career planning and management.
100
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective
communication – communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques –
use of computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management –
control and performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear
understanding of managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading &
controlling and have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th
Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values to
instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
101
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss
the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the
society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers”, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
4. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity
and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‘ Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
102
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):
1. To enable graduates to pursue higher education and research, or have a successful career
in industries associated with Computer Science and Engineering, or as entrepreneurs. To
ensure that graduates will have the ability and attitude to adapt to emerging technological
changes.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES POs:
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
1
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one‘s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES (PSOs)
To analyze, design and develop computing solutions by applying foundational concepts of
Computer Science and Engineering.
To apply software engineering principles and practices for developing quality software for scientific
and business applications.
To adapt to emerging Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) to innovate ideas and
solutions to existing/novel problems.
Mapping of POs/PSOs to PEOs
Contribution 1: Reasonable 2:Significant 3:Strong
2
PEOs
POs 1. Graduates will 2. Graduates will
pursue higher have the ability
education and and attitude to
research, or have a adapt to
successful career in emerging
industries associated technological
with Computer changes.
Science and
Engineering, or as
entrepreneurs.
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge
of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering 3 1
specialization to the solution of complex
engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review
research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated
3 1
conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and
engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design
solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes
that meet the specified needs with appropriate
3 2
consideration for the public health and safety,
and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex
problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of
experiments, analysis and interpretation of 3 2
data, and synthesis of the information to
provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply
appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction
2 3
and modeling to complex engineering activities
with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning
informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent
2 2
responsibilities relevant to the professional
engineering practice.
3
7. Environment and sustainability:
Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the 2 1
knowledge of, and need for sustainable
development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to
professional ethics and responsibilities and
3 1
norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively
as an individual, and as a member or leader in
3 2
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on
complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at
large, such as, being able to comprehend and
3 2
write effective reports and design
documentation, make effective presentations,
and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance:
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
the engineering and management principles and
apply these to one‘s own work, as a member 2 2
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for,
and have the preparation and ability to engage
1 3
in independent and life-long learning in the
broadest context of technological change.
PSOs
1. Analyze, design and develop computing solutions by applying foundational concepts of
3 1
computer science and engineering.
2. Apply software engineering principles and practices for developing quality software for
3 1
scientific and business applications.
3. Adapt to emerging information and communication technologies (ICT) to innovate ideas
1 3
and solutions to existing/novel problems.
4
MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
A broad relation between the Course Outcomes and Programme Outcomes is given in the
following table
Course Title Programme Outcome (PO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Communicative √ √ √ √
English
Engineering √ √ √
√
Mathematics - I
Engineering Physics √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √
Chemistry
SEMESTER I
Problem Solving
and Python √ √ √
Programming
Engineering √ √ √ √ √ √ √
√
Graphics
Problem Solving √
and Python
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Programming
Laboratory
Physics and √ √ √ √ √ √
Chemistry
Laboratory
Technical English √ √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √
√
Mathematics II
Physics for √ √ √
Information
Science
Basic Electrical, √ √ √
SEMESTER II
Electronics and
Measurement
Engineering
Environmental √ √ √ √
Science and √ √ √ √
Engineering
Programming in C √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Practices √ √ √
Laboratory
C Programming √
√ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
5
PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)
COURSE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TITLE
Discrete
√ √ √ √
Mathematics
Digital
Principles and √ √ √
Design
Data Structures √ √ √
SEMESTER III
Object Oriented
√ √ √
Programming
Communication
√ √ √
Engineering
Data Structures
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Object Oriented
Programming √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Digital Systems
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Interpersonal
Skills/Listening √ √ √ √
YEAR II
&Speaking
Probability and
Queueing √ √ √ √ √ √
Theory
Computer
√ √ √
Architecture
Database
Management √ √ √
Systems
SEMESTER IV
Design and
Analysis of √ √ √ √ √ √
Algorithms
Operating
√ √ √
Systems
Software
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering
Database
Management
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Systems
Laboratory
Operating
Systems √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Advanced
Reading and √ √ √ √
Writing
6
Algebra and
√ √ √ √
Number Theory
Computer
√ √ √
Networks
Microprocessors
and √ √ √
Microcontrollers
Theory of
√ √ √
Computation
SEMESTER V
Object Oriented
Analysis and √ √ √ √
YEAR III
Design
Open Elective I
Microprocessors
and
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Microcontrollers
Laboratory
Object Oriented
Analysis and
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Design
Laboratory
Networks
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Internet
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
Programming
Artificial
√ √ √
Intelligence
Mobile
√ √ √
Computing
√ √ √ √ √ √ √
SEMESTER VI
Compiler Design
Distributed
√ √ √
Systems
Professional
Elective I
Internet
Programming √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Mobile
Application
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Development
Laboratory
Mini Project √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Professional
Communication
Principles of
SEMESTER VII
√ √ √ √
Management
YEAR IV
Cryptography
and Network √ √ √
Security
Cloud Computing √ √ √
Open Elective II
7
Professional
Elective II
Professional
Elective III
Cloud Computing
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Security
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Laboratory
Professional
Elective IV
SEMESTER
Professional
VIII
Elective V
Project Work
√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
8
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
SEM COURSE TITLE PROGRAMME OUTCOME (PO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VI Data Warehousing and Data
√ √ √
Mining
Software Testing √ √ √ √ √ √
Embedded Systems √ √ √
Agile Methodologies √ √ √
Graph Theory and Applications- √ √ √
Intellectual Property Rights √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Digital Signal Processing √ √ √
VII Big Data Analytics √ √ √ √ √ √
Machine Learning Techniques √ √ √ √ √ √
Computer Graphics and
√ √ √
Multimedia
Software Project Management √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Internet of Things √ √ √
Service Oriented Architecture √ √ √
Total Quality Management √ √ √ √
Multi-core Architectures
√ √ √
and Programming
Human Computer Interaction √ √ √
C# and .Net Programming √ √ √ √ √ √
Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
√ √ √
Networks
Advanced Topics on Databases √ √ √
Foundation Skills in Integrated
√ √ √
Product Development
Human Rights √ √ √
Disaster Management √ √ √ √
VIII Digital Image Processing √ √ √
Social Network Analysis √ √ √
Information Security √ √ √ √
Software Defined Networks √ √ √
Cyber Forensics √ √ √ √
Soft Computing √ √ √
Professional Ethics in
√ √ √ √ √ √
Engineering
Information Retrieval Techniques √ √ √
Green Computing √ √ √
GPU Architecture and
√ √ √
Programming
Natural Language Processing √ √ √
Parallel Algorithms √ √ √
Speech Processing √ √ √
Fundamentals of Nano Science √ √ √
9
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I - VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - I
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 0 0 3
3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES 4
Python Programming 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
COURSE CONTACT
SI.No COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering BS
4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - II
3. PH8252 Physics for Information BS
3 3 0 0 3
Science
4. BE8255 Basic Electrical, ES
Electronics and
3 3 0 0 3
Measurement
Engineering
5. GE8291 Environmental Science HS
3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
6. CS8251 Programming in C PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. CS8261 C Programming PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 28 20 0 8 24
10
SEMESTER III
COURSE CONTACT
Sl.No COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8351 Discrete Mathematics BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. Digital Principles and
CS8351 ES 4 4 0 0 4
System Design
3. CS8391 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. Object Oriented
CS8392 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
5. Communication
EC8395 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
6. Data Structures
CS8381 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. Object Oriented
CS8383 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. Digital Systems
CS8382 ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. Interpersonal
HS8381 Skills/Listening EEC 2 0 0 2 1
&Speaking
TOTAL 31 17 0 14 24
SEMESTER IV
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8402 Probability and Queueing BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory
2. CS8491 Computer Architecture PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8492 Database Management PC
3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. CS8451 Design and Analysis of PC
3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
5. CS8493 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. CS8494 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CS8481 Database Management PC
4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
8. CS8461 Operating Systems PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. HS8461 Advanced Reading and EEC
2 0 0 2 1
Writing
TOTAL 29 19 0 10 24
11
SEMESTER V
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8551 Algebra and Number
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Theory
2. CS8591 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
4. CS8501 Theory of Computation PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8592 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Design
6. Open Elective I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EC8681 Microprocessors and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
8. CS8582 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 4 0 0 4 2
and Design Laboratory
9. CS8581 Networks Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER VI
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. CS8651 Internet Programming PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8691 Artificial Intelligence PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8601 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8602 Compiler Design PC 5 3 0 2 4
5. CS8603 Distributed Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CS8661 Internet Programming
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. CS8662 Mobile Application
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Development Laboratory
9. CS8611 Mini Project EEC 2 0 0 2 1
10. HS8581 Professional EEC 2
0 0 2 1
Communication
TOTAL 32 18 0 14 25
12
SEMESTER VII
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MG8591 Principles of
HS 3 3 0 0 3
Management
2. CS8792 Cryptography and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Network Security
3. CS8791 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. Open Elective II OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III
PRACTICALS
7. CS8711 Cloud Computing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. IT8761 Security Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22
SEMESTER VIII
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective IV PE
3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective V PE
3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
3. CS8811 Project Work
EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 185
13
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3. GE8291 Environmental Science
HS 3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
4. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
BASIC SCIENCES (BS)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics I
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering BS
4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics II
6. PH8252 Physics for Information BS
3 3 0 0 3
Science
7. MA8351 Discrete Mathematics BS 4 4 0 0 4
8. MA8402 Probability and Queueing BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory
9. MA8551 Algebra and Number BS
4 4 0 0 4
Theory
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
3. Problem Solving and
GE8161 Python Programming ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
4. Basic Electrical, Electronics
BE8255 and Measurement ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8261 Engineering Practices
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
6. CS8351 Digital Principles and
ES 4 4 0 0 4
System Design
7. EC8395 Communication ES
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
8. CS8382 Digital Systems Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
14
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CS8251 Programming in C PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8261 C Programming Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
3. CS8391 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8392 Object Oriented
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
5. CS8381 Data Structures Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
6. CS8383 Object Oriented
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
7. CS8491 Computer Architecture PC 3 3 0 0 3
8. CS8492 Database Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
9. CS8451 Design and Analysis of
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
10. CS8493 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
11. CS8494 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
12. CS8481 Database Management
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
13. CS8461 Operating Systems
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
14. CS8591 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
15. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
16. CS8501 Theory of Computation PC 3 3 0 0 3
17. CS8592 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Design
18. EC8681 Microprocessors and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
19. CS8582 Object Oriented Analysis
PC 4 0 0 4 2
and Design Laboratory
20. CS8581 Networks Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
21. CS8651 Internet Programming PC 3 3 0 0 3
22. CS8691 Artificial Intelligence PC 3 3 0 0 3
23. CS8601 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
24. CS8602 Compiler Design PC 5 3 0 2 4
25. CS8603 Distributed Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
26. CS8661 Internet Programming
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
27. CS8662 Mobile Application
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Development Laboratory
28. CS8792 Cryptography and Network
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Security
29. CS8791 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
30. CS8711 Cloud Computing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
31. IT8761 Security Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
15
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)
SEMESTER VI
ELECTIVE - I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8075 Data Warehousing and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Data Mining
2. IT8076 Software Testing PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. IT8072 Embedded Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8072 Agile Methodologies PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8077 Graph Theory and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Applications-
6. IT8071 Digital Signal Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8075 Intellectual Property
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Rights
SEMESTER VII
ELECTIVE - II
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8091 Big Data Analytics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8082 Machine Learning
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
3. CS8092 Computer Graphics and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Multimedia
4. IT8075 Software Project
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. CS8081 Internet of Things PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. IT8074 Service Oriented
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Architecture
7. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII
ELECTIVE - III
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8083 Multi-core Architectures and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. CS8079 Human Computer
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Interaction
3. CS8073 C# and .Net Programming PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8088 Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
5. CS8071 Advanced Topics on
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Databases
6. GE8072 Foundation Skills in
Integrated Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
7. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
8. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
16
SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE - IV
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. EC8093 Digital Image Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. CS8085 Social Network Analysis PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. IT8073 Information Security PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CS8087 Software Defined Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8074 Cyber Forensics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. CS8086 Soft Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8076 Professional Ethics in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE - V
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8080 Information Retrieval
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
2. CS8078 Green Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8076 GPU Architecture and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
4. CS8084 Natural Language Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. CS8001 Parallel Algorithms PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. IT8077 Speech Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Science
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
& Speaking
2. HS8461 Advanced Reading and
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Writing
3. CS8611 Mini Project EEC 2 0 0 2 1
4. HS8581 Professional Communication EEC 2 0 0 2 1
5. CS8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
17
SUMMARY
S.NO. SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS Percentage
AREA TOTAL
II III IV V VI VII VIII
I
1. HS 4 7 3 14 7.60%
2. BS 12 7
4 4 4 31 16.8%
3. ES 9 5
9 23 12.5%
4. PC 5
10 19 18 20 10 82 44.5%
5. PE 3 6 6 15 8.15%
6. OE 3 3 6 3.3%
7. EEC 1 1 2 10 14 7.65%
Total 25 24 24 24 25 25 22 16 185
Non Credit /
8.
Mandatory
18
L T P C
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology
students.
To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short
narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic
conversations. Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave-
Language development – prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing
meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure-
use of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening
to longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources.
Speaking- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development-
degrees of comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single
word substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines
Writing- letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email-
Listening- listening to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them.
Speaking- speaking about oneself- speaking about one‘s friend- Language development-
Tenses- simple present-simple past- present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary
development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs
19
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing
an outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-
fixed and semi-fixed expressions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
AT THE END OF THE COURSE, LEARNERS WILL BE ABLE TO:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,2011.
2. Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
3. Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student‘s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business English.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5. Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books: 2013.
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
20
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler‘s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor‘s series for functions
of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange‘s method of
undetermined multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by
parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by
partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler‘s and Legendre‘s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following
skills:
Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar
coordinates, in addition to change of order and change of variables.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions
and integration by parts.
Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent
improper integrals.
Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8,
3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES:
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., ―Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
21
L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform
and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in
beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein‘s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance
angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical
fibers - fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity - Forbe‘s and Lee‘s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through
compound media (series and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck‘s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger‘s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances
- coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures -
crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of
imperfections in plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth
techniques.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
The students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
The students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and
their applications in fibre optics,
The students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of
materials and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
The students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
The students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal
growth techniques.
22
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. ―Engineering Physics‖. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. ―Engineering Physics‖. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. ―Engineering Physics‖. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. ―Principles of Physics‖. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. ―Physics for Scientists and Engineers‖. Cengage Learning,
2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. ―Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics‘.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and
water treatment techniques.
To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single
and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and
fuel cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external
treatment – Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse
Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms – Freundlich‘s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir‘s adsorption
isotherm – contact theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir -
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement. Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria
– autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic promoters - acid base catalysis – applications
(catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis – Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum -
manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane
number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power
alcohol and biodiesel. Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific
values- theoretical calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition
temperature - explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
23
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission
and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder
reactor - solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and
supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid
battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for
further learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, ―A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry‖, S. Chand & Company
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, ―Engineering Chemistry‖ Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Wiley India PVT, LTD,
New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, ―Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications‖, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
To read and write simple Python programs.
To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
To define Python functions and call them.
To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation
(pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies
for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a
card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
modules and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments;
Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables,
distance between two points.
24
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort,
insertion sort, mergesort, histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
Decompose a Python program into functions.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist‘‘, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, ―An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, ―Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python‘‘, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, ―Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, ―Exploring Python‖, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, ―Fundamentals of Python: First Programs‖, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, ―Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem-Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, ―Practical Programming: An Introduction
to Computer Science using Python 3‖, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC,
2013.
25
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of
Three Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial
views of objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6 +12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
Perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of
objects.
Project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
Draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
Visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
26
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natrajan K.V., ―A text book of Engineering Graphics‖, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., ―Engineering Graphics‖, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
REFERENCES:
th
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Charotar Publishing House, 50
Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., ―Engineering Drawing‖ (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores,
Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., ―Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N. S. Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, ―Engineering Graphics‖, Oxford University, Press,
New Delhi, 2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LT PC
0 04 2
OBJECTIVES:
To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Use functions for structuring Python programs.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS:
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton‘s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
27
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
BS8161
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes)
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics,
thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young‘s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee‘s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
28
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler‘s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1. Vogel‘s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014).
HS8251 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering
and technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations, participate in group
discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their
areas of specialization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts
from journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
29
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking
– describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions
in a text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-
vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal
passive voice, numerical adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking –
introduction to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical,
practice in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary
Development- sequence words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded
sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of
presentations- Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job
application – cover letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and
issue based essays--Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-.
Language Development- clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and
survey-Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported
speech.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course learners will be able to:
Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
Write reports and winning job applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles
and Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary
reading.
30
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be
used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices –
Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic
forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green‘s, Gauss divergence and Stoke‘s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w z c, cz, , z 2 - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy‘s integral theorem – Cauchy‘s integral formula – Taylor‘s and Laurent‘s
series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and
unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of
the following topics and their applications:
Eigen values and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green‘s
theorems and their verification.
Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
31
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., ― Advanced Engineering Mathematics ‖, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O‘Neil, P.V. ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, ―Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics ―Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
PHYSICS FOR INFORMATION SCIENCE L T P C
PH8252
(Common to CSE & IT) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the essential principles of Physics of semiconductor device and Electron
transport properties. Become proficient in magnetic and optical properties of materials and
Nano-electronic devices.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential – Energy bands in solids – tight binding approximation - Electron
effective mass – concept of hole.
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9
Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect band gap semiconductors
– Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier
concentration in N-type & P-type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with
temperature – variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration – Carrier
transport in Semiconductor: random motion, drift, mobility and diffusion – Hall effect and devices –
Ohmic contacts – Schottky diode.
UNIT III MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Magnetic dipole moment – atomic magnetic moments- magnetic permeability and susceptibility -
Magnetic material classification: diamagnetism – paramagnetism – ferromagnetism –
antiferromagnetism – ferrimagnetism – Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction-
saturation magnetization and Curie temperature – Domain Theory- M versus H behaviour – Hard
and soft magnetic materials – examples and uses-– Magnetic principle in computer data storage
– Magnetic hard disc (GMR sensor).
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P-N diode – solar cell - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes – Optical data storage
techniques.
32
UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9
Electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy – Quantum confinement –
Quantum structures – Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum dot structure
- Band gap of nanomaterials – Tunneling: single electron phenomena and single electron
transistor – Quantum dot laser. Conductivity of metallic nanowires – Ballistic transport – Quantum
resistance and conductance – Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications .
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will able to
Gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structuues,
Acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various
devices,
Get knowledge on magnetic properties of materials and their applications in data storage,
Have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for
optoelectronics,
Understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications in carbon electronics..
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jasprit Singh, ―Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles‖, Wiley 2012.
2. Kasap, S.O. ―Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices‖, McGraw-Hill Education, 2007.
3. Kittel, C. ―Introduction to Solid State Physics‖. Wiley, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Garcia, N. & Damask, A. ―Physics for Computer Science Students‖. Springer-Verlag, 2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. ―Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics‖. Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. ―Nanotechnology: Understanding
Small Systems‖. CRC Press, 2014.
BE8255 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND MEASUREMENT LTPC
ENGINEERING 3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of electronic circuit constructions.
To learn the fundamental laws, theorems of electrical circuits and also to analyze them
To study the basic principles of electrical machines and their performance
To study the different energy sources, protective devices and their field applications
To understand the principles and operation of measuring instruments and transducers
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 9
Ohms Law, Kirchhoff‘s Law-Instantaneous power- series and parallel circuit analysis with resistive,
capacitive and inductive network - nodal analysis, mesh analysis- network theorems - Thevenins
theorem, Norton theorem, maximum power transfer theorem and superposition theorem, three
phase supply-Instantaneous, Reactive and apparent power-star delta conversion.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
DC and AC ROTATING MACHINES:Types, Construction, principle, Emf and torque equation,
application Speed Control- Basics of Stepper Motor – Brushless DC motors- Transformers-
Introduction- types and construction, working principle of Ideal transformer-Emf equation- All day
efficiency calculation.
33
UNIT III UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER 9
Renewable energy sources-wind and solar panels. Illumination by lamps- Sodium Vapour,
Mercury vapour, Fluorescent tube. Domestic refrigerator and air conditioner-Electric circuit,
construction and working principle. Batteries-NiCd, Pb Acid and Li ion–Charge and Discharge
Characteristics. Protection-need for earthing, fuses and circuit breakers.Energy Tariff calculation
for domestic loads.
UNIT IV ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 9
PN Junction-VI Characteristics of Diode, zener diode, Transistors configurations - amplifiers. Op
amps- Amplifiers, oscillator,rectifiers, differentiator, integrator, ADC, DAC. Multi vibrator using 555
Timer IC . Voltage regulator IC using LM 723,LM 317.
UNIT V ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENT 9
Characteristic of measurement-errors in measurement, torque in indicating instruments- moving
coil and moving iron meters, Energy meter and watt meter. Transducers- classification-thermo
electric, RTD, Strain gauge, LVDT, LDR and piezoelectric. Oscilloscope-CRO.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Discuss the essentials of electric circuits and analysis.
Discuss the basic operation of electric machines and transformers
Introduction of renewable sources and common domestic loads.
Introduction to measurement and metering for electric circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.P. Kotharti and I.J Nagarath, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering,
Mc Graw Hill, 2016,Third Edition.
2. M.S. Sukhija and T.K. Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronic Engineering, Oxford, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. S.B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, Fundaments of Electrical Engineering,
Cambridge, 2016
2. B.L Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics. Chand
& Co, 2008.
3. S.K.Sahdev, Basic of Electrical Engineering, Pearson, 2015
4. John Bird, ―Electrical and Electronic Principles and Technology‖, Fourth Edition, Elsevier,
2010.
5. Mittle,Mittal, Basic Electrical Engineering‖, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 2016.
6. C.L.Wadhwa, ―Generation, Distribution and Utilisation of Electrical Energy‖, New Age
international pvt.ltd.,2003.
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the nature and facts about environment.
To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and
waste management.
34
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive
use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national
and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic
species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field
study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes,
etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems –
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,
case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land
degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field
study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy –
water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental
organization- environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –
wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act –
Wildlife protection act – Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
35
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on
the following after completing the course.
Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‗Environmental Science and Engineering‘, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‗Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science‘, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‗Environmental law‘, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, ―Textbook of Environmental Studies‖, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‗Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure‘, Oxford University Press, 2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, ―Environmental Science‖, Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.
CS8251 PROGRAMMING IN C LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop C Programs using basic programming constructs
To develop C programs using arrays and strings
To develop applications in C using functions , pointers and structures
To do input/output and file handling in C
UNIT I BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction to programming paradigms - Structure of C program - C programming: Data Types –
Storage classes - Constants – Enumeration Constants - Keywords – Operators: Precedence and
Associativity - Expressions - Input/Output statements, Assignment statements – Decision making
statements - Switch statement - Looping statements – Pre-processor directives - Compilation
process
UNIT II ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9
Introduction to Arrays: Declaration, Initialization – One dimensional array – Example Program:
Computing Mean, Median and Mode - Two dimensional arrays – Example Program: Matrix
Operations (Addition, Scaling, Determinant and Transpose) - String operations: length, compare,
concatenate, copy – Selection sort, linear and binary search
UNIT III FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9
Introduction to functions: Function prototype, function definition, function call, Built-in functions
(string functions, math functions) – Recursion – Example Program: Computation of Sine series,
Scientific calculator using built-in functions, Binary Search using recursive functions – Pointers –
Pointer operators – Pointer arithmetic – Arrays and pointers – Array of pointers – Example
Program: Sorting of names – Parameter passing: Pass by value, Pass by reference – Example
Program: Swapping of two numbers and changing the value of a variable using pass by reference
36
UNIT IV STRUCTURES 9
Structure - Nested structures – Pointer and Structures – Array of structures – Example Program
using structures and pointers – Self referential structures – Dynamic memory allocation - Singly
linked list - typedef
UNIT V FILE PROCESSING 9
Files – Types of file processing: Sequential access, Random access – Sequential access file -
Example Program: Finding average of numbers stored in sequential access file - Random access
file - Example Program: Transaction processing using random access files – Command line
arguments
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Develop simple applications in C using basic constructs
Design and implement applications using arrays and strings
Develop and implement applications in C using functions and pointers.
Develop applications in C using structures.
Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, ―Programming in C‖, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
2. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, ―The C Programming language‖, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, ―C How to Program‖, Seventh edition, Pearson Publication
2. Juneja, B. L and Anita Seth, ―Programming in C‖, CENGAGE Learning India pvt. Ltd., 2011
3. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, ―Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C‖, First
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2009.
4. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, ―Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C‖, Dorling
Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia, 2011.
5. Byron S. Gottfried, "Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with
C",McGraw-Hill Education, 1996.
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
BUILDINGS:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings.
Safety
aspects.
PLUMBING WORKS:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
37
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
CARPENTRY USING POWER TOOLS ONLY:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
WELDING:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
BASIC MACHINING:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
SHEET METAL WORK:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
MACHINE ASSEMBLY PRACTICE:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
DEMONSTRATION ON:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC
circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding
measurement of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
38
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
Fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
Use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
39
CS8261 C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVES:
To develop programs in C using basic constructs.
To develop applications in C using strings, pointers, functions, structures.
To develop applications in C using file processing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Programs using I/O statements and expressions.
2. Programs using decision-making constructs.
3. Write a program to find whether the given year is leap year or Not? (Hint: not every
centurion year is a leap. For example 1700, 1800 and 1900 is not a leap year)
4. Design a calculator to perform the operations, namely, addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division and square of a number.
5. Check whether a given number is Armstrong number or not?
6. Given a set of numbers like <10, 36, 54, 89, 12, 27>, find sum of weights based on the
following conditions.
5 if it is a perfect cube.
4 if it is a multiple of 4 and divisible by 6.
3 if it is a prime number.
Sort the numbers based on the weight in the increasing order as shown below
<10,its weight>,<36,its weight><89,its weight>
7. Populate an array with height of persons and find how many persons are above the
average height.
8. Populate a two dimensional array with height and weight of persons and compute the Body
Mass Index of the individuals.
9. Given a string ―a$bcd./fg‖ find its reverse without changing the position of special
characters.
(Example input:a@gh%;j and output:j@hg%;a)
10. Convert the given decimal number into binary, octal and hexadecimal numbers using user
defined functions.
11. From a given paragraph perform the following using built-in functions:
a. Find the total number of words.
b. Capitalize the first word of each sentence.
c. Replace a given word with another word.
12. Solve towers of Hanoi using recursion.
13. Sort the list of numbers using pass by reference.
14. Generate salary slip of employees using structures and pointers.
15. Compute internal marks of students for five different subjects using structures and
functions.
16. Insert, update, delete and append telephone details of an individual or a company into a
telephone directory using random access file.
17. Count the number of account holders whose balance is less than the minimum balance
using sequential access file.
Mini project
18. Create a ―Railway reservation system‖ with the following modules
Booking
Availability checking
Cancellation
Prepare chart
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
40
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop C programs for simple applications making use of basic constructs, arrays and
strings.
Develop C programs involving functions, recursion, pointers, and structures.
Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.
MA8351 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To extend student‘s logical and mathematical maturity and ability to deal with abstraction.
To introduce most of the basic terminologies used in computer science courses and
application of ideas to solve practical problems.
To understand the basic concepts of combinatorics and graph theory.
To familiarize the applications of algebraic structures.
To understand the concepts and significance of lattices and boolean algebra which are
widely used in computer science and engineering.
UNIT I LOGIC AND PROOFS 12
Propositional logic – Propositional equivalences - Predicates and quantifiers – Nested quantifiers –
Rules of inference - Introduction to proofs – Proof methods and strategy.
UNIT II COMBINATORICS 12
Mathematical induction – Strong induction and well ordering – The basics of counting – The
pigeonhole principle – Permutations and combinations – Recurrence relations – Solving linear
recurrence relations – Generating functions – Inclusion and exclusion principle and its applications
UNIT III GRAPHS 12
Graphs and graph models – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Matrix
representation of graphs and graph isomorphism – Connectivity – Euler and Hamilton paths.
UNIT IV ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 12
Algebraic systems – Semi groups and monoids - Groups – Subgroups – Homomorphism‘s –
Normal subgroup and cosets – Lagrange‘s theorem – Definitions and examples of Rings and
Fields.
UNIT V LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 12
Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as posets – Properties of lattices - Lattices as algebraic
systems – Sub lattices – Direct product and homomorphism – Some special lattices – Boolean
algebra.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students would:
Have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the logic of a program.
Have an understanding in identifying structures on many levels.
Be aware of a class of functions which transform a finite set into another finite set which
relates to input and output functions in computer science.
Be aware of the counting principles.
Be exposed to concepts and properties of algebraic structures such as groups, rings and
fields.
41
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rosen, K.H., "Discrete Mathematics and its Applications", 7th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, Special Indian Edition, 2011.
2. Tremblay, J.P. and Manohar.R, " Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 30th Reprint, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Grimaldi, R.P. "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction", 4th Edition,
Pearson Education Asia, Delhi, 2007.
2. Lipschutz, S. and Mark Lipson., "Discrete Mathematics", Schaum‘s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill
Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3. Koshy, T. "Discrete Mathematics with Applications", Elsevier Publications, 2006.
CS8351 DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To design digital circuits using simplified Boolean functions
• To analyze and design combinational circuits
• To analyze and design synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits
• To understand Programmable Logic Devices
• To write HDL code for combinational and sequential circuits
UNIT I BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 12
Number Systems - Arithmetic Operations - Binary Codes- Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates
- Theorems and Properties of Boolean Algebra - Boolean Functions - Canonical and
Standard Forms - Simplification of Boolean Functions using Karnaugh Map - Logic Gates –
NAND and NOR Implementations.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 12
Combinational Circuits – Analysis and Design Procedures - Binary Adder-Subtractor -
Decimal Adder - Binary Multiplier - Magnitude Comparator - Decoders – Encoders –
Multiplexers - Introduction to HDL – HDL Models of Combinational circuits.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 12
Sequential Circuits - Storage Elements: Latches , Flip-Flops - Analysis of Clocked
Sequential Circuits - State Reduction and Assignment - Design Procedure - Registers and
Counters - HDL Models of Sequential Circuits.
UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 12
Analysis and Design of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits – Reduction of State and Flow
Tables – Race-free State Assignment – Hazards.
UNIT V MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC 12
RAM – Memory Decoding – Error Detection and Correction - ROM - Programmable Logic
Array – Programmable Array Logic – Sequential Programmable Devices.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Simplify Boolean functions using KMap
Design and Analyze Combinational and Sequential Circuits
Implement designs using Programmable Logic Devices
Write HDL code for combinational and Sequential Circuits
42
TEXT BOOK:
1. M. Morris R. Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, ―Digital Design: With an Introduction to the
Verilog HDL, VHDL, and SystemVerilog‖, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. G. K. Kharate, Digital Electronics, Oxford University Press, 2010
2. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Fifth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2017.
3. Charles H. Roth Jr, Larry L. Kinney, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Sixth Edition,
CENGAGE Learning, 2013
4. Donald D. Givone, Digital Principles and Design‖, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2003.
CS8391 DATA STRUCTURES LT PC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of ADTs
To Learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues
To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
To apply Tree and Graph structures
UNIT I LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation
––singly linked lists- circularly linked lists- doubly-linked lists – applications of lists –Polynomial
Manipulation – All operations (Insertion, Deletion, Merge, Traversal).
UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – STACKS, QUEUES 9
Stack ADT – Operations - Applications - Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of Infix to
postfix expression - Queue ADT – Operations - Circular Queue – Priority Queue - deQueue –
applications of queues.
UNIT III NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – TREES 9
Tree ADT – tree traversals - Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – applications of trees – binary
search tree ADT –Threaded Binary Trees- AVL Trees – B-Tree - B+ Tree - Heap – Applications of
heap.
UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - GRAPHS 9
Definition – Representation of Graph – Types of graph - Breadth-first traversal - Depth-first
traversal – Topological Sort – Bi-connectivity – Cut vertex – Euler circuits – Applications of graphs.
UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9
Searching- Linear Search - Binary Search. Sorting - Bubble sort - Selection sort - Insertion sort -
Shell sort – Radix sort. Hashing- Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing –
Rehashing – Extendible Hashing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Implement abstract data types for linear data structures.
Apply the different linear and non-linear data structures to problem solutions.
Critically analyze the various sorting algorithms.
43
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C‖, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education,1997.
2. Reema Thareja, ―Data Structures Using C‖, Second Edition , Oxford University Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L.Rivest, Clifford Stein, ―Introduction to
Algorithms", Second Edition, Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
2. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, ―Data Structures and Algorithms‖, Pearson Education,1983.
3. Stephen G. Kochan, ―Programming in C‖, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
4. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, ―Fundamentals of Data Structures in C‖,
Second Edition, University Press, 2008
CS8392 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java
To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
To define exceptions and use I/O streams
To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10
Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance -
Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source
File -Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in
Java – constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types,
Variables, Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.
UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9
Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining an
interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings
UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9
Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions – built-in exceptions, creating
own exceptions, Stack Trace Elements. Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and
Character streams – Reading and Writing Console – Reading and Writing Files
UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8
Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, Inter-thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups. Generic
Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and
Limitations.
44
UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9
Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts, and
images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse events -
AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing Components – Text
Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists- choices- Scrollbars –
Windows –Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Develop Java programs using OOP principles
Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams
Develop Java applications with threads and generics classes
Develop interactive Java programs using swings
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, ―Java The complete reference‖, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, ―Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals‖, 9th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, ―Java SE 8 for programmers‖, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Steven Holzner, ―Java 2 Black book‖, Dreamtech press, 2011.
3. Timothy Budd, ―Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java‖, Updated Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.
EC8395 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology through demonstrations,
case studies, simulations, contributions of scientist, national/international policies with a
futuristic vision along with socio-economic impact and issues
To study the various analog and digital modulation techniques
To study the principles behind information theory and coding
To study the various digital communication techniques
UNIT I ANALOG MODULATION 9
Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Angle
modulation – PM and FM – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Superheterodyne receivers
UNITII PULSE MODULATION 9
Low pass sampling theorem – Quantization – PAM – Line coding – PCM, DPCM, DM, and
ADPCM And ADM, Channel Vocoder - Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing
UNIT III DIGITAL MODULATION AND TRANSMISSION 9
Phase shift keying – BPSK, DPSK, QPSK – Principles of M-ary signaling M-ary PSK & QAM –
Comparison, ISI – Pulse shaping – Duo binary encoding – Cosine filters – Eye pattern, equalizers
45
UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 9
Measure of information – Entropy – Source coding theorem – Shannon–Fano coding, Huffman
Coding, LZ Coding – Channel capacity – Shannon-Hartley law – Shannon's limit – Error control
codes – Cyclic codes, Syndrome calculation – Convolution Coding, Sequential and Viterbi
decoding
UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS 9
PN sequences – properties – m-sequence – DSSS – Processing gain, Jamming – FHSS –
Synchronisation and tracking – Multiple Access – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
Use data and pulse communication techniques.
Analyze Source and Error control coding.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, ―Principles of Communication Systems‖ 3/e, TMH 2007
2. S. Haykin ―Digital Communications‖ John Wiley 2005
REFERENCES:
1. B.P.Lathi, ―Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems‖, 3rd edition, Oxford
University Press, 2007
2. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series – ―Analog and Digital Communications‖ TMH 2006
3. B.Sklar, Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications‖ 2/e Pearson
Education 2007.
CS8381 DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVES
To implement linear and non-linear data structures
To understand the different operations of search trees
To implement graph traversal algorithms
To get familiarized to sorting and searching algorithms
1. Array implementation of Stack and Queue ADTs
2. Array implementation of List ADT
3. Linked list implementation of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
4. Applications of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
5. Implementation of Binary Trees and operations of Binary Trees
6. Implementation of Binary Search Trees
7. Implementation of AVL Trees
8. Implementation of Heaps using Priority Queues.
9. Graph representation and Traversal algorithms
10. Applications of Graphs
11. Implementation of searching and sorting algorithms
12. Hashing – any two collision techniques
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
46
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Write functions to implement linear and non-linear data structure operations
Suggest appropriate linear / non-linear data structure operations for solving a given
problem
Appropriately use the linear / non-linear data structure operations for a given problem
Apply appropriate hash functions that result in a collision free scenario for data storage and
retrieval
CS8383 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVES
To build software development skills using java programming for real-world applications.
To understand and apply the concepts of classes, packages, interfaces, arraylist, exception
handling and file processing.
To develop applications using generic programming and event handling.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop a Java application to generate Electricity bill. Create a class with the following
members: Consumer no., consumer name, previous month reading, current month reading,
type of EB connection (i.e domestic or commercial). Compute the bill amount using the
following tariff.
If the type of the EB connection is domestic, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
First 100 units - Rs. 1 per unit
101-200 units - Rs. 2.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 4 per unit
> 501 units - Rs. 6 per unit
If the type of the EB connection is commercial, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
First 100 units - Rs. 2 per unit
101-200 units - Rs. 4.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 6 per unit
> 501 units - Rs. 7 per unit
2. Develop a java application to implement currency converter (Dollar to INR, EURO to INR, Yen
to INR and vice versa), distance converter (meter to KM, miles to KM and vice versa) , time
converter (hours to minutes, seconds and vice versa) using packages.
3. Develop a java application with Employee class with Emp_name, Emp_id, Address, Mail_id,
Mobile_no as members. Inherit the classes, Programmer, Assistant Professor, Associate
Professor and Professor from employee class. Add Basic Pay (BP) as the member of all the
inherited classes with 97% of BP as DA, 10 % of BP as HRA, 12% of BP as PF, 0.1% of BP for
staff club fund. Generate pay slips for the employees with their gross and net salary.
4. Design a Java interface for ADT Stack. Implement this interface using array. Provide
necessary exception handling in both the implementations.
5. Write a program to perform string operations using ArrayList. Write functions for the following
a. Append - add at end
b. Insert – add at particular index
c. Search
d. List all string starts with given letter
47
6. Write a Java Program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains two integers and
an empty method named print Area(). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle and
Circle such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the classes
contains only the method print Area () that prints the area of the given shape.
7. Write a Java program to implement user defined exception handling.
8. Write a Java program that reads a file name from the user, displays information about whether
the file exists, whether the file is readable, or writable, the type of file and the length of the file
in bytes.
9. Write a java program that implements a multi-threaded application that has three threads. First
thread generates a random integer every 1 second and if the value is even, second thread
computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd, the third thread will print the
value of cube of the number.
10. Write a java program to find the maximum value from the given type of elements using a
generic function.
11. Design a calculator using event-driven programming paradigm of Java with the following
options.
a) Decimal manipulations
b) Scientific manipulations
12. Develop a mini project for any application using Java concepts.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Develop and implement Java programs for simple applications that make use of classes,
packages and interfaces.
Develop and implement Java programs with arraylist, exception handling and
multithreading .
Design applications using file processing, generic programming and event handling.
CS8382 DIGITAL SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various basic logic gates
To design and implement the various combinational circuits
To design and implement combinational circuits using MSI devices.
To design and implement sequential circuits
To understand and code with HDL programming
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of Boolean Theorems using basic gates.
2. Design and implementation of combinational circuits using basic gates for arbitrary
functions, code converters.
3. Design and implement Half/Full Adder and Subtractor.
4. Design and implement combinational circuits using MSI devices:
4 – bit binary adder / subtractor
Parity generator / checker
Magnitude Comparator
Application using multiplexers
48
5. Design and implement shift-registers.
6. Design and implement synchronous counters.
7. Design and implement asynchronous counters.
8. Coding combinational circuits using HDL.
9. Coding sequential circuits using HDL.
10. Design and implementation of a simple digital system (Mini Project).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Implement simplified combinational circuits using basic logic gates
Implement combinational circuits using MSI devices
Implement sequential circuits like registers and counters
Simulate combinational and sequential circuits using HDL
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
LABORATORY REQUIREMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS HARDWARE:
1. Digital trainer kits - 30
2. Digital ICs required for the experiments in sufficient numbers
SOFTWARE:
1. HDL simulator.
L T P C
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING&SPEAKING
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage in
specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation -
pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a complete
idea as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over a
wide range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute informal
talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer - accept -
decline - take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
49
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group
discussion - summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to and
participating in conversations - persuade.
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions
in academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL :30PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
Listen and respond appropriately.
Participate in group discussions
Make effective presentations
Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University Press,
Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford:
2010
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014.
3. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
MA8402 PROBABILITY AND QUEUING THEORY L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
To understand the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random
variables and to introduce some standard distributions applicable to engineering which can
describe real life phenomenon.
To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in IT fields.
To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
To understand the significance of advanced queueing models.
To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop
probabilistic models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
50
UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – Axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye‘s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.
UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and linear
regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and
identically distributed random variables).
UNIT III RANDOM PROCESSES 12
Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 12
Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little‘s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms – Queues with impatient customers : Balking
and reneging.
UNIT V ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 12
Finite source models - M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special
cases – Series queues – Open Jackson networks.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have knowledge
of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
Apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
Acquire skills in analyzing queueing models.
Understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time in a
probabilistic manner
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gross, D., Shortle, J.F, Thompson, J.M and Harris. C.M., ―Fundamentals of Queueing Theory",
Wiley Student 4th Edition, 2014.
2. Ibe, O.C., ―Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes", Elsevier, 1st Indian
Reprint, 2007.
REFERENCES :
1. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum‘s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random Variables and
Random Processes", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Yates, R.D. and Goodman. D. J., "Probability and Stochastic Processes", 2nd Edition, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore, 2012.
51
CS8491 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer.
• To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and floating point
arithmetic unit.
• To learn the basics of pipelined execution.
• To understand parallelism and multi-core processors.
• To understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories.
• To learn the different ways of communication with I/O devices.
UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9
Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance – Instructions: Language of
the Computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation – Logical operations –
decision making – MIPS Addressing.
UNIT II ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9
Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Floating Point Representation –
Floating Point Operations – Subword Parallelism
UNIT III PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9
A Basic MIPS implementation – Building a Datapath – Control Implementation Scheme –
Pipelining – Pipelined datapath and control – Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards –
Exceptions.
UNIT IV PARALLELISIM 9
Parallel processing challenges – Flynn‘s classification – SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, and
Vector Architectures - Hardware multithreading – Multi-core processors and other Shared
Memory Multiprocessors - Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters, Warehouse
Scale Computers and other Message-Passing Multiprocessors.
UNIT V MEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9
Memory Hierarchy - memory technologies – cache memory – measuring and improving
cache performance – virtual memory, TLB‘s – Accessing I/O Devices – Interrupts – Direct
Memory Access – Bus structure – Bus operation – Arbitration – Interface circuits - USB.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions.
Design arithmetic and logic unit.
Understand pipelined execution and design control unit.
Understand parallel processing architectures.
Understand the various memory systems and I/O communication.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, Computer
Organization and Embedded Systems, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
52
REFERENCES:
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. John P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture – A Quantitative
Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2012.
CS8492 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
To learn the fundamentals of data models and to represent a database system using ER
diagrams.
To study SQL and relational database design.
To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing
techniques which will help in physical DB design.
To understand the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency
control techniques and recovery procedures.
To have an introductory knowledge about the Storage and Query processing
Techniques
UNIT I RELATIONAL DATABASES 10
Purpose of Database System – Views of data – Data Models – Database System Architecture –
Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – Relational Algebra – SQL
fundamentals – Advanced SQL features – Embedded SQL– Dynamic SQL
UNIT II DATABASE DESIGN 8
Entity-Relationship model – E-R Diagrams – Enhanced-ER Model – ER-to-Relational Mapping –
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – First, Second, Third Normal Forms,
Dependency Preservation – Boyce/Codd Normal Form – Multi-valued Dependencies and Fourth
Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form
UNIT III TRANSACTIONS 9
Transaction Concepts – ACID Properties – Schedules – Serializability – Concurrency Control –
Need for Concurrency – Locking Protocols – Two Phase Locking – Deadlock – Transaction
Recovery - Save Points – Isolation Levels – SQL Facilities for Concurrency and Recovery.
UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES 9
RAID – File Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Indexing and Hashing –Ordered
Indices – B+ tree Index Files – B tree Index Files – Static Hashing – Dynamic Hashing – Query
Processing Overview – Algorithms for SELECT and JOIN operations – Query optimization using
Heuristics and Cost Estimation.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9
Distributed Databases: Architecture, Data Storage, Transaction Processing – Object-based
Databases: Object Database Concepts, Object-Relational features, ODMG Object Model, ODL,
OQL - XML Databases: XML Hierarchical Model, DTD, XML Schema, XQuery – Information
Retrieval: IR Concepts, Retrieval Models, Queries in IR systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
53
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Classify the modern and futuristic database applications based on size and complexity
Map ER model to Relational model to perform database design effectively
Write queries using normalization criteria and optimize queries
Compare and contrast various indexing strategies in different database systems
Appraise how advanced databases differ from traditional databases.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, ―Database System Concepts‖, Sixth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, ―Fundamentals of Database Systems‖, Sixth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. C.J.Date, A.Kannan, S.Swamynathan, ―An Introduction to Database Systems‖, Eighth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systems‖, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill
College Publications, 2015.
3. G.K.Gupta,"Database Management Systems‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
CS8451 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and apply the algorithm analysis techniques.
To critically analyze the efficiency of alternative algorithmic solutions for the same problem
To understand different algorithm design techniques.
To understand the limitations of Algorithmic power.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Notion of an Algorithm – Fundamentals of Algorithmic Problem Solving – Important Problem Types
– Fundamentals of the Analysis of Algorithmic Efficiency –Asymptotic Notations and their
properties. Analysis Framework – Empirical analysis - Mathematical analysis for Recursive and
Non-recursive algorithms - Visualization
UNIT II BRUTE FORCE AND DIVIDE-AND-CONQUER 9
Brute Force – Computing an – String Matching - Closest-Pair and Convex-Hull Problems -
Exhaustive Search - Travelling Salesman Problem - Knapsack Problem - Assignment problem.
Divide and Conquer Methodology – Binary Search – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap Sort -
Multiplication of Large Integers – Closest-Pair and Convex - Hull Problems.
UNIT III DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND GREEDY TECHNIQUE 9
Dynamic programming – Principle of optimality - Coin changing problem, Computing a Binomial
Coefficient – Floyd‘s algorithm – Multi stage graph - Optimal Binary Search Trees – Knapsack
Problem and Memory functions.
Greedy Technique – Container loading problem - Prim‘s algorithm and Kruskal's Algorithm – 0/1
Knapsack problem, Optimal Merge pattern - Huffman Trees.
54
UNIT IV ITERATIVE IMPROVEMENT 9
The Simplex Method - The Maximum-Flow Problem – Maximum Matching in Bipartite Graphs,
Stable marriage Problem.
UNIT V COPING WITH THE LIMITATIONS OF ALGORITHM POWER 9
Lower - Bound Arguments - P, NP NP- Complete and NP Hard Problems. Backtracking – n-Queen
problem - Hamiltonian Circuit Problem – Subset Sum Problem. Branch and Bound – LIFO Search
and FIFO search - Assignment problem – Knapsack Problem – Travelling Salesman Problem -
Approximation Algorithms for NP-Hard Problems – Travelling Salesman problem – Knapsack
problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Design algorithms for various computing problems.
Analyze the time and space complexity of algorithms.
Critically analyze the different algorithm design techniques for a given problem.
Modify existing algorithms to improve efficiency.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, ―Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms‖, Third Edition,
Pearson Education, 2012.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, Computer Algorithms/ C++, Second
Edition, Universities Press, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H.Cormen, Charles E.Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein, ―Introduction
to Algorithms‖, Third Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Data Structures and Algorithms‖,
Pearson Education, Reprint 2006.
3. Harsh Bhasin, ―Algorithms Design and Analysis‖, Oxford university press, 2016.
4. S. Sridhar, ―Design and Analysis of Algorithms‖, Oxford university press, 2014.
5. http://nptel.ac.in/
CS8493 OPERATING SYSTEMS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems.
To understand Processes and Threads
To analyze Scheduling algorithms.
To understand the concept of Deadlocks.
To analyze various memory management schemes.
To understand I/O management and File systems.
To be familiar with the basics of Linux system and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 7
Computer System Overview-Basic Elements, Instruction Execution, Interrupts, Memory Hierarchy,
Cache Memory, Direct Memory Access, Multiprocessor and Multicore Organization. Operating
system overview-objectives and functions, Evolution of Operating System.- Computer System
Organization Operating System Structure and Operations- System Calls, System Programs, OS
Generation and System Boot.
55
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 11
Processes - Process Concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on Processes, Inter-process
Communication; CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria, Scheduling algorithms, Multiple-processor
scheduling, Real time scheduling; Threads- Overview, Multithreading models, Threading issues;
Process Synchronization - The critical-section problem, Synchronization hardware, Mutex locks,
Semaphores, Classic problems of synchronization, Critical regions, Monitors; Deadlock - System
model, Deadlock characterization, Methods for handling deadlocks, Deadlock prevention,
Deadlock avoidance, Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.
UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9
Main Memory – Background, Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Segmentation,
Segmentation with paging, 32 and 64 bit architecture Examples; Virtual Memory – Background,
Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Allocation, Thrashing; Allocating Kernel Memory, OS
Examples.
UNIT IV FILE SYSTEMS AND I/O SYSTEMS 9
Mass Storage system – Overview of Mass Storage Structure, Disk Structure, Disk Scheduling and
Management, swap space management; File-System Interface - File concept, Access methods,
Directory Structure, Directory organization, File system mounting, File Sharing and Protection; File
System Implementation- File System Structure, Directory implementation, Allocation Methods,
Free Space Management, Efficiency and Performance, Recovery; I/O Systems – I/O Hardware,
Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem, Streams, Performance.
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
Linux System - Design Principles, Kernel Modules, Process Management, Scheduling, Memory
Management, Input-Output Management, File System, Inter-process Communication; Mobile OS -
iOS and Android - Architecture and SDK Framework, Media Layer, Services Layer, Core OS
Layer, File System.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Analyze various scheduling algorithms.
Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
Understand the functionality of file systems.
Perform administrative tasks on Linux Servers.
Compare iOS and Android Operating Systems.
TEXT BOOK :
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, ―Operating System Concepts‖,
9th Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, ―Operating Systems – A Spiral Approach‖,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
2. Achyut S.Godbole, Atul Kahate, ―Operating Systems‖, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, ―Modern Operating Systems‖, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Gary Nutt, ―Operating Systems‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Harvey M. Deitel, ―Operating Systems‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
6. Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati, ―Understanding the Linux kernel‖, 3rd edition, O‘Reilly,
2005.
7. Neil Smyth, ―iPhone iOS 4 Development Essentials – Xcode‖, Fourth Edition, Payload media,
2011.
56
CS8494 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the phases in a software project
To understand fundamental concepts of requirements engineering and Analysis Modeling.
To understand the various software design methodologies
To learn various testing and maintenance measures
UNIT I SOFTWARE PROCESS AND AGILE DEVELOPMENT 9
Introduction to Software Engineering, Software Process, Perspective and Specialized Process
Models –Introduction to Agility-Agile process-Extreme programming-XP Process.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION 9
Software Requirements: Functional and Non-Functional, User requirements, System requirements,
Software Requirements Document – Requirement Engineering Process: Feasibility Studies,
Requirements elicitation and analysis, requirements validation, requirements management-
Classical analysis: Structured system Analysis, Petri Nets- Data Dictionary.
UNIT III SOFTWARE DESIGN 9
Design process – Design Concepts-Design Model– Design Heuristic – Architectural Design -
Architectural styles, Architectural Design, Architectural Mapping using Data Flow- User Interface
Design: Interface analysis, Interface Design –Component level Design: Designing Class based
components, traditional Components.
UNIT IV TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9
Software testing fundamentals-Internal and external views of Testing-white box testing - basis
path testing-control structure testing-black box testing- Regression Testing – Unit Testing –
Integration Testing – Validation Testing – System Testing And Debugging –Software
Implementation Techniques: Coding practices-Refactoring-Maintenance and Reengineering-BPR
model-Reengineering process model-Reverse and Forward Engineering.
9
UNIT V PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Software Project Management: Estimation – LOC, FP Based Estimation, Make/Buy Decision
COCOMO I & II Model – Project Scheduling – Scheduling, Earned Value Analysis Planning –
Project Plan, Planning Process, RFP Risk Management – Identification, Projection - Risk
Management-Risk Identification-RMMM Plan-CASE TOOLS
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Identify the key activities in managing a software project.
Compare different process models.
Concepts of requirements engineering and Analysis Modeling.
Apply systematic procedure for software design and deployment.
Compare and contrast the various testing and maintenance.
Manage project schedule, estimate project cost and effort required.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger S. Pressman, ―Software Engineering – A Practitioner‟s Approach‖, Seventh Edition, Mc
Graw-Hill International Edition, 2010.
2. Ian Sommerville, ―Software Engineering‖, 9th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2011.
57
REFERENCES:
1. Rajib Mall, ―Fundamentals of Software Engineering‖, Third Edition, PHI Learning
PrivateLimited, 2009.
2. Pankaj Jalote, ―Software Engineering, A Precise Approach‖, Wiley India, 2010.
3. Kelkar S.A., ―Software Engineering‖, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
4. Stephen R.Schach, ―Software Engineering‖, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited,2007.
5. http://nptel.ac.in/.
CS8481 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
AIM:
The aim of this laboratory is to inculcate the abilities of applying the principles of the database
management systems. This course aims to prepare the students for projects where a proper
implementation of databases will be required.
OBJECTIVES:
To understand data definitions and data manipulation commands
To learn the use of nested and join queries
To understand functions, procedures and procedural extensions of data bases
To be familiar with the use of a front end tool
To understand design and implementation of typical database applications
1. Data Definition Commands, Data Manipulation Commands for inserting, deleting, updating
and retrieving Tables and Transaction Control statements
2. Database Querying – Simple queries, Nested queries, Sub queries and Joins
3. Views, Sequences, Synonyms
4. Database Programming: Implicit and Explicit Cursors
5. Procedures and Functions
6. Triggers
7. Exception Handling
8. Database Design using ER modeling, normalization and Implementation for any application
9. Database Connectivity with Front End Tools
10. Case Study using real life database applications
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Use typical data definitions and manipulation commands.
Design applications to test Nested and Join Queries
Implement simple applications that use Views
Implement applications that require a Front-end Tool
Critically analyze the use of Tables, Views, Functions and Procedures
58
CS8461 OPERATING SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVES
To learn Unix commands and shell programming
To implement various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
To implement Process Creation and Inter Process Communication.
To implement Deadlock Avoidance and Deadlock Detection Algorithms
To implement Page Replacement Algorithms
To implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Basics of UNIX commands
2. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system
fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir
3. Write C programs to simulate UNIX commands like cp, ls, grep, etc.
4. Shell Programming
5. Write C programs to implement the various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
6. Implementation of Semaphores
7. Implementation of Shared memory and IPC
8. Bankers Algorithm for Deadlock Avoidance
9. Implementation of Deadlock Detection Algorithm
10. Write C program to implement Threading & Synchronization Applications
11. Implementation of the following Memory Allocation Methods for fixed partition
a) First Fit b) Worst Fit c) Best Fit
12. Implementation of Paging Technique of Memory Management
13. Implementation of the following Page Replacement Algorithms
a) FIFO b) LRU c) LFU
14. Implementation of the various File Organization Techniques
15. Implementation of the following File Allocation Strategies
a) Sequential b) Indexed c) Linked
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
Implement Deadlock avoidance and Detection Algorithms
Implement Semaphores
Create processes and implement IPC
Analyze the performance of the various Page Replacement Algorithms
Implement File Organization and File Allocation Strategies
L T P C
HS8461 ADVANCED READING AND WRITING
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
• Strengthen the reading skills of students of engineering.
• Enhance their writing skills with specific reference to technical writing.
• Develop students‘ critical thinking skills.
• Provide more opportunities to develop their project and proposal writing skills.
59
UNIT I
Reading - Strategies for effective reading-Use glosses and footnotes to aid reading
comprehension- Read and recognize different text types-Predicting content using photos and title
Writing-Plan before writing- Develop a paragraph: topic sentence, supporting sentences,
concluding sentence –Write a descriptive paragraph
UNIT II
Reading-Read for details-Use of graphic organizers to review and aid comprehension Writing-
State reasons and examples to support ideas in writing- Write a paragraph with reasons and
examples- Write an opinion paragraph
UNIT III
Reading- Understanding pronoun reference and use of connectors in a passage- speed reading
techniques-Writing- Elements of a good essay-Types of essays- descriptive-narrative- issue-
based-argumentative-analytical.
UNIT IV
Reading- Genre and Organization of Ideas- Writing- Email writing- visumes – Job application-
project writing-writing convincing proposals.
UNIT V
Reading- Critical reading and thinking- understanding how the text positions the reader- identify
Writing- Statement of Purpose- letter of recommendation- Vision statement
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
Write different types of essays.
Write winning job applications.
Read and evaluate texts critically.
Display critical thinking in various professional contexts.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gramer F. Margot and Colin S. Ward Reading and Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2011
2. Debra Daise, CharlNorloff, and Paul Carne Reading and Writing (Level 4) Oxford
University Press: Oxford, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Davis, Jason and Rhonda LIss.Effective Academic Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2006
2. E. Suresh Kumar and et al. Enriching Speaking and Writing Skills. Second Edition.
Orient Black swan: Hyderabad, 2012
3. Withrow, Jeans and et al. Inspired to Write. Readings and Tasks to develop writing
skills. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, 2004
4. Goatly, Andrew. Critical Reading and Writing. Routledge: United States of America,
2000
5. Petelin, Roslyn and Marsh Durham. The Professional Writing Guide: Knowing Well
and Knowing Why. Business & Professional Publishing: Australia, 2004
60
MA8551 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
To introduce and apply the concepts of rings, finite fields and polynomials.
To understand the basic concepts in number theory
To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.
UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 12
Groups : Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem. Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n -
Ring homomorphism.
UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 12
Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.
UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 12
Division algorithm – Base - b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers
– GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.
UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 12
Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence‘s – Linear Congruence‘s - Applications: Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation-Chinese remainder theorem – 2 x 2 linear systems.
UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 12
Wilson‘s theorem – Fermat‘s little theorem – Euler‘s theorem – Euler‘s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Apply the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve related
problems.
Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
Demonstrate their mastery by solving non - trivial problems related to the concepts, and by
proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the text.
Apply integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Koshy, T., ―Elementary Number Theory with Applications‖, Elsevier Publications,
New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Lidl, R. and Pitz, G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2006.
2. Niven, I., Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., ―An Introduction to Theory of Numbers‖,
John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, ―Coding Theory – A first Course‖, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
61
CS8591 COMPUTER NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the protocol layering and physical level communication.
• To analyze the performance of a network.
• To understand the various components required to build different networks.
• To learn the functions of network layer and the various routing protocols.
• To familiarize the functions and protocols of the Transport layer.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PHYSICAL LAYER 9
Networks – Network Types – Protocol Layering – TCP/IP Protocol suite – OSI Model –
Physical Layer: Performance – Transmission media – Switching – Circuit-switched
Networks – Packet Switching.
UNIT II DATA-LINK LAYER & MEDIA ACCESS 9
Introduction – Link-Layer Addressing – DLC Services – Data-Link Layer Protocols – HDLC
– PPP - Media Access Control - Wired LANs: Ethernet - Wireless LANs – Introduction –
IEEE 802.11, Bluetooth – Connecting Devices.
UNIT III 9
NETWORK LAYER
Network Layer Services – Packet switching – Performance – IPV4 Addresses – Forwarding
of IP Packets - Network Layer Protocols: IP, ICMP v4 – Unicast Routing Algorithms –
Protocols – Multicasting Basics – IPV6 Addressing – IPV6 Protocol.
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Introduction – Transport Layer Protocols – Services – Port Numbers – User Datagram
Protocol – Transmission Control Protocol – SCTP.
UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9
WWW and HTTP – FTP – Email –Telnet –SSH – DNS – SNMP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand the basic layers and its functions in computer networks.
Evaluate the performance of a network.
Understand the basics of how data flows from one node to another.
Analyze and design routing algorithms.
Design protocols for various functions in the network.
Understand the working of various application layer protocols.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, Fifth Edition TMH,
2013.
REFERENCES
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, Computer Networks: A Systems Approach, Fifth
Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc., 2012.
2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, Tenth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013.
3. Nader F. Mir, Computer and Communication Networks, Second Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2014.
4. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang and Fred Baker, Computer Networks: An Open
Source Approach, McGraw Hill Publisher, 2011.
5. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking, A Top-Down Approach
Featuring the Internet, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
62
EC8691 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
To learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.
To interface microprocessors with supporting chips.
To study the Architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
To design a microcontroller based system
UNIT I THE 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes - Instruction set and
assembler directives – Assembly language programming – Modular Programming - Linking and
Relocation - Stacks - Procedures – Macros – Interrupts and interrupt service routines – Byte and
String Manipulation.
UNIT II 8086 SYSTEM BUS STRUCTURE 9
8086 signals – Basic configurations – System bus timing –System design using 8086 – I/O
programming – Introduction to Multiprogramming – System Bus Structure – Multiprocessor
configurations – Coprocessor, Closely coupled and loosely Coupled configurations – Introduction
to advanced processors.
UNIT III I/O INTERFACING 9
Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface – Serial communication
interface – D/A and A/D Interface - Timer – Keyboard /display controller – Interrupt controller –
DMA controller – Programming and applications Case studies: Traffic Light control, LED display ,
LCD display, Keyboard display interface and Alarm Controller.
UNIT IV MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers(SFRs) - I/O Pins Ports and Circuits - Instruction
set - Addressing modes - Assembly language programming.
UNIT V INTERFACING MICROCONTROLLER 9
Programming 8051 Timers - Serial Port Programming - Interrupts Programming – LCD &
Keyboard Interfacing - ADC, DAC & Sensor Interfacing - External Memory Interface- Stepper
Motor and Waveform generation - Comparison of Microprocessor, Microcontroller, PIC and ARM
processors
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand and execute programs based on 8086 microprocessor.
Design Memory Interfacing circuits.
Design and interface I/O circuits.
Design and implement 8051 microcontroller based systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A.Gibson, ―Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family -
Architecture, Programming and Design‖, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
(UNIT I- III)
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay, ―The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C‖, Second Edition, Pearson education, 2011.
(UNIT IV-V)
63
REFERENCES:
1. Doughlas V.Hall, ―Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and
Hardware‖,TMH,2012
2. A.K.Ray,K.M.Bhurchandi,‖Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals ―3rd edition, Tata
McGrawHill,2012
CS8501 THEORY OF COMPUTATION LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the language hierarchy
To construct automata for any given pattern and find its equivalent regular
expressions
To design a context free grammar for any given language
To understand Turing machines and their capability
To understand undecidable problems and NP class problems
UNIT I AUTOMATA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Introduction to formal proof – Additional forms of Proof – Inductive Proofs –Finite Automata –
Deterministic Finite Automata – Non-deterministic Finite Automata – Finite Automata with Epsilon
Transitions
UNIT II REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND LANGUAGES 9
Regular Expressions – FA and Regular Expressions – Proving Languages not to be regular –
Closure Properties of Regular Languages – Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.
UNIT III CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGES 9
CFG – Parse Trees – Ambiguity in Grammars and Languages – Definition of the Pushdown
Automata – Languages of a Pushdown Automata – Equivalence of Pushdown Automata and CFG,
Deterministic Pushdown Automata.
UNIT IV PROPERTIES OF CONTEXT FREE LANGUAGES 9
Normal Forms for CFG – Pumping Lemma for CFL – Closure Properties of CFL – Turing Machines
– Programming Techniques for TM.
UNIT V UNDECIDABILITY 9
Non Recursive Enumerable (RE) Language – Undecidable Problem with RE – Undecidable
Problems about TM – Post‘s Correspondence Problem, The Class P and NP.
TOTAL :45PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Construct automata, regular expression for any pattern.
Write Context free grammar for any construct.
Design Turing machines for any language.
Propose computation solutions using Turing machines.
Derive whether a problem is decidable or not.
TEXT BOOK:
1. J.E.Hopcroft, R.Motwani and J.D Ullman, ―Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computations‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
64
REFERENCES:
1. H.R.Lewis and C.H.Papadimitriou, ―Elements of the theory of Computation‖, Second Edition,
PHI, 2003.
2. J.Martin, ―Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation‖, Third Edition, TMH, 2003.
3. Micheal Sipser, ―Introduction of the Theory and Computation‖, Thomson Brokecole, 1997.
CS8592 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of object modeling
To understand and differentiate Unified Process from other approaches.
To design with static UML diagrams.
To design with the UML dynamic and implementation diagrams.
To improve the software design with design patterns.
To test the software against its requirements specification
UNIT I UNIFIED PROCESS AND USE CASE DIAGRAMS 9
Introduction to OOAD with OO Basics - Unified Process – UML diagrams – Use Case –Case study
– the Next Gen POS system, Inception -Use case Modelling – Relating Use cases –
include, extend and generalization – When to use Use-cases
UNIT II STATIC UML DIAGRAMS 9
Class Diagram–– Elaboration – Domain Model – Finding conceptual classes and description
classes – Associations – Attributes – Domain model refinement – Finding conceptual class
Hierarchies – Aggregation and Composition - Relationship between sequence diagrams and use
cases – When to use Class Diagrams
UNIT III DYNAMIC AND IMPLEMENTATION UML DIAGRAMS 9
Dynamic Diagrams – UML interaction diagrams - System sequence diagram – Collaboration
diagram – When to use Communication Diagrams - State machine diagram and Modelling –When
to use State Diagrams - Activity diagram – When to use activity diagrams
Implementation Diagrams - UML package diagram - When to use package diagrams -
Component and Deployment Diagrams – When to use Component and Deployment diagrams
UNIT IV DESIGN PATTERNS 9
GRASP: Designing objects with responsibilities – Creator – Information expert – Low Coupling –
High Cohesion – Controller
Design Patterns – creational – factory method – structural – Bridge – Adapter – behavioural –
Strategy – observer –Applying GoF design patterns – Mapping design to code
UNIT V TESTING 9
Object Oriented Methodologies – Software Quality Assurance – Impact of object orientation on
Testing – Develop Test Cases and Test Plans
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
65
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Express software design with UML diagrams
Design software applications using OO concepts.
Identify various scenarios based on software requirements
Transform UML based software design into pattern based design using design patterns
Understand the various testing methodologies for OO software
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Craig Larman, ―Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and
Design and Iterative Development‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Ali Bahrami - Object Oriented Systems Development - McGraw Hill International Edition - 1999
REFERENCES:
1. Erich Gamma, a n d Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, ―Design patterns: Elements
of Reusable Object-Oriented Software‖, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
2. Martin Fowler, ―UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling Language‖,
Third edition, Addison Wesley, 2003.
EC8681 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY LT PC
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To Introduce ALP concepts, features and Coding methods
Write ALP for arithmetic and logical operations in 8086 and 8051
Differentiate Serial and Parallel Interface
Interface different I/Os with Microprocessors
Be familiar with MASM
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
8086 Programs using kits and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
2. Move a data block without overlap
3. Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
4. Floating point operations, string manipulations, sorting and searching
5. Password checking, Print RAM size and system date
6. Counters and Time Delay
Peripherals and Interfacing Experiments
7. Traffic light controller
8. Stepper motor control
9. Digital clock
10. Key board and Display
11. Printer status
12. Serial interface and Parallel interface
13. A/D and D/A interface and Waveform Generation
8051 Experiments using kits and MASM
14. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
15. Square and Cube program, Find 2‘s complement of a number
16. Unpacked BCD to ASCII
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
66
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Write ALP Programmes for fixed and Floating Point and Arithmetic operations
Interface different I/Os with processor
Generate waveforms using Microprocessors
Execute Programs in 8051
Explain the difference between simulator and Emulator
LAB EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
HARDWARE:
8086 development kits - 30 nos
Interfacing Units - Each 10 nos
Microcontroller - 30 nos
SOFTWARE:
Intel Desktop Systems with MASM - 30 nos
8086 Assembler
8051 Cross Assembler
CS8582 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LABORATORY L T PC
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To capture the requirements specification for an intended software system
To draw the UML diagrams for the given specification
To map the design properly to code
To test the software system thoroughly for all scenarios
To improve the design by applying appropriate design patterns.
Draw standard UML diagrams using an UML modeling tool for a given case study and map design
to code and implement a 3 layered architecture. Test the developed code and validate whether the
SRS is satisfied.
1. Identify a software system that needs to be developed.
2. Document the Software Requirements Specification (SRS) for the identified system.
3. Identify use cases and develop the Use Case model.
4. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a Domain Model and also derive a Class
Diagram from that.
5. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them
using
UML Sequence and Collaboration Diagrams
6. Draw relevant State Chart and Activity Diagrams for the same system.
7. Implement the system as per the detailed design
8. Test the software system for all the scenarios identified as per the usecase diagram
9. Improve the reusability and maintainability of the software system by applying appropriate
design patterns.
10. Implement the modified system and test it for various scenarios
SUGGESTED DOMAINS FOR MINI-PROJECT:
1. Passport automation system.
2. Book bank
3. Exam registration
4. Stock maintenance system.
5. Online course reservation system
67
6. Airline/Railway reservation system
7. Software personnel management system
8. Credit card processing
9. e-book management system
10. Recruitment system
11. Foreign trading system
12. Conference management system
13. BPO management system
14. Library management system
15. Student information system
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Perform OO analysis and design for a given problem specification.
Identify and map basic software requirements in UML mapping.
Improve the software quality using design patterns and to explain the rationale behind
applying specific design patterns
Test the compliance of the software with the SRS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Standard PC
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
1. Windows 7 or higher
2. ArgoUML that supports UML 1.4 and higher
3. Selenium, JUnit or Apache JMeter
CS8581 NETWORKS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To learn and use network commands.
To learn socket programming.
To implement and analyze various network protocols.
To learn and use simulation tools.
To use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Learn to use commands like tcpdump, netstat, ifconfig, nslookup and traceroute. Capture
ping and traceroute PDUs using a network protocol analyzer and examine.
2. Write a HTTP web client program to download a web page using TCP sockets.
3. Applications using TCP sockets like:
Echo client and echo server
Chat
File Transfer
4. Simulation of DNS using UDP sockets.
5. Write a code simulating ARP /RARP protocols.
6. Study of Network simulator (NS) and Simulation of Congestion Control Algorithms using
NS.
7. Study of TCP/UDP performance using Simulation tool.
8. Simulation of Distance Vector/ Link State Routing algorithm.
9. Performance evaluation of Routing protocols using Simulation tool.
10. Simulation of error correction code (like CRC).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
68
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Implement various protocols using TCP and UDP.
Compare the performance of different transport layer protocols.
Use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.
Analyze various routing algorithms.
Implement error correction codes.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
LABORATORY REQUIREMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
HARDWARE:
1. Standalone desktops 30 Nos
SOFTWARE:
1. C / C++ / Java / Python / Equivalent Compiler 30
2. Network simulator like NS2/Glomosim/OPNET/ Packet Tracer / Equivalent
CS8651 INTERNET PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand different Internet Technologies.
To learn java-specific web services architecture
UNIT I WEBSITE BASICS, HTML 5, CSS 3, WEB 2.0 9
Web Essentials: Clients, Servers and Communication – The Internet – Basic Internet
protocols – World wide web – HTTP Request Message – HTTP Response Message – Web
Clients – Web Servers – HTML5 – Tables – Lists – Image – HTML5 control elements –
Semantic elements – Drag and Drop – Audio – Video controls - CSS3 – Inline, embedded
and external style sheets – Rule cascading – Inheritance – Backgrounds – Border Images –
Colors – Shadows – Text – Transformations – Transitions – Animations.
UNIT II CLIENT SIDE PROGRAMMING 9
Java Script: An introduction to JavaScript–JavaScript DOM Model-Date and Objects,-
Regular Expressions- Exception Handling-Validation-Built-in objects-Event Handling-
DHTML with JavaScript- JSON introduction – Syntax – Function Files – Http Request –
SQL.
UNIT III SERVER SIDE PROGRAMMING 9
Servlets: Java Servlet Architecture- Servlet Life Cycle- Form GET and POST actions-
Session Handling- Understanding Cookies- Installing and Configuring Apache Tomcat Web
Server- DATABASE CONNECTIVITY: JDBC perspectives, JDBC program example - JSP:
Understanding Java Server Pages-JSP Standard Tag Library (JSTL)-Creating HTML forms
by embedding JSP code.
UNIT IV PHP and XML 9
An introduction to PHP: PHP- Using PHP- Variables- Program control- Built-in functions-
Form Validation- Regular Expressions - File handling – Cookies - Connecting to Database.
XML: Basic XML- Document Type Definition- XML Schema DOM and Presenting XML, XML
Parsers and Validation, XSL and XSLT Transformation, News Feed (RSS and ATOM).
69
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO AJAX and WEB SERVICES 9
AJAX: Ajax Client Server Architecture-XML Http Request Object-Call Back Methods; Web
Services: Introduction- Java web services Basics – Creating, Publishing, Testing and
Describing a Web services (WSDL)-Consuming a web service, Database Driven web
service from an application –SOAP.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Construct a basic website using HTML and Cascading Style Sheets.
Build dynamic web page with validation using Java Script objects and by applying
different event handling mechanisms.
Develop server side programs using Servlets and JSP.
Construct simple web pages in PHP and to represent data in XML format.
Use AJAX and web services to develop interactive web applications
TEXT BOOK:
1. Deitel and Deitel and Nieto, ―Internet and World Wide Web - How to Program‖,
Prentice Hall, 5th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Wynkoop and John Burke ―Running a Perfect Website‖, QUE, 2nd
Edition,1999.
2. Chris Bates, Web Programming – Building Intranet Applications, 3rd Edition, Wiley
Publications, 2009.
3. Jeffrey C and Jackson, ―Web Technologies A Computer Science Perspective‖,
Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Gopalan N.P. and Akilandeswari J., ―Web Technology‖, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
5. UttamK.Roy, ―Web Technologies‖, Oxford University Press, 2011.
CS8691 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
To learn the different search strategies in AI
To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
To understand the different ways of designing software agents
To know about the various applications of AI.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction–Definition - Future of Artificial Intelligence – Characteristics of Intelligent Agents–
Typical Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to Typical AI problems.
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9
Problem solving Methods - Search Strategies- Uninformed - Informed - Heuristics - Local Search
Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial Observations - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems – Constraint Propagation - Backtracking Search - Game Playing - Optimal
Decisions in Games – Alpha - Beta Pruning - Stochastic Games
70
UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9
First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Unification – Forward Chaining-Backward
Chaining – Resolution – Knowledge Representation - Ontological Engineering-Categories and
Objects – Events - Mental Events and Mental Objects - Reasoning Systems for Categories -
Reasoning with Default Information
UNIT IV SOFTWARE AGENTS 9
Architecture for Intelligent Agents – Agent communication – Negotiation and Bargaining –
Argumentation among Agents – Trust and Reputation in Multi-agent systems.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
AI applications – Language Models – Information Retrieval- Information Extraction – Natural
Language Processing - Machine Translation – Speech Recognition – Robot – Hardware –
Perception – Planning – Moving
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
Represent a problem using first order and predicate logic
Provide the apt agent strategy to solve a given problem
Design software agents to solve a problem
Design applications for NLP that use Artificial Intelligence.
TEXT BOOKS:
1 S. Russell and P. Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach‖, Prentice Hall, Third
Edition, 2009.
2 I. Bratko, ―Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. M. Tim Jones, ―Artificial Intelligence: A Systems Approach(Computer Science)‖, Jones
and Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008
2. Nils J. Nilsson, ―The Quest for Artificial Intelligence‖, Cambridge University Press,
2009.
3. William F. Clocksin and Christopher S. Mellish,‖ Programming in Prolog: Using the ISO
Standard‖, Fifth Edition, Springer, 2003.
4. Gerhard Weiss, ―Multi Agent Systems‖, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2013.
5. David L. Poole and Alan K. Mackworth, ―Artificial Intelligence: Foundations of
Computational Agents‖, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
CS8601 MOBILE COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of mobile computing.
To learn the basics of mobile telecommunication system .
To be familiar with the network layer protocols and Ad-Hoc networks.
To know the basis of transport and application layer protocols.
To gain knowledge about different mobile platforms and application development.
71
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Mobile Computing – Applications of Mobile Computing- Generations of
Mobile Communication Technologies- Multiplexing – Spread spectrum -MAC Protocols –
SDMA- TDMA- FDMA- CDMA
UNIT II MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9
Introduction to Cellular Systems - GSM – Services & Architecture – Protocols – Connection
Establishment – Frequency Allocation – Routing – Mobility Management – Security – GPRS-
UMTS – Architecture – Handover - Security
UNIT III MOBILE NETWORK LAYER 9
Mobile IP – DHCP – AdHoc– Proactive protocol-DSDV, Reactive Routing Protocols – DSR,
AODV , Hybrid routing –ZRP, Multicast Routing- ODMRP, Vehicular Ad Hoc networks
( VANET) –MANET Vs VANET – Security.
UNIT IV MOBILE TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYER 9
Mobile TCP– WAP – Architecture – WDP – WTLS – WTP –WSP – WAE – WTA Architecture
– WML
UNIT V MOBILE PLATFORMS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Mobile Device Operating Systems – Special Constraints & Requirements – Commercial
Mobile Operating Systems – Software Development Kit: iOS, Android, BlackBerry, Windows
Phone – MCommerce – Structure – Pros & Cons – Mobile Payment System – Security
Issues
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Explain the basics of mobile telecommunication systems
Illustrate the generations of telecommunication systems in wireless networks
Determine the functionality of MAC, network layer and Identify a routing protocol for a
given Ad hoc network
Explain the functionality of Transport and Application layers
Develop a mobile application using android/blackberry/ios/Windows SDK
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jochen Schiller, ―Mobile Communications‖, PHI, Second Edition, 2003.
2. Prasant Kumar Pattnaik, Rajib Mall, ―Fundamentals of Mobile Computing‖, PHI
Learning Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi – 2012
REFERENCES
1. Dharma Prakash Agarval, Qing and An Zeng, "Introduction to Wireless and Mobile
systems",Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd, 2005.
2. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklons and Thomas Stober, ―Principles of
Mobile Computing‖, Springer, 2003.
3. William.C.Y.Lee,―Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and Digital Systems‖,
Second Edition,TataMcGraw Hill Edition ,2006.
4. C.K.Toh, ―AdHoc Mobile Wireless Networks‖, First Edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
5. Android Developers : http://developer.android.com/index.html
6. Apple Developer : https://developer.apple.com/
7. Windows Phone DevCenter : http://developer.windowsphone.com
8. BlackBerry Developer : http://developer.blackberry.com
72
CS8602 COMPILER DESIGN L T P C
3 0 2 4
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the various phases of compiler.
To learn the various parsing techniques.
To understand intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
To learn to implement front-end of the compiler.
To learn to implement code generator.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS 9
Structure of a compiler – Lexical Analysis – Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input Buffering –
Specification of Tokens – Recognition of Tokens – Lex – Finite Automata – Regular Expressions
to Automata – Minimizing DFA.
UNIT II SYNTAX ANALYSIS 12
Role of Parser – Grammars – Error Handling – Context-free grammars – Writing a grammar –
Top Down Parsing - General Strategies Recursive Descent Parser Predictive Parser-LL(1)
Parser-Shift Reduce Parser-LR Parser-LR (0)Item Construction of SLR Parsing Table -
Introduction to LALR Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer-YACC.
UNIT III INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION 8
Syntax Directed Definitions, Evaluation Orders for Syntax Directed Definitions, Intermediate
Languages: Syntax Tree, Three Address Code, Types and Declarations, Translation of
Expressions, Type Checking.
UNIT IV RUN-TIME ENVIRONMENT AND CODE GENERATION 8
Storage Organization, Stack Allocation Space, Access to Non-local Data on the Stack, Heap
Management - Issues in Code Generation - Design of a simple Code Generator.
UNIT V CODE OPTIMIZATION 8
Principal Sources of Optimization – Peep-hole optimization - DAG- Optimization of Basic Blocks-
Global Data Flow Analysis - Efficient Data Flow Algorithm.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Develop a lexical analyzer to recognize a few patterns in C. (Ex. identifiers, constants,
comments, operators etc.). Create a symbol table, while recognizing identifiers.
2. Implement a Lexical Analyzer using Lex Tool
3. Implement an Arithmetic Calculator using LEX and YACC
4. Generate three address code for a simple program using LEX and YACC.
5. Implement simple code optimization techniques (Constant folding, Strength reduction and
Algebraic transformation)
6. Implement back-end of the compiler for which the three address code is given as input and
the 8086 assembly language code is produced as output.
PRACTICALS 30 PERIODS
THEORY 45 PERIODS
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand the different phases of compiler.
Design a lexical analyzer for a sample language.
Apply different parsing algorithms to develop the parsers for a given grammar.
Understand syntax-directed translation and run-time environment.
Learn to implement code optimization techniques and a simple code generator.
Design and implement a scanner and a parser using LEX and YACC tools.
73
TEXT BOOK:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Compilers: Principles,
Techniques and Tools‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Randy Allen, Ken Kennedy, Optimizing Compilers for Modern Architectures: A
Dependence based Approach, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.
2. Steven S. Muchnick, Advanced Compiler Design and Implementation‖, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers - Elsevier Science, India, Indian Reprint 2003.
3. Keith D Cooper and Linda Torczon, Engineering a Compiler‖, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers Elsevier Science, 2004.
4. V. Raghavan, Principles of Compiler Design‖, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers,
2010.
5. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C‖, Prentice-Hall Software Series, 1993.
CS8603 DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the foundations of distributed systems.
To learn issues related to clock Synchronization and the need for global state in distributed
systems.
To learn distributed mutual exclusion and deadlock detection algorithms.
To understand the significance of agreement, fault tolerance and recovery protocols in
Distributed Systems.
To learn the characteristics of peer-to-peer and distributed shared memory systems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: Definition –Relation to computer system components –Motivation –Relation to
parallel systems – Message-passing systems versus shared memory systems –Primitives for
distributed communication –Synchronous versus asynchronous executions –Design issues and
challenges. A model of distributed computations: A distributed program –A model of distributed
executions –Models of communication networks –Global state – Cuts –Past and future cones of
an event –Models of process communications. Logical Time: A framework for a system of logical
clocks –Scalar time –Vector time – Physical clock synchronization: NTP.
UNIT II MESSAGE ORDERING & SNAPSHOTS 9
Message ordering and group communication: Message ordering paradigms –Asynchronous
execution with synchronous communication –Synchronous program order on an asynchronous
system –Group communication – Causal order (CO) - Total order. Global state and snapshot
recording algorithms: Introduction –System model and definitions –Snapshot algorithms for
FIFO channels
UNIT III DISTRIBUTED MUTEX & DEADLOCK 9
Distributed mutual exclusion algorithms: Introduction – Preliminaries – Lamport‘s algorithm –
Ricart-Agrawala algorithm – Maekawa‘s algorithm – Suzuki–Kasami‘s broadcast algorithm.
Deadlock detection in distributed systems: Introduction – System model – Preliminaries –
Models of deadlocks – Knapp‘s classification – Algorithms for the single resource model, the
AND model and the OR model.
74
UNIT IV RECOVERY & CONSENSUS 9
Checkpointing and rollback recovery: Introduction – Background and definitions – Issues in
failure recovery – Checkpoint-based recovery – Log-based rollback recovery – Coordinated
checkpointing algorithm – Algorithm for asynchronous checkpointing and recovery. Consensus
and agreement algorithms: Problem definition – Overview of results – Agreement in a failure –
free system – Agreement in synchronous systems with failures.
UNIT V P2P & DISTRIBUTED SHARED MEMORY 9
Peer-to-peer computing and overlay graphs: Introduction – Data indexing and overlays – Chord
– Content addressable networks – Tapestry. Distributed shared memory: Abstraction and
advantages – Memory consistency models –Shared memory Mutual Exclusion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
Elucidate the foundations and issues of distributed systems
Understand the various synchronization issues and global state for distributed systems.
Understand the Mutual Exclusion and Deadlock detection algorithms in distributed systems
Describe the agreement protocols and fault tolerance mechanisms in distributed systems.
Describe the features of peer-to-peer and distributed shared memory systems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kshemkalyani, Ajay D., and Mukesh Singhal. Distributed computing: principles, algorithms,
and systems. Cambridge University Press, 2011.
2. George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, ―Distributed Systems Concepts and
Design‖, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Pradeep K Sinha, "Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts and Design", Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.
2. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan G. Shivaratri. Advanced concepts in operating systems.
McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1994.
3. Tanenbaum A.S., Van Steen M., ―Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms‖,
Pearson Education, 2007.
4. Liu M.L., ―Distributed Computing, Principles and Applications‖, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Nancy A Lynch, ―Distributed Algorithms‖, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, USA, 2003.
CS8661 INTERNET PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To be familiar with Web page design using HTML/XML and style sheets
To be exposed to creation of user interfaces using Java frames and applets.
To learn to create dynamic web pages using server side scripting.
To learn to write Client Server applications.
To be familiar with the PHP programming.
To be exposed to creating applications with AJAX
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Create a web page with the following using HTML
a. To embed a map in a web page
b. To fix the hot spots in that map
c. Show all the related information when the hot spots are clicked.
75
2. Create a web page with the following.
a. Cascading style sheets.
b. Embedded style sheets.
c. Inline style sheets. Use our college information for the web pages.
3. Validate the Registration, user login, user profile and payment by credit card pages using
JavaScript.
4. Write programs in Java using Servlets:
i. To invoke servlets from HTML forms
ii. Session tracking using hidden form fields and Session tracking for a hit count
5. Write programs in Java to create three-tier applications using servlets for conducting on-
line examination for displaying student mark list. Assume that student information is
available in a database which has been stored in a database server.
6. Install TOMCAT web server. Convert the static web pages of programs into dynamic web
pages using servlets (or JSP) and cookies. Hint: Users information (user id, password,
credit card number) would be stored in web.xml. Each user should have a separate
Shopping Cart.
7. Redo the previous task using JSP by converting the static web pages into dynamic web
pages. Create a database with user information and books information. The books
catalogue should be dynamically loaded from the database.
8. Create and save an XML document at the server, which contains 10 users Information.
Write a Program, which takes user Id as an input and returns the User details by taking
the user information from the XML document
9. i. Validate the form using PHP regular expression.
ii. PHP stores a form data into database.
10. Write a web service for finding what people think by asking 500 people‘s opinion for any
consumer product.
TOTAL: 60PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Construct Web pages using HTML/XML and style sheets.
Build dynamic web pages with validation using Java Script objects and by applying
different event handling mechanisms.
Develop dynamic web pages using server side scripting.
Use PHP programming to develop web applications.
Construct web applications using AJAX and web services.
SOFTWARE REQUIRED:
Dream Weaver or Equivalent, MySQL or Equivalent, Apache Server, WAMP/XAMPP
CS8662 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the components and structure of mobile application development frameworks
for Android and windows OS based mobiles.
To understand how to work with various mobile application development frameworks.
To learn the basic and important design concepts and issues of development of mobile
applications.
To understand the capabilities and limitations of mobile devices.
76
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop an application that uses GUI components, Font and Colours
2. Develop an application that uses Layout Managers and event listeners.
3. Write an application that draws basic graphical primitives on the screen.
4. Develop an application that makes use of databases.
5. Develop an application that makes use of Notification Manager
6. Implement an application that uses Multi-threading
7. Develop a native application that uses GPS location information
8. Implement an application that writes data to the SD card.
9. Implement an application that creates an alert upon receiving a message
10. Write a mobile application that makes use of RSS feed
11. Develop a mobile application to send an email.
12. Develop a Mobile application for simple needs (Mini Project)
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop mobile applications using GUI and Layouts.
Develop mobile applications using Event Listener.
Develop mobile applications using Databases.
Develop mobile applications using RSS Feed, Internal/External Storage, SMS, Multi-
threading and GPS.
Analyze and discover own mobile app for simple needs.
REFERENCES:
1. Build Your Own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Standalone desktops with Windows or Android or
iOS or Equivalent Mobile Application Development
Tools with appropriate emulators and debuggers - 30 Nos.
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to:
Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employable Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the topic –
answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute
presentations
UNIT III
77
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics
- brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-term
career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2. Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization .
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
78
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career planning
and management
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication
–communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, ―Management‖, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition,
2009.
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert ―Management‖, Pearson Education, 6th
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, ―Fundamentals of Management‖
Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, ― Management‖, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich ―Essentials of management‖ Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, ―Principles of Management‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999
CS8792 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Cryptography Theories, Algorithms and Systems.
To understand necessary Approaches and Techniques to build protection
mechanisms in order to secure computer networks.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Security trends - Legal, Ethical and Professional Aspects of Security, Need for Security at
Multiple levels, Security Policies - Model of network security – Security attacks, services and
mechanisms – OSI security architecture – Classical encryption techniques: substitution
techniques, transposition techniques, steganography- Foundations of modern cryptography:
perfect security – information theory – product cryptosystem – cryptanalysis.
UNIT II SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
MATHEMATICS OF SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Algebraic structures - Modular
arithmetic-Euclid‟s algorithm- Congruence and matrices - Groups, Rings, Fields- Finite
fields- SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block cipher Principles of DES – Strength of
79
DES – Differential and linear cryptanalysis - Block cipher design principles – Block cipher
mode of operation – Evaluation criteria for AES – Advanced Encryption Standard - RC4 –
Key distribution.
UNIT III PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
MATHEMATICS OF ASYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Primes – Primality Testing –
Factorization – Euler‘s totient function, Fermat‘s and Euler‘s Theorem - Chinese Remainder
Theorem – Exponentiation and logarithm - ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA
cryptosystem – Key distribution – Key management – Diffie Hellman key exchange -
ElGamal cryptosystem – Elliptic curve arithmetic-Elliptic curve cryptography.
UNIT IV MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION AND INTEGRITY 9
Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of
hash function and MAC – SHA –Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS- Entity
Authentication: Biometrics, Passwords, Challenge Response protocols- Authentication
applications - Kerberos, X.509
UNIT V SECURITY PRACTICE AND SYSTEM SECURITY 9
Electronic Mail security – PGP, S/MIME – IP security – Web Security - SYSTEM
SECURITY: Intruders – Malicious software – viruses – Firewalls.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats and
vulnerabilities
Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms
Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
Apply the various Authentication schemes to simulate different applications.
Understand various Security practices and System security standards
TEXT BOOK:
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, PHI
3rd Edition, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. C K Shyamala, N Harini and Dr. T R Padmanabhan: Cryptography and Network
Security, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd
2. BehrouzA.Foruzan, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGraw Hill 2007.
3. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, and Mike Speciner, Network Security: PRIVATE
Communication in a PUBLIC World, Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-046019-2
CS8791 CLOUD COMPUTING LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of cloud computing.
To appreciate the evolution of cloud from the existing technologies.
To have knowledge on the various issues in cloud computing.
To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
To appreciate the emergence of cloud as the next generation computing paradigm.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
80
Introduction to Cloud Computing – Definition of Cloud – Evolution of Cloud Computing –
Underlying Principles of Parallel and Distributed Computing – Cloud Characteristics – Elasticity in
Cloud – On-demand Provisioning.
UNIT II CLOUD ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES 10
Service Oriented Architecture – REST and Systems of Systems – Web Services – Publish-
Subscribe Model – Basics of Virtualization – Types of Virtualization – Implementation Levels of
Virtualization – Virtualization Structures – Tools and Mechanisms – Virtualization of CPU –
Memory – I/O Devices –Virtualization Support and Disaster Recovery.
UNIT III CLOUD ARCHITECTURE, SERVICES AND STORAGE 8
Layered Cloud Architecture Design – NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture – Public,
Private and Hybrid Clouds - laaS – PaaS – SaaS – Architectural Design Challenges – Cloud
Storage – Storage-as-a-Service – Advantages of Cloud Storage – Cloud Storage Providers – S3.
UNIT IV RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY IN CLOUD 10
Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource Provisioning and Resource Provisioning Methods
– Global Exchange of Cloud Resources – Security Overview – Cloud Security Challenges –
Software-as-a-Service Security – Security Governance – Virtual Machine Security – IAM –
Security Standards.
UNIT V CLOUD TECHNOLOGIES AND ADVANCEMENTS 8
Hadoop – MapReduce – Virtual Box -- Google App Engine – Programming Environment for
Google App Engine –– Open Stack – Federation in the Cloud – Four Levels of Federation –
Federated Services and Applications – Future of Federation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Articulate the main concepts, key technologies, strengths and limitations of cloud
computing.
Learn the key and enabling technologies that help in the development of cloud.
Develop the ability to understand and use the architecture of compute and storage cloud,
service and delivery models.
Explain the core issues of cloud computing such as resource management and security.
Be able to install and use current cloud technologies.
Evaluate and choose the appropriate technologies, algorithms and approaches for
implementation and use of cloud.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack G. Dongarra, "Distributed and Cloud Computing, From
Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things", Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.
2. Rittinghouse, John W., and James F. Ransome, ―Cloud Computing: Implementation,
Management and Security‖, CRC Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, S. ThamaraiSelvi, ―Mastering Cloud Computing‖, Tata
Mcgraw Hill, 2013.
2. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, "Cloud Computing - A Practical Approach‖, Tata
Mcgraw Hill, 2009.
3. George Reese, "Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the
Cloud: Transactional Systems for EC2 and Beyond (Theory in Practice)‖, O'Reilly, 2009.
CS8711 CLOUD COMPUTING LABORATORY LTPC
81
0 042
OBJECTIVES:
To develop web applications in cloud
To learn the design and development process involved in creating a cloud based
application
To learn to implement and use parallel programming using Hadoop
1. Install Virtualbox/VMware Workstation with different flavours of linux or windows OS on top
of windows7 or 8.
2. Install a C compiler in the virtual machine created using virtual box and execute Simple
Programs
3. Install Google App Engine. Create hello world app and other simple web applications using
python/java.
4. Use GAE launcher to launch the web applications.
5. Simulate a cloud scenario using CloudSim and run a scheduling algorithm that is not
present in CloudSim.
6. Find a procedure to transfer the files from one virtual machine to another virtual machine.
7. Find a procedure to launch virtual machine using trystack (Online Openstack Demo
Version)
8. Install Hadoop single node cluster and run simple applications like wordcount.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Configure various virtualization tools such as Virtual Box, VMware workstation.
Design and deploy a web application in a PaaS environment.
Learn how to simulate a cloud environment to implement new schedulers.
Install and use a generic cloud environment that can be used as a private cloud.
Manipulate large data sets in a parallel environment.
IT8761 SECURITY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To learn different cipher techniques
To implement the algorithms DES, RSA,MD5,SHA-1
To use network security tools and vulnerability assessment tools
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Perform encryption, decryption using the following substitution techniques
(i) Ceaser cipher, (ii) playfair cipher iii) Hill Cipher iv) Vigenere cipher
2. Perform encryption and decryption using following transposition techniques
i) Rail fence ii) row & Column Transformation
3. Apply DES algorithm for practical applications.
4. Apply AES algorithm for practical applications.
5. Implement RSA Algorithm using HTML and JavaScript
6. Implement the Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange algorithm for a given problem.
7. Calculate the message digest of a text using the SHA-1 algorithm.
8. Implement the SIGNATURE SCHEME - Digital Signature Standard.
9. Demonstrate intrusion detection system (ids) using any tool eg. Snort or any other s/w.
10. Automated Attack and Penetration Tools
82
Exploring N-Stalker, a Vulnerability Assessment Tool
11. Defeating Malware
i) Building Trojans ii) Rootkit Hunter
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop code for classical Encryption Techniques to solve the problems.
Build cryptosystems by applying symmetric and public key encryption algorithms.
Construct code for authentication algorithms.
Develop a signature scheme using Digital signature standard.
Demonstrate the network security system using open source tools
REFERENCES:
1. Build Your Own Security Lab, Michael Gregg, Wiley India
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS: SOFTWARE: C / C++ / Java or
equivalent compiler GnuPG, Snort, N-Stalker or Equivalent HARDWARE: Standalone desktops -
30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.
CS8075 DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand data warehouse concepts, architecture, business analysis and tools
To understand data pre-processing and data visualization techniques
To study algorithms for finding hidden and interesting patterns in data
To understand and apply various classification and clustering techniques using tools.
UNIT I DATA WAREHOUSING, BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND ON-LINE ANALYTICAL
PROCESSING (OLAP) 9
Basic Concepts - Data Warehousing Components – Building a Data Warehouse – Database
Architectures for Parallel Processing – Parallel DBMS Vendors - Multidimensional Data Model –
Data Warehouse Schemas for Decision Support, Concept Hierarchies -Characteristics of OLAP
Systems – Typical OLAP Operations, OLAP and OLTP.
UNIT II DATA MINING – INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Data Mining Systems – Knowledge Discovery Process – Data Mining Techniques
– Issues – applications- Data Objects and attribute types, Statistical description of data, Data
Preprocessing – Cleaning, Integration, Reduction, Transformation and discretization, Data
Visualization, Data similarity and dissimilarity measures.
UNIT III DATA MINING - FREQUENT PATTERN ANALYSIS 9
Mining Frequent Patterns, Associations and Correlations – Mining Methods- Pattern Evaluation
Method – Pattern Mining in Multilevel, Multi Dimensional Space – Constraint Based Frequent
Pattern Mining, Classification using Frequent Patterns
83
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING 9
Decision Tree Induction - Bayesian Classification – Rule Based Classification – Classification by
Back Propagation – Support Vector Machines –– Lazy Learners – Model Evaluation and
Selection-Techniques to improve Classification Accuracy.
Clustering Techniques – Cluster analysis-Partitioning Methods - Hierarchical Methods – Density
Based Methods - Grid Based Methods – Evaluation of clustering – Clustering high dimensional
data- Clustering with constraints, Outlier analysis-outlier detection methods.
UNIT V WEKA TOOL 9
Datasets – Introduction, Iris plants database, Breast cancer database, Auto imports database -
Introduction to WEKA, The Explorer – Getting started, Exploring the explorer, Learning algorithms,
Clustering algorithms, Association–rule learners.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Design a Data warehouse system and perform business analysis with OLAP tools.
Apply suitable pre-processing and visualization techniques for data analysis
Apply frequent pattern and association rule mining techniques for data analysis
Apply appropriate classification and clustering techniques for data analysis
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, ―Data Mining Concepts and Techniques‖, Third Edition,
Elsevier, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Alex Berson and Stephen J.Smith, ―Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP‖, Tata
McGraw – Hill Edition, 35th Reprint 2016.
2. K.P. Soman, Shyam Diwakar and V. Ajay, ―Insight into Data Mining Theory and Practice‖,
Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
3. Ian H.Witten and Eibe Frank, ―Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and
Techniques‖, Elsevier, Second Edition.
IT8076 SOFTWARE TESTING LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the criteria for test cases.
To learn the design of test cases.
To understand test management and test automation techniques.
To apply test metrics and measurements.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Testing as an Engineering Activity – Testing as a Process – Testing Maturity Model- Testing
axioms – Basic definitions – Software Testing Principles – The Tester‘s Role in a Software
Development Organization – Origins of Defects – Cost of defects – Defect Classes – The Defect
Repository and Test Design –Defect Examples- Developer/Tester Support of Developing a Defect
Repository.
84
UNIT II TEST CASE DESIGN STRATEGIES 9
Test case Design Strategies – Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design – Boundary Value
Analysis – Equivalence Class Partitioning – State based testing – Cause-effect graphing –
Compatibility testing – user documentation testing – domain testing - Random Testing –
Requirements based testing – Using White Box Approach to Test design – Test Adequacy Criteria
– static testing vs. structural testing – code functional testing – Coverage and Control Flow Graphs
– Covering Code Logic – Paths – code complexity testing – Additional White box testing
approaches- Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria.
UNIT III LEVELS OF TESTING 9
The need for Levels of Testing – Unit Test – Unit Test Planning – Designing the Unit Tests – The
Test Harness – Running the Unit tests and Recording results – Integration tests – Designing
Integration Tests – Integration Test Planning – Scenario testing – Defect bash elimination System
Testing – Acceptance testing – Performance testing – Regression Testing – Internationalization
testing – Ad-hoc testing – Alpha, Beta Tests – Testing OO systems – Usability and Accessibility
testing – Configuration testing –Compatibility testing – Testing the documentation –
Website testing.
UNIT IV TEST MANAGEMENT 9
People and organizational issues in testing – Organization structures for testing teams –
testing services – Test Planning – Test Plan Components – Test Plan Attachments – Locating
Test Items – test management – test process – Reporting Test Results – Introducing the test
specialist – Skills needed by a test specialist – Building a Testing Group- The Structure of Testing
Group- .The Technical Training Program.
UNIT V TEST AUTOMATION 9
Software test automation – skills needed for automation – scope of automation – design and
architecture for automation – requirements for a test tool – challenges in automation – Test
metrics and measurements – project, progress and productivity metrics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Design test cases suitable for a software development for different domains.
Identify suitable tests to be carried out.
Prepare test planning based on the document.
Document test plans and test cases designed.
Use automatic testing tools.
Develop and validate a test plan.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, ―Software Testing – Principles and Practices‖,
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Ron Patton, ―Software Testing‖, Second Edition, Sams Publishing, Pearson Education, 2007.
AU Library.com
REFERENCES:
1. Ilene Burnstein, ―Practical Software Testing‖, Springer International Edition, 2003.
2. Edward Kit,‖ Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process‖, Pearson
Education, 1995.
3. Boris Beizer,‖ Software Testing Techniques‖ – 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New
York, 1990.
4. Aditya P. Mathur, ―Foundations of Software Testing _ Fundamental Algorithms
and Techniques‖, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education, 2008.
85
IT8072 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the architecture and programming of ARM processor.
To become familiar with the embedded computing platform design and analysis.
To get thorough knowledge in interfacing concepts
To design an embedded system and to develop programs
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM PROCESSORS 9
Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example:
Model train controller- Instruction sets preliminaries - ARM Processor – CPU: programming input
and output- supervisor mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system
mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power consumption.
UNIT II EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM DESIGN 9
The CPU Bus-Memory devices and systems–Designing with computing platforms – consumer
electronics architecture – platform-level performance analysis - Components for embedded
programs- Models of programs- Assembly, linking and loading – compilation techniques- Program
level performance analysis – Software performance optimization – Program level energy and
power analysis and optimization – Analysis and optimization of program size- Program validation
and testing.
UNIT III SENSOR INTERFACING WITH ARDUINO 9
Basics of hardware design and functions of basic passive components-sensors and actuators-
Arduino code - library file for sensor interfacing-construction of basic applications
UNIT IV EMBEDDED FIRMWARE 9
Reset Circuit, Brown-out Protection Circuit-Oscillator Unit - Real Time Clock-Watchdog Timer -
Embedded Firmware Design Approaches and Development Languages.
UNIT V EMBEDDED C PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction-Creating ‗hardware delays‘ using Timer 0 and Timer 1-Reading switches-Adding
Structure to the code-Generating a minimum and maximum delay-Example: Creating a portable
hardware delay- Timeout mechanisms-Creating loop timeouts-Testing loop timeouts- hardware
timeouts-Testing a hardware timeout
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor.
Explain the concepts of embedded systems
Understand the Concepts of peripherals and interfacing of sensors.
Capable of using the system design techniques to develop firmware
Illustrate the code for constructing a system
TEXT BOOKS:
1.Marilyn Wolf, ―Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System
Design‖, Third Edition ―Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012. (unit I & II)
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/interface-with-arduino#syllabus (Unit III)
3 .Michael J. Pont, ―Embedded C‖, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.(Unit IV & V)
86
REFERENCES:
1.Shibu K.V, ―Introduction to Embedded Systems‖, McGraw Hill.2014
2.Jonathan W.Valvano, ―Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing‖, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012
3 Raj Kamal, ―Embedded Systems-Architecture,programming and design‖, 3 edition,TMH.2015
4. Lyla, ―Embedded Systems‖, Pearson , 2013
6. David E. Simon, ―An Embedded Software Primer‖, Pearson Education,2000.
CS8072 AGILE METHODOLOGIES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students with a theoretical as well as practical understanding of agile software
development practices and how small teams can apply them to create high-quality software.
To provide a good understanding of software design and a set of software technologies and
APIs.
To do a detailed examination and demonstration of Agile development and testing techniques.
To understand the benefits and pitfalls of working in an Agile team.
To understand Agile development and testing.
UNIT I AGILE METHODOLOGY 9
Theories for Agile Management – Agile Software Development – Traditional Model vs. Agile Model
- Classification of Agile Methods – Agile Manifesto and Principles – Agile Project Management –
Agile Team Interactions – Ethics in Agile Teams - Agility in Design, Testing – Agile
Documentations – Agile Drivers, Capabilities and Values
UNIT II AGILE PROCESSES 9
Lean Production - SCRUM, Crystal, Feature Driven Development- Adaptive Software
Development - Extreme Programming: Method Overview – Lifecycle – Work Products, Roles and
Practices.
UNIT III AGILITY AND KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT 9
Agile Information Systems – Agile Decision Making - Earl‗S Schools of KM – Institutional
Knowledge Evolution Cycle – Development, Acquisition, Refinement, Distribution, Deployment ,
Leveraging – KM in Software Engineering – Managing Software Knowledge – Challenges of
Migrating to Agile Methodologies – Agile Knowledge Sharing – Role of Story-Cards – Story-Card
Maturity Model (SMM).
UNIT IV AGILITY AND REQUIREMENTS ENGINEERING 9
Impact of Agile Processes in RE–Current Agile Practices – Variance – Overview of RE Using Agile
– Managing Unstable Requirements – Requirements Elicitation – Agile Requirements Abstraction
Model – Requirements Management in Agile Environment, Agile Requirements Prioritization –
Agile Requirements Modeling and Generation – Concurrency in Agile Requirements Generation.
UNIT V AGILITY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 9
Agile Product Development – Agile Metrics – Feature Driven Development (FDD) – Financial and
Production Metrics in FDD – Agile Approach to Quality Assurance - Test Driven Development –
Agile Approach in Global Software Development.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
87
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Realize the importance of interacting with business stakeholders in determining the
requirements for a software system
Perform iterative software development processes: how to plan them, how to execute
them.
Point out the impact of social aspects on software development success.
Develop techniques and tools for improving team collaboration and software quality.
Perform Software process improvement as an ongoing task for development teams.
Show how agile approaches can be scaled up to the enterprise level.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David J. Anderson and Eli Schragenheim, ―Agile Management for Software Engineering:
Applying the Theory of Constraints for Business Results‖, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Hazza and Dubinsky, ―Agile Software Engineering, Series: Undergraduate Topics in
Computer Science‖, Springer, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Craig Larman, ―Agile and Iterative Development: A Manager‗s Guide‖, Addison-Wesley,
2004.
2. Kevin C. Desouza, ―Agile Information Systems: Conceptualization, Construction, and
Management‖, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007.
CS8077 GRAPH THEORY AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand fundamentals of graph theory.
To study proof techniques related to various concepts in graphs.
To explore modern applications of graph theory.
UNIT I 9
Introduction - Graph Terminologies - Types of Graphs - Sub Graph- Multi Graph - Regular
Graph - Isomorphism - Isomorphic Graphs - Sub-graph - Euler graph - Hamiltonian Graph -
Related Theorems.
UNIT II 9
Trees -Properties- Distance and Centres - Types - Rooted Tree-- Tree Enumeration-
Labeled Tree - Unlabeled Tree - Spanning Tree - Fundamental Circuits- Cut Sets -
Properties - Fundamental Circuit and Cut-set- Connectivity- Separability -Related
Theorems.
UNIT III 9
Network Flows - Planar Graph - Representation - Detection - Dual Graph - Geometric and
Combinatorial Dual - Related Theorems - Digraph - Properties - Euler Digraph.
UNIT IV 9
Matrix Representation - Adjacency matrix- Incidence matrix- Circuit matrix - Cut-set matrix -
Path Matrix- Properties - Related Theorems - Correlations. Graph Coloring - Chromatic
Polynomial - Chromatic Partitioning - Matching - Covering - Related Theorems.
88
UNIT V 9
Graph Algorithms- Connectedness and Components- Spanning Tree- Fundamental
Circuits- Cut Vertices- Directed Circuits- Shortest Path - Applications overview.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
Understand the basic concepts of graphs, and different types of graphs
Understand the properties, theorems and be able to prove theorems.
Apply suitable graph model and algorithm for solving applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Narsingh Deo, "Graph Theory with Application to Engineering and Computer
Science", Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.Ltd, 2003.
2. L.R.Foulds , "Graph Theory Applications", Springer ,2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Bondy, J. A. and Murty, U.S.R., "Graph Theory with Applications", North Holland
Publication,2008.
2. West, D. B., ―Introduction to Graph Theory‖, Pearson Education, 2011.
3. John Clark, Derek Allan Holton, ―A First Look at Graph Theory‖, World Scientific
Publishing Company, 1991.
4. Diestel, R, "Graph Theory", Springer,3rd Edition,2006.
5. Kenneth H.Rosen, "Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications", Mc Graw Hill ,
2007.
L T P C
IT8071 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of discrete time signals, systems and their classifications.
To analyze the discrete time signals in both time and frequency domain.
To design lowpass digital IIR filters according to predefined specifications based on analog
filter theory and analog-to-digital filter transformation.
To design Linear phase digital FIR filters using fourier method, window technique
To realize the concept and usage of DSP in various engineering fields.
UNIT I DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to DSP – Basic elements of DSP– Sampling of Continuous time signals–Representation,
Operation and Classification of Discrete Time Signal–Classification of Discrete Time Systems–
Discrete Convolution: Linear and Circular–Correlation.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF LTI DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Analysis of LTI Discrete Time Systems using DFT–Properties of DFT–Inverse DFT– Analysis of LTI
Discrete Time Systems using FFT Algorithms– Inverse DFT using FFT Algorithm.
UNIT III INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9
Frequency response of Analog and Digital IIR filters–Realization of IIR filter–Design of analog low
pass filter–Analog to Digital filter Transformation using Bilinear Transformation and Impulse Invariant
method–Design of digital IIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF, and BRF) using various transformation
techniques.
89
UNIT IV FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9
Linear Phase FIR filter–Phase delay–Group delay–Realization of FIR filter–Design of Causal and
Non-causal FIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF and BRF) using Window method (Rectangular, Hamming
window, Hanning window) –Frequency Sampling Technique.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF DSP 9
Multirate Signal Processing: Decimation, Interpolation, Spectrum of the sampled signal –Processing
of Audio and Radar signal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Perform mathematical operations on signals.
Understand the sampling theorem and perform sampling on continuous-time signals to get
discrete time signal by applying advanced knowledge of the sampling theory.
Transform the time domain signal into frequency domain signal and vice-versa.
Apply the relevant theoretical knowledge to design the digital IIR/FIR filters for the given
analog specifications.
TEXT BOOK:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, ―Digital Signal Processing – Principles, Algorithms &
Applications‖, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Richard G. Lyons, ―Understanding Digital Signal Processing‖. Second Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. A.V.Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, ―Discrete-Time Signal Processing‖, 8th Indian
Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
3. Emmanuel C.Ifeachor, & Barrie.W.Jervis, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Second Edition,
Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
4. William D. Stanley, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Second Edition, Reston Publications.
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from
WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological
Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act
of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
90
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition
and IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S. V. Satakar, ―Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002
REFERENCES:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, ―Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets‖, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,‖Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy‖,
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
CS8091 BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the fundamental concepts of big data and analytics.
To explore tools and practices for working with big data
To learn about stream computing.
To know about the research that requires the integration of large amounts of data.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA 9
Evolution of Big data - Best Practices for Big data Analytics - Big data characteristics - Validating
- The Promotion of the Value of Big Data - Big Data Use Cases- Characteristics of Big Data
Applications - Perception and Quantification of Value -Understanding Big Data Storage - A
General Overview of High-Performance Architecture - HDFS - MapReduce and YARN - Map
Reduce Programming Model
UNIT II CLUSTERING AND CLASSIFICATION 9
Advanced Analytical Theory and Methods: Overview of Clustering - K-means - Use Cases -
Overview of the Method - Determining the Number of Clusters - Diagnostics - Reasons to
Choose and Cautions .- Classification: Decision Trees - Overview of a Decision Tree - The
General Algorithm - Decision Tree Algorithms - Evaluating a Decision Tree - Decision Trees in
R - Naïve Bayes - Bayes‘ Theorem - Naïve Bayes Classifier.
91
UNIT III ASSOCIATION AND RECOMMENDATION SYSTEM 9
Advanced Analytical Theory and Methods: Association Rules - Overview - Apriori Algorithm -
Evaluation of Candidate Rules - Applications of Association Rules - Finding Association& finding
similarity - Recommendation System: Collaborative Recommendation- Content Based
Recommendation - Knowledge Based Recommendation- Hybrid Recommendation Approaches.
UNIT IV STREAM MEMORY 9
Introduction to Streams Concepts – Stream Data Model and Architecture - Stream Computing,
Sampling Data in a Stream – Filtering Streams – Counting Distinct Elements in a Stream –
Estimating moments – Counting oneness in a Window – Decaying Window – Real time Analytics
Platform(RTAP) applications - Case Studies - Real Time Sentiment Analysis, Stock Market
Predictions. Using Graph Analytics for Big Data: Graph Analytics
UNIT V NOSQL DATA MANAGEMENT FOR BIG DATA AND VISUALIZATION 9
NoSQL Databases : Schema-less Models‖: Increasing Flexibility for Data Manipulation-Key Value
Stores- Document Stores - Tabular Stores - Object Data Stores - Graph Databases Hive -
Sharding –- Hbase – Analyzing big data with twitter - Big data for E-Commerce Big data for blogs
- Review of Basic Data Analytic Methods using R.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Work with big data tools and its analysis techniques
Analyze data by utilizing clustering and classification algorithms
Learn and apply different mining algorithms and recommendation systems for large
volumes of data
Perform analytics on data streams
Learn NoSQL databases and management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, "Mining of Massive Datasets", Cambridge
University Press, 2012.
2. David Loshin, "Big Data Analytics: From Strategic Planning to Enterprise Integration with
Tools, Techniques, NoSQL, and Graph", Morgan Kaufmann/El sevier Publishers, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. EMC Education Services, "Data Science and Big Data Analytics: Discovering, Analyzing,
Visualizing and Presenting Data", Wiley publishers, 2015.
2. Bart Baesens, "Analytics in a Big Data World: The Essential Guide to Data Science and its
Applications", Wiley Publishers, 2015.
3. Dietmar Jannach and Markus Zanker, "Recommender Systems: An Introduction",
Cambridge University Press, 2010.
4. Kim H. Pries and Robert Dunnigan, "Big Data Analytics: A Practical Guide for Managers "
CRC Press, 2015.
5. Jimmy Lin and Chris Dyer, "Data-Intensive Text Processing with MapReduce", Synthesis
Lectures on Human Language Technologies, Vol. 3, No. 1, Pages 1-177, Morgan Claypool
publishers, 2010.
92
CS8082 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need for machine learning for various problem solving
To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised learning algorithms in
machine learning
To understand the latest trends in machine learning
To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem solving
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning – Version Spaces and
Candidate Eliminations – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm –
Heuristic Space Search.
UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer Networks and Back
Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic Algorithms – Hypothesis Space Search –
Genetic Programming – Models of Evaluation and Learning.
UNIT III BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9
Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum Description Length
Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm – Naïve Bayes Classifier – Bayesian
Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability Learning – Sample Complexity – Finite and Infinite
Hypothesis Spaces – Mistake Bound Model.
UNIT IV INSTANT BASED LEARNING 9
K- Nearest Neighbour Learning – Locally weighted Regression – Radial Basis
Functions – Case Based Learning.
UNIT V ADVANCED LEARNING 9
Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set – First Order
Rules – Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction – Inverting Resolution –
Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories – Explanation Base Learning – FOCL
Algorithm – Reinforcement Learning – Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference Learning
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised machine learning
approaches
Discuss the decision tree algorithm and indentity and overcome the problem of
overfitting
Discuss and apply the back propagation algorithm and genetic algorithms to various
problems
Apply the Bayesian concepts to machine learning
Analyse and suggest appropriate machine learning approaches for various types of
problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, ―Machine Learning‖, McGraw-Hill E d u c a t i o n ( I n d i a ) P r i va t e
Limited, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning)‖, The MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, ―Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective‖, CRC Press, 2009.
93
CS8092 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop an understanding and awareness how issues such as content, information
architecture, motion, sound, design, and technology merge to form effective and
compelling interactive experiences for a wide range of audiences and end users.
To become familiar with various software programs used in the creation and
implementation of multi- media
To appreciate the importance of technical ability and creativity within design practice.
To gain knowledge about graphics hardware devices and software used.
To understand the two-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
To understand the three-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
To appreciate illumination and color models
To become familiar with understand clipping techniques
To become familiar with Blender Graphics
UNIT I ILLUMINATION AND COLOR MODELS 9
Light sources - basic illumination models – halftone patterns and dithering techniques; Properties
of light - Standard primaries and chromaticity diagram; Intuitive colour concepts - RGB colour
model - YIQ colour model - CMY colour model - HSV colour model - HLS colour model; Colour
selection. Output primitives – points and lines, line drawing algorithms, loading the frame buffer,
line function; circle and ellipse generating algorithms; Pixel addressing and object geometry, filled
area primitives.
UNIT II TWO-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9
Two dimensional geometric transformations – Matrix representations and homogeneous
coordinates, composite transformations; Two dimensional viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing
coordinate reference frame; window-to-viewport coordinate transformation, Two dimensional
viewing functions; clipping operations – point, line, and polygon clipping algorithms.
UNIT III THREE-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9
Three dimensional concepts; Three dimensional object representations – Polygon surfaces-
Polygon tables- Plane equations - Polygon meshes; Curved Lines and surfaces, Quadratic
surfaces; Blobby objects; Spline representations – Bezier curves and surfaces -B-Spline curves
and surfaces. TRANSFORMATION AND VIEWING: Three dimensional geometric and modeling
transformations – Translation, Rotation, Scaling, composite transformations; Three dimensional
viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing coordinates, Projections, Clipping; Visible surface detection
methods.
UNIT IV MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM DESIGN & MULTIMEDIA FILE HANDLING 9
Multimedia basics − Multimedia applications − Multimedia system architecture − Evolving
technologies for multimedia − Defining objects for multimedia systems − Multimedia data interface
standards − Multimedia databases. Compression and decompression − Data and file format
standards − Multimedia I/O technologies − Digital voice and audio − Video image and animation −
Full motion video − Storage and retrieval technologies.
UNIT V HYPERMEDIA 9
Multimedia authoring and user interface - Hypermedia messaging -Mobile messaging −
Hypermedia message component − Creating hypermedia message − Integrated multimedia
message standards − Integrated document management − Distributed multimedia systems.CASE
STUDY: BLENDER GRAPHICS Blender Fundamentals – Drawing Basic Shapes – Modelling –
Shading & Textures
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
94
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Design two dimensional graphics.
Apply two dimensional transformations.
Design three dimensional graphics.
Apply three dimensional transformations.
Apply Illumination and color models.
Apply clipping techniques to graphics.
Understood Different types of Multimedia File Format
Design Basic 3d Scenes using Blender
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker M, ―Computer Graphics", Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2007 [
UNIT I – III ]
2. Andleigh, P. K and Kiran Thakrar, ―Multimedia Systems and Design‖, PHI, 2003. [ UNIT
IV,V ]
REFERENCES:
1. Judith Jeffcoate, ―Multimedia in practice: Technology and Applications‖, PHI, 1998.
2. Foley, Vandam, Feiner and Hughes, ―Computer Graphics: Principles and
Practice‖, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Jeffrey McConnell, ―Computer Graphics: Theory into Practice‖, Jones and Bartlett
Publishers,2006.
4. Hill F S Jr., "Computer Graphics", Maxwell Macmillan , 1990.
5. Peter Shirley, Michael Ashikhmin, Michael Gleicher, Stephen R Marschner, Erik Reinhard,
KelvinSung, and AK Peters, ―Fundamentals of Computer Graphics‖, CRC Press, 2010.
6. William M. Newman and Robert F.Sproull, ―Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics‖,
Mc Graw Hill 1978.
https://www.blender.org/support/tutorials/
IT8075 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation techniques.
To plan and manage projects at each stage of the software development life cycle (SDLC).
To learn about the activity planning and risk management principles.
To manage software projects and control software deliverables.
To develop skills to manage the various phases involved in project management and people
management.
To deliver successful software projects that support organization‘s strategic goals.
UNIT I PROJECT EVALUATION AND PROJECT PLANNING 9
Importance of Software Project Management – Activities - Methodologies – Categorization of
Software Projects – Setting objectives – Management Principles – Management Control – Project
portfolio Management – Cost-benefit evaluation technology – Risk evaluation – Strategic program
Management – Stepwise Project Planning.
95
UNIT II PROJECT LIFE CYCLE AND EFFORT ESTIMATION 9
Software process and Process Models – Choice of Process models - Rapid Application development
– Agile methods – Dynamic System Development Method – Extreme Programming– Managing
interactive processes – Basics of Software estimation – Effort and Cost estimation techniques –
COSMIC Full function points - COCOMO II - a Parametric Productivity Model.
UNIT III ACTIVITY PLANNING AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9
Objectives of Activity planning – Project schedules – Activities – Sequencing and scheduling –
Network Planning models – Formulating Network Model – Forward Pass & Backward Pass
techniques – Critical path (CRM) method – Risk identification – Assessment – Risk Planning –Risk
Management – – PERT technique – Monte Carlo simulation – Resource Allocation – Creation of
critical paths – Cost schedules.
UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL 9
Framework for Management and control – Collection of data – Visualizing progress – Cost monitoring
– Earned Value Analysis – Prioritizing Monitoring – Project tracking – Change control – Software
Configuration Management – Managing contracts – Contract Management.
UNIT V STAFFING IN SOFTWARE PROJECTS 9
Managing people – Organizational behavior – Best methods of staff selection – Motivation – The
Oldham – Hackman job characteristic model – Stress – Health and Safety – Ethical and Professional
concerns – Working in teams – Decision making – Organizational structures – Dispersed and Virtual
teams – Communications genres – Communication plans – Leadership.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand Project Management principles while developing software.
Gain extensive knowledge about the basic project management concepts, framework and the
process models.
Obtain adequate knowledge about software process models and software effort estimation
techniques.
Estimate the risks involved in various project activities.
Define the checkpoints, project reporting structure, project progress and tracking mechanisms
using project management principles.
Learn staff selection process and the issues related to people management
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell and Rajib Mall: Software Project Management – Fifth Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert K. Wysocki ―Effective Software Project Management‖ – Wiley Publication, 2011.
2. Walker Royce: ―Software Project Management‖- Addison-Wesley, 1998.
3. Gopalaswamy Ramesh, ―Managing Global Software Projects‖ – McGraw Hill Education
(India), Fourteenth Reprint 2013.
96
CS8081 INTERNET OF THINGS LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Smart Objects and IoT Architectures
To learn about various IOT-related protocols
To build simple IoT Systems using Arduino and Raspberry Pi.
To understand data analytics and cloud in the context of IoT
To develop IoT infrastructure for popular applications
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IoT 9
Evolution of Internet of Things - Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack -– Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT – Functional blocks of an IoT ecosystem – Sensors,
Actuators, Smart Objects and Connecting Smart Objects
UNIT II IoT PROTOCOLS 9
IoT Access Technologies: Physical and MAC layers, topology and Security of IEEE 802.15.4,
802.15.4g, 802.15.4e, 1901.2a, 802.11ah and LoRaWAN – Network Layer: IP versions,
Constrained Nodes and Constrained Networks – Optimizing IP for IoT: From 6LoWPAN to 6Lo,
Routing over Low Power and Lossy Networks – Application Transport Methods: Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition – Application Layer Protocols: CoAP and MQTT
UNIT III DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Design Methodology - Embedded computing logic - Microcontroller, System on Chips - IoT system
building blocks - Arduino - Board details, IDE programming - Raspberry Pi - Interfaces and
Raspberry Pi with Python Programming.
UNIT IV DATA ANALYTICS AND SUPPORTING SERVICES 9
Structured Vs Unstructured Data and Data in Motion Vs Data in Rest – Role of Machine Learning
– No SQL Databases – Hadoop Ecosystem – Apache Kafka, Apache Spark – Edge Streaming
Analytics and Network Analytics – Xively Cloud for IoT, Python Web Application Framework –
Django – AWS for IoT – System Management with NETCONF-YANG
UNIT V CASE STUDIES/INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9
Cisco IoT system - IBM Watson IoT platform – Manufacturing - Converged Plantwide Ethernet
Model (CPwE) – Power Utility Industry – GridBlocks Reference Model - Smart and Connected
Cities: Layered architecture, Smart Lighting, Smart Parking Architecture and Smart Traffic Control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Explain the concept of IoT.
Analyze various protocols for IoT.
Design a PoC of an IoT system using Rasperry Pi/Arduino
Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario
TEXTBOOK:
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome Henry, ―IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of Things,
Cisco Press, 2017
97
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, ―Internet of Things – A hands-on approach‖, Universities
Press, 2015
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , ―The Internet of Things – Key applications
and Protocols‖, Wiley, 2012 (for Unit 2).
3. Jan Ho¨ ller, Vlasios Tsiatsis , Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis , Karnouskos, Stefan Avesand.
David Boyle, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things - Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence", Elsevier, 2014.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), ―Architecting the Internet of
Things‖, Springer, 2011.
5. Michael Margolis, Arduino Cookbook, Recipes to Begin, Expand, and Enhance Your Projects,
2nd Edition, O'Reilly Media, 2011.
https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet
IT8074 SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To learn fundamentals of XML
To provide an overview of Service Oriented Architecture and Web services and their
importance
To learn web services standards and technologies
To learn service oriented analysis and design for developing SOA based applications
UNIT I XML 9
XML document structure – Well-formed and valid documents – DTD – XML Schema – Parsing
XML using DOM, SAX – XPath - XML Transformation and XSL – Xquery
UNIT II SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE (SOA) BASICS 9
Characteristics of SOA, Benefits of SOA , Comparing SOA with Client-Server and Distributed
architectures –-- Principles of Service Orientation – Service layers
UNIT III WEB SERVICES (WS) AND STANDARDS 8
Web Services Platform – Service descriptions – WSDL – Messaging with SOAP – Service
discovery – UDDI – Service-Level Interaction Patterns – Orchestration and Choreography
UNIT IV WEB SERVICES EXTENSIONS 8
WS-Addressing - WS-ReliableMessaging - WS-Policy – WS-Coordination – WS -Transactions -
WS-Security - Examples
UNIT V SERVICE ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 11
SOA delivery strategies – Service oriented analysis – Service Modelling – Service oriented design
– Standards and composition guidelines -- Service design – Business process design – Case
Study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Understand XML technologies
Understand service orientation, benefits of SOA
Understand web services and WS standards
Use web services extensions to develop solutions
Understand and apply service modeling, service oriented analysis and design for
application development
98
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas Erl, ― Service Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology, and Design‖, Pearson
Education, 2005
2. Sandeep Chatterjee and James Webber, ―Developing Enterprise Web Services: An
Architect's Guide‖, Prentice Hall, 2004
REFERENCES:
1. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael E Stevens, Sunil Mathew, ―Java Web Services
Architecture‖, Elsevier, 2003.
2. Ron Schmelzer et al. ― XML and Web Services‖, Pearson Education, 2002.
3. Frank P.Coyle, ―XML, Web Services and the Data Revolution‖, Pearson Education,
2002
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran
and Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction,
Customer complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier
partnership - Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts,
Methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason
to bench mark, Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss
function - TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration- ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001—Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
99
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe
and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, ―Total Quality Management‖, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards
CS8083 MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURES AND PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need for multi-core processors, and their architecture.
To understand the challenges in parallel and multi-threaded programming.
To learn about the various parallel programming paradigms,
To develop multicore programs and design parallel solutions.
UNIT I MULTI-CORE PROCESSORS 9
Single core to Multi-core architectures – SIMD and MIMD systems – Interconnection networks -
Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures – Cache coherence - Performance
Issues – Parallel program design.
UNIT II PARALLEL PROGRAM CHALLENGES 9
Performance – Scalability – Synchronization and data sharing – Data races – Synchronization
primitives (mutexes, locks, semaphores, barriers) – deadlocks and livelocks – communication
between threads (condition variables, signals, message queues and pipes).
UNIT III SHARED MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH OpenMP 9
OpenMP Execution Model – Memory Model – OpenMP Directives – Work-sharing Constructs -
Library functions – Handling Data and Functional Parallelism – Handling Loops - Performance
Considerations.
UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED MEMORY PROGRAMMING WITH MPI 9
MPI program execution – MPI constructs – libraries – MPI send and receive – Point-to-point and
Collective communication – MPI derived datatypes – Performance evaluation
UNIT V PARALLEL PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT 9
Case studies - n-Body solvers – Tree Search – OpenMP and MPI implementations and
comparison.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Describe multicore architectures and identify their characteristics and challenges.
Identify the issues in programming Parallel Processors.
Write programs using OpenMP and MPI.
Design parallel programming solutions to common problems.
Compare and contrast programming for serial processors and programming for parallel
processors.
100
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter S. Pacheco, ―An Introduction to Parallel Programming‖, Morgan-Kauffman/Elsevier, 2011.
2. Darryl Gove, ―Multicore Application Programming for Windows, Linux, and Oracle Solaris‖,
Pearson, 2011 (unit 2)
REFERENCES:
1. Michael J Quinn, ―Parallel programming in C with MPI and OpenMP‖, Tata McGraw Hill,2003.
2. Victor Alessandrini, Shared Memory Application Programming, 1st Edition, Concepts and
Strategies in Multicore Application Programming, Morgan Kaufmann, 2015.
3. Yan Solihin, Fundamentals of Parallel Multicore Architecture, CRC Press, 2015.
CS8079 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the foundations of Human Computer Interaction.
To become familiar with the design technologies for individuals and persons with
disabilities.
To be aware of mobile HCI.
To learn the guidelines for user interface.
UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF HCI 9
The Human: I/O channels – Memory – Reasoning and problem solving; The Computer: Devices
– Memory – processing and networks; Interaction: Models – frameworks – Ergonomics – styles –
elements – interactivity- Paradigms. - Case Studies
UNIT II DESIGN & SOFTWARE PROCESS 9
Interactive Design: Basics – process – scenarios – navigation – screen design – Iteration and
prototyping. HCI in software process: Software life cycle – usability engineering – Prototyping in
practice – design rationale. Design rules: principles, standards, guidelines, rules. Evaluation
Techniques – Universal Design
UNIT III MODELS AND THEORIES 9
HCI Models: Cognitive models: Socio-Organizational issues and stakeholder requirements –
Communication and collaboration models-Hypertext, Multimedia and WWW.
UNIT IV MOBILE HCI 9
Mobile Ecosystem: Platforms, Application frameworks- Types of Mobile Applications: Widgets,
Applications, Games- Mobile Information Architecture, Mobile 2.0, Mobile Design: Elements of
Mobile Design, Tools. - Case Studies
UNIT V WEB INTERFACE DESIGN 9
Designing Web Interfaces – Drag & Drop, Direct Selection, Contextual Tools, Overlays, Inlays
and Virtual Pages, Process Flow - Case Studies
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Design effective dialog for HCI
Design effective HCI for individuals and persons with disabilities.
Assess the importance of user feedback.
Explain the HCI implications for designing multimedia/ ecommerce/ e-learning Web sites.
Develop meaningful user interface.
101
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory Abowd, Russell Beale, ―Human Computer Interaction‖, 3rd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2004 (UNIT I, II & III)
2. Brian Fling, ―Mobile Design and Development‖, First Edition, O‘Reilly Media Inc., 2009 (UNIT –
IV)
3. Bill Scott and Theresa Neil, ―Designing Web Interfaces‖, First Edition, O‘Reilly, 2009. (UNIT-V)
CS8073 C# AND .NET PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn basic programming in C# and the object oriented programming concepts.
To update and enhance skills in writing Windows applications, ADO.NET and ASP
.NET.
To study the advanced concepts in data connectivity, WPF, WCF and WWF with
C# and .NET 4.5.
To implement mobile applications using .Net compact framework
To understand the working of base class libraries, their operations and
manipulation of data using XML.
UNIT I C# LANGUAGE BASICS 9
.Net Architecture - Core C# - Variables - Data Types - Flow control - Objects and
Types- Classes and Structs - Inheritance- Generics – Arrays and Tuples - Operators
and Casts - Indexers
UNIT II C# ADVANCED FEATURES 9
Delegates - Lambdas - Lambda Expressions - Events - Event Publisher - Event
Listener - Strings and Regular Expressions - Generics - Collections - Memory
Management and Pointers - Errors and Exceptions - Reflection
UNIT III BASE CLASS LIBRARIES AND DATA MANIPULATION 9
Diagnostics -Tasks, Threads and Synchronization - .Net Security - Localization -
Manipulating XML- SAX and DOM - Manipulating files and the Registry- Transactions -
ADO.NET- Peer-to-Peer Networking - PNRP - Building P2P Applications - Windows
Presentation Foundation (WPF).
UNIT IV WINDOW BASED APPLICATIONS, WCF AND WWF 9
Window based applications - Core ASP.NET- ASP.NET Web forms -Windows
Communication Foundation (WCF)- Introduction to Web Services - .Net Remoting -
Windows Service - Windows Workflow Foundation (WWF) - Activities – Workflows
UNIT V .NET FRAMEWORK AND COMPACT FRAMEWORK 9
Assemblies - Shared assemblies - Custom Hosting with CLR Objects - Appdomains -
Core XAML - Bubbling and Tunneling Events- Reading and Writing XAML - .Net
Compact Framework - Compact Edition Data Stores – Errors, Testing and Debugging –
Optimizing performance – Packaging and Deployment – Networking and Mobile
Devices
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
102
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Write various applications using C# Language in the .NET Framework.
Develop distributed applications using .NET Framework.
Create mobile applications using .NET compact Framework.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Christian Nagel, Bill Evjen, Jay Glynn, Karli Watson, Morgan Skinner . ―Professional
C# 2012 and .NET 4.5‖, Wiley, 2012
2. Harsh Bhasin, ―Programming in C#‖, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCES
1. Ian Gariffiths, Mathew Adams, Jesse Liberty, ―Programming C# 4.0‖, O‗Reilly,
Fourth Edition, 2010.
2. Andrew Troelsen, Pro C# 5.0 and the .NET 4.5 Framework, Apress publication,
2012.
3. Andy Wigley, Daniel Moth, Peter Foot, ―Mobile Development Handbook‖, Microsoft
Press, 2011.
CS8088 WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the issues and challenges in the design of wireless ad hoc networks.
To understand the working of MAC and Routing Protocols for ad hoc and sensor networks
To learn about the Transport Layer protocols and their QoS for ad hoc and sensor
networks.
To understand various security issues in ad hoc and sensor networks and the
corresponding solutions.
UNIT I MAC & ROUTING IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9
Introduction – Issues and challenges in ad hoc networks – MAC Layer Protocols for wireless
ad hoc networks – Contention-Based MAC protocols – MAC Protocols Using Directional
Antennas – Multiple-Channel MAC Protocols – Power-Aware MAC Protocols – Routing in Ad
hoc Networks – Design Issues – Proactive, Reactive and Hybrid Routing Protocols
UNIT II TRANSPORT & QOS IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9
TCP‟s challenges and Design Issues in Ad Hoc Networks – Transport protocols for ad hoc
networks – Issues and Challenges in providing QoS – MAC Layer QoS solutions – Network
Layer QoS solutions – QoS Model
UNIT III MAC & ROUTING IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Introduction – Applications – Challenges – Sensor network architecture – MAC Protocols for
wireless sensor networks – Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup concepts – Contention-
Based protocols – Schedule-Based protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 Zigbee – Topology Control –
Routing Protocols
103
UNIT IV TRANSPORT & QOS IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Data-Centric and Contention-Based Networking – Transport Layer and QoS in Wireless
Sensor Networks – Congestion Control in network processing – Operating systems for
wireless sensor networks – Examples
UNIT V SECURITY IN AD HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Security Attacks – Key Distribution and Management – Intrusion Detection – Software based
Anti-tamper techniques – Water marking techniques – Defense against routing attacks -
Secure Ad hoc routing protocols – Broadcast authentication WSN protocols – TESLA – Biba –
Sensor Network Security Protocols – SPINS
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Identify different issues in wireless ad hoc and sensor networks .
To analyze protocols developed for ad hoc and sensor networks .
To identify and understand security issues in ad hoc and sensor
networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, ―Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and 2.
Protocols‖, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Holger Karl, Andreas Willing, ―Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks‖,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.
REFERENCES
1. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T G Basavaraju, C Puttamadappa, ―Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks‖,
Auerbach Publications, 2008.
2. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, ―Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory
and Applications (2nd Edition)‖, World Scientific Publishing, 2011.
3. Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks
Theory and Practice‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2010
4. Xiang-Yang Li , “Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory and Applications‖, 1227
th edition, Cambridge university Press,2008.
CS8071 ADVANCED TOPICS ON DATABASES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the modeling and design of databases.
To acquire knowledge on parallel and distributed databases and their applications.
To study the usage and applications of Object Oriented and Intelligent databases.
To understand the usage of advanced data models.
To learn emerging databases such as XML, Cloud and Big Data.
To acquire inquisitive attitude towards research topics in databases.
UNIT I PARALLEL AND DISTRIBUTED DATABASES 9
Database System Architectures: Centralized and Client-Server Architectures – Server System
Architectures – Parallel Systems- Distributed Systems – Parallel Databases: I/O Parallelism – Inter
and Intra Query Parallelism – Inter and Intra operation Parallelism – Design of Parallel Systems-
Distributed Database Concepts - Distributed Data Storage – Distributed Transactions – Commit
Protocols – Concurrency Control – Distributed Query Processing – Case Studies
104
UNIT II OBJECT AND OBJECT RELATIONAL DATABASES 9
Concepts for Object Databases: Object Identity – Object structure – Type Constructors –
Encapsulation of Operations – Methods – Persistence – Type and Class Hierarchies – Inheritance
– Complex Objects – Object Database Standards, Languages and Design: ODMG Model – ODL –
OQL – Object Relational and Extended – Relational Systems: Object Relational features in
SQL/Oracle – Case Studies.
UNIT III INTELLIGENT DATABASES 9
Active Databases: Syntax and Semantics (Starburst, Oracle, DB2)- Taxonomy- Applications-
Design Principles for Active Rules- Temporal Databases: Overview of Temporal Databases-
TSQL2- Deductive Databases: Logic of Query Languages – Datalog- Recursive Rules-Syntax and
Semantics of Datalog Languages- Implementation of Rules and Recursion- Recursive Queries in
SQL- Spatial Databases- Spatial Data Types- Spatial Relationships- Spatial Data Structures-
Spatial Access Methods- Spatial DB Implementation.
UNIT IV ADVANCED DATA MODELS 9
Mobile Databases: Location and Handoff Management - Effect of Mobility on Data Management -
Location Dependent Data Distribution - Mobile Transaction Models -Concurrency Control -
Transaction Commit Protocols- Multimedia Databases- Information Retrieval- Data Warehousing-
Data Mining- Text Mining.
UNIT V EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES 9
XML Databases: XML-Related Technologies-XML Schema- XML Query Languages- Storing XML
in Databases-XML and SQL- Native XML Databases- Web Databases- Geographic Information
Systems- Biological Data Management- Cloud Based Databases: Data Storage Systems on the
Cloud- Cloud Storage Architectures-Cloud Data Models- Query Languages- Introduction to Big
Data-Storage-Analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able,
To develop in-depth understanding of relational databases and skills to optimize database
performance in practice.
To understand and critique on each type of databases.
To design faster algorithms in solving practical database problems.
To implement intelligent databases and various data models.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, ―Fundamentals of Database Systems‖, Sixth Edition ,
Pearson, 2011.
2. Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, ―Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management‖, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, ―Database System Concepts‖, Sixth
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. C.J.Date, A.Kannan, S.Swamynathan, ―An Introduction to Database Systems‖, Eighth
Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
3. Carlo Zaniolo, Stefano Ceri, Christos Faloutsos, Richard T.Snodgrass, V.S.Subrahmanian,
Roberto Zicari, ―Advanced Database Systems‖, Morgan Kaufmann publishers,2006.
105
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
106
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, ―Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business‖, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, ―People and Performance‖, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, ―Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts‖, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights;
collective / Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National
and State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO‘s, Media, Educational
Institutions, Social Movements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
107
OUTCOME:
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
REFERENCES:
1. Kapoor S.K., ―Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws‖, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
2. Chandra U., ―Human Rights‖, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of
caste, class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don‘ts during various types of
Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community
based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community,
Panchayati Raj
Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processess and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management
Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as
dams, embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and
Scenarios in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology
and local resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes
and legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
108
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Singhal J.P. ―Disaster Management‖, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, ―Disaster Science and Management‖, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers,
New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.
EC8093 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To become familiar with digital image fundamentals
To get exposed to simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency domain.
To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
To study the image segmentation and representation techniques.
To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods
UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual Perception – Image
Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships between pixels -
Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D
transforms - DFT, DCT.
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial Filtering–
Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency Domain: Introduction to Fourier
Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth and
Gaussian filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.
109
UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order
Statistics – Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum
Notch Filtering – Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering
UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9
Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region based segmentation –
Region growing – Region splitting and merging – Morphological processing- erosion and dilation,
Segmentation by morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction – Watershed
segmentation algorithm.
UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9
Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding, JPEG
standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional
Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on
matching.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Know and understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as
digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D-transforms.
Operate on images using the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
Understand the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
Learn the basics of segmentation, features extraction, compression and recognition
methods for color models.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, Third Edition,
2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, ‗Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, ‗Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB‘, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, ‗Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing‘, Prentice
Hall Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, John Wiley, New York, 2002
5. Milan Sonka et al ‗Image processing, analysis and machine vision‘, Brookes/Cole, Vikas
Publishing House, 2nd edition, 1999
CS8085 SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYSIS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of semantic web and related applications.
To learn knowledge representation using ontology.
To understand human behaviour in social web and related communities.
To learn visualization of social networks.
110
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Semantic Web: Limitations of current Web - Development of Semantic Web -
Emergence of the Social Web - Social Network analysis: Development of Social Network Analysis
- Key concepts and measures in network analysis - Electronic sources for network analysis:
Electronic discussion networks, Blogs and online communities - Web-based networks -
Applications of Social Network Analysis.
UNIT II MODELLING, AGGREGATING AND KNOWLEDGE
REPRESENTATION 9
Ontology and their role in the Semantic Web: Ontology-based knowledge Representation -
Ontology languages for the Semantic Web: Resource Description Framework - Web Ontology
Language - Modelling and aggregating social network data: State-of-the-art in network data
representation - Ontological representation of social individuals - Ontological representation of
social relationships - Aggregating and reasoning with social network data - Advanced
representations.
UNIT III EXTRACTION AND MINING COMMUNITIES IN WEB SOCIAL
NETWORKS 9
Extracting evolution of Web Community from a Series of Web Archive - Detecting communities in
social networks - Definition of community - Evaluating communities - Methods for community
detection and mining - Applications of community mining algorithms - Tools for detecting
communities social network infrastructures and communities - Decentralized online social
networks - Multi-Relational characterization of dynamic social network communities.
UNIT IV PREDICTING HUMAN BEHAVIOUR AND PRIVACY ISSUES 9
Understanding and predicting human behaviour for social communities - User data management -
Inference and Distribution - Enabling new human experiences - Reality mining - Context -
Awareness - Privacy in online social networks - Trust in online environment - Trust models based
on subjective logic - Trust network analysis - Trust transitivity analysis - Combining trust and
reputation - Trust derivation based on trust comparisons - Attack spectrum and countermeasures.
UNIT V VISUALIZATION AND APPLICATIONS OF SOCIAL NETWORKS 9
Graph theory - Centrality - Clustering - Node-Edge Diagrams - Matrix representation - Visualizing
online social networks, Visualizing social networks with matrix-based representations - Matrix and
Node-Link Diagrams - Hybrid representations - Applications - Cover networks - Community
welfare - Collaboration networks - Co-Citation networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Develop semantic web related applications.
Represent knowledge using ontology.
Predict human behaviour in social web and related communities.
Visualize social networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter Mika, ―Social Networks and the Semantic Web‖, First Edition, Springer 2007.
2. Borko Furht, ―Handbook of Social Network Technologies and Applications‖, 1st Edition,
Springer, 2010.
111
REFERENCES:
1. Guandong Xu ,Yanchun Zhang and Lin Li, ―Web Mining and Social Networking – Techniques
and applications‖, First Edition, Springer, 2011.
2. Dion Goh and Schubert Foo, ―Social information Retrieval Systems: Emerging Technologies
and Applications for Searching the Web Effectively‖, IGI Global Snippet, 2008.
3. Max Chevalier, Christine Julien and Chantal Soulé-Dupuy, ―Collaborative and Social
Information Retrieval and Access: Techniques for Improved user Modelling‖, IGI Global
Snippet, 2009.
4. John G. Breslin, Alexander Passant and Stefan Decker, ―The Social Semantic Web‖, Springer,
2009.
IT8073 INFORMATION SECURITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Information Security
To know the legal, ethical and professional issues in Information Security
To know the aspects of risk management
To become aware of various standards in this area
To know the technological aspects of Information Security
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History, What is Information Security?, Critical Characteristics of Information, NSTISSC
Security Model, Components of an Information System, Securing the Components, Balancing
Security and Access, The SDLC, The Security SDLC
UNIT II SECURITY INVESTIGATION 9
Need for Security, Business Needs, Threats, Attacks, Legal, Ethical and Professional Issues -
An Overview of Computer Security - Access Control Matrix, Policy-Security policies,
Confidentiality policies, Integrity policies and Hybrid policies
UNIT III SECURITY ANALYSIS 9
Risk Management: Identifying and Assessing Risk, Assessing and Controlling Risk -
Systems: Access Control Mechanisms, Information Flow and Confinement Problem
UNIT IV LOGICAL DESIGN 9
Blueprint for Security, Information Security Policy, Standards and Practices, ISO 17799/BS
7799, NIST Models, VISA International Security Model, Design of Security Architecture,
Planning for Continuity
UNIT V PHYSICAL DESIGN 9
Security Technology, IDS, Scanning and Analysis Tools, Cryptography, Access Control
Devices, Physical Security, Security and Personnel
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
112
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
Discuss the basics of information security
Illustrate the legal, ethical and professional issues in information security
Demonstrate the aspects of risk management.
Become aware of various standards in the Information Security System
Design and implementation of Security Techniques.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, ―Principles of Information Security‖, Vikas
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003
REFERENCES
1. Micki Krause, Harold F. Tipton, ― Handbook of Information Security Management‖,
Vol 1-3 CRCPress LLC, 2004.
2. Stuart McClure, Joel Scrambray, George Kurtz, ―Hacking Exposed‖, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2003
3. Matt Bishop, ― Computer Security Art and Science‖, Pearson/PHI, 2002.
CS8087 SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamentals of software defined networks.
To understand the separation of the data plane and the control plane.
To study about the SDN Programming.
To study about the various applications of SDN
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
History of Software Defined Networking (SDN) – Modern Data Center – Traditional Switch
Architecture – Why SDN – Evolution of SDN – How SDN Works – Centralized and
Distributed Control and Date Planes
UNIT II OPEN FLOW & SDN CONTROLLERS 9
Open Flow Specification – Drawbacks of Open SDN, SDN via APIs, SDN via Hypervisor-
Based Overlays – SDN via Opening up the Device – SDN Controllers – General Concepts
UNIT III DATA CENTERS 9
Multitenant and Virtualized Multitenant Data Center – SDN Solutions for the Data Center
Network – VLANs – EVPN – VxLAN – NVGRE
UNIT IV SDN PROGRAMMING 9
Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current Languages
and Tools, Composition of SDNs – Network Functions Virtualization (NFV) and Software
Defined Networks: Concepts, Implementation and Applications
UNIT V SDN 9
Juniper SDN Framework – IETF SDN Framework – Open Daylight Controller – Floodlight
Controller – Bandwidth Calendaring – Data Center Orchestration
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
113
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Analyze the evolution of software defined networks
Express the various components of SDN and their uses
Explain the use of SDN in the current networking scenario
Design and develop various applications of SDN
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul Goransson and Chuck Black, ―Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive
Approach, First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2014.
2. Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, ―SDN: Software Defined Networks, O'Reilly
Media, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Siamak Azodolmolky, ―Software Defined Networking with Open Flow, Packet
Publishing, 2013.
2. Vivek Tiwari, ―SDN and Open Flow for Beginners‖, Amazon Digital Services, Inc.,
2013.
3. Fei Hu, Editor, ―Network Innovation through Open Flow and SDN: Principles and
Design, CRC Press, 2014.
CS8074 CYBER FORENSICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn computer forensics
To become familiar with forensics tools
To learn to analyze and validate forensics data
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER FORENSICS 9
Introduction to Traditional Computer Crime, Traditional problems associated with Computer
Crime. Introduction to Identity Theft & Identity Fraud. Types of CF techniques - Incident and
incident response methodology - Forensic duplication and investigation. Preparation for IR:
Creating response tool kit and IR team. - Forensics Technology and Systems -
Understanding Computer Investigation – Data Acquisition.
UNIT II EVIDENCE COLLECTION AND FORENSICS TOOLS 9
Processing Crime and Incident Scenes – Working with Windows and DOS Systems.
Current Computer Forensics Tools: Software/ Hardware Tools.
UNIT III ANALYSIS AND VALIDATION 9
Validating Forensics Data – Data Hiding Techniques – Performing Remote Acquisition –
Network Forensics – Email Investigations – Cell Phone and Mobile Devices Forensics
UNIT IV ETHICAL HACKING 9
Introduction to Ethical Hacking - Footprinting and Reconnaissance - Scanning Networks -
Enumeration - System Hacking - Malware Threats - Sniffing
UNIT V ETHICAL HACKING IN WEB 9
Social Engineering - Denial of Service - Session Hijacking - Hacking Web servers - Hacking
Web Applications – SQL Injection - Hacking Wireless Networks - Hacking Mobile Platforms.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
114
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Understand the basics of computer forensics
Apply a number of different computer forensic tools to a given scenario
Analyze and validate forensics data
Identify the vulnerabilities in a given network infrastructure
Implement real-world hacking techniques to test system security
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips, Frank Enfinger, Christopher Steuart, ―Computer
Forensics and Investigations‖, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2016.
2. CEH official Certfied Ethical Hacking Review Guide, Wiley India Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. John R.Vacca, ―Computer Forensics‖, Cengage Learning, 2005
2. MarjieT.Britz, ―Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime‖: An Introduction‖, 3 rd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. AnkitFadia ― Ethical Hacking‖ Second Edition, Macmillan India Ltd, 2006
4. Kenneth C.Brancik ―Insider Computer Fraud‖ Auerbach Publications Taylor &
Francis Group–2008.
CS8086 SOFT COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing
To become familiar with various techniques like neural networks, genetic algorithms
and fuzzy systems.
To apply soft computing techniques to solve problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9
Introduction-Artificial Intelligence-Artificial Neural Networks-Fuzzy Systems-Genetic
Algorithm and Evolutionary Programming-Swarm Intelligent Systems-Classification of
ANNs-McCulloch and Pitts Neuron Model-Learning Rules: Hebbian and Delta- Perceptron
Network-Adaline Network-Madaline Network.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Back propagation Neural Networks - Kohonen Neural Network -Learning Vector
Quantization -Hamming Neural Network - Hopfield Neural Network- Bi-directional
Associative Memory -Adaptive Resonance Theory Neural Networks- Support Vector
Machines - Spike Neuron Models.
UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets - Classical Relations and Fuzzy
Relations -Membership Functions -Defuzzification - Fuzzy Arithmetic and Fuzzy Measures -
Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning - Introduction to Fuzzy Decision Making.
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Basic Concepts- Working Principles -Encoding- Fitness Function - Reproduction -
Inheritance Operators - Cross Over - Inversion and Deletion -Mutation Operator - Bit-wise
Operators -Convergence of Genetic Algorithm.
115
UNIT V HYBRID SYSTEMS 9
Hybrid Systems -Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic -GA Based Weight
Determination - LR-Type Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy Neuron - Fuzzy BP Architecture -
Learning in Fuzzy BP- Inference by Fuzzy BP - Fuzzy ArtMap: A Brief Introduction - Soft
Computing Tools - GA in Fuzzy Logic Controller Design - Fuzzy Logic Controller
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
Apply suitable soft computing techniques for various applications.
Integrate various soft computing techniques for complex problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.P.Padhy, S.P.Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford
University Press, 2015.
2. S.N.Sivanandam , S.N.Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
2nd Edition, 2011.
3. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, ―Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing‖, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
2. Kwang H.Lee, ―First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications‖, Springer, 2005.
3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, ―Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications‖,
Prentice Hall, 1996.
4. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, ―Neural Networks Algorithms,
Applications, and Programming Techniques‖, Addison Wesley, 2003.
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values,
to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‗Engineering Ethics‘ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‘s theory – Gilligan‘s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
116
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss
the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the
society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, ―Ethics in Engineering‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, ―Engineering Ethics‖, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, ―Engineering Ethics‖, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, ―Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases‖, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, ―Ethics and the Conduct of Business‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, ―Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers‖, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, ―Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibility‖ Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‗ Value Education‘, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
117
CS8080 INFORMATION RETRIEVAL TECHNIQUES LT PC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Information Retrieval.
To understand machine learning techniques for text classification and clustering.
To understand various search engine system operations.
To learn different techniques of recommender system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Information Retrieval – Early Developments – The IR Problem – The User‗s Task – Information
versus Data Retrieval - The IR System – The Software Architecture of the IR System – The
Retrieval and Ranking Processes - The Web – The e-Publishing Era – How the web changed
Search – Practical Issues on the Web – How People Search – Search Interfaces Today –
Visualization in Search Interfaces.
UNIT II MODELING AND RETRIEVAL EVALUATION 9
Basic IR Models - Boolean Model - TF-IDF (Term Frequency/Inverse Document Frequency)
Weighting - Vector Model – Probabilistic Model – Latent Semantic Indexing Model – Neural
Network Model – Retrieval Evaluation – Retrieval Metrics – Precision and Recall – Reference
Collection – User-based Evaluation – Relevance Feedback and Query Expansion – Explicit
Relevance Feedback.
UNIT III TEXT CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING 9
A Characterization of Text Classification – Unsupervised Algorithms: Clustering – Naïve Text
Classification – Supervised Algorithms – Decision Tree – k-NN Classifier – SVM Classifier –
Feature Selection or Dimensionality Reduction – Evaluation metrics – Accuracy and Error –
Organizing the classes – Indexing and Searching – Inverted Indexes – Sequential Searching –
Multi-dimensional Indexing.
UNIT IV WEB RETRIEVAL AND WEB CRAWLING 9
The Web – Search Engine Architectures – Cluster based Architecture – Distributed Architectures
– Search Engine Ranking – Link based Ranking – Simple Ranking Functions – Learning to Rank –
Evaluations -- Search Engine Ranking – Search Engine User Interaction – Browsing – Applications
of a Web Crawler – Taxonomy – Architecture and Implementation – Scheduling Algorithms –
Evaluation.
UNIT V RECOMMENDER SYSTEM 9
Recommender Systems Functions – Data and Knowledge Sources – Recommendation
Techniques – Basics of Content-based Recommender Systems – High Level Architecture –
Advantages and Drawbacks of Content-based Filtering – Collaborative Filtering – Matrix
factorization models – Neighborhood models.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Use an open source search engine framework and explore its capabilities
Apply appropriate method of classification or clustering.
Design and implement innovative features in a search engine.
Design and implement a recommender system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ricardo Baeza-Yates and Berthier Ribeiro-Neto, ―Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts
and Technology behind Search, Second Edition, ACM Press Books, 2011.
2. Ricci, F, Rokach, L. Shapira, B.Kantor, ―Recommender Systems Handbook‖, First Edition, 2011.
118
REFERENCES:
1. C. Manning, P. Raghavan, and H. Schütze, ―Introduction to Information Retrieval, Cambridge
University Press, 2008.
2. Stefan Buettcher, Charles L. A. Clarke and Gordon V. Cormack, ―Information Retrieval:
Implementing and Evaluating Search Engines, The MIT Press, 2010.
CS8078 GREEN COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamentals of Green Computing.
To analyze the Green computing Grid Framework.
To understand the issues related with Green compliance.
To study and develop various case studies.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS 9
Green IT Fundamentals: Business, IT, and the Environment – Green computing: carbon
foot print, scoop on power – Green IT Strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals –
Environmentally Responsible Business: Policies, Practices, and Metrics.
UNIT II GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9
Green Assets: Buildings, Data Centers, Networks, and Devices – Green Business
Process Management: Modeling, Optimization, and Collaboration – Green Enterprise
Architecture – Environmental Intelligence – Green Supply Chains – Green Information
Systems: Design and Development Models.
UNIT III GRID FRAMEWORK 9
Virtualization of IT systems – Role of electric utilities, Telecommuting, teleconferencing
and teleporting – Materials recycling – Best ways for Green PC – Green Data center –
Green Grid framework.
UNIT IV GREEN COMPLIANCE 9
Socio-cultural aspects of Green IT – Green Enterprise Transformation Roadmap –
Green Compliance: Protocols, Standards, and Audits – Emergent Carbon Issues:
Technologies and Future.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) – Case Study Scenarios
for Trial Runs – Case Studies – Applying Green IT Strategies and Applications to a
Home, Hospital, Packaging Industry and Telecom Sector.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Acquire knowledge to adopt green computing practices to minimize negative
impacts on the environment.
Enhance the skill in energy saving practices in their use of hardware.
Evaluate technology tools that can reduce paper waste and carbon footprint by the
stakeholders.
Understand the ways to minimize equipment disposal requirements .
119
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhuvan Unhelkar, ―Green IT Strategies and Applications-Using Environmental
Intelligence‖, CRC Press, June 2014.
2. Woody Leonhard, Katherine Murray, ―Green Home computing for dummies‖,
August 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. 2.
1. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, ―Green Data Center: steps for the
Journey‖, Shroff/IBM rebook, 2011.
2. John Lamb, ―The Greening of IT‖, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Jason Harris, ―Green Computing and Green IT- Best Practices on regulations &
industry‖, Lulu.com, 2008
4. Carl speshocky, ―Empowering Green Initiatives with IT‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
5. Wu Chun Feng (editor), ―Green computing: Large Scale energy efficiency‖, CRC
Press
CS8076 GPU ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of GPU architectures
To write programs for massively parallel processors
To understand the issues in mapping algorithms for GPUs
To introduce different GPU programming models
UNIT I GPU ARCHITECTURE 12
Evolution of GPU architectures - Understanding Parallelism with GPU –Typical GPU Architecture -
CUDA Hardware Overview - Threads, Blocks, Grids, Warps, Scheduling - Memory Handling with
CUDA: Shared Memory, Global Memory, Constant Memory and Texture Memory.
UNIT II CUDA PROGRAMMING 8
Using CUDA - Multi GPU - Multi GPU Solutions - Optimizing CUDA Applications: Problem
Decomposition, Memory Considerations, Transfers, Thread Usage, Resource Contentions.
UNIT III PROGRAMMING ISSUES 8
Common Problems: CUDA Error Handling, Parallel Programming Issues, Synchronization,
Algorithmic Issues, Finding and Avoiding Errors.
UNIT IV OPENCL BASICS 8
OpenCL Standard – Kernels – Host Device Interaction – Execution Environment – Memory
Model – Basic OpenCL Examples.
UNIT V ALGORITHMS ON GPU 9
Parallel Patterns: Convolution, Prefix Sum, Sparse Matrix - Matrix Multiplication - Programming
Heterogeneous Cluster.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Describe GPU Architecture
Write programs using CUDA, identify issues and debug them
Implement efficient algorithms in GPUs for common application kernels, such as matrix
multiplication
Write simple programs using OpenCL
Identify efficient parallel programming patterns to solve problems
120
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shane Cook, CUDA Programming: ―A Developer's Guide to Parallel Computing with GPUs
(Applications of GPU Computing), First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.
2. David R. Kaeli, Perhaad Mistry, Dana Schaa, Dong Ping Zhang, ―Heterogeneous computing
with OpenCL‖, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kauffman, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Nicholas Wilt, ―CUDA Handbook: A Comprehensive Guide to GPU Programming, Addison -
Wesley, 2013.
2. Jason Sanders, Edward Kandrot, ―CUDA by Example: An Introduction to General Purpose
GPU Programming‖, Addison - Wesley, 2010.
3. David B. Kirk, Wen-mei W. Hwu, Programming Massively Parallel Processors - A Hands-on
Approach, Third Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2016.
4. http://www.nvidia.com/object/cuda_home_new.html
5. http://www.openCL.org
CS8084 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the fundamentals of natural language processing
To understand the use of CFG and PCFG in NLP
To understand the role of semantics of sentences and pragmatics
To apply the NLP techniques to IR applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Origins and challenges of NLP – Language Modeling: Grammar-based LM, Statistical LM -
Regular Expressions, Finite-State Automata – English Morphology, Transducers for lexicon
and rules, Tokenization, Detecting and Correcting Spelling Errors, Minimum Edit Distance
UNIT II WORD LEVEL ANALYSIS 9
Unsmoothed N-grams, Evaluating N-grams, Smoothing, Interpolation and Backoff – Word
Classes, Part-of-Speech Tagging, Rule-based, Stochastic and Transformation-based
tagging, Issues in PoS tagging – Hidden Markov and Maximum Entropy models.
UNIT III SYNTACTIC ANALYSIS 9
Context-Free Grammars, Grammar rules for English, Treebanks, Normal Forms for
grammar – Dependency Grammar – Syntactic Parsing, Ambiguity, Dynamic Programming
parsing – Shallow parsing – Probabilistic CFG, Probabilistic CYK, Probabilistic Lexicalized
CFGs - Feature structures, Unification of feature structures.
UNIT IV SEMANTICS AND PRAGMATICS 10
Requirements for representation, First-Order Logic, Description Logics – Syntax-Driven
Semantic analysis, Semantic attachments – Word Senses, Relations between Senses,
Thematic Roles, selectional restrictions – Word Sense Disambiguation, WSD using
Supervised, Dictionary & Thesaurus, Bootstrapping methods – Word Similarity using
Thesaurus and Distributional methods.
UNIT V DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND LEXICAL RESOURCES 8
Discourse segmentation, Coherence – Reference Phenomena, Anaphora Resolution using
Hobbs and Centering Algorithm – Coreference Resolution – Resources: Porter Stemmer,
Lemmatizer, Penn Treebank, Brill's Tagger, WordNet, PropBank, FrameNet, Brown Corpus,
British National Corpus (BNC).
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
121
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
To tag a given text with basic Language features
To design an innovative application using NLP components
To implement a rule based system to tackle morphology/syntax of a language
To design a tag set to be used for statistical processing for real-time applications
To compare and contrast the use of different statistical approaches for different
types of NLP applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Daniel Jurafsky, James H. Martin―Speech and Language Processing: An
Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and
Speech, Pearson Publication, 2014.
2. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, ―Natural Language Processing with
Python‖, First Edition, O‗Reilly Media, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Breck Baldwin, ―Language Processing with Java and LingPipe Cookbook, Atlantic
Publisher, 2015.
2. Richard M Reese, ―Natural Language Processing with Java‖, O‗Reilly Media, 2015.
3. Nitin Indurkhya and Fred J. Damerau, ―Handbook of Natural Language Processing,
Second Edition, Chapman and Hall/CRC Press, 2010.
4. Tanveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, ―Natural Language Processing and Information
Retrieval‖, Oxford University Press, 2008.
CS8001 PARALLEL ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand different parallel architectures and models of computation.
To introduce the various classes of parallel algorithms.
To study parallel algorithms for basic problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for Parallel Processing - Data and Temporal Parallelism - Models of Computation -
RAM and PRAM Model – Shared Memory and Message Passing Models- Processor
Organisations - PRAM Algorithm – Analysis of PRAM Algorithms- Parallel Programming
Languages.
UNIT II PRAM ALGORITHMS 9
Parallel Algorithms for Reduction – Prefix Sum – List Ranking –Preorder Tree Traversal –
Searching -Sorting - Merging Two Sorted Lists – Matrix Multiplication - Graph Coloring -
Graph Searching.
UNIT III SIMD ALGORITHMS -I 9
2D Mesh SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Reduction - Prefix Computation - Selection -
Odd-Even Merge Sorting - Matrix Multiplication
122
UNIT IV SIMD ALGORITHMS -II 9
Hypercube SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Selection- Odd-Even Merge Sort- Bitonic
Sort- Matrix Multiplication Shuffle Exchange SIMD Model - Parallel Algorithms for Reduction
-Bitonic Merge Sort - Matrix Multiplication - Minimum Cost Spanning Tree
UNIT V MIMD ALGORITHMS 9
UMA Multiprocessor Model -Parallel Summing on Multiprocessor- Matrix Multiplication on
Multiprocessors and Multicomputer - Parallel Quick Sort - Mapping Data to Processors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
Develop parallel algorithms for standard problems and applications.
Analyse efficiency of different parallel algorithms.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael J. Quinn, "Parallel Computing : Theory & Practice", Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, Second edition, 2017.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, "Fundamentals of
Computer Algorithms", University press, Second edition , 2011.
3. V Rajaraman, C Siva Ram Murthy, " Parallel computers- Architecture and
Programming ", PHI learning, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Ananth Grame, George Karpis, Vipin Kumar and Anshul Gupta, "Introduction to
Parallel Computing", 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2003.
2. M Sasikumar, Dinesh Shikhare and P Ravi Prakash , " Introduction to Parallel
Processing", PHI learning , 2013.
3. S.G.Akl, "The Design and Analysis of Parallel Algorithms", PHI, 1989.
IT8077 L T P C
SPEECH PROCESSING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of the speech processing
Explore the various speech models
Gather knowledge about the phonetics and pronunciation processing
Perform wavelet analysis of speech
To understand the concepts of speech recognition
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - knowledge in speech and language processing - ambiguity - models and algorithms
- language - thought - understanding - regular expression and automata - words & transducers –
N grams
UNIT II SPEECH MODELLING 9
Word classes and part of speech tagging – hidden markov model – computing likelihood: the
forward algorithm – training hidden markov model – maximum entropy model – transformation-
based tagging – evaluation and error analysis – issues in part of speech tagging – noisy channel
model for spelling
UNIT III SPEECH PRONUNCIATION AND SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
Phonetics - speech sounds and phonetic transcription - articulatory phonetics - phonological
categories and pronunciation variation - acoustic phonetics and signals - phonetic resources -
articulatory and gestural phonology
123
UNIT IV SPEECH IDENTIFICATION 9
Speech synthesis - text normalization - phonetic analysis - prosodic analysis – diphone waveform
synthesis - unit selection waveform synthesis - evaluation
UNIT V SPEECH RECOGNITION 9
Automatic speech recognition - architecture - applying hidden markov model - feature extraction:
mfcc vectors - computing acoustic likelihoods - search and decoding - embedded training -
multipass decoding: n-best lists and lattices- a* (‗stack‘) decoding - context-dependent acoustic
models: triphones - discriminative training - speech recognition by humans
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Successful completion of the course ,Students will be able to
Create new algorithms with speech processing
Derive new speech models
Perform various language phonetic analysis
Create a new speech identification system
Generate a new speech recognition system
TEXT BOOK:
1. Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, ― Speech and Language Processing: An Introduction to
Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and Speech Recognition‖, Person
education,2013.
REFERENCES
1. Kai-Fu Lee, ―Automatic Speech Recognition‖, The Springer International Series in Engineering
and Computer Science, 1999.
2. Himanshu Chaurasiya, ―Soft Computing Implementation of Automatic Speech Recognition‖,
LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, 2010.
3. Claudio Becchetti, Klucio Prina Ricotti, ―Speech Recognition: Theory and C++
implementation‖,Wiley publications 2008.
4. Ikrami Eldirawy , Wesam Ashour, ―Visual Speech Recognition‖, Wiley publications , 2011
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-
ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties:
Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to
properties and motivation for study (qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
124
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-
growth, laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications-
Nanometal oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques-
AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines,
Targetted drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro
Mechanical Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition,
Nanoparticles for sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., ―Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications‖, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, ―Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces‖, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, ―Nanotechnology‖, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,―The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations‖. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
125
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:
PEO1: To enable graduates to pursue research, or have a successful career in academia or
industries associated with Electronics and Communication Engineering, or as
entrepreneurs.
PEO2: To provide students with strong foundational concepts and also advanced techniques
and tools in order to enable them to build solutions or systems of varying complexity.
PEO3: To prepare students to critically analyze existing literature in an area of specialization
and ethically develop innovative and research oriented methodologies to solve the
problems identified.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering
activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
1
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one‘s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES (PSOs)
1. To analyze, design and develop solutions by applying foundational concepts of electronics
and communication engineering.
2. To apply design principles and best practices for developing quality products for scientific
and business applications.
3. To adapt to emerging information and communication technologies (ICT) to innovate ideas
and solutions to existing/novel problems.
Contribution 1: Reasonable 2: Significant 3: Strong
2
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES WITH PROGRAMME
OUTCOMES
A broad relation between the programme objective and the outcomes is given in the following table
PROGRAMME PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
EDUCATIONAL A B C D E F G H I J K L
OBJECTIVES
1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 3 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 2
MAPPING OF PROGRAM SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
A broad relation between the Program Specific Objectives and the outcomes is given in the
following table
PROGRAM PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
SPECIFIC A B C D E F G H I J K L
OBJECTIVES
1 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3
3
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:
A broad relation between the Course Outcomes and Programme Outcomes is given in the
following table
COURSE OUTCOMES PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Sem Course Name a b c d e f g h i j k l
Communicative English
Engineering Mathematics – I
Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
I Problem Solving and Python Programming
Engineering Graphics
Problem Solving and Python Programming
Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
Technical English
Engineering Mathematics – II
Physics for Electronics Engineering
Basic Electrical and Instrumentation
II Engineering
Circuit Analysis
Electronic Devices
Circuits and Devices Laboratory
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Linear Algebra and Partial Differential
Equations
Fundamentals of Data Structures In C
Electronic Circuits- I
Signals and Systems
III Digital Electronics
Control System Engineering
Fundamentals of Data Structures in C
Laboratory
Analog and Digital Circuits Laboratory
Interpersonal Skills/Listening &Speaking
Probability and Random Processes
Electronic Circuits II
Communication Theory
IV
Electromagnetic Fields
Linear Integrated Circuits
Environmental Science and Engineering
4
COURSE OUTCOMES PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Sem Course Name a b c d e f g h i j k l
Circuits Design and Simulation Laboratory
Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory
Digital Communication
Discrete-Time Signal Processing
Computer Architecture and Organization
Communication Networks
V Professional Elective I
Open Elective I
Digital Signal Processing Laboratory
Communication Systems Laboratory
Networks Laboratory
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
VLSI Design
Wireless Communication
Principles of Management
VI Transmission Lines and RF Systems
Professional Elective -II
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Laboratory
VLSI Design Laboratory
Technical Seminar
Professional Communication
Antennas and Microwave Engineering
Optical Communication
Embedded and Real Time Systems
Ad hoc and Wireless Sensor Networks
VII
Professional Elective -III
Open Elective - II
Embedded Laboratory
Advanced Communication Laboratory
Professional Elective - IV
VIII Professional Elective - V
Project Work
5
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I - VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - I
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151
Engineering Chemistry BS 3 0 0 3
3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry
BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics - II
3. PH8253 Physics for Electronics
BS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. BE8254 Basic Electrical and
Instrumentation ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. EC8251 Circuit Analysis PC 4 4 0 0 4
6. EC8252 Electronic Devices PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EC8261 Circuits and Devices PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 29 21 0 8 25
6
SEMESTER III
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8352 Linear Algebra and Partial
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Differential Equations
2. EC8393 Fundamentals of Data
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Structures In C
3. EC8351 Electronic Circuits- I PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8352 Signals and Systems PC 4 4 0 0 4
5. EC8392 Digital Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. EC8391 Control Systems
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
7. EC8381 Fundamentals of Data
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Structures in C Laboratory
8. EC8361 Analog and Digital
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Circuits Laboratory
9. HS8381 Interpersonal
Skills/Listening EEC 2 0 0 2 1
&Speaking
TOTAL 30 20 0 10 25
SEMESTER IV
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8451 Probability and Random
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Processes
2. EC8452 Electronic Circuits II PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8491 Communication Theory PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8451 Electromagnetic Fields PC 4 4 0 0 4
5. EC8453 Linear Integrated Circuits PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
7. EC8461 Circuits Design and PC
4 0 0 4 2
Simulation Laboratory
8. EC8462 Linear Integrated Circuits PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 28 20 0 8 24
7
SEMESTER V
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EC8501 Digital Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. EC8553 Discrete-Time Signal
PC 4 4 0 0 4
Processing
3. EC8552 Computer Architecture and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Organization
4. EC8551 Communication Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EC8562 Digital Signal Processing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. EC8561 Communication Systems
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. EC8563 Communication Networks
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER VI
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
2. EC8095 VLSI Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8652 Wireless Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
5. EC8651 Transmission Lines and RF
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
6. Professional PE 3
3 0 0 3
Elective -II
PRACTICALS
7. EC8681 Microprocessors and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
8. EC8661 VLSI Design Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
9. EC8611 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
10. HS8581 Professional EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Communication
TOTAL 30 18 0 12 24
8
SEMESTER VII
COURSE CONTACT
SI.No COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EC8701 Antennas and Microwave
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
2. EC8751 Optical Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8791 Embedded and Real Time
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. EC8702 Ad hoc and Wireless
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Sensor Networks
5. Professional Elective -III PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Open Elective - II OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EC8711 Embedded Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. EC8761 Advanced Communication PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22
SEMESTER VIII
Sl. COURSE CATEGOR CONTACT
COURSE TITLE L T P C
No CODE Y PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective IV
2. Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
3. EC8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 186
9
HUMANITIES AND SOCIALSCIENCES (HS)
COURSE CONTACT
Sl.NO COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3. GE8291 Environmental Science
HS 3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
4. MG8591 Principles of
HS 3 3 0 0 3
Management
BASIC SCIENCES (BS)
Sl.NO COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics I
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry
BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics II
6. PH8253 Physics for Electronics
BS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
7. MA8352 Linear Algebra and
Partial Differential BS 4 4 0 0 4
Equations
8. MA8451 Probability and Random
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Processes
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
Sl. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
3. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
4. BE8254 Basic Electrical and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
5. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
6. EC8393 Fundamentals of Data
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Structures In C
7. EC8381 Fundamentals of Data ES
Structures in C 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
10
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
Sl.NO COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. EC8251 Circuit Analysis PC 4 4 0 0 4
2. EC8252 Electronic Devices PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8261 Circuits and Devices
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Lab
4. EC8351 Electronic Circuits- I
PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. EC8352 Signals and Systems
PC 4 4 0 0 4
6. EC8392 Digital Electronics
PC 3 3 0 0 3
7. EC8391 Control System
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
8. EC8361 Analog and Digital
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Circuits Laboratory
9. EC8452 Electronic
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Circuits II
10. EC8491 Communication
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Theory
11. EC8451 Electromagnetic
PC 4 4 0 0 4
Fields
12. EC8453 Linear Integrated
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Circuits
13. EC8461 Circuits Design and
Simulation PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
14. EC8462 Linear Integrated
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Circuits Laboratory
15. EC8501 Digital
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
16. EC8553 Discrete-Time Signal
PC 4 4 0 0 4
Processing
17. EC8651 Transmission Lines
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and RF Systems
18. EC8552 Computer
Architecture and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Organization
19. EC8551 Communication
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
20. EC8562 Digital Signal
Processing PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
21. EC8561 Communication
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
22. EC8563 Communication
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Networks Laboratory
23. EC8691 Microprocessors and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
24. EC8095 VLSI Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
25. EC8652 Wireless
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
26. EC8661 VLSI Design
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
11
27. EC8681 Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
28. EC8701 Antennas and
Microwave PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
29. EC8751 Optical
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
30. EC8791 Embedded and Real
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Time Systems
31. EC8702 Ad hoc and Wireless
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Sensor Networks
32. EC8711 Embedded
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
33. EC8761 Advanced
Communication PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
12
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)*
SEMESTER V
ELECTIVE I
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8392 Object Oriented
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. EC8073 Medical Electronics PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. CS8493 Operating Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8074 Robotics and Automation PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EC8075 Nano Technology and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
6. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VI
ELECTIVE II
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. CS8792 Cryptography and Network
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Security
2. EC8091 Advanced Digital Signal
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
3. EC8001 MEMS and NEMS PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8002 Multimedia Compression
PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Communication
5. EC8003 CMOS Analog IC Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. EC8004 Wireless Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII
ELECTIVE III
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
1. EC8092 Advanced Wireless PE
3 3 0 0 3
Communication
2. EC8071 Cognitive Radio PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. GE8072 Foundation Skills in
Integrated Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
4. CS8082 Machine Learning
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
5. EC8005 Electronics Packaging and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Testing
6. EC8006 Mixed Signal IC Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
13
SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE IV
COURSE CONTACT
SI.No COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. EC8072 Electro Magnetic
Interference and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Compatibility
2. EC8007 Low power SoC Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EC8008 Photonic Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8009 Compressive Sensing PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EC8093 Digital Image PE
3 3 0 0 3
Processing
6. GE8076 Professional Ethics in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
SEMESTER VIII
ELECTIVE V
COURSE CONTACT
SI.No COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. EC8010 Video Analytics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. EC8011 DSP Architecture and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
3. EC8094 Satellite
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
4. CS8086 Soft Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. IT8006 Principles of Speech
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
6. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Science
*Professional Electives are grouped according to elective number as was done previously.
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
S.NO COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. HS8381 Interpersonal
Skills/Listening & EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Speaking
2. EC8611 Technical Seminar
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
3. HS8581 Professional EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Communication
4. EC8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
14
SUMMARY
S.NO. SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS Percentage
AREA TOTAL
II III IV V VI VII VIII
I
1. HS 4 4 3 3 14 7.56%
2. BS 12 7
4 4 27 14.6%
3. ES 9 5
5 19 10.27%
4. PC 9
15 17 19 16 16 92 50%
5. PE 3 3 3 6 15 8.10%
6. OE 3 3 6 3.24%
7. EEC 1 2 10 13 6.48%
Total 25 25 25 24 25 24 22 16 186
Non Credit /
8.
Mandatory
15
L T P C
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology
students.
To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short
narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic
conversations. Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave-
Language development – prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing
meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure-
use of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening –
listening to longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different
sources. Speaking- asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language
development- degrees of comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary
development – single word substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines
Writing- letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email-
Listening- listening to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them.
Speaking- speaking about oneself- speaking about one‘s friend- Language development-
Tenses- simple present-simple past- present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary
development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs
16
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing
an outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-
fixed and semi-fixed expressions.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York:
Rutledge,2011.
2. Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
3. Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student‘s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business
English. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5. Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books:
2013.
17
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler‘s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor‘s series for functions
of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange‘s method of
undetermined multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by
parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by
partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler‘s and Legendre‘s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following
skills:
Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar
coordinates, in addition to change of order and change of variables.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions
and integration by parts.
Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent
improper integrals.
Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
18
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8,
3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Narosa Publications,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., ―Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment –
uniform and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to
bending in beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution –
plane progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein‘s A
and B coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) –
Semiconductor lasers: homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical
aperture and acceptance angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) –
losses associated with optical fibers - fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity - Forbe‘s and Lee‘s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through
compound media (series and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck‘s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its
physical significance – Schrödinger‘s wave equation – time independent and time dependent
equations – particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning
tunnelling microscope.
19
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar
distances - coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond
structures - crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults –
role of imperfections in plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth
techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its
applications,
the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and
their applications in fibre optics,
the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of
materials and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and
its applications in tunneling microscopes, and
the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal
growth techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. ―Engineering Physics‖. Oxford University Press,
2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. ―Engineering Physics‖. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. ―Engineering Physics‖. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. ―Principles of Physics‖. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. ―Physics for Scientists and Engineers‖. Cengage
Learning, 2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. ―Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics‘.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and
water treatment techniques.
To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single
and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and
fuel cells.
20
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external
treatment – Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse
Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms – Freundlich‘s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir‘s adsorption
isotherm – contact theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir -
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement. Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria
– autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic promoters - acid base catalysis – applications
(catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis – Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum -
manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane
number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power
alcohol and biodiesel. Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific
values- theoretical calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition
temperature - explosive range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission
and fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder
reactor - solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and
supercapacitors: Types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid
battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for
further learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, ―A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry‖, S. Chand & Company
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, ―Engineering Chemistry‖ Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Wiley India PVT, LTD,
New Delhi, 2013.
21
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, ―Engineering Chemistry‖, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, ―Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications‖, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
To read and write simple Python programs.
To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
To define Python functions and call them.
To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation
(pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies
for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a
card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments;
modules and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments;
Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables,
distance between two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort,
insertion sort, mergesort, histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
22
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
Decompose a Python program into functions.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist‘‘, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, ―An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, ―Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python‘‘, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, ―Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, ―Exploring Python‖, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, ―Fundamentals of Python: First Programs‖, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, ―Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem-Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, ―Practical Programming: An Introduction
to Computer Science using Python 3‖, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC,
2013.
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and
design of Engineering products.
T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views
of objects
23
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
Familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
Perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of objects.
Project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
Draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
Visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Natrajan K.V., ―A text book of Engineering Graphics‖, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., ―Engineering Graphics‖, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Charotar Publishing House, 50th
Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., ―Engineering Drawing‖ (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores,
Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., ―Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N S Parthasarathy And Vela Murali, ―Engineering Graphics‖, Oxford University, Press, New
Delhi, 2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., ―Engineering Drawing‖, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
24
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
4. students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
5. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING ANDPYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC
0 04 2
OBJECTIVES
To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Use functions for structuring Python programs.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton‘s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
25
BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in
optics, thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young‘s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee‘s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler‘s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis
of water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel‘s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)
26
HS8251 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering
and technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations, participate in group
discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their
areas of specialization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts
from journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking
– describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions
in a text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-
vocabularyused in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal
passive voice, numerical adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking –
introduction to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical,
practice in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary
Development- sequence words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded
sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of
presentations- Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job
application – cover letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and
issue based essays--Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-.
Language Development- clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and
survey-Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course learners will be able to:
Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
Write reports and winning job applications.
27
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary
reading.
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be
used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices –
Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic
forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green‘s, Gauss divergence and Stoke‘s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w z c, cz, , z - Bilinear transformation.
2
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy‘s integral theorem – Cauchy‘s integral formula – Taylor‘s and Laurent‘s
series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for
evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
28
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and
unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential
equations with constant coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of
the following topics and their applications:
Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green‘s
theorems and their verification.
Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., ― Advanced Engineering Mathematics ‖, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O‘Neil, P.V. ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, ―Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics ―Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
PH8253 PHYSICS FOR ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
(Common to BME, ME, CC, ECE, EEE, E&I, ICE) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the essential principles of Physics of semiconductor device and Electron
transport properties. Become proficient in magnetic, dielectric and optical properties of
materials and nano devices.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential: Bloch thorem – metals and insulators - Energy bands in solids– tight
binding approximation - Electron effective mass – concept of hole.
29
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9
Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect semiconductors – Carrier
concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration in N-
type & P-type semiconductors – Carrier transport: Velocity-electric field relations – drift and
diffusion transport - Einstein‘s relation – Hall effect and devices – Zener and avalanche
breakdown in p-n junctions - Ohmic contacts – tunnel diode - Schottky diode – MOS capacitor -
power transistor.
UNIT III MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Magnetism in materials – magnetic field and induction – magnetization - magnetic permeability
and susceptibility–types of magnetic materials – microscopic classification of magnetic materials -
Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction- saturation magnetization and Curie temperature
– Domain Theory. Dielectric materials: Polarization processes – dielectric loss – internal field –
Clausius-Mosotti relation- dielectric breakdown – high-k dielectrics.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and Semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P- N diode – solar cell –photo detectors - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes –
excitons - quantum confined Stark effect – quantum dot laser.
UNIT V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9
Introduction - electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy– quantum
confinement – quantum structures - Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum
dot structures –Zener-Bloch oscillations – resonant tunneling – quantum interference effects –
mesoscopic structures: conductance fluctuations and coherent transport – Coulomb blockade
effects - Single electron phenomena and Single electron Transistor – magnetic semiconductors–
spintronics - Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will able to
Gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structuues,
Acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various
devices,
Get knowledge on magnetic and dielectric properties of materials,
Have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for
optoelectronics,
Understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications in spintronics and
carbon electronics..
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kasap, S.O. ―Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices‖, McGraw-Hill Education,
2007.
2. Umesh K Mishra & Jasprit Singh, ―Semiconductor Device Physics and Design‖, Springer,
2008.
3. Wahab, M.A. ―Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials‖. Narosa
Publishing House, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Garcia, N. & Damask, A. ―Physics for Computer Science Students‖. Springer-Verlag,
2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. ―Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics‖. Pearson Education, 2009
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. ―Nanotechnology: Understanding
Small Systems‖. CRC Press, 2014
30
BE8254 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
Operation of Three phase electrical circuits and power measurement
Working principles of Electrical Machines
Working principle of Various measuring instruments
UNIT I AC CIRCUITS AND POWER SYSTEMS 9
Three phase power supply – Star connection – Delta connection – Balanced and Unbalanced
Loads- Power equation – Star Delta Conversion – Three Phase Power Measurement -
Transmission & Distribution of electrical energy – Over head Vs Underground system – Protection
of power system – types of tariff – power factor improvement
UNIT II TRANSFORMER 9
Introduction - Ideal Transformer – Accounting For Finite Permeability And Core Loss – Circuit
Model Of Transformer – Per Unit System – Determination Of Parameters Of Circuit Model Of
Transformer – Voltage Regulation – Name Plate Rating – Efficiency – Three Phase Transformers -
Auto Transformers
UNIT III DC MACHINES 9
Introduction – Constructional Features– Motoring and generation principle - Emf And Torque
equation – Circuit Model – Methods of Excitation and magnetisation characteristics – Starting and
Speed Control – Universal Motor
UNIT IV AC MACHINES 9
Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors – Construction –Types – Equivalent circuit,
Single phase Induction motors -Construction– Types–starting and speed control methods.
Alternator- working principle–Equation of induced EMF – Voltage regulation, Synchronous motors-
working principle-starting methods -– Torque equation – Stepper Motors – Brushless DC Motors
UNIT V MEASUREMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION 9
Type of Electrical and electronic instruments – Classification- Types of indicating Instruments –
Principles of Electrical Instruments –Multimeters, Oscilloscopes- Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Measurement – Errors in Measurement – Transducers - Classification of
Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive, Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall
effect and Mechanical
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
Understand the concept of three phase power circuits and measurement.
Comprehend the concepts in electrical generators, motors and transformers
Choose appropriate measuring instruments for given application
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, ―Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering‖, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016
2. Giorgio Rizzoni, ―Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering‖, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, 2010
3. S.K.Bhattacharya ―Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering‖, Pearson India, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Del Toro ,‖Electrical Engineering Fundamentals‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Leonard S Bobrow, ― Foundations of Electrical Engineering‖, Oxford University Press, 2013
3. Rajendra Prasad ,‖Fundamentals of Electrical engineering‖, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. Mittle N., ―Basic Electrical Engineering‖, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 24th reprint 2016
5. A.E.Fitzgerald, David E Higginbotham and Arvin Grabel, ―Basic Electrical Engineering‖,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, 2009
31
EC8251 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS LTPC
400 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic concepts of DC and AC circuits behavior
To study the transient and steady state response of the circuits subjected to step and
sinusoidal excitations.
To introduce different methods of circuit analysis using Network theorems, duality and
topology.
UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS AND NETWORK TOPOLOGY 12
Ohm‘s Law – Kirchhoff‘s laws – Mesh current and node voltage method of analysis for D.C and
A.C. circuits - Network terminology - Graph of a network - Incidence and reduced incidence
matrices – Trees –Cutsets - Fundamental cutsets - Cutset matrix – Tie sets - Link currents and
Tie set schedules -Twig voltages and Cutset schedules, Duality and dual networks.
UNIT II NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 12
Network theorems -Superposition theorem, Thevenin‘s theorem, Norton‘s theorem,
Reciprocity theorem, Millman‘s theorem, and Maximum power transfer theorem ,application of
Network theorems- Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star
delta conversion.
UNIT III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 12
Resonance - Series resonance - Parallel resonance - Variation of impedance with frequency -
Variation in current through and voltage across L and C with frequency – Bandwidth - Q factor -
Selectivity. Self inductance - Mutual inductance - Dot rule - Coefficient of coupling - Analysis
of multiwinding coupled circuits - Series, Parallel connection of coupled inductors - Single tuned
and double tuned coupled circuits.
UNITIV TRANSIENT ANALYSIS 12
Natural response-Forced response - Transient response of RC, RL and RLC circuits to excitation
by Step Signal, Impulse Signal and exponential sources - Complete response of RC, RL and RLC
Circuits to sinusoidal excitation.
UNIT V TWO PORT NETWORKS 12
Two port networks, Z parameters, Y parameters, Transmission (ABCD) parameters, Hybrid(H)
Parameters, Interconnection of two port networks, Symmetrical properties of T and π networks.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Develop the capacity to analyze electrical circuits, apply the circuit theorems in real time
Design and understand and evaluate the AC and DC circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William H. Hayt, Jr. Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, ―Engineering Circuit
Analysis‖ , McGraw Hill Science Engineering, Eighth Edition, 11th Reprint 2016.
2. Joseph Edminister and Mahmood Nahvi, ―Electric Circuits‖, Schaum‘s Outline Series,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, Fifth Edition Reprint 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, ―Fundamentals of Electric Circuits‖, Fifth
Edition,
McGraw Hill, 9th Reprint 2015.
2. A.Bruce Carlson, ―Cicuits: Engineering Concepts and Analysis of Linear Electric Circuits‖,
Cengage Learning, India Edition 2nd Indian Reprint 2009.
3. Allan H.Robbins, Wilhelm C.Miller, ―Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice‖, Cengage
Learning, Fifth Edition, 1st Indian Reprint 2013.
32
EC8252 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To acquaint the students with the construction, theory and operation of the basic
electronic devices such as PN junction diode, Bipolar and Field effect Transistors, Power
control devices, LED, LCD and other Opto-electronic devices
UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE 9
PN junction diode, Current equations, Energy Band diagram, Diffusion and drift current densities,
forward and reverse bias characteristics, Transition and Diffusion Capacitances, Switching
Characteristics, Breakdown in PN Junction Diodes.
UNIT II BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS 9
NPN -PNP -Operations-Early effect-Current equations – Input and Output characteristics of CE,
CB, CC - Hybrid -π model - h-parameter model, Ebers Moll Model- Gummel Poon-model, Multi
Emitter Transistor.
UNIT III FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS 9
JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics,-Current equations-Pinch off voltage and its
significance- MOSFET- Characteristics- Threshold voltage -Channel length modulation, D-
MOSFET, E-MOSFET- Characteristics – Comparison of MOSFET with JFET.
UNIT IV SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Metal-Semiconductor Junction- MESFET, FINFET, PINFET, CNTFET, DUAL GATE MOSFET,
Schottky barrier diode-Zener diode-Varactor diode –Tunnel diode- Gallium Arsenide device,
LASER diode, LDR.
UNIT V POWER DEVICES AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9
UJT, SCR, Diac, Triac, Power BJT- Power MOSFET- DMOS-VMOS. LED, LCD, Photo transistor,
Opto Coupler, Solar cell, CCD.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
Explain the V-I characteristic of diode, UJT and SCR
Describe the equivalence circuits of transistors
Operate the basic electronic devices such as PN junction diode, Bipolar and Field effect
Transistors, Power control devices, LED, LCD and other Opto-electronic devices
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald A Neaman, ―Semiconductor Physics and Devices‖, Fourth Edition, Tata Mc GrawHill
Inc. 2012.
2. Salivahanan. S, Suresh Kumar. N, Vallavaraj.A, ―Electronic Devices and circuits‖, Third Edition,
Tata McGraw- Hill, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, ―Electron Devices and Circuit Theory‖ Pearson
Prentice Hall, 10th edition, July 2008.
2. R.S.Sedha, ― A Text Book of Applied Electronics‖ S.Chand Publications, 2006.
3. Yang, ―Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices‖, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1978.
33
EC8261 CIRCUITS AND DEVICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the characteristics of basic electronic devices such as Diode, BJT,FET, SCR
To understand the working of RL,RC and RLC circuits
To gain hand on experience in Thevinin & Norton theorem, KVL & KCL, and Super Position
Theorems
1. Characteristics of PN Junction Diode
2. Zener diode Characteristics & Regulator using Zener diode
3. Common Emitter input-output Characteristics
4. Common Base input-output Characteristics
5. FET Characteristics
6. SCR Characteristics
7. Clipper and Clamper & FWR
8. Verifications Of Thevinin & Norton theorem
9. Verifications Of KVL & KCL
10. Verifications Of Super Position Theorem
11. verifications of maximum power transfer & reciprocity theorem
12. Determination Of Resonance Frequency of Series & Parallel RLC Circuits
13. Transient analysis of RL and RC circuits
LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS
BC 107, BC 148,2N2646,BFW10 - 25 each
1N4007, Zener diodes - 25 each
Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors - sufficient quantities
Bread Boards - 15 Nos
CRO (30MHz) – 15 Nos.
Function Generators (3MHz) – 10 Nos.
Dual Regulated Power Supplies ( 0 – 30V) – 10 Nos.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
Design RL and RC circuits
Verify Thevinin & Norton theorem KVL & KCL, and Super Position Theorems
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic
engineering practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
34
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with different joining
components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
Welding:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC
circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding
measurement of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
35
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
Fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
Use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
36
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
MA8352 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
To understand the concepts of vector space, linear transformations and diagonalization.
To apply the concept of inner product spaces in orthogonalization.
To understand the procedure to solve partial differential equations.
To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.
UNIT I VECTOR SPACES 12
Vector spaces – Subspaces – Linear combinations and linear system of equations – Linear
independence and linear dependence – Bases and dimensions.
UNIT II LINEAR TRANSFORMATION AND DIAGONALIZATION 12
Linear transformation - Null spaces and ranges - Dimension theorem - Matrix representation of a
linear transformations - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors - Diagonalizability.
UNIT III INNER PRODUCT SPACES 12
Inner product, norms - Gram Schmidt orthogonalization process - Adjoint of linear operations -
Least square approximation.
UNIT IV PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation – Solutions of first order equations – Standard types and equations reducible to
standard types – Singular solutions – Lagrange‘s linear equation – Integral surface passing
through a given curve – Classification of partial differential equations - Solution of linear equations
of higher order with constant coefficients – Linear non-homogeneous partial differential equations.
UNIT V FOURIER SERIES SOLUTIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Dirichlet‘s conditions – General Fourier series – Half range sine and cosine series - Method of
separation of variables – Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and one-dimensional heat
equation – Steady state solution of two-dimensional heat equation – Fourier series solutions in
Cartesian coordinates.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
Demonstrate their mastery by solving non - trivial problems related to the concepts and by
proving simple theorems about the statements proven by the text.
Able to solve various types of partial differential equations.
Able to solve engineering problems using Fourier series.
37
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., ―Higher Engineering Mathematics‖, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014.
2. Friedberg, A.H., Insel, A.J. and Spence, L., ―Linear Algebra‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L. and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. James, G. ―Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics‖, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Kolman, B. Hill, D.R., ―Introductory Linear Algebra‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, First
Reprint, 2009.
4. Kumaresan, S., ―Linear Algebra – A Geometric Approach‖, Prentice – Hall of India, New
Delhi, Reprint, 2010.
5. Lay, D.C., ―Linear Algebra and its Applications‖, 5th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
6. O‘Neil, P.V., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, Cengage Learning, 2007.
7. Strang, G., ―Linear Algebra and its applications‖, Thomson (Brooks/Cole), New Delhi, 2005.
8. Sundarapandian, V. ―Numerical Linear Algebra‖, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
EC8393 FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA STRUCTURES IN C LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the features of C
To learn the linear and non-linear data structures
To explore the applications of linear and non-linear data structures
To learn to represent data using graph data structure
To learn the basic sorting and searching algorithms
UNIT I C PROGRAMMING BASICS 9
Structure of a C program – compilation and linking processes – Constants, Variables – Data Types
– Expressions using operators in C – Managing Input and Output operations – Decision Making
and Branching – Looping statements. Arrays – Initialization – Declaration – One dimensional and
Two-dimensional arrays. Strings- String operations – String Arrays. Simple programs- sorting-
searching – matrix operations.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS, POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND UNIONS 9
Functions – Pass by value – Pass by reference – Recursion – Pointers - Definition – Initialization –
Pointers arithmetic. Structures and unions - definition – Structure within a structure - Union -
Programs using structures and Unions – Storage classes, Pre-processor directives.
UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9
Arrays and its representations – Stacks and Queues – Linked lists – Linked list-based
implementation of Stacks and Queues – Evaluation of Expressions – Linked list based polynomial
addition.
UNIT IV NON-LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9
Trees – Binary Trees – Binary tree representation and traversals –Binary Search Trees –
Applications of trees. Set representations - Union-Find operations. Graph and its representations –
Graph Traversals.
UNIT V SEARCHING AND SORTING ALGORITHMS 9
Linear Search – Binary Search. Bubble Sort, Insertion sort – Merge sort – Quick sort - Hash tables
– Overflow handling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
38
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Implement linear and non-linear data structure operations using C
Suggest appropriate linear / non-linear data structure for any given data set.
Apply hashing concepts for a given problem
Modify or suggest new data structure for an application
Appropriately choose the sorting algorithm for an application
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, ―Programming in C, Second Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2011.
2. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, ―Fundamentals of Data Structures in
C, Second Edition, University Press, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, ―Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 1996
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Data Structures and Algorithms,
Pearson Education, 1983.
3. Robert Kruse, C.L.Tondo, Bruce Leung, Shashi Mogalla , ― Data Structures and Program
Design in C, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2007
4. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, ―An Introduction to Data Structures with
Applications, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1991.
EC8351 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the methods of biasing transistors
To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
To design and analyze the regulated DC power supplies.
To troubleshoot and fault analysis of power supplies.
UNIT I BIASING OF DISCRETE BJT, JFET AND MOSFET 9
BJT– Need for biasing - DC Load Line and Bias Point – DC analysis of Transistor circuits - Various
biasing methods of BJT – Bias Circuit Design - Thermal stability - Stability factors - Bias
compensation techniques using Diode, thermistor and sensistor – Biasing BJT Switching Circuits-
JFET - DC Load Line and Bias Point - Various biasing methods of JFET - JFET Bias Circuit
Design - MOSFET Biasing - Biasing FET Switching Circuits.
UNIT II BJT AMPLIFIERS 9
Small Signal Hybrid π equivalent circuit of BJT – Early effect - Analysis of CE, CC and CB
amplifiers using Hybrid π equivalent circuits - AC Load Line Analysis- Darlington Amplifier -
Bootstrap technique - Cascade, Cascode configurations - Differential amplifier, Basic BJT
differential pair – Small signal analysis and CMRR.
UNIT III SINGLE STAGE FET, MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9
Small Signal Hybrid π equivalent circuit of FET and MOSFET - Analysis of CS, CD and CG
amplifiers using Hybrid π equivalent circuits - Basic FET differential pair- BiCMOS circuits.
39
UNIT IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS 9
Amplifier frequency response – Frequency response of transistor amplifiers with circuit capacitors
– BJT frequency response – short circuit current gain - cut off frequency – fα, fβ and unity gain
bandwidth – Miller effect - frequency response of FET - High frequency analysis of CE and
MOSFET CS amplifier - Transistor Switching Times.
UNIT V POWER SUPPLIES AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE TESTING 9
Linear mode power supply - Rectifiers - Filters - Half-Wave Rectifier Power Supply - Full-Wave
Rectifier Power Supply - Voltage regulators: Voltage regulation - Linear series, shunt and
switching Voltage Regulators - Over voltage protection - BJT and MOSFET – Switched mode
power supply (SMPS) - Power Supply Performance and Testing - Troubleshooting and Fault
Analysis, Design of Regulated DC Power Supply.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After studying this course, the student should be able to:
Acquire knowledge of
Working principles, characteristics and applications of BJT and FET
Frequency response characteristics of BJT and FET amplifiers
Analyze the performance of small signal BJT and FET amplifiers - single stage and multi
stage amplifiers
Apply the knowledge gained in the design of Electronic circuits
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald. A. Neamen, Electronic Circuits Analysis and Design, 3rd Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Ltd., 2010. (Unit I-IV)
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, ―Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory‖, 11th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2013. (Unit V)
REFERENCES
th
1. Millman J, Halkias.C.and Sathyabrada Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 4 Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Ltd., 2015.
th
2. Salivahanan and N. Suresh Kumar, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 4 Edition, , Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Ltd., 2017.
3. Floyd, Electronic Devices, Ninth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
th
4. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices & Circuits, 5 Edition, Oxford University Press, 2008.
5. Anwar A. Khan and Kanchan K. Dey, A First Course on Electronics, PHI, 2006.
6. Rashid M, Microelectronics Circuits, Thomson Learning, 2007.
EC8352 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain
UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 12
Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and Sinusoids_
Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals, Periodic &
Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals - Classification of
systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant & Time-invariant,
Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
40
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 12
Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
properties
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 12
Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace transforms in
Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.
UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 12
Baseband signal Sampling – Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT) – Properties of
DTFT - Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 12
Impulse response – Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and Z
Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in series and
parallel.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
To be able to determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
Capable of determining the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
Capable of characterizing LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
To be able to compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains
TEXT BOOK:
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, ―Signals and Systems‖, Pearson, 2015.(Unit 1-
V)
REFERENCES
1. B. P. Lathi, ―Principles of Linear Systems and Signals‖, Second Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, ―Signals & Systems - Continuous and
Discrete‖, Pearson, 2007.
3. John Alan Stuller, ―An Introduction to Signals and Systems‖, Thomson, 2007.
EC8392 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To present the Digital fundamentals, Boolean algebra and its applications in digital
systems
To familiarize with the design of various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
To introduce the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous
sequential circuits
To explain the various semiconductor memories and related technology
To introduce the electronic circuits involved in the making of logic gates
41
UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9
Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‗s and 2‗s complements, Codes –
Binary, BCD, Excess 3, Gray, Alphanumeric codes, Boolean theorems, Logic gates, Universal
gates, Sum of products and product of sums, Minterms and Maxterms, Karnaugh map
Minimization and Quine-McCluskey method of minimization.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel Adder – Carry look
ahead Adder, BCD Adder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Magnitude Comparator, Decoder,
Encoder, Priority Encoder.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, Master/Slave FF – operation and excitation tables, Triggering of FF,
Analysis and design of clocked sequential circuits – Design - Moore/Mealy models, state
minimization, state assignment, circuit implementation – Design of Counters- Ripple Counters,
Ring Counters, Shift registers, Universal Shift Register.
UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Stable and Unstable states, output specifications, cycles and races, state reduction, race free
assignments, Hazards, Essential Hazards, Pulse mode sequential circuits, Design of Hazard
free circuits.
UNIT V MEMORY DEVICES AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 9
Basic memory structure – ROM -PROM – EPROM – EEPROM –EAPROM, RAM – Static and
dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) -
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation
of combinational logic circuits using PLA, PAL.
Digital integrated circuits: Logic levels, propagation delay, power dissipation, fan-out and fan-
in, noise margin, logic families and their characteristics-RTL, TTL, ECL, CMOS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course:
Use digital electronics in the present contemporary world
Design various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
Do the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous sequential
circuits
Use the semiconductor memories and related technology
Use electronic circuits involved in the design of logic gates
TEXT BOOK:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, ―Digital Design‖, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles H.Roth. ―Fundamentals of Logic Design‖, 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ―Digital Fundamentals‖, 10th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2011
3. S.Salivahanan and S.Arivazhagan―Digital Electronics‖, Ist Edition, Vikas Publishing
House pvt Ltd, 2012.
4. Anil K.Maini ―Digital Electronics‖, Wiley, 2014.
5. A.Anand Kumar ―Fundamentals of Digital Circuits‖, 4th Edition, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2016.
6. Soumitra Kumar Mandal ― Digital Electronics‖, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2016.
42
EC8391 CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the components and their representation of control systems
To learn various methods for analyzing the time response, frequency response and
stability of the systems.
To learn the various approach for the state variable analysis.
UNIT I SYSTEMS COMPONENTS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9
Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory-
Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs
models-DC and AC servo Systems-Synchronous -Multivariable control system
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9
Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first order
and second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady error constant
and system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD, PI,PID control systems
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency
response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot- Nyquist plots-Design of
compensators using Bode plots-Cascade lead compensation-Cascade lag compensation-Cascade
lag-lead compensation
UNIT IV CONCEPTS OF STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-Relative
stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability criterion.
UNIT V CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING STATE VARIABLE METHODS 9
State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-Conversion
of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-Concepts of
Controllability and Observability-Stability of linear systems-Equivalence between transfer function
and state variable representations-State variable analysis of digital control system-Digital control
design using state feedback.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Identify the various control system components and their representations.
Analyze the various time domain parameters.
Analysis the various frequency response plots and its system.
Apply the concepts of various system stability criterions.
Design various transfer functions of digital control system using state variable models.
TEXT BOOK:
1. M.Gopal, ―Control System – Principles and Design‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, ―Control System Engineering‖, New Age International Publishers,
5 th Edition, 2007.
2. K. Ogata, ‗Modern Control Engineering‘, 5th edition, PHI, 2012.
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, Control System Engineering, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2013.
4. Benjamin.C.Kuo, ―Automatic control systems‖, Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition,1995.
43
EC8381 FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA STRUCTURES IN C LABORATORY L T PC
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and implement basic data structures using C
To apply linear and non-linear data structures in problem solving.
To learn to implement functions and recursive functions by means of data
structures
To implement searching and sorting algorithms
LIST OF EXERCISES
1. Basic C Programs – looping, data manipulations, arrays
2. Programs using strings – string function implementation
3. Programs using structures and pointers
4. Programs involving dynamic memory allocations
5. Array implementation of stacks and queues
6. Linked list implementation of stacks and queues
7. Application of Stacks and Queues
8. Implementation of Trees, Tree Traversals
9. Implementation of Binary Search trees
10. Implementation of Linear search and binary search
11. Implementation Insertion sort, Bubble sort, Quick sort and Merge Sort
12. Implementation Hash functions, collision resolution technique
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Write basic and advanced programs in C
Implement functions and recursive functions in C
Implement data structures using C
Choose appropriate sorting algorithm for an application and implement it in a modularized
way
EC8361 ANALOG AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Study the Frequency response of CE, CB and CC Amplifier
Learn the frequency response of CS Amplifiers
Study the Transfer characteristics of differential amplifier
Perform experiment to obtain the bandwidth of single stage and multistage amplifiers
Perform SPICE simulation of Electronic Circuits
Design and implement the Combinational and sequential logic circuits
LIST OF ANALOG EXPERIMENTS:
1. 1. Design of Regulated Power supplies
2. 2. Frequency Response of CE, CB, CC and CS amplifiers
3. 3. Darlington Amplifier
4. 4. Differential Amplifiers - Transfer characteristics, CMRR Measurement
5. 5. Cascode and Cascade amplifiers
6. 6. Determination of bandwidth of single stage and multistage amplifiers
7. 7. Analysis of BJT with Fixed bias and Voltage divider bias using Spice
8. 8. Analysis of FET, MOSFET with fixed bias, self-bias and voltage divider bias using
simulation software like Spice
44
9. 9. Analysis of Cascode and Cascade amplifiers using Spice
10. Analysis of Frequency Response of BJT and FET using Spice
LIST OF DIGITAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates(i) BCD to
excess-3 code and vice versa (ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa
2. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ Subtractor and BCD adder
using IC 7483
3. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic gates
4. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates
5. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 / Mod-12
Ripple counters
6. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to:
Design and Test rectifiers, filters and regulated power supplies.
Design and Test BJT/JFET amplifiers.
Differentiate cascode and cascade amplifiers.
Analyze the limitation in bandwidth of single stage and multi stage amplifier
Measure CMRR in differential amplifier
Simulate and analyze amplifier circuits using PSpice.
Design and Test the digital logic circuits.
LAB REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS, 2 STUDENTS / EXPERIMENT:
S.NO EQUIPMENTS FOR ANALOG LAB
1 CRO/DSO (30MHz) – 15 Nos.
2 Signal Generator /Function Generators (3 MHz) – 15 Nos
3 Dual Regulated Power Supplies ( 0 – 30V) – 15 Nos.
4 Standalone desktop PCs with SPICE software – 15 Nos.
5 Transistor/FET (BJT-NPN-PNP and NMOS/PMOS) – 50 Nos
6 Components and Accessories: Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors, diodes, Zener
Diodes, Bread Boards, Transformers.
7 SPICE Circuit Simulation Software: (any public domain or commercial software)
S.NO EQUIPMENTS FOR DIGITAL LAB
1 Dual power supply/ single mode power supply - 15 Nos
2 IC Trainer Kit - 15 Nos
3 Bread Boards - 15 Nos
4 Seven segment display -15 Nos
5 Multimeter - 15 Nos
6 ICs each 50 Nos
7400/ 7402 / 7404 / 7486 / 7408 / 7432 / 7483 / 74150 /
74151 / 74147 / 7445 / 7476/7491/ 555 / 7494 / 7447 / 74180 /
7485 / 7473 / 74138 / 7411 / 7474
45
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING&SPEAKING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage
in specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation
- pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a
complete idea as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over
a wide range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute
informal talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer -
accept - decline - take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group
discussion - summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to
and participating in conversations - persuade.
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions
in academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL :30PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
Listen and respond appropriately.
Participate in group discussions
Make effective presentations
Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
46
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University Press,
Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2010
REFERENCES
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014.
3. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
MA8451 PROBABILITY AND RANDOM PROCESSES L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
To understand the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random
variables and to introduce some standard distributions applicable to engineering which can
describe real life phenomenon.
To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in IT fields.
To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.
UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – Axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye‘s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.
UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and linear
regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and
identically distributed random variables).
UNIT III RANDOM PROCESSES 12
Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Markov chain - Poisson process – Random
telegraph process.
UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 12
Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 12
Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs –
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
47
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have knowledge
of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
The students will have an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring
skills in handling situations involving more than one variable. Able to analyze the response
of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum‘s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., ―Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., ―Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., ―Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.
EC8452 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of amplifiers and oscillators
constructed with discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for
building linear and digital integrated circuits
To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
To design oscillators.
To study about turned amplifier.
To understand the analysis and design of LC and RC oscillators, amplifiers, multi
vibrators, power amplifiers and DC convertors.
UNIT I FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND STABILITY 9
Feedback Concepts – gain with feedback – effect of feedback on gain stability, distortion,
bandwidth, input and output impedances; topologies of feedback amplifiers – analysis of
series-series, shunt-shunt and shunt-series feedback amplifiers-stability problem-Gain and
Phase-margins-Frequency compensation.
48
UNIT II OSCILLATORS 9
Barkhausen criterion for oscillation – phase shift, Wien bridge - Hartley & Colpitt‘s
oscillators – Clapp oscillator-Ring oscillators and crystal oscillators – oscillator amplitude
stabilization.
UNIT III TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9
Coil losses, unloaded and loaded Q of tank circuits, small signal tuned amplifiers –
Analysis of capacitor coupled single tuned amplifier – double tuned amplifier - effect of
cascading single tuned and double tuned amplifiers on bandwidth – Stagger tuned
amplifiers - Stability of tuned amplifiers – Neutralization - Hazeltine neutralization method.
UNIT IV WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9
Pulse circuits – attenuators – RC integrator and differentiator circuits – diode clampers
and clippers –Multivibrators - Schmitt Trigger- UJT Oscillator.
UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC CONVERTERS 9
Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Power MOSFET-Temperature
Effect- Class AB Power amplifier using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost,
Buck-Boost analysis and design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze different types of amplifier, oscillator and multivibrator circuits
Design BJT amplifier and oscillator circuits
Analyze transistorized amplifier and oscillator circuits
Design and analyze feedback amplifiers
Design LC and RC oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave shaping circuits,
multivibrators, power amplifier and DC convertors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sedra and Smith, ―Micro Electronic Circuits‖; Sixth Edition, Oxford University Press,
2011. (UNIT I, III,IV,V)
2. Jacob Millman, ‗Microelectronics‘, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, Reprinted, 2009.
(UNIT I,II,IV,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, ―Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory‖, 10th Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008
2. David A. Bell, ―Electronic Devices and Circuits‖, Fifth Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2008.
3. Millman J. and Taub H., ―Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms‖, TMH, 2000.
4. Millman and Halkias. C., Integrated Electronics, TMH, 2007.
49
EC8491 COMMUNICATION THEORY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of various analog modulations and their spectral characteristics
To understand the properties of random process
To know the effect of noise on communication systems
To know the principles of sampling & quantization
UNIT I AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9
Amplitude Modulation- DSBSC, DSBFC, SSB, VSB - Modulation index, Spectra, Power relations
and Bandwidth – AM Generation – Square law and Switching modulator, DSBSC Generation –
Balanced and Ring Modulator, SSB Generation – Filter, Phase Shift and Third Methods, VSB
Generation – Filter Method, Hilbert Transform, Pre-envelope & complex envelope –comparison of
different AM techniques, Superheterodyne Receiver
UNIT II ANGLE MODULATION 9
Phase and frequency modulation, Narrow Band and Wide band FM – Modulation index, Spectra,
Power relations and Transmission Bandwidth - FM modulation –Direct and Indirect methods, FM
Demodulation – FM to AM conversion, FM Discriminator - PLL as FM Demodulator.
UNIT III RANDOM PROCESS 9
Random variables, Random Process, Stationary Processes, Mean, Correlation & Covariance
functions, Power Spectral Density, Ergodic Processes, Gaussian Process, Transmission of a
Random Process Through a LTI filter.
UNIT IV NOISE CHARACTERIZATION 9
Noise sources – Noise figure, noise temperature and noise bandwidth – Noise in cascaded
systems. Representation of Narrow band noise –In-phase and quadrature, Envelope and Phase –
Noise performance analysis in AM & FM systems – Threshold effect, Pre-emphasis and de-
emphasis for FM.
UNIT V SAMPLING & QUANTIZATION 9
Low pass sampling – Aliasing- Signal Reconstruction-Quantization - Uniform & non-uniform
quantization - quantization noise - Logarithmic Companding –PAM, PPM, PWM, PCM – TDM,
FDM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Design AM communication systems
Design Angle modulated communication systems
Apply the concepts of Random Process to the design of Communication systems
Analyze the noise performance of AM and FM systems
Gain knowledge in sampling and quantization
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.G.Proakis, M.Salehi, ―Fundamentals of Communication Systems‖, Pearson Education
2014. (UNIT I-IV)
2. Simon Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, 4th Edition, Wiley, 2014.(UNIT I-V)
50
REFERENCES:
1. B.P.Lathi, ―Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems‖, 3rd Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2007.
2. D.Roody, J.Coolen, ―Electronic Communications, 4th edition PHI 2006
3. A.Papoulis, ―Probability, Random variables and Stochastic Processes‖, McGraw Hill, 3rd
edition, 1991.
4. B.Sklar, ―Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications‖, 2nd Edition Pearson
Education 2007
5. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series - ―Analog and Digital Communications‖ TMH 2006
6. Couch.L., "Modern Communication Systems", Pearson, 2001.
EC8451 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To gain conceptual and basic mathematical understanding of electric and magnetic fields in
free space and in materials
To understand the coupling between electric and magnetic fields through Faraday's law,
displacement current and Maxwell's equations
To understand wave propagation in lossless and in lossy media
To be able to solve problems based on the above concepts
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Electromagnetic model, Units and constants, Review of vector algebra, Rectangular, cylindrical
and spherical coordinate systems, Line, surface and volume integrals, Gradient of a scalar field,
Divergence of a vector field, Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector field, Stoke's theorem, Null
identities, Helmholtz's theorem
UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS 12
Electric field, Coulomb's law, Gauss's law and applications, Electric potential, Conductors in static
electric field, Dielectrics in static electric field, Electric flux density and dielectric constant,
Boundary conditions, Capacitance, Parallel, cylindrical and spherical capacitors, Electrostatic
energy, Poisson's and Laplace's equations, Uniqueness of electrostatic solutions, Current density
and Ohm's law, Electromotive force and Kirchhoff's voltage law, Equation of continuity and
Kirchhoff's current law
UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 12
Lorentz force equation, Law of no magnetic monopoles, Ampere's law, Vector magnetic potential,
Biot-Savart law and applications, Magnetic field intensity and idea of relative permeability,
Magnetic circuits, Behaviour of magnetic materials, Boundary conditions, Inductance and
inductors, Magnetic energy, Magnetic forces and torques
UNIT IV TIME-VARYING FIELDS AND MAXWELL's EQUATIONS 12
Faraday's law, Displacement current and Maxwell-Ampere law, Maxwell's equations, Potential
functions, Electromagnetic boundary conditions, Wave equations and solutions, Time-harmonic
fields
UNIT V PLANE ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 12
Plane waves in lossless media, Plane waves in lossy media (low-loss dielectrics and good
conductors), Group velocity, Electromagnetic power flow and Poynting vector, Normal incidence at
a plane conducting boundary, Normal incidence at a plane dielectric boundary
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
51
OUTCOMES:
By the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Display an understanding of fundamental electromagnetic laws and concepts
Write Maxwell's equations in integral, differential and phasor forms and explain their physical
meaning
Explain electromagnetic wave propagation in lossy and in lossless media
Solve simple problems requiring estimation of electric and magnetic field quantities based on
these concepts and laws
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.K. Cheng, Field and wave electromagnetics, 2nd ed., Pearson (India), 1989 (UNIT I, II,III
IV,V)
2. W.H. Hayt and J.A. Buck, Engineering electrmagnetics, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill (India), 2006
(UNIT I-V)
REFERENCES
1. D.J. Griffiths, Introduction to electrodynamics, 4th ed., Pearson (India), 2013
2. B.M. Notaros, Electromagnetics, Pearson: New Jersey, 2011
3. M.N.O. Sadiku and S.V. Kulkarni, Principles of electromagnetics, 6th ed., Oxford (Asian
Edition), 2015
L T P C
EC8453 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits
To learn the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers
To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL
To learn the theory of ADC and DAC
To introduce the concepts of waveform generation and introduce some special function
ICs
UNIT I BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9
Current mirror and current sources, Current sources as active loads, Voltage sources, Voltage
References, BJT Differential amplifier with active loads, Basic information about op-amps – Ideal
Operational Amplifier - General operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC
741, DC and AC performance characteristics, slew rate, Open and closed loop configurations –
JFET Operational Amplifiers – LF155 and TL082.
UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9
Sign Changer, Scale Changer, Phase Shift Circuits, Voltage Follower, V-to-I and I-to-V converters,
adder, subtractor, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator, Differentiator, Logarithmic amplifier,
Antilogarithmic amplifier, Comparators, Schmitt trigger, Precision rectifier, peak detector, clipper
and clamper, Low-pass, high-pass and band-pass Butterworth filters.
UNIT III ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL 9
Analog Multiplier using Emitter Coupled Transistor Pair - Gilbert Multiplier cell – Variable
transconductance technique, analog multiplier ICs and their applications, Operation of the basic
PLL, Closed loop analysis, Voltage controlled oscillator, Monolithic PLL IC 565, application of PLL
for AM detection, FM detection, FSK modulation and demodulation and Frequency synthesizing
and clock synchronisation.
52
UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG 9
CONVERTERS
Analog and Digital Data Conversions, D/A converter – specifications - weighted resistor type, R-2R
Ladder type, Voltage Mode and Current-Mode R - 2R Ladder types - switches for D/A converters,
high speed sample-and-hold circuits, A/D Converters – specifications - Flash type - Successive
Approximation type - Single Slope type – Dual Slope type - A/D Converter using Voltage-to-Time
Conversion - Over-sampling A/D Converters, Sigma – Delta converters.
UNIT V WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND SPECIAL FUNCTION ICS 9
Sine-wave generators, Multivibrators and Triangular wave generator, Saw-tooth wave generator,
ICL8038 function generator, Timer IC 555, IC Voltage regulators – Three terminal fixed and
adjustable voltage regulators - IC 723 general purpose regulator - Monolithic switching regulator,
Low Drop – Out(LDO) Regulators - Switched capacitor filter IC MF10, Frequency to Voltage and
Voltage to Frequency converters, Audio Power amplifier, Video Amplifier, Isolation Amplifier, Opto-
couplers and fibre optic IC.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Design linear and non linear applications of OP – AMPS
Design applications using analog multiplier and PLL
Design ADC and DAC using OP – AMPS
Generate waveforms using OP – AMP Circuits
Analyze special function ICs
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Roy Choudhry, Shail Jain, ―Linear Integrated Circuits‖, New Age International
Pvt. Ltd., 2018, Fifth Edition. (Unit I – V)
2. Sergio Franco, ―Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated
Circuits‖, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2016 (Unit I – V)
REFERENCES:
1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, ―OP-AMP and Linear ICs‖, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall / Pearson
Education, 2015.
2. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, ―Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated
Circuits‖, Sixth Edition, PHI, 2001.
3. B.S.Sonde, ―System design using Integrated Circuits‖ , 2nd Edition, New Age Pub, 2001.
4. Gray and Meyer, ―Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits‖, Wiley
International,5th Edition, 2009.
5. William D.Stanley, ―Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits‖, Pearson
Education,4th Edition,2001.
6. S.Salivahanan & V.S. Kanchana Bhaskaran, ―Linear Integrated Circuits‖, TMH,2nd Edition,
4th Reprint, 2016.
53
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the nature and facts about environment.
To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and
waste management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds,
streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species
and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at
global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of
biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems –
pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems –
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral
resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,
case studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy
sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource,
land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field
study of local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
54
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy –
water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental
organization- environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –
wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife
protection act – Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental
legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is
an important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge
on the following after completing the course.
Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‗Environmental Science and Engineering‘, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‗Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science‘, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‗Environmental law‘, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi,
2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, ―Textbook of Environmental Studies‖, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‗Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure‘, Oxford University Press,
2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, ―Environmental Science‖, Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.
EC8461 CIRCUITS DESIGN AND SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To gain hands on experience in designing electronic circuits
To learn simulation software used in circuit design
To learn the fundamental principles of amplifier circuits
To differentiate feedback amplifiers and oscillators.
To differentiate the operation of various multivibrators
55
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THE FOLLOWING CIRCUITS
1. Series and Shunt feedback amplifiers-Frequency response, Input and output
impedance
2. RC Phase shift oscillator and Wien Bridge Oscillator
3. Hartley Oscillator and Colpitts Oscillator
4. Single Tuned Amplifier
5. RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits
6. Astable and Monostable multivibrators
7. Clippers and Clampers
SIMULATION USING SPICE (Using Transistor):
1. Tuned Collector Oscillator
2. Twin -T Oscillator / Wein Bridge Oscillator
3. Double and Stagger tuned Amplifiers
4. Bistable Multivibrator
5. Schmitt Trigger circuit with Predictable hysteresis
6. Analysis of power amplifier
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to:
Analyze various types of feedback amplifiers
Design oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave-shaping circuits and multivibrators
Design and simulate feedback amplifiers, oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave-shaping
circuits and multivibrators using SPICE Tool.
LAB REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS / 2 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.NO EQUIPMENTS
1 CRO (Min 30MHz) - 15 Nos
2 Signal Generator /Function Generators (2 MHz) – 15 Nos
3 Dual Regulated Power Supplies (0 – 30V) - 15 Nos
4 Digital Multimeter - 15 Nos
5 Digital LCR Meter - 2 Nos
6 Standalone desktops PC - 15 Nos
7 Transistor/FET (BJT-NPN-PNP and NMOS/PMOS) - 50 Nos
Components and Accessories:
Transistors, Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors, diodes, Zener Diodes, Bread Boards, Transformers.
SPICE Circuit Simulation Software: (any public domain or commercial software)
56
EC8462 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of linear integrated circuits and available ICs
To understand the characteristics of the operational amplifier.
To apply operational amplifiers in linear and nonlinear applications.
To acquire the basic knowledge of special function IC.
To use SPICE software for circuit design
DESIGN AND TESTING OF THE FOLLOWING CIRCUITS
1. Inverting, Non inverting and differential amplifiers.
2. Integrator and Differentiator.
3. Instrumentation amplifier
4. Active low-pass, High-pass and band-pass filters.
5. Astable & Monostable multivibrators using Op-amp
6. Schmitt Trigger using op-amp.
7. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op-amp.
8. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
9. PLL characteristics and its use as Frequency Multiplier, Clock synchronization
10. R-2R Ladder Type D- A Converter using Op-amp.
11. DC power supply using LM317 and LM723.
12. Study of SMPS
SIMULATION USING SPICE:
1. Active low-pass, High-pass and band-pass filters using Op-amp
2. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
3. A/ D converter
4. Analog multiplier
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to:
Design amplifiers, oscillators, D-A converters using operational amplifiers.
Design filters using op-amp and performs an experiment on frequency response.
Analyze the working of PLL and describe its application as a frequency multiplier.
Design DC power supply using ICs.
Analyze the performance of filters, multivibrators, A/D converter and analog
multiplier using SPICE.
LAB REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS / 2 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.NO EQUIPMENTS
1 CRO/DSO (Min 30MHz) -- 15 Nos
2 Signal Generator /Function Generators (2 MHz) – 15 Nos
3 Dual Regulated Power Supplies (0 – 30V) -- 15 Nos
4 Digital Multimeter -- 15 Nos
5 IC Tester -- 5 Nos
6 Standalone desktops PC -- 15 Nos
7 Components and Accessories – 50 Nos
57
Components and Accessories:
Transistors, Resistors, Capacitors, diodes, Zener diodes, Bread Boards, Transformers, wires,
Power transistors, Potentiometer, A/D and D/A convertors, LEDs .
Note: Op-Amps uA741, LM 301, LM311, LM 324, LM317, LM723, 7805, 7812, 2N3524, 2N3525,
2N3391, AD 633, LM 555, LM 565 may be used.
EC8501 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the limits set by Information Theory
To study the various waveform coding schemes
To learn the various baseband transmission schemes
To understand the various band pass signaling schemes
To know the fundamentals of channel coding
UNIT I INFORMATION THEORY 9
Discrete Memoryless source, Information, Entropy, Mutual Information - Discrete Memoryless
channels – Binary Symmetric Channel, Channel Capacity - Hartley - Shannon law - Source coding
theorem - Shannon - Fano & Huffman codes.
UNIT II WAVEFORM CODING & REPRESENTATION 9
Prediction filtering and DPCM - Delta Modulation - ADPCM & ADM principles-Linear Predictive
Coding- Properties of Line codes- Power Spectral Density of Unipolar / Polar RZ & NRZ – Bipolar
NRZ - Manchester
UNIT III BASEBAND TRANSMISSION & RECEPTION 9
ISI – Nyquist criterion for distortion less transmission – Pulse shaping – Correlative coding - Eye
pattern – Receiving Filters- Matched Filter, Correlation receiver, Adaptive Equalization
UNIT IV DIGITAL MODULATION SCHEME 9
Geometric Representation of signals - Generation, detection, PSD & BER of Coherent BPSK,
BFSK & QPSK - QAM - Carrier Synchronization - Structure of Non-coherent Receivers - Principle
of DPSK.
UNIT V ERROR CONTROL CODING 9
Channel coding theorem - Linear Block codes - Hamming codes - Cyclic codes - Convolutional
codes - Viterbi Decoder.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
Design PCM systems
Design and implement base band transmission schemes
Design and implement band pass signaling schemes
Analyze the spectral characteristics of band pass signaling schemes and their noise
performance
Design error control coding schemes
58
TEXT BOOK:
1. S. Haykin, ―Digital Communications‖, John Wiley, 2005 (Unit I –V)
REFERENCES
1. B. Sklar, ―Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications‖, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009
2. B.P.Lathi, ―Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems‖ 3rd Edition, Oxford University
Press 2007.
3. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series - ―Analog and Digital Communications‖, TMH 2006
4. J.G Proakis, ―Digital Communication‖, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, 2001.
EC8553 DISCRETE-TIME SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To learn discrete fourier transform, properties of DFT and its application to linear filtering
To understand the characteristics of digital filters, design digital IIR and FIR filters and
apply these filters to filter undesirable signals in various frequency bands
To understand the effects of finite precision representation on digital filters
To understand the fundamental concepts of multi rate signal processing and its
applications
To introduce the concepts of adaptive filters and its application to communication
engineering
UNIT I DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 12
Review of signals and systems, concept of frequency in discrete-time signals, summary of
analysis & synthesis equations for FT & DTFT, frequency domain sampling, Discrete Fourier
transform (DFT) - deriving DFT from DTFT, properties of DFT - periodicity, symmetry, circular
convolution. Linear filtering using DFT. Filtering long data sequences - overlap save and overlap
add method. Fast computation of DFT - Radix-2 Decimation-in-time (DIT) Fast Fourier transform
(FFT), Decimation-in-frequency (DIF) Fast Fourier transform (FFT). Linear filtering using FFT.
UNIT II INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 12
Characteristics of practical frequency selective filters. characteristics of commonly used analog
filters - Butterworth filters, Chebyshev filters. Design of IIR filters from analog filters (LPF, HPF,
BPF, BRF) - Approximation of derivatives, Impulse invariance method, Bilinear transformation.
Frequency transformation in the analog domain. Structure of IIR filter - direct form I, direct form II,
Cascade, parallel realizations.
UNIT III FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 12
Design of FIR filters - symmetric and Anti-symmetric FIR filters - design of linear phase FIR filters
using Fourier series method - FIR filter design using windows (Rectangular, Hamming and
Hanning window), Frequency sampling method. FIR filter structures - linear phase structure,
direct form realizations
UNIT IV FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 12
Fixed point and floating point number representation - ADC - quantization - truncation and
rounding - quantization noise - input / output quantization - coefficient quantization error - product
quantization error - overflow error - limit cycle oscillations due to product quantization and
summation - scaling to prevent overflow.
59
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 12
DSP functionalities - circular buffering – DSP architecture – Fixed and Floating point architecture
principles – Programming – Application examples.
TOTAL:60PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
Apply DFT for the analysis of digital signals and systems
Design IIR and FIR filters
Characterize the effects of finite precision representation on digital filters
Design multirate filters
Apply adaptive filters appropriately in communication systems
TEXT BOOK:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, ―Digital Signal Processing – Principles,
Algorithms & Applications‖, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
(UNIT I – V)
REFERENCES:
1. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor & Barrie. W. Jervis, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Second Edition,
Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. A. V. Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, ―Discrete-Time Signal Processing‖, 8th
Indian Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
3. Sanjit K. Mitra, ―Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach‖, Tata Mc Graw
Hill, 2007.
4. Andreas Antoniou, ―Digital Signal Processing‖, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2006.
EC8552 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make students understand the basic structure and operation of digital computer
To familiarize with implementation of fixed point and floating-point arithmetic operations
To study the design of data path unit and control unit for processor
To understand the concept of various memories and interfacing
To introduce the parallel processing technique
UNIT I COMPUTER ORGANIZATION & INSTRUCTIONS 9
Basics of a computer system: Evolution, Ideas, Technology, Performance, Power wall,
Uniprocessors to Multiprocessors. Addressing and addressing modes. Instructions: Operations
and Operands, Representing instructions, Logical operations, control operations.
UNIT II ARITHMETIC 9
Fixed point Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division. Floating Point arithmetic, High
performance arithmetic, Subword parallelism
UNIT III THE PROCESSOR 9
Introduction, Logic Design Conventions, Building a Datapath - A Simple Implementation scheme -
An Overview of Pipelining - Pipelined Datapath and Control. Data Hazards: Forwarding versus
Stalling, Control Hazards, Exceptions, Parallelism via Instructions.
60
UNIT IV MEMORY AND I/O ORGANIZATION 9
Memory hierarchy, Memory Chip Organization, Cache memory, Virtual memory.
Parallel Bus Architectures, Internal Communication Methodologies, Serial Bus Architectures, Mass
storage, Input and Output Devices.
UNIT V ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 9
Parallel processing architectures and challenges, Hardware multithreading, Multicore and shared
memory multiprocessors, Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters and Warehouse
scale computers - Introduction to Multiprocessor network topologies.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
Describe data representation, instruction formats and the operation of a digital computer
Illustrate the fixed point and floating-point arithmetic for ALU operation
Discuss about implementation schemes of control unit and pipeline performance
Explain the concept of various memories, interfacing and organization of multiple processors
Discuss parallel processing technique and unconventional architectures
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessey, ―Computer Organization and Design‖, Fifth
edition, Morgan Kauffman / Elsevier, 2014. (UNIT I-V)
2. Miles J. Murdocca and Vincent P. Heuring, ―Computer Architecture and Organization: An
Integrated approach‖, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2015 (UNIT IV,V)
REFERENCES
1. V. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, ―Computer Organization―, Fifth
edition, Mc Graw-Hill Education India Pvt Ltd, 2014.
2. William Stallings ―Computer Organization and Architecture‖, Seventh Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006.
3. Govindarajalu, ―Computer Architecture and Organization, Design Principles and Applications",
Second edition, McGraw-Hill Education India Pvt Ltd, 2014.
EC8551 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Understand the division of network functionalities into layers.
Be familiar with the components required to build different types of networks
Be exposed to the required functionality at each layer
Learn the flow control and congestion control algorithms
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS & LINK LAYER 9
Overview of Data Communications- Networks – Building Network and its types– Overview of
Internet - Protocol Layering - OSI Mode – Physical Layer – Overview of Data and Signals -
introduction to Data Link Layer - Link layer Addressing- Error Detection and Correction
61
UNIT II MEDIA ACCESS & INTERNETWORKING 9
Overview of Data link Control and Media access control - Ethernet (802.3) - Wireless LANs –
Available Protocols – Bluetooth – Bluetooth Low Energy – WiFi – 6LowPAN–Zigbee - Network
layer services – Packet Switching – IPV4 Address – Network layer protocols ( IP, ICMP, Mobile IP)
UNIT III ROUTING 9
Routing - Unicast Routing – Algorithms – Protocols – Multicast Routing and its basics – Overview
of Intradomain and interdomain protocols – Overview of IPv6 Addressing – Transition from IPv4 to
IPv6
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Introduction to Transport layer –Protocols- User Datagram Protocols (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocols (TCP) –Services – Features – TCP Connection – State Transition Diagram –
Flow, Error and Congestion Control - Congestion avoidance (DECbit, RED) – QoS – Application
requirements
UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9
Application Layer Paradigms – Client Server Programming – World Wide Web and HTTP - DNS- -
Electronic Mail (SMTP, POP3, IMAP, MIME) – Introduction to Peer to Peer Networks – Need for
Cryptography and Network Security – Firewalls.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Identify the components required to build different types of networks
Choose the required functionality at each layer for given application
Identify solution for each functionality at each layer
Trace the flow of information from one node to another node in the network
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, ―Data communication and Networking‖, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw –
Hill, 2013 (UNIT I –V)
REFERENCES
1. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, ―Computer Networking - A Top-Down Approach
Featuring the Internet‖, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
2. Nader. F. Mir,― Computer and Communication Networks‖, Pearson Prentice Hall
Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2014.
3. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang, Fred Baker, ―Computer Networks: An Open Source
Approach‖, Mc Graw Hill Publisher, 2011.
4. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, ―Computer Networks: A Systems Approach‖, Fifth
Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.
62
EC8562 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To perform basic signal processing operations such as Linear Convolution, Circular
Convolution, Auto Correlation, Cross Correlation and Frequency analysis in MATLAB
To implement FIR and IIR filters in MATLAB and DSP Processor
To study the architecture of DSP processor
To design a DSP system to demonstrate the Multi-rate and Adaptive signal processing
concepts.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: MATLAB / EQUIVALENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
1. Generation of elementary Discrete-Time sequences
2. Linear and Circular convolutions
3. Auto correlation and Cross Correlation
4. Frequency Analysis using DFT
5. Design of FIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and demonstrates the filtering operation
6. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev IIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and
demonstrate the filtering operations
DSP PROCESSOR BASED IMPLEMENTATION
1. Study of architecture of Digital Signal Processor
2. Perform MAC operation using various addressing modes
3. Generation of various signals and random noise
4. Design and demonstration of FIR Filter for Low pass, High pass, Band pass and
Band stop filtering
5. Design and demonstration of Butter worth and Chebyshev IIR Filters for Low pass,
High pass, Band pass and Band stop filtering
6. Implement an Up-sampling and Down-sampling operation in DSP Processor
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Carryout basic signal processing operations
Demonstrate their abilities towards MATLAB based implementation of various DSP
systems
Analyze the architecture of a DSP Processor
Design and Implement the FIR and IIR Filters in DSP Processor for performing
filtering operation over real-time signals
Design a DSP system for various applications of DSP
EC8561 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To visualize the effects of sampling and TDM
To Implement AM & FM modulation and demodulation
To implement PCM & DM
To simulate Digital Modulation schemes
To simulate Error control coding schemes
63
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Signal Sampling and reconstruction
2. Time Division Multiplexing
3. AM Modulator and Demodulator
4. FM Modulator and Demodulator
5. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation
6. Delta Modulation and Demodulation
7. Line coding schemes
8. Simulation of ASK, FSK, and BPSK generation schemes
9. Simulation of DPSK, QPSK and QAM generation schemes
10. Simulation of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK and QAM
11. Simulation of ASK, FSK and BPSK detection schemes
12. Simulation of Linear Block and Cyclic error control coding schemes
13. Simulation of Convolutional coding scheme
14. Communication link simulation
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Simulate & validate the various functional modules of a communication system
Demonstrate their knowledge in base band signaling schemes through
implementation of digital modulation schemes
Apply various channel coding schemes & demonstrate their capabilities
towards the improvement of the noise performance of communication system
Simulate end-to-end communication Link
LAB Requirements for a Batch of 30 students (3 students per experiment):
i) Kits for Signal Sampling, TDM, AM, FM, PCM, DM and Line Coding Schemes
ii) CROs/DSOs – 15 Nos, Function Generators – 15 Nos.
iii) MATLAB or equivalent software package for simulation experiments
iv) PCs - 15 Nos
EC8563 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Learn to communicate between two desktop computers
Learn to implement the different protocols
Be familiar with IP Configuration
Be familiar with the various routing algorithms
Be familiar with simulation tools
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Implementation of Error Detection / Error Correction Techniques
2. Implementation of Stop and Wait Protocol and sliding window
3. Implementation and study of Goback-N and selective repeat protocols
4. Implementation of High Level Data Link Control
5. Implementation of IP Commands such as ping, Traceroute, nslookup.
6. Implementation of IP address configuration.
7. To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA protocol
and compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
8. Network Topology - Star, Bus, Ring
64
9. Implementation of distance vector routing algorithm
10. Implementation of Link state routing algorithm
11. Study of Network simulator (NS) and simulation of Congestion Control Algorithms
using NS
12. Implementation of Encryption and Decryption Algorithms using any programming
language
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Communicate between two desktop computers
Implement the different protocols
Program using sockets.
Implement and compare the various routing algorithms
Use the simulation tool.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
SOFTWARE
• C / Python / Java / Equivalent Compiler
• MATLAB SOFTWARE (Few experiments can be practiced with MATLAB)
• Standard LAN Trainer Kits 4 Nos
• Network simulator like NS2/ NS3 / Glomosim/OPNET/ 30 Equivalent
HARDWARE
Standalone Desktops 30 Nos
EC8691 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
To learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.
To interface microprocessors with supporting chips.
To study the Architecture of 8051 microcontroller.
To design a microcontroller based system
UNIT I THE 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes - Instruction set and
assembler directives – Assembly language programming – Modular Programming - Linking and
Relocation - Stacks - Procedures – Macros – Interrupts and interrupt service routines – Byte and
String Manipulation.
UNIT II 8086 SYSTEM BUS STRUCTURE 9
8086 signals – Basic configurations – System bus timing –System design using 8086 – I/O
programming – Introduction to Multiprogramming – System Bus Structure – Multiprocessor
configurations – Coprocessor, Closely coupled and loosely Coupled configurations – Introduction
to advanced processors.
UNIT III I/O INTERFACING 9
Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface – Serial communication
interface – D/A and A/D Interface - Timer – Keyboard /display controller – Interrupt controller –
DMA controller – Programming and applications Case studies: Traffic Light control, LED display ,
LCD display, Keyboard display interface and Alarm Controller.
65
UNIT IV MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers(SFRs) - I/O Pins Ports and Circuits - Instruction
set - Addressing modes - Assembly language programming.
UNIT V INTERFACING MICROCONTROLLER 9
Programming 8051 Timers - Serial Port Programming - Interrupts Programming – LCD &
Keyboard Interfacing - ADC, DAC & Sensor Interfacing - External Memory Interface- Stepper
Motor and Waveform generation - Comparison of Microprocessor, Microcontroller, PIC and ARM
processors
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand and execute programs based on 8086 microprocessor.
Design Memory Interfacing circuits.
Design and interface I/O circuits.
Design and implement 8051 microcontroller based systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A.Gibson, ―Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 / 8088 Family -
Architecture, Programming and Design‖, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007. (UNIT I-
III)
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay, ―The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C‖, Second Edition, Pearson education, 2011. (UNIT
IV-V)
REFERENCES:
1. Doughlas V.Hall, ―Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware‖,TMH,2012
2. A.K.Ray,K.M.Bhurchandi, "Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals" 3rd edition, Tata
McGrawHill, 2012
EC8095 VLSI DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics.
Learn the design and realization of combinational & sequential digital circuits.
Architectural choices and performance tradeoffs involved in designing and realizing the
circuits in CMOS technology are discussed
Learn the different FPGA architectures and testability of VLSI circuits.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9
MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate, Layout Design Rules,
Gate Layouts, Stick Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters tics, C-V Charters tics, Non ideal I-V
Effects, DC Transfer characteristics, RC Delay Model, Elmore Delay, Linear Delay Model, Logical
effort, Parasitic Delay, Delay in Logic Gate, Scaling.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9
Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic
Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates, Domino, Dual Rail Domino, CPL, DCVSPG,
DPL, Circuit Pitfalls.
Power: Dynamic Power, Static Power, Low Power Architecture.
66
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Static latches and Registers, Dynamic latches and Registers, Pulse Registers, Sense Amplifier
Based Register, Pipelining, Schmitt Trigger, Monostable Sequential Circuits, Astable Sequential
Circuits.
Timing Issues : Timing Classification Of Digital System, Synchronous Design.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS AND SUBSYSTEM 9
Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders, Multipliers, Shifters, ALUs, power and speed
tradeoffs, Case Study: Design as a tradeoff.
Designing Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks, Memory
Core, Memory Peripheral Circuitry.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES AND TESTING 9
FPGA Building Block Architectures, FPGA Interconnect Routing Procedures. Design for
Testability: Ad Hoc Testing, Scan Design, BIST, IDDQ Testing, Design for Manufacturability,
Boundary Scan.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
UPON COMPLETION OF THE COURSE, STUDENTS SHOULD be ABLE TO
Realize the concepts of digital building blocks using MOS transistor.
Design combinational MOS circuits and power strategies.
Design and construct Sequential Circuits and Timing systems.
Design arithmetic building blocks and memory subsystems.
Apply and implement FPGA design flow and testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris ―CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective‖, 4th Edition, Pearson , 2017 (UNIT I,II,V)
2. Jan M. Rabaey ,Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, ‖Digital Integrated Circuits:A
Design perspective‖, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.(UNIT III,IV)
REFERENCES
1. M.J. Smith, ―Application Specific Integrated Circuits‖, Addisson Wesley, 1997
2. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim ―CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:Analysis
& Design‖,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
3. Wayne Wolf, ―Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip‖, Pearson Education, 2007
4. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, ―CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation‖, Prentice Hall of India 2005.
EC8652 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the characteristic of wireless channel
To understand the design of a cellular system
To study the various digital signaling techniques and multipath mitigation techniques
To understand the concepts of multiple antenna techniques
67
UNIT I WIRELESS CHANNELS 9
Large scale path loss – Path loss models: Free Space and Two-Ray models -Link Budget
design – Small scale fading- Parameters of mobile multipath channels – Time dispersion
parameters-Coherence bandwidth – Doppler spread & Coherence time, fading due to
Multipath time delay spread – flat fading – frequency selective fading – Fading due to
Doppler spread – fast fading – slow fading.
UNIT II CELLULAR ARCHITECTURE 9
Multiple Access techniques - FDMA, TDMA, CDMA – Capacity calculations–Cellular
concept- Frequency reuse - channel assignment- hand off- interference & system capacity-
trunking & grade of service – Coverage and capacity improvement.
UNIT III DIGITAL SIGNALING FOR FADING CHANNELS 9
Structure of a wireless communication link, Principles of Offset-QPSK, p/4-DQPSK,
Minimum Shift Keying, Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying, Error performance in fading
channels, OFDM principle – Cyclic prefix, Windowing, PAPR.
UNIT IV MULTIPATH MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 9
Equalisation – Adaptive equalization, Linear and Non-Linear equalization, Zero forcing and
LMS Algorithms. Diversity – Micro and Macro diversity, Diversity combining techniques,
Error probability in fading channels with diversity reception, Rake receiver.
UNIT V MULTIPLE ANTENNA TECHNIQUES 9
MIMO systems – spatial multiplexing -System model -Pre-coding - Beam forming -
transmitter diversity, receiver diversity- Channel state information-capacity in fading and
non-fading channels.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student should be able to:
• Characterize a wireless channel and evolve the system design specifications
• Design a cellular system based on resource availability and traffic demands
• Identify suitable signaling and multipath mitigation techniques for the wireless
channel and system under consideration.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rappaport,T.S., ―Wireless communications‖, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2010.(UNIT I, II, IV)
2. Andreas.F. Molisch, ―Wireless Communications‖, John Wiley – India, 2006. (UNIT
III,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Wireless Communication –Andrea Goldsmith, Cambridge University Press, 2011
2. Van Nee, R. and Ramji Prasad, ―OFDM for wireless multimedia communications,
Artech House, 2000
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Upena Dalal, ―Wireless Communication‖, Oxford University Press, 2009.
68
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization .
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning,
Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning
and management
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication
–communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding
Managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, ―Management‖, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition,
2009.
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert ―Management‖, Pearson Education, 6th
Edition, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, ―Fundamentals of Management‖
Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, ― Management‖, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich ―Essentials of management‖ Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, ―Principles of Management‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999
69
EC8651 TRANSMISSION LINES AND RF SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the various types of transmission lines and its characteristics
To give thorough understanding about high frequency line, power and impedance
measurements
To impart technical knowledge in impedance matching using smith chart
To introduce passive filters and basic knowledge of active RF components
To get acquaintance with RF system transceiver design
UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY 9
General theory of Transmission lines - the transmission line - general solution - The infinite line -
Wavelength, velocity of propagation - Waveform distortion - the distortion-less line - Loading and
different methods of loading - Line not terminated in Z0 - Reflection coefficient - calculation of
current, voltage, power delivered and efficiency of transmission - Input and transfer impedance -
Open and short circuited lines - reflection factor and reflection loss.
UNIT II HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES 9
Transmission line equations at radio frequencies - Line of Zero dissipation - Voltage and current
on the dissipation-less line, Standing Waves, Nodes, Standing Wave Ratio - Input impedance of
the dissipation-less line - Open and short circuited lines - Power and impedance measurement
on lines - Reflection losses - Measurement of VSWR and wavelength.
UNIT III IMPEDANCE MATCHING IN HIGH FREQUENCY LINES 9
Impedance matching: Quarter wave transformer - Impedance matching by stubs - Single stub
and double stub matching - Smith chart - Solutions of problems using Smith chart - Single and
double stub matching using Smith chart.
UNIT IV WAVEGUIDES 9
General Wave behavior along uniform guiding structures – Transverse Electromagnetic Waves,
Transverse Magnetic Waves, Transverse Electric Waves – TM and TE Waves between parallel
plates. Field Equations in rectangular waveguides, TM and TE waves in rectangular
waveguides, Bessel Functions, TM and TE waves in Circular waveguides.
UNIT V RF SYSTEM DESIGN CONCEPTS 9
Active RF components: Semiconductor basics in RF, bipolar junction transistors, RF field effect
transistors, High electron mobility transistors Basic concepts of RF design, Mixers, Low noise
amplifiers, voltage control oscillators, Power amplifiers, transducer power gain and stability
considerations.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Explain the characteristics of transmission lines and its losses
Write about the standing wave ratio and input impedance in high frequency
transmission lines
Analyze impedance matching by stubs using smith charts
Analyze the characteristics of TE and TM waves
Design a RF transceiver system for wireless communication
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D Ryder, ―Networks, lines and fields‖, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India, 2015. (UNIT I-
IV)
2. Mathew M. Radmanesh, ―Radio Frequency &Microwave Electronics‖, Pearson Education
Asia, Second Edition,2002. (UNIT V)
70
REFERENCES:
1. Reinhold Ludwig and Powel Bretchko,‖ RF Circuit Design – Theory and Applications‖,
Pearson Education Asia, First Edition,2001.
2. D. K. Misra, ―Radio Frequency and Microwave Communication Circuits- Analysis and
Design‖, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
3. E.C.Jordan and K.G. Balmain, ―Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems Prentice
Hall of India, 2006.
4. G.S.N Raju, "Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines Pearson Education,
First edition 2005.
EC8681 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY LT PC
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To Introduce ALP concepts, features and Coding methods
Write ALP for arithmetic and logical operations in 8086 and 8051
Differentiate Serial and Parallel Interface
Interface different I/Os with Microprocessors
Be familiar with MASM
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
8086 Programs using kits and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
2. Move a data block without overlap
3. Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
4. Floating point operations, string manipulations, sorting and searching
5. Password checking, Print RAM size and system date
6. Counters and Time Delay
Peripherals and Interfacing Experiments
7. Traffic light controller
8. Stepper motor control
9. Digital clock
10. Key board and Display
11. Printer status
12. Serial interface and Parallel interface
13. A/D and D/A interface and Waveform Generation
8051 Experiments using kits and MASM
14. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations
15. Square and Cube program, Find 2‘s complement of a number
16. Unpacked BCD to ASCII
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Write ALP Programmes for fixed and Floating Point and Arithmetic operations
Interface different I/Os with processor
Generate waveforms using Microprocessors
Execute Programs in 8051
Explain the difference between simulator and Emulator
71
LAB EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
HARDWARE:
8086 development kits - 30 nos
Interfacing Units - Each 10 nos
Microcontroller - 30 nos
SOFTWARE:
Intel Desktop Systems with MASM - 30 nos
8086 Assembler
8051 Cross Assembler
L T P C
EC8661 VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To learn Hardware Descriptive Language(Verilog/VHDL)
To learn the fundamental principles of VLSI circuit design in digital and analog
domain
To familiarize fusing of logical modules on FPGAs
To provide hands on design experience with professional design (EDA) platforms
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Part I: Digital System Design using HDL & FPGA (24 Periods)
Design an Adder (Min 8 Bit) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
1.
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Design a Multiplier (4 Bit Min) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
2.
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Design an ALU using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement by
3.
Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Design a Universal Shift Register using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software
4.
and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Design Finite State Machine (Moore/Mealy) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
5.
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Design Memories using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and implement
6. by Xilinx/Altera FPGA
Compare pre synthesis and post synthesis simulation for experiments 1 to 6.
Requirements: Xilinx ISE/Altera Quartus/ equivalent EDA Tools along with
Xilinx/Altera/equivalent FPGA Boards
Part-II Digital Circuit Design (24 Periods)
7. Design and simulate a CMOS inverter using digital flow
8. Design and simulate a CMOS Basic Gates & Flip-Flops
9. Design and simulate a 4-bit synchronous counter using a Flip-Flops
Manual/Automatic Layout Generation and Post Layout Extraction for experiments 7
to 9
Analyze the power, area and timing for experiments 7 to 9 by performing Pre Layout
and Post Layout Simulations.
72
Part-III Analog Circuit Design (12 Periods)
10. Design and Simulate a CMOS Inverting Amplifier.
Design and Simulate basic Common Source, Common Gate and Common Drain
11.
Amplifiers.
Analyze the input impedance, output impedance, gain and bandwidth for
experiments 10 and 11 by performing Schematic Simulations.
Design and simulate simple 5 transistor differential amplifier. Analyze Gain,
12.
Bandwidth and CMRR by performing Schematic Simulations.
Requirements: Cadence/Synopsis/ Mentor Graphics/Tanner/equivalent EDA Tools
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Write HDL code for basic as well as advanced digital integrated circuit
Import the logic modules into FPGA Boards
Synthesize Place and Route the digital IPs
Design, Simulate and Extract the layouts of Digital & Analog IC Blocks using EDA
tools
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.NO EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Xilinx ISE/Altera Quartus/ equivalent
1 10 User License
EDA Tools
2 Xilinx/Altera/equivalent FPGA Boards 10 no
Cadence/Synopsis/ Mentor
3 10 User License
Graphics/Tanner/equivalent EDA Tools
4 Personal Computer 30 no
73
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to:
Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employable Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the topic –
answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute
presentations
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics
- brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-term
career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2. Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
74
EC8701 ANTENNAS AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the student to understand the basic principles in antenna and microwave
system design
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of various antenna designs.
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of microwave components and
antenna for practical applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE SYSTEMS AND ANTENNAS 9
Microwave frequency bands, Physical concept of radiation, Near- and far-field regions,
Fields and Power Radiated by an Antenna, Antenna Pattern Characteristics, Antenna Gain
and Efficiency, Aperture Efficiency and Effective Area, Antenna Noise Temperature and G/T,
Impedance matching, Friis transmission equation, Link budget and link margin, Noise
Characterization of a microwave receiver.
UNIT II RADIATION MECHANISMS AND DESIGN ASPECTS 9
Radiation Mechanisms of Linear Wire and Loop antennas, Aperture antennas, Reflector
antennas, Microstrip antennas and Frequency independent antennas, Design considerations
and applications.
UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Two-element array, Array factor, Pattern multiplication, Uniformly spaced arrays with uniform
and non-uniform excitation amplitudes, Smart antennas.
UNIT IV PASSIVE AND ACTIVE MICROWAVE DEVICES 9
Microwave Passive components: Directional Coupler, Power Divider, Magic Tee, attenuator,
resonator, Principles of Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Gunn Diodes, IMPATT diodes,
Schottky Barrier diodes, PIN diodes, Microwave tubes: Klystron, TWT, Magnetron.
UNIT V MICROWAVE DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
Impedance transformation, Impedance Matching, Microwave Filter Design, RF and
Microwave Amplifier Design, Microwave Power amplifier Design, Low Noise Amplifier
Design, Microwave Mixer Design, Microwave Oscillator Design
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student should be able to:
• Apply the basic principles and evaluate antenna parameters and link power budgets
• Design and assess the performance of various antennas
• Design a microwave system given the application specifications
TEXTBOOKS:
1. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, "Antennas and Wave
Propagation: Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006. (UNIT I, II, III)
2. David M. Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Fourth Edition, Wiley India, 2012.(UNIT
I,IV,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Constantine A.Balanis, ―Antenna Theory Analysis and Design‖, Third edition, John
Wiley India Pvt Ltd., 2005.
2. R.E.Collin, "Foundations for Microwave Engineering", Second edition,
IEEE Press, 2001
75
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
EC8751 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about the various optical fiber modes, configuration and transmission
characteristics of optical fibers
To learn about the various optical sources, detectors and transmission techniques
To explore various idea about optical fiber measurements and various coupling
techniques
To enrich the knowledge about optical communication systems and networks
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERS 9
Introduction-general optical fiber communication system- basic optical laws and definitions-
optical modes and configurations -mode analysis for optical propagation through fibers-
modes in planar wave guide-modes in cylindrical optical fiber-transverse electric and
transverse magnetic modes- fiber materials-fiber fabrication techniques-fiber optic cables-
classification of optical fiber-single mode fiber-graded index fiber.
UNIT II TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTIC OF OPTICAL FIBER 9
Attenuation-absorption --scattering losses-bending losses-core and cladding losses-signal
dispersion –inter symbol interference and bandwidth-intra model dispersion-material
dispersion- waveguide dispersion-polarization mode dispersion-intermodal dispersion-
dispersion optimization of single mode fiber-characteristics of single mode fiber-R-I Profile-
cutoff wave length-dispersion calculation-mode field diameter.
UNIT III OPTICAL SOURCES AND DETECTORS 9
Sources: Intrinsic and extrinsic material-direct and indirect band gaps-LED-LED structures-
surface emitting LED-Edge emitting LED-quantum efficiency and LED power-light source
materials-modulation of LED-LASER diodes-modes and threshold conditions-Rate
equations-external quantum efficiency-resonant frequencies-structures and radiation
patterns-single mode laser-external modulation-temperature effort.
Detectors: PIN photo detector-Avalanche photo diodes-Photo detector noise-noise
sources-SNR-detector response time-Avalanche multiplication noise-temperature effects-
comparisons of photo detectors.
UNIT IV OPTICAL RECEIVER, MEASUREMENTS AND COUPLING 9
Fundamental receiver operation-preamplifiers-digital signal transmission-error sources-Front
end amplifiers-digital receiver performance-probability of error-receiver sensitivity-quantum
limit.
Optical power measurement-attenuation measurement-dispersion measurement- Fiber
Numerical Aperture Measurements- Fiber cut- off Wave length Measurements- Fiber
diameter measurements-Source to Fiber Power Launching-Lensing Schemes for Coupling
Management-Fiber to Fiber Joints-LED Coupling to Single Mode Fibers-Fiber Splicing-
Optical Fiber connectors.
UNIT V OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS 9
System design consideration Point – to –Point link design –Link power budget –rise time
budget, WDM –Passive DWDM Components-Elements of optical networks-SONET/SDH-
Optical Interfaces-SONET/SDH Rings and Networks-High speed light wave Links-OADM
configuration-Optical ETHERNET-Soliton.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
76
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Realize basic elements in optical fibers, different modes and configurations.
Analyze the transmission characteristics associated with dispersion and polarization
techniques.
Design optical sources and detectors with their use in optical communication
system.
Construct fiber optic receiver systems, measurements and coupling techniques.
Design optical communication systems and its networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P Chakrabarti, "Optical Fiber Communication‖, McGraw Hill Education (India)Private
Limited, 2016 (UNIT I, II, III)
2. Gred Keiser,"Optical Fiber Communication‖, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited. Fifth Edition, Reprint 2013. (UNIT I, IV, V)
REFERENCES:
1. John M.Senior, ―Optical fiber communication‖, Pearson Education, second
edition.2007.
2. Rajiv Ramaswami, ―Optical Networks ― , Second Edition, Elsevier , 2004.
3. J.Gower, ―Optical Communication System‖, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
4. Govind P. Agrawal, ―Fiber-optic communication systems‖, third edition, John Wiley
& sons, 2004.
EC8791 EMBEDDED AND REAL TIME SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Understand the concepts of embedded system design and analysis
Learn the architecture and programming of ARM processor
Be exposed to the basic concepts of embedded programming
Learn the real time operating systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDEDSYSTEM DESIGN 9
Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design
example: Model train controller- Design methodologies- Design flows - Requirement
Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture design – Quality Assurance
techniques - Designing with computing platforms – consumer electronics architecture –
platform-level performance analysis.
UNIT II ARM PROCESSOR AND PERIPHERALS 9
ARM Architecture Versions – ARM Architecture – Instruction Set – Stacks and
Subroutines – Features of the LPC 214X Family – Peripherals – The Timer Unit – Pulse
Width Modulation Unit – UART – Block Diagram of ARM9 and ARM Cortex M3 MCU.
UNIT III EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 9
Components for embedded programs- Models of programs- Assembly, linking and loading
– compilation techniques- Program level performance analysis – Software performance
optimization – Program level energy and power analysis and optimization – Analysis and
optimization of program size- Program validation and testing.
77
UNIT IV REAL TIME SYSTEMS 9
Structure of a Real Time System –– Estimating program run times – Task Assignment and
Scheduling – Fault Tolerance Techniques – Reliability, Evaluation – Clock Synchronisation.
UNIT V PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Introduction – Multiple tasks and multiple processes – Multirate systems- Preemptive real-
time operating systems- Priority based scheduling- Interprocess communication mechanisms
– Evaluating operating system performance- power optimization strategies for processes –
Example Real time operating systems-POSIX-Windows CE. - Distributed embedded systems
– MPSoCs and shared memory multiprocessors. – Design Example - Audio player, Engine
control unit – Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor
Outline the concepts of embedded systems
Explain the basic concepts of real time operating system design
Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Marilyn Wolf, ―Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System
Design‖, Third Edition ―Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012. (UNIT
I, II, III, V)
2. Jane W.S.Liu,‖ Real Time Systems‖, Pearson Education, Third Indian Reprint, 2003.(UNIT
IV)
REFERENCES:
1. Lyla B.Das, ―Embedded Systems : An Integrated Approach‖ Pearson Education, 2013.
2. Jonathan W.Valvano, ―Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing‖, Third
Edition Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. David. E. Simon, ―An Embedded Software Primer‖, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-
Wesley Professional, 2007.
4. Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, ―An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design
to Networking with C/C++‖, Prentice Hall, 1999.
5. C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, ―Real-Time Systems‖, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997
6. K.V.K.K.Prasad, ―Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming‖,
Dream Tech Press, 2005.
7. Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, ―Embedded Real Time Systems Programming‖, Tata Mc Graw
Hill, 2004.
78
EC8702 AD HOC AND WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Learn Ad hoc network and Sensor Network fundamentals
Understand the different routing protocols
Have an in-depth knowledge on sensor network architecture and design issues
Understand the transport layer and security issues possible in Ad hoc and Sensor
networks
Have an exposure to mote programming platforms and tools
UNIT I AD HOC NETWORKS – INTRODUCTION AND ROUTING 9
PROTOCOLS
Elements of Ad hoc Wireless Networks, Issues in Ad hoc wireless networks, Example
commercial applications of Ad hoc networking, Ad hoc wireless Internet, Issues in Designing
a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks, Classifications of Routing Protocols, Table
Driven Routing Protocols - Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV), On–Demand
Routing protocols –Ad hoc On–Demand Distance Vector Routing (AODV).
UNIT II SENSOR NETWORKS – INTRODUCTION & ARCHITECTURES 9
Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor
Networks, WSN application examples, Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components,
Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Network Architecture - Sensor Network Scenarios,
Transceiver Design Considerations, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit.
UNIT III WSN NETWORKING CONCEPTS AND PROTOCOLS 9
MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols And Wakeup
Concepts - S-MAC, The Mediation Device Protocol, Contention based protocols - PAMAS,
Schedule based protocols – LEACH, IEEE 802.15.4 MAC protocol, Routing Protocols-
Energy Efficient Routing, Challenges and Issues in Transport layer protocol.
UNIT IV SENSOR NETWORK SECURITY 9
Network Security Requirements, Issues and Challenges in Security Provisioning, Network
Security Attacks, Layer wise attacks in wireless sensor networks, possible solutions for
jamming, tampering, black hole attack, flooding attack. Key Distribution and Management,
Secure Routing – SPINS, reliability requirements in sensor networks.
UNIT V SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS 9
Sensor Node Hardware – Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node-level software
platforms – TinyOS, nesC, CONTIKIOS, Node-level Simulators – NS2 and its extension to
sensor networks, COOJA, TOSSIM, Programming beyond individual nodes – State centric
programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student would be able to:
Know the basics of Ad hoc networks and Wireless Sensor Networks
Apply this knowledge to identify the suitable routing algorithm based on the network and
user requirement
Apply the knowledge to identify appropriate physical and MAC layer protocols
Understand the transport layer and security issues possible in Ad hoc and sensor
networks.
Be familiar with the OS used in Wireless Sensor Networks and build basic modules
79
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B. S. Manoj, ―Ad Hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and
Protocols‖, Prentice Hall, PTR, 2004. (UNIT I)
2. Holger Karl , Andreas willig, ―Protocol and Architecture for Wireless Sensor Networks‖,
John wiley publication, Jan 2006.(UNIT II-V)
REFERENCES:
1. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, ―Wireless Sensor Networks: an information processing
approach‖, Elsevier publication, 2004.
2. Charles E. Perkins, ―Ad Hoc Networking‖, Addison Wesley, 2000.
3. I.F. Akyildiz, W. Su, Sankarasubramaniam, E. Cayirci, ―Wireless sensor networks: a
survey‖, computer networks, Elsevier, 2002, 394 - 422.
EC8711 EMBEDDED LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Learn the working of ARM processor
Understand the Building Blocks of Embedded Systems
Learn the concept of memory map and memory interface
Write programs to interface memory, I/Os with processor
Study the interrupt performance
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Study of ARM evaluation system
2. Interfacing ADC and DAC.
3. Interfacing LED and PWM.
4. Interfacing real time clock and serial port.
5. Interfacing keyboard and LCD.
6. Interfacing EPROM and interrupt.
7. Mailbox.
8. Interrupt performance characteristics of ARM and FPGA.
9. Flashing of LEDS.
10. Interfacing stepper motor and temperature sensor.
11. Implementing zigbee protocol with ARM.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Write programs in ARM for a specific Application
Interface memory, A/D and D/A convertors with ARM system
Analyze the performance of interrupt
Write program for interfacing keyboard, display, motor and sensor.
Formulate a mini project using embedded system
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS (3 students per batch)
Embedded trainer kits with ARM board 10 Nos
Embedded trainer kits suitable for wireless communication 10 Nos
Adequate quantities of Hardware, software and consumables
80
EC8761 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Understand the working principle of optical sources, detector, fibers
Develop understanding of simple optical communication link
Understand the measurement of BER, Pulse broadening
Understand and capture an experimental approach to digital wireless communication
Understand actual communication waveforms that will be sent and received across
wireless channel
LIST OF OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Measurement of connector, bending and fiber attenuation losses.
2. Numerical Aperture and Mode Characteristics of Fibers.
3. DC Characteristics of LED and PIN Photo diode.
4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link Characterization - frequency response(analog), eye diagram
and BER (digital)
LIST OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION EXPERIMENTS
1. Wireless Channel Simulation including fading and Doppler effects
2. Simulation of Channel Estimation, Synchronization & Equalization techniques
3. Analysing Impact of Pulse Shaping and Matched Filtering using Software Defined Radios
4. OFDM Signal Transmission and Reception using Software Defined Radios
LIST OF MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS
1. VSWR and Impedance Measurement and Impedance Matching
2. Characterization of Directional Couplers, Isolators, Circulators
3. Gunn Diode Characteristics
4. Microwave IC – Filter Characteristics
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this lab course, the student would be able to
Analyze the performance of simple optical link by measurement of losses and Analyzing
the mode characteristics of fiber
Analyze the Eye Pattern, Pulse broadening of optical fiber and the impact on BER
Estimate the Wireless Channel Characteristics and Analyze the performance of Wireless
Communication System
Understand the intricacies in Microwave System design
81
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS 3 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.NO NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1 Trainer kit for carrying out LED and PIN diode 2 Nos
characteristics, Digital multi meter, optical power
meter
2 Trainer kit for determining the mode characteristics, 2 Nos
losses in optical fiber
3 Trainer kit for analyzing Analog and Digital link 2 Nos
performance, 2 Mbps PRBS Data source, 10 MHz
signal generator, 20 MHz Digital storage
Oscilloscope
4 Kit for measuring Numerical aperture and 2 Nos
Attenuation of fiber
5 Advanced Optical fiber trainer kit for PC to PC 2 Nos
communication, BER Measurement, Pulse
broadening.
5 MM/SM Glass and plastic fiber patch chords with 2 sets
ST/SC/E2000 connectors
6 LEDs with ST / SC / E2000 receptacles – 650 / 850 2 sets
nm
7 PIN PDs with ST / SC / E2000 receptacles – 650 / 2 sets
850 nm
8 Digital Communications Teaching Bundle 10 Users
(LabVIEW/MATLAB/Equivalent software tools)
9 Transmit/receive pair of NI USRP-2920 transceivers 2 Nos
(50 MHz to 2.2 GHz)
CS8392 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java
To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
To define exceptions and use I/O streams
To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10
Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance -
Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source File
-Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in Java
– constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types, Variables,
Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.
82
UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9
Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining an
interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings
UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9
Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions - built in exceptions, creating
own exception, Stack Trace Elements.
Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and Character streams – Reading and Writing
Console – Reading and Writing Files
UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8
Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, Inter thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups.
Generic Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and
Limitations.
UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9
Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts, and
images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse events -
AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing Components – Text
Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists- choices- Scrollbars –
Windows –Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Develop Java programs using OOP principles
Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams
Develop Java applications with threads and generics classes
Develop interactive Java programs using swings
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, ―Java The complete reference‖, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, ―Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals‖, 9th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, ―Java SE 8 for programmers‖, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Steven Holzner, ―Java 2 Black book‖, Dreamtech press, 2011.
3. Timothy Budd, ―Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java‖, Updated Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.
83
EC8073 MEDICAL ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To gain knowledge about the various physiological parameters both electrical and non
electrical and the methods of recording and also the method of transmitting these
parameters
To study about the various assist devices used in the hospitals
To gain knowledge about equipment used for physical medicine and the various recently
developed diagnostic and therapeutic techniques.
UNIT I ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING 9
Sources of bio medical signals, Bio-potentials, Biopotential electrodes, biological amplifiers, ECG,
EEG, EMG, PCG, typical waveforms and signal characteristics
UNIT II BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER 9
MEASUREMENT
pH, PO2, PCO2, Colorimeter, Blood flow meter, Cardiac output, respiratory, blood pressure,
temperature and pulse measurement, Blood Cell Counters.
UNIT III ASSIST DEVICES 9
Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Dialyser, Ventilators, Magnetic Resonance Imaging
Systems, Ultrasonic Imaging Systems.
UNIT IV PHYSICAL MEDICINE AND BIOTELEMETRY 9
Diathermies- Shortwave, ultrasonic and microwave type and their applications, Surgical
Diathermy, Biotelemetry.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9
Telemedicine, Insulin Pumps, Radio pill, Endomicroscopy, Brain machine interface, Lab on a chip.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:
Know the human body electro- physiological parameters and recording of bio-potentials
Comprehend the non-electrical physiological parameters and their measurement – body
temperature, blood pressure, pulse, blood cell count, blood flow meter etc.
Interpret the various assist devices used in the hospitals viz. pacemakers, defibrillators,
dialyzers and ventilators
Comprehend physical medicine methods eg. ultrasonic, shortwave, microwave surgical
diathermies , and bio-telemetry principles and methods
Know about recent trends in medical instrumentation
TEXT BOOK:
1. Leslie Cromwell, ―Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement‖, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007. (UNIT I – V)
REFERENCES:
1. Khandpur, R.S., ―Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation‖, TATA Mc Graw-Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
2. John G.Webster, ―Medical Instrumentation Application and Design‖, 3rd Edition, Wiley India
Edition, 2007
3. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, ―Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology‖, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 2004.
84
CS8493 OPERATING SYSTEMS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems.
To understand Processes and Threads
To analyze Scheduling algorithms.
To understand the concept of Deadlocks.
To analyze various memory management schemes.
To understand I/O management and File systems.
To be familiar with the basics of Linux system and Mobile OS like iOS and Android.
UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEM OVERVIEW 7
Computer System Overview-Basic Elements, Instruction Execution, Interrupts, Memory Hierarchy,
Cache Memory, Direct Memory Access, Multiprocessor and Multicore Organization. Operating
system overview-objectives and functions, Evolution of Operating System.- Computer System
Organization Operating System Structure and Operations- System Calls, System Programs, OS
Generation and System Boot.
UNIT II PROCESS MANAGEMENT 11
Processes - Process Concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on Processes, Interprocess
Communication; CPU Scheduling - Scheduling criteria, Scheduling algorithms, Multiple-processor
scheduling, Real time scheduling; Threads- Overview, Multithreading models, Threading issues;
Process Synchronization - The critical-section problem, Synchronization hardware, Mutex locks,
Semaphores, Classic problems of synchronization, Critical regions, Monitors; Deadlock - System
model, Deadlock characterization, Methods for handling deadlocks, Deadlock prevention,
Deadlock avoidance, Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.
UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9
Main Memory – Background, Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Segmentation,
Segmentation with paging, 32 and 64 bit architecture Examples; Virtual Memory – Background,
Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Allocation, Thrashing; Allocating Kernel Memory, OS
Examples.
UNIT IV FILE SYSTEMS AND I/O SYSTEMS 9
Mass Storage system – Overview of Mass Storage Structure, Disk Structure, Disk Scheduling and
Management, swap space management; File-System Interface - File concept, Access methods,
Directory Structure, Directory organization, File system mounting, File Sharing and Protection; File
System Implementation- File System Structure, Directory implementation, Allocation Methods,
Free Space Management, Efficiency and Performance, Recovery; I/O Systems – I/O Hardware,
Application I/O interface, Kernel I/O subsystem, Streams, Performance.
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
Linux System - Design Principles, Kernel Modules, Process Management, Scheduling, Memory
Management, Input-Output Management, File System, Interprocess Communication; Mobile OS -
iOS and Android - Architecture and SDK Framework, Media Layer, Services Layer, Core OS
Layer, File System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Analyze various scheduling algorithms.
Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
Understand the functionality of file systems.
Perform administrative tasks on Linux Servers and compare iOS and Android Operating
Systems.
85
TEXT BOOK :
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, ―Operating System Concepts‖, 9th
Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
REFERENCES :
1. Ramaz Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, ―Operating Systems – A Spiral Approach‖,
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
2. Achyut S.Godbole, Atul Kahate, ― Operating Systems‖, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.
3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, ―Modern Operating Systems‖, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
4. Gary Nutt, ―Operating Systems‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
5. Harvey M. Deital, ―Operating Systems‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
6. Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati, ―Understanding the Linux kernel‖, 3rd edition, O‘Reilly,
2005.
7. Neil Smyth, ―iPhone iOS 4 Development Essentials – Xcode‖, Fourth Edition, Payload media,
2011.
EC8074 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning, applications
and social aspects of robots
To study about the electrical drive systems and sensors used in robotics for various
applications
To learn about analyzing robot kinematics, dynamics through different methodologies and
study various design aspects of robot arm manipulator and end-effector
To learn about various motion planning techniques and the associated control architecture
To understand the implications of AI and other trending concepts of robotics
UNIT I FOUNDATION FOR BEGINNERS 9
Introduction -- brief history, definition, anatomy, types, classification, specification and need based
applications; role and need of robots for the immediate problems of the society, future of mankind
and automation-ethical issues; industrial scenario local and global, case studies on mobile robot
research platform and industrial serial arm manipulator
UNIT II BUILDING BLOCKS OF A ROBOT 9
Types of electric motors - DC, Servo, Stepper; specification, drives for motors - speed & direction
control and circuitry, Selection criterion for actuators, direct drives, non-traditional actuators;
Sensors for localization, navigation, obstacle avoidance and path planning in known and unknown
environments – optical, inertial, thermal, chemical, biosensor, other common sensors; Case study
on choice of sensors and actuators for maze solving robot and self driving cars
86
UNIT III KINEMATICS, DYNAMICS AND DESIGN OF ROBOTS & END-EFFECTORS 9
Robot kinematics - Geometric approach for 2R, 3R manipulators, homogenous transformation
using D-H representation, kinematics of WMR, Lagrangian formulation for 2R robot dynamics;
Mechanical design aspects of a 2R manipulator, WMR; End-effector - common types and design
case study.
UNIT IV NAVIGATION, PATH PLANNING AND CONTROL ARCHITECTURE 9
Mapping & Navigation – SLAM, Path planning for serial manipulators; types of control
architectures - Cartesian control, Force control and hybrid position/force control, Behaviour based
control, application of Neural network, fuzzy logic, optimization algorithms for navigation problems,
programming methodologies of a robot
UNIT V AI AND OTHER RESEARCH TRENDS IN ROBOTICS 9
Application of Machine learning - AI, Expert systems; Tele-robotics and Virtual Reality, Micro &
Nanorobots, Unmanned vehicles, Cognitive robotics, Evolutionary robotics, Humanoids
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student should be able to:
Explain the concepts of industrial robots in terms of classification, specifications and
coordinate systems, along with the need and application of robots & automation
Examine different sensors and actuators for applications like maze solving and self driving
cars.
Design a 2R robot & an end-effector and solve the kinematics and dynamics of motion for
robots.
Explain navigation and path planning techniques along with the control architectures
adopted for robot motion planning.
Describe the impact and progress in AI and other research trends in the field of robotics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Saeed. B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics, Analysis, system, Applications, Pearson
educations, 2002
2. Roland Siegwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh, Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots, MIT
Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Richard David Klafter, Thomas A. Chmielewski, Michael Negin, Robotic engineering: an
integrated approach, Prentice Hall, 1989
2. Craig, J. J., Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley,
1989.
3. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzalez and C.S.G. Lee, Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence,
McGraw-Hill, 1987.
4. Wesley E Snyder R, Industrial Robots, Computer Interfacing and Control, Prentice Hall
International Edition, 1988.
5. Robin Murphy, Introduction to AI Robotics, MIT Press, 2000
6. Ronald C. Arkin, Behavior-based Robotics, MIT Press, 1998
7. N. P. Padhy, Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems, Oxford University Press, 2005
8. Stefano Nolfi, Dario Floreano, Evolutionary Robotics – The Biology, Intelligence and
Technology of Self–Organizing Machines (Intelligent Robotics and Autonomous Agents
series), MIT Press, 2004.
87
EC8075 NANOTECHNOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide a broad view of the nascent field of nanoscience and nanotechnology to
undergraduates
To explore the basics of nanomaterial synthesis and characterization.
To introduce the applications of nanotechnology
UINI I INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Basic Structure of Nanoparticles- Kinetics in Nanostructured Materials- Zero dimensional, size and
shape of nanoparticles; one-dimensional and two dimensional nanostructures- clusters of metals
and semiconductors, bio nano-particles.
UNIT II FABRICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Types of Nanomaterials (Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes); Gas, liquid, and solid –phase synthesis of nanomaterials; Lithography techniques
(Photolithography, Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography); Thin film deposition; Electrospinning.
Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNIT III PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS 9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance; Methods for the measurement of
nanomaterials; Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM. Confocal and TIRF
imaging.
UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES 9
Carbon Nanotubes, Fullerenes, Nanowires, Quantum Dots. Applications of nanostructures.
Reinforcement in Ceramics, Drug delivery, Giant magnetoresistance, etc. Cells response to
Nanostructures.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nano electronics, Nano sensors, Nanotechnology in Diagnostics applications, Environmental and
Agricultural Applications of nanotechnology, Nano technology for energy systems
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Describe the basic science behind the properties of materials.
Interpret the creation, characterization, and manipulation of nanoscale materials.
Comprehend the exciting applications of nanotechnology at the leading edge of scientific
research
Apply their knowledge of nanotechnology to identify how they can be exploited for new
applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology by Bharat Bhushan 2004.(Unit I – V)
2. Encyclopedia of Nanotechnology - Hari Singh Nalwa 2004. (Unit I – V)
REFERENCES:
1. Nanomaterials, Nanotechnologies and Design: an Introduction to Engineers and
Architects, D. Michael Ashby, Paulo Ferreira, Daniel L. Schodek, Butterworth-Heinemann,
2009.
2. Handbook of Nanophase and Nanostructured Materials (in four volumes), Eds: Z.L. Wang,
Y. Liu, Z. Zhang, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, 2003.
3. Handbook of Nanoceramics and their Based Nanodevices (Vol. 2) Edited by Tseung-Yuen
Tseng and Hari Singh Nalwa, American Scientific Publishers.
88
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; collective /
Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National and
State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO‘s, Media, Educational Institutions,
Social Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
REFERENCES:
1. Kapoor S.K., ―Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws‖, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
2. Chandra U., ―Human Rights‖, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran
and Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction,
Customer complaints, Customer retention.
89
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee
involvement - Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward,
Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier
partnership - Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts,
Methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason
to bench mark, Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss
function - TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration- ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001—Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe
and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, ―Total Quality Management‖, Pearson Education Asia, Revised
Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards
L T P C
CS8792 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand Cryptography Theories, Algorithms and Systems.
To understand necessary Approaches and Techniques to build protection
mechanisms in order to secure computer networks.
90
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Security trends - Legal, Ethical and Professional Aspects of Security, Need for Security at
Multiple levels, Security Policies - Model of network security – Security attacks, services and
mechanisms – OSI security architecture – Classical encryption techniques: substitution
techniques, transposition techniques, steganography).- Foundations of modern
cryptography: perfect security – information theory – product cryptosystem – cryptanalysis.
UNIT II SYMMETRIC CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
MATHEMATICS OF SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Algebraic structures - Modular
arithmetic-Euclid‘s algorithm- Congruence and matrices - Groups, Rings, Fields- Finite
fields- SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block cipher Principles of DES – Strength of
DES – Differential and linear cryptanalysis - Block cipher design principles – Block cipher
mode of operation – Evaluation criteria for AES – Advanced Encryption Standard - RC4 –
Key distribution.
UNIT III PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
MATHEMATICS OF ASYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY: Primes – Primality Testing –
Factorization – Euler‘s totient function, Fermat‘s and Euler‘s Theorem - Chinese Remainder
Theorem – Exponentiation and logarithm - ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA
cryptosystem – Key distribution – Key management – Diffie Hellman key exchange -
ElGamal cryptosystem – Elliptic curve arithmetic-Elliptic curve cryptography.
UNIT IV MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION AND INTEGRITY 9
Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of
hash function and MAC – SHA –Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS- Entity
Authentication: Biometrics, Passwords, Challenge Response protocols- Authentication
applications - Kerberos, X.509
UNIT V SECURITY PRACTICE AND SYSTEM SECURITY 9
Electronic Mail security – PGP, S/MIME – IP security – Web Security - SYSTEM
SECURITY: Intruders – Malicious software – viruses – Firewalls.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats and
vulnerabilities
Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms
Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
Apply the various Authentication schemes to simulate different applications.
Understand various Security practices and System security standards
TEXT BOOK:
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, PHI
3rd Edition, 2006.
REFERENCES
1. C K Shyamala, N Harini and Dr. T R Padmanabhan: Cryptography and Network
Security, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd
2. BehrouzA.Foruzan, Cryptography and Network Security, Tata McGraw Hill 2007.
3. Charlie Kaufman, Radia Perlman, and Mike Speciner, Network Security: PRIVATE
Communication in a PUBLIC World, Prentice Hall, ISBN 0-13-046019-2
91
EC8091 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn and understand the concepts of stationary and non-stationary random signals
and analysis & characterization of discrete-time random processes
To enunciate the significance of estimation of power spectral density of random processes
To introduce the principles of optimum filters such as Wiener and Kalman filters
To introduce the principles of adaptive filters and their applications to communication
engineering
To introduce the concepts of multi-resolution analysis
UNIT I DISCRETE-TIME RANDOM PROCESSES 9
Random variables - ensemble averages a review, random processes - ensemble averages,
autocorrelation and autocovariance matrices, ergodic random process, white noise, filtering
random processes, spectral factorization, special types of random processes - AR, MA, ARMA
UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 10
Bias and consistency, Non-parametric methods - Periodogram, modified-Periodogram -
performance analysis. Bartlett's method, Welch's method, Blackman-Tukey method. Performance
comparison. Parametric methods - autoregressive (AR) spectrum estimation - autocorrelation
method, Prony's method, solution using Levinson Durbin recursion.
UNIT III OPTIMUM FILTERS 9
Wiener filters - FIR Wiener filter - discrete Wiener Hopf equation, Applications - filtering, linear
prediction. IIR Wiener filter - causal and non-causal filters. Recursive estimators - discrete Kalman
filter.
UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9
Principles and properties of adaptive filters - FIR adaptive filters. Adaptive algorithms - steepest
descent algorithm, the LMS algorithm - convergence. Applications of adaptive filtering - noise
cancellation, channel equalization.
UNIT V MULTIRESOLUTION ANALYSIS 8
Short-time Fourier transform - Heisenberg uncertainty principle. Principles of multi-resolution
analysis - sub-band coding, the continuous and discrete wavelet transform - properties.
Applications of wavelet transform - noise reduction, image compression.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Articulate and apply the concepts of special random processes in practical applications
Choose appropriate spectrum estimation techniques for a given random process
Apply optimum filters appropriately for a given communication application
Apply appropriate adaptive algorithm for processing non-stationary signals
Apply and analyse wavelet transforms for signal and image processing based applications
92
TEXT BOOKS
1. Monson H. Hayes, "Statistical digital signal processing and modeling", John Wiley and Sons
Inc. New York, Indian reprint 2008. (UNIT I-IV)
2. P. P. Vaidyanathan, "Multirate systems and filter banks", Prentice Hall Inc. 1993 (UNIT V)
REFERENCES:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, ―Digital Signal Processing – Principles, Algorithms
& Applications‖, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
2. Sophoncles J. Orfanidis, "Optimum signal processing", McGraw Hill, 2000
EC8001 MEMS AND NEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of micro and nano electromechanical devices
To know the fabrication process of Microsystems
To know the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators
To introduce the concepts of quantum mechanics and nano systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS AND NEMS 9
Introduction to Design of MEMS and NEMS, Overview of Nano and Microelectromechanical
Systems, Applications of Micro and Nanoelectromechanical systems, Materials for MEMS and
NEMS: Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals.
UNIT II MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, CVD, Sputtering Etching techniques,
Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, LIGA.
UNIT III MICRO SENSORS 9
MEMS Sensors: Design of Acoustic wave sensors, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive Pressure
sensors, Case study: Piezoelectric energy harvester
UNIT IV MICRO ACTUATORS 9
Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys,
Actuation using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces, Case Study:RF Switch.
UNIT V NANO DEVICES 9
Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics, Shrodinger Equation, ZnO nanorods based NEMS
device: Gas sensor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:
Interpret the basics of micro/nano electromechanical systems including their applications
and advantages
Recognize the use of materials in micro fabrication and describe the fabrication processes
including surface micromachining, bulk micromachining and LIGA.
Analyze the key performance aspects of electromechanical transducers including sensors
and actuators
Comprehend the theoretical foundations of quantum mechanics and Nano systems
93
REFERENCES:
1. Marc Madou, ―Fundamentals of Microfabrication‖, CRC press 1997.
2. Stephen D. Senturia,‖ Micro system Design‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Tai Ran Hsu ,‖MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture‖ ,Tata Mcraw Hill, 2002.
4. Chang Liu, ―Foundations of MEMS‖, Pearson education India limited, 2006,
5. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, ―MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and Structures‖ CRC
Press, 2002
EC8002 MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION AND COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the compression schemes for text, voice, image and video
To understand the QoS issues in multimedia network
To know the communication protocols for multimedia networking
UNIT I AUDIO COMPRESSION 9
Sampling and Quantization of Speech (PCM) - Adaptive differential PCM - Delta Modulation -
Vector Quantization- Linear predictive coding (LPC) - Code excited Linear predictive Coding
(CELP)
UNIT II IMAGE AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9
Graphics Interchange format- Tagged image file format-Digitized documents- Digitized pictures-
JPEG-Video Encoding-Motion estimation –Overview of H.263 and MPEG-2
UNIT III TEXT COMPRESSION 7
Static and Dynamic Huffman coding – Arithmetic coding –Lempel-Ziv coding – LZW coding
UNIT IV GUARANTEED SERVICE MODEL 10
Best Effort service model – Scheduling and Dropping policies – Network Performance Parameters
– Quality of Service and metrics – WFQ and its variants – Random Early Detection – QoS aware
Routing – Admission Control – Resource Reservation – RSVP - Traffic Shaping Algorithms –
Caching – Laissez Faire Approach - Possible Architectures – An Overview of QoS Architectures
UNIT V MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION 10
Stream characteristics for Continuous media – Temporal Relationship – Object Stream
Interactions, Media Levity, Media Synchronization – Models for Temporal Specifications –
Streaming of Audio and Video – Jitter – Fixed playout and Adaptive playout – Recovering from
packet loss – RTSP –– Multimedia Communication Standards – RTP/RTCP – SIP and H.263
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Design audio compression techniques
Configure Text, image and video compression techniques
Select suitable service model for specific application
Configure multimedia communication network
94
TEXT BOOK:
1. Fred Halsall, ―Multimedia communication- Applications, Networks, Protocols and
Standards‖, Pearson education, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Tay Vaughan, ―Multimedia Making it work , McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2006.
2. Kurose and W. Ross, ―Computer Networking ―A Top Down Approach, Pearson education,
3rd ed, 2005.
3. KR. Rao,Z S Bojkovic, D A Milovanovic, ―Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques,
Standards, and Networks‖, Pearson Education 2007
4. R. Steimnetz, K. Nahrstedt, ―Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications‖,
Pearson Education, First ed, 1995.
5. Nalin K Sharda, ‗Multimedia Information Networking‘, Prentice Hall of India, 1999
6. Aura Ganz, Zvi Ganz and Kitti Wongthawaravat, ‗Multimedia Wireless Networks:
Technologies, Standards and QoS‘, Prentice Hall, 2003.
7. Ellen Kayata Wesel, ‗Wireless Multimedia Communications: Networking Video, Voice and
Data‘, Addision Wesley, 1998
EC8003 CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the fundamentals of analog circuits and MOS device models
To gain knowledge on various configurations of MOS transistors and feedback concepts
To study the characteristics of noise and frequency response of the amplifier
To learn the concepts of Op-Amp frequency compensation, capacitor switches and PLLs
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANALOG IC DESIGN AND CURRENT MIRRORS 9
Concepts of Analog Design - General consideration of MOS devices – MOS I/V Characteristics –
Second order effects – MOS device models. Basic current mirrors- Cascode current mirrors-
Active current mirrors- Large and Small signal analysis- Common mode properties.
UNIT II AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK 9
Basic Concepts – Common source stage- Source follower- Common gate stage- Cascode stage.
Single ended and differential operation- Basic Differential pair- Common mode response-
Differential pair with MOS loads- Gilbert Cell. Feedback- General Consideration of feedback
circuits- Feedback topologies- Effect of loading- Effect of feedback on Noise.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS AND NOISE 9
General considerations- Miller Effect and Association of Poles with Nodes, Common source
stage- Source followers- Common gate stage- Cascode stage- Differential pair. Noise- Statistical
characteristics of noise- Types of noise- Representation of noise in circuits- Noise in single stage
amplifiers- Noise in differential pairs- Noise Bandwidth.
95
UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER STABILITY AND FREQUENCY 9
COMPENSATION
General Considerations- One and Two Stage Op Amps- Gain Boosting- Comparison- Common
mode feedback- Input range limitations- Slew rate- Power Supply Rejection- Noise in Op Amps-
General consideration of stability and frequency compensation- Multipole system- Phase margin-
Frequency compensation- Compensation of two stage op Amps- Other compensation techniques.
UNIT V SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS AND PLLS 9
General Considerations- Sampling switches- Switched Capacitor Amplifiers- Switched Capacitor
Integrator- Switched Capacitor Common mode feedback. Phase Locked Loops-Simple PLL-
Charge pump PLLs - Non ideal Effects in PLLs- Delay locked loops- its Applications.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to:
Realize the concepts of Analog MOS devices and current mirror circuits.
Design different configuration of Amplifiers and feedback circuits.
Analyze the characteristics of frequency response of the amplifier and its noise.
Analyze the performance of the stability and frequency compensation techniques of Op-
Amp Circuits.
Construct switched capacitor circuits and PLLs
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behzad Razavi, ―Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits‖, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001,
33rd re-print, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holmberg ―CMOS Analog Circuit Design‖ Second Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2004.
2. Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, Robert G. Meyer, Analysis and Design of
Analog Integrated Circuits, 5th Edition, Wiley, 2009
3. Grebene, ―Bipolar and MOS Analog Integrated circuit design‖, John Wiley & sons, Inc.,
2003
EC8004 WIRELESS NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the concept about Wireless networks, protocol stack and standards
To understand and analyse the network layer solutions for Wireless networks
To study about fundamentals of 3G Services, its protocols and applications
To have in depth knowledge on internetworking of WLAN and WWAN
To learn about evolution of 4G Networks, its architecture and applications
UNIT I WIRELESS LAN 9
Introduction-WLAN technologies: - IEEE802.11: System architecture, protocol architecture,
802.11b, 802.11a – Hiper LAN: WATM, BRAN, HiperLAN2 – Bluetooth: Architecture, WPAN –
IEEE 802.15.4, Wireless USB, Zigbee, 6LoWPAN, WirelessHART
96
UNIT II MOBILE NETWORK LAYER 9
Introduction - Mobile IP: IP packet delivery, Agent discovery, tunneling and encapsulation,
IPV6-Network layer in the internet- Mobile IP session initiation protocol - mobile ad-hoc
network: Routing: Destination Sequence distance vector, IoT: CoAP
UNIT III 3G OVERVIEW 9
Overview of UTMS Terrestrial Radio access network-UMTS Core network Architecture: 3GPP
Architecture, User equipment, CDMA2000 overview- Radio and Network components,
Network structure, Radio Network, TD-CDMA, TD – SCDMA.
UNIT IV INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WLANS AND WWANS 9
Internetworking objectives and requirements, Schemes to connect WLANS and 3G Networks,
Session Mobility, Internetworking Architecture for WLAN and GPRS, System Description,
Local Multipoint Distribution Service, Multichannel Multipoint Distribution System.
UNIT V 4G & Beyond 9
Introduction – 4G vision – 4G features and challenges - Applications of 4G – 4G Technologies:
Multicarrier Modulation, Smart antenna techniques, IMS Architecture, LTE, Advanced
Broadband Wireless Access and Services, MVNO.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student would be able to:
Conversant with the latest 3G/4G networks and its architecture
Design and implement wireless network environment for any application using latest
wireless protocols and standards
Ability to select the suitable network depending on the availability and requirement
Implement different type of applications for smart phones and mobile devices with
latest network strategies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jochen Schiller, ‖Mobile Communications‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education
2012.(Unit I,II,III)
2. Vijay Garg, ―Wireless Communications and networking‖, First Edition, Elsevier 2007.(Unit
IV,V)
REFERENCES:
1. Erik Dahlman, Stefan Parkvall, Johan Skold and Per Beming, "3G Evolution HSPA and LTE
for Mobile Broadband‖, Second Edition, Academic Press, 2008.
2. Anurag Kumar, D.Manjunath, Joy kuri, ―Wireless Networking‖, First Edition, Elsevier 2011.
3. Simon Haykin , Michael Moher, David Koilpillai, ―Modern Wireless Communications‖, First
Edition, Pearson Education 2013
97
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from
WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological
Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act
of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition
and IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S. V. Satakar, ―Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, ―Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets‖, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,‖Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy‖,
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
98
EC8092 ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the importance of improving capacity of wireless channel
using MIMO
To enable understanding of channel impairment mitigation using space-time block and
Trellis codes
To teach advanced MIMO system like layered space time codes, MU-MIMO System
and MIMO-OFDM systems
UNIT I CAPACITY OF WIRELESS CHANNELS 9
The crowded spectrum, need for high data rate, MIMO systems – Array Gain, Diversity Gain,
Data Pipes, Spatial MUX, MIMO System Model. MIMO System Capacity – channel known at
the TX, Channel unknown to the TX – capacity of deterministic channels, Random channels
and frequency selective channels.
UNIT II RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION 9
Radio wave propagation – Macroscopic fading- free space and out door, small scale fading
Fading measurements – Direct pulse measurements, spread spectrum correlation channel
sounding frequency domain channel sounding, Antenna Diversity – Diversity combining
methods.
UNIT III SPACE TIME BLOCK CODES 9
Delay Diversity scheme, Alamoti space time code – Maximum likelihood decoding maximum
ratio combining. Transmit diversity space time block codes for real signal constellation and
complex signal constellation - decoding of STBC.
UNIT IV SPACE TIME TRELLIS CODES 9
Space time coded systems, space time code word design criteria, design of space time T C
on slow fading channels, design of STTC on Fast Fading channels, performance analysis in
slow and fast fading channels, effect of imperfect channel estimation and Antenna correlation
on performance, comparison of STBC & STTC.
UNIT V LAYERED SPACE TIME CODES 9
LST transmitter – Horizontal and Vertical LST receiver – ML Rx, Zero forcing Rx; MMSE Rx,
SIC Rx, ZF V-blast Rx- MMSE V-blast Rx, Iterative Rx - capacity of MIMO – OFDM systems
– capacity of MIMO multi user systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student should be able to:
Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
Apply the knowledge about the importance of MIMO in today's communication
Appreciate the various methods for improving the data rate of wireless communication
system
REFERENCES:
1. Mohinder Jankiraman, Space-time codes and MIMO systems, Artech House,
Boston, London . www.artech house.com, ISBN 1-58053-865-7-2004
2. Paulraj Rohit Nabar, Dhananjay Gore, Introduction of space time wireless
communication systems, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
3. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Communication‖,
Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Sergio Verdu ― Multi User Detection‖ Cambridge University Press, 1998
99
EC8071 COGNITIVE RADIO L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the evolving software defined radio and cognitive radio techniques and
their essential functionalities
To study the basic architecture and standard for cognitive radio
To understand the physical, MAC and Network layer design of cognitive radio
To expose the student to evolving applications and advanced features of cognitive radio
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE-DEFINED RADIO AND COGNITIVE
RADIO 9
Evolution of Software Defined Radio and Cognitive radio: goals, benefits, definitions, architectures,
relations with other radios, issues, enabling technologies, radio frequency spectrum and
regulations.
UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE 9
Cognition cycle – orient, plan, decide and act phases, Organization, SDR as a platform for
Cognitive Radio – Hardware and Software Architectures, Overview of IEEE 802.22 standard for
broadband wireless access in TV bands.
UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS 9
Introduction – Primary user detection techniques – energy detection, feature detection, matched
filtering, cooperative detection and other approaches, Fundamental Tradeoffs in spectrum sensing,
Spectrum Sharing Models of Dynamic Spectrum Access - Unlicensed and Licensed Spectrum
Sharing, Fundamental Limits of Cognitive Radio.
UNIT IV MAC AND NETWORK LAYER DESIGN FOR COGNITIVE RADIO 9
MAC for cognitive radios – Polling, ALOHA, slotted ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA / CA, Network layer
design – routing in cognitive radios, flow control and error control techniques.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Overview of security issues in cognitive radios, auction based spectrum markets in cognitive radio
networks, public safety and cognitive radio, cognitive radio for Internet of Things.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Gain knowledge on the design principles on software defined radio and cognitive radio
Develop the ability to design and implement algorithms for cognitive radio spectrum sensing
and dynamic spectrum access
Build experiments and projects with real time wireless applications
Apply the knowledge of advanced features of cognitive radio for real world applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, Thomas Hou, ―Cognitive Radio Communications
and Networks‖, Academic Press, Elsevier, 2010. (Unit I to IV)
2. Huseyin Arslan (Ed.), ―Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive Wireless
Systems, Springer, 2007. (Unit V)
100
REFERENCES:
1. Bruce Fette, ―Cognitive Radio Technology‖, Newnes, 2006.
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, ― Cognitive Radio Networks‖, John Wiley and Sons,
2009.
3. Ezio Biglieri, Professor Andrea J. Goldsmith, Dr Larry J. Greenstein, Narayan B. Mandayam,
H. Vincent Poor, ―Principles of Cognitive Radio‖ , Cambridge University Press, 2012.
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at
the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability
Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to
System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface
Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical,
Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program -
Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and
Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing -
System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
101
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, ―Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business‖, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, ―People and Performance‖, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, ―Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts‖, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
CS8082 MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the need for machine learning for various problem solving
To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised learning algorithms in
machine learning
To learn the new approaches in machine learning
To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem solving
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning – Version Spaces and
Candidate Eliminations – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm –
Heuristic Space Search.
102
UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer Networks and Back
Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic Algorithms – Hypothesis Space Search –
Genetic Programming – Models of Evaluation and Learning.
UNIT III BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9
Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum Description Length
Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm – Naïve Bayes Classifier – Bayesian
Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability Learning – Sample Complexity – Finite and Infinite
Hypothesis Spaces – Mistake Bound Model.
UNIT IV INSTANT BASED LEARNING 9
K- Nearest Neighbour Learning – Locally weighted Regression – Radial Bases
Functions – Case Based Learning.
UNIT V ADVANCED LEARNING 9
Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set – First Order
Rules – Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction – Inverting Resolution –
Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories – Explanation Base Learning – FOCL
Algorithm – Reinforcement Learning – Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference Learning
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised machine learning
approaches
Apply specific supervised or unsupervised machine learning algorithm for a particular
problem
Analyse and suggest the appropriate machine learning approach for the various
types of problem
Design and make modifications to existing machine learning algorithms to suit an
individual application
Provide useful case studies on the advanced machine learning algorithms
TEXT BOOK:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, ―Machine Learning‖, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning)‖, The MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, ―Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective‖, CRC Press, 2009.
EC8005 ELECTRONIC PACKAGING AND TESTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce and discuss various issues related to the system packaging
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING 9
Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS packaging,
consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging, Trends, Challenges, Driving
Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for Microelectronic packaging, Packaging Material
Properties, Ceramics, Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density interconnect
substrates
103
UNIT II ELECTRICAL ISSUES IN PACKAGING 9
Electrical Issues of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power Distribution, Electromagnetic
Interference, Transmission Lines, Clock Distribution, Noise Sources, Digital and RF Issues. Design
Process Electrical Design: Interconnect Capacitance, Resistance and Inductance fundamentals;
Packaging roadmaps - Hybrid circuits - Resistive, Capacitive and Inductive parasitics
UNIT III CHIP PACKAGES 9
IC Assembly - Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape Automated Bonding,
Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level burn – in and test. Single chip packaging:
functions, types, materials processes, properties, characteristics, trends. Multi chip packaging:
types, design, comparison, trends. System – in - package (SIP); Passives: discrete, integrated,
and embedded
UNIT IV PCB, SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND THERMAL 9
CONSIDERATIONS
Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard fabrication, Micro via Boards.
Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology, Through Hole Technology, Process Control and
Design challenges. Thermal Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal conductivity and
resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements
UNIT V TESTING 9
Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch and fatigue – failures –
thermo mechanically induced –electrically induced – chemically induced. Electrical Testing:
System level electrical testing, Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design for Testability
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Give a comprehensive introduction to the various packaging types used along with the
associated thermal, speed, signal and integrity power issues
Enable design of packages which can withstand higher temperature, vibrations and shock
Design of PCBs which minimize the EMI and operate at higher frequency
Analyze the concepts of Testing and testing methods
TEXT BOOK:
1. Tummala, Rao R., Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging, McGraw Hill, 2001
REFERENCES:
1. Blackwell (Ed), The electronic packaging handbook, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, Microelectronics packaging handbook, McGraw Hill, 2008.
3. Bosshart, Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology, TataMcGraw Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, Electronic Product design, Wiley India, 2011
5. R.S.Khandpur, Printed Circuit Board, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005
6. Recent literature in Electronic Packaging
7. Michael L. Bushnell &Vishwani D. Agrawal,‖ Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital,
memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits‖, Kluwer Academic Publishers.2000.
8. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, ―Digital System Testing and Testable
Design‖, Computer Science Press,1990
104
EC8006 MIXED SIGNAL IC DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Study the mixed signal of submicron CMOS circuits
Understand the various integrated based filters and topologies
Learn the data converters architecture, modeling and signal to noise ratio
Study the integrated circuit of oscillators and PLLs
UNIT I SUBMICRON CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Submicron CMOS: Overview and Models, CMOS process flow, Capacitors and Resistors.
Digital circuit design: The MOSFET Switch, Delay Elements, An Adder. Analog Circuit
Design: Biasing, Op-Amp Design, Circuit Noise.
UNIT II INTEGRATOR BASED CMOS FILTERS 9
Integrator Building Blocks- low pass filter, Active RC integrators, MOSFET-C Integrators, gm-
C integrators, Discrete time integrators. Filtering Topologies: The Bilinear transfer function,
The Biquadratic transfer function, Filters using Noise shaping.
UNIT III DATA CONVERTER ARCHITECTURES 9
DAC Architectures- Resistor string, R-2R ladder Networks, Current Steering, Charge Scaling
DACs, Cyclic DAC, and Pipeline DAC. ADC Architectures- Flash, Two-step flash ADC,
Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC‘s, Successive Approximation ADC.
UNIT IV DATA CONVERTER MODELING AND SNR 9
Sampling and Aliasing: A modeling approach, Impulse sampling, The sample and Hold,
Quantization noise. Data converter SNR: An overview, Clock Jitter, Improving SNR using
Averaging, Decimating filter for ADCs, Interpolating filter for DACs, Band pass and High pass
sinc filters - Using feedback to improve SNR.
UNIT V OSCILLATORS AND PLL 9
LC oscillators, Voltage Controlled Oscillators. Simple PLL, Charge pumps PLLs, Non ideal
effects in PLLs, Delay Locked Loops.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to
Apply the concepts for mixed signal MOS circuit.
Analyze the characteristics of IC based CMOS filters.
Design of various data converter architecture circuits.
Analyze the signal to noise ratio and modeling of mixed signals.
Design of oscillators and phase lock loop circuit.
REFERENCES:
1. CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design by R.Jacob Baker, Wiley India, IEEE Press, reprint
2008.
2. CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation by R.Jacob Baker, Wiley India, IEEE
Press, Second Edition, reprint 2009.
3. Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits by Behzad Razavi, McGraw Hill, 33 rd Re-
print, 2016.
105
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of
caste, class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don‘ts during various types of
Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community
based DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community,
Panchayati Raj Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-
holders- Institutional Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster
Management Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as
dams, embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and
Scenarios in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology
and local resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes
and legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarios in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
106
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Singhal J.P. ―Disaster Management‖, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, ―Disaster Science and Management‖, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt.
Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers,
New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.
EC8072 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND L T P C
COMPATIBILITY 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic concepts of Electromagnetic Interference
To teach the importance of Electromagnetic Compatible designs
To explain the existing standards for Electromagnetic Compatibility
UNIT I EMI/EMC CONCEPTS 9
EMI-EMC definitions; Sources and Victims of EMI; Conducted and Radiated EMI Emission and
Susceptibility; Case Histories; Radiation Hazards to humans.
UNIT II EMI COUPLING PRINCIPLES 9
Conducted, radiated and transient coupling; Common ground impedance coupling; Common mode
and ground loop coupling; Differential mode coupling; Near field cable to cable coupling; Field to
cable coupling; Power mains and Power supply coupling; Transient EMI, ESD.
UNIT III EMI CONTROL 9
Shielding; EMI Filters; Grounding; Bonding; Isolation transformer; Transient suppressors; EMI
Suppression Cables.
UNIT IV EMC DESIGN FOR CIRCUITS AND PCBS 9
Noise from Relays and Switches; Nonlinearities in Circuits; Cross talk in transmission line and
cross talk control; Component selection and mounting; PCB trace impedance; Routing; Power
distribution decoupling; Zoning; Grounding; VIAs; Terminations.
UNIT V EMI MEASUREMENTS AND STANDARDS 9
Open area test site; TEM cell; EMI test shielded chamber and shielded ferrite lined anechoic
chamber; Line impedance stabilization networks; EMI Rx and spectrum analyzer; Civilian
standards - CISPR, FCC, IEC, EN; Military standards-MIL461E/462.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Identify the various types and mechanisms of Electromagnetic Interference
Propose a suitable EMI mitigation technique
Describe the various EMC Standards and methods to measure them
107
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.P.Kodali, ―Engineering EMC Principles, Measurements and Technologies‖, IEEE Press,
Newyork, 1996.(Unit I – V)
2. Henry W.Ott., Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems‖, A Wiley Inter Science
Publications, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork, 1988. (Unit – IV)
REFERENCES:
1. C.R.Paul,‖Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility‖ , John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 1992.
2. Bemhard Keiser, ―Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility‖, 3rd Ed, Artech house,
Norwood, 1986.
3. Don R. J.White Consultant Incorporate, ―Handbook of EMI/EMC‖, Vol I-V, 1988.
EC8007 LOW POWER SoC DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Identify sources of power in an IC.
Understand basic principle of System on Chip design
Learn optimization of power in combinational and sequential logic machines for SoC
Design
Identify suitable techniques to reduce the power dissipation and design circuits with low
power dissipation.
UNIT I POWER CONSUMPTION IN CMOS 9
Physics of power dissipation in CMOS FET devices – Hierarchy of limits of power – Sources of
power consumption – Static Power Dissipation, Active Power Dissipation - Designing for Low
Power, Circuit Techniques for Leakage Power Reduction - Basic principle of low power design,
Logic level power optimization – Circuit level low power design.
UNIT II SYSTEM-ON-CHIP DESIGN 9
System-on-Chip Concept, Design Principles in SoC Architecture, SoC Design Flow, Platform-
based and IP based SoC Designs, Basic Concepts of Bus-Based Communication Architectures.
High performance algorithms for ASICs/ SoCs as case studies – Canonic Signed Digit Arithmetic,
KCM, Distributed Arithmetic, High performance digital filters for sigma-delta ADC
UNIT III POWER OPTIMIZATION OF COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL 9
LOGIC MACHINES FOR SOC
Introduction to Standard Cell-Based Layout – Simulation - Combinational Network Delay - Logic
and interconnect Design - Power Optimization - Switch Logic Networks. Introduction - Latches and
Flip-Flops - Sequential Systems and Clocking Disciplines - Sequential System Design - Power
Optimization - Design Validation - Sequential Testing.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF LOW POWER CIRCUITS FOR SUB SYSTEM ON A 9
SOC
Subsystem Design Principles - Combinational Shifters – Adders – ALUs – Multipliers – High
Density Memory – Field Programmable Gate Arrays - Programmable Logic Arrays - Computer
arithmetic techniques for low power system – low voltage low power static Random access and
dynamic Random access memories, low power clock, Inter connect and layout design
108
UNIT V FLOOR PLANNING 9
Floor-planning Methods – Block Placement & Channel Definition - Global Routing - switchbox
Routing - Power Distribution - Clock Distributions - Floor-planning Tips - Design Validation - Off-
Chip Connections – Packages, The I/O Architecture - PAD Design
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze and design low-power VLSI circuits using different circuit technologies for system on
chip design
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.Rabaey, ―Low Power Design Essentials (Integrated Circuits and Systems)‖, Springer, 2009
2. Wayne Wolf, ―Modern VLSI Design – System – on – Chip Design‖, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition,
2008.
REFERENCES:
1. J.B.Kuo & J.H.Lou, ―Low-voltage CMOS VLSI Circuits‖, Wiley, 1999.
2. A.Bellaowar & M.I.Elmasry,‖Low power Digital VLSI Design, Circuits and Systems‖, Kluwer,
1996.
3. Wayne Wolf, ―Modern VLSI Design – IP based Design‖, Prentice Hall, 4th Edition, 2008.
4. M.J.S. Smith : Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Pearson, 2003
5. Sudeep Pasricha and NikilDutt, On-Chip Communication Architectures System on Chip
Interconnect, Elsevier, 2008
6. Recent literature in Low Power VLSI Circuits.
7. Recent literature in Design of ASICs
EC8008 PHOTONIC NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the student to understand the importance of the backbone infrastructure
for our present and future communication needs and familiarize them with the
architectures and the protocol stack in use
• To enable the student to understand the differences in the design of data plane and
the control plane and the routing, switching and the resource allocation methods
and the network management and protection methods in vogue
• To expose the student to the advances in networking and switching domains and
the future trends
UNIT I OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
Light Propagation in optical fibers – Loss & bandwidth, System limitations, Nonlinear
effects; Solitons; Optical Network Components – Couplers, Isolators & Circulators,
Multiplexers & Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength Converters.
UNIT II OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9
Introduction to Optical Networks; SONET / SDH, Metropolitan-Area Networks, Layered
Architecture; Broadcast and Select Networks – Topologies for Broadcast Networks, Media-
Access Control Protocols, Wavelength Routing Architecture.
109
UNIT III WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS 9
The optical layer, Optical Network Nodes, Routing and wavelength assignment, Traffic
Grooming in Optical Networks, Architectural variations- Linear Light wave networks,
Logically Routed Networks.
UNIT IV PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS 9
Photonic Packet Switching – OTDM, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Synchronization,
Broadcast OTDM networks, Switch-based networks, Contention Resolution Access
Networks – Network Architecture overview, Optical Access Network Architectures and
OTDM networks.
UNIT V NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT 9
Transmission System Engineering – System model, Power penalty - transmitter, receiver,
Optical amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion, Wavelength stabilization, Overall design
considerations, Control and Management – Network management functions, Configuration
management, Performance management, Fault management, Optical safety, Service
interface.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student would be able to:
Use the backbone infrastructure for our present and future communication needs
Analyze the architectures and the protocol stack
Compare the differences in the design of data plane, control plane, routing,
switching, resource allocation methods, network management and protection
methods in vogue
REFERENCES:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, ―Optical Networks: A Practical Perspective‖,
Harcourt Asia Pte Ltd., Second Edition 2004.
2. C. Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, ―WDM Optical Networks: Concept, Design
and Algorithms‖, Prentice Hall of India, Ist Edition, 2002.
3. P.E. Green, Jr., ―Fiber Optic Networks‖, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1993.
4. Biswanath Mukherjee, ―Optical WDM Networks‖, Springer Series, 2006.
EC8009 COMPRESSIVE SENSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To present the basic theory and ideas showing when it is possible to reconstruct sparse or
nearly sparse signals from undersampled data
To expose students to recent ideas in modern convex optimization allowing rapid signal
recovery
To give students a sense of real time applications that might benefit from compressive
sensing ideas
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPRESSED SENSING 9
Introduction; Motivation; Mathematical Background; Traditional Sampling; Traditional
Compression; Conventional Data Acquisition System; Drawbacks of Transform coding;
Compressed Sensing (CS).
UNIT II SPARSITY AND SIGNAL RECOVERY 9
Signal Representation; Basis vectors; Sensing matrices; Restricted Isometric Property;
Coherence; Stable recovery; Number of measurements.
110
UNIT III RECOVERY ALGORITHMS 9
Basis Pursuit algorithm: L1 minimization; Matching pursuit: Orthogonal Matching Pursuit(OMP),
Stagewise OMP, Regularized OMP, Compressive Sampling Matching Pursuit (CoSaMP); Iterative
Thresholding algorithm: Hard thresholding, Soft thresholding; Model based : Model based
CoSaMP, Model based HIT.
UNIT IV COMPRESSIVE SENSING FOR WSN 9
Basics of WSN; Wireless Sensor without Compressive Sensing; Wireless Sensor with
Compressive Sensing; Compressive Wireless Sensing: Spatial compression in WSNs, Projections
in WSNs, Compressed Sensing in WSNs.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF COMPRESSIVE SENSING 9
Compressed Sensing for Real-Time Energy-Efficient Compression on Wireless Body Sensor
Nodes; Compressive sensing in video surveillance; An Application of Compressive Sensing for
Image Fusion; Single-Pixel Imaging via Compressive Sampling.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Appreciate the motivation and the necessity for compressed sensing technology.
Design a new algorithm or modify an existing algorithm for different application areas in
wireless sensor network.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Radha S, Hemalatha R, Aasha Nandhini S, ―Compressive Sensing for Wireless
Communication: Challenges and Opportunities‖, River publication, 2016. (UNIT I-V)
2. Mark A. Davenport, Marco F. Duarte, Yonina C. Eldar and Gitta Kutyniok, ―Introduction to
Compressed Sensing,‖ in Compressed Sensing: Theory and Applications, Y. Eldar and G.
Kutyniok, eds., Cambridge University Press, 2011 (UNIT I)
REFERENCES:
1. Duarte, M.F.; Davenport, M.A.; Takhar, D.; Laska, J.N.; Ting Sun; Kelly, K.F.; Baraniuk,
R.G.; , "Single-Pixel Imaging via Compressive Sampling," Signal Processing Magazine,
IEEE, vol.25, no.2, pp.83-91, March 2008.
2. Tao Wan.; Zengchang Qin.; , ―An application of compressive sensing for image fusion‖, CIVR
'10 Proceedings of the ACM International Conference on Image and Video Retrieval, Pages
3-9.
3. H. Mamaghanian , N. Khaled , D. Atienza and P. Vandergheynst "Compressed sensing for
real-time energy-efficient ecg compression on wireless body sensor nodes", IEEE Trans.
Biomed. Eng., vol. 58, no. 9, pp.2456 -2466 2011.
4. Mohammadreza Balouchestani.; Kaamran Raahemifar.; and Sridhar Krishnan.;,
―COMPRESSED SENSING IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS: SURVEY‖ , Canadian
Journal on Multimedia and Wireless Networks Vol. 2, No. 1, February 2011.
111
EC8093 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To become familiar with digital image fundamentals
To get exposed to simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency domain.
To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
To study the image segmentation and representation techniques.
To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods
UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual Perception – Image
Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships between pixels -
Color image fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D
transforms - DFT, DCT.
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial Filtering–
Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency Domain: Introduction to Fourier
Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth and
Gaussian filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.
UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order
Statistics – Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum
Notch Filtering – Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering
UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9
Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region based segmentation –
Region growing – Region splitting and merging – Morphological processing- erosion and dilation,
Segmentation by morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction – Watershed
segmentation algorithm.
UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9
Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding, JPEG
standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional
Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on
matching.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Know and understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as
digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D-transforms.
Operate on images using the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
Understand the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
Learn the basics of segmentation, features extraction, compression and recognition
methods for color models.
112
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, Third Edition,
2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, ‗Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, ‗Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB‘, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, ‗Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing‘, Prentice
Hall Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, ‗Digital Image Processing‘, John Wiley, New York, 2002
5. Milan Sonka et al ‗Image processing, analysis and machine vision‘, Brookes/Cole, Vikas
Publishing House, 2nd edition, 1999.
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values,
to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‗Engineering Ethics‘ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‘s theory – Gilligan‘s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
– Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
113
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss
the ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the
society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, ―Ethics in Engineering‖, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, ―Engineering Ethics‖, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, ―Engineering Ethics‖, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, ―Engineering Ethics –
Concepts and Cases‖, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, ―Ethics and the Conduct of Business‖, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, ―Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and
Engineers‖, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, ―Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal
Integrity and Social Responsibility‖ Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‗ Value Education‘, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
EC8010 VIDEO ANALYTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the need for video Analytics
To understand the basic configuration of video analytics
To understand the functional blocks of a video analytic system
To get exposed to the various applications of video analytics
UNIT I VIDEO ANALYTIC COMPONENTS 9
Need for Video Analytics-Overview of video Analytics- Foreground extraction- Feature extraction-
classifier - Preprocessing- edge detection- smoothening- Feature space-PCA-FLD-SIFT features
UNIT II FOREGROUND EXTRACTION 9
Background estimation- Averaging- Gaussian Mixture Model- Optical Flow based- Image
Segmentation- Region growing- Region splitting-Morphological operations- erosion-Dilation-
Tracking in a multiple camera environment
UNIT III CLASSIFIERS 9
Neural networks (back propagation) - Deep learning networks- Fuzzy Classifier- Bayesian
classifier-HMM based classifier
114
UNIT IV VIDEO ANALYTICS FOR SECURITY 9
Abandoned object detection- human behavioral analysis -human action recognition- perimeter security-
crowd analysis and prediction of crowd congestion
UNIT V VIDEO ANALYTICS FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE & 9
TRAFFIC MONITIRING AND ASSISTANCE
Customer behavior analysis - people counting- Traffic rule violation detection- traffic congestion
identification for route planning- driver assistance- lane change warning
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Design video analytic algorithms for security applications
Design video analytic algorithms for business intelligence
Design custom made video analytics system for the given target application
REFERENCES:
1. Graeme A. Jones (Editor), Nikos Paragios (Editor), Carlo S. Regazzoni (Editor) Video-Based
Surveillance Systems: Computer Vision and Distributed Processing , Kluwer academic
publisher, 2001
2. Nilanjan Dey (Editor), Amira Ashour (Editor) and Suvojit Acharjee (Editor), Applied Video
Processing in Surveillance and Monitoring Systems (IGI global) 2016
3. Zhihao Chen (Author), Ye Yang (Author), Jingyu Xue (Author), Liping Ye (Author), Feng
Guo (Author), The Next Generation of Video Surveillance and Video Analytics: The Unified
Intelligent Video Analytics Suite, CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform, 2014
4. Caifeng Shan (Editor), Fatih Porikli (Editor), Tao Xiang (Editor), Shaogang Gong (Editor)
Video Analytics for Business Intelligence, Springer, 2012
EC8011 DSP PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND L T P C
PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to provide knowledge on:
Basics on Digital Signal Processors
Programmable DSP‘s Architecture, On-chip Peripherals and Instruction set
Programming for signal processing applications
Advanced Programmable DSP Processors
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSPs 9
Introduction to Programmable DSPs, Architectural Features of PDSPs - Multiplier and Multiplier
accumulator – Modified Bus Structures and Memory access – Multiple access memory – Multi-port
memory – VLIW architecture- Pipelining – Special Addressing modes in P-DSPs – On chip
Peripherals, Applications of Programmable DSPs.
UNIT II TMS320C5X PROCESSOR 9
Architecture of C5X Processor – Addressing modes – Assembly language Instructions - Pipeline
structure, On-chip Peripherals – Block Diagram of DSP starter kit (DSK) – Software Tools, DSK
on-board peripherals, Application Programs for processing real time signals.
115
UNIT III TMS320C6X PROCESSOR 9
Architecture of the C6x Processor - Instruction Set – Addressing modes, Assembler directives, On-
chip peripherals, DSP Development System: DSP Starter Kit - Code Composer Studio - Support
Files – Introduction to AIC23 codec and other on-board peripherals, Real-Time Programming
Examples for Signals and Noise generation, Frequency analysis, Filter design.
UNIT IV ADSP PROCESSORS 9
Architecture of ADSP-21XX and ADSP-210XX series of DSP processors- Addressing modes and
assembly language instructions – Application programs –Filter design, FFT calculation.
UNIT V ADVANCED PROCESSORS 9
Study of TI‘s advanced processors - TMS320C674x and TMS320C55x DSPs, ADSP‘s Blackfin
and SigmaDSP Processors, NXP‘s DSP56Fxx Family of DSP Processors, Comparison of the
features of TI, ADSP and NXP DSP family processors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze the concepts of Digital Signal Processors
Demonstrate their ability to program the DSP processor for signal processing applications
Discuss, compare and select the suitable Advanced DSP Processors for real-time signal
processing applications
REFERENCES:
1. B. Venkataramani and M. Bhaskar, ―Digital Signal Processors – Architecture, Programming
and Applications‖ – Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited. New Delhi, 2003.
2. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Digital Signal Processing – Implementations using DSP
Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx, Cengage Learning India Private
Limited, Delhi 2012.
3. Rulph Chassaing and Donald Reay, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the
C6713 and C6416 DSK, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication, 2012 (Reprint).
4. User guides Texas Instruments, Analog Devices and NXP.
EC8094 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Understand the basics of satellite orbits
Understand the satellite segment and earth segment
Analyze the various methods of satellite access
Understand the applications of satellites
Understand the basics of satellite Networks
116
UNIT I SATELLITE ORBITS 9
Kepler‟s Laws, Newton‟s law, orbital parameters, orbital perturbations, station keeping, geo
stationary and non Geo-stationary orbits – Look Angle Determination- Limits of visibility –
eclipse-Sub satellite point –Sun transit outage-Launching Procedures - launch vehicles and
propulsion.
UNIT II SPACE SEGMENT 9
Spacecraft Technology- Structure, Primary power, Attitude and Orbit control, Thermal control
and Propulsion, communication Payload and supporting subsystems, Telemetry, Tracking and
command-Transponders-The Antenna Subsystem.
UNIT III SATELLITE LINK DESIGN 9
Basic link analysis, Interference analysis, Rain induced attenuation and interference,
Ionospheric characteristics, Link Design with and without frequency reuse.
UNIT IV SATELLITE ACCESS AND CODING METHODS 9
Modulation and Multiplexing: Voice, Data, Video, Analog – digital transmission system, Digital
video Broadcast, multiple access: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, DAMA Assignment Methods,
compression – encryption, Coding Schemes.
UNIT V SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9
INTELSAT Series, INSAT, VSAT, Mobile satellite services: GSM, GPS, INMARSAT, LEO,
MEO, Satellite Navigational System. GPS Position Location Principles, Differential GPS,
Direct Broadcast satellites (DBS/DTH).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student would be able to:
Analyze the satellite orbits
Analyze the earth segment and space segment
Analyze the satellite Link design
Design various satellite applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dennis Roddy, ―Satellite Communication‖, 4th Edition, Mc Graw Hill International, 2006.
2. Timothy,Pratt,Charles,W.Bostain,JeremyE.Allnutt,"SatelliteCommunication‖,2nd Edition,
Wiley Publications,2002
REFERENCES:
1. Wilbur L.Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, ―Satellite Communication
Systems Engineering‖, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
2. N.Agarwal, ―Design of Geosynchronous Space Craft‖, Prentice Hall, 1986.
3. Bruce R. Elbert, ―The Satellite Communication Applications‖, Hand Book, Artech House
Bostan London, 1997.
4. Tri T. Ha, ―Digital Satellite Communication‖, II nd edition, 1990.
5. Emanuel Fthenakis, ―Manual of Satellite Communications‖, Mc Graw Hill Book Co.,
1984.
6. Robert G. Winch, ―Telecommunication Trans Mission Systems‖, Mc Graw-Hill Book Co.,
1983.
7. Brian Ackroyd, ―World Satellite Communication and earth station Design‖, BSP
professional Books, 1990.
8. G.B.Bleazard, ―Introducing Satellite communications―, NCC Publication, 1985.
9. M.Richharia, ―Satellite Communication Systems-Design Principles‖, Macmillan 2003.
117
CS8086 SOFT COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing
To become familiar with various techniques like neural networks, genetic algorithms
and fuzzy systems.
To apply soft computing techniques to solve problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9
Introduction-Artificial Intelligence-Artificial Neural Networks-Fuzzy Systems-Genetic
Algorithm and Evolutionary Programming-Swarm Intelligent Systems-Classification of
ANNs-McCulloch and Pitts Neuron Model-Learning Rules: Hebbian and Delta- Perceptron
Network-Adaline Network-Madaline Network.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Back propagation Neural Networks - Kohonen Neural Network -Learning Vector
Quantization -Hamming Neural Network - Hopfield Neural Network- Bi-directional
Associative Memory -Adaptive Resonance Theory Neural Networks- Support Vector
Machines - Spike Neuron Models.
UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets - Classical Relations and Fuzzy
Relations -Membership Functions -Defuzzification - Fuzzy Arithmetic and Fuzzy Measures -
Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning - Introduction to Fuzzy Decision Making.
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Basic Concepts- Working Principles -Encoding- Fitness Function - Reproduction -
Inheritance Operators - Cross Over - Inversion and Deletion -Mutation Operator - Bit-wise
Operators -Convergence of Genetic Algorithm.
UNIT V HYBRID SYSTEMS 9
Hybrid Systems -Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic -GA Based Weight
Determination - LR-Type Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy Neuron - Fuzzy BP Architecture -
Learning in Fuzzy BP- Inference by Fuzzy BP - Fuzzy ArtMap: A Brief Introduction - Soft
Computing Tools - GA in Fuzzy Logic Controller Design - Fuzzy Logic Controller
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
Apply suitable soft computing techniques for various applications.
Integrate various soft computing techniques for complex problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.P.Padhy, S.P.Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming", Oxford
University Press, 2015.
2. S.N.Sivanandam , S.N.Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India Pvt.Ltd.,
2nd Edition, 2011.
3. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., 2017.
118
REFERENCES:
1. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, ―Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing‖, Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
2. Kwang H.Lee, ―First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications‖, Springer, 2005.
3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, ―Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications‖,
Prentice Hall, 1996.
4. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, ―Neural Networks Algorithms,
Applications, and Programming Techniques‖, Addison Wesley, 2003.
IT8006 PRINCIPLES OF SPEECH PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made:
To understand the speech production mechanism and the various speech analysis
techniques and speech models
To understand the speech compression techniques
To understand the speech recognition techniques
To know the speaker recognition and text to speech synthesis techniques
UNIT I SPEECH SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS & ANALYSIS 11
Speech production process - speech sounds and features- - Phonetic Representation of Speech --
representing= speech in time and frequency domains - Short-Time Analysis of Speech - Short-
Time Energy and Zero-Crossing Rate - Short-Time Autocorrelation Function - Short-Time Fourier
Transform (STFT) - Speech Spectrum - Cepstrum - Mel-Frequency Cepstrum Coefficients -
Hearing and Auditory Perception - Perception of Loudness - Critical Bands - Pitch Perception
UNIT II SPEECH COMPRESSION 12
Sampling and Quantization of Speech (PCM) - Adaptive differential PCM - Delta Modulation -
Vector Quantization- Linear predictive coding (LPC) - Code excited Linear predictive Coding
(CELP)
UNIT III SPEECH RECOGNITION 12
LPC for speech recognition- Hidden Markov Model (HMM)- training procedure for HMM- subword
unit model based on HMM- language models for large vocabulary speech recognition - Overall
recognition system based on subword units - Context dependent subword units- Semantic post
processor for speech recognition
UNIT IV SPEAKER RECOGNITION 5
Acoustic parameters for speaker verification- Feature space for speaker recognition-similarity
measures- Text dependent speaker verification-Text independent speaker verification techniques
UNIT V SPEAKER RECOGNITION AND TEXT TO SPEECH SYNTHESIS 5
Text to speech synthesis(TTS)-Concatenative and waveform synthesis methods, sub-word units
for TTS, intelligibility and naturalness-role of prosody
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Design speech compression techniques
Configure speech recognition techniques
Design speaker recognition systems
Design text to speech synthesis systems
119
TEXT BOOKS:
1. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schafer, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing, Foundations and
Trendsin Signal Processing Vol. 1, Nos. 1–2 (2007) 1–194
2. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan ―Speech and Audio signal processing- processing and
perception of speech and music‖, John Wiley and sons 2006
REFERENCES
1. Lawrence Rabiner, Biiing and– Hwang Juang and B.Yegnanarayana ―Fundamentals of Speech
Recognition‖, Pearson Education, 2009
2. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, ―Speech Recognition‖, John Wiley and Sons, 1999
3. Donglos O shanhnessy ―Speech Communication: Human and Machine ―, 2nd Ed. University
press 2001.
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVE:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-
ultra-thin films-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties:
Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties
and motivation for study (qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-
growth, laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications-
Nanometal oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, Nano alumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nano
clays-functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques-
AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
Nano InfoTech: Information storage- Nano computer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nano biotechnology: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines,
Targeted drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro
Mechanical Systems (NEMS)- Nano sensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition,
Nanoparticles for sun barrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
120
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., ―Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications‖, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, ―Nanoscale Characterization of surfaces & Interfaces‖, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, ―Nanotechnology‖, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,―The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations‖. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
121
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
Educational Objectives
Bachelor of Electrical and Electronics Engineering curriculum is designed to prepare the graduates
having attitude and knowledge to
1. Have successful technical and professional careers in their chosen fields such as circuit theory,
Field theory, control theory and computational platforms.
2. Engross in life long process of learning to keep themselves abreast of new developments in the
field of Electronics and their applications in power engineering.
Programme Outcomes
The graduates will have the ability to
a. Apply the Mathematical knowledge and the basics of Science and Engineering to solve the
problems pertaining to Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering.
b. Identify and formulate Electrical and Electronics Engineering problems from research literature
and be ability to analyze the problem using first principles of Mathematics and Engineering
Sciences.
c. Come out with solutions for the complex problems and to design system components or process
that fulfill the particular needs taking into account public health and safety and the social, cultural
and environmental issues.
d. Draw well-founded conclusions applying the knowledge acquired from research and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of
information and to arrive at significant conclusion.
e. Form, select and apply relevant techniques, resources and Engineering and IT tools for
Engineering activities like electronic prototyping, modeling and control of systems and also being
conscious of the limitations.
f. Understand the role and responsibility of the Professional Electrical and Electronics Engineer and
to assess societal, health, safety issues based on the reasoning received from the contextual
knowledge.
g. Be aware of the impact of professional Engineering solutions in societal and environmental
contexts and exhibit the knowledge and the need for Sustainable Development.
h. Apply the principles of Professional Ethics to adhere to the norms of the engineering practice and
to discharge ethical responsibilities.
i. Function actively and efficiently as an individual or a member/leader of different teams and
multidisciplinary projects.
j. Communicate efficiently the engineering facts with a wide range of engineering community and
others, to understand and prepare reports and design documents; to make effective presentations
and to frame and follow instructions.
k. Demonstrate the acquisition of the body of engineering knowledge and insight and Management
Principles and to apply them as member / leader in teams and multidisciplinary environments.
l. Recognize the need for self and life-long learning, keeping pace with technological challenges in
the broadest sense.
PEO \PO a b c d e f g h i j k l
1
2
1
NAME OF THE
SEMESTER PROGRAM OUTCOMES
SUBJECT
a b c d e f g h i j k l
THEORY
Communicative English
Engineering Mathematics - I
Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
Problem Solving and Python
SEM I Programming
Engineering Graphics
PRACTICAL
Problem Solving and Python
Programming Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
THEORY
Technical English
Engineering Mathematics - II
Physics For Electronics Engineering
Basic Civil and Mechanical
Engineering
SEM II Circuit Theory
Environmental Science
and Engineering
PRACTICALS
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Electric Circuits Lab
THEORY
Transforms and Partial Differential
Equations
Digital Logic Circuits
SEM III Electromagnetic Theory
Electrical Machines – I
2
Electron Devices and Circuits
Power Plant Engineering
PRACTICALS
Electronics Laboratory
Electrical Machines Laboratory - I
THEORY
Numerical Methods
Electrical Machines – II
Transmission and Distribution
Measurements and Instrumentation
Linear Integrated Circuits and
SEM IV Applications
Control Systems
PRACTICALS
Electrical Machines Lab II
Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
Technical Seminar
THEORY
Power System Analysis
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers
Power Electronics
SEM V Digital Signal Processing
Object Oriented Programming
Open Elective I
PRACTICALS
Control and Instrumentation
Laboratory
3
Professional Communication
Object Oriented Programming
Laboratory
THEORY
Solid State Drives
Protection and Switchgear
Embedded Systems
Professional Elective I
Professional Elective II
SEM VI
PRACTICALS
Power Electronics and Drives
Laboratory
Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers Laboratory
Mini Project
THEORY
High Voltage Engineering
Power System Operation and
Control
Renewable Energy Systems
SEM VII Open Elective II
Professional Elective III
Professional Elective IV
PRACTICALS
Power System Simulation
Laboratory
Renewable Energy Systems
Laboratory
SEM VIII THEORY
Professional Elective V
4
Professional Elective VI
PRACTICALS
Project Work
. PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE
NAME OF THE
SL.NO. PROGRAM OUTCOMES
SUBJECT
a b c d e f g h i j k l
THEORY
Advanced Control System
Visual Languages and Applications
ELECTIVE – I Design of Electrical Apparatus
Power Systems Stability
Modern Power Converters
Intellectual Property Rights
Principles of Robotics
Special Electrical Machines
Power Quality
ELECTIVE – II
EHVAC Transmission
Communication Engineering
Disaster Management
Human Rights
Operations Research
Probability and Statistics
ELECTIVE – III
Fibre Optics and Laser
Instrumentation
Foundation Skills in Integrated
Product Development
5
System Identification and Adaptive
Control
Computer Architecture
ELECTIVE – IV Control of Electrical Drives
VLSI Design
Power Systems Transients
Total Quality Management
Flexible AC Transmission Systems
Soft Computing Techniques
Power Systems Dynamics
SMPS and UPS
ELECTIVE – V
Electric Energy Generation,
Utilization and Conservation
Professional Ethics in Engineering
Principals of Management
Energy Management and Auditing
Data Structures
High Voltage Direct Current
Transmission
ELECTIVE – VI Microcontroller Based System
Design
Smart Grid
Biomedical Instrumentation
Fundamentals of Nano Science
6
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA & SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES
Python Programming 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics - II BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8253 Physics for Electronics BS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. BE8252 Basic Civil and Mechanical ES
4 4 0 0 4
Engineering
5. EE8251 Circuit Theory PC 4 2 2 0 3
6. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. EE8261 PC 4
Electric Circuits Laboratory 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 30 20 2 8 25
7
SEMESTER III
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8353 Transforms and Partial BS
4 0 0 4
Differential Equations 4
2. EE8351 Digital Logic Circuits PC 4 2 2 0 3
3. EE8391 Electromagnetic PC 4
2 2 0 3
Theory
4. EE8301 Electrical Machines - I PC 4 2 2 0 3
5. EC8353 Electron Devices and ES
3 3 0 0 3
Circuits
6. ME8792 Power Plant ES
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICALS
7. EC8311 Electronics Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
8. EE8311 Electrical Machines PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory - I
TOTAL 30 16 6 8 23
SEMESTER IV
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. EE8401 Electrical Machines - II PC 4 2 2 0 3
3. EE8402 Transmission and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Distribution
4. EE8403 Measurements and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
5. EE8451 Linear Integrated PC
Circuits and 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
6. IC8451 Control Systems PC 5 3 2 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. EE8411 Electrical Machines PC 0 0 4 2
4
Laboratory - II
8. EE8461 Linear and Digital PC 4 0 0 4 2
Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
9. EE8412 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 32 18 4 10 25
8
SEMESTER V
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EE8501 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Analysis
2. EE8551 Microprocessors and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
3. EE8552 Power Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. EE8591 Digital Signal PC 4 2 2 0 3
Processing
5. CS8392 Object Oriented ES
3 3 0 0 3
Programming
6. Open Elective I* OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. EE8511 Control and PC
Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. HS8581 Professional
Communication EEC 2 0 0 2 1
9. CS8383 Object Oriented ES 4
Programming 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 29 17 2 10 23
SEMESTER VI
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EE8601 Solid State Drives PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. EE8602 Protection and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Switchgear
3. EE8691 Embedded Systems ES 3 3 0 0 3
4. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
6. EE8661 Power Electronics and PC
0 0 4 2
Drives Laboratory 4
7. EE8681 Microprocessors and PC
Microcontrollers 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. EE8611 Mini Project EEC 4
0 0 4 2
TOTAL 27 15 0 12 21
9
SEMESTER VII
COURSE CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EE8701 High Voltage PC
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
2. EE8702 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Operation and Control
3. EE8703 Renewable Energy PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. Open Elective II* OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III
6. Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective IV
PRACTICALS
7. EE8711 Power System PC 4 0 0 4 2
Simulation Laboratory
8. EE8712 Renewable Energy PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
TOTAL 26 18 0 8 22
SEMESTER VIII
COURSE CATEG CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE ORY PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective VI PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
3. EE8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 180
*Course from the curriculum of other UG Programmes.
10
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE –I ( VI SEMESTER)
COURSE CATEGORY CONTACT
S.NO. COURSE TITLE L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. IC8651 Advanced Control System PE 4 2 2 0 3
Visual Languages and PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. EE8001
Applications
Design of Electrical PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8002
Apparatus
4. EE8003 Power Systems Stability PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EE8004 Modern Power Converters PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II ( VI SEMESTER)
1. RO8591 Principles of Robotics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. EE8005 Special Electrical Machines PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8006 Power Quality PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EE8007 EHVAC Transmission PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EC8395 Communication Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III ( VII SEMESTER)
1. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. MG8491 Operations Research PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. MA8391 Probability and Statistics PE 4 4 0 0 4
Fibre Optics and Laser PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EI8075
Instrumentation
Foundation Skills in PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8072 Integrated Product
Development
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV ( VII SEMESTER)
System Identification and PE 3 3 0 0 3
1. EE8008
Adaptive Control
2. CS8491 Computer Architecture PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8009 Control of Electrical Drives PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EC8095 VLSI Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EE8010 Power Systems Transients PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
11
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – V ( VIII SEMESTER)
Flexible AC Transmission PE 3 3 0 0 3
1. EE8011
Systems
2. EE8012 Soft Computing Techniques PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8013 Power Systems Dynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EE8014 SMPS and UPS PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EE8015Electric Energy Generation, PE 3 3 0 0 3
Utilization and Conservation
6. Professional Ethics in PE 3 3 0 0 3
GE8076
Engineering
7. MG8591 Principles of Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – VI ( VIII SEMESTER)
Energy Management and PE 3 3 0 0 3
1. EE8016
Auditing
2. CS8391 Data Structures PE 3 3 0 0 3
High Voltage Direct Current PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8017
Transmission
Microcontroller Based System PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EE8018
Design
5. EE8019 Smart Grid PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. EI8073 Biomedical Instrumentation PE 3 3 0 0 3
Fundamentals of Nano PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8073
Science
*Professional Electives are grouped according to elective number as was done previously.
12
HUMANITIES AND SOCIALSCIENCES (HS)
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CONTACT L T P C
CODE CATEGORY PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative
HS 4 4 0 0 4
English
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3. GE8291 Environmental HS
3 0 0 3
Science and 3
Engineering
BASIC SCIENCES (BS)
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering
BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics I
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering
BS 3 3 0 0 3
Chemistry
4. BS8161 Physics and BS
Chemistry 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering BS
4 0 0 4
Mathematics II 4
6. PH8253 Physics For BS
Electronics 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
7. MA8353 Transforms and BS
Partial Differential 4 4 0 0 4
Equations
8. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
S.NO COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python programming
2. GE8152 Engineering
ES 6 2 0 4 4
Graphics
3. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES 0 0 4 2
13
Python programming
Laboratory 4
4. BE8252 Basic Civil and ES
Mechanical 4 4 0 0 4
Engineering
5. GE8261 Engineering ES 4
0 0 4 2
Practices Laboratory
6. EC8353 Electron Devices ES 3
3 0 0 3
and Circuits
7. ME8792 Power Plant ES 3
3 0 0 3
Engineering
8. EC8311 Electronics ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. CS8392 Object Oriented ES
3 3 0 0 3
Programming
10. CS8383 Object Oriented ES
Programming 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
11. EE8691 Embedded Systems ES 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. EE8251 Circuit Theory PC 4 2 2 0 3
2. EE8261 Electric Circuits PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
3. EE8351 Digital Logic PC
4 2 2 0 3
Circuits
4. EE8391 Electromagnetic PC
4 2 2 0 3
Theory
5. EE8301 Electrical PC
4 2 2 0 3
Machines - I
6. EE8311 Electrical PC
Machines 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory - I
7. EE8401 Electrical PC
4 2 2 0 3
Machines - II
8. EE8402 Transmission and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Distribution
9. EE8403 Measurements and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
10. EE8451 Linear Integrated PC
Circuits and 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
11. IC8451 Control Systems PC 5 3 2 0 4
12. EE8411 Electrical Machines PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory II
14
13. EE8461 Linear and Digital PC 4 0 0 4 2
Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
14. EE8501 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Analysis
15. EE8551 Microprocessors PC 3 3 0 0 3
and
Microcontrollers
16. EE8552 Power Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
17. EE8591 Digital Signal PC 4 2 2 0 3
Processing
18. EE8511 Control and PC
Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
19. EE8601 Solid State Drives PC 3 3 0 0 3
20. EE8602 Protection and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Switchgear
21. EE8661 Power Electronics PC
and Drives 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
22. EE8681 Microprocessors PC
and 4
0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers
Laboratory
23. EE8701 High Voltage PC
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
24. EE8702 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Operation and
Control
25. EE8703 Renewable Energy PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
26. EE8711 Power System PC 4 0 0 4 2
Simulation
Laboratory
27. EE8712 Renewable Energy PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems
Laboratory
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. EE8412 Technical seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
2. HS8581 Professional EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Communication
3. EE8611 Mini Project EEC 4
0 0 4 2
4. EE8811 Project work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
15
SUMMARY
S.NO. SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS
AREA TOTAL
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1. HS 4 7 - - - - - 11
2. BS 12 7 4 4 - - - 27
3. ES 9 6 8 - 5 3 - 31
4. PC - 5 11 20 14 10 13 - 73
5. PE 6 6 6 18
6. OE 3 - 3 6
7. EEC 1 1 2 10 14
Total 25 25 23 25 23 21 22 16 180
Non Credit / - - - - - - - - 0
Mandatory
16
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology students.
• To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
• To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
• To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short narrative
descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic conversations.
Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave- Language development
– prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure- use
of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening to
longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources. Speaking-
asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development- degrees of
comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single word
substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines Writing-
letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email- Listening- listening
to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them. Speaking- speaking about
oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development- Tenses- simple present-simple past-
present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal
verbs
17
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing an
outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-
fixed and semi-fixed expressions
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES
1 Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York:
Rutledge,2011.
2 Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively : Developing Speaking Skillsfor
BusinessEnglish. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
3 Dutt P. Kiranmai and RajeevanGeeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books:
2013
4 Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
5 Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
18
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I
L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two
variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined
multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of parameters
– Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
• Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
• Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
• Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
• Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar coordinates, in
addition to change of order and change of variables.
19
• Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions and
integration by parts.
• Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent improper
integrals.
• Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6,
3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 -
7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile strength
– torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and experiment -
bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform and non-uniform
bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance angle -
20
types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical fibers - fibre
optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic strips
- thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal conductivity -
Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through compound media (series
and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators, ovens and solar
water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances -
coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures - crystal
imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of imperfections in
plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
• the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
• the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
• the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of materials
and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
• the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
• the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal growth
techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage Learning,
2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
21
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and water
treatment techniques.
• To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single and
two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
• Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
• Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
• Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and fuel
cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external treatment
– Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from solutions
– adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption isotherm – contact
theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir - applications of adsorption on
pollution abatement.
Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic
promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis –
Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum - manufacture
of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural
gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values- theoretical
calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive
range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission and
fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder reactor -
solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and supercapacitors: Types of
22
batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells
– H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for further
learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company LTD,
New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) LTD,
New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT, LTD, New
Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
• To read and write simple Python programs.
• To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
• To define Python functions and call them.
• To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments; modules
and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments; Illustrative
programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between
two points.
23
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort, insertion sort, mergesort,
histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
• Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
• Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
• Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
• Decompose a Python program into functions.
• Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated
for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
3. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
4. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.
5. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python:
An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
6. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
24
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS LT P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
• T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
• perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of objects.
• project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
• draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
• visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
25
TEXT BOOK:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
th
2. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50
Edition, 2010.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N S Parthasarathy And Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LT P C
LABORATORY 004 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
• To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
• Use functions for structuring Python programs.
• Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• Read and write data from/to files in Python.
26
LIST OF PROGRAMS
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
• Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
• Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
• Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
• Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
• Read and write data from/to files in Python.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics,
thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
27
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
• To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality parameters
through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
• To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
• The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)
28
HS8251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES: The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students
to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering and
technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations , participate in group discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their areas
of specialisation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts from
journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking –
describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in a
text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-vocabularyused
in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal passive voice, numerical
adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking – introduction
to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical, practice in speed
reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary Development-
sequence words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of presentations-
Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job application – cover
letter –Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and issue based essays--
Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development-
clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and survey-
Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
29
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course learners will be able to:
• Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
• Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
• Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
• Write reports and winning job applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
2. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
3. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
4. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
5. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for suplementary reading.
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can
be used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering
disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
30
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w = z + c, cz, , z 2 - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series
– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real
integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and unit
impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and integrals –
Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic
functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of the following
topics and their applications:
• Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
• Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
• Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s theorems
and their verification.
• Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
• Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
31
4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
PHYSICS FOR ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C
PH8253
(Common to BME, ME, CC, ECE, EEE, E&I, ICE) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the essential principles of Physics of semiconductor device and Electron transport
properties. Become proficient in magnetic, dielectric and optical properties of materials and nano
devices.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a
three dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states –
Electron in periodic potential: Bloch thorem – metals and insulators - Energy bands in solids– tight
binding approximation - Electron effective mass – concept of hole.
UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9
Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect semiconductors – Carrier
concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration in N-
type & P-type semiconductors – Carrier transport: Velocity-electric field relations – drift and diffusion
transport - Einstein’s relation – Hall effect and devices – Zener and avalanche breakdown in p-n
junctions - Ohmic contacts – tunnel diode - Schottky diode – MOS capacitor - power transistor.
UNIT III MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Magnetism in materials – magnetic field and induction – magnetization - magnetic permeability and
susceptibility–types of magnetic materials – microscopic classification of magnetic materials -
Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction- saturation magnetization and Curie temperature –
Domain Theory. Dielectric materials: Polarization processes – dielectric loss – internal field –
Clausius-Mosotti relation- dielectric breakdown – high-k dielectrics.
UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9
Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and Semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P- N diode – solar cell –photo detectors - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes – excitons -
quantum confined Stark effect – quantum dot laser.
UNIT V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9
Introduction - electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy– quantum
confinement – quantum structures - Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum dot
structures –Zener-Bloch oscillations – resonant tunneling – quantum interference effects –
mesoscopic structures: conductance fluctuations and coherent transport – Coulomb blockade effects
- Single electron phenomena and Single electron Transistor – magnetic semiconductors– spintronics -
Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
32
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will able to
• gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structuues,
• acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various devices,
• get knowledge on magnetic and dielectric properties of materials,
• have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for optoelectronics,
• understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications in spintronics and carbon
electronics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kasap, S.O. “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2007.
2. Umesh K Mishra & Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Device Physics and Design”, Springer,
2008.
3. Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”. Narosa Publishing
House, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. Garcia, N. & Damask, A. “Physics for Computer Science Students”. Springer-Verlag, 2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”. Pearson Education, 2009
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. “Nanotechnology: Understanding
Small Systems”. CRC Press, 2014
BE8252 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LT PC
4 0 04
OBJECTIVES:
• To impart basic knowledge on Civil and Mechanical Engineering.
• To familiarize the materials and measurements used in Civil Engineering.
• To provide the exposure on the fundamental elements of civil engineering structures.
• To enable the students to distinguish the components and working principle of power
plant units, IC engines, and R & AC system.
A – OVER VIEW
UNIT I SCOPE OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 10
Overview of Civil Engineering - Civil Engineering contributions to the welfare of Society –
Specialized sub disciplines in Civil Engineering – Structural, Construction, Geotechnical,
Environmental, Transportation and Water Resources Engineering
Overview of Mechanical Engineering - Mechanical Engineering contributions to the welfare of
Society –Specialized sub disciplines in Mechanical Engineering - Production, Automobile, Energy
Engineering - Interdisciplinary concepts in Civil and Mechanical Engineering.
B – CIVIL ENGINEERING
33
UNIT II SURVEYING AND CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS 10
Surveying: Objects – classification – principles – measurements of distances – angles – leveling –
determination of areas– contours - examples.
Civil Engineering Materials:Bricks – stones – sand – cement – concrete – steel - timber - modern
materials
UNIT III BUILDING COMPONENTS AND STRUCTURES 15
Foundations: Types of foundations - Bearing capacity and settlement – Requirement of good
foundations.
Civil Engineering Structures: Brickmasonry – stonemasonry – beams – columns – lintels – roofing
– flooring – plastering – floor area, carpet area and floor space index - Types of Bridges and Dams –
water supply - sources and quality of water - Rain water harvesting - introduction to high way and rail
way.
C – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
UNIT IV INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND POWER PLANTS 15
Classification of Power Plants - Internal combustion engines as automobile power plant – Working
principle of Petrol and Diesel Engines – Four stroke and two stroke cycles – Comparison of four
stroke and two stroke engines – Working principle of steam, Gas, Diesel, Hydro - electric and
Nuclear Power plants –- working principle of Boilers, Turbines, Reciprocating Pumps (single acting
and double acting) and Centrifugal Pumps
UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 10
Terminology of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. Principle of vapour compression and absorption
system–Layout of typical domestic refrigerator–Window and Split type room Air conditioner.
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• appreciate the Civil and Mechanical Engineering components of Projects.
• explain the usage of construction material and proper selection of construction materials.
• measure distances and area by surveying
• identify the components used in power plant cycle.
• demonstrate working principles of petrol and diesel engine.
• elaborate the components of refrigeration and Air conditioning cycle.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Shanmugam Gand Palanichamy MS,“Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering”,Tata McGraw
Hill PublishingCo.,NewDelhi,1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Palanikumar, K. Basic Mechanical Engineering, ARS Publications, 2010.
2. Ramamrutham S.,“Basic Civil Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd.1999.
3. Seetharaman S.,“BasicCivil Engineering”,AnuradhaAgencies,2005.
4. ShanthaKumar SRJ.,“Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai,
2000.
34
5. Venugopal K. and Prahu Raja V., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers,
Kumbakonam,2000.
EE8251 CIRCUIT THEORY L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce electric circuits and its analysis
• To impart knowledge on solving circuit equations using network theorems
• To introduce the phenomenon of resonance in coupled circuits.
• To educate on obtaining the transient response of circuits.
• To introduce Phasor diagrams and analysis of three phase circuits
UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 6+6
Resistive elements - Ohm’s Law Resistors in series and parallel circuits – Kirchoffs laws – Mesh
current and node voltage - methods of analysis.
UNIT II NETWORK REDUCTION AND THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC IRCUITS 6+6
Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta conversion.
Thevenins and Norton Theorems – Superposition Theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem –
Reciprocity Theorem – Millman's theorem.
UNIT III TRANSIENT RESPONSE ANALYSIS 6+6
L and C elements -Transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for
DC input and A.C. sinusoidal input.
UNIT IV THREE PHASE CIRCUITS 6+6
A.C. circuits – Average and RMS value - Phasor Diagram – Power, Power Factor and Energy.-
Analysis of three phase 3-wire and 4-wire circuits with star and delta connected loads,
balanced & un balanced – phasor diagram of voltages and currents – power measurement in
three phase circuits.
UNIT V RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 6+6
Series and parallel resonance – their frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth - Self
and mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to analyse electrical circuits
• Ability to apply circuit theorems
• Ability to analyse transients
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William H. Hayt Jr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits
Analysis”, McGraw Hill publishers, edition, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,
Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013.
35
3. Allan H. Robbins, Wilhelm C. Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”, Cengage
Learning India, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Chakrabarti A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), Dhanpath Rai & Sons, New
Delhi, 1999.
2. Jegatheesan, R., “Analysis of Electric Circuits,” McGraw Hill, 2015.
3. Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahri, “Electric circuits”, Schaum’s series, McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
4. M E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”,Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
2015.
5. Mahadevan, K., Chitra, C., “Electric Circuits Analysis,” Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2015.
6. Richard C. Dorf and James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”, 7th Edition,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2015.
7. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”,
McGraw Hill, 2015.
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To study the nature and facts about environment.
• To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
• To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
• To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
• To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
• To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and waste
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive use,
productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local
36
levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat
loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India –
conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common
plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid waste
management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an individual in
prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone
and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral
resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources,
case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case
studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources,
use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation,
man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in conservation of
natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to
document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on the
following after completing the course.
• Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
• Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
• Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
37
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings.
Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with different
joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
Welding:
38
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement
of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
• use welding equipments to join the structures.
• Carry out the basic machining operations
• Make the models using sheet metal works
• Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
• Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
• Measure the electrical quantities
• Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
39
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
40
EE8261 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To simulate various electric circuits using Pspice/ Matlab/e-Sim / Scilab
• To gain practical experience on electric circuits and verification of theorems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Kirchhoff’s
voltage and current laws.
2. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Thevenin’s
theorem.
3. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Norton’s
theorem.
4. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Superposition
theorem.
5. Simulation and experimental verification of Maximum Power transfer Theorem.
6. Study of Analog and digital oscilloscopes and measurement of sinusoidal voltage,
frequency and power factor.
7. Simulation and Experimental validation of R-C electric circuit transients.
8. Simulation and Experimental validation of frequency response of RLC electric circuit.
9. Design and Simulation of series resonance circuit.
10. Design and Simulation of parallel resonant circuits.
11. Simulation of three phase balanced and unbalanced star, delta networks circuits.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Understand and apply circuit theorems and concepts in engineering applications.
• Simulate electric circuits.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1 Regulated Power Supply: 0 – 15 V D.C - 10 Nos / Distributed Power Source.
2 Function Generator (1 MHz) - 10 Nos.
3 Single Phase Energy Meter - 1 No.
4 Oscilloscope (20 MHz) - 10 Nos.
5 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (20 MHz) – 1 No.
6 10 Nos. of PC with Circuit Simulation Software (min 10 Users) ( e-Sim / Scilab/
Pspice / MATLAB /other Equivalent software Package) and Printer (1 No.)
7 AC/DC - Voltmeters (10 Nos.), Ammeters (10 Nos.) and Multi-meters (10 Nos.)
8 Single Phase Wattmeter – 3 Nos.
9 Decade Resistance Box, Decade Inductance Box, Decade Capacitance Box - 6 Nos
each.
10 Circuit Connection Boards - 10 Nos.
Necessary Quantities of Resistors, Inductors, Capacitors of various capacities (Quarter Watt to 10
Watt)
41
MA8353 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
• To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
• To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
• To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
• To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of
second and higher order with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of
two dimensional equation of heat conduction.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial fraction and residues) –
Initial and final value theorems - Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations – Solution
of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
• Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
• Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
• Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
42
• Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
• Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using
Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. Andrews, L.C and Shivamoggi, B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 9th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
3. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
4. James, G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2016.
6. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
EE8351 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To study various number systems and simplify the logical expressions using Boolean
functions
• To study combinational circuits
• To design various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.
• To introduce asynchronous sequential circuits and PLDs
• To introduce digital simulation for development of application oriented logic circuits.
UNIT I NUMBER SYSTEMS AND DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 6+6
Review of number systems, binary codes, error detection and correction codes (Parity and
Hamming code) - Digital Logic Families -comparison of RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL and MOS
families -operation, characteristics of digital logic family.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
6+6
Combinational logic - representation of logic functions-SOP and POS forms, K-map
representations - minimization using K maps - simplification and implementation of
combinational logic – multiplexers and de multiplexers - code converters, adders,
subtractors, Encoders and Decoders.
43
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 6+6
Sequential logic- SR, JK, D and T flip flops - level triggering and edge triggering - counters -
asynchronous and synchronous type - Modulo counters - Shift registers - design of
synchronous sequential circuits – Moore and Melay models- Counters, state diagram; state
reduction; state assignment.
UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS AND 6+6
PROGRAMMABILITY LOGIC DEVICES
Asynchronous sequential logic circuits-Transition tability, flow tability-race conditions,
hazards &errors in digital circuits; analysis of asynchronous sequential logic circuits-
introduction to Programmability Logic Devices: PROM – PLA –PAL, CPLD-FPGA.
UNIT V VHDL 6+6
RTL Design – combinational logic – Sequential circuit – Operators – Introduction to
Packages – Subprograms – Test bench. (Simulation /Tutorial Examples: adders, counters,
flip flops, Multiplexers & De multiplexers).
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to design combinational and sequential Circuits.
• Ability to simulate using software package.
• Ability to study various number systems and simplify the logical expressions using
Boolean functions
• Ability to design various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.
• Ability to introduce asynchronous sequential circuits and PLDs
• Ability to introduce digital simulation for development of application oriented logic
circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James W. Bignel, Digital Electronics, Cengage learning, 5th Edition, 2007.
2. M. Morris Mano, ‘Digital Design with an introduction to the VHDL’, Pearson
Education, 2013.
3. Comer “Digital Logic & State Machine Design, Oxford, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Mandal, “Digital Electronics Principles & Application, McGraw Hill Edu, 2013.
2. William Keitz, Digital Electronics-A Practical Approach with VHDL, Pearson, 2013.
3. Thomas L.Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 11th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
4. Charles H.Roth, Jr, Lizy Lizy Kurian John, ‘Digital System Design using VHDL, Cengage,
2013.
5. D.P.Kothari,J.S.Dhillon, ‘Digital circuits and Design’,Pearson Education, 2016.
EE8391 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields
• To impart knowledge on the concepts of
Electrostatic fields, electrical potential, energy density and their applications.
Magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector potential and its applications.
44
Different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
Electromagnetic waves and characterizing parameters
UNIT I ELECTROSTATICS – I 6+6
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Coordinate Systems – Vector fields –Gradient,
Divergence, Curl – theorems and applications - Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field
due to discrete and continuous charges – Gauss’s law and applications.
UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS – II 6+6
Electric potential – Electric field and equipotential plots, Uniform and Non-Uniform field,
Utilization factor – Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectrics - Dielectric polarization –
Dielectric strength - Electric field in multiple dielectrics – Boundary conditions, Poisson’s and
Laplace’s equations, Capacitance, Energy density, Applications.
UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 6+6
Lorentz force, magnetic field intensity (H) – Biot–Savart’s Law - Ampere’s Circuit Law – H due to
straight conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current, Magnetic flux density (B) – B in free
space, conductor, magnetic materials – Magnetization, Magnetic field in multiple media –
Boundary conditions, scalar and vector potential, Poisson’s Equation, Magnetic force, Torque,
Inductance, Energy density, Applications.
UNIT IV ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS 6+6
Magnetic Circuits - Faraday’s law – Transformer and motional EMF – Displacement current -
Maxwell’s equations (differential and integral form) – Relation between field theory and circuit
theory – Applications.
UNIT V ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 6+6
Electromagnetic wave generation and equations – Wave parameters; velocity, intrinsic
impedance, propagation constant – Waves in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics,
conductors- skin depth - Poynting vector – Plane wave reflection and refraction.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector
fields.
• Ability to understand the basic concepts about electrostatic fields, electrical potential,
energy density and their applications.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge in magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector
potential and its applications.
• Ability to understand the different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
• Ability to understand the basic concepts electromagnetic waves and characterizing
parameters
• Ability to understand and compute Electromagnetic fields and apply them for design and
analysis of electrical equipment and systems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mathew N. O. Sadiku, ‘Principles of Electromagnetics’, 6th Edition, Oxford University
Press Inc. Asian edition, 2015.
2. William H. Hayt and John A. Buck, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics’, McGraw Hill Special
Indian edition, 2014.
3. Kraus and Fleish, ‘Electromagnetics with Applications’, McGraw Hill International
Editions, Fifth Edition, 2010.
45
REFERENCES
1. V.V.Sarwate, ‘Electromagnetic fields and waves’, First Edition, Newage Publishers,
1993.
2. J.P.Tewari, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics - Theory, Problems and Applications’,
Second Edition, Khanna Publishers.
3. Joseph. A.Edminister, ‘Schaum’s Outline of Electromagnetics, Third Edition (Schaum’s
Outline Series), McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. S.P.Ghosh, Lipika Datta, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, First Edition, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, 2012.
5. K A Gangadhar, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, Khanna Publishers; Eighth Reprint :
2015
EE8301 L T P C
ELECTRICAL MACHINES – I 2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Magnetic-circuit analysis and introduce magnetic materials
• Constructional details, the principle of operation, prediction of performance, the
methods of testing the transformers and three phase transformer connections.
• Working principles of electrical machines using the concepts of electromechanical
energy conversion principles and derive expressions for generated voltage and torque
developed in all Electrical Machines.
• Working principles of DC machines as Generator types, determination of their no-
load/load characteristics, starting and methods of speed control of motors.
• Various losses taking place in D.C. Motor and to study the different testing methods to
arrive at their performance.
UNIT I MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS 6+6
Magnetic circuits –Laws governing magnetic circuits - Flux linkage, Inductance and energy –
Statically and Dynamically induced EMF - Torque – Properties of magnetic materials,
Hysteresis and Eddy Current losses - AC excitation, introduction to permanent magnets-
Transformer as a magnetically coupled circuit.
UNIT II TRANSFORMERS 6+6
Construction – principle of operation – equivalent circuit parameters – phasor diagrams,
losses – testing – efficiency and voltage regulation-all day efficiency-Sumpner’s test, per unit
representation – inrush current - three phase transformers-connections – Scott Connection
– Phasing of transformer– parallel operation of three phase transformers-auto transformer –
tap changing transformers- tertiary winding.
UNIT III ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND CONCEPTS 6+6
IN ROTATING MACHINES
Energy in magnetic system – Field energy and co energy-force and torque equations –
singly and multiply excited magnetic field systems-mmf of distributed windings – Winding
Inductances-, magnetic fields in rotating machines – rotating mmf waves – magnetic
46
saturation and leakage fluxes.
UNIT IV DC GENERATORS 6+6
Construction and components of DC Machine – Principle of operation - Lap and wave
windings-EMF equations– circuit model – armature reaction –methods of excitation-
commutation - interpoles compensating winding –characteristics of DC generators.
UNIT V DC MOTORS 6+6
Principle and operations - types of DC Motors – Speed Torque Characteristics of DC Motors-
starting and speed control of DC motors –Plugging, dynamic and regenerative braking-
testing and efficiency – Retardation test- Swinburne’s test and Hopkinson’s test - Permanent
Magnet DC (PMDC)motors-applications of DC
Motor
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to analyze the magnetic-circuits.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge in constructional details of transformers.
• Ability to understand the concepts of electromechanical energy conversion.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge in working principles of DC Generator.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge in working principles of DC Motor
• Ability to acquire the knowledge in various losses taking place in D.C. Machines
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen J. Chapman, ‘Electric Machinery Fundamentals’4th edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
2. P.C. Sen‘Principles of Electric Machines and Power Electronics’ John Wiley & Sons;
3rd Edition 2013.
3. Nagrath, I.J. and Kothari.D.P., Electric Machines’, McGraw-Hill Education, 2004
REFERENCES
1. Theodore Wildi, “Electrical Machines, Drives, and Power Systems”, Pearson
Education., (5th Edition), 2002.
2. B.R. Gupta ,’Fundamental of Electric Machines’ New age International Publishers,3rd
Edition ,Reprint 2015.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, ‘Electrical Machines’ McGraw - Hill Education, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition,2009.
4. Vincent Del Toro, ‘Basic Electric Machines’ Pearson India Education, 2016.
5. Surinder Pal Bali, ‘Electrical Technology Machines & Measurements, Vol.II, Pearson,
2013.
6. Fitzgerald. A.E., Charles Kingsely Jr, Stephen D.Umans, ‘Electric Machinery’, Sixth
edition, McGraw Hill Books Company, 2003.
47
EC8353 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
• Understand the structure of basic electronic devices.
• Be exposed to active and passive circuit elements.
• Familiarize the operation and applications of transistor like BJT and FET.
• Explore the characteristics of amplifier gain and frequency response.
• Learn the required functionality of positive and negative feedback systems.
UNIT I PN JUNCTION DEVICES 9
PN junction diode –structure, operation and V-I characteristics, diffusion and transition capacitance -
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier,– Display devices- LED, Laser diodes, Zener
diodecharacteristics- Zener Reverse characteristics – Zener as regulator
UNIT II TRANSISTORS AND THYRISTORS 9
BJT, JFET, MOSFET- structure, operation, characteristics and Biasing UJT, Thyristors and IGBT -
Structure and characteristics.
UNIT III AMPLIFIERS 9
BJT small signal model – Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –MOSFET
small signal model– Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain and frequency response- High
frequency analysis.
UNIT IV MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9
BIMOS cascade amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – FET
input stages – Single tuned amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods,
power amplifiers –Types (Qualitative analysis).
UNIT V FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9
Advantages of negative feedback – voltage / current, series , Shunt feedback –positive feedback –
Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be ability to:
• Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
• Able to identify and differentiate both active and passive elements
• Analyze the characteristics of different electronic devices such as diodes and
transistors
• Choose and adapt the required components to construct an amplifier circuit.
• Employ the acquired knowledge in design and analysis of oscillators
TEXT BOOKS:
1. . David A. Bell ,”Electronic devices and circuits”, Oxford University higher education, 5th
edition 2008.
2. Sedra and smith, “Microelectronic circuits”,7th Ed., Oxford University Press
48
REFERENCES:
1. Balbir Kumar, Shail.B.Jain, “Electronic devices and circuits” PHI learning private limited, 2nd edition
2014.
2. Thomas L.Floyd, “Electronic devices” Conventional current version, Pearson prentice hall, 10th
Edition, 2017.
3. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003.
4. Robert L.Boylestad, “Electronic devices and circuit theory”, 2002.
5. Robert B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical
Instrumentation”, CRC Press, 2004.
ME8792 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailing the role of Mechanical Engineers in their
operation and maintenance.
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 9
Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers,
FBC Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants –
Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration
systems.
UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 9
Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas
Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle
systems.
UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 9
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada
Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.
Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 9
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV),
Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL
ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 9
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution
control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
49
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal power
plant.
CO2 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas
and Combined cycle power plants.
CO3 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power
plants.
CO4 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable
energy power plants.
CO5 Explain the applications of power plants while extend their knowledge to power plant
economics and environmental hazards and estimate the costs of electrical energy
production.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
2010.
2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy", Open University, Oxford University Press in association
with the Open University, 2004.
3. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering", Second
Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw – Hill, 1998.
EC8311 ELECTRONICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To enability the students to understand the behavior of semiconductor device based on
experimentation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diode
2. Characteristics of a NPN Transistor under common emitter , common collector and
common base configurations
3. Characteristics of JFET and draw the equivalent circuit
4. Characteristics of UJT and generation of saw tooth waveforms
5. Design and Frequency response characteristics of a Common Emitter amplifier
6. Characteristics of photo diode & photo transistor, Study of light activated relay circuit
7. Design and testing of RC phase shift and LC oscillators
8. Single Phase half-wave and full wave rectifiers with inductive and capacitive filters
9. Differential amplifiers using FET
10. Study of CRO for frequency and phase measurements
50
11. Realization of passive filters
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyse electronic circuits.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Semiconductor devices like Diode, Zener Diode, NPN Transistors, JFET, UJT, Photo diode,
Photo Transistor
2. Resistors, Capacitors and inductors
3. Necessary digital IC 8
4. Function Generators 10
5. Regulated 3 output Power Supply 5, ± 15V 10
6. CRO 10
7. Storage Oscilloscope 1
8. Bread boards
9. Atleast one demo module each for the listed equipments.
10. Component data sheets to be provided
EE8311 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY-I L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To expose the students to the operation of D.C. machines and transformers
and give them experimental skill.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Open circuit and load characteristics of DC shunt generator- critical resistance and critical
speed.
2. Load characteristics of DC compound generator with differential and cumulative
connections.
3. Load test on DC shunt motor.
4. Load test on DC compound motor.
5. Load test on DC series motor.
6. Swinburne’s test and speed control of DC shunt motor.
7. Hopkinson’s test on DC motor – generator set.
8. Load test on single-phase transformer and three phase transformers.
9. Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer.
10. Sumpner’s test on single phase transformers.
11. Separation of no-load losses in single phase transformer.
12 Study of starters and 3-phase transformers connections.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze DC Generator
51
• Ability to understand and analyze DC Motor
• Ability to understand and analyse Transformers.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. DC Shunt Motor with Loading Arrangement – 3 nos
2. DC Shunt Motor Coupled with Three phase Alternator – 1 No.
3. Single Phase Transformer – 4 nos
4. DC Series Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
5. DC compound Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
6. Three Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
7. Single Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
8. DC Shunt Motor Coupled With DC Compound Generator – 2 nos
9. DC Shunt Motor Coupled With DC Shunt Motor – 1 No.
10. Tachometer -Digital/Analog – 8 nos
11. Single Phase Auto Transformer – 2 nos
12. Three Phase Auto Transformer – 1 No.
13. Single Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
14. Three Phase Resistive Loading Bank. – 2 nos
MA8491 NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
• To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals in real life
• situations.
• To acquaint the student with understanding of numerical techniques of differentiation and
integration which plays an important role in engineering and technology disciplines.
• To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
• To understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving various types of
partial differential equations.
UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 12
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method - Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
52
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 12
Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange's interpolation – Newton’s divided difference
interpolation – Cubic Splines - Difference operators and relations - Interpolation with equal intervals -
Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae.
UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12
Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using
Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule – Romberg’s Method - Two point and three point Gaussian
quadrature formulae – Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Single step methods - Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge - Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods - Milne’s and
Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.
UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS 12
Finite difference methods for solving second order two - point linear boundary value problems - Finite
difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations on
rectangular domain – One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and implicit (Crank Nicholson)
methods – One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
• Understand the basic concepts and techniques of solving algebraic and transcendental
equations.
• Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation and error approximations in various
intervals in real life situations.
• Apply the numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
• Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
• Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. Brian Bradie, "A Friendly Introduction to Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Gerald. C. F. and Wheatley. P. O., "Applied Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, 6th
Edition, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Mathews, J.H. "Numerical Methods for Mathematics, Science and Engineering", 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1992.
4. Sankara Rao. K., "Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers", Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
5. Sastry, S.S, "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 5th Edition,
2015.
53
EE8401 ELECTRICAL MACHINES – II L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Construction and performance of salient and non – salient type synchronous
generators.
• Principle of operation and performance of synchronous motor.
• Construction, principle of operation and performance of induction machines.
• Starting and speed control of three-phase induction motors.
• Construction, principle of operation and performance of single phase induction
motors and special machines.
UNIT I SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 6+6
Constructional details – Types of rotors –winding factors- emf equation – Synchronous
reactance – Armature reaction – Phasor diagrams of non salient pole synchronous
generator connected to infinite bus--Synchronizing and parallel operation – Synchronizing
torque -Change of excitation and mechanical input- Voltage regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF
and A.S.A methods – steady state power- angle characteristics– Two reaction theory –slip
test -short circuit transients - Capability Curves
UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 6+6
Principle of operation – Torque equation – Operation on infinite bus bars - V and Inverted V
curves – Power input and power developed equations – Starting methods – Current loci for
constant power input, constant excitation and constant power developed-Hunting – natural
frequency of oscillations – damper windings- synchronous condenser.
UNIT III THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 6+6
Constructional details – Types of rotors –- Principle of operation – Slip –cogging and
crawling- Equivalent circuit – Torque-Slip characteristics - Condition for maximum torque –
Losses and efficiency – Load test - No load and blocked rotor tests - Circle diagram –
Separation of losses – Double cage induction motors –Induction generators – Synchronous
induction motor.
UNIT IV STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION 6+6
MOTOR
Need for starting – Types of starters – DOL, Rotor resistance, Autotransformer and Star-
delta starters – Speed control – Voltage control, Frequency control and pole changing –
Cascaded connection-V/f control – Slip power recovery scheme-Braking of three phase
induction motor: Plugging, dynamic braking and regenerative braking.
UNIT V SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND SPECIAL MACHINES 6+6
Constructional details of single phase induction motor – Double field revolving theory and
operation – Equivalent circuit – No load and blocked rotor test – Performance analysis –
Starting methods of single-phase induction motors – Capacitor-start capacitor run Induction
motor- Shaded pole induction motor - Linear induction motor – Repulsion motor -
Hysteresis motor - AC series motor- Servo motors- Stepper motors - introduction to
magnetic levitation systems.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
54
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Synchronous
Generator
• Ability to understand MMF curves and armature windings.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Synchronous motor.
• Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Three phase Induction
Motor
• Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Special Machines
• Ability to predetermine the performance characteristics of Synchronous Machines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen. D. Umans, ‘Electric Machinery’, Mc Graw
Hill publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
2. Vincent Del Toro, ‘Basic Electric Machines’ Pearson India Education, 2016.
3. Stephen J. Chapman, ‘Electric Machinery Fundamentals’4th edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. D.P. Kothari and I.J. Nagrath, ‘Electric Machines’, McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, 2002.
2. P.S. Bhimbhra, ‘Electrical Machinery’, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
3. M.N. Bandyopadhyay, Electrical Machines Theory and Practice, PHI Learning PVT
LTD., New Delhi, 2009.
4. B.R.Gupta, ’Fundamental of Electric Machines’ New age International Publishers,3rd
Edition ,Reprint 2015.
5. Murugesh Kumar, ‘Electric Machines’, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2002.
6. Alexander S. Langsdorf, ‘Theory of Alternating-Current Machinery’, McGraw Hill
Publications, 2001.
EE8402 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To study the structure of electric power system and to develop expressions for the
computation of transmission line parameters.
• To obtain the equivalent circuits for the transmission lines based on distance and to
determine voltage regulation and efficiency.
• To understand the mechanical design of transmission lines and to analyze the
voltage distribution in insulator strings to improve the efficiency.
• To study the types, construction of cables and methods to improve the efficiency.
• To study about distribution systems, types of substations, methods of grounding,
EHVAC, HVDC and FACTS.
UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 9
Structure of Power System - Parameters of single and three phase transmission lines with
single and double circuits -Resistance, inductance and capacitance of solid, stranded and
bundled conductors, Symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing and transposition - application
of self and mutual GMD; skin and proximity effects -Typical configurations, conductor types
and electrical parameters of EHV lines.
55
UNIT II MODELLING AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 9
Performance of Transmission lines - short line, medium line and long line - equivalent
circuits, phasor diagram, attenuation constant, phase constant, surge impedance -
transmission efficiency and voltage regulation, real and reactive power flow in lines - Power
Circle diagrams - Formation of Corona – Critical Voltages – Effect on Line Performance.
UNIT III MECHANICAL DESIGN OF LINES 9
Mechanical design of OH lines – Line Supports –Types of towers – Stress and Sag
Calculation – Effects of Wind and Ice loading. Insulators: Types, voltage distribution in
insulator string, improvement of string efficiency, testing of insulators.
UNIT IV UNDER GROUND CABLES 9
Underground cables - Types of cables – Construction of single core and 3 core cables -
Insulation Resistance – Potential Gradient - Capacitance of Single-core and 3 core cables
- Grading of cables - Power factor and heating of cables – DC cables.
UNIT V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 9
Distribution Systems – General Aspects – Kelvin’s Law – AC and DC distributions -
Techniques of Voltage Control and Power factor improvement – Distribution Loss –Types
of Substations -Methods of Grounding – Trends in Transmission and Distribution: EHVAC,
HVDC and FACTS (Qualitative treatment only).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• To understand the importance and the functioning of transmission line parameters.
• To understand the concepts of Lines and Insulators.
• To acquire knowledge on the performance of Transmission lines.
• To understand the importance of distribution of the electric power in power system.
• To acquire knowledge on Underground Cables
• To become familiar with the function of different components used in Transmission
and Distribution levels of power system and modelling of these components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.P.Kothari, I.J. Nagarath, ‘Power System Engineering’, Mc Graw-Hill Publishing
Company limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2008.
2. C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, New Academic Science Ltd, 2009.
3. S.N. Singh, ‘Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution’, Prentice Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. B.R.Gupta, ‘Power System Analysis and Design’ S. Chand, New Delhi, Fifth Edition,
2008.
2. Luces M.Fualken berry, Walter Coffer, ‘Electrical Power Distribution and
Transmission’, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Arun Ingole, "power transmission and distribution" Pearson Education, 2017
4. J.Brian, Hardy and Colin R.Bayliss ‘Transmission and Distribution in Electrical
Engineering’, Newnes; Fourth Edition, 2012.
5. G.Ramamurthy, “Handbook of Electrical power Distribution,” Universities Press,
2013.
56
6. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Principles of power system’, S. Chand & Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 2013
EE8403 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Basic functional elements of instrumentation
• Fundamentals of electrical and electronic instruments
• Comparison between various measurement techniques
• Various storage and display devices
• Various transducers and the data acquisition systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Functional elements of an instrument – Static and dynamic characteristics – Errors in
measurement – Statistical evaluation of measurement data – Standards and calibration-
Principle and types of analog and digital voltmeters, ammeters.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS 9
Principle and types of multi meters – Single and three phase watt meters and energy meters –
Magnetic measurements – Determination of B-H curve and measurements of iron loss –
Instrument transformers – Instruments for measurement of frequency and phase.
UNIT III COMPARATIVE METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS 9
D.C potentiometers, D.C (Wheat stone, Kelvin and Kelvin Double bridge) & A.C bridges
(Maxwell, Anderson and Schering bridges), transformer ratio bridges, self-balancing bridges.
Interference & screening – Multiple earth and earth loops - Electrostatic and electromagnetic
Interference – Grounding techniques.
UNIT IV STORAGE AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9
Magnetic disk and tape – Recorders, digital plotters and printers, CRT display, digital CRO,
LED, LCD & Dot matrix display – Data Loggers.
UNIT V TRANSDUCERS AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS 9
Classification of transducers – Selection of transducers – Resistive, capacitive & inductive
Transducers – Piezoelectric, Hall effect, optical and digital transducers – Elements of data
acquisition system – Smart sensors-Thermal Imagers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• To acquire knowledge on Basic functional elements of instrumentation
• To understand the concepts of Fundamentals of electrical and electronic instruments
• Ability to compare between various measurement techniques
• To acquire knowledge on Various storage and display devices
• To understand the concepts Various transducers and the data acquisition systems
• Ability to model and analyze electrical and electronic Instruments and understand the
operational features of display Devices and Data Acquisition System.
57
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A.K. Sawhney, ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation’,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2010.
2. J. B. Gupta, ‘A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements’, S. K. Kataria & Sons,
Delhi, 2013.
3. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., Measurement Systems – Applications and Design, Special
Indian Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
REFERENCES
1. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, McGraw Hill, III Edition 2010.
2. D.V.S. Murthy, ‘Transducers and Instrumentation’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2015.
3. David Bell, ‘ Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements’, Oxford University Press,2013.
4. Martin Reissland, ‘Electrical Measurements’, New Age International (P) Ltd., Delhi, 2001.
5. Alan. S. Morris, Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall
of India, 2003.
EE8451 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following topics
• Signal analysis using Op-amp based circuits.
• Applications of Op-amp.
• Functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits, regulator
Circuits.
• IC fabrication procedure.
UNIT I IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and
etching, diffusion of impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging. Fabrication of
diodes, capacitance, resistance, FETs and PV Cell.
UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9
Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, differential amplifier;
frequency response of OP-AMP; Basic applications of op-amp – Inverting and Non-inverting
Amplifiers, summer, differentiator and integrator-V/I & I/V converters.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9
Instrumentation amplifier and its applications for transducer Bridge, Log and Antilog
Amplifiers- Analog multiplier & Divider, first and second order active filters, comparators,
multivibrators, waveform generators, clippers, clampers, peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A
converter (R- 2R ladder and weighted resistor types), A/D converters using opamps.
UNIT IV SPECIAL ICs 9
Functional block, characteristics of 555 Timer and its PWM application - IC-566 voltage
controlled oscillator IC; 565-phase locked loop IC, AD633 Analog multiplier ICs.
58
UNIT V APPLICATION ICs 9
AD623 Instrumentation Amplifier and its application as load cell weight measurement - IC
voltage regulators –LM78XX, LM79XX; Fixed voltage regulators its application as Linear
power supply - LM317, 723 Variability voltage regulators, switching regulator- SMPS - ICL
8038 function generator IC.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to acquire knowledge in IC fabrication procedure
• Ability to analyze the characteristics of Op-Amp
• To understand the importance of Signal analysis using Op-amp based circuits.
• Functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits,
regulator Circuits.
• To understand and acquire knowledge on the Applications of Op-amp
• Ability to understand and analyse, linear integrated circuits their Fabrication and
Application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Bell, ‘Op-amp & Linear ICs’, Oxford, 2013.
2. D. Roy Choudhary, Sheil B. Jani, ‘Linear Integrated Circuits’, II edition, New Age,
2003.
3. Ramakant A.Gayakward, ‘Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits’, IV edition,
Pearson Education, 2003 / PHI. 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Fiore,”Opamps & Linear Integrated Circuits Concepts & applications”, Cengage,
2010.
2. Floyd ,Buchla,”Fundamentals of Analog Circuits, Pearson, 2013.
3. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital
circuits system’, McGraw Hill, 2003.
4. Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, ‘Op-amp and Linear ICs’, Pearson, 6th
edition,2012.
5. Sergio Franco, ‘Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits’,
Mc Graw Hill, 2016.
6. Muhammad H. Rashid,’ Microelectronic Circuits Analysis and Design’ Cengage
Learning, 2011.
IC8451 CONTROL SYSTEMS LT P C
3204
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To understand the use of transfer function models for analysis physical systems and
introduce the control system components.
• To provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state error
analysis.
• To accord basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency
responses of systems.
• To introduce stability analysis and design of compensators
59
• To introduce state variable representation of physical systems
UNIT I SYSTEMS AND REPRESENTATION 9
Basic elements in control systems: – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of
mechanical and thermal systems – Transfer function – AC and DC servomotors – Block diagram
reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs.
UNIT II TIME RESPONSE 9
Time response: – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system response –
Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – Root locus construction- Effects of
P, PI, PID modes of feedback control –Time response analysis.
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE 9
Frequency response: – Bode plot – Polar plot – Determination of closed loop response from open
loop response - Correlation between frequency domain and time domain specifications
UNIT IV STABILITY AND COMPENSATOR DESIGN 9
Characteristics equation – Routh Hurwitz criterion – Nyquist stability criterion- Performance criteria –
Effect of Lag, lead and lag-lead compensation on frequency response-Design of Lag, lead and lag-
lead compensator using bode plots.
UNIT V STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9
Concept of state variables – State models for linear and time invariant Systems – Solution of state
and output equation in controllable canonical form – Concepts of controllability and observability.
TOTAL (L: 45+T:30): 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student should have the :
• Ability to develop various representations of system based on the knowledge of
Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals.
• Ability to do time domain and frequency domain analysis of various models of linear
system.
• Ability to interpret characteristics of the system to develop mathematical model.
• Ability to design appropriate compensator for the given specifications.
• Ability to come out with solution for complex control problem.
• Ability to understand use of PID controller in closed loop system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 2017.
2. Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Wiley, 2014.
REFERENCES
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson, 2015.
2. Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education,2009.
3. John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and Houpis Sttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
4. Rames C.Panda and T. Thyagarajan, “An Introduction to Process Modelling
Identification and Control of Engineers”, Narosa Publishing House, 2017.
5. M.Gopal, “Control System: Principle and design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
6. NPTEL Video Lecture Notes on “Control Engineering “by Prof. S. D. Agashe, IIT
Bombay.
60
EE8411 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY - II L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To expose the students to the operation of synchronous machines and induction
motors and give them experimental skill.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods.
2. Regulation of three phase alternator by ZPF and ASA methods.
3. Regulation of three phase salient pole alternator by slip test.
4. Measurements of negative sequence and zero sequence impedance of alternators.
5. V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor.
6. Load test on three-phase induction motor.
7. No load and blocked rotor tests on three-phase induction motor (Determination of
equivalent circuit parameters).
8. Separation of No-load losses of three-phase induction motor.
9. Load test on single-phase induction motor.
10. No load and blocked rotor test on single-phase induction motor.
11. Study of Induction motor Starters
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should have the :
• Ability to understand and analyze EMF and MMF methods
• Ability to analyze the characteristics of V and Inverted V curves
• Ability to understand the importance of Synchronous machines
• Ability to understand the importance of Induction Machines
• Ability to acquire knowledge on separation of losses
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Synchronous Induction motor 3HP – 1 No.
2. DC Shunt Motor Coupled With Three phase Alternator – 4 nos
3. DC Shunt Motor Coupled With Three phase Slip ring Induction motor – 1 No.
4. Three Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
5. Single Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
6. Tachometer -Digital/Analog – 8 nos
7. Single Phase Auto Transformer – 2 nos
8. Three Phase Auto Transformer – 3 nos
9. Single Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
10. Three Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
11. Capacitor Bank – 1 No.
61
EE8461 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with digital and analog
ICs.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Implementation of Boolean Functions, Adder and Subtractor circuits.
2. Code converters: Excess-3 to BCD and Binary to Gray code converter and vice-versa
3. Parity generator and parity checking
4. Encoders and Decoders
5. Counters: Design and implementation of 3-bit modulo counters as synchronous and
Asynchronous types using FF IC’s and specific counter IC.
6. Shift Registers: Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO,
PIPO modes using suitability IC’s.
7. Study of multiplexer and de multiplexer
8. Timer IC application: Study of NE/SE 555 timer in Astability, Monostability operation.
9. Application of Op-Amp: inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Adder, comparator,
Integrator and Differentiator.
10. Voltage to frequency characteristics of NE/ SE 566 IC.
11. Variability Voltage Regulator using IC LM317.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should have the :
• Ability to understand and implement Boolean Functions.
• Ability to understand the importance of code conversion
• Ability to Design and implement 4-bit shift registers
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Application of Op-Amp
• Ability to Design and implement counters using specific counter IC.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS: (3 per Batch)
S.No Name of the equipments / Components Quantity Required Remarks
1 Dual ,(0-30V) variability Power Supply 10 -
2 CRO 9 30MHz
3 Digital Multimeter 10 Digital
4 Function Generator 8 1 MHz
5 IC Tester (Analog) 2
6 Bread board 10
62
7 Computer (PSPICE installed) 1
Consumabilitys (sufficient quantity)
1 IC 741/ IC NE555/566/565
2 Digital IC types
3 LED
4 LM317
5 LM723
6 ICSG3524 / SG3525
7 Transistor – 2N3391
8 Diodes, IN4001,BY126
9 Zener diodes
10 Potentiometer
11 Step-down transformer 230V/12-0-12V
12 Capacitor
13 Resistors 1/4 Watt Assorted
14 Single Strand Wire
EE8412 TECHNICAL SEMINAR LT P C
0021
OBJECTIVES:
• To encourage the students to study advanced engineering developments
• To prepare and present technical reports.
• To encourage the students to use various teaching aids such as overhead
projectors, power point presentation and demonstrative models.
METHOD OF EVALUATION:
During the seminar session each student is expected to prepare and present a topic on
engineering/ technology, for a duration of about 8 to 10 minutes. In a session of three periods
per week, 15 students are expected to present the seminar. Each student is expected to
present atleast twice during the semester and the student is evaluated based on that. At the
end of the semester, he / she can submit a report on his / her topic of seminar and marks are
given based on the report. A Faculty guide is to be allotted and he / she will guide and monitor
the progress of the student and maintain attendance also. Evaluation is 100% internal.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
63
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to review, prepare and present technological developments
• Ability to face the placement interviews
EE8501 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To model the power system under steady state operating condition
• To understand and apply iterative techniques for power flow analysis
• To model and carry out short circuit studies on power system
• To model and analyze stability problems in power system
UNIT I POWER SYSTEM 9
Need for system planning and operational studies - Power scenario in India - Power system
components – Representation - Single line diagram - per unit quantities - p.u. impedance
diagram - p.u. reactance diagram - Network graph, Bus incidence matrix, Primitive
parameters, Bus admittance matrix from primitive parameters - Representation of off-
nominal transformer - Formation of bus admittance matrix of large power network.
UNIT II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 9
Bus classification - Formulation of Power Flow problem in polar coordinates - Power flow
solution using Gauss Seidel method - Handling of Voltage controlled buses - Power Flow
Solution by Newton Raphson method.
UNIT III SYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9
Assumptions in short circuit analysis - Symmetrical short circuit analysis using Thevenin’s
theorem - Bus Impedance matrix building algorithm (without mutual coupling) - Symmetrical
fault analysis through bus impedance matrix - Post fault bus voltages - Fault level - Current
limiting reactors.
UNIT IV UNSYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9
Symmetrical components - Sequence impedances - Sequence networks - Analysis of
unsymmetrical faults at generator terminals: LG, LL and LLG - unsymmetrical fault occurring
at any point in a power system - computation of post fault currents in symmetrical
component and phasor domains.
UNIT V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Classification of power system stability – Rotor angle stability - Swing equation - Swing
curve - Power-Angle equation - Equal area criterion - Critical clearing angle and time -
Classical step-by-step solution of the swing equation – modified Euler method.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to model the power system under steady state operating condition
• Ability to understand and apply iterative techniques for power flow analysis
• Ability to model and carry out short circuit studies on power system
• Ability to model and analyze stability problems in power system
64
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Fault analysis.
• Ability to model and understand various power system components and carry out
power flow, short circuit and stability studies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John J. Grainger, William D. Stevenson, Jr, ‘Power System Analysis’, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, Second Edition, 2008.
3. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 21st reprint, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Pai M A, ‘Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis’, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2007.
2. J. Duncan Glover, Mulukutla S.Sarma, Thomas J. Overbye, ‘Power System Analysis
& Design’, Cengage Learning, Fifth Edition, 2012.
3. Gupta B.R., ‘Power System - Analysis and Design’, S. Chand Publishing, 2001.
4. Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 10th reprint, 2010.
EE8551 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Architecture of µP8085 & µC 8051
• Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
• Need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
• Simple applications development with programming 8085 & 8051
UNIT I 8085 PROCESSOR 9
Hardware Architecture, pinouts – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING OF 8085 PROCESSOR
9
Instruction -format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data
manipulation& control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing –
Look up tability - Subroutine instructions - stack.
UNIT III 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9
Hardware Architecture, pinouts – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts- Data
Transfer, Manipulation, Control Algorithms& I/O instructions, Comparison to Programming
concepts with 8085.
65
UNIT IV PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 9
Study on need, Architecture, configuration and interfacing, with ICs: 8255, 8259, 8254,
8279, - A/D and D/A converters &Interfacing with 8085& 8051.
UNIT V MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9
Simple programming exercises- key board and display interface –Control of servo motor-
stepper motor control- Application to automation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to acquire knowledge in Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
• Ability to need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
• Ability to understand the importance of Interfacing
• Ability to explain the architecture of Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
• Ability to write the assembly language programme.
• Ability to develop the Microprocessor and Microcontroller based applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sunil Mathur &Jeebananda Panda, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
2. R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with
8085, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller
and Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. B.RAM,” Computer Fundamentals Architecture and Organization” New age
International Private Limited, Fifth edition, 2017.
3. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, Microprocessor & Microcontroller Architecture,
Programming & Interfacing using 8085,8086,8051,McGraw Hill Edu,2013.
4. Ajay V.Deshmukh, ‘Microcontroller Theory &Applications’, McGraw Hill Edu,2016
5. Douglas V.Hall, ‘Microprocessor and Interfacing’, McGraw Hill Edu,2016.
EE8552 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Different types of power semiconductor devices and their switching
• Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
• Operation, switching techniques and basics topologies of DC-DC switching
regulators.
• Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to
understand harmonic reduction methods.
• Operation of AC voltage controller and various configurations.
66
UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Study of switching devices, SCR, TRIAC, GTO, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT and IGCT- Static
characteristics: SCR, MOSFET and IGBT - Triggering and commutation circuit for SCR-
Introduction to Driver and snubber circuits.
UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
2-pulse, 3-pulse and 6-pulseconverters– performance parameters –Effect of source
inductance–– Firing Schemes for converter–Dual converters, Applications-light dimmer,
Excitation system, Solar PV systems.
UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTERS 9
Step-down and step-up chopper-control strategy– Introduction to types of choppers-A, B, C,
D and E -Switched mode regulators- Buck, Boost, Buck- Boost regulator, Introduction to
Resonant Converters, Applications-Battery operated vehicles.
UNIT IV INVERTERS 9
Single phase and three phase voltage source inverters (both1200 mode and 1800 mode)–
Voltage& harmonic control--PWM techniques: Multiple PWM, Sinusoidal PWM, modified
sinusoidal PWM – Introduction to space vector modulation –Current source inverter,
Applications-Induction heating, UPS.
UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase and Three phase AC voltage controllers–Control strategy- Power Factor
Control – Multistage sequence control -single phase and three phase cyclo converters –
Introduction to Matrix converters, Applications –welding .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to analyse AC-AC and DC-DC and DC-AC converters.
• Ability to choose the converters for real time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.H. Rashid, ‘Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications’, Pearson
Education, Third Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
2. P.S.Bimbra “Power Electronics” Khanna Publishers, third Edition, 2003.
3. Ashfaq Ahmed ‘Power Electronics for Technology’, Pearson Education, Indian
reprint, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Joseph Vithayathil,’ Power Electronics, Principles and Applications’, McGraw Hill
Series, 6th Reprint, 2013.
2. Philip T. Krein, “Elements of Power Electronics” Oxford University Press, 2004
Edition.
3. L. Umanand, “Power Electronics Essentials and Applications”, Wiley, 2010.
4. Ned Mohan Tore. M. Undel and, William. P. Robbins, ‘Power Electronics:
Converters, Applications and Design’, John Wiley and sons, third edition, 2003.
5. S.Rama Reddy, ‘Fundamentals of Power Electronics’, Narosa Publications, 2014.
6. M.D. Singh and K.B. Khanchandani, “Power Electronics,” Mc Graw Hill India, 2013.
7. JP Agarwal,” Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design” 1e, Pearson Education,
2002.
67
EE8591 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Signals and systems & their mathematical representation.
• Discrete time systems.
• Transformation techniques & their computation.
• Filters and their design for digital implementation.
• Programmability digital signal processor & quantization effects.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6+6
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stability, dynamic, recursive,
time variance; classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power;
mathematical representation of signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization,
quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect.
UNIT II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 6+6
Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-
transform, application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response –
Convolution – Discrete Time Fourier transform , magnitude and phase representation.
UNIT III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 6+6
Discrete Fourier Transform- properties, magnitude and phase representation -
Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT &DIF using radix 2 FFT – Butterfly
structure.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS 6+6
FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques –
Need and choice of windows – Linear phase characteristics. Analog filter design –
Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations; IIR Filters, digital design using impulse
invariant and bilinear transformation Warping, pre warping.
UNIT V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 6+6
Introduction – Architecture – Features – Addressing Formats – Functional modes -
Introduction to Commercial DS Processors.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Ability to understand the importance of Fourier transform, digital filters and DS
Processors.
2. Ability to acquire knowledge on Signals and systems & their mathematical
representation.
3. Ability to understand and analyze the discrete time systems.
4. Ability to analyze the transformation techniques & their computation.
5. Ability to understand the types of filters and their design for digital implementation.
6. Ability to acquire knowledge on programmability digital signal processor & quantization
effects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, ‘Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms
68
and Applications’, Pearson Education, New Delhi, PHI. 2003.
2. S.K. Mitra, ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’, McGraw Hill
Edu, 2013.
3. Lonnie C.Ludeman ,”Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing”,Wiley,2013
REFERENCES
1. Poorna Chandra S, Sasikala. B ,Digital Signal Processing, Vijay Nicole/TMH,2013.
2. Robert Schilling & Sandra L.Harris, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing using
Matlab”, Cengage Learning,2014.
3. B.P.Lathi, ‘Principles of Signal Processing and Linear Systems’, Oxford University
Press, 2010 3. Taan S. ElAli, ‘Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with
Mat Lab’, CRC Press, 2009.
4. SenM.kuo, woonseng\s.gan, “Digital Signal Processors, Architecture,
Implementations & Applications, Pearson,2013
5. DimitrisG.Manolakis, Vinay K. Ingle, applied Digital Signal
Processing,Cambridge,2012
CS8392 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java
• To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
• To define exceptions and use I/O streams
• To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
• To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10
Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance -
Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source File
-Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in Java
– constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types, Variables,
Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.
UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9
Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining an
interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings
UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9
Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions – built-in exceptions, creating
own exceptions, Stack Trace Elements. Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and
Character streams – Reading and Writing Console – Reading and Writing Files
UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8
Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
69
synchronizing threads, Inter-thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups. Generic
Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and Limitations.
UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9
Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts, and
images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse events -
AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing Components – Text
Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists- choices- Scrollbars – Windows
–Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
• Develop Java programs using OOP principles
• Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
• Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams
• Develop Java applications with threads and generics classes
• Develop interactive Java programs using swings
TEXT BOOKS
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, “Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals”, 9th Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “Java SE 8 for programmers”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. Steven Holzner, “Java 2 Black book”, Dreamtech press, 2011.
3. Timothy Budd, “Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java”, Updated Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.
EE8511 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide knowledge on analysis and design of control system along with basics of
instrumentation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
CONTROLSYSTEMS:
1. P, PI and PID controllers
2. Stability Analysis
3. Modeling of Systems – Machines, Sensors and Transducers
4. Design of Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead Compensators
5. Position Control Systems
6. Synchro-Transmitter- Receiver and Characteristics
7. Simulation of Control Systems by Mathematical development tools.
70
INSTRUMENTATION:
8. Bridge Networks –AC and DC Bridges
9. Dynamics of Sensors/Transducers
(a) Temperature (b) pressure (c) Displacement (d) Optical (e) Strain ( f) Flow
10 Power and Energy Measurement
11 Signal Conditioning
(a) Instrumentation Amplifier
(b) Analog – Digital and Digital –Analog converters (ADC and DACs)
12 Process Simulation
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand control theory and apply them to electrical engineering problems.
• Ability to analyze the various types of converters.
• Ability to design compensators
• Ability to understand the basic concepts of bridge networks.
• Ability to the basics of signal conditioning circuits.
• Ability to study the simulation packages.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CONTROLSYSTEMS:
1. PID controller simulation and learner kit – 1 No.
2. Digital storage Oscilloscope for capturing transience- 1 No
2 Personal Computer with control
system simulation packages - 10 Nos
3. DC motor –Generator test set-up for evaluation of motor parameters
4. CRO 30MHz – 1 No.
5. 2MHz Function Generator – 1No.
6. Position Control Systems Kit (with manual) – 1 No., Tacho Generator Coupling set
7. AC Synchro transmitter& receiver – 1No.
8. Sufficient number of Digital multi meters, speed and torque sensors
INSTRUMENTATION:
9. R, L, C Bridge kit (with manual)
10. a) Electric heater – 1No.
Thermometer – 1No.Thermistor (silicon type) RTD nickel type – 1No.
b) 30 psi Pressure chamber (complete set) – 1No. Current generator (0 – 20mA) Air
foot pump – 1 No. (with necessary connecting tubes)
c) LVDT20mm core length movability type – 1No. CRO 30MHz – 1No.
d) Optical sensor – 1 No. Light source
e) Strain Gauge Kit with Handy lever beam – 1No.
71
100gm weights – 10 nos
f) Flow measurement Trainer kit – 1 No.
(1/2 HP Motor, Water tank, Digital Milliammeter, complete set)
11. Single phase Auto transformer – 1No. Watt-hour meter (energy meter) – 1No. Ammeter
Voltmeter Rheostat Stop watch
Connecting wires (3/20)
12. IC Transistor kit – 1No.
13. Instrumentation Amplifier kit-1 No
14. Analog – Digital and Digital –Analog converters (ADC and DACs)- 1 No
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LTPC
0 021
OBJECTIVES: The course aims to:
• Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
• Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
• Make them Employability Graduates
• Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the
topic – answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively –
5 minute presentations
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group
dynamics - brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to
improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-
term career plan-making career changes.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be ability to:
• Make effective presentations
72
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2. Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad,
2016.
3. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2015
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
CS8383 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LT P C
LABORATORY 0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To build software development skills using java programming for real-world applications.
• To understand and apply the concepts of classes, packages, interfaces, arraylist, exception
handling and file processing.
• To develop applications using generic programming and event handling.
List of experiments
1. Develop a Java application to generate Electricity bill. Create a class with the following
members: Consumer no., consumer name, previous month reading, current month reading, type
of EB connection(i.e domestic or commercial). Compute the bill amount using the following tariff.
If the type of the EB connection is domestic, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
First 100 units - Rs. 1 per unit
101-200 units - Rs. 2.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 4 per unit
> 501 units - Rs. 6 per unit
If the type of the EB connection is commercial, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
First 100 units - Rs. 2 per unit
101-200 units - Rs. 4.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 6 per unit
> 501 units - Rs. 7 per unit
2. Develop a java application to implement currency converter (Dollar to INR, EURO to INR, Yen to
INR and vice versa), distance converter (meter to KM, miles to KM and vice versa) , time
converter (hours to minutes, seconds and vice versa) using packages.
3. Develop a java application with Employee class with Emp_name, Emp_id, Address, Mail_id,
Mobile_no as members. Inherit the classes, Programmer, Assistant Professor, Associate
Professor and Professor from employee class. Add Basic Pay (BP) as the member of all the
73
inherited classes with 97% of BP as DA, 10 % of BP as HRA, 12% of BP as PF, 0.1% of BP for
staff club fund. Generate pay slips for the employees with their gross and net salary.
4. Design a Java interface for ADT Stack. Implement this interface using array. Provide necessary
exception handling in both the implementations.
5. Write a program to perform string operations using ArrayList. Write functions for the following
a. Append - add at end
b. Insert – add at particular index
c. Search
d. List all string starts with given letter
6. Write a Java Program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains two integers and
an empty method named print Area(). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle and
Circle such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the classes
contains only the method print Area () that prints the area of the given shape.
7. Write a Java program to implement user defined exception handling.
8. Write a Java program that reads a file name from the user, displays information about whether
the file exists, whether the file is readable, or writable, the type of file and the length of the file in
bytes.
9. Write a java program that implements a multi-threaded application that has three threads. First
thread generates a random integer every 1 second and if the value is even, second thread
computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd, the third thread will print the
value of cube of the number.
10. Write a java program to find the maximum value from the given type of elements using a generic
function.
11. Design a calculator using event-driven programming paradigm of Java with the following options.
a) Decimal manipulations
b) Scientific manipulations
12. Develop a mini project for any application using Java concepts.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Develop and implement Java programs for simple applications that make use of classes,
packages and interfaces.
• Develop and implement Java programs with arraylist, exception handling and multithreading .
• Design applications using file processing, generic programming and event handling.
74
EE8601 SOLID STATE DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Steady state operation and transient dynamics of a motor load system.
• Analyze the operation of the converter/chopper fed dc drive, both qualitatively and quantitatively.
• Operation and performance of AC motor drives.
• Analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state DC motor
drive.
UNIT I DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS 9
Electric drive – Equations governing motor load dynamics – steady state stability – multi quadrant
Dynamics: acceleration, deceleration, starting & stopping – typical load torque characteristics –
Selection of motor.
UNIT II CONVERTER / CHOPPER FED DC MOTOR DRIVE 9
Steady state analysis of the single and three phase converter fed separately excited DC motor drive–
continuous conduction – Time ratio and current limit control – 4 quadrant operation of converter /
chopper fed drive-Applications.
UNIT III INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 9
Stator voltage control–V/f control– Rotor Resistance control-qualitative treatment of slip power
recovery drives-closed loop control–– vector control- Applications.
UNIT IV SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 9
V/f control and self-control of synchronous motor: Margin angle control and power factor control-
Three phase voltage/current source fed synchronous motor- Applications.
UNIT V DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR DRIVES 9
Transfer function for DC motor / load and converter – closed loop control with Current and speed
feedback–armature voltage control and field weakening mode – Design of controllers; current
controller and speed controller- converter selection and characteristics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and suggest a converter for solid state drive.
• Ability to select suitability drive for the given application.
• Ability to study about the steady state operation and transient dynamics of a motor load
system.
• Ability to analyze the operation of the converter/chopper fed dc drive.
• Ability to analyze the operation and performance of AC motor drives.
• Ability to analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state
DC motor drive.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gopal K.Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House, 1992.
2. Bimal K.Bose. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education, 2002.
3. R.Krishnan, Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control, Pearson, 2001.
REFERENCES
1. Vedam Subramanyam, “ Electric Drives Concepts and Applications ”, 2e, McGraw Hill, 2016
75
2. Shaahin Felizadeh, “Electric Machines and Drives”, CRC Press (Taylor and Francis Group),
2013.
3. John Hindmarsh and Alasdain Renfrew, “Electrical Machines and Drives System,” Elsevier
2012.
4. Theodore Wildi, “ Electrical Machines ,Drives and power systems ,6th edition, Pearson
Education ,2015
5. N.K. De., P.K. SEN” Electric drives” PHI, 2012.
EE8602 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Causes of abnormal operating conditions (faults, lightning and switching surges) of the
apparatus and system.
• Characteristics and functions of relays and protection schemes.
• Apparatus protection, static and numerical relays
• Functioning of circuit breaker
UNIT I PROTECTION SCHEMES 9
Principles and need for protective schemes – nature and causes of faults – types of faults – Methods
of Grounding - Zones of protection and essential qualities of protection – Protection scheme
UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAYS 9
Operating principles of relays - the Universal relay – Torque equation – R-X diagram –
Electromagnetic Relays – Over current, Directional, Distance, Differential, Negative sequence and
Under frequency relays.
UNIT III APPARATUS PROTECTION 9
Current transformers and Potential transformers and their applications in protection schemes -
Protection of transformer, generator, motor, bus bars and transmission line.
UNIT IV STATIC RELAYS AND NUMERICAL PROTECTION 9
Static relays – Phase, Amplitude Comparators – Synthesis of various relays using Static
comparators – Block diagram of Numerical relays – Over current protection, transformer differential
protection, distant protection of transmission lines.
UNIT V CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9
Physics of arcing phenomenon and arc interruption - DC and AC circuit breaking – re-striking
voltage and recovery voltage - rate of rise of recovery voltage - resistance switching - current
chopping - interruption of capacitive current - Types of circuit breakers – air blast, air break, oil,
SF6, MCBs, MCCBs and vacuum circuit breakers – comparison of different circuit breakers –
Rating and selection of Circuit breakers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze Electromagnetic and Static Relays.
• Ability to suggest suitability circuit breaker.
• Ability to find the causes of abnormal operating conditions of the apparatus and system.
76
• Ability to analyze the characteristics and functions of relays and protection schemes.
• Ability to study about the apparatus protection, static and numerical relays.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on functioning of circuit breaker.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sunil S.Rao, ‘Switchgear and Protection’, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
2. B.Rabindranath and N.Chander, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
International (P) Ltd., First Edition 2011.
3. Arun Ingole, ‘Switch Gear and Protection’ Pearson Education, 2017.
REFERENCES
1. BadriRam ,B.H. Vishwakarma, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
InternationalPvt Ltd Publishers, Second Edition 2011.
2. Y.G.Paithankar and S.R.Bhide, ‘Fundamentals of power system protection’, Second
Edition,Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
3. C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, 6th Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2010
4. RavindraP.Singh, ‘Switchgear and Power System Protection’, PHI Learning Private Ltd.,
NewDelhi, 2009.
5. VK Metha,” Principles of Power Systems” S. Chand, 2005.
6. Bhavesh Bhalja, R.P. Maheshwari, Nilesh G. Chotani,’Protection and Switchgear’ Oxford
University Press, 2011.
EE8691 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Building Blocks of Embedded System
• Various Embedded Development Strategies
• Bus Communication in processors, Input/output interfacing.
• Various processor scheduling algorithms.
• Basics of Real time operating system and example tutorials to discuss on one real time
operating system tool.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Embedded Systems –Structural units in Embedded processor , selection of
processor & memory devices- DMA – Memory management methods- Timer and Counting
devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock, In circuit emulator, Target Hardware Debugging.
UNIT II EMBEDDED NETWORKING 9
Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication
protocols RS232 standard – RS422 – RS 485 - CAN Bus -Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) – Inter
Integrated Circuits (I2C) –need for device drivers.
UNIT III EMBEDDED FIRMWARE DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
Embedded Product Development Life Cycle- objectives, different phases of EDLC, Modelling of
EDLC; issues in Hardware-software Co-design, Data Flow Graph, state machine model,
77
Sequential Program Model, concurrent Model, object oriented Model.
UNIT IV RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling, Task
communication shared memory, message passing-, Inter process Communication –
synchronization between processes-semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority
inheritance.
UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATION AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Case Study of Washing Machine- Automotive Application- Smart card System Application-ATM
machine –Digital camera
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze Embedded systems.
• Ability to suggest an embedded system for a given application.
• Ability to operate various Embedded Development Strategies
• Ability to study about the bus Communication in processors.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on various processor scheduling algorithms.
• Ability to understand basics of Real time operating system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peckol, “Embedded system Design”, John Wiley & Sons,2010
2. Lyla B Das,” Embedded Systems-An Integrated Approach”, Pearson, 2013
3. Shibu. K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, 2e, Mc graw Hill, 2017.
REFERENCES
1. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded System-Architecture, Programming, Design’, Mc Graw Hill, 2013.
2. C.R.Sarma, “Embedded Systems Engineering”, University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd, 2013.
3. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2006.
4. Han-Way Huang, “Embedded system Design Using C8051”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
5. Rajib Mall “Real-Time systems Theory and Practice” Pearson Education, 2007.
EE8661 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide hands on experience with power electronic converters and testing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Gate Pulse Generation using R, RC and UJT.
2 Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC
3 Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT
4 AC to DC half controlled converter
5 AC to DC fully controlled Converter
6 Step down and step up MOSFET based choppers
7 IGBT based single phase PWM inverter
78
8 IGBT based three phase PWM inverter
9 AC Voltage controller
10 Switched mode power converter.
11 Simulation of PE circuits (1Φ & 3Φ semi converters, 1Φ & 3Φ full converters, DC-DC
converters, AC voltage controllers).
12 Characteristics of GTO & IGCT.
13 Characteristics of PMBLDC motor
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to practice and understand converter and inverter circuits and apply software for
engineering problems.
• Ability to experiment about switching characteristics various switches.
• Ability to analyze about AC to DC converter circuits.
• Ability to analyze about DC to AC circuits.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on AC to AC converters
• Ability to acquire knowledge on simulation software.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Device characteristics(for SCR, MOSFET, TRIAC,GTO,IGCT and IGBT kit with built-in /
discrete power supply and meters) - 2 each
2. SinglephaseSCRbasedhalfcontrolledconverterandfullycontrolledconverteralong with
built-in/separate/firing circuit/module and meter – 2 each
3. MOSFET based step up and step down choppers (Built in/ Discrete) – 1 each
4. IGBT based single phase PWM inverter module/Discrete Component – 2
5. IGBT based three phase PWM inverter module/Discrete Component – 2
6. Switched mode power converter module/Discrete Component – 2
7. SCR &TRIAC based 1 phase AC controller along with lamp or rheostat load - 2
8. Cyclo converter kit with firing module – 1
9. Dual regulated DC power supply with common ground
10. Cathode ray Oscilloscope –10
11. Isolation Transformer – 5
12. Single phase Auto transformer –3
13. Components (Inductance, Capacitance ) 3 set for each
14. Multimeter – 5
15. LCR meter – 3
16. Rheostats of various ranges – 2 sets of 10 value
17. Work tabilitys – 10
18. DC and AC meters of required ranges – 20
19. Component data sheets to be provided
79
EE8681 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide training on programming of microprocessors and microcontrollers
and understand the interface requirements.
• To simulate various microprocessors and microcontrollers using KEIL or Equivalent
simulator.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Simple arithmetic operations: addition / subtraction / multiplication / division.
2 Programming with control instructions:
(i) Ascending / Descending order, Maximum / Minimum of numbers.
(ii) Programs using Rotate instructions.
(iii) Hex / ASCII / BCD code conversions.
3 Interface Experiments: with 8085
(i) A/D Interfacing. & D/A Interfacing.
4 Traffic light controller.
5 I/O Port / Serial communication
6 Programming Practices with Simulators/Emulators/open source
7 Read a key ,interface display
8 Demonstration of basic instructions with 8051 Micro controller execution, including:
(i) Conditional jumps & looping
(ii) Calling subroutines.
9 Programming I/O Port and timer of 8051
(i) study on interface with A/D & D/A
(ii) Study on interface with DC & AC motors
10 Application hardware development using embedded processors.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering
problems.
• Ability to programming logics for code conversion.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on A/D and D/A.
• Ability to understand basics of serial communication.
• Ability to understand and impart knowledge in DC and AC motor interfacing.
• Ability to understand basics of software simulators.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Sl.No. Description of Equipment Quantity required
1. 8085 Microprocessor Trainer with Power Supply 15
2. 8051 Micro Controller Trainer Kit with power 15
supply
3. 8255 Interface boards 5
4. 8251 Interface boards 5
80
5. 8259 Interface boards 5
6. 8279 Keyboard / Display Interface boards 5
7. 8254 timer/ counters 5
8. ADC and DAC cards 5
9. AC & DC motor with Controller s 5
10. Traffic Light Control Systems 5
EE8611 MINI PROJECT LT P C
0042
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop their own innovative prototype of ideas.
• To train the students in preparing mini project reports and examination.
The students in a group of 5 to 6 works on a topic approved by the head of the department
and prepares a comprehensive mini project report after completing the work to the
satisfaction. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews. The
review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A mini project report is
required at the end of the semester. The mini project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the mini project report jointly by external and internal examiners constituted
by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• On Completion of the mini project work students will be in a position to take up their
final year project work and find solution by formulating proper methodology.
EE8701 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Various types of over voltages in power system and protection methods.
• Generation of over voltages in laboratories.
• Measurement of over voltages.
• Nature of Breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
• Testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination
UNIT I OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9
Causes of over voltages and its effects on power system – Lightning, switching surges and
temporary over voltages, Corona and its effects – Bewley lattice diagram- Protection
against over voltages.
81
UNIT II DIELECTRIC BREAKDOWN 9
Properties of Dielectric materials - Gaseous breakdown in uniform and non-uniform fields –
Corona discharges – Vacuum breakdown – Conduction and breakdown in pure and
commercial liquids, Maintenance of oil Quality – Breakdown mechanisms in solid and
composite dielectrics- Applications of insulating materials in electrical equipments.
UNIT III GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
Generation of High DC voltage: Rectifiers, voltage multipliers, vandigraff generator:
generation of high impulse voltage: single and multistage Marx circuits – generation of high
AC voltages: cascaded transformers, resonant transformer and tesla coil- generation of
switching surges – generation of impulse currents - Triggering and control of impulse
generators.
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9
High Resistance with series ammeter – Dividers, Resistance, Capacitance and Mixed
dividers - Peak Voltmeter, Generating Voltmeters - Capacitance Voltage Transformers,
Electrostatic Voltmeters – Sphere Gaps - High current shunts- Digital techniques in high
voltage measurement.
UNIT V HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING & INSULATION COORDINATION 9
High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus as per International and Indian standards
– Power frequency, impulse voltage and DC testing of Insulators, circuit breakers, bushing,
isolators and transformers- Insulation Coordination& testing of cables.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand Transients in power system.
• Ability to understand Generation and measurement of high voltage.
• Ability to understand High voltage testing.
• Ability to understand various types of over voltages in power system.
• Ability to measure over voltages.
• Ability to test power apparatus and insulation coordination
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.Naidu and V. Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth
Edition, 2013.
2. E. Kuffel and W.S. Zaengl, J.Kuffel, ‘High voltage Engineering fundamentals’,
Newnes Second Edition Elsevier , New Delhi, 2005.
3. C.L. Wadhwa, ‘High voltage Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, Third
Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. L.L. Alston, ‘High Voltage Technology’, Oxford University Press, First Indian Edition,
2011.
2. Mazen Abdel – Salam, Hussein Anis, Ahdab A-Morshedy, Roshday Radwan, High
Voltage Engineering – Theory &Practice, Second Edition Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2010.
3. Subir Ray,’ An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering’ PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2013.
82
EE8702 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following topics
• Significance of power system operation and control.
• Real power-frequency interaction and design of power-frequency controller.
• Reactive power-voltage interaction and the control actions to be implemented for
maintaining the voltage profile against varying system load.
• Economic operation of power system.
• SCADA and its application for real time operation and control of power systems
UNIT I PRELIMINARIES ON POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND 9
CONTROL
Power scenario in Indian grid – National and Regional load dispatching centers –
requirements of good power system - necessity of voltage and frequency regulation - real
power vs frequency and reactive power vs voltage control loops - system load variation, load
curves and basic concepts of load dispatching - load forecasting - Basics of speed
governing mechanisms and modeling - speed load characteristics - regulation of two
generators in parallel.
UNIT II REAL POWER - FREQUENCY CONTROL 9
Load Frequency Control (LFC) of single area system-static and dynamic analysis of
uncontrolled and controlled cases - LFC of two area system - tie line modeling - block
diagram representation of two area system - static and dynamic analysis - tie line with
frequency bias control – state variability model - integration of economic dispatch control
with LFC.
UNIT III REACTIVE POWER – VOLTAGE CONTROL 9
Generation and absorption of reactive power - basics of reactive power control – Automatic
Voltage Regulator (AVR) – brushless AC excitation system – block diagram representation
of AVR loop - static and dynamic analysis – stability compensation – voltage drop in
transmission line - methods of reactive power injection - tap changing transformer, SVC
(TCR + TSC) and STATCOM for voltage control.
UNIT IV ECONOMIC OPERATION OF POWER SYSTEM 9
Statement of economic dispatch problem - input and output characteristics of thermal plant -
incremental cost curve - optimal operation of thermal units without and with transmission
losses (no derivation of transmission loss coefficients) - base point and participation factors
method - statement of unit commitment (UC) problem - constraints on UC problem - solution
of UC problem using priority list – special aspects of short term and long term hydrothermal
problems.
UNIT V COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9
Need of computer control of power systems-concept of energy control centers and functions
– PMU - system monitoring, data acquisition and controls - System hardware configurations
- SCADA and EMS functions - state estimation problem – measurements and errors -
weighted least square estimation - various operating states - state transition diagram.
83
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the day-to-day operation of electric power system.
• Ability to analyze the control actions to be implemented on the system to meet the
minute-to-minute variation of system demand.
• Ability to understand the significance of power system operation and control.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on real power-frequency interaction.
• Ability to understand the reactive power-voltage interaction.
• Ability to design SCADA and its application for real time operation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Olle.I.Elgerd, ‘Electric Energy Systems theory - An introduction’, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 34th reprint, 2010.
2. Allen. J. Wood and Bruce F. Wollen berg, ‘Power Generation, Operation and
Control’, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2016.
3. Abhijit Chakrabarti and Sunita Halder, ‘Power System Analysis Operation and
Control’, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Third Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, Second Edition, 2008.
2. Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
21st reprint, 2010.
3. Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 10th reprint, 2010.
EE8703 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Awareness about renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
• Adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing renewable Energy.
• Recognize current and possible future role of renewable energy sources.
UNIT I RENEWABLE ENERGY (RE) SOURCES 9
Environmental consequences of fossil fuel use, Importance of renewable sources of energy,
Sustainable Design and development, Types of RE sources, Limitations of RE sources,
Present Indian and international energy scenario of conventional and RE sources.
UNIT II WIND ENERGY 9
Power in the Wind – Types of Wind Power Plants(WPPs)–Components of WPPs-Working
of WPPs- Siting of WPPs-Grid integration issues of WPPs.
84
UNIT III SOLAR PV AND THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Solar Radiation, Radiation Measurement, Solar Thermal Power Plant, Central Receiver
Power Plants, Solar Ponds.- Thermal Energy storage system with PCM- Solar Photovoltaic
systems : Basic Principle of SPV conversion – Types of PV Systems- Types of Solar Cells,
Photovoltaic cell concepts: Cell, module, array ,PV Module I-V Characteristics, Efficiency &
Quality of the Cell, series and parallel connections, maximum power point tracking,
Applications.
UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9
Introduction-Bio mass resources –Energy from Bio mass: conversion processes-Biomass
Cogeneration-Environmental Benefits. Geothermal Energy: Basics, Direct Use, Geothermal
Electricity. Mini/micro hydro power: Classification of hydropower schemes, Classification of
water turbine, Turbine theory, Essential components of hydroelectric system.
UNIT V OTHER ENERGY SOURCES 9
Tidal Energy: Energy from the tides, Barrage and Non Barrage Tidal power systems. Wave
Energy: Energy from waves, wave power devices. Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion
(OTEC)- Hydrogen Production and Storage- Fuel cell : Principle of working- various types -
construction and applications. Energy Storage System- Hybrid Energy Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to create awareness about renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
• Ability to get adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing renewable Energy.
• Ability to recognize current and possible future role of renewable energy sources.
• Ability to explain the various renewable energy resources and technologies and their
applications.
• Ability to understand basics about biomass energy.
• Ability to acquire knowledge about solar energy.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshua Earnest, Tore Wizeliu, ‘Wind Power Plants and Project Development’, PHI
Learning Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
2. D.P.Kothari, K.C Singal, Rakesh Ranjan “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Scott Grinnell, “Renewable Energy & Sustainable Design”, CENGAGE Learning,
USA, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. A.K.Mukerjee and Nivedita Thakur,” Photovoltaic Systems: Analysis and Design”,
PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011
2. Richard A. Dunlap,” Sustainable Energy” Cengage Learning India Private Limited,
Delhi, 2015.
3. Chetan Singh Solanki, “ Solar Photovoltaics : Fundamentals, Technologies and
Applications”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011
4. Bradley A. Striebig,Adebayo A.Ogundipe and Maria Papadakis,” Engineering
Applications in Sustainable Design and Development”, Cengage Learning India
Private Limited, Delhi, 2016.
5. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable energy”, Open University, Oxford University Press in
association with the Open University, 2004.
6. Shobh Nath Singh, ‘Non-conventional Energy resources’ Pearson Education ,2015.
85
EE8711 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide better understanding of power system analysis through digital simulation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Computation of Transmission Line Parameters
2 Formation of Bus Admittance and Impedance Matrices and Solution of Networks
3 Power Flow Analysis using Gauss-Seidel Method
4 Power Flow Analysis using Newton Raphson Method
5 Symmetric and unsymmetrical fault analysis
6 Transient stability analysis of SMIB System
7 Economic Dispatch in Power Systems
8 Load – Frequency Dynamics of Single- Area and Two-Area Power Systems
9 State estimation: Weighted least square estimation
10 Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems : Transmission Line Energization
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
• Ability to understand power system planning and operational studies.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Formation of Bus Admittance and Impedance Matrices
and Solution of Networks.
• Ability to analyze the power flow using GS and NR method
• Ability to find Symmetric and Unsymmetrical fault
• Ability to understand the economic dispatch.
• Ability to analyze the electromagnetic transients.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. Personal computers (Intel i3, 80GB, 2GBRAM) – 30 nos
2. Printer laser- 1 No.
3. Dot matrix- 1 No.
4. Server (Intel i5, 80GB, 2GBRAM) (High Speed Processor) – 1 No.
5. Software: any power system simulation software with 5 user license
6. Compliers: C, C++, VB, VC++ - 30 users
86
EE8712 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To train the students in Renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
• To provide adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing Renewable Energy.
• To recognize current and possible future role of Renewable energy sources.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Simulation study on Solar PV Energy System.
2 Experiment on “VI-Characteristics and Efficiency of 1kWp Solar PV System”.
3 Experiment on “Shadowing effect & diode based solution in 1kWp Solar PV System”.
4 Experiment on Performance assessment of Grid connected and Standalone 1kWp Solar
Power System.
5 Simulation study on Wind Energy Generator.
6 Experiment on Performance assessment of micro Wind Energy Generator.
7 Simulation study on Hybrid (Solar-Wind) Power System.
8 Experiment on Performance Assessment of Hybrid (Solar-Wind) Power System.
9 Simulation study on Hydel Power.
10 Experiment on Performance Assessment of 100W Fuel Cell.
11 Simulation study on Intelligent Controllers for Hybrid Systems.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze Renewable energy systems.
• Ability to train the students in Renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
• Ability to provide adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing Renewable
Energy.
• Ability to simulate the various Renewable energy sources.
• Ability to recognize current and possible future role of Renewable energy sources.
• Ability to understand basics of Intelligent Controllers.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
S.No Name of the equipments / Components Quantity Remarks
Required
1. Personal computers (Intel i3, 80GB, 2GBRAM) 15 -
2. CRO 9 30MHz
3. Digital Multimeter 10 Digital
4. PV panels - 100W, 24V 1
5. Battery storage system with charge and 1
discharge control 40Ah
6. PV Emulator 1
7. Micro Wind Energy Generator module 1
87
Consumabilitys (Minimum of 5 Nos. each)
8. Potentiometer 5 -
9. Step-down transformer 5 230V/12-0-12V
10. Component data sheets to be provided
EE8811 PROJECT WORK LT P C
0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature review
till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports and to
face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department
under the guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after
completing the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is
evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by
the Head of the Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project
work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and
internal examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• On Completion of the project work students will be in a position to take up any challenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.
IC8651 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM LT P C
22 03
OBJECTIVES:
i. To provide knowledge on design state feedback control and state observer.
ii. To provide knowledge in phase plane analysis.
iii. To give basic knowledge in describing function analysis.
iv. To study the design of optimal controller.
v. To study the design of optimal estimator including Kalman Filter
UNIT I STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 6+6
Introduction- concepts of state variables and state model-State model for linear continuous time
systems, Diagonalisation- solution of state equations- Concepts of controllability and observability.
UNIT II STATE VARIABLE DESIGN 6+6
Introduction to state model: Effect of state feedback - Pole placement design: Necessary and
sufficient condition for arbitrary pole placement, State regulator design Design of state observers-
Separation principle- Design of servo systems: State feedback with integral control.
88
UNIT III SAMPLED DATA ANALYSIS 6+6
Introduction spectrum analysis of sampling process signal reconstruction difference equations The Z
transform function, the inverse Z transform function, response of Linear discrete system, the Z
transform analysis of sampled data control systems, response between sampling instants, the Z and
S domain relationship. Stability analysis and compensation techniques.
UNIT IV NON LINEAR SYSTEMS 6+6
Introduction, common physical nonlinearites, The phase plane method: concepts, singular points,
stability of non linear systems, construction of phase trajectories system analysis by phase plane
method. The describing function method, stability analysis by describing function method, Jump
resonance.
UNIT V OPTIMAL CONTROL 6+6
Introduction: Classical control and optimization, formulation of optimal control problem, Typical optimal
control performance measures - Optimal state regulator design: Lyapunov equation, Matrix Riccati
equation - LQR steady state optimal control – Application examples.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
i. Able to design state feedback controller and state observer.
ii. Able to understand and analyse linear and nonlinear systems using phase plane
method.
iii. Able to understand and analyse nonlinear systems using describing function method.
iv. Able to understand and design optimal controller.
v. Able to understand optimal estimator including Kalman Filter.
vi. Ability to apply advanced control strategies to practical engineering problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th edition, Mc Graw Hill India, 2012
2. K. Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. K. P. Mohandas, “Modern Control Engineering”, Sanguine Technical Publishers, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. M.Gopal, Modern Control System Theory, 3rd edition, New Age International Publishers, 2014.
2. William S Levine, “Control System Fundamentals,” The Control Handbook, CRC Press, Tayler and
Francies Group, 2011.
3. Ashish Tewari, ‘Modern Control Design with Matlab and Simulink’, John Wiley, New Delhi, 2002.
4. T. Glad and L. Ljung,, “Control Theory –Multivariable and Non-Linear Methods”, Taylor & Francis,
2002.
5. D.S.Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems” First Indian Reprint, CRC Press, 2009.
EE8001 VISUAL LANGUAGES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• To study about the concepts of windows programming models, MFC applications,
drawing with the GDI, getting inputs from Mouse and the Keyboard.
• To study the concepts of Menu basics, menu magic and classic controls of the
windows programming using VC++.
• To study the concept of Document/View Architecture with single & multiple document
89
interface, toolbars, status bars and File I/O Serialization.
• To study about the integrated development programming event driven programming,
variabilitys, constants, procedures and basic ActiveX controls in visual basic.
• To understand the database and the database management system, visual data
manager, data bound controls and ADO controls in VB.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF WINDOWS AND MFC 9
Messages - Windows programming - SDK style - Hungarian notation and windows data
types - SDK programming in perspective. The benefits of C++ and MFC - MFC design
philosophy – Document / View architecture - MFC class hierarchy - AFX functions.
Application object - Frame window object - Message map. Drawing the lines – Curves –
Ellipse – Polygons and other shapes. GDI pens – Brushes - GDI fonts - Deleting GDI objects
and deselecting GDI objects. Getting input from the mouse: Client & Non-client - Area
mouse messages - Mouse wheel - Cursor. Getting input from the keyboard: Input focus -
Keystroke messages - Virtual key codes - Character & dead key messages.
UNIT II RESOURCES AND CONTROLS 9
Creating a menu – Loading and displaying a menu – Responding to menu commands –
Command ranges - Updating the items in menu, update ranges – Keyboard accelerators.
Creating menus programmatically - Modifying menus programmatically - The system menu -
Owner draw menus – Cascading menus - Context menus. The C button class – C list box
class – C static class - The font view application – C edit class – C combo box class – C
scrollbar class. Model dialog boxes – Modeless dialog boxes.
UNIT III DOCUMENT / VIEW ARCHITECTURE 9
The in existence function revisited – Document object – View object – Frame window object
– Dynamic object creation. SDI document template - Command routing. Synchronizing
multiple views of a document – Mid squares application – Supporting multiple document
types – Alternatives to MDI. Splitter Windows: Dynamic splitter window – Static splitter
windows. Creating & initializing a toolbar - Controlling the toolbar’s visibility – Creating &
initializing a status bar - Creating custom status bar panes – Status bar support in
appwizard. Opening, closing and creating the files - Reading & Writing – C file derivatives –
Serialization basics - Writing serializability classes.
UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF VISUAL BASIC 9
Menu bar – Tool bar – Project explorer – Toolbox – Properties window – Form designer –
Form layout – Intermediate window. Designing the user interface: Aligning the controls –
Running the application – Visual development and event driven programming.
Variabilitys: Declaration – Types – Converting variability types – User defined data types -
Lifetime of a variability. Constants - Arrays – Types of arrays. Procedures: Subroutines –
Functions – Calling procedures. Text box controls – List box & Combo box controls – Scroll
bar and slider controls – File controls.
UNIT V DATABASE PROGRAMMING WITH VB 9
Record sets – Data control – Data control properties, methods. Visual data manager:
Specifying indices with the visual data manager – Entering data with the visual data
manager. Data bound list control – Data bound combo box – Data bound grid control.
Mapping databases: Database object – Tability def object, Query def object. Programming
the active database objects – ADO object model – Establishing a connection - Executing
SQL statements – Cursor types and locking mechanism – Manipulating the record set
90
object – Simple record editing and updating.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering
problems
• Ability to study about the concepts of windows programming models.
• Ability to study the concepts of Menu basics, menu magic and classic controls.
• Ability to study the concept of Document/View Architecture with single & multiple
document interface.
• Ability to study about the integrated development programming event driven
programming.
• Ability to understand the database and the database management system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jeff Prosise, ‘Programming Windows With MFC’, Second Edition, WP Publishers &
Distributors (P) Ltd, Reprinted, 2002.
2. Evangelos Petroutsos, ‘Mastering Visual Basic 6.0’, BPB Publications, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Herbert Schildt, ‘MFC Programming From the Ground Up’, Second Edition, McGraw
Hill, reprinted, 2002.
2. John Paul Muller, ‘Visual C++ 6 From the Ground Up Second Edition’, McGraw Hill,
Reprinted, 2002.
3. Curtis Smith & Micheal Amundsen, ‘Teach Yourself Database Programming with
Visual Basic 6 in 21 days’, Techmedia Pub, 1999.
EE8002 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Magnetic circuit parameters and thermal rating of various types of electrical machines.
• Armature and field systems for D.C. machines.
• Core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers.
• Design of stator and rotor of induction machines and synchronous machines.
• The importance of computer aided design method.
UNIT I DESIGN OF FIELD SYSTEM AND ARMATURE 9
Major considerations in Electrical Machine Design – Materials for Electrical apparatus –
Design of Magnetic circuits – Magnetising current – Flux leakage – Leakage in Armature.
Design of lap winding and wave winding.
UNIT II DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS 9
Construction - KVA output for single and three phase transformers – Overall dimensions –
design of yoke, core and winding for core and shell type transformers – Estimation of No
load current – Temperature rise in Transformers – Design of Tank and cooling tubes of
Transformers. Computer program: Complete Design of single phase core transformer
91
UNIT III DESIGN OF DC MACHINES 9
Construction - Output Equations – Main Dimensions – Choice of specific loadings –
Selection of number of poles – Design of Armature – Design of commutator and brushes –
design of field Computer program: Design of Armature main dimensions
UNIT IV DESIGN OF INDUCTION MOTORS 9
Construction - Output equation of Induction motor – Main dimensions – choice of specific
loadings – Design of squirrel cage rotor and wound rotor –Magnetic leakage calculations –
Operating characteristics : Magnetizing current - Short circuit current – Circle diagram -
Computer program: Design of slip-ring rotor
UNIT V DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 9
Output equations – choice of specific loadings – Design of salient pole machines – Short
circuit ratio – Armature design – Estimation of air gap length – Design of rotor –Design of
damper winding – Determination of full load field MMF – Design of field winding – Design of
turbo alternators -Computer program: Design of Stator main dimensions-Brushless DC
Machines
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand basics of design considerations for rotating and static electrical
machines
• Ability to design of field system for its application.
• Ability to design sing and three phase transformer.
• Ability to design armature and field of DC machines.
• Ability to design stator and rotor of induction motor.
• Ability to design and analyze synchronous machines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sawhney, A.K., ‘A Course in Electrical Machine Design’, Dhanpat Rai& Sons, New
Delhi, Fifth Edition, 1984.
2. M V Deshpande ‘Design and Testing of Electrical Machines’ PHI learning Pvt Lt,
2011.
3. Sen, S.K., ‘Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes’,
Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. A.Shanmugasundaram, G.Gangadharan, R.Palani ‘Electrical Machine Design Data
Book’, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2007.
2. ‘Electrical Machine Design’, Balbir Singh, Vikas Publishing House Private Limited,
1981.
3. V Rajini, V.S Nagarajan, ‘Electrical Machine Design’, Pearson, 2017.
4. K.M.Vishnumurthy ‘Computer aided design of electrical machines’ B S
Publications,2008
92
EE8003 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the fundamental concepts of stability of power systems and its
classification.
• To expose the students to dynamic behaviour of the power system for small and
large disturbances.
• To understand and enhance the stability of power systems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STABILITY 9
Fundamental concepts - Stability and energy of a system - Power System Stability:
Definition, Causes, Nature and Effects of disturbances, Classification of stability,
Modelling of electrical components - Basic assumptions made in stability studies-
Modelling of Synchronous machine for stability studies(classical model) - Rotor dynamics
and the swing equation.
UNIT II SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY 9
Basic concepts and definitions – State space representation, Physical Interpretation of
small–signal stability, Eigen properties of the state matrix: Eigenvalues and eigenvectors,
modal matrices, eigenvalue and stability, mode shape and participation factor. Small–
signal stability analysis of a Single-Machine Infinite Bus (SMIB) Configuration with
numerical example.
UNIT III TRANSIENT STABILITY 9
Review of numerical integration methods: modified Euler and Fourth Order Runge-Kutta
methods, Numerical stability,. Interfacing of Synchronous machine (classical machine)
model to the transient stability algorithm (TSA) with partitioned – explicit approaches-
Application of TSA to SMIB system.
UNIT IV VOLTAGE STABILITY 9
Factors affecting voltage stability- Classification of Voltage stability-Transmission system
characteristics- Generator characteristics- Load characteristics- Characteristics of
reactive power compensating Devices- Voltage collapse.
UNIT V ENHANCEMENT OF SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY AND TRANSIENT 9
STABILITY
Power System Stabilizer –. Principle behind transient stability enhancement methods:
high-speed fault clearing, regulated shunt compensation, dynamic braking, reactor
switching, independent pole-operation of circuit-breakers, single-pole switching, fast-
valving, high-speed excitation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Learners will attain knowledge about the stability of power system
• Learners will have knowledge on small-signal stability, transient stability and voltage
stability.
• Learners will be able to understand the dynamic behaviour of synchronous
generator for different disturbances.
93
• Learners will be able to understand the various methods to enhance the stability of
a power system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Power system stability and control ,P. Kundur ; edited by Neal J. Balu, Mark G.
Lauby,
McGraw-Hill, 1994.
2. R.Ramnujam,” Power System Dynamics Analysis and Simulation, PHI Learning
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009
3. T.V. Cutsem and C.Vournas, “Voltage Stability of Electric Power Systems”,
Kluwer publishers, 1998.
REFERENCES
1. Peter W., Saucer, Pai M.A., “Power System Dynamics and Stability, Pearson
Education (Singapore), 9th Edition, 2007.
2. EW. Kimbark., “Power System Stability”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, New Jersey,
2013.
3. SB. Crary., “Power System Stability”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, New Jersey, 1955.
4. K.N. Shubhanga,“Power System Analysis” Pearson, 2017.
5. Power systems dynamics: Stability and control / K.R. Padiyar, BS Publications, 2008
6. Power system control and Stability P.M. Anderson, A.A. Foud, Iowa State University
Press, 1977.
EE8004 MODERN POWER CONVERTERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Switched mode power supplies
• Matrix Converter
• Soft switched converters
UNIT I SWITCHED MODE POWER SUPPLIES (SMPS) 9
DC Power supplies and Classification; Switched mode dc power supplies - with and without
isolation, single and multiple outputs; Closed loop control and regulation; Design examples
on converter and closed loop performance.
UNIT II AC-DC CONVERTERS 9
Switched mode AC-DC converters. synchronous rectification - single and three phase
topologies - switching techniques - high input power factor . reduced input current harmonic
distortion. improved efficiency. with and without input-output isolation. performance indices
design examples
UNIT III DC-AC CONVERTERS 9
Multi-level Inversion - concept, classification of multilevel inverters, Principle of operation,
main features and analysis of Diode clamped, Flying capacitor and cascaded multilevel
inverters; Modulation schemes.
UNIT IV AC-AC CONVERTERS WITH AND WITHOUT DC LINK 9
Matrix converters. Basic topology of matrix converter; Commutation – current path;
Modulation techniques - scalar modulation, indirect modulation; Matrix converter as only
94
AC-DC converter; AC-AC converter with DC link - topologies and operation - with and
without resonance link - converter with dc link converter; Performance comparison with
matrix converter with DC link converters.
UNIT V SOFT-SWITCHING POWER CONVERTERS 9
Soft switching techniques. ZVS, ZCS, quasi resonance operation; Performance comparison
hard switched and soft switched converters.AC-DC converter, DC-DC converter, DC-AC
converter.; Resonant DC power supplies .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to suggest converters for AC-DC conversion and SMPS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Power Electronics Handbook, M.H.Rashid, Academic press, New york, 2000.
2. Advanced DC/DC Converters, Fang Lin Luo and Fang Lin Luo, CRC Press,
NewYork, 2004.
3. Control in Power Electronics- Selected Problem, Marian P.Kazmierkowski,
R.Krishnan and Frede Blaabjerg, Academic Press (Elsevier Science), 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Power Electronic Circuits, Issa Batarseh, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.2004
2. Power Electronics for Modern Wind Turbines, Frede Blaabjerg and Zhe Chen,
Morgan & Claypool Publishers series, United States of America, 2006.
3. Krein Philip T, Elements of Power Electronics,Oxford University press, 2008
4. Agarwal ,Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and Design, 3rd edition, Jai P,
Prentice Hall,2000
5. L. Umanand, Power Electronics: Essentials & Applications, John Wiley and Sons,
2009.
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from WTO
to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological Research,
Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act of
India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
95
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition and
IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S. V. Satakar, “Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002
REFERENCES:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
RO8591 PRINCIPLES OF ROBOTICS LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the functional elements of Robotics
• To impart knowledge on the direct and inverse kinematics
• To introduce the manipulator differential motion and control
• To educate on various path planning techniques
• To introduce the dynamics and control of manipulators
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9
Brief history-Types of Robot–Technology-Robot classifications and specifications-Design and
controlissues- Various manipulators – Sensors - work cell - Programming languages.
UNIT II DIRECT AND INVERSE KINEMATICS 9
Mathematical representation of Robots - Position and orientation – Homogeneous transformation-
Various joints- Representation using the Denavit Hattenberg parameters -Degrees of freedom-Direct
kinematics-Inverse kinematics- SCARA robots- Solvability – Solution methods-Closed form solution.
UNIT III MANIPULATOR DIFFERENTIAL MOTION AND STATICS 9
Linear and angular velocities-Manipulator Jacobian-Prismatic and rotary joints–Inverse -Wrist and arm
singularity - Static analysis - Force and moment Balance.
96
UNIT IV PATH PLANNING 9
Definition-Joint space technique-Use of p-degree polynomial-Cubic polynomial-Cartesian space
technique - Parametric descriptions - Straight line and circular paths - Position and orientation
planning.
UNIT V DYNAMICS AND CONTROL 9
Lagrangian mechanics-2DOF Manipulator-Lagrange Euler formulation-Dynamic model –Manipulator
control problem-Linear control schemes-PID control scheme-Force control of robotic manipulator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand basic concept of robotics.
• To analyze Instrumentation systems and their applications to various
• To know about the differential motion add statics in robotics
• To know about the various path planning techniques.
• To know about the dynamics and control in robotics industries.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.K.Mittal and I.J.Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,4th Reprint, 2005.
2. JohnJ.Craig ,Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third edition, Pearson Education,
2009.
3. M.P.Groover, M.Weiss, R.N. Nageland N. G.Odrej, Industrial Robotics, McGraw-Hill
Singapore, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Ashitava Ghoshal, Robotics-Fundamental Concepts and Analysis’, Oxford University Press, Sixth
impression, 2010.
2. K. K.Appu Kuttan, Robotics, I K International, 2007.
3. Edwin Wise, Applied Robotics, Cengage Learning, 2003.
4. R.D.Klafter,T.A.Chimielewski and M.Negin, Robotic Engineering–An Integrated Approach,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1994.
5. B.K.Ghosh, Control in Robotics and Automation: Sensor Based Integration, Allied
Publishers,Chennai, 1998.
6. S.Ghoshal, “ Embedded Systems & Robotics” – Projects using the 8051 Microcontroller”,
Cengage Learning, 2009.
97
EE8005 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of stepping motors.
• Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of switched reluctance
motors.
• Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of permanent magnet
brushless D.C. motors.
• Construction, principle of operation and performance of permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
• Construction, principle of operation and performance of other special Machines.
UNIT I STEPPER MOTORS 9
Constructional features –Principle of operation –Types – Torque predictions – Linear
Analysis – Characteristics – Drive circuits – Closed loop control – Concept of lead angle -
Applications.
UNIT II SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS (SRM) 9
Constructional features –Principle of operation- Torque prediction–Characteristics Steady
state performance prediction – Analytical Method – Power controllers – Control of SRM
drive- Sensor less operation of SRM – Applications.
UNIT III PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS D.C. MOTORS 9
Fundamentals of Permanent Magnets- Types- Principle of operation- Magnetic circuit
analysis- EMF and Torque equations- Power Converter Circuits and their controllers -
Characteristics and control- Applications.
UNIT IV PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (PMSM) 9
Constructional features -Principle of operation – EMF and Torque equations - Sine wave
motor with practical windings - Phasor diagram - Power controllers – performance
characteristics -Digital controllers – Applications.
UNIT V OTHER SPECIAL MACHINES 9
Constructional features – Principle of operation and Characteristics of Hysteresis motor-
Synchronous Reluctance Motor–Linear Induction motor-Repulsion motor- Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to analyze and design controllers for special Electrical Machines.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of stepper motor.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of stepper switched
reluctance motors.
• Ability to construction, principle of operation, switched reluctance motors.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of permanent magnet
brushless D.C. motors.
• Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
• Ability to select a special Machine for a particular application.
98
TEXT BOOKS:
• K.Venkataratnam, ‘Special Electrical Machines’, Universities Press (India) Private
Limited, 2008.
• T. Kenjo, ‘Stepping Motors and Their Microprocessor Controls’, Clarendon Press
London, 1984
• E.G. Janardanan, ‘Special electrical machines’, PHI learning Private Limited, Delhi,
2014.
REFERENCES
1. R.Krishnan, ‘Switched Reluctance Motor Drives – Modeling, Simulation, Analysis,
Design and Application’, CRC Press, New York, 2001.
2. T. Kenjo and S. Nagamori, ‘Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors’,
Clarendon Press, London, 1988.
3. T.J.E.Miller,‘Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives’, Oxford
University Press, 1989.
4. R.Srinivasan, ‘Special Electrical Machines’, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
EE8006 POWER QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Causes & Mitigation techniques of various PQ events.
• Various Active & Passive power filters.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9
Terms and definitions & Sources – Overloading, under voltage, over voltage - Concepts of
transients - Short duration variations such as interruption - Long duration variation such as
sustained interruption - Sags and swells - Voltage sag - Voltage swell - Voltage imbalance –
Voltage fluctuations - Power frequency variations - International standards of power quality
– Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve
UNIT II VOLTAGE SAG AND SWELL 9
Estimating voltage sag performance - Thevenin’s equivalent source - Analysis and
calculation of various faulted condition - Estimation of the sag severity - Mitigation of
voltage sag, Static transfer switches and fast transfer switches. - Capacitor switching –
Lightning - Ferro resonance - Mitigation of voltage swell.
UNIT III HARMONICS 9
Harmonic sources from commercial and industrial loads - Locating harmonic sources –
Power system response characteristics - Harmonics Vs transients. Effect of harmonics –
Harmonic distortion - Voltage and current distortions - Harmonic indices - Inter harmonics –
Resonance Harmonic distortion evaluation, IEEE and IEC standards.
UNIT IV PASSIVE POWER COMPENSATORS 9
Principle of Operation of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators, Analysis and Design of
Passive Shunt Compensators Simulation and Performance of Passive Power Filters-
Limitations of Passive Filters Parallel Resonance of Passive Filters with the Supply System
99
and Its Mitigation. Fundamentals of load compensation – voltage regulation & power factor
correction.
UNIT V POWER QUALITY MONITORING & CUSTOM POWER DEVICES 9
Monitoring considerations - Monitoring and diagnostic techniques for various power quality
problems - Quality measurement equipment - Harmonic / spectrum analyzer - Flicker
meters Disturbance analyzer - Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring.
Principle& Working of DSTATCOM – DSTATCOM in Voltage control mode, current control
mode, DVR Structure – Rectifier supported DVR – DC Capacitor supported DVR -Unified
power quality conditioner.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand various sources, causes and effects of power quality issues,
electrical systems and their measures and mitigation.
• Ability to analyze the causes & Mitigation techniques of various PQ events.
• Ability to study about the various Active & Passive power filters.
• Ability to understand the concepts about Voltage and current distortions, harmonics.
• Ability to analyze and design the passive filters.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on compensation techniques.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on DVR.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger. C. Dugan, Mark. F. Mc Granagham, Surya Santoso, H.WayneBeaty,
“Electrical Power Systems Quality”, McGraw Hill,2003
2. J. Arrillaga, N.R. Watson, S. Chen, “Power System Quality Assessment”, (New York :
Wiley),2000.
3. Bhim Singh, Ambrish Chandra, Kamal Al-Haddad,” Power Quality Problems &
Mitigation Techniques” Wiley, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. G.T. Heydt, “Electric Power Quality”, 2nd Edition. (West Lafayette, IN, Stars in a
Circle Publications, 1994.
2. M.H.J Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and
Interruptions”, (New York: IEEE Press), 2000.
EE8007 EHVAC TRANSMISSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• EHVAC Transmission lines
• Electrostatic field of AC lines
• Corona in E.H.V. lines
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
EHVAC Transmission line trends and preliminary aspect - standard transmission voltages –
Estimation at line and ground parameters-Bundle conductors: Properties -Inductance and
Capacitance of EHV lines – Positive, negative and zero sequence impedance – Line
Parameters for Modes of Propagation.
100
UNIT II ELECTROSTATIC FIELDS 9
Electrostatic field and voltage gradients – Calculations of electrostatic field of AC lines –
Effect of high electrostatic field on biological organisms and human beings - Surface
voltage gradients and Maximum gradients of actual transmission lines – Voltage gradients
on sub conductor.
UNIT III POWER CONTROL 9
Electrostatic induction in un energized lines – Measurement of field and voltage gradients
for three phase single and double circuit lines – Un energized lines. Power Frequency
Voltage control and overvoltage in EHV lines: No load voltage – Charging currents at power
frequency-Voltage control – Shunt and Series compensation – Static VAR compensation.
UNIT IV CORONA EFFECTS AND RADIO INTERFERENCE 9
Corona in EHV lines – Corona loss formulae-Charge voltage diagram- Attenuation of
traveling waves due to Corona – Audio noise due to Corona, its generation, characteristic
and limits. Measurements of audio noise radio interference due to Corona - properties of
radio noise – Frequency spectrum of RI fields – Measurements of RI and RIV.
UNIT V STEADY STATE AND TRANSIENT LIMITS 9
Design of EHV lines based on steady state and transient limits - EHV cables and their
characteristics-Introduction six phase transmission – UHV.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the principles and types of EHVAC system.
• Ability to analyze the electrostatic field of AC lines
• Ability to study about the compensation.
• Ability to study about the corona in E.H.V. lines
• Ability to understand the EHV cables.
• Ability to analyze the steady state and transient limits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rokosh Das Begamudre, ”Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”– Wiley
Eastern LTD., NEW DELHI 1990.
2. S. Rao, “HVAC and HVDC Transmission, Engineering and Practice” Khanna
Publisher, Delhi, 1990.
REFERENCES
1. Subir Ray, “An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, 2013.
2. RD Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”– New Academic
Science Ltd; 4 edition 2011.
3. Edison,” EHV Transmission line”- Electric Institution, GEC, 1968.
101
EC8395 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology through demonstrations,
case studies, simulations, contributions of scientist, national/international policies with a futuristic
vision along with socio-economic impact and issues
• To study the various analog and digital modulation techniques
• To study the principles behind information theory and coding
• To study the various digital communication techniques
UNIT I ANALOG MODULATION 9
Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Angle
modulation – PM and FM – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Superheterodyne receivers
UNITII PULSE MODULATION 9
Low pass sampling theorem – Quantization – PAM – Line coding – PCM, DPCM, DM, and ADPCM
And ADM, Channel Vocoder - Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing
UNIT III DIGITAL MODULATION AND TRANSMISSION 9
Phase shift keying – BPSK, DPSK, QPSK – Principles of M-ary signaling M-ary PSK & QAM –
Comparison, ISI – Pulse shaping – Duo binary encoding – Cosine filters – Eye pattern, equalizers
UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 9
Measure of information – Entropy – Source coding theorem – Shannon–Fano coding, Huffman
Coding, LZ Coding – Channel capacity – Shannon-Hartley law – Shannon's limit – Error control codes
– Cyclic codes, Syndrome calculation – Convolution Coding, Sequential and Viterbi decoding
UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS 9
PN sequences – properties – m-sequence – DSSS – Processing gain, Jamming – FHSS –
Synchronisation and tracking – Multiple Access – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
• Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
• Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
• Use data and pulse communication techniques.
• Analyze Source and Error control coding.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH 2007
2. S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2005
REFERENCES:
1. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford University
Press, 2007
2. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series – “Analog and Digital Communications” TMH 2006
3. B.Sklar, Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications” 2/e Pearson
Education 2007.
102
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
• To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
• To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
• To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
• To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of caste,
class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics,
complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community based
DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj
Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management Authority(SDMA)
– Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as dams,
embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and Scenarios
in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology and local
resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes and
legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and field
works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be ability to
• Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
• Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
103
• Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13:
978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu Vulnerability India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES :
• To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; collective /
Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabilityd
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National and
State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational Institutions, Social
Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
• Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
104
REFERENCES:
1. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
2. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
MG8491 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: 0
• To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources
for the engineering and business problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15
The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitivity analysis.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8
Transportation Assignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest
route – Minimal spanning tree – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT
networks – Critical path scheduling – Sequencing models.
UNIT III INVENTORY MODELS 6
Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models –
Stochastic inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6
Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and
multi server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite
population – Simulation.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 10
Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life –
Economic life– Single / Multi variability search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple
Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Upon completion of this course, the students can ability to use the optimization techniques
for use engineering and Business problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Hillier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 2005
2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley,
2009.
105
2. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 1990.
3. Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992.
4. Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern,
1994.
5. Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantitative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 2002.
MA8391 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
• This course aims at providing the required skill to apply the statistical tools in engineering
problems.
• To introduce the basic concepts of probability and random variables.
• To introduce the basic concepts of two dimensional random variables.
• To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays
an important role in real life problems.
• To introduce the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments which plays very
important roles in the field of agriculture and statistical quality control.
UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – The axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.
UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and linear
regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and
identically distributed random variables).
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Sampling distributions - Estimation of parameters - Statistical hypothesis - Large sample tests based
on Normal distribution for single mean and difference of means -Tests based on t, Chi-square and F
distributions for mean, variance and proportion - Contingency table (test for independent) - Goodness
of fit.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
One way and Two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT V STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL `12
Control charts for measurements (X and R charts) – Control charts for attributes (p, c and np charts) –
Tolerance limits - Acceptance sampling.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
106
• Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have knowledge of
standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
• Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
• Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
• Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture
and statistical quality control.
• Have the notion of sampling distributions and statistical techniques used in engineering and
management problems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
2. Milton. J. S. and Arnold. J.C., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES :
1. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
2. Papoulis, A. and Unnikrishnapillai, S., "Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes", McGraw Hill Education India, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Ross, S.M., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists", 3rd Edition,
Elsevier, 2004.
4. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan, R.A., "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of
Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
5. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., "Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2007.
EI8075 FIBRE OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS LT P C
3003
AIM:
To contribute to the knowledge of Fibre optics and Laser Instrumentation and its Industrial andMedical
Application.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties.
• To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibres.
• To expose the students to the Laser fundamentals.
• To provide adequate knowledge about Industrial application of lasers.
• To provide adequate knowledge about holography and Medical applications of Lasers.
UNIT I OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES 9
Construction of optical fiber cable: Guiding mechanism in optical fiber and Basic component of optical
fiber communication, –Principles of light propagation through a fibre: Total internal reflection,
Acceptance angle (θa), Numerical aperture and Skew mode, –Different types of fibres and their
properties: Single and multimode fibers and Step index and graded index fibers,– fibrecharacteristics:
Mechanical characteristics and Transmission characteristics, – Absorption losses – Scattering losses
– Dispersion – Connectors and splicers –Fibre termination – Optical sources: Light Emitting Diode
(LED), – Optical detectors: PIN Diode.
107
UNIT II INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBRES 9
Fibre optic sensors: Types of fiber optics sensor, Intrinsic sensor- Temperature/ Pressure sensor,
Extrinsic sensors, Phase Modulated Fibre Optic Sensor and Displacementsensor (Extrinsic Sensor) –
Fibre optic instrumentation system: Measurement of attenuation (by cut back method), Optical domain
reflectometers, Fiber Scattering loss Measurement, Fiber Absorption Measurement, Fiber dispersion
measurements, End reflection method and Near field scanning techniques – Different types of
modulators: Electro-optic modulator (EOM) –Interferometric method of measurement of length –
Moire fringes – Measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage, liquid level and strain.
UNIT III LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9
Fundamental characteristics of lasers – Level Lasers: Two-Level Laser, Three Level Laser, Quasi
Three and four level lasers – Properties of laser: Monochromaticity, Coherence, Divergence and
Directionality and Brightness –Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q-switching and mode
locking – Cavity damping – Types of lasers; – Gas lasers, solid lasers, liquid lasers and
semiconductor lasers.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS 9
Laser for measurement of distance, Laser for measurement of length, Laser for measurement of
velocity, Laser for measurement of acceleration, Laser for measurement of current, voltage and Laser
for measurement of Atmospheric Effect: Types of LIDAR, Construction And Working, and LIDAR
Applications – Material processing: Laser instrumentation for material processing, Powder Feeder,
Laser Heating, Laser Welding, Laser Melting, Conduction Limited Melting and Key Hole Melting –
Laser trimming of material: Process Of Laser Trimming, Types Of Trim, Construction And Working
Advantages – Material Removal and vaporization: Process Of Material Removal.
UNIT V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9
Holography: Basic Principle, Holography vs. photography, Principle Of Hologram Recording,
Condition For Recording A Hologram, Reconstructing and viewing the holographic image–
Holography for non-destructive testing – Holographic components – Medical applications of lasers,
laser-Tissue Interactions Photochemical reactions, Thermalisation, collisional relaxation, Types of
Interactions and Selecting an Interaction Mechanism – Laser instruments for surgery, removal of
tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynaecology and oncology.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES (COs):
1. Understand the principle, transmission, dispersion and attenuation characteristics of opticalfibers
2. Apply the gained knowledge on optical fibers for its use as communication medium and as sensor
as well which have important applications in production, manufacturing industrial and biomedical
applications.
3. Understand laser theory and laser generation system.
4. Students will gain ability to apply laser theory for the selection of lasers for a specific Industrial and
medical application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.M. Senior, ‘Optical Fibre Communication – Principles and Practice’, Prentice Hall of India,1985.
2. J. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, ‘Introduction to Opto Electronics’, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Eric Udd, William B., and Spillman, Jr., “Fiber Optic Sensors: An Introduction for Engineers and
Scientists “, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. M. Arumugam, ‘Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors’, Anuradha Agencies, 2002.
3. John F. Ready, “Industrial Applications of Lasers”, Academic Press, Digitized in 2008.
108
4. Monte Ross, ‘Laser Applications’, McGraw Hill, 1968.
5. John and Harry, “Industrial lasers and their application”, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
6. Keiser, G., “Optical Fiber Communication”, McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2000.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
109
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
• Define, formulate and analyze a problem
• Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
• Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
• Work independently as well as in teams
• Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
110
EE8008 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• The concept of system identification and adaptive control
• Black-box approach based system identification
• Batch and recursive identification
• Computer Controlled Systems
• Design concept for adaptive control schemes
UNIT I NON-PARAMETRIC METHODS 9
Non-parametric methods - Transient analysis - frequency analysis - Correlation analysis -
Spectral analysis - Input signal design for identification
UNIT II PARAMETRIC METHODS 9
Least squares estimation – Analysis of the least squares estimate - Best linear unbiased
estimate – Model parameterizations - Prediction error methods.
UNIT III RECURSIVE IDENTIFICATION METHODS 9
The recursive least square method - Model validation –Model structure determination -
Introduction to closed loop system identification.
UNIT IV ADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES 9
Introduction – Auto-tuning of PID controller using relay feedback approach – Types of adaptive
control, Gain scheduling, Model reference adaptive control, Self–tuning controller – Design of
gain scheduled adaptive controller – Applications of gain scheduling.
UNIT V MODEL-REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM (MRAS) and SELF-TUNING 9
REGULATOR (STR)
STR – Pole placement design – Indirect STR and direct STR – MRAC - MIT rule – Lyapunov
theory – Relationship between MRAC and STR.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand various system identification techniques and features of adaptive
control like STR and MRAC.
• Ability to understand the concept of system identification and adaptive control
• Ability to understand about Black-box approach based system identification
• Ability to get knowledge about batch and recursive identification
• Ability to study about computer controlled systems
• Ability to design concept for adaptive control schemes
TEXT BOOKS:
1. T. Soderstrom and PetreStoica, System Identification, Prentice Hall International
(UK) Ltd. 1989
2. Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Witten mark, Adaptive Control, Pearson Education, Second
edition, Fifth impression, 2009.
REFERENCES
1 L. Ljung, System Identification - Theory for the User, 2nd edition, PTR Prentice Hall,
111
Upper Saddle River, N.J., 1999.
2 K. S. Narendra and A. M. Annaswamy, Stability Adaptive Systems, Prentice-Hall,
1989.
3 H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, Prentice Hall, 3rd edition, 2002.
4 William S.Levine, “Control Systems Advanced Methods, the Control Handbook, CRC
Press 2011.
5 S. Sastry and M. Bodson, Adaptive Control, Prentice-Hall, 1989
CS8491 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer.
• To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and floating point
arithmetic unit.
• To learn the basics of pipelined execution.
• To understand parallelism and multi-core processors.
• To understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories.
• To learn the different ways of communication with I/O devices.
UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9
Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance – Instructions: Language of
the Computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation – Logical operations –
decision making – MIPS Addressing.
UNIT II ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9
Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Floating Point Representation –
Floating Point Operations – Subword Parallelism
UNIT III PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9
A Basic MIPS implementation – Building a Datapath – Control Implementation Scheme –
Pipelining – Pipelined datapath and control – Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards –
Exceptions.
UNIT IV PARALLELISIM 9
Parallel processing challenges – Flynn’s classification – SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, and
Vector Architectures - Hardware multithreading – Multi-core processors and other Shared
Memory Multiprocessors - Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters, Warehouse
Scale Computers and other Message-Passing Multiprocessors.
UNIT V MEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9
Memory Hierarchy - memory technologies – cache memory – measuring and improving
cache performance – virtual memory, TLB’s – Accessing I/O Devices – Interrupts – Direct
Memory Access – Bus structure – Bus operation – Arbitration – Interface circuits - USB.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
112
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
• Understand the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions.
• Design arithmetic and logic unit.
• Understand pipelined execution and design control unit.
• Understand parallel processing architectures.
• Understand the various memory systems and I/O communication.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, Computer
Organization and Embedded Systems, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. John P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture – A Quantitative
Approachǁ, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2012.
EE8009 CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• To understand the DC drive control.
• To study and analyze the Induction motor drive control.
• To study and understand the Synchronous motor drive control.
• To study and analyze the SRM and BLDC motor drive control.
• To analyze and design the Digital control for drives.
UNIT I CONTROL OF DC DRIVES 9
Losses in electrical drive system, Energy efficient operation of drives, block diagram/
transfer function of self, separately excited DC motors --closed loop control-speed control-
current control - constant torque/power operation - P, PI and PID controllers–response
comparison.
UNIT II CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORDRIVE 9
VSI a n d C S I fed induction motor drives-principles of V/f control-closed loop variable
frequency PW M inverter with dynamic braking- static Scherbius drives- power factor
considerations– modified Kramer drives-principle of vector control- implementation-block
diagram, Design of closed loop operation of V/f control of Induction motor drive systems.
UNIT III CONTROL OF SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 9
Open loop VSI fed drive and its characteristics–Self control–Torque control –Torque angle
113
control –Power factor control–Brushless excitation systems––Field oriented control –
Design of closed loop operation of Self control of Synchronous motor drive systems.
UNIT IV CONTROL OF SRM AND BLDC MOTOR DRIVES 9
SRM construction - Principle of operation - SRM drive design factors-Torque controlled
SRM- Block diagram of Instantaneous Torque control using current controllers and flux
controllers. Construction and Principle of operation of BLDC Machine -Sensing and logic
switching scheme,-Sinusoidal and trapezoidal type of Brushless dc motors – Block
diagram of current controlled Brushless dc motor drive.
UNIT V DIGITAL CONTROL OF DC DRIVE 9
Phase Locked Loop and micro-computer control of DC drives–Program flow chart for
constant constant torque and constant horse power operations Speed detection and
current sensing circuits and feedback elements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand various control strategies and controllers for AC and DC Motor
Drive systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dubey, G.K, Power semiconductor controlled devices, Prentice Hall International
New jersey, 1989.
2. R.Krishnan,, Electric Motor Drives - Modeling, Analysis and ControlPrentice- Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. Murphy, J.M.D, Turnbull F.G, Thyristor control of AC motors,., Pergamon press,
Oxford, 1988.
REFERENCES
1. Bin Wu, High-Power Converters and AC Drives, Wiley-IEEE Press
2. Buxbaum, A.Schierau, and K.Staughen, A design of control systems for DC drives,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
3. Bimal K. Bose, Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pte. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
4. R. Krishnan, Switched Reluctance Motor Drives: Modeling, Simulation, Analysis,
Design, and Applications, CRC press, 2001.
5. Werner Leonhard, Control of Electrical Drives, 3rd Edition, Springer, Sept., 2001.
6. R. Krishnan, Permanent Magnet Synchronous and Brushless DC Motor Drives, CRC
press, 2001.
EC8095 VLSI DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• Study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics.
• Learn the design and realization of combinational & sequential digital circuits.
• Architectural choices and performance tradeoffs involved in designing and realizing the
circuits in CMOS technology are discussed
• Learn the different FPGA architectures and testability of VLSI circuits.
114
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9
MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate, Layout Design Rules,
Gate Layouts, Stick Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters tics, C-V Charters tics, Nonideal I-V
Effects, DC Transfer characteristics, RC Delay Model, Elmore Delay, Linear Delay Model, Logical
effort, Parasitic Delay, Delay in Logic Gate, Scaling.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9
Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic
Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates, Domino, Dual Rail Domino, CPL, DCVSPG,
DPL, Circuit Pitfalls.
Power: Dynamic Power, Static Power, Low Power Architecture.
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Static latches and Registers, Dynamic latches and Registers, Pulse Registers, Sense Amplifier
Based Register, Pipelining, Schmmit Trigger, Monostability Sequential Circuits, Astability
Sequential Circuits.
Timing Issues : Timing Classification Of Digital System, Synchronous Design.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS AND SUBSYSTEM 9
Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders, Multipliers, Shifters, ALUs, power and speed
tradeoffs, Case Study: Design as a tradeoff.
Designing Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks, Memory
Core, Memory Peripheral Circuitry.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES AND TESTING 9
FPGA Building Block Architectures, FPGA Interconnect Routing Procedures.
Design for Testability: Ad Hoc Testing, Scan Design, BIST, IDDQ Testing, Design for
Manufacturability, Boundary Scan.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
UPON COMPLETION OF THE COURSE, STUDENTS SHOULD ABILITY TO
• Realize the concepts of digital building blocks using MOS transistor.
• Design combinational MOS circuits and power strategies.
• Design and construct Sequential Circuits and Timing systems.
• Design arithmetic building blocks and memory subsystems.
• Apply and implement FPGA design flow and testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson , 2017.(UNIT I,II,V)
2. Jan M. Rabaey ,Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, ”Digital Integrated Circuits:A
Design perspective”, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.(UNIT III,IV)
REFERENCES
1. M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997
115
2. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:Analysis
& Design”,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
3. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip”, Pearson Education, 2007
4. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India 2005.
EE8010 POWER SYSTEMS TRANSIENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Generation of switching transients and their control using circuit – theoretical concept.
• Mechanism of lighting strokes and the production of lighting surges.
• Propagation, reflection and refraction of travelling waves.
• Voltage transients caused by faults, circuit breaker action, load rejection on integrated
power system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SURVEY 9
Review and importance of the study of transients - causes for transients. RL circuit
transient with sine wave excitation - double frequency transients - basic transforms of the
RLC circuit transients. Different types of power system transients - effect of transients on
power systems – role of the study of transients in system planning.
UNIT II SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9
Over voltages due to switching transients - resistance switching and the equivalent circuit
for interrupting the resistor current - load switching and equivalent circuit - waveforms for
transient voltage across the load and the switch - normal and abnormal switching
transients. Current suppression - current chopping - effective equivalent circuit.
Capacitance switching - effect of source regulation - capacitance switching with a restrike,
with multiple restrikes. Illustration for multiple restriking transients - ferro resonance.
UNIT III LIGHTNING TRANSIENTS 9
Review of the theories in the formation of clouds and charge formation - rate of charging of
thunder clouds – mechanism of lightning discharges and characteristics of lightning strokes
– model for lightning stroke - factors contributing to good line design - protection using
ground wires - tower footing resistance - Interaction between lightning and power system.
UNIT IV TRAVELING WAVES ON TRANSMISSION LINE COMPUTATION OF 9
TRANSIENTS
Computation of transients - transient response of systems with series and shunt lumped
parameters and distributed lines. Traveling wave concept - step response - Bewely’s lattice
diagram - standing waves and natural frequencies - reflection and refraction of travelling
waves.
UNIT V TRANSIENTS IN INTEGRATED POWER SYSTEM 9
The short line and kilometric fault - distribution of voltages in a power system - Line
dropping and load rejection - voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines - over
116
voltage induced by faults -switching surges on integrated system Qualitative application of
EMTP for transient computation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze switching and lightning transients.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on generation of switching transients and their control.
• Ability to analyze the mechanism of lighting strokes.
• Ability to understand the importance of propagation, reflection and refraction of
travelling waves.
• Ability to find the voltage transients caused by faults.
• Ability to understand the concept of circuit breaker action, load rejection on
integrated power system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allan Greenwood, ‘Electrical Transients in Power Systems’, Wiley Inter Science, New
York, 2ndEdition, 1991.
2. Pritindra Chowdhari, “Electromagnetic transients in Power System”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., Second Edition, 2009.
3. C.S. Indulkar, D.P.Kothari, K. Ramalingam, ‘Power System Transients – A statistical
approach’, PHI Learning Private Limited, Second Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. M.S.Naidu and V.Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition,
2013.
2. R.D. Begamudre, ‘Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering’, Wiley Eastern
Limited, 1986.
3. Y.Hase, Handbook of Power System Engineering,” Wiley India, 2012.
4. J.L.Kirtley, “Electric Power Principles, Sources, Conversion, Distribution and use,”
Wiley, 2012.
5. Akihiro ametani,” Power System Transient theory and applications”, CRC press,
2013.
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
• To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer
complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee involvement
- Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal -
Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier partnership - Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
117
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function -
TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001—
Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
• The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe and
Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised Third
Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards
EE8011 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• The start-of-art of the power system
• Performance of power systems with FACTS controllers.
• FACTS controllers for load flow and dynamic analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Real and reactive power control in electrical power transmission lines–loads & system
compensation-Uncompensated transmission line–shunt and series compensation.
UNIT II STATIC VAR COMPENSATOR (SVC) AND APPLICATIONS 9
Voltage control by SVC–Advantages of slope in dynamic characteristics–Influence of SVC
on system voltage–Design of SVC voltage regulator–TCR-FC-TCR-Modeling of SVC for
power flow and fast transient stability– Applications: Enhancement of transient stability –
118
Steady state power transfer –Enhancement of power system damping.
UNIT III THYRISTOR CONTROLLED SERIES CAPACITOR (TCSC) AND 9
APPLICATIONS
Operation of the TCSC–Different modes of operation–Modelling of TCSC, Variability
reactance model– Modelling for Power Flow and stability studies. Applications:
Improvement of the system stability limit–Enhancement of system damping.
UNIT IV VOLTAGE SOURCE CONVERTER BASED FACTS CONTROLLERS 9
Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM)–Principle of operation–V-I Characteristics.
Applications: Steady state power transfer-enhancement of transient stability-prevention of
voltage instability. SSSC-operation of SSSC and the control of power flow–modelling of
SSSC in load flow and transient stability studies- Dynamic voltage restorer(DVR).
UNIT V ADVANCED FACTS CONTROLLERS 9
Interline DVR(IDVR) - Unified Power flow controller (UPFC) - Interline power flow controller
(IPFC) - Unified Power quality conditioner (UPQC).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand, analyze and develop analytical model of FACTS controller for
power system application.
• Ability to understand the concepts about load compensation techniques.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on facts devices.
• Ability to understand the start-of-art of the power system
• Ability to analyze the performance of steady state and transients of facts controllers.
• Ability to study about advanced FACTS controllers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Mohan Mathur, Rajiv K.Varma,“Thyristor–Based Facts Controllers for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, IEEE press andJohnWiley&Sons,Inc,2002.
2. NarainG. Hingorani, “Understanding FACTS-Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC
Transmission Systems”, Standard Publishers Distributors,Delhi-110006,2011.
3. T.J.E Miller, Power Electronics in power systems, John Wiley and sons.
REFERENCES
1. K.R. Padiyar, ”FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age
International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
2. A.T.John,“FlexibleA.C.TransmissionSystems”,InstitutionofElectricalandElectronic
Engineers(IEEE), 1999.
3. V.K.Sood, HVDC and FACTS controllers–Applications of Static Converters in Power
System, APRIL2004,KluwerAcademic Publishers,2004.
119
EE8012 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Basics of artificial neural network.
• Concepts of modelling and control of neural and fuzzy control schemes.
• Features of hybrid control schemes.
UNIT I ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK 9
Review of fundamentals – Biological neuron, artificial neuron, activation function, single
layer perceptron – Limitation – Multi layer perceptron – Back Propagation Algorithm
(BPA) – Recurrent Neural Network (RNN) – Adaptive Resonance Theory (ART) based
network – Radial basis function network – online learning algorithms, BP through time –
RTRL algorithms – Reinforcement learning.
UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS FOR MODELING AND CONTROL 9
Modelling of non-linear systems using ANN – Generation of training data – Optimal
architecture– Model validation – Control of non-linear systems using ANN – Direct and
indirect neuro control schemes – Adaptive neuro controller – Familiarization with neural
network toolbox.
UNIT III FUZZY SET THEORY 9
Fuzzy set theory – Fuzzy sets – Operation on fuzzy sets – Scalar cardinality, fuzzy
cardinality, union and intersection, complement (Yager and Sugeno), equilibrium points,
aggregation, projection, composition, cylindrical extension, fuzzy relation – Fuzzy
membership functions.
UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC FOR MODELING AND CONTROL 9
Modelling of non-linear systems using fuzzy models – TSK model – Fuzzy logic controller
– Fuzzification – Knowledge base – Decision making logic – Defuzzification – Adaptive
fuzzy systems – Familiarization with fuzzy logic toolbox.
UNIT V HYBRID CONTROL SCHEMES 9
Fuzzification and rule base using ANN – Neuro fuzzy systems – ANFIS – Fuzzy neuron–
GA – Optimization of membership function and rule base using Genetic Algorithm –
Introduction to other evolutionary optimization techniques, support vector machine– Case
study – Familiarization with ANFIS toolbox.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the concepts of ANN, different features of fuzzy logic and their
modelling, control aspects and different hybrid control schemes.
• Ability to understand the basics of artificial neural network.
• Ability to get knowledge on modelling and control of neural.
• Ability to get knowledge on modelling and control of fuzzy control schemes.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on hybrid control schemes.
• Ability to understand the concepts of Adaptive Resonance Theory
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Laurence Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Prentice Hall, Englewood
120
Cliffs, N.J., 1992
2. Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill Inc.,
2000.
REFERENCES
1. Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithm in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”,
Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc. 1989
2. Millon W.T., Sutton R.S. and Webrose P.J., “Neural Networks for Control”, MIT
press, 1992
3. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning series)’, MIT Press, Second Edition, 2010.
4. Zhang Huaguang and Liu Derong, “Fuzzy Modeling and Fuzzy Control Series:
Control Engineering”, 2006
EE8013 POWER SYSTEMS DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Basics of dynamics and stability problems
• Modeling of synchronous machines
• Excitation system and speed-governing controllers.
• Small signal stability of a single-machine infinite bus system with excitation system and
power system stabilizer.
• Transient stability simulation of multi machine power system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of system dynamics – numerical techniques – introduction to software packages to
study the responses. Concept and importance of power system stability in the operation
and design - distinction between transient and dynamic stability - complexity of stability
problem in large system – necessity for reduced models - stability of interconnected
systems.
UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE MODELLING 9
Synchronous machine - flux linkage equations - Park’s transformation - per unit conversion
- normalizing the equations - equivalent circuit - current space model - flux linkage state
space model. Sub-transient and transient inductances - time constants. Simplified models
(one axis and constant flux linkage) - steady state equations and phasor diagrams.
UNIT III MACHINE CONTROLLERS 9
Exciter and voltage regulators - function and types of excitation systems - typical excitation
system configuration - block diagram and state space representation of IEEE type 1
excitation system - saturation function - stabilizing circuit. Function of speed governing
systems - block diagram and state space representation of IEEE mechanical hydraulic
governor and electrical hydraulic governors for hydro turbines and steam turbines.
121
UNIT IV TRANSIENT STABILITY 9
State equation for multi machine system with one axis model and simulation – modelling of
multi machine power system with one axis machine model including excitation system and
speed governing system and simulation using R-K method of fourth order (Gill’s technique)
for transient stability analysis - power system stabilizer. For all simulations, the algorithm
and flow chart have to be discussed.
UNIT V DYNAMIC STABILITY 9
System response to small disturbances - linear model of the unregulated synchronous
machine and its modes of oscillation - regulated synchronous machine - distribution of
power impact - linearization of the load equation for the one machine problem – simplified
linear model - effect of excitation on dynamic stability - approximate system representation
- supplementary stabilizing signals - dynamic performance measure - small signal
performance measures.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and analyze power system operation, stability, control and
protection.
• Ability to get knowledge on the basics of dynamics and stability problems
• Ability to design and modelling of synchronous machines
• Ability to study about excitation system and speed-governing controllers.
• Ability to understand the concept of small signal stability of a single-machine infinite
bus system with excitation system.
• Ability to analyze the transient stability simulation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P.M. Anderson and A.A.Fouad, ‘Power System Control and Stability’, Galgotia
Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
2. P. Kundur, ‘Power System Stability and Control’, McGraw Hill Inc., USA, 1994.
3. R.Ramanujam, “Power System Dynamics – Analysis and Simulation”, PHI, 2009.
REFERENCES
1. M.A.Pai and W.Sauer, ‘Power System Dynamics and Stability’, Pearson Education
Asia, India, 2002.
2. James A.Momoh, Mohamed. E. EI-Hawary. “ Electric Systems, Dynamics and
Stability with Artificial Intelligence applications”, Marcel Dekker, USA First Edition,
2000.
3. C.A.Gross, “Power System Analysis,” Wiley India, 2011.
4. B.M.Weedy, B.J.Lory, N.Jenkins, J.B.Ekanayake and G.Strbac,” Electric Power
Systems”, Wiley India, 2013.
5. K.Umarao, “Computer Techniques and Models in Power System,” I.K. International,
2007.
122
EE8014 SMPS AND UPS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Modern power electronic converters and its applications in electric power utility.
• Resonant converters and UPS
UNIT I DC-DC CONVERTERS 9
Principles of step down and step up converters – Analysis and state space modeling of
Buck, Boost, Buck- Boost and Cuk converters.
UNIT II SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS 9
Analysis and state space modeling of fly back, Forward, Push pull, Luo, Half bridge and full
bridge converters- control circuits and PWM techniques.
UNIT III RESONANT CONVERTERS 9
Introduction- classification- basic concepts- Resonant switch- Load Resonant converters-
ZVS , Clamped voltage topologies- DC link inverters with Zero Voltage Switching- Series
and parallel Resonant inverters- Voltage control.
UNIT IV DC-AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase and three phase inverters, control using various (sine PWM, SVPWM and
PSPWM) techniques, various harmonic elimination techniques- Multilevel inverters-
Concepts - Types: Diode clamped- Flying capacitor- Cascaded types- Applications.
UNIT V POWER CONDITIONERS, UPS & FILTERS 9
Introduction- Power line disturbances- Power conditioners –UPS: offline UPS, Online UPS,
Applications – Filters: Voltage filters, Series-parallel resonant filters, filter without series
capacitors, filter for PWM VSI, current filter, DC filters – Design of inductor and transformer
for PE applications – Selection of capacitors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to analyze the state space model for DC – DC converters
• Ability to acquire knowledge on switched mode power converters.
• Ability to understand the importance of Resonant Converters.
• Ability to analyze the PWM techniques for DC-AC converters
• Ability to acquire knowledge on modern power electronic converters and its applications
in electric power utility.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on filters and UPS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Simon Ang, Alejandro Oliva,” Power-Switching Converters”, Third Edition, CRC
Press, 2010.
2. KjeldThorborg, “Power Electronics – In theory and Practice”, Overseas Press, First
Indian Edition 2005.
3. M.H. Rashid – Power Electronics handbook, Elsevier Publication, 2001.
REFERENCES
1. Philip T Krein, “ Elements of Power Electronics”, Oxford University Press
2. Ned Mohan, Tore.M.Undeland, William.P.Robbins, Power Electronics converters,
Applications and design- Third Edition- John Wiley and Sons- 2006
123
3. M.H. Rashid – Power Electronics circuits, devices and applications- third edition
Prentice Hall of India New Delhi, 2007.
4. Erickson, Robert W, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer, second edition,
2010.
EE8015 ELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATION, UTILIZATION AND L T P C
CONSERVATION 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
• To study the generation, conservation of electrical power and energy efficient equipments.
• To understand the principle, design of illumination systems and energy efficiency lamps.
• To study the methods of industrial heating and welding.
• To understand the electric traction systems and their performance.
UNIT I ILLUMINATION 9
Importance of lighting – properties of good lighting scheme – laws of illumination – photometry -
types of lamps – lighting calculations – basic design of illumination schemes for residential,
commercial, street lighting, factory lighting and flood lighting – LED lighting and energy efficient
lamps.
UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9
Refrigeration-Domestic refrigerator and water coolers - Air-Conditioning-Various types
of air-conditioning system and their applications, smart air conditioning units - Energy
Efficient motors: Standard motor efficiency, need for efficient motors, Motor life cycle,
Direct Savings and payback analysis, efficiency evaluation factor.
UNIT III HEATING AND WELDING 9
Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating –
dielectric heating - electric arc furnaces. Brief introduction to electric welding – welding
generator, welding transformer and the characteristics.
UNIT IV TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems –
mechanics of train movement – traction motors and control – braking – recent trends in electric
traction.
UNIT V DOMESTIC UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY 9
Domestic utilization of electrical energy – House wiring. Induction based appliances, Online and
OFF line UPS, Batteries - Power quality aspects – nonlinear and domestic loads – Earthing –
Domestic, Industrial and Substation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• To understand the main aspects of generation, utilization and conservation.
• To identify an appropriate method of heating for any particular industrial application.
• To evaluate domestic wiring connection and debug any faults occurred.
• To construct an electric connection for any domestic appliance like refrigerator as well as to
design a battery charging circuit for a specific household application.
• To realize the appropriate type of electric supply system as well as to evaluate the
124
performance of a traction unit.
• To understand the main aspects of Traction.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Wadhwa, C.L. “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd, 2003.
2. Dr. Uppal S.L. and Prof. S. Rao, 'Electrical Power Systems', Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 15th Edition, 2014.
3. Energy Efficiency in Electric Utilities, BEE Guide Book, 2010
REFERENCES
1. Partab.H, “Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New
Delhi, 2004.
2. Openshaw Taylor.E, “Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units”, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd,
2003.
3. Gupta.J.B, “Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction”, S.K.Kataria and Sons,
2002.
4. Cleaner Production – Energy Efficiency Manual for GERIAP, UNEP, Bangkok prepared
by National Productivity Council.
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values,
to instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational
Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.
125
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Upon completion of the course, the student should be ability to apply ethics in society, discuss the
ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity
and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‘ Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and
principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.
126
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and Techniques
– Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization structure
– types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority – centralization and
decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning, Recruitment,
selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career planning and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication –
communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Upon completion of the course, students will be ability to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same basic
knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
2. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition,
2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”,
7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999
127
EE8016 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• To impact concepts behind economic analysis and Load management.
• Energy management on various electrical equipments and metering.
• Concept of lighting systems and cogeneration.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of Energy – Need for energy management – Energy accounting - Energy
monitoring, targeting and reporting - Energy audit process.
UNIT II ENERGY MANAGEMENT FOR MOTORS AND COGENERATION 9
Energy management for electric motors – Transformer and reactors - Capacitors and
synchronous machines, energy management by cogeneration – Forms of cogeneration –
Feasibility of cogeneration – Electrical interconnection.
UNIT III LIGHTING SYSTEMS 9
Energy management in lighting systems – Task and the working space - Light sources –
Ballasts – Lighting controls – Optimizing lighting energy – Power factor and effect of
harmonics, lighting and energy standards.
UNIT IV METERING FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Metering for energy management – Units of measure - Utility meters – Demand meters –
Paralleling of current transformers – Instrument transformer burdens – Multi tasking solid
state meters, metering location vs requirements, metering techniques and practical
examples.
UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND MODELS 9
Economic analysis – Economic models - Time value of money - Utility rate structures –
Cost of electricity – Loss evaluation, load management – Demand control techniques –
Utility monitoring and control system – HVAC and energy management – Economic
justification.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the basics of Energy audit process.
• Ability to understand the basics of energy management by cogeneration
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Energy management in lighting systems
• Ability to impact concepts behind economic analysis and Load management.
• Ability to understand the importance of Energy management on various electrical
equipment and metering.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on HVAC.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Barney L. Capehart, Wayne C. Turner, and William J. Kennedy, Guide to Energy
Management, Fifth Edition, The Fairmont Press, Inc., 2006
2. Eastop T.D & Croft D.R, Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists,.Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184 , 1990.
128
REFERENCES
1. Reay D.A, Industrial Energy Conservation, 1stedition, Pergamon Press, 1977.
2. IEEE Recommended Practice for Energy Management in Industrial and Commercial
Facilities, IEEE, 196.
3. Amit K. Tyagi, Handbook on Energy Audits and Management, TERI, 2003.
4. Electricity in buildings good practice guide, McGraw-Hill Education, 2016.
5. National Productivity Council Guide Books
CS8391 DATA STRUCTURES LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concepts of ADTs
• To Learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues
• To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
• To apply Tree and Graph structures
UNIT I LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9
Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation ––
singly linked lists- circularly linked lists- doubly-linked lists – applications of lists –Polynomial
Manipulation – All operations (Insertion, Deletion, Merge, Traversal).
UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – STACKS, QUEUES 9
Stack ADT – Operations - Applications - Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of Infix to
postfix expression - Queue ADT – Operations - Circular Queue – Priority Queue - deQueue –
applications of queues.
UNIT III NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – TREES 9
Tree ADT – tree traversals - Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – applications of trees – binary
search tree ADT –Threaded Binary Trees- AVL Trees – B-Tree - B+ Tree - Heap – Applications of
heap.
UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - GRAPHS 9
Definition – Representation of Graph – Types of graph - Breadth-first traversal - Depth-first traversal –
Topological Sort – Bi-connectivity – Cut vertex – Euler circuits – Applications of graphs.
UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9
Searching- Linear Search - Binary Search. Sorting - Bubble sort - Selection sort - Insertion sort - Shell
sort – Radix sort. Hashing- Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing – Rehashing –
Extendible Hashing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
• Implement abstract data types for linear data structures.
• Apply the different linear and non-linear data structures to problem solutions.
• Critically analyze the various sorting algorithms.
129
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education,1997.
2. Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Second Edition , Oxford University Press, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L.Rivest, Clifford Stein, “Introduction to
Algorithms", Second Edition, Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
2. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education,1983.
3. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
4. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”,
Second Edition, University Press, 2008
EE8017 HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Planning of DC power transmission and comparison with AC power
transmission.
• HVDC converters.
• HVDC system control.
• Harmonics and design of filters.
• Power flow in HVDC system under steady state.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
DC Power transmission technology–Comparison of AC and DC transmission–Application
of DC transmission–Description of DC transmission system–Planning for HVDC
transmission–Modern trends in HVDC technology–DC breakers–Operating problems–
HVDC transmission based on VSC –Types and applications of MTDC systems.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS 9
Line commutated converter -Analysis of Graetz circuit with and without overlap -Pulse
number– Choice of converter configuration – Converter bridge characteristics– Analysis of
a 12 pulse converters– Analysis of VSC topologies and firing schemes.
UNIT III CONVERTER AND HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL 9
Principles of DC link control–Converter control characteristics–System control hierarchy–
Firing angle control– Current and extinction angle control–Starting and stopping of DC link
–Power control –Higher level controllers –Control of VSC based HVDC link.
UNIT IV REACTIVE POWER AND HARMONICS CONTROL 9
Reactive power requirements in steady state–Sources of reactive power–SVC and
STATCOM– Generation of harmonics –Design of AC and DC filters– Active filters.
UNIT V POWER FLOW ANALYSIS IN AC/DC SYSTEMS 9
Per unit system for DC quantities–DC system model –Inclusion of constraints –Power flow
analysis –case study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
130
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand the principles and types of HVDC system.
• Ability to analyze and understand the concepts of HVDC converters.
• Ability to acquire knowledge on DC link control.
• Ability to understand the concepts of reactive power management, harmonics and
power flow analysis.
• Ability to get knowledge about Planning of DC power transmission and comparison
with AC power transmission.
• Ability to understand the importance of power flow in HVDC system under steady
state.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Padiyar,K.R.,“HVDC power transmission system”, New Age International(P)Ltd.
NewDelhi, Second Edition,2010.
2. Arrillaga,J.,“High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, Peter Pregrinus,
London,1983.
REFERENCES
1. Kundur P.,“ Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw-Hill,1993.
2. Colin Adamson and Hingorani NG,“ High Voltage Direct Current Power
Transmission”, Garraway Limited, London, 1960.
3. Edward Wilson Kimbark,“ Direct Current Transmission”, Vol.I, Wiley inter science,
New York, London, Sydney,1971.
EE8018 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Architecture of PIC microcontroller
• Interrupts and timers
• Peripheral devices for data communication and transfer
• Functional blocks of ARM processor
• Architecture of ARM processors
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9
Introduction to PIC Microcontroller–PIC 16C6x and PIC16C7x Architecture–IC16cxx–-
Pipelining - Program Memory considerations – Register File Structure - Instruction Set -
Addressing modes – Simple Operations.
UNIT II INTERRUPTS AND TIMER 9
PIC micro controller Interrupts- External Interrupts-Interrupt Programming–Loop time
subroutine Timers-Timer Programming– Front panel I/O-Soft Keys– State machines and
key switches– Display of Constant and Variability strings.
UNIT III PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 9
2
I C Bus for Peripherals Chip Access– Bus operation-Bus subroutines– Serial EEPROM—
Analog to Digital Converter–UART-Baud rate selection–Data handling circuit–Initialization -
131
LCD and keyboard Interfacing -ADC, DAC, and Sensor Interfacing.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO ARM PROCESSOR 9
Architecture –ARM programmer’s model –ARM Development tools- Memory Hierarchy –
ARM Assembly Language Programming–Simple Examples–Architectural Support for
Operating systems.
UNIT V ARM ORGANIZATION 9
3-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization– 5-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization–ARM Instruction
Execution- ARM Implementation– ARM Instruction Set– ARM coprocessor interface–
Architectural support for High Level Languages – Embedded ARM Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering
problems.
• Ability to understand the concepts of Architecture of PIC microcontroller
• Ability to acquire knowledge on Interrupts and timers.
• Ability to understand the importance of Peripheral devices for data communication.
• Ability to understand the basics of sensor interfacing
• Ability to acquire knowledge in Architecture of ARM processors
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peatman,J.B., “Design with PIC Micro Controllers”PearsonEducation,3rdEdition,
2004.
2. Furber,S., “ARM System on Chip Architecture” Addison Wesley trade Computer
Publication, 2000.
REFERENCES
1. Mazidi, M.A.,“PIC Microcontroller” Rollin Mckinlay, Danny causey ,Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.
EE8019 SMART GRID L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
• Smart Grid technologies, different smart meters and advanced metering infrastructure.
• The power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
• The high performance computing for Smart Grid applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID 9
Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept, Definitions and Need for Smart Grid, Smart grid drivers,
functions, opportunities, challenges and benefits, Difference between conventional & Smart
Grid, National and International Initiatives in Smart Grid.
132
UNIT II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 9
Technology Drivers, Smart energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation,
Feeder Automation ,Transmission systems: EMS, FACTS and HVDC, Wide area monitoring,
Protection and control, Distribution systems: DMS, Volt/VAR control, Fault Detection,
Isolation and service restoration, Outage management, High-Efficiency Distribution
Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers, Plugin Hybrid Electric Vehicles(PHEV).
UNIT III SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE 9
IntroductiontoSmartMeters,AdvancedMeteringinfrastructure(AMI)driversandbenefits, AMI
protocols, standards and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement
Unit(PMU), Intelligent Electronic Devices(IED)&their application for monitoring & protection.
UNIT IV POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID 9
Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable
Energy Sources, Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality
monitoring, Power Quality Audit.
UNIT V HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING FOR SMART GRID 9
APPLICATIONS
Local Area Network(LAN),House Area Network(HAN), Wide Area Network(WAN), Broad
band over Power line(BPL),IP based Protocols, Basics of Web Service and CLOUD
Computing to make Smart Grids smarter, Cyber Security for Smart Grid.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Learners will develop more understanding on the concepts of Smart Grid and its
present developments.
• Learners will study about different Smart Grid technologies.
• Learners will acquire knowledge about different smart meters and advanced
metering infrastructure.
• Learners will have knowledge on power quality management in Smart Grids
• Learners will develop more understanding on LAN, WAN and Cloud Computing for
Smart Grid applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”,CRCPress2012.
2. JanakaEkanayake,NickJenkins,KithsiriLiyanage,JianzhongWu,AkihikoYokoyama,
“Smart Grid: TechnologyandApplications”,Wiley2012.
REFERENCES
• VehbiC. Güngör ,Dilan Sahin, Taskin Kocak, Salih Ergüt, Concettina Buccella, Carlo
Cecati, and Gerhard P. Hancke, “Smart Grid Technologies: Communication
Technologies and Standards” IEEE Transactions On Industrial Informatics, Vol.7,No.4,
November2011.
• Xi Fang, Satyajayant Misra, Guoliang Xue, and Dejun Yang“SmartGrid –The New
and Improved Power Grid: A Survey” ,IEEE Transaction on Smart Grids,vol.14,2012.
• James Momohe “Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis,”, Wiley-IEEE
Press , 2012.
133
EI8073 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To Introduce Fundamentals of Biomedical Engineering
• To study the communication mechanics in a biomedical system with few
examples
• To study measurement of certain important electrical and non-electrical
parameters
• To understand the basic principles in imaging techniques
• To have a basic knowledge in life assisting and therapeutic devices
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING 9
Cell and its structure – Resting and Action Potential – Nervous system and its fundamentals -
Basic components of a biomedical system- Cardiovascular systems- Respiratory systems -Kidney
and blood flow - Biomechanics of bone - Biomechanics of soft tissues -Physiological signals and
transducers - Transducers – selection criteria – Piezo electric, ultrasonic transducers -
Temperature measurements - Fibre optic temperature sensors
UNIT II NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT AND DIAGNOSTIC 9
PROCEDURES
Measurement of blood pressure - Cardiac output - Heart rate - Heart sound - Pulmonary function
measurements – spirometer – Photo Plethysmography, Body Plethysmography – Blood Gas
analysers, pH of blood –measurement of blood pCO2, pO2, finger-tip oxymeter - ESR, GSR
measurements.
UNIT III ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS 9
Electrodes – Limb electrodes –floating electrodes – pregelled disposability electrodes - Micro,
needle and surface electrodes – Amplifiers, Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper
amplifiers – Isolation amplifier - ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – Lead systems and recording
methods – Typical waveforms - Electrical safety in medical environment, shock hazards – leakage
current-Instruments for checking safety parameters of biomedical equipment.
UNIT IV IMAGING MODALITIES AND ANALYSIS 9
Radio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques – Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography –
Endoscopy – Thermography –Different types of biotelemetry systems - Retinal Imaging - Imaging
application in Biometric systems.
UNIT V LIFE ASSISTING, THERAPEUTIC AND ROBOTIC DEVICES 9
Pacemakers – Defibrillators – Ventilators – Nerve and muscle stimulators – Diathermy – Heart –
Lung machine – Audio meters – Dialysers – Lithotripsy - ICCU patient monitoring system - Nano
Robots - Robotic surgery –Orthopedic prostheses fixation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course students will have the
• Ability to understand the philosophy of the heart, lung, blood circulation and
respiration system.
• Ability to provide latest ideas on devices of non‐electrical devices.
• Ability to gain knowledge on various sensing and measurement devices of electrical origin.
• Ability to understand the analysis systems of various organ types.
• Ability to bring out the important and modern methods of imaging techniques and their
134
analysis.
• Ability to explain the medical assistance/techniques, robotic and therapeutic equipments.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, Prentice Hall of India,
New
Delhi, 2007.
2. Khandpur R.S, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2nd
edition, 2003
3. Joseph J Carr and John M.Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th edition, 2012
REFERENCES
1. John G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation Application and Design, John Wiley and sons,
New York, 1998.
2. Duane Knudson, Fundamentals of Biomechanics, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2007.
3. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011.
4. Ed. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Hand Book, Third Edition, Boca
Raton, CRC Press LLC, 2006.
5. M.Arumugam, ‘Bio-Medical Instrumentation’, Anuradha Agencies, 2003.
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-
Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-
multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
135
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targetted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition, Nanoparticles for
sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
• Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
• Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,“The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure,
Theory, Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
136
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:
Bachelor of Mechanical Engineering curriculum is designed to impart Knowledge, Skill and
Attitude on the graduates to
1. Have a successful career in Mechanical Engineering and allied industries.
2. Have expertise in the areas of Design, Thermal, Materials and Manufacturing.
3. Contribute towards technological development through academic research and industrial
practices.
4. Practice their profession with good communication, leadership, ethics and social
responsibility.
5. Graduates will adapt to evolving technologies through life-long learning.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
1. An ability to apply knowledge of mathematics and engineering sciences to develop
mathematical models for industrial problems.
2. An ability to identify, formulates, and solve complex engineering problems. with high
degree of competence.
3. An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data
obtained through those experiments.
4. An ability to design mechanical systems, component, or a process to meet desired needs
within the realistic constraints such as environmental, social, political and economic
sustainability.
5. An ability to use modern tools, software and equipment to analyze multidisciplinary
problems.
6. An ability to demonstrate on professional and ethical responsibilities.
7. An ability to communicate, write reports and express research findings in a scientific
community.
8. An ability to adapt quickly to the global changes and contemporary practices.
9. An ability to engage in life-long learning.
PEO / PO Mapping
Programme PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Educational Objectives
I
II
III
IV
V
1
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Communicative English
Engineering Mathematics I
Engineering Physics
SEM 1
Engineering Chemistry
Problem Solving and Python Programming
Engineering Graphics
Problem Solving and Python Programming Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
YEAR 1
Technical English
Engineering Mathematics II
Materials Science
SEM 2
Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Environmental Science and Engineering
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Laboratory COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Transforms and Partial Differential Equations
Engineering Thermodynamics
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Manufacturing Technology - I
SEM 3
Electrical Drives and Controls
Manufacturing Technology Laboratory - I
Computer Aided Machine Drawing
YEAR 2
Electrical Engineering Laboratory
Interpersonal Skills / Listening & Speaking
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Statistics and Numerical Methods
SEM 4
Kinematics of Machinery
Manufacturing Technology– II
Engineering Metallurgy
2
Strength of Materials for Mechanical Engineers
Thermal Engineering- I
Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II
Strength of Materials and Fluid Mechanics Machinery Laboratory
Advanced Reading and Writing
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Thermal Engineering- II
Design of Machine Elements
Metrology and Measurements
SEM 5
Dynamics of Machines
Kinematics and Dynamics Laboratory
Thermal Engineering Laboratory
Metrology and Measurements Laboratory
YEAR 3
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Design of Transmission Systems
Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing
Heat and Mass Transfer
SEM 6
Finite Element Analysis
Hydraulics and Pneumatics
C.A.D. / C.A.M. Laboratory
Design and Fabrication Project
Professional Communication
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Power Plant Engineering
Mechatronics
SEM 7
Process Planning and Cost Estimation
Simulation and Analysis Laboratory
YEAR 4
Mechatronics Laboratory
Technical Seminar
Project Work
SEM 8
Principles of Management
3
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS - 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python ES 4
0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics - II BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BE8253 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
6. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
TOTAL 30 20 2 8 25
4
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Transforms and Partial Differential BS 4
MA8353 4 0 0 4
Equations
2. ME8391 Engineering Thermodynamics PC 5 3 2 0 4
3. CE8394 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery ES 4 4 0 0 4
4. ME8351 Manufacturing Technology - I PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. EE8353 Electrical Drives and Controls ES 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
6. ME8361 Manufacturing Technology PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory - I
7. ME8381 Computer Aided Machine Drawing PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. EE8361 Electrical Engineering Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
9. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills / Listening & EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Speaking
TOTAL 33 17 2 14 25
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8452 Statistics and Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
2. ME8492 Kinematics of Machinery PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. ME8451 Manufacturing Technology – II PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. ME8491 Engineering Metallurgy PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. Strength of Materials for ES 3
CE8395 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Engineers
6. ME8493 Thermal Engineering- I PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME8462 Manufacturing Technology PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory – II
8. CE8381 Strength of Materials and Fluid ES 4
Mechanics and Machinery 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. HS8461 Advanced Reading and Writing EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 29 19 0 10 24
5
SEMESTER V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. ME8595 Thermal Engineering- II PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. ME8593 Design of Machine Elements PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. ME8501 Metrology and Measurements PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. ME8594 Dynamics of Machines PC 4 4 0 0 4
5. Open Elective I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
6. Kinematics and Dynamics PC 4
ME8511 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. ME8512 Thermal Engineering Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. ME8513 Metrology and Measurements PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 28 16 0 12 22
SEMESTER VI
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Design of Transmission PC 3
ME8651 3 0 0 3
Systems
2. Computer Aided Design and PC 3
ME8691 3 0 0 3
Manufacturing
3. ME8693 Heat and Mass Transfer PC 5 3 2 0 4
4. ME8692 Finite Element Analysis PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. ME8694 Hydraulics and Pneumatics PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective - I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. ME8681 CAD / CAM Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. ME8682 Design and Fabrication Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
9. HS8581 Professional Communication EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 30 18 2 10 24
6
SEMESTER VII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. ME8792 Power Plant Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. Process Planning and Cost PC
ME8793 3 3 0 0 3
Estimation
3. ME8791 Mechatronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. Open Elective - II OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective – III PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. Simulation and Analysis PC
ME8711 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. ME8781 Mechatronics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
9. ME8712 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 28 18 0 10 23
SEMESTER VIII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective– IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. ME8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 29 9 0 20 16
TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR AWARD OF THE DEGREE = 184
7
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
GE8291 Environmental Science and
3. HS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
BASIC SCIENCE (BS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 5 3 2 0 4
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BS 4 0 0 4 2
5. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics II BS 4 4 0 0 4
6. PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
Transforms and Partial Differential
7. MA8353 BS 4 4 0 0 4
Equations
8. MA8452 Statistics and Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
1. ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
GE8161 Problem Solving and Python
3. ES 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
4. BE8253 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation Engineering
5. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
GE8261
6. Engineering Practices Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics and
7. ES 4 0 0 4 2
Instrumentation Engineering Laboratory
8. CE8394 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery ES 5 3 2 0 4
9. EE8353 Electrical Drives and Controls ES 3 3 0 0 3
10. EE8361 Electrical Engineering Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
Strength of Materials for Mechanical ES 3
11. CE8395 3 0 0 3
Engineers
Strength of Materials and Fluid
12. CE8381 ES 4 0 0 4 2
Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory
8
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. ME8391 Engineering Thermodynamics PC 5 3 2 0 4
2. ME8351 Manufacturing Technology - I PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. ME8361 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory - I PC 4 0 0 4 2
4. ME8381 Computer Aided Machine Drawing PC 4 0 0 4 2
5. ME8492 Kinematics of Machinery PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. ME8451 Manufacturing Technology– II PC 3 3 0 0 3
7. ME8491 Engineering Metallurgy PC 3 3 0 0 3
8. ME8493 Thermal Engineering- I PC 3 3 0 0 3
9. ME8462 Manufacturing Technology Laboratory–II PC 4 0 0 4 2
10. ME8595 Thermal Engineering- II PC 3 3 0 0 3
11. ME8593 Design of Machine Elements PC 3 3 0 0 3
12. ME8501 Metrology and Measurements PC 3 3 0 0 3
13. ME8594 Dynamics of Machines PC 4 4 0 0 4
14. ME8511 Kinematics and Dynamics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
15. ME8512 Thermal Engineering Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
16. ME8513 Metrology and Measurements Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
17. ME8651 Design of Transmission Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
Computer Aided Design and
18. ME8691 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Manufacturing
19. ME8693 Heat and Mass Transfer PC 5 3 2 0 4
20. ME8692 Finite Element Analysis PC 3 3 0 0 3
21. ME8694 Hydraulics and Pneumatics PC 3 3 0 0 3
22. ME8681 C.A.D. / C.A.M. Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
23. ME8682 Design and Fabrication Project PC 4 0 0 4 2
24. ME8792 Power Plant Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
25. ME8791 Mechatronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
Process Planning and Cost
26. ME8793 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Estimation
27. ME8711 Simulation and Analysis Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
28. ME8781 Mechatronics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
9
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES FOR B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER VI, ELECTIVE I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. ME8091 Automobile Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. PR8592 Welding Technology PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. Gas Dynamics and Jet
ME8096 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Propulsion
4. GE8075 Intellectual Property PE 3 0 0 3
3
Rights
5. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano PE 3 3 0 0 3
Science
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
ME8071 Refrigeration and Air
1. PE 3 3 0 0 3
conditioning
2. ME8072 Renewable Sources of PE 3 3 0 0 3
Energy
3. ME8098 Quality Control and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Reliability Engineering
4. ME8073 Unconventional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Machining Processes
5. MG8491 Operations Research PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. MF8071 Additive Manufacturing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8077 Total Quality PE
3 3 0 0 3
Management
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. ME8099 Robotics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. ME8095 Design of Jigs, Fixtures
PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Press Tools
3. ME8093 Computational Fluid PE 3 3 0 0 3
Dynamics
4. ME8097 Non Destructive Testing PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Evaluation
5. ME8092 Composite Materials and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Mechanics
6. GE8072 Foundation Skills in PE 3 3 0 0 3
Integrated Product
Development
7. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
8. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
10
SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVE IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. IE8693 Production Planning and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Control
2. MG8091 Entrepreneurship PE 3 0 0 3
3
Development
3. ME8094 Computer Integrated PE 3
3 0 0 3
Manufacturing Systems
4. ME8074 Vibration and Noise PE 3 0 0 3
3
Control
5. EE8091 Micro Electro Mechanical PE 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
6. GE8076 Professional Ethics in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
Interpersonal
1. HS8381 EEC 4 0 0 4 2
Skills/Listening &
2. ME8712 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
3. ME8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 12
Advanced Reading and
4. HS8461 EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Writing
ME8682 Design and Fabrication EEC 4
5. 0 0 4 2
Project
Professional
6. HS8581 EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Communication
11
SUMMARY
CREDITS Percentage
SL. SUBJECT CREDITS PER SEMESTER
TOTAL %
NO. AREA
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1. HS 4 7 - - - - 3 14 7.61%
2. BS 12 7 4 4 - - - - 27 14.67%
3. ES 9 11 9 5 - - - - 33 17.80%
4. PC - - 11 14 19 18 13 - 74 40.22%
5. PE - - - - - 3 6 3 15 8.15%
6. OE - - - - 3 - 3 6 3.26%
7. EEC - - 1 1 - 3 1 10 16 7.6%
Total 25 25 25 24 22 24 23 16 184
8. Non Credit /
Mandatory
12
L T P C
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology students.
To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY & FRIENDS 12
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short narrative
descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic conversations.
Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave- Language development
– prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure- use
of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening to
longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources. Speaking-
asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development- degrees of
comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single word
substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines Writing-
letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email- Listening- listening
to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them. Speaking- speaking about
oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development- Tenses- simple present-simple past-
present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal
verbs
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing an
outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations- fixed
and semi-fixed expressions
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
13
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Course book for Undergraduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES
1 Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,2011.
2 Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
3 Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4 Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business
English. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5 Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books: 2013
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modeling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable calculus
and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and computer
science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two
variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined
multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
14
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of parameters
– Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar coordinates, in
addition to change of order and change of variables.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions and
integration by parts.
Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent improper
integrals.
Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6,
3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 -
7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
15
L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile
strength – torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform
and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in
beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance
angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical
fibers - fibre optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal
conductivity - Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through
compound media (series and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers,
refrigerators, ovens and solar water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal
systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances
- coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures -
crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of
imperfections in plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth
techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of
materials and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
16
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal
growth techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage
Learning, 2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and water
treatment techniques.
To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single and
two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and fuel
cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external treatment
– Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from solutions
– adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption isotherm – contact
theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir - applications of adsorption on
pollution abatement.
Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic
promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis –
Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
17
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum - manufacture
of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural
gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values- theoretical
calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive
range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission and
fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder reactor -
solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and supercapacitors: Types of
batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells
– H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for further
learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
LTD, New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) LTD,
New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT, LTD, New
Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
To read and write simple Python programs.
To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
To define Python functions and call them.
To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
18
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments; modules
and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments; Illustrative
programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between
two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort, insertion sort, mergesort,
histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
Decompose a Python program into functions.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated
for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.
19
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of objects.
project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
20
TEXT BOOK:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.
REFERENCES:
th
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50
Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The
students will be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Use functions for structuring Python programs.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
21
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in
optics, thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
22
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality parameters
through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)
HS8251 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering and
technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations , participate in group discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their areas
of specialisation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts from
journals- newspapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary Language
Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
23
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking –
describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in a
text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-vocabularyused in
formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal passive voice, numerical
adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking – introduction
to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical, practice in speed
reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary Development- sequence
words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of presentations-
Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job application – cover letter
–Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and issue based essays--
Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development-
clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and survey-
Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course learners will be able to:
Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
Write reports and winning job applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology. Orient
Black swan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges. Cengage
Learning, USA: 2007
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary reading.
24
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex Analysis
and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical problems
arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the various laws of
physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be used for efficiently
solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigen values
and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w z c, cz, , z 2 - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series
– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real
integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and unit
impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and integrals –
Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic
functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of the following
topics and their applications:
Eigen values and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s theorems
and their verification.
Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
25
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C
(Common to courses offered in Faculty of Mechanical
PH8251
Engineering 3 0 0 3
Except B.E. Materials Science and Engineering )
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the essential principles of materials science for mechanical and related engineering
applications.
UNIT I PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Solid solutions - Hume Rothery's rules – the phase rule - single component system - one-component
system of iron - binary phase diagrams - isomorphous systems - the tie-line rule - the lever rule -
application to isomorphous system - eutectic phase diagram - peritectic phase diagram - other
invariant reactions – free energy composition curves for binary systems - microstructural change
during cooling.
UNIT II FERROUS ALLOYS 9
The iron-carbon equilibrium diagram - phases, invariant reactions - microstructure of slowly cooled
steels - eutectoid steel, hypo and hypereutectoid steels - effect of alloying elements on the Fe-C
system - diffusion in solids - Fick's laws - phase transformations - T-T-T-diagram for eutectoid steel –
pearlitic, baintic and martensitic transformations - tempering of martensite – steels – stainless steels –
cast irons.
UNIT III MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9
Tensile test - plastic deformation mechanisms - slip and twinning - role of dislocations in slip -
strengthening methods - strain hardening - refinement of the grain size - solid solution strengthening -
precipitation hardening - creep resistance - creep curves - mechanisms of creep - creep-resistant
materials - fracture - the Griffith criterion - critical stress intensity factor and its determination - fatigue
failure - fatigue tests - methods of increasing fatigue life - hardness - Rockwell and Brinell hardness -
Knoop and Vickers microhardness.
26
UNIT IV MAGNETIC, DIELECTRIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Ferromagnetism – domain theory – types of energy – hysteresis – hard and soft magnetic materials –
ferrites - dielectric materials – types of polarization – Langevin-Debye equation – frequency effects on
polarization - dielectric breakdown – insulating materials – Ferroelectric materials - superconducting
materials and their properties.
UNIT V NEW MATERIALS 9
Ceramics – types and applications – composites: classification, role of matrix and reinforcement,
processing of fiber reinforced plastics – metallic glasses: types , glass forming ability of alloys, melt
spinning process, applications - shape memory alloys: phases, shape memory effect, pseudoelastic
effect, NiTi alloy, applications – nanomaterials: preparation (bottom up and top down approaches),
properties and applications – carbon nanotubes: types.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will have knowledge on the various phase diagrams and their applications
the students will acquire knowledge on Fe-Fe3C phase diagram,various microstructures and
alloys
the students will get knowledge on mechanical properties of materials and their measurement
the students will gain knowledge on magnetic, dielectric and superconducting properties of
materials
the students will understand the basics of ceramics, composites and nanomaterials.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Balasubramaniam, R. “Callister's Materials Science and Engineering”. Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
2014.
2. Raghavan, V. “Physical Metallurgy: Principles and Practice”. PHI Learning, 2015.
3. Raghavan, V. “Materials Science and Engineering : A First course”. PHI Learning, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. Askeland, D. “Materials Science and Engineering”. Brooks/Cole, 2010.
2. Smith, W.F., Hashemi, J. & Prakash, R. “Materials Science and Engineering”.
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
3. Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”.
Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
BE8253 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
• Electric circuit laws, single and three phase circuits and wiring
• Working principles of Electrical Machines
• Working principle of Various electronic devices and measuring instruments
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9
Basic circuit components -, Ohms Law - Kirchoff’s Law – Instantaneous Power – Inductors -
Capacitors – Independent and Dependent Sources - steady state solution of DC circuits - Nodal
analysis, Mesh analysis- Thevinin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem, Maximum Power transfer theorem-
Linearity and Superposition Theorem.
27
UNIT II AC CIRCUITS 9
Introduction to AC circuits – waveforms and RMS value – power and power factor, single phase and
three-phase balanced circuits – Three phase loads - housing wiring, industrial wiring, materials of
wiring
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Principles of operation and characteristics of ; DC machines, Transformers (single and three phase )
,Synchronous machines , three phase and single phase induction motors.
UNIT IV ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS 9
Types of Materials – Silicon & Germanium- N type and P type materials – PN Junction –Forward and
Reverse Bias –Semiconductor Diodes –Bipolar Junction Transistor – Characteristics – Field Effect
Transistors – Transistor Biasing –Introduction to operational Amplifier –Inverting Amplifier –Non
Inverting Amplifier –DAC – ADC .
UNIT V MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION 9
Introduction to transducers - Classification of Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive,
Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall effect and Mechanical - ,Classification of instruments
- Types of indicating Instruments - multimeters –Oscilloscopes- – three-phase power measurements
– instrument transformers (CT and PT )
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
Understand electric circuits and working principles of electrical machines
Understand the concepts of various electronic devices
Choose appropriate instruments for electrical measurement for a specific application
TEXT BOOKS
1. Leonard S Bobrow, “Foundations of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2013
2. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, ”Electrical Machines “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016
3. Thereja .B.L., “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.,
2008
REFERENCES
1. Del Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007
2. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology”, Elsevier, First Indian Edition, 2006
3. Allan S Moris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elseveir, First Indian Edition, 2006
4. Rajendra Prasad, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006
5. A.E.Fitzgerald, David E Higginbotham and Arvin Grabel, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw
Hill Education(India) Private Limited, 2009
6. N K De, Dipu Sarkar, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Universities Press (India)Private Limited 2016
28
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the nature and facts about environment.
To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and waste
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive use,
productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local
levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat
loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India –
conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common
plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid waste
management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an individual in
prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone
and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral
resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources,
case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case
studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources,
use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation,
man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in conservation of
natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to
document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
29
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on the
following after completing the course.
Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD, Hydrabad,
2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India PVT,
LTD, Delhi, 2014.
GE8292 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop capacity to predict the effect of force and motion in the course of carrying out the
design functions of engineering.
UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Parallelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Vector operations of forces -additions,
subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces – rectangular components – Equilibrium of
a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces –
Principle of transmissibility .
30
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 9+6
Free body diagram – Types of supports –Action and reaction forces – stable equilibrium – Moments
and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Single equivalent
force -Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 9+6
Centroids and centre of mass – Centroids of lines and areas - Rectangular, circular, triangular areas
by integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula –
Theorems of Pappus - Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula –
Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas –
Principal axes of inertia-Mass moment of inertia –mass moment of inertia for prismatic, cylindrical and
spherical solids from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion -
Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation– Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT V FRICTION AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 9+6
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilibrium analysis of simple systems with sliding friction –
wedge friction-. Rolling resistance -Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and
acceleration – General Plane motion of simple rigid bodies such as cylinder, disc/wheel and sphere.
TOTAL : 45+30=75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
illustrate the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
analyse the rigid body in equilibrium
evaluate the properties of surfaces and solids
calculate dynamic forces exerted in rigid body
determine the friction and the effects by the laws of friction
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer, F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi (2004).
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics”, Oxford University Press (2010)
REFERENCES:
1. Bhavikatti, S.S and Rajashekarappa, K.G., “Engineering Mechanics”, New Age International (P)
Limited Publishers, 1998.
2. Hibbeller, R.C and Ashok Gupta, “Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics”, 11 th Edition,
Pearson Education 2010.
3. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao. G., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education 2006.
4. Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G., “ Engineering Mechanics- Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics- Volume
2”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,1993.
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G., “Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”, 3rd
Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
31
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with different
joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
Welding:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
32
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of
AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
1. CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
33
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
2. ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
BE8261 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T PC
ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students in performing various tests on electrical drives, sensors and circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Load test on separately excited DC generator
2. Load test on Single phase Transformer
3. Load test on Induction motor
4. Verification of Circuit Laws
5. Verification of Circuit Theorems
6. Measurement of three phase power
7. Load test on DC shunt motor.
8. Diode based application circuits
9. Transistor based application circuits
10. Study of CRO and measurement of AC signals
11. Characteristics of LVDT
12. Calibration of Rotometer
13. RTD and Thermistor
Minimum of 10 Experiments to be carried out :-
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
34
OUTCOMES:
Ability to determine the speed characteristic of different electrical machines
Ability to design simple circuits involving diodes and transistors
Ability to use operational amplifiers
1. LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 D. C. Motor Generator Set 2
2 D.C. Shunt Motor 2
3 Single Phase Transformer 2
4 Single Phase Induction Motor 2
5 Ammeter A.C and D.C 20
6 Voltmeters A.C and D.C 20
7. Watt meters LPF and UPF 4
8. Resistors & Breadboards -
9. Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes 4
10. Dual Regulated power supplies 6
11. A.C. Signal Generators 4
12. Transistors (BJT, JFET) -
MA8353 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of
second and higher order with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of
two dimensional equation of heat conduction.
35
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial fraction and residues) –
Initial and final value theorems - Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations – Solution
of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using
Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. B.V Ramana.., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2016.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
3. G. James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
4. L.C Andrews, L.C and Shivamoggi, B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
5. N.P. Bali. and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 9th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
6. R.C. Wylie, and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
ME8391 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVE:
To familiarize the students to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to perform
thermal analysis on their behavior and performance.
(Use of Standard and approved Steam Table, Mollier Chart, Compressibility Chart and
Psychrometric Chart permitted)
36
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW 9+6
Basic concepts - concept of continuum, comparison of microscopic and macroscopic approach.
Path and point functions. Intensive and extensive, total and specific quantities. System and their
types. Thermodynamic Equilibrium State, path and process. Quasi-static, reversible and irreversible
processes. Heat and work transfer, definition and comparison, sign convention. Displacement
work and other modes of work .P-V diagram. Zeroth law of thermodynamics – concept of
temperature and thermal equilibrium– relationship between temperature scales –new temperature
scales. First law of thermodynamics –application to closed and open systems – steady and
unsteady flow processes.
UNIT II SECOND LAW AND AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS 9+6
Heat Reservoir, source and sink. Heat Engine, Refrigerator, Heat pump. Statements of second
law and its corollaries. Carnot cycle Reversed Carnot cycle, Performance. Clausius inequality.
Concept of entropy, T-s diagram, Tds Equations, entropy change for - pure substance, ideal gases -
different processes, principle of increase in entropy. Applications of II Law. High and low grade
energy. Available and non-available energy of a source and finite body. Energy and irreversibility.
Expressions for the energy of a closed system and open systems. Energy balance and
entropy generation. Irreversibility. I and II law Efficiency.
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE AND STEAM POWER CYCLE 9+6
Formation of steam and its thermodynamic properties, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. p-v-T
surface. Use of Steam Table and Mollier Chart. Determination of dryness fraction. Application of I
and II law for pure substances. Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle Improvement Methods -
Reheat and Regenerative cycles, Economiser, preheater, Binary and Combined cycles.
UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 9+6
Properties of Ideal gas- Ideal and real gas comparison- Equations of state for ideal and real gases-
Reduced properties. Compressibility factor-.Principle of Corresponding states. -Generalised
Compressibility Chart and its use-. Maxwell relations, Tds Equations, Difference and ratio of
heat capacities, Energy equation, Joule-Thomson Coefficient, Clausius Clapeyron equation,
Phase Change Processes. Simple Calculations.
UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND PSYCHROMETRY 9+6
Mole and Mass fraction, Dalton’s and Amagat’s Law. Properties of gas mixture – Molar mass, gas
constant, density, change in internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and Gibbs function. Psychrometric
properties, Psychrometric charts. Property calculations of air vapour mixtures by using chart and
expressions. Psychrometric process – adiabatic saturation, sensible heating and cooling,
humidification, dehumidification, evaporative cooling and adiabatic mixing. Simple Applications
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Apply the first law of thermodynamics for simple open and closed systems under steady
and unsteady conditions.
CO2 Apply second law of thermodynamics to open and closed systems and calculate entropy
and availability.
CO3 Apply Rankine cycle to steam power plant and compare few cycle improvement methods
CO4 Derive simple thermodynamic relations of ideal and real gases
CO5 Calculate the properties of gas mixtures and moist air and its use in psychometric
processes
TEXT BOOKS :
1. R.K.Rajput, “A Text Book Of Engineering Thermodynamics “,Fifth Edition,2017.
2. Yunus a. Cengel & michael a. Boles, “Thermodynamics”, 8th edition 2015.
37
REFERENCES:
1. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Borgnakke & Sonnatag, “Fundamental of Thermodynamics”, 8th Edition , 2016.
3. Chattopadhyay, P, "Engineering Thermodynamics", Oxford University Press, 2016.
4. Michael J. Moran, Howard N. Shapiro, “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”,
8th Edition.
5. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
CE8394 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES
The properties of fluids and concept of control volume are studied
The applications of the conservation laws to flow through pipes are studied.
To understand the importance of dimensional analysis
To understand the importance of various types of flow in pumps.
To understand the importance of various types of flow in turbines.
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 12
Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mass density, specific weight, specific volume,
specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility, vapor pressure, surface tension and capillarity. Flow
characteristics – concept of control volume - application of continuity equation, energy
equation and momentum equation.
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 12
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli-
Boundary layer concepts – types of boundary layer thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation –friction
factor- Moody diagram- commercial pipes- minor losses – Flow through pipes in series and parallel.
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12
Need for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similitude –types of similitude -
Dimensionless parameters- application of dimensionless parameters – Model analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 12
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various efficiencies– velocity
components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps– working principle
- work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump- working principle – Rotary
pumps –classification.
UNIT V TURBINES 12
Classification of turbines – heads and efficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed flow
turbines. Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work done by
water on the runner – draft tube. Specific speed - unit quantities – performance curves for turbines
– governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
38
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Apply mathematical knowledge to predict the properties and characteristics of a fluid.
Can analyse and calculate major and minor losses associated with pipe flow in piping
networks.
Can mathematically predict the nature of physical quantities
Can critically analyse the performance of pumps
Can critically analyse the performance of turbines.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House, New Delhi
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Graebel. W.P, "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 2011
2. Kumar K. L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi
2016
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, 2011.
4. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co. 2010
ME8351 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the concepts of basic manufacturing processes and fabrication techniques,
such as metal casting, metal joining, metal forming and manufacture of plastic components.
UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9
Sand Casting : Sand Mould – Type of patterns - Pattern Materials – Pattern allowances –Moulding
sand Properties and testing – Cores –Types and applications – Moulding machines– Types and
applications; Melting furnaces : Blast and Cupola Furnaces; Principle of special casting
processes : Shell - investment – Ceramic mould – Pressure die casting - Centrifugal Casting - CO2
process – Stir casting; Defects in Sand casting
UNIT II JOINING PROCESSES 9
Operating principle, basic equipment, merits and applications of: Fusion welding processes: Gas
welding - Types – Flame characteristics; Manual metal arc welding – Gas Tungsten arc welding
- Gas metal arc welding – Submerged arc welding – Electro slag welding; Operating principle and
applications of: Resistance welding - Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding – Electron beam
welding – Friction welding and Friction Stir Welding; Brazing and soldering; Weld defects: types,
causes and cure.
UNIT III METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9
Hot working and cold working of metals – Forging processes – Open, impression and closed die
forging – forging operations. Rolling of metals– Types of Rolling – Flat strip rolling – shape rolling
operations – Defects in rolled parts. Principle of rod and wire drawing – Tube drawing – Principles of
Extrusion – Types – Hot and Cold extrusion.
39
UNIT IV SHEET METAL PROCESSES 9
Sheet metal characteristics – shearing, bending and drawing operations – Stretch forming
operations – Formability of sheet metal – Test methods –special forming processes-Working
principle and applications – Hydro forming – Rubber pad forming – Metal spinning– Introduction of
Explosive forming, magnetic pulse forming, peen forming, Super plastic forming – Micro forming
UNIT V MANUFACTURE OF PLASTIC COMPONENTS 9
Types and characteristics of plastics – Moulding of thermoplastics – working principles and typical
applications – injection moulding – Plunger and screw machines – Compression moulding, Transfer
Moulding – Typical industrial applications – introduction to blow moulding –Rotational moulding –
Film blowing – Extrusion – Thermoforming – Bonding of Thermoplastics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain different metal casting processes, associated defects, merits and demerits
CO2 Compare different metal joining processes.
CO3 Summarize various hot working and cold working methods of metals.
CO4 Explain various sheet metal making processes.
CO5 Distinguish various methods of manufacturing plastic components.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury. AK., "Elements of workshop Technology",
volume I and II, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai, 2008
2. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education India Edition,
2013
REFERENCES:
1. Gowri P. Hariharan, A.Suresh Babu, "Manufacturing Technology I", Pearson Education, 2008
2. Paul Degarma E, Black J.T and Ronald A. Kosher, "Materials and Processes, in
Manufacturing" Eight Edition, Prentice – Hall of India, 1997.
3. Rao, P.N. "Manufacturing Technology Foundry, Forming and Welding", 4 th Edition, TMH-2013
4. Roy. A. Lindberg, "Processes and Materials of Manufacture", PHI / Pearson education, 2006
5. Sharma, P.C., "A Text book of production Technology", S.Chand and Co. Ltd., 2014.
EE8353 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their
performance.
To study the different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.
To study the conventional and solid-state drives
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Basic Elements – Types of Electric Drives – factors influencing the choice of electrical drives
– heating and cooling curves – Loading conditions and classes of duty – Selection of power rating
for drive motors with regard to thermal overloading and Load variation factors
40
UNIT II DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 9
Mechanical characteristics – Speed-Torque characteristics of various types of load and drive motors
– Braking of Electrical motors – DC motors: Shunt, series and compound - single phase and
three phase induction motors.
UNIT III STARTING METHODS 8
Types of D.C Motor starters – Typical control circuits for shunt and series motors – Three phase
squirrel cage and slip ring induction motors.
UNIT IV CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C. DRIVES 10
Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward-Leonard control
system - Using controlled rectifiers and DC choppers –applications.
UNIT V CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF A.C. DRIVES 10
Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, voltage / frequency control, slip
power recovery scheme – Using inverters and AC voltage regulators – applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon Completion of this subject, the students can able to explain different types of
electrical machines and their performance
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006
2. Vedam Subrahmaniam, “Electric Drives (Concepts and Applications)”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Partab. H., “Art and Science and Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 2017
2. Pillai.S.K “A First Course on Electric Drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2012
3. Singh. M.D., K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
ME8361 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – I LT P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To Study and practice the various operations that can be performed in lathe, shaper,
drilling, milling machines etc. and to equip with the practical knowledge required in the core
industries.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Machining and Machining time estimations for:
1. Taper Turning
2. External Thread cutting
3. Internal Thread Cutting
4. Eccentric Turning
5. Knurling
6. Square Head Shaping
7. Hexagonal Head Shaping
8. Fabrication of simple structural shapes using Gas Metal Arc Welding
9. Joining of plates and pipes using Gas Metal Arc Welding/ Arc Welding /Submerged arc welding
10. Preparation of green sand moulds
11 Manufacturing of simple sheet metal components using shearing and bending operations.
12. Manufacturing of sheet metal components using metal spinning on a lathe
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Demonstrate the safety precautions exercised in the mechanical workshop.
CO2 Make the workpiece as per given shape and size using Lathe.
CO3 Join two metals using arc welding.
CO4 Use sheet metal fabrication tools and make simple tray and funnel.
CO5 Use different moulding tools, patterns and prepare sand moulds.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Centre Lathes 7 Nos.
2 Horizontal Milling Machine 1 No
3 Vertical Milling Machine 1 No
4 Shaper 1 No.
5 Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 2 Nos
6 Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and 1 No
other welding outfit
7 Moulding table, Moulding equipments 2 Nos
8 Sheet metal forming tools and equipments 2 Nos.
ME8381 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand and interpret drawings of machine components
To prepare assembly drawings both manually and using standard CAD packages
To familiarize the students with Indian Standards on drawing practices and standard
components
To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
UNIT I DRAWING STANDARDS & FITS AND TOLERANCES 12
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints,
keys, fasteners – Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts,
nuts, screws, keys etc. - Limits, Fits – Tolerancing of individual dimensions – Specification of Fits –
Preparation of production drawings and reading of part and assembly drawings, basic principles of
geometric dimensioning & tolerancing.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO 2D DRAFTING 16
Drawing, Editing, Dimensioning, Layering, Hatching, Block, Array, Detailing, Detailed
drawing.
Bearings - Bush bearing, Plummer block
Valves – Safety and non-return valves.
UNIT III 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING AND ASSEMBLY 32
Sketcher - Datum planes – Protrusion – Holes - Part modeling – Extrusion – Revolve – Sweep –
Loft – Blend – Fillet - Pattern – Chamfer - Round - Mirror – Section - Assembly
Couplings – Flange, Universal, Oldham’s, Muff, Gear couplings
Joints – Knuckle, Gib & cotter, strap, sleeve & cotter joints
Engine parts – Piston, connecting rod, cross-head (vertical and horizontal), stuffing box,
multi-plate clutch
Miscellaneous machine components – Screw jack, machine vice, tail stock, chuck, vane
and gear pump
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
Note: 25% of assembly drawings must be done manually and remaining 75% of assembly drawings
must be done by using any CAD software. The above tasks can be performed manually and using
standard commercial 2D / 3D CAD software
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Follow the drawing standards, Fits and Tolerances
CO2 Re-create part drawings, sectional views and assembly drawings as per standards
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Machine Drawing”, 22nd Edition, Subhas Stores Books Corner,
Bangalore, 2013
REFERENCES:
1. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, 48th Edition, Charotar Publishers,2013
2. Junnarkar, N.D., “Machine Drawing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004
3. N. Siddeshwar, P. Kanniah, V.V.S. Sastri, ”Machine Drawing” , published by Tata Mc
GrawHill,2006
4. S. Trymbaka Murthy, “A Text Book of Computer Aided Machine Drawing”, CBS Publishers, New
Delhi, 2007
EE8361 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To validate the principles studied in theory by performing experiments in the laboratory
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load test on DC Shunt & DC Series motor
2. O.C.C & Load characteristics of DC Shunt and DC Series generator
3. Speed control of DC shunt motor (Armature, Field control)
4. Load test on single phase transformer
5. O.C & S.C Test on a single phase transformer
6. Regulation of an alternator by EMF & MMF methods.
7. V curves and inverted V curves of synchronous Motor
8. Load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor
9. Speed control of three phase slip ring Induction Motor
10. Study of DC & AC Starters
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to perform speed characteristic of different electrical machine
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 DC Shunt motor 2
2 DC Series motor 1
3 DC shunt motor-DC Shunt Generator set 1
4 DC Shunt motor-DC Series Generator set 1
5 Single phase transformer 2
6 Three phase alternator 2
7 Three phase synchronous motor 1
8 Three phase Squirrel cage Induction motor 1
9 Three phase Slip ring Induction motor 1
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING & SPEAKING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage in
specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation -
pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a complete idea
as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over a wide
range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute informal
talk - greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer - accept - decline
- take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group discussion -
summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to and participating in
conversations - persuade.
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions in
academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Listen and respond appropriately.
• Participate in group discussions
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University Press,
Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford:
2010
REFERENCES
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014.
3. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
MA8452 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in
engineering and technology.
To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays
an important role in real life problems.
To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering and
technology disciplines.
To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Sampling distributions - Estimation of parameters - Statistical hypothesis - Large sample tests based
on Normal distribution for single mean and difference of means -Tests based on t, Chi-square and
F distributions for mean, variance and proportion - Contingency table (test for independent) -
Goodness of fit.
UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 12
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method - Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION 12
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Single step methods : Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods : Milne’s and Adams
- Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal. B.S. and Grewal. J.S., “Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science ", 10th Edition,
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2006.
4. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and Statistics ",
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
5. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", 8th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2007.
ME8492 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic components and layout of linkages in the assembly of a system
machine.
To understand the principles in analyzing the assembly with respect to the displacement,
velocity, and acceleration at any point in a link of a mechanism.
To understand the motion resulting from a specified set of linkages, design few linkage
mechanisms and cam mechanisms for specified output motions.
To understand the basic concepts of toothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains and the
effects of friction in motion transmission and in machine components.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 9
Classification of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitions – Degree of
freedom, Mobility – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler’s criterion – Grashof’s Law – Kinematic inversions
of four-bar chain and slider crank chains – Limit positions – Mechanical advantage – Transmission
Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line
generators, Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.
UNIT II KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 9
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method–
Velocity and acceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic
analysis of simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Acceleration –
Introduction to linkage synthesis problem.
UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 9
Classification of cams and followers – Terminology and definitions – Displacement diagrams –
Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of follower
motions – Layout of plate cam profiles – Specified contour cams – Circular arc and tangent cams –
Pressure angle and undercutting – sizing of cams.
UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Law of toothed gearing – Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles –Spur Gear terminology and
definitions –Gear tooth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercutting. Helical, Bevel,
Worm, Rack and Pinion gears [Basics only]. Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis
gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains.
UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –
Bearings and lubrication – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – Friction in brakes- Band and
Block brakes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Discuss the basics of mechanism
CO2 Calculate velocity and acceleration in simple mechanisms
CO3 Develop CAM profiles
CO4 Solve problems on gears and gear trains
CO5 Examine friction in machine elements
TEXT BOOKS:
1. F.B. Sayyad, “Kinematics of Machinery”, MacMillan Publishers Pvt Ltd., Tech-max Educational
resources, 2011.
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
3. Uicker,
th J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
4 Edition, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Allen S. Hall Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hall, 1961
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2014
3. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", 3 r d Edition Affiliated
East-West Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
4. John Hannah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Edition,
1999.
5. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Edition, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2005.
ME8451 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY – II L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept and basic mechanics of metal cutting, working of standard
machine tools such as lathe, shaping and allied machines, milling, drilling and allied machines,
grinding and allied machines and broaching.
To understand the basic concepts of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) of machine tools and
CNC Programming
UNIT I THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9
Mechanics of chip formation, single point cutting tool, forces in machining, Types of chip, cutting
tools– nomenclature, orthogonal metal cutting, thermal aspects, cutting tool materials, tool wear,
tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids and Machinability.
UNIT II TURNING MACHINES 9
Centre lathe, constructional features, specification, operations – taper turning methods, thread
cutting methods, special attachments, machining time and power estimation. Capstan and turret
lathes- tool layout – automatic lathes: semi automatic – single spindle : Swiss type, automatic
screw type – multi spindle:
UNIT III SHAPER, MILLING AND GEAR CUTTING MACHINES 9
Shaper - Types of operations. Drilling ,reaming, boring, Tapping. Milling operations-types of milling
cutter. Gear cutting – forming and generation principle and construction of gear milling ,hobbing
and gear shaping processes –finishing of gears.
UNIT IV ABRASIVE PROCESS AND BROACHING 9
Abrasive processes: grinding wheel – specifications and selection, types of grinding process–
cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding and internal grinding- Typical applications
– concepts of surface integrity, broaching machines: broach construction – push, pull, surface and
continuous broaching machines
UNIT V CNC MACHINING 9
Numerical Control (NC) machine tools – CNC types, constructional details, special features,
machining centre, part programming fundamentals CNC – manual part programming –
micromachining – wafer machining.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the mechanism of material removal processes.
CO2 Describe the constructional and operational features of centre lathe and other special
purpose lathes.
CO3 Describe the constructional and operational features of shaper, planner, milling, drilling,
sawing and broaching machines.
CO4 Explain the types of grinding and other super finishing processes apart from gear
manufacturing processes.
CO5 Summarize numerical control of machine tools and write a part program.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.II., Media Promoters 2014
2. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology - Metal Cutting and Machine Tools", 3rd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Richerd R Kibbe, John E. Neely, Roland O. Merges and Warren J.White “Machine Tool
Practices”, Prentice Hall of India, 1998
2. Geofrey Boothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools", Mc Graw Hill,
1984
3. HMT, "Production Technology", Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
4. Roy. A.Lindberg, “Process and Materials of Manufacture,” Fourth Edition, PHI/Pearson
Education 2006.
ME8491 ENGINEERING METALLURGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, treatment, testing and applications of
metals and non-metallic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for
various engineering applications.
UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitial – phase diagrams,
Isomorphous, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Iron – carbon equilibrium
diagram. Classification of steel and cast Iron microstructure, properties and application.
UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 9
Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidising – normalising, hardening
and Tempering of steel. Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on
I.T. diagram CCR – Hardenability, Jominy end quench test - Austempering, martempering – case
hardening, carburizing, Nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening –
Vacuum and Plasma hardening. .
UNIT III FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9
Effect of alloying additions on steel- α and β stabilisers– stainless and tool steels – HSLA, Maraging
steels – Cast Iron - Grey, white, malleable, spheroidal – alloy cast irons, Copper and copper alloys
– Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and Al-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment –
Bearing alloys, Mg-alloys, Ni-based super alloys and Titanium alloys.
UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9
Polymers – types of polymer, commodity and engineering polymers – Properties and applications of
various thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI,
PAI, PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE, Polymers – Urea and Phenol formaldehydes)- Engineering
Ceramics – Properties and applications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –Composites-
Classifications- Metal Matrix and FRP - Applications of Composites.
UNIT V MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND DEFORMATION MECHANISMS 9
Mechanisms of plastic deformation, slip and twinning – Types of fracture – Testing of materials
under tension, compression and shear loads – Hardness tests (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell),
hardness tests, Impact test lzod and charpy, fatigue and creep failure mechanisms.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain alloys and phase diagram, Iron-Iron carbon diagram and steel classification.
CO2 Explain isothermal transformation, continuous cooling diagrams and different heat
treatment processes.
CO3 Clarify the effect of alloying elements on ferrous and non-ferrous metals
CO4 Summarize the properties and applications of non metallic materials.
CO5 Explain the testing of mechanical properties. .
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Avner, S.H., “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Book Company,1997.
2. Williams D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised Indian
Edition 2014
REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, “Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall of India
Private Limited, 2010.
2. Raghavan.V, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2015.
3. U.C.Jindal : Material Science and Metallurgy, "Engineering Materials and Metallurgy", First
Edition, Dorling Kindersley, 2012
4. Upadhyay. G.S. and Anish Upadhyay, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Viva Books Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
CE8395 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS FOR MECHANICAL L T P C
ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of stress, strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
To study the concept of shearing force and bending moment due to external loads in
determinate beams and their effect on stresses.
To determine stresses and deformation in circular shafts and helical spring due to torsion.
To compute slopes and deflections in determinate beams by various methods.
To study the stresses and deformations induced in thin and thick shells.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains –Stresses
on inclined planes – principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stress.
UNIT II TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams
– Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple
bending– bending stress distribution – Load carrying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched
beams – Shear stress distribution.
UNIT III TORSION 9
Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs, carriage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of
slopes and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwell’s reciprocal
theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9
Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure circumferential and longitudinal stresses
and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal pressure –
Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
Understand the concepts of stress and strain in simple and compound bars, the importance of
principal stresses and principal planes.
Understand the load transferring mechanism in beams and stress distribution due to shearing
force and bending moment.
Apply basic equation of simple torsion in designing of shafts and helical spring
Calculate the slope and deflection in beams using different methods.
Analyze and design thin and thick shells for the applied internal and external pressures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 2016
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002
2. Ferdinand P. Been, Russell Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, 2013
4. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Press, Oxford Higher Education
Series, 2010.
ME8493 THERMAL ENGINEERING - I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in
thermodynamics into analysis of cyclic processes
To apply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal application like IC engines,
Steam.
Turbines, Compressors and Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems
(Use of standard refrigerant property data book, Steam Tables, Mollier diagram and
Psychrometric chart permitted)
UNIT I GAS AND STEAM POWER CYCLES 9
Air Standard Cycles - Otto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton – Cycle Analysis, Performance and Comparison
– Rankine, reheat and regenerative cycle.
UNIT II RECIPROCATING AIR COMPRESSOR 9
Classification and comparison, working principle, work of compression - with and without
clearance, Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency. Multistage air
compressor with Intercooling. Working principle and comparison of Rotary compressors with
reciprocating air compressors.
UNIT III INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND COMBUSTION 9
IC engine – Classification, working, components and their functions. Ideal and actual : Valve and
port timing diagrams, p-v diagrams- two stroke & four stroke, and SI & CI engines – comparison.
Geometric, operating, and performance comparison of SI and CI engines. Desirable properties
and qualities of fuels. Air-fuel ratio calculation – lean and rich mixtures. Combustion in SI & CI
Engines – Knocking – phenomena and control.
UNIT IV INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEMS 9
Performance parameters and calculations. Morse and Heat Balance tests. Multipoint Fuel Injection
system and Common Rail Direct lnjection systems. Ignition systems – Magneto, Battery and
Electronic. Lubrication and Cooling systems. Concepts of Supercharging and Turbocharging –
Emission Norms.
UNIT V GAS TURBINES 9
Gas turbine cycle analysis – open and closed cycle. Performance and its improvement -
Regenerative, Intercooled, Reheated cycles and their combinations. Materials for Turbines.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Apply thermodynamic concepts to different air standard cycles and solve problems.
CO2 Solve problems in single stage and multistage air compressors
CO3 Explain the functioning and features of IC engines, components and auxiliaries.
CO4 Calculate performance parameters of IC Engines.
CO5 Explain the flow in Gas turbines and solve problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothandaraman.C.P., Domkundwar. S,Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal Engineering",
Fifth Edition, ”Dhanpat Rai & sons , 2016
2. Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Arora.C.P, ”Refrigeration and Air Conditioning ,” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers 2008
2. Ganesan V..” Internal Combustion Engines” , Third Edition, Tata Mcgraw-Hill 2012
3. Ramalingam. K.K., "Thermal Engineering", SCITECH Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
4. Rudramoorthy, R, “Thermal Engineering “,Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2003
5. Sarkar, B.K,”Thermal Engineering” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007
ME8462 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY – II L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To Study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in special
purpose machines and its applications in real life manufacture of components in the industry
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Contour milling using vertical milling machine
2. Spur gear cutting in milling machine
3. Helical Gear Cutting in milling machine
4. Gear generation in hobbing machine
5. Gear generation in gear shaping machine
6. Plain Surface grinding
7. Cylindrical grinding
8. Tool angle grinding with tool and Cutter Grinder
9. Measurement of cutting forces in Milling / Turning Process
10. CNC Part Programming
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 use different machine tools to manufacturing gears
CO2 Ability to use different machine tools to manufacturing gears.
CO3 Ability to use different machine tools for finishing operations
CO4 Ability to manufacture tools using cutter grinder
CO5 Develop CNC part programming
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Turret and Capstan Lathes 1 No each
2 Horizontal Milling Machine 2 No
3 Vertical Milling Machine 1 No
4 Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.
5 Cylinderical Grinding Machine 1 No.
6 Radial Drilling Machine 1 No.
7 lathe Tool Dynamometer 1 No
8 Milling Tool Dynamometer 1 No
9 Gear Hobbing Machine 1 No
10 Tool Makers Microscope 1 No
11 CNC Lathe 1 No
12 CNC Milling machine 1 No
13 Gear Shaping machine 1 No
14 Centerless grinding machine 1 No
15 Tool and cutter grinder 1 No
CE8381 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND FLUID MECHANICS L T P C
AND MACHINERY LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To study the mechanical properties of materials when subjected to different types of
loading.
To verify the principles studied in Fluid Mechanics theory by performing experiments in
lab.
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild steel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminium rods
3. Torsion test on mild steel rod
4. Impact test on metal specimen
5. Hardness test on metals - Brinnell and Rockwell Hardness Number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Compression test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge
9. Effect of hardening- Improvement in hardness and impact resistance of steels.
10. Tempering- Improvement Mechanical properties Comparison
(i) Unhardened specimen
(ii) Quenched Specimen and
(iii) Quenched and tempered specimen.
11. Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and
(ii) Hardened and tempered samples.
OUTCOME:
Ability to perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on Solid
materials.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Universal Tensile Testing machine with double 1 shear attachment – 1
40 Ton Capacity
2 Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) 1
3 Impact Testing Machine (300 J Capacity) 1
4 Brinell Hardness Testing Machine 1
5 Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine 1
6 Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads (2500 N) 1
7 Metallurgical Microscopes 3
8 Muffle Furnace (800 C) 1
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINES LABORATORY 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter.
2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.
3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter.
4. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/
submergible pump
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on Solid materials.
Use the measurement equipments for flow measurement.
Perform test on different fluid machinery.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Orifice meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton wheel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
HS8461 ADVANCED READING AND WRITING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
• Strengthen the reading skills of students of engineering.
• Enhance their writing skills with specific reference to technical writing.
• Develop students’ critical thinking skills.
• Provide more opportunities to develop their project and proposal writing skills.
UNIT I
Reading - Strategies for effective reading-Use glosses and footnotes to aid reading comprehension-
Read and recognize different text types-Predicting content using photos and title Writing-Plan before
writing- Develop a paragraph: topic sentence, supporting sentences, concluding sentence –Write a
descriptive paragraph
UNIT II
Reading-Read for details-Use of graphic organizers to review and aid comprehension Writing-State
reasons and examples to support ideas in writing- Write a paragraph with reasons and examples-
Write an opinion paragraph
UNIT III
Reading- Understanding pronoun reference and use of connectors in a passage- speed reading
techniques-Writing- Elements of a good essay-Types of essays- descriptive-narrative- issue-based-
argumentative-analytical.
UNIT IV
Reading- Genre and Organization of Ideas- Writing- Email writing- resumes – Job application- project
writing-writing convincing proposals.
UNIT V
Reading- Critical reading and thinking- understanding how the text positions the reader- identify
Writing- Statement of Purpose- letter of recommendation- Vision statement
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Write different types of essays.
• Write winning job applications.
• Read and evaluate texts critically.
• Display critical thinking in various professional contexts.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Debra Daise, CharlNorloff, and Paul Carne Reading and Writing (Level 4) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2011
2. Gramer F. Margot and Colin S. Ward Reading and Writing (Level 3) Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2011
REFERENCES
1. Davis, Jason and Rhonda LIss.Effective Academic Writing (Level 3) Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2006
2. E. Suresh Kumar and et al. Enriching Speaking and Writing Skills. Second Edition. Orient Black
swan: Hyderabad, 2012
3. Withrow, Jeans and et al. Inspired to Write. Readings and Tasks to develop writing skills.
Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, 2004
4. Goatly, Andrew. Critical Reading and Writing. Routledge: United States of America, 2000
5. Petelin, Roslyn and Marsh Durham. The Professional Writing Guide: Knowing Well and
Knowing Why. Business & Professional Publishing: Australia, 2004
ME8595 THERMAL ENGINEERING – II L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To apply the thermodynamic concepts for Nozzles, Boilers, Turbines, and Refrigeration
& Air Conditioning Systems.
To understand the concept of utilising residual heat in thermal systems.
UNIT I STEAM NOZZLE 9
Types and Shapes of nozzles, Flow of steam through nozzles, Critical pressure ratio, Variation of
mass flow rate with pressure ratio. Effect of friction. Metastable flow.
UNIT II BOILERS 9
Types and comparison. Mountings and Accessories. Fuels - Solid, Liquid and Gas. Performance
calculations, Boiler trial.
UNIT III STEAM TURBINES 9
Types, Impulse and reaction principles, Velocity diagrams, Work done and efficiency – optimal
operating conditions. Multi-staging, compounding and governing.
UNIT IV COGENERATION AND RESIDUAL HEAT RECOVERY 9
Cogeneration Principles, Cycle Analysis, Applications, Source and utilisation of residual heat. Heat
pipes, Heat pumps, Recuperative and Regenerative heat exchangers. Economic Aspects.
UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR – CONDITIONING 9
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Effect of Superheat and Sub-cooling, Performance
calculations, Working principle of air cycle, vapour absorption system, and Thermoelectric
refrigeration. Air conditioning systems, concept of RSHF, GSHF and ESHF, Cooling load
calculations. Cooling towers – concept and types.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Solve problems in Steam Nozzle
CO2 Explain the functioning and features of different types of Boilers and auxiliaries and
calculate performance parameters.
CO3 Explain the flow in steam turbines, draw velocity diagrams for steam turbines and solve
problems.
CO4 Summarize the concept of Cogeneration, Working features of Heat pumps and Heat
exchangers
CO5 Solve problems using refrigerant table / charts and psychrometric charts
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kothandaraman, C.P., Domkundwar .S and Domkundwar A.V.,”A course in Thermal
Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2016.
2. Mahesh. M. Rathore, “Thermal Engineering”, 1st Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publications, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Arora .C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2008
2. Ballaney. P.L ." Thermal Engineering”, Khanna publishers, 24th Edition 2012
3. Charles H Butler : Cogeneration” McGraw Hill, 1984.
4. Donald Q. Kern, “ Process Heat Transfer”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2001.
5. Sydney Reiter “Industrial and Commercial Heat Recovery Systems” Van Nostrand Reinhols,
1985.
ME8593 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To familiarize the various steps involved in the Design Process
To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a component
to satisfy functional and strength requirements.
To learn to use standard practices and standard data
To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components
(Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted)
UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 9
Introduction to the design process - factors influencing machine design, selection of materials
based on mechanical properties - Preferred numbers, fits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and
torsional stress equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle stresses for various
load combinations, eccentric loading – curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame- Factor of
safety - theories of failure – Design based on strength and stiffness – stress concentration –
Design for variable loading.
UNIT II SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 9
Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Keys, keyways
and splines - Rigid and flexible couplings.
UNIT III TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9
Threaded fastners - Bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints –
Welded joints, riveted joints for structures - theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Various types of springs, optimization of helical springs - rubber springs - Flywheels
considering stresses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines- Connecting Rods and
crank shafts.
UNIT V BEARINGS 9
Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings - Hydrodynamic journal bearings, Sommerfeld
Number, Raimondi and Boyd graphs, -- Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the influence of steady and variable stresses in machine component design.
CO2 Apply the concepts of design to shafts, keys and couplings.
CO3 Apply the concepts of design to temporary and permanent joints.
CO4 Apply the concepts of design to energy absorbing members, connecting rod and crank
shaft.
CO5 Apply the concepts of design to bearings.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2016.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill
BookCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
2. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book
Co, 2003.
3. P.C. Gope, “Machine Design – Fundamental and Application”, PHI learning private ltd, New Delhi,
2012.
4. R.B. Patel, “Design of Machine Elements”, MacMillan Publishers India P Ltd., Tech-Max
Educational resources, 2011.
5. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4th Edition, Wiley,
2005
6. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chennai, 2015.
ME8501 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge on various Metrological equipments available to measure the dimension
of the components.
To provide knowledge on the correct procedure to be adopted to measure the dimension of
the components.
UNIT I BASICS OF METROLOGY 9
Introduction to Metrology – Need – Elements – Work piece, Instruments – Persons – Environment –
their effect on Precision and Accuracy – Errors – Errors in Measurements – Types – Control –
Types of standards.
UNIT II LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS 9
Linear Measuring Instruments – Evolution – Types – Classification – Limit gauges – gauge design –
terminology – procedure – concepts of interchange ability and selective assembly – Angular
measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor clinometers angle gauges, spirit levels sine bar –
Angle alignment telescope – Autocollimator – Applications.
UNIT III ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9
Basic concept of lasers Advantages of lasers – laser Interferometers – types – DC and AC Lasers
interferometer – Applications – Straightness – Alignment. Basic concept of CMM – Types of CMM
– Constructional features – Probes – Accessories – Software – Applications – Basic
concepts of Machine Vision System – Element – Applications.
UNIT IV FORM MEASUREMENT 9
Principles and Methods of straightness – Flatness measurement – Thread measurement, gear
measurement, surface finish measurement, Roundness measurement – Applications.
UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF POWER, FLOW AND TEMPERATURE 9
Force, torque, power - mechanical , Pneumatic, Hydraulic and Electrical type. Flow measurement:
Venturimeter, Orifice meter, rotameter, pitot tube – Temperature: bimetallic strip, thermocouples,
electrical resistance thermometer – Reliability and Calibration – Readability and Reliability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Describe the concepts of measurements to apply in various metrological instruments
CO2 Outline the principles of linear and angular measurement tools used for industrial
applications
CO3 Explain the procedure for conducting computer aided inspection
CO4 Demonstrate the techniques of form measurement used for industrial components
CO5 Discuss various measuring techniques of mechanical properties in industrial
applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gupta. I.C., “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpatrai Publications, 2005.
2. Jain R.K. “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Alan S. Morris, “The essence of Measurement”, Prentice Hall of India 1996.
2. Beckwith, Marangoni, Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education , 2014.
3. Charles Reginald Shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, 5th edition, Cengage Learning
EMEA,1990.
4. Donald Peckman, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern, 2004.
5. Raghavendra ,Krishnamurthy “Engineering Metrology & Measurements”, Oxford Univ. Press,
2013.
ME8594 DYNAMICS OF MACHINES L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the force-motion relationship in components subjected to external forces
and analysis of standard mechanisms.
To understand the undesirable effects of unbalances resulting from prescribed motions
in mechanism.
To understand the effect of Dynamics of undesirable vibrations.
To understand the principles in mechanisms used for speed control and stability
control.
UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 12
Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic Analysis
in reciprocating engines – Gas forces – Inertia effect of connecting rod– Bearing loads – Crank
shaft torque – Turning moment diagrams –Fly Wheels – Flywheels of punching presses- Dynamics
of Cam- follower mechanism.
UNIT II BALANCING 12
Static and dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating masses – Balancing a single cylinder engine –
Balancing of Multi-cylinder inline, V-engines – Partial balancing in engines – Balancing of linkages –
Balancing machines-Field balancing of discs and rotors.
UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 12
Basic features of vibratory systems – Degrees of freedom – single degree of freedom – Free
vibration– Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped vibration–
Torsional vibration of shaft – Critical speeds of shafts – Torsional vibration – Two and three
rotor torsional systems.
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 12
Response of one degree freedom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –
Disturbance caused by unbalance – Support motion –transmissibility – Vibration isolation vibration
measurement.
UNIT V MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 12
Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal
governors – Characteristics – Effect of friction – Controlling force curves. Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic
forces and torques – Gyroscopic stabilization – Gyroscopic effects in Automobiles, ships
and airplanes.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Calculate static and dynamic forces of mechanisms.
CO2 Calculate the balancing masses and their locations of reciprocating and rotating masses.
CO3 Compute the frequency of free vibration.
CO4 Compute the frequency of forced vibration and damping coefficient.
CO5 Calculate the speed and lift of the governor and estimate the gyroscopic effect on
automobiles, ships and airplanes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. F. B. Sayyad, “Dynamics of Machinery”, McMillan Publishers India Ltd., Tech-Max Educational
resources, 2011.
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
3. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
4th Edition, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2014
2. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", 3 r d Edition Affiliated
East-West Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
3. Khurmi, R.S.,”Theory of Machines”, 14th Edition, S Chand Publications, 2005.
4. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 1992.
5. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.
6. V.Ramamurthi, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 2002.
ME8511 KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To supplement the principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.
To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Study of gear parameters.
b) Experimental study of velocity ratios of simple, compound, Epicyclic and differential gear trains.
2. a)Kinematics of Four Bar, Slider Crank, Crank Rocker, Double crank, Double rocker,
Oscillating cylinder Mechanisms.
b) Kinematics of single and double universal joints.
3. a) Determination of Mass moment of inertia of Fly wheel and Axle system.
b)Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia of axisymmetric bodies using Turn Table
apparatus. c) Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia using bifilar suspension and
compound pendulum.
4. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic effect and couple.
5. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell, and Hartnell
Governors.
6. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon
7. a) Single degree of freedom Spring Mass System – Determination of natural
Frequency and verification of Laws of springs – Damping coefficient
determination. b) Multi degree freedom suspension system – Determination of
influence coefficient.
8. a) Determination of torsional natural frequency of single and Double Rotor systems.- Undamped
and Damped Natural frequencies.
b) Vibration Absorber – Tuned vibration absorber.
9. Vibration of Equivalent Spring mass system – undamped and damped vibration.
10. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critical speeds of shafts with concentrated loads.
11. a) Balancing of rotating masses. (b) Balancing of reciprocating masses.
12. a) Transverse vibration of Free-Free beam – with and without concentrated masses. b) Forced
Vibration of Cantilever beam – Mode shapes and natural frequencies.
c) Determination of transmissibility ratio using vibrating table.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain gear parameters, kinematics of mechanisms, gyroscopic effect and working of lab
equipments.
CO2 Determine mass moment of inertia of mechanical element, governor effort and range
sensitivity, natural frequency and damping coefficient, torsional frequency, critical speeds of
shafts, balancing mass of rotating and reciprocating masses, and transmissibility ratio.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Cam follower setup. 1 No.
2 Motorised gyroscope. 1 No.
3 Governor apparatus - Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell governors. 1 No.
4 Whirling of shaft apparatus. 1 No.
5 Dynamic balancing machine. 1 No.
6 Two rotor vibration setup. 1 No.
7 Spring mass vibration system. 1 No.
8 Torsional Vibration of single rotor system setup. 1 No.
9 Gear Models 1 No.
10 Kinematic Models to study various mechanisms. 1 No.
11 Turn table apparatus. 1 No.
12 Transverse vibration setup of 1 No.
a) cantilever
ME8512 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To study the value timing-V diagram and performance of IC Engines
To Study the characteristics of fuels/Lubricates used in IC Engines
To study the Performance of steam generator/ turbine
To study the heat transfer phenomena predict the relevant coefficient using implementation
To study the performance of refrigeration cycle / components
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I.C. ENGINE LAB
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams.
2. Actual p-v diagrams of IC engines.
3. Performance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.
4. Heat Balance Test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.
5. Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine.
6. Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine.
7. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels / lubricants.
STEAM LAB
1. Study on Steam Generators and Turbines.
2. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.
3. Performance and Energy Balance Test on Steam Turbine.
HEAT TRANSFER LAB:
1. Thermal conductivity measurement using guarded plate apparatus.
2. Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.
3. Determination of heat transfer coefficient under natural convection from a vertical cylinder.
4. Determination of heat transfer coefficient under forced convection from a tube.
5. Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wall.
6. Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder.
7. Heat transfer from pin-fin apparatus (natural & forced convection modes)
8. Determination of Stefan – Boltzmann constant.
9. Determination of emissivity of a grey surface.
10. Effectiveness of Parallel / counter flow heat exchanger.
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB
1. Determination of COP of a refrigeration system
2. Experiments on Psychrometric processes
3. Performance test on a reciprocating air compressor
4. Performance test in a HC Refrigeration System
5. Performance test in a fluidized Bed Cooling Tower
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 conduct tests on heat conduction apparatus and evaluate thermal conductivity of
materials.
CO2 conduct tests on natural and forced convective heat transfer apparatus and evaluate
heat transfer coefficient.
CO3 conduct tests on radiative heat transfer apparatus and evaluate Stefan Boltzmann
constant and emissivity.
CO4 conduct tests to evaluate the performance of parallel/counter flow heat exchanger
apparatus and reciprocating air compressor.
CO5 conduct tests to evaluate the performance of refrigeration and airconditioning test rigs.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
S.No.
1 I.C Engine – 2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1 set
2 Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1 No.
3 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading. 1 No
4 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading. 1 No.
5 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading. 1 No.
6 Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
7 Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1 No.
8 Data Acquisition system with any one of the above engines 1 No.
9 Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1 No.
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Guarded plate apparatus 1 No.
2 Lagged pipe apparatus 1 No.
3 Natural convection-vertical cylinder apparatus 1 No.
4 Forced convection inside tube apparatus 1 No.
5 Composite wall apparatus 1 No.
6 Thermal conductivity of insulating powder apparatus 1 No.
7 Pin-fin apparatus 1 No.
8 Stefan-Boltzmann apparatus 1 No.
9 Emissivity measurement apparatus 1 No.
10 Parallel/counter flow heat exchanger apparatus 1 No.
11 Single/two stage reciprocating air compressor 1 No.
12 Refrigeration test rig 1 No.
13 Air-conditioning test rig 1 No.
ME8513 METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To familiar with different measurement equipments and use of this industry for
quality inspection.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration and use of measuring instruments – Vernier caliper, micrometer, Vernier height gauge –
using gauge blocks
2. Calibration and use of measuring instruments – depth micrometer, bore gauge, telescopic gauge
3. Measurement of linear dimensions using Comparators
4. Measurement of angles using bevel protractor and sine bar
5. Measurement of screw thread parameters – Screw thread Micrometers and Three wire method
‘(floating carriage micrometer)
6. Measurement of gear parameters – disc micrometers, gear tooth vernier caliper
7. Measurement of features in a prismatic component using Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
8. Programming of CNC Coordinate Measuring Machines for repeated measurements of identical
components
9. Non-contact (Optical) measurement using Toolmaker’s microscope / Profile projector and Video
measurement system
10. Measurement of Surface finish in components manufactured using various processes (turning,
milling, grinding, etc.,) using stylus based instruments.
11. Machine tool metrology – Level tests using precision level; Testing of straightness of a machine
tool guide way using Autocollimator, spindle tests.
12. Measurement of force, torque and temperature
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Measure the gear tooth dimensions, angle using sine bar, straightness and flatness,
thread parameters, temperature using thermocouple, force, displacement, torque and
vibration.
CO2 Calibrate the vernier, micrometer and slip gauges and setting up the comparator for the
inspection.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Micrometer 5
2 Vernier Caliper 5
3 Vernier Height Gauge 2
4 Vernier depth Gauge 2
5 Slip Gauge Set 1
6 Gear Tooth Vernier 1
7 Sine Bar 1
8 Floating Carriage Micrometer 1
9 Profile Projector / Tool Makers Microscope 1
10 Parallel / counter flow heat exchanger apparatus 1
11 Mechanical / Electrical / Pneumatic Comparator 1
12 Autocollimator 1
13 Temperature Measuring Setup 1
14 Force Measuring Setup 1
15 Torque Measuring Setup 1
16 Coordinate measuring machine 1
17 Surface finish measuring equipment 1
18 Bore gauge 1
19 Telescope gauge 1
ME8651 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of Mechanical power
Transmission components.
To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmission of Mechanical
elements
To learn to use standard data and catalogues
(Use of P S G Design Data Book permitted)
UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS 9
Design of Flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and pulleys – Selection of hoisting wire
ropes and pulleys – Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets.
UNIT II SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 9
Speed ratios and number of teeth-Force analysis -Tooth stresses - Dynamic effects – Fatigue
strength - Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical gears based
on strength and wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane-
Equivalent number of teeth-forces for helical gears.
UNIT III BEVEL, WORM AND CROSS HELICAL GEARS 9
Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth.
Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demerits-
terminology. Thermal capacity, materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of the
worm gear pair. Cross helical: Terminology-helix angles-Estimating the size of the pair of cross
helical gears.
UNIT IV GEAR BOXES 9
Geometric progression - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout -Design of sliding
mesh gear box - Design of multi speed gear box for machine tool applications - Constant mesh
gear box - Speed reducer unit. – Variable speed gear box, Fluid Couplings, Torque Converters for
automotive applications.
UNIT V CAMS, CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9
Cam Design: Types-pressure angle and under cutting base circle determination-forces and surface
stresses. Design of plate clutches –axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches-
Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes - external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe
brake.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 apply the concepts of design to belts, chains and rope drives.
CO2 apply the concepts of design to spur, helical gears.
CO3 apply the concepts of design to worm and bevel gears.
CO4 apply the concepts of design to gear boxes .
CO5 apply the concepts of design to cams, brakes and clutches
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2016.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Merhyle F. Spotts, Terry E. Shoup and Lee E. Hornberger, “Design of Machine Elements”
8th Edition, Printice Hall, 2003.
2. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 2003.
3. Prabhu. T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2000.
4. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4th Edition, Wiley,
2005
5. Sundararajamoorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chennai, 2003.
ME8691 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component design
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design,
Proper planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Product cycle- Design process- sequential and concurrent engineering- Computer aided design –
CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D transformations-
homogeneous coordinates - Line drawing -Clipping- viewing transformation-Brief introduction to CAD
and CAM – Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control- Introduction to CAD/CAM –CAD/CAM
concepts ––Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of
Production Performance
UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING 9
Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-Techniques
for surface modeling – surface patch- Coons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-spline surfaces. Solid
modeling techniques- CSG andB-rep
UNIT III CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) - standards for exchange images-
Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) - Data exchange standards - IGES, STEP, CALS etc. -
communication standards.
UNIT IV FUNDAMENTAL OF CNC AND PART PROGRAMING 9
Introduction to NC systems and CNC - Machine axis and Co-ordinate system- CNC machine tools-
Principle of operation CNC- Construction features including structure- Drives and CNC controllers-
2D and 3D machining on CNC- Introduction of Part Programming, types - Detailed Manual part
programming on Lathe & Milling machines using G codes and M codes- Cutting Cycles, Loops, Sub
program and Macros- Introduction of CAM package.
UNIT V CELLULAR MANUFACTURING AND FLEXIBLE
MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) 9
Group Technology(GT),Part Families–Parts Classification and coding–Simple Problems in Opitz Part
Coding system–Production flow Analysis–Cellular Manufacturing–Composite part concept–Types of
Flexibility - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Application & Benefits – FMS Planning and Control–
Quantitative analysis in FMS
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the 2D and 3D transformations, clipping algorithm, Manufacturing models and
Metrics
CO2 Explain the fundamentals of parametric curves, surfaces and Solids
CO3 Summarize the different types of Standard systems used in CAD
CO4 Apply NC & CNC programming concepts to develop part programme for Lathe &
Milling Machines
CO5 Summarize the different types of techniques used in Cellular Manufacturing and FMS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hill PublishingCo.2007
2. Mikell.P.Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
3. Radhakrishnan P, SubramanyanS.andRaju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi,2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and Manufacturing
management “ Second Edition, Pearson Education, 1999.
2. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics”’. Prentice Hall, Inc,1992.
3. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice" Pearson
Education -2003
4. William M Neumann and Robert F.Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill Book
Co. Singapore, 1989.
ME8693 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the mechanisms of heat transfer under steady and transient conditions.
To understand the concepts of heat transfer through extended surfaces.
To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic
concepts of mass transfer.
(Use of standard HMT data book permitted)
UNIT I CONDUCTION 9+6
General Differential equation of Heat Conduction– Cartesian and Polar Coordinates – One
Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction –– plane and Composite Systems – Conduction with
Internal Heat Generation – Extended Surfaces – Unsteady Heat Conduction – Lumped Analysis –
Semi Infinite and Infinite Solids –Use of Heisler’s charts.
UNIT II CONVECTION 9+6
Free and Forced Convection - Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Free and
Forced Convection during external flow over Plates and Cylinders and Internal flow through tubes .
UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 9+6
Nusselt’s theory of condensation - Regimes of Pool boiling and Flow boiling. Correlations in boiling
and condensation. Heat Exchanger Types - Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient – Fouling Factors -
Analysis – LMTD method - NTU method.
UNIT IV RADIATION 9+6
Black Body Radiation – Grey body radiation - Shape Factor – Electrical Analogy – Radiation
Shields. Radiation through gases.
UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 9+6
Basic Concepts – Diffusion Mass Transfer – Fick’s Law of Diffusion – Steady state Molecular
Diffusion – Convective Mass Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy –
Convective Mass Transfer Correlations.
TOTAL : 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Apply heat conduction equations to different surface configurations under steady
state and transient conditions and solve problems
CO2 Apply free and forced convective heat transfer correlations to internal and external
flows through/over various surface configurations and solve problems
CO3 Explain the phenomena of boiling and condensation, apply LMTD and NTU methods
of thermal analysis to different types of heat exchanger configurations and solve
problems
CO4 Explain basic laws for Radiation and apply these principles to radiative heat transfer
between different types of surfaces to solve problems
CO5 Apply diffusive and convective mass transfer equations and correlations to solve
problems for different applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Holman, J.P., "Heat and Mass Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, 2000
2. Yunus A. Cengel, "Heat Transfer A Practical Approach", Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition 2015
REFERENCES:
1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer", John
Wiley & Sons, 1998.
2. Kothandaraman, C.P., "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer", New Age International,
New Delhi, 1998.
3. Nag, P.K., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002
4. Ozisik, M.N., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1994.
5. R.C. Sachdeva, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat & Mass transfer”, New Age International
Publishers, 2009
ME8692 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of Mathematical Modeling of Engineering Problems.
To appreciate the use of FEM to a range of Engineering Problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Background – Mathematical Modeling of field problems in Engineering – Governing
Equations – Discrete and continuous models – Boundary, Initial and Eigen Value problems–
Weighted Residual Methods – Variational Formulation of Boundary Value Problems – Ritz
Technique – Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method.
UNIT II ONE-DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 9
One Dimensional Second Order Equations – Discretization – Element types- Linear and Higher
order Elements – Derivation of Shape functions and Stiffness matrices and force vectors- Assembly
of Matrices - Solution of problems from solid mechanics and heat transfer. Longitudinal vibration
frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth Order Beam Equation –Transverse deflections and Natural
frequencies of beams.
UNIT III TWO DIMENSIONAL SCALAR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions – Variational formulation –Finite
Element formulation – Triangular elements – Shape functions and element matrices and vectors.
Application to Field Problems - Thermal problems – Torsion of Non circular shafts –Quadrilateral
elements – Higher Order Elements.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL VECTOR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Equations of elasticity – Plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric problems – Body forces and
temperature effects – Stress calculations - Plate and shell elements.
UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC FORMULATION 9
Natural co-ordinate systems – Isoparametric elements – Shape functions for iso parametric
elements – One and two dimensions – Serendipity elements – Numerical integration and
application to plane stress problems - Matrix solution techniques – Solutions Techniques to
Dynamic problems – Introduction to Analysis Software.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1 Summarize the basics of finite element formulation.
CO2 Apply finite element formulations to solve one dimensional Problems.
CO3 Apply finite element formulations to solve two dimensional scalar Problems.
CO4 Apply finite element method to solve two dimensional Vector problems.
CO5 Apply finite element method to solve problems on iso parametric element and
dynamic Problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reddy. J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2005
2. Seshu, P, “Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatti Asghar M, "Fundamental Finite Element Analysis and Applications", John Wiley & Sons,
2005 (Indian Reprint 2013)*
2. Chandrupatla & Belagundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, 3rd Edition,
Prentice Hall College Div, 1990
3. Logan, D.L., “A first course in Finite Element Method”, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., 2002
4. Rao, S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
2004
5. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Witt, “Concepts and
Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, 4th Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2002.
ME8694 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide student with knowledge on the application of fluid power in process,
construction and manufacturing Industries.
To provide students with an understanding of the fluids and components utilized in modern
industrial fluid power system.
To develop a measurable degree of competence in the design, construction and operation of
fluid power circuits.
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINICIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9
Introduction to Fluid power – Advantages and Applications – Fluid power systems – Types of fluids
- Properties of fluids and selection – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law – Principles of flow -
Friction loss – Work, Power and Torque Problems, Sources of Hydraulic power : Pumping Theory
– Pump Classification – Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Performance, Selection criteria of Linear and Rotary – Fixed and Variable displacement pumps –
Problems.
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9
Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning –
Hydraulic motors - Control Components : Direction Control, Flow control and pressure control
valves – Types, Construction and Operation – Servo and Proportional valves – Applications –
Accessories : Reservoirs, Pressure Switches – Applications – Fluid Power ANSI Symbols –
Problems.
UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 9
Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits – Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double-
Pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-Safe,
Speed Control, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical hydraulic servo
systems.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC AND ELECTRO PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9
Properties of air – Perfect Gas Laws – Compressor – Filters, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air
control Valves, Quick Exhaust Valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of Pneumatic circuit –
Cascade method – Electro Pneumatic System – Elements – Ladder diagram – Problems,
Introduction to fluidics and pneumatic logic circuits.
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9
Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems, Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for Pick and Place applications and tool handling
in CNC Machine tools – Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the Fluid power and operation of different types of pumps.
CO2 Summarize the features and functions of Hydraulic motors, actuators and Flow control
valves
CO3 Explain the different types of Hydraulic circuits and systems
CO4 Explain the working of different pneumatic circuits and systems
CO5 Summarize the various trouble shooting methods and applications of hydraulic and
pneumatic systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Pearson Education 2005.
2. Majumdar S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems- Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2001.
REFERENCES:
1. Anthony Lal, “Oil hydraulics in the service of industry”, Allied publishers, 1982.
2. Dudelyt, A. Pease and John T. Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
3. Majumdar S.R., “Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995
4. Michael J, Prinches and Ashby J. G, “Power Hydraulics”, Prentice Hall, 1989.
5. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Chand & Co, 2006.
ME8681 CAD / CAM LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modelling software systems.
To study the features of CNC Machine Tool.
To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.,)
To know the application of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical
Machining centre, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING 30 PERIODS
List of Experiments
1. Introduction of 3D Modelling software
Creation of 3D assembly model of following machine elements using 3D Modelling software
2. Flange Coupling
3. Plummer Block
4. Screw Jack
5. Lathe Tailstock
6. Universal Joint
7. Machine Vice
8. Stuffing box
9. Crosshead
10. Safety Valves
11. Non-return valves
12. Connecting rod
13. Piston
14. Crankshaft
* Students may also be trained in manual drawing of some of the above components
2. Manual Part Programming. 30 PERIODS
(i) Part Programming - CNC Machining
Centre a) Linear Cutting.
b) Circular cutting.
c) Cutter Radius
Compensation. d) Canned
Cycle Operations.
(ii) Part Programming - CNC Turning
Centre a) Straight, Taper and Radius
Turning.
b) Thread Cutting.
c) Rough and Finish Turning
Cycle. d) Drilling and Tapping
Cycle.
3. Computer Aided Part Programming
e) CL Data and Post process generation using CAM packages.
f) Application of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO1 Draw 3D and Assembly drawing using CAD software
CO2 Demonstrate manual part programming with G and M codes using CAM
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. Description of Equipment Qty
HARDWARE
1. Computer Server 1
Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with atleast 1
2. GB main memory) networked to the server 30
3. A3 size plotter 1
4. Laser Printer 1
5. CNC Lathe 1
6. CNC milling machine 1
SOFTWARE
Any High end integrated modeling and manufacturing CAD
7. / CAM software 15 licenses
CAM Software for machining centre and turning centre
8. (CNC Programming and tool path simulation for FANUC / 15 licenses
Sinumeric and Heidenhain controller)
9. Licensed operating system Adequate
10. Support for CAPP Adequate
ME8682 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
The main objective is to give an opportunity to the student to get hands on training in
the fabrication of one or more components of a complete working model, which is designed
by them.
GUIDELINE FOR REVIEW AND EVALUATION
The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor. The device/
system/component(s) to be fabricated may be decided in consultation with the supervisor and if
possible with an industry. A project report to be submitted by the group and the fabricated model,
which will be reviewed and evaluated for internal assessment by a Committee constituted by
the Head of the Department. At the end of the semester examination the project work is evaluated
based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners
constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 design and Fabricate the machine element or the mechanical product.
CO2 demonstrate the working model of the machine element or the mechanical product.
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: The course aims to:
Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employable Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the
topic – answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively –
5 minute presentations
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group
dynamics - brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to
improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-
term career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2.Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,
2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
ME8792 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailing the role of Mechanical Engineers in their
operation and maintenance.
UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 9
Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers,
FBC Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants –
Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration
systems.
UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 9
Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas
Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle
systems.
UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 9
Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada
Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.
Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.
UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 9
Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV),
Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.
UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL
ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 9
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution
control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal power
plant.
CO2 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas
and Combined cycle power plants.
CO3 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power
plants.
CO4 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable
energy power plants.
CO5 Explain the applications of power plants while extend their knowledge to power plant
economics and environmental hazards and estimate the costs of electrical energy
production.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
2010.
2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy", Open University, Oxford University Press in association
with the Open University, 2004.
3. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering", Second
Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw – Hill, 1998.
ME8793 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the process planning concepts to make cost estimation for various products
after process planning
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 9
Introduction- methods of process planning-Drawing interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
process selection-.Production equipment and tooling selection
UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9
Process parameters calculation for various production processes-Selection jigs and fixtures
election of quality assurance methods - Set of documents for process planning-Economics of
process planning- case studies
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9
Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- allocation of over
head charges- Calculation of depreciation cost
UNIT IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9
Estimation of Different Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding Shop,
Estimation of Foundry Shop
UNIT V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9
Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Different Lathe Operations ,Drilling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for Milling,
Shaping and Planning -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 select the process, equipment and tools for various industrial products.
CO2 prepare process planning activity chart.
CO3 explain the concept of cost estimation.
CO4 compute the job order cost for different type of shop floor.
CO5 calculate the machining time for various machining operations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter scalon, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Books, Dec 2002.
2. Sinha B.P, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing co, 1995.
REFERENCES:
1. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2002.
2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John Wiley,
1998.
3. Russell R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2003.
4. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production, Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Pearson Education 2001.
5. K.C. Jain & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, Khanna
Publishers 1990.
ME8791 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge about the elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics systems
which are very much essential to understand the emerging field of automation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Concepts of Mechatronics approach – Need for
Mechatronics – Emerging areas of Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and
Transducers: Static and dynamic Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance
sensors – Strain gauges – Eddy current sensor – Hall effect sensor – Temperature sensors – Light
sensors
UNIT II MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Architecture of 8085 – Pin Configuration – Addressing Modes –Instruction set, Timing
diagram of 8085 – Concepts of 8051 microcontroller – Block diagram,.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9
Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard interfacing, LED display –interfacing, ADC and
DAC interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control interface.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output processing – Programming – Mnemonics – Timers,
counters and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC.
UNIT V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Advantages and
Disadvantages. Design process-stages of design process – Traditional and Mechatronics design
concepts – Case studies of Mechatronics systems – Pick and place Robot – Engine Management
system – Automatic car park barrier.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Discuss the interdisciplinary applications of Electronics, Electrical, Mechanical and
Computer Systems for the Control of Mechanical, Electronic Systems and sensor
technology.
CO2 Discuss the architecture of Microprocessor and Microcontroller, Pin Diagram, Addressing
Modes of Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
CO3 Discuss Programmable Peripheral Interface, Architecture of 8255 PPI, and various device
interfacing
CO4 Explain the architecture, programming and application of programmable logic controllers
to problems and challenges in the areas of Mechatronic engineering.
CO5 Discuss various Actuators and Mechatronics system using the knowledge and skills
acquired through the course and also from the given case studies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Prentice Hall, 2008
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall, 1993.
2. Clarence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Press, First Indian Re-print, 2013
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, PWS publishing
company, 2007.
4. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
5. Michael B.Histand and Davis G.Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill International edition, 2007.
ME8711 SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY L T P C
0 P
0 4 2
0
OBJECTIVES:
To give exposure to software tools needed to analyze engineering problems.
To expose the students to different applications of simulation and analysis tools.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS A. SIMULATION
1. MATLAB basics, Dealing with matrices, Graphing-Functions of one variable and two variables
2. Use of Matlab to solve simple problems in vibration
3. Mechanism Simulation using Multibody Dynamic software
B. ANALYSIS
1. Force and Stress analysis using link elements in Trusses, cables etc.
2. Stress and deflection analysis in beams with different support conditions.
3. Stress analysis of flat plates and simple shells.
4. Stress analysis of axi – symmetric components.
5. Thermal stress and heat transfer analysis of plates.
6. Thermal stress analysis of cylindrical shells.
7. Vibration analysis of spring-mass systems.
8. Model analysis of Beams.
9. Harmonic, transient and spectrum analysis of simple systems.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 simulate the working principle of air conditioning system, hydraulic and pneumatic
cylinder and cam follower mechanisms using MATLAB.
CO2 analyze the stresses and strains induced in plates, brackets and beams and heat transfer
problems.
CO3 calculate the natural frequency and mode shape analysis of 2D components and beams.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Computer Work Station 15
2 Color Desk Jet Printer 01
3 Multibody Dynamic Software Suitable for Mechanism 15 licenses
simulation and analysis
4 C / MATLAB 5 licenses
ME8781 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY L
T P C
0
P 4 2
0
OBJECTIVE: 0
To know the method of programming the microprocessor and also the design,
modeling & analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic & pneumatic Systems which enable the
students to understand the concept of mechatronics.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Assembly language programming of 8085 – Addition – Subtraction – Multiplication –
Division – Sorting – Code Conversion.
2. Stepper motor interface.
3. Traffic light interface.
4. Speed control of DC motor.
5. Study of various types of transducers.
6. Study of hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-pneumatic circuits.
7. Modelling and analysis of basic hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical circuits using Software.
8. Study of PLC and its applications.
9. Study of image processing technique.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Demonstrate the functioning of mechatronics system with various pneumatic, hydraulic
and electrical systems.
CO2 Demonstrate the functioning of control systems with the help of PLC and microcontrollers.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.
No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Basic Pneumatic Trainer Kit with manual and electrical 1 No.
controls/ PLC Control each
2 Basic Hydraulic Trainer Kit 1 No
3 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Systems Simulation Software 10 No
4 8051 - Microcontroller kit with stepper motor and drive 2 No
circuit sets
5 Image processing system with hardware & software 1 No.
ME8712 TECHNICALSEMINAR L T P C
0 0 2 1
To enrich the communication skills of the student and presentations of technical topics of interest,
this course is introduced. In this course, a student has to present three Technical papers or recent
advances in engineering/technology that will be evaluated by a Committee constituted by the Head
of the Department.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions
and principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers
- managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment –
Current trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives –
setting objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career
planning and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication
– communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use
of computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control
and performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding
of managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have
same basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
2. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition,
2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”,
7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999
ME8811 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 P
0 20 10
0 00
0
OBJECTIVE:
To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and
literature review till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing
project reports and to face reviews and viva voce examination.
The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department under
the guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a
minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the
Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is
evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal
examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On Completion of the project work students will be in a position to take up any
challenging practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.
ME8091 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile.
To have the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission system
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body, Vehicle
aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines –components-functions and
materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronically
controlled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type
and common rail direct injection system), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil ignition
system, capacitive discharge ignition system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emission
control by three way catalytic converter system, Emission norms (Euro and BS).
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over
drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints,
Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Steering geometry and types of steering gear box-Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Types of
Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System (ABS),
electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol
and Hydrogen in Automobiles- Engine modifications required –Performance, Combustion and
Emission Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels - Electric and Hybrid
Vehicles, Fuel Cell Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and
Transmission Systems should be given to the students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 recognize the various parts of the automobile and their functions and materials.
CO2 discuss the engine auxiliary systems and engine emission control.
CO3 distinguish the working of different types of transmission systems.
CO4 explain the Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems.
CO5 predict possible alternate sources of energy for IC Engines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain K.K. and Asthana .R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 13th Edition 2014. .
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, 1998.
3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, 1999.
4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The Good
heart - Will Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
5. Newton ,Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers,1989.
PR8592 WELDING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the basics of welding and to know about the various types of welding
processes
UNIT I GAS AND ARC WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Fundamental principles – Air Acetylene welding, Oxyacetylene welding, Carbon arc welding, Shielded
metal arc welding, Submerged arc welding, TIG & MIG welding, Plasma arc welding and Electroslag
welding processes - advantages, limitations and applications.
UNIT II RESISTANCE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Spot welding, Seam welding, Projection welding, Resistance Butt welding, Flash Butt welding,
Percussion welding and High frequency resistance welding processes - advantages, limitations and
applications.
UNIT III SOLID STATE WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Cold welding, Diffusion bonding, Explosive welding, Ultrasonic welding, Friction welding, Forge
welding, Roll welding and Hot pressure welding processes - advantages, limitations and applications.
UNIT IV OTHER WELDING PROCESSES: 9
Thermit welding, Atomic hydrogen welding, Electron beam welding, Laser Beam welding, Friction stir
welding, Under Water welding, Welding automation in aerospace, nuclear and surface transport
vehicles.
UNIT V DESIGN OF WELD JOINTS, WELDABILITY AND TESTING OF WELDMENTS 9
Various weld joint designs – Welding defects – causes and remedies - Weldability of Aluminium,
Copper, and Stainless steels. Destructive and non destructive testing of weldments.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able
Understand the construction and working principles of gas and arc welding process.
Understand the construction and working principles of resistance welding process.
Understand the construction and working principles of various solid state welding process.
Understand the construction and working principles of various special welding processes.
Understand the concepts on weld joint design, weldability and testing of weldments.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Little R.L., “Welding and welding Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi,
34th reprint, 2008.
2. Parmer R.S., “Welding Engineering and Technology”, 1st Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2008.
3. Parmer R.S., “Welding Processes and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.
REFERENCES
1. AWS- Welding Hand Book. 8th Edition. Vol- 2. “Welding Process”
2. Christopher Davis. “Laser Welding- Practical Guide”. Jaico Publishing House.
3. Davis A.C., “The Science and Practice of Welding”, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge,
1993
4. Nadkarni S.V. “Modern Arc Welding Technology”, Oxford IBH Publishers, 1st Edition, 2005.
5. Schwartz M.M. “Metals Joining Manual”. McGraw Hill Books, 1979.
6. Tylecote R.F. “The Solid Phase Welding of Metals”. Edward Arnold Publishers Ltd. London.
ME8096 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C
3 P 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES: 0
To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.
To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow. To gain some
basic knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.
(Use of Standard Gas Tables permitted)
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 9
Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves and
Mach cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable ducts –
Nozzle and Diffusers
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9
Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow) and Friction (Fanno flow)
– variation of flow properties.
UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 9
Governing equations – Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks – Prandtl
– Meyer relations – Applications.
UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 9
Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive efficiency – Operating
principle, cycle analysis and use of stagnation state performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and
turbo prop engines.
UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 9
Types of rocket engines – Propellants-feeding systems – Ignition and combustion – Theory of
rocket propulsion – Performance study – Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity –
Applications – space flights.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Apply the concept of compressible flows in variable area ducts.
CO2 Apply the concept of compressible flows in constant area ducts.
CO3 examine the effect of compression and expansion waves in compressible flow.
CO4 use the concept of gas dynamics in Jet Propulsion.
CO5 apply the concept of gas dynamics in Space Propulsion.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compressible flow", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2012.
2. Yahya, S.M. "Fundamentals of Compressible Flow", New Age International (P) Limited, New
Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamutto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group
Ltd.,1980
2. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2010.
3. Shapiro. A.H.," Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow", John wiley, New
York, 1953.
4. Sutton. G.P., "Rocket Propulsion Elements", John wiley, New York,2010,.
5. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines", John Wiley, New York, 1970.
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from WTO
to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological Research,
Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act of
India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition and
IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS
1. S.V. Satarkar, Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002.
2. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
REFERENCES
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”, McGraw
Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-
Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-
multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targetted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition, Nanoparticles for
sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Characterization of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition, Weinheim
Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia, “The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure, Theory, Modeling
and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
ME8071 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C
3 0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the underlying principles of operations in different Refrigeration & Air
conditioning systems and components.
• To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Refrigeration - Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants Desirable
properties – Classification - Nomenclature - ODP & GWP.
UNIT II VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 9
Vapor compression cycle : p-h and T-s diagrams - deviations from theoretical cycle – subcooling
and super heating- effects of condenser and evaporator pressure on COP- multipressure system -
low temperature refrigeration - Cascade systems – problems. Equipments: Type of Compressors,
Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators.
UNIT III OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 9
Working principles of Vapour absorption systems and adsorption cooling systems – Steam jet
refrigeration- Ejector refrigeration systems- Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration - Magnetic
- Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems.
UNIT IV PSYCHROMETRIC PROPERTIES AND PROCESSES 9
Properties of moist Air-Gibbs Dalton law, Specific humidity, Dew point temperature, Degree of
saturation, Relative humidity, Enthalpy, Humid specific heat, Wet bulb temperature Thermodynamic
wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart; Psychrometric of air-conditioning processes, mixing of
air streams.
UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND LOAD ESTIMATION 9
Air conditioning loads: Outside and inside design conditions; Heat transfer through structure, Solar
radiation, Electrical appliances, Infiltration and ventilation, internal heat load; Apparatus
selection; fresh air load, human comfort & IAQ principles, effective temperature & chart, calculation
of summer & winter air conditioning load; Classifications, Layout of plants; Air distribution system;
Filters; Air Conditioning Systems with Controls: Temperature, Pressure and Humidity sensors,
Actuators & Safety controls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of Refrigeration
CO2 Explain the Vapor compression Refrigeration systems and to solve problems
CO3 Discuss the various types of Refrigeration systems
CO4 Calculate the Psychrometric properties and its use in psychrometric processes
CO5 Explain the concepts of Air conditioning and to solve problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. ASHRAE Hand book, Fundamentals, 2010
2. Jones W.P., "Air conditioning engineering", 5th edition, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007
3. Roy J. Dossat, "Principles of Refrigeration", 4th edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2009.
4. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J. W., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1986.
ME8072 RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY L
T P C
P 3
0 0 3
OBJECTIVE: 0
At the end of the course, the students are expected to identify the new methodologies
/ technologies for effective utilization of renewable energy sources.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
World Energy Use – Reserves of Energy Resources – Environmental Aspects of Energy Utilisation
– Renewable Energy Scenario in Tamil nadu, India and around the World – Potentials -
Achievements / Applications – Economics of renewable energy systems.
UNIT II SOLAR ENERGY 9
Solar Radiation – Measurements of Solar Radiation - Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors –
Solar direct Thermal Applications – Solar thermal Power Generation - Fundamentals of Solar Photo
Voltaic Conversion – Solar Cells – Solar PV Power Generation – Solar PV Applications.
UNIT III WIND ENERGY 9
Wind Data and Energy Estimation – Types of Wind Energy Systems – Performance – Site Selection
– Details of Wind Turbine Generator – Safety and Environmental Aspects
UNIT IV BIO - ENERGY 9
Biomass direct combustion – Biomass gasifiers – Biogas plants – Digesters – Ethanol production
– Bio diesel – Cogeneration - Biomass Applications
UNIT V OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Tidal energy – Wave Energy – Open and Closed OTEC Cycles – Small Hydro-Geothermal Energy
– Hydrogen and Storage - Fuel Cell Systems – Hybrid Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Discuss the importance and Economics of renewable Energy
CO2 Discuss the method of power generation from Solar Energy
CO3 Discuss the method of power generation from Wind Energy
CO4 Explain the method of power generation from Bio Energy
CO5 Explain the Tidal energy, Wave Energy, OTEC, Hydro energy, Geothermal Energy, Fuel
Cells and Hybrid Systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai. G.D., "Non Conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., "Renewable Energy Sources", EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2006.
REFERENCES:
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics, "Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications",
PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015.
2. David M. Mousdale – "Introduction to Biofuels", CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, USA
2017
3. Freris. L.L., "Wind Energy Conversion Systems", Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
4. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
5. Johnson Gary, L. "Wind Energy Systems", Prentice Hall, New York, 1985
ME8098 QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concept of SQC
To understand process control and acceptance sampling procedure and their
application.
To learn the concept of reliability.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 9
Introduction, definition of quality, basic concept of quality, definition of SQC, benefits and limitation
of SQC, Quality assurance, Quality control: Quality cost-Variation in process causes of variation –
Theory of control chart- uses of control chart –X chart, R chart and chart - process capability –
process capability studies and simple problems. Six sigma concepts
UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 9
Control chart for attributes –control chart for non conformings– p chart and np chart – control chart
for nonconformities– C and U charts, State of control and process out of control identification in
charts, pattern study.
UNIT III ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9
Lot by lot sampling – types – probability of acceptance in single, double, multiple sampling
techniques – O.C. curves – producer’s Risk and consumer’s Risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL
concepts-standard sampling plans for AQL and LTPD- uses of standard sampling plans.
UNIT IV LIFE TESTING – RELIABILITY 9
Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time
between failure, hazard rate – Weibull model, system reliability, series, parallel and mixed
configuration – simple problems. Maintainability and availability – simple problems. Acceptance
sampling based on reliability test – O.C Curves.
UNIT V QUALITY AND RELIABILITY 9
Reliability improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design for reliability – redundancy
unit and standby redundancy – Optimization in reliability – Product design – Product analysis –
Product development–Product life cycles.
Note: Use of approved statistical table permitted in the examination.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Summarize the concept of Quality and Process control for variables
CO2 Apply the process control for attributes
CO3 Explain the concept of sampling and to solve problems
CO4 Explain the concept of Life testing
CO5 Explain the concept Reliability and techniques involved
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas.C. Montgomery, “Introduction to Statistical quality control”, 7th edition, John Wiley
2012.
2. Srinath. L.S., “Reliability Engineering”, Affiliated East west press, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Besterfield D.H., “Quality Control”, Prentice Hall, 2013.
2. Connor, P.D.T.O., “Practical Reliability Engineering”, John Wiley, 2012
3. Danny Samson, “Manufacturing & Operations Strategy”, Prentice Hall, 1991
4. Grant, Eugene .L “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hill, 2017
5. Gupta. R.C, “Statistical Quality control”, Khanna Publishers, 2001.
ME8073 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
OBJECTIVE: 0
To learn about various unconventional machining processes, the various process parameters and
their influence on performance and their applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Unconventional machining Process – Need – classification – merits, demerits and applications.
Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining - Ultrasonic
Machining. (AJM, WJM, AWJM and USM). Working Principles – equipment used – Process
parameters – MRR- Applications.
UNIT II THERMAL AND ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Electric Discharge Machining (EDM) – Wire cut EDM – Working Principle-equipments-Process
Parameters-Surface Finish and MRR- electrode / Tool – Power and control Circuits-Tool Wear –
Dielectric – Flushing –– Applications. Laser Beam machining and drilling, (LBM), plasma, Arc
machining (PAM) and Electron Beam Machining (EBM). Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam
control techniques – Applications.
UNIT III CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9
Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining (CHM and ECM)- Etchants – Maskant -
techniques of applying maskants - Process Parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Applications.
Principles of ECM- equipments-Surface Roughness and MRR Electrical circuit-Process Parameters-
ECG and ECH - Applications.
UNIT IV ADVANCED NANO FINISHING PROCESSES 9
Abrasive flow machining, chemo-mechanical polishing, magnetic abrasive finishing, magneto
rheological finishing, magneto rheological abrasive flow finishing their working principles, equipments,
effect of process parameters, applications, advantages and limitations.
UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES 9
Recent developments in non-traditional machining processes, their working principles, equipments,
effect of process parameters, applications, advantages and limitations. Comparison of non-traditional
machining processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the need for unconventional machining processes and its classification
CO2 Compare various thermal energy and electrical energy based unconventional
machining processes.
CO3 Summarize various chemical and electro-chemical energy based unconventional
machining processes.
CO4 Explain various nano abrasives based unconventional machining processes.
CO5 Distinguish various recent trends based unconventional machining processes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Benedict. G.F. “Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1987.
2. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining”, Chapman and Hall, London, 1998.
3. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black, and Ronald. A.Kohser, “Material and Processes in Manufacturing”
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 8thEdition, New Delhi , 2001.
MG8491 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVE:
To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources
for the engineering and business problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15
The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitivity analysis.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8
Transportation Assignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest
route – Minimal spanning tree – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT
networks – Critical path scheduling – Sequencing models.
UNIT III INVENTORY MODELS 6
Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models –
Stochastic inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6
Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and
multi server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite
population – Simulation.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 10
Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life –
Economic life– Single / Multi variable search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the optimization techniques
for use engineering and Business problems
TEXT BOOK:
1. Hillier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 2005
2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley,
2009.
2. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 1990.
3. Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992.
4. Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern,
1994.
5. Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantitative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 2002.
MF8071 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the principle, methods, possibilities and limitations as well as environmental effects of
Additive Manufacturing technologies.
• To be familiar with the characteristics of the different materials those are used in Additive
Manufacturing technologies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview – Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing Technology -Principle – AM Process
Chain- Classification –Rapid Prototyping- Rapid Tooling – Rapid Manufacturing – Applications-
Benefits –Case studies.
UNIT II DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Design tools: Data processing - CAD model preparation – Part orientation and support structure
generation – Model slicing –Tool path generation- Design for Additive Manufacturing: Concepts and
objectives- AM unique capabilities – DFAM for part quality improvement- Customised design and
fabrication for medical applications.
UNIT III PHOTOPOLYMERIZATION AND POWDER BED FUSION PROCESSES 9
Photo polymerization: SLA-Photo curable materials – Process - Advantages and Applications. Powder
Bed Fusion: SLS-Process description – powder fusion mechanism – Process Parameters
– Typical Materials and Application. Electron Beam Melting.
UNIT IV EXTRUSION BASED AND SHEET LAMINATION PROCESSES 9
Extrusion Based System: FDM-Introduction – Basic Principle – Materials – Applications and
Limitations – Bioextrusion. Sheet Lamination Process:LOM- Gluing or Adhesive bonding – Thermal
bonding.
UNIT V PRINTING PROCESSES AND BEAM DEPOSITION PROCESSES 9
Droplet formation technologies – Continuous mode – Drop on Demand mode – Three Dimensional
Printing – Advantages – Bioplotter - Beam Deposition Process:LENS- Process description – Material
delivery – Process parameters – Materials – Benefits – Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of this course, students will learn about a working principle and construction of
Additive Manufacturing technologies, their potential to support design and manufacturing, modern
development in additive manufacturing process and case studies relevant to mass customized
manufacturing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, Third
edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2 Ian Gibson, David W.Rosen, Brent Stucker “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid
Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing” Springer , 2010.
REFERENCES:
1 Andreas Gebhardt “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing” Hanser Gardner Publication 2011.
2 Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3 Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications :A tool box for prototype
development”, CRC Press, 2007.
4 Tom Page “Design for Additive Manufacturing” LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, 2012.
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer
complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee involvement
- Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal -
Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier partnership - Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function -
TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001—
Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe and
Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised Third
Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
4. ISO 9001-2015 standards
ME8099 ROBOTICS L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: 0
To understand the functions of the basic components of a Robot.
To study the use of various types of End of Effectors and Sensors
To impart knowledge in Robot Kinematics and Programming
To learn Robot safety issues and economics.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9
Robot - Definition - Robot Anatomy - Co ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and
Classification- Specifications-Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load- Robot
Parts and their Functions-Need for Robots-Different Applications.
UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper
Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of all these Drives, End
Effectors-Grippers-Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Grippers, Magnetic Grippers,
Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External
Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 9
Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors- Position
sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, pneumatic Position Sensors,
Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured, Lighting Approach, Time of Flight, Range
Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors ,binary Sensors., Analog Sensors, Wrist Sensors,
Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors, Camera, Frame Grabber, Sensing and Digitizing Image Data-
Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting Techniques, Image Processing and Analysis-Data
Reduction, Segmentation, Feature Extraction, Object Recognition, Other Algorithms, Applications-
Inspection, Identification, Visual Serving and Navigation.
UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Difference; Forward Kinematics and Reverse
Kinematics of manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (in 2 Dimension), Four Degrees
of freedom (in 3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-Manipulator Dynamics,
Trajectory Generator, Manipulator Mechanism Design-Derivations and problems. Lead through
Programming, Robot programming Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor
Commands, End Effector commands and simple Programs.
UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 9
RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries-Various Steps; Safety Considerations for
Robot Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the concepts of industrial robots, classification, specifications and coordinate
systems. Also summarize the need and application of robots in different sectors.
CO2 Illustrate the different types of robot drive systems as well as robot end effectors.
CO3 Apply the different sensors and image processing techniques in robotics to improve the
ability of robots.
CO4 Develop robotic programs for different tasks and familiarize with the kinematics motions of
robot.
CO5 Examine the implementation of robots in various industrial sectors and interpolate the
economic analysis of robots.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Groover M.P., “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Applications”, McGraw Hill,
2012.
2. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An Integrated
Approach”,Prentice Hall, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., 2013.
3. Fu.K.S.,Gonzalz R.C. and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987.
4. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
5. Koren Y., “Robotics for Engineers", Mc Graw Hill Book Co., 1992.
ME8095 DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURES AND PRESS TOOLS L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the functions and design principles of Jigs, fixtures and press tools
To gain proficiency in the development of required views of the final design.
UNIT I LOCATING AND CLAMPING PRINCIPLES: 9
Objectives of tool design- Function and advantages of Jigs and fixtures – Basic elements –
principles of location – Locating methods and devices – Redundant Location – Principles of
clamping – Mechanical actuation – pneumatic and hydraulic actuation Standard parts – Drill bushes
and Jig buttons – Tolerances and materials used.
UNIT II JIGS AND FIXTURES 9
Design and development of jigs and fixtures for given component- Types of Jigs – Post, Turnover,
Channel, latch, box, pot, angular post jigs – Indexing jigs – General principles of milling, Lathe,
boring, broaching and grinding fixtures – Assembly, Inspection and Welding fixtures – Modular
fixturing systems- Quick change fixtures.
UNIT III PRESS WORKING TERMINOLOGIES AND ELEMENTS OF CUTTING DIES 9
Press Working Terminologies - operations – Types of presses – press accessories – Computation
of press capacity – Strip layout – Material Utilization – Shearing action – Clearances – Press Work
Materials – Center of pressure- Design of various elements of dies – Die Block – Punch holder,
Die set, guide plates – Stops – Strippers – Pilots – Selection of Standard parts – Design and
preparation of four standard views of simple blanking, piercing, compound and progressive dies.
UNIT IV BENDING AND DRAWING DIES 9
Difference between bending and drawing – Blank development for above operations – Types of
Bending dies – Press capacity – Spring back – knockouts – direct and indirect – pressure pads –
Ejectors – Variables affecting Metal flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts – draw
beads- ironing – Design and development of bending, forming, drawing, reverse redrawing and
combination dies – Blank development for axisymmetric, rectangular and elliptic parts – Single and
double action dies.
UNIT V FORMING TECHNIQUES AND EVALUATION 9
Bulging, Swaging, Embossing, coining, curling, hole flanging, shaving and sizing, assembly, fine
Blanking dies – recent trends in tool design- computer Aids for sheet metal forming Analysis – basic
introduction - tooling for numerically controlled machines- setup reduction for work holding – Single
minute exchange of dies – Poka Yoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: (Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted in the University examination)
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Summarize the different methods of Locating Jigs and Fixtures and Clamping
principles
CO2 Design and develop jigs and fixtures for given component
CO3 Discuss the press working terminologies and elements of cutting dies
CO4 Distinguish between Bending and Drawing dies.
CO5 Discuss the different types of forming techniques
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joshi, P.H. “Jigs and Fixtures”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi, 2010.
2. Joshi P.H “Press tools - Design and Construction”, wheels publishing, 1996
REFERENCES:
1. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design Prentice Hall of India.
2. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.
3. Donaldson, Lecain and Goold “Tool Design”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
4. Hoffman “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Singapore, 2004.
5. Kempster, “Jigs and Fixture Design”, Third Edition, Hoddes and Stoughton, 1974.
6. Venkataraman. K., “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Press Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2005.
ME8093 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: 0
To introduce Governing Equations of viscous fluid flows
To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer
To enable the students to understand the various discretization methods, solution procedures
and turbulence modeling.
To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer by
using high speed computers.
UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 9
Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity,
Momentum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions –
Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical
behaviour of PDEs on CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations.
UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE AND FINITE VOLUME METHODS FOR DIFFUSION 9
Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second
order accuracy – Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three -
dimensional diffusion problems –Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes –
Example problems on elliptic and parabolic equations – Use of Finite Difference and Finite Volume
methods.
UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 9
Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes properties
of discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law,
QUICK Schemes.
UNIT IV FLOW FIELD ANALYSIS 9
Finite volume methods -Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation
– Staggered grid – Momentum equations – Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction
equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants – PISO Algorithms.
UNIT V TURBULENCE MODELS AND MESH GENERATION 9
Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low
Reynolds number models – Structured Grid generation – Unstructured Grid generation – Mesh
refinement – Adaptive mesh – Software tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Derive the governing equations and boundary conditions for Fluid dynamics
CO2 Analyze Finite difference and Finite volume methods for Diffusion
CO3 Analyze Finite volume method for Convective diffusion
CO4 Analyze Flow field problems
CO5 Explain and solve the Turbulence models and Mesh generation techniques
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ghoshdastidar, P.S., "Computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer", Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2017.
2. Versteeg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., "An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
finite volume Method", Pearson Education Ltd.Second Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Anil W. Date "Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics" Cambridge University Press,
2005.
2. Chung, T.J. "Computational Fluid Dynamics", Cambridge University, Press, 2002.
3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Press, 2005
4. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., "Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer", Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Patankar, S.V. "Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow", Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,
2004
ME8097 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND EVALUATION L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVE:
To study and understand the various Non Destructive Evaluation and Testing methods,
theory and their industrial applications.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 9
NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the detection
of manufacturing defects as well as material characterisation. Relative merits and limitations,
Various physical characteristics of materials and their applications in NDT., Visual inspection –
Unaided and aided.
UNIT II SURFACE NDE METHODS 9
Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants,
developers, advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of
results. Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials Magnetisation
methods, Interpretation and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of
demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY AND EDDY CURRENT TESTING (ET) 9
Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for
applying liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors,
Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents,
Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation,
Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING (UT) AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION (AE) 9
Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam and
angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array
Ultrasound, Time of Flight Diffraction. Acoustic Emission Technique – Principle, AE parameters,
Applications
UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY (RT) 9
Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use of
filters and screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films -
graininess, density, speed, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts,
Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed
Tomography
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of NDT
CO2 Discuss the different methods of NDE
CO3 Explain the concept of Thermography and Eddy current testing
CO4 Explain the concept of Ultrasonic Testing and Acoustic Emission
CO5 Explain the concept of Radiography
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2014.
2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, ”Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American Society of
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.
2. ASNT, American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio, NDT Handbook,Vol. 1,
Leak Testing, Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing, Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing Vol. 4,
Radiographic Testing, Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing, Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission Testing, Vol.
7, Ultrasonic Testing
3. Charles, J. Hellier,“ Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York 2001.
4. Paul E Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Edition New
Jersey, 2005
ME8092 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of composite material strength and its mechanical
behavior
Understanding the analysis of fiber reinforced Laminate design for different combinations of
plies with different orientations of the fiber.
Thermo-mechanical behavior and study of residual stresses in Laminates during
processing.
Implementation of Classical Laminate Theory (CLT) to study and analysis for residual
stresses in an isotropic layered structure such as electronic chips.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION, LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS & MANUFACTURING 9
Definition –Need – General Characteristics, Applications. Fibers – Glass, Carbon, Ceramic
and Aramid fibers. Matrices – Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices – Characteristics of
fibers and matrices. Lamina Constitutive Equations: Lamina Assumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint.
Generalized Hooke’s Law. Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case,
Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij), Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures.
Generally Orthotropic Lamina –Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stiffness. Manufacturing:
Bag Moulding Compression Moulding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding – Other Manufacturing
Processes
UNIT II FLAT PLATE LAMINATE CONSTITUTE EQUATIONS 9
Definition of stress and Moment Resultants. Strain Displacement relations. Basic Assumptions of
Laminated anisotropic plates. Laminate Constitutive Equations – Coupling Interactions, Balanced
Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cross Ply Laminates. Laminate
Structural Moduli. Evaluation of Lamina Properties from Laminate Tests. Quasi-Isotropic Laminates.
Determination of Lamina stresses within Laminates.
UNIT III LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 9
Introduction - Maximum Stress and Strain Criteria. Von-Misses Yield criterion for Isotropic Materials.
Generalized Hill’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hill’s Failure Criterion for
Composites. Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure
UNIT IV THERMAL ANALYSIS 9
Assumption of Constant C.T.E’s. Modification of Hooke’s Law. Modification of Laminate Constitutive
Equations. Orthotropic Lamina C.T.E’s. C.T.E’s for special Laminate Configurations –
Unidirectional, Off-axis, Symmetric Balanced Laminates, Zero C.T.E laminates, Thermally Quasi-
Isotropic Laminates
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED FLAT PLATES 9
Equilibrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling Analysis.
Free Vibrations – Natural Frequencies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Summarize the various types of Fibers, Equations and manufacturing methods for
Composite materials
CO2 Derive Flat plate Laminate equations
CO3 Analyze Lamina strength
CO4 Analyze the thermal behavior of Composite laminates
CO5 Analyze Laminate flat plates
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gibson, R.F., "Principles of Composite Material Mechanics", Second Edition, McGraw-Hill,
CRC press in progress, 1994, -.
2. Hyer, M.W., “Stress Analysis of Fiber – Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw Hill, 1998
REFERENCES:
1. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.
2. Halpin, J.C., “Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis”, Technomic Publishing Co., 1984.
3. Issac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, “Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford
University Press-2006, First Indian Edition - 2007
4. Mallick, P.K., Fiber, ”Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”, Maneel
Dekker Inc, 1993.
5. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S., (edition), “Composite Materials Technology: Processes and
Properties”, Hansen Publisher, Munish, 1990.
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; collective /
Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National and
State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational Institutions, Social
Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
REFERENCES:
1. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
2. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability, disasters,
disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of caste,
class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics,
complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community based
DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj
Institutions / Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processess and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management
Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as dams,
embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and Scenarios
in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology and local
resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes and
legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and field
works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
2. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010.
3. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13:
978-9380386423
4. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.
IE8693 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T P C
3 P 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES: 0
To understand the various components and functions of production planning and control such
as work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory Control.
To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP).
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit
consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of a
new design.
UNIT II WORK STUDY 9
Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.
UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9
Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9
Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and
expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.
UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9
Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planning
systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to prepare production planning
and control activities such as work study, product planning, production scheduling, Inventory
Control.
They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for
manufacturing and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th Edition
John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, Khanna
Publishers, 1990.
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university press,
2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE, 2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition, Excel
books 2007
MG8091 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 P
0 0 3
OBJECTIVE: 0
To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students and to
impart basic entrepreneurial skills and understanding to run a business efficiently and
effectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and
Intrapreneur Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth.
UNIT II MOTIVATION 9
Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, Self Rating,
Business Games, Thematic Apperception Test – Stress Management, Entrepreneurship
Development Programs – Need, Objectives.
UNIT III BUSINESS 9
Small Enterprises – Definition, Classification – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project
Formulation – Steps involved in setting up a Business – identifying, selecting a Good Business
opportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment – Preparation
of Preliminary Project Reports – Project Appraisal – Sources of Information – Classification of
Needs and Agencies.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Need – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Institution, Management of
working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sickness in small Business – Concept, Magnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corrective
Measures - Business Incubators – Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises – Growth
Strategies in small industry – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub
Contracting.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to gain knowledge and skills needed
to run a business successfully.
TEXT BOOKS :
th
1. Donald F Kuratko, “Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process and Practice”, 9 Edition, Cengage
Learning, 2014.
2. Khanka. S.S., “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi,
2013.
REFERENCES :
1. EDII “Faulty and External Experts – A Hand Book for New Entrepreneurs Publishers:
Entrepreneurship Development”, Institute of India, Ahmadabad, 1986.
2. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013. nd
3. Mathew J Manimala, "Enterprenuership theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis” 2
Edition Dream tech, 2005.
4. Rajeev Roy, "Entrepreneurship" 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.
ME8094 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz.,
Design, Proper planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Brief introduction to CAD and CAM – Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control- Introduction to
CAD/CAM – Concurrent Engineering-CIM concepts – Computerised elements of CIM system –
Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of Production
Performance – Simple problems – Manufacturing Control – Simple Problems – Basic Elements of
an Automated system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time Production.
UNIT II PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL AND COMPUTERISED
PROCESS PLANNING 9
Process planning – Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Process Planning – Aggregate Production Planning and the Master Production Schedule – Material
Requirement planning – Capacity Planning- Control Systems-Shop Floor Control-Inventory Control
– Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planning-II (MRP-II) & Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) - Simple Problems.
UNIT III CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9
Group Technology(GT), Part Families – Parts Classification and coding – Simple Problems in Opitz
Part Coding system – Production flow Analysis – Cellular Manufacturing – Composite part concept
– Machine cell design and layout – Quantitative analysis in Cellular Manufacturing – Rank
Order Clustering Method - Arranging Machines in a GT cell – Hollier Method – Simple Problems.
UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND AUTOMATED
GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS) 9
Types of Flexibility - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Application & Benefits – FMS Planning and
Control – Quantitative analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle
System (AGVS) – AGVS Application – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management &
Safety.
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 9
Robot Anatomy and Related Attributes – Classification of Robots- Robot Control systems – End
Effectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability - Industrial Robot Applications
– Robot Part Programming – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability – Simple Problems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of CAD, CAM and computer integrated manufacturing
systems
CO2 Summarize the production planning and control and computerized process planning
CO3 Differentiate the different coding systems used in group technology
CO4 Explain the concepts of flexible manufacturing system (FMS) and automated guided
vehicle (AGV) system
CO5 Classification of robots used in industrial applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mikell.P.Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
2. Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S.and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Gideon Halevi and Roland Weill, “Principles of Process Planning – A Logical Approach”
Chapman & Hall, London, 1995.
2. Kant Vajpayee S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall India.
3. Rao. P, N Tewari &T.K. Kundra, “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, 2000.
ME8074 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The student will be able to understand the sources of vibration and noise in automobiles
and make design modifications to reduce the vibration and noise and improve the life of the
components
UNIT I BASICS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction, classification of vibration: free and forced vibration, undamped and damped vibration,
linear and non linear vibration, response of damped and undamped systems under harmonic force,
analysis of single degree and two degree of freedom systems, torsional vibration, determination of
natural frequencies.
UNIT II BASICS OF NOISE 9
Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound pressure level, addition, subtraction and
averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise,
measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality
analysis.
UNIT III AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9
Noise Characteristics of engines, engine overall noise levels, assessment of combustion noise,
assessment of mechanical noise, engine radiated noise, intake and exhaust noise, engine
necessary contributed noise, transmission noise, aerodynamic noise, tire noise, brake noise.
UNIT IV CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9
Vibration isolation, tuned absorbers, un-tuned viscous dampers, damping treatments, application
dynamic forces generated by IC engines, engine isolation, crank shaft damping, modal analysis of
the mass elastic model shock absorbers.
UNIT V SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9
Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis,
palliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures,
sound energy absorption, sound transmission through barriers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Summarize the Basics of Vibration
CO2 Summarize the Basics of Noise
CO3 Explain the Sources of Automotive Noise
CO4 Discuss the Control techniques for vibration
CO5 Describe the sources and control of Noise
TEXT BOOK:
1. Singiresu S.Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Balakumar Balachandran and Edward B. Magrab, “Fundamentals of Vibrations”, 1st Editon,
Cengage Learning, 2009
2. Benson H. Tongue, “Principles of Vibrations”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University, 2007
3. Bernard Challen and Rodica Baranescu - “Diesel Engine Reference Book”, Second Edition,
SAE International, 1999.
4. David Bies and Colin Hansen, “Engineering Noise Control – Theory and Practice”,4th Edition,
E and FN Spon, Taylore & Francise e-Library, 2009
5. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 2009
EE8091 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C
VANCED I.C ENGINES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.
To educate on the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques.
To introduce various sensors and actuators
To introduce different materials used for MEMS
To educate on the applications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and
Mechanical engineering.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and Actuators –
Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes – New Materials – Review of
Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stress and strain analysis
– Flexural beam bending- Torsional deflection.
UNIT II SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Electrostatic sensors – Parallel plate capacitors – Applications – Interdigitated Finger
capacitor – Comb drive devices – Micro Grippers – Micro Motors - Thermal Sensing and Actuation
– Thermal expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal resistors – Thermal Bimorph - Applications –
Magnetic Actuators – Micromagnetic components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators-
Actuation using Shape Memory Alloys
UNIT III SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-II 9
Piezoresistive sensors – Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stress analysis of mechanical elements
– Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors – Piezoelectric sensors and actuators
– piezoelectric effects – piezoelectric materials – Applications to Inertia , Acoustic, Tactile and Flow
sensors.
UNIT IV MICROMACHINING 9
Silicon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotrophic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silicon – Plasma Etching
– Deep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants – Case studies
- Basic surface micro machining processes – Structural and Sacrificial Materials – Acceleration of
sacrificial Etch – Striction and Antistriction methods – LIGA Process - Assembly of 3D MEMS –
Foundry process.
UNIT V POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS 9
Polymers in MEMS– Polimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene
– Fluorocarbon - Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS –
Lenses and Mirrors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to understand and apply basic science, circuit theory, Electro-magnetic field theory
control theory and apply them to electrical engineering problems.
Ability to understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education Inc., 2006.
2. Stephen D Senturia, "Microsystem Design", Springer Publication, 2000.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2002.
REFERENCES:
1. James J.Allen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Press Publisher, 2010
2. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,2002
3. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000
4. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
2000.
5. Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and Application,”
Springer 2012.
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values to
instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational
Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) –
Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss the
ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
4. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity
and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‘ Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
116
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
117
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
1. PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:
Bachelor of Mechatronics Engineering curriculum is designed to prepare the graduates having
attitude and knowledge to
1. Develop innovative and sustainable products with multidisciplinary Engineering expertise.
2. Solve complex engineering problems by applying mechanical, electrical and computer
knowledge and engage in lifelong learning in their profession
3. Work or pursue higher education in multicultural, multilingual and multinational environment
with competent oral and written communication.
4. Lead and contribute in a team entrusted with professional, social and ethical responsibilities.
2. PROGRAMME OUTCOMES:
a. Will be able to apply the laws of science and mathematics to provide engineering solutions to
solve complex problems.
b. Will be able to identify and analyze complex problems by modeling with the help of literature
survey and validate the solution with experiments.
c. Will be able to design and develop Mechatronics systems by selecting and integrating,
sensors, appropriate materials, mechanics, thermal systems, manufacturing and automation
methods.
d. Will be able to collect, condition monitor and interpret data to provide engineering solutions.
e. Will be able to create applications, products as well as modernizing the existing systems by
using latest tools and technologies.
f. Will be able to develop solutions for local and global requirements by applying
engineering knowledge and professional ethics.
g. Will have professional values on environmental and energy consumption for sustainability.
h. Will be able to become a leader and contribute in a team with entrepreneurial qualities.
i. Will be able to interact effectively in both oral and written format.
j. Will continuously update their knowledge and skills to meet the ever changing global needs.
3. PEO / PO Mapping
PEO /
a b c d e f g h i j
PO
1
2
3
4
4. SEMESTER COURSE WISE PO MAPPING
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Communicative English
Engineering Mathematics I
SEMESTER 1
Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
Problem Solving and Python Programming
Engineering Graphics
Problem Solving and Python Programming Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
YEAR 1
Technical English
Engineering Mathematics II
Materials Science
SEMESTER 2
Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering
Environmental Science and Engineering
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Practices Laboratory
Basic Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering Laboratory
Course Title a b c d e f g h i j
Transforms and Partial Differential Equations
Strength of Materials for Mechanical Engineers
SEMESTER III
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Digital Electronics
Electrical Machines and Drives
Analog Devices and Circuits
Strength of Materials and Fluid Mechanics &
Machinery Laboratory
YEAR II
Electrical Machines and Drives Laboratory
Interpersonal Skills/Listening & Speaking
Statistics and Numerical Methods
Manufacturing Technology
SEMESTER IV
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Kinematics of Machinery
Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer
Microprocessor and Microcontrollers Laboratory
Manufacturing Technology Laboratory
Computer Aided Machine Drawing
Advanced Reading and Writing
Power Electronics
Sensors and Instrumentation
SEMESTER V
Dynamics of Machines
Control System Engineering
YEAR III
Open Elective - I
Power Electronics Laboratory
Sensors and Instrumentation Laboratory
Dynamics Laboratory
Professional Communication
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics
ME
ER
SE
ST
VI
Design of Mechatronics System
Design of Machine Elements
Industrial Automation
Principles of Management
Professional Elective – I
Applied Hydraulics and Pneumatics Laboratory
Industrial Automation Laboratory
Design and Fabrication Project
Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing
Robotics and Machine Vision System
SEMESTER VII
Embedded System Design
Open Elective - II
Professional Elective – II
YEAR IV
Professional Elective - III
Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing
Laboratory
Robotics Laboratory
Automotive Electronics
SEMESTE
R VIII
Professional Elective - IV
Professional Elective – V
Project Work
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and Python
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and Python ES 4
0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BS 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics - II BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. BE8253 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
6. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
PRACTICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES
and Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
TOTAL 30 20 2 8 25
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8353 Transforms and Partial BS 4 4 0 0 4
Differential Equations
2. CE8395 Strength of Materials for ES 3 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Engineers
3. CE8394 Fluid Mechanics and ES 4 4 0 0 4
Machinery
4. EC8392 Digital Electronics ES 3 3 0 0 3
5. MT8301 Electrical Machines and ES 3 3 0 0 3
Drives
6. MT8302 Analog Devices and Circuits PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CE8381 Strength of Materials and ES 4 0 0 4 2
Fluid Mechanics &
Machinery Laboratory
8. MT8311 Electrical Machines and ES 4 0 0 4 2
Drives Laboratory
9. HS8381 Interpersonal Skills/Listening
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
& Speaking
TOTAL 30 20 0 10 25
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA8452 Statistics and Numerical BS 4
4 0 0 4
Methods
2. ME8392 Manufacturing Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MT8491 Microprocessors and PC 3
3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
4. ME8492 Kinematics of Machinery PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. MT8401 Thermodynamics and Heat PC 3 3
3 0 0
Transfer
PRACTICALS
6. MT8411 Microprocessor and PC 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
7. ME8461 Manufacturing Technology PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. ME8381 Computer Aided Machine PC 4
0 0 4 2
Drawing
9. HS8461 Advanced Reading and EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Writing
TOTAL 30 16 0 14 23
SEMESTER V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EE8552 Power Electronics ES 3 3 0 0 3
2. MT8591 Sensors and Instrumentation PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. ME8594 Dynamics of Machines PC 4 4 0 0 4
4. EC8391 Control Systems Engineering ES 3 3 0 0 3
5. Open Elective - I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
6. MT8511 Power Electronics Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
7. MT8512 Sensors and Instrumentation
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. ME8481 Dynamics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
9. HS8581 Professional Communication EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 30 16 0 14 23
SEMESTER VI
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. ME8591 Applied Hydraulics and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Pneumatics
2. MT8601 Design of Mechatronics PC
3 3 0 0 3
System
3. ME8593 Design of Machine Elements PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. MT8602 Industrial Automation PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective – I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. MT8611 Applied Hydraulics and PC
4 0 0 4
Pneumatics Laboratory 2
8. MT8612 Industrial Automation PC
4 0 0 4
Laboratory 2
9. ME8682 Design and Fabrication Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 30 18 0 12 24
SEMESTER VII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. ME8691 Computer Aided Design and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Manufacturing
2. MT8701 Robotics and Machine Vision PC
3 3 0 0 3
System
3. MT8791 Embedded System Design PC 4 2 0 2 3
4. Open Elective - II OE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective - III PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. MT8711 Computer Aided Design and PC 4
0 0 4
Manufacturing Laboratory 2
8. MT8781 Robotics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 27 17 0 10 22
SEMESTER VIII
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MT8801 Automotive Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective - IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
4. MT8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
TOTAL 29 9 0 20 19
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS:186
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES (HS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1 HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2 HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3 GE8291 Environmental Science and HS 3
3 0 0 3
Engineering
4 MG8591 Principles of Management HS 3 3 0 0 3
BASIC SCIENCE (BS)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1 MA8151 Engineering Mathematics I BS 4 4 0 0 4
2 PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3 CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
Physics and Chemistry BS 4
4 BS8161 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5 MA8251 Engineering Mathematics II BS 4 4 0 0 4
6 PH8251 Materials Science BS 3 3 0 0 3
Transforms and Partial BS 4 4 0 0 4
7 MA8353
Differential Equations
Statistics and Numerical BS 4
8 MA8452 4 0 0 4
Methods
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and
ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
2. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
3. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES 4
Python Programming 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
4. BE8253 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES 3
and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3
Engineering
5. GE8292 Engineering Mechanics ES 5 3 2 0 4
6. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. BE8261 Basic Electrical, Electronics ES 4
and Instrumentation 0 0 4 2
Engineering Laboratory
8. CE8395 Strength of Materials for ES 3 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Engineers
9. CE8394 Fluid Mechanics and ES 4 4 0 0 4
Machinery
10. CE8395 Strength of Materials and ES 4 0 0 4 2
Fluid Mechanics &
Machinery Laboratory
11. EC8392 Digital Electronics ES 3 3 0 0 3
12. MT8301 Electrical Machines and ES 3 3 0 0 3
Drives
13. MT8311 Electrical Machines and ES 4 0 0 4 2
Drives Laboratory
14. EE8552 Power Electronics ES 3 3 0 0 3
15. EC8391 Control Systems ES
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
16. MT8511 Power Electronics
ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1 MT8302 Analog Devices and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Circuits
3 ME8392 Manufacturing Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
4 MT8491 Microprocessors and PC 3
3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers
5 ME8492 Kinematics of Machinery PC 3 3 0 0 3
6 MT8401 Thermodynamics and Heat PC 3
3 0 0 3
Transfer
7 MT8411 Microprocessor and PC 4
0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers Laboratory
8 ME8461 Manufacturing Technology PC 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9 ME8381 Computer Aided Machine PC 4
0 0 4 2
Drawing
10 MT8591 Sensors and PC
3 3 0 0
Instrumentation 3
11 ME8594 Dynamics of Machines PC 4 4 0 0 4
12 MT8511 Sensors and PC 4
0 0 4 2
Instrumentation Laboratory
13 ME8481 Dynamics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
14 ME8591 Applied Hydraulics and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Pneumatics
15 MT8601 Design of Mechatronics PC
3 3 0 0 3
System
16 ME8593 Design of Machine PC
3 3 0 0
Elements 3
17 MT8602 Industrial Automation PC 3 3 0 0 3
18 MT8611 Applied Hydraulics and PC
4 0 0 4 2
Pneumatics Laboratory
19 MT8612 Industrial Automation PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
20 ME8691 Computer Aided Design PC
3 3 0 0 3
and Manufacturing
21 MT8701 Robotics and Machine PC
3 3 0 0 3
Vision System
22 MT8791 Embedded System Design PC 4 2 0 2 3
25 MT8711 Computer Aided Design PC 4
and Manufacturing 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
26 MT8781 Robotics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
27 MT8801 Automotive Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)*
SEMESTER VI, ELECTIVE I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. IT8071 Digital Signal Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MT8001 Object Oriented PE
3 3 0 0 3
Programming in C++
3. ME8091 Automobile Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano PE
3 3 0 0 3
Science
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AN8091 Maintenance Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. ME8793 Process Planning and Cost PE
3 3 0 0 3
Estimation
3. MG8491 Operations Research PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. MT8002 Advanced Manufacturing PE
3 3 0 0 3
Technology
5. AE8751 Avionics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. MF8071 Additive Manufacturing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII, ELECTIVE III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. EC8093 Digital Image Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MT8003 Medical Mechatronics PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. MT8071 Virtual Instrumentation PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. IT8075 Software Project PE
3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. GE8072 Foundation skills in
Integrated Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
6. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVE IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. CS8691 Artificial Intelligence PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MG8091 Entrepreneurship PE
3 3 0 0 3
Development
3. RO8791 Modeling and Simulation PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. EE8091 Micro Electro Mechanical PE
3 3 0 0 3
Systems
SEMESTER VIII, ELECTIVE V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. CS8492 Database Management PE
3 3 0 0 3
Systems
2. MG8892 Marketing Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. IM8071 Product Design and PE
3 3 0 0 3
Development
4. GE8076 Professional Ethics in PE
3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
Interpersonal EEC
1. HS8381 2 0 0 2 1
Skills/Listening & Speaking
ME8682 Design and Fabrication EEC
2. 4 0 0 4 2
Project
3. HS8461 Reading and Writing Skills EEC 2 0 0 2 1
HS8581 Professional EEC 2
4. 0 0 2 1
Communication
5. MT8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10
SUMMARY
B.E. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
Subject Area Credits Per Semester Credits Percentage
Semester I II III IV V VI VII VIII Total %
Humanities and
1. Social Studies 4 7 3 14 8
(HS)
Basic Sciences
2. 12 7 4 4 27 15
(BS)
Engineering
3. 9 11 17 8 45 24
Sciences (ES)
Professional
4. 3 18 11 16 13 3 64 34
Core (PC)
Professional
5. 3 6 6 15 8
Electives (PE)
Open Electives
6. 3 3 6 3
(OE)
Project Work
7. 1 1 1 2 10 15 8
(PR/EEC)
TOTAL 25 25 25 23 23 24 22 19 186
Non-Credit/
8.
(Mandatory)
L T P C
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology students.
To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12
Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.
UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12
Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short narrative
descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic conversations.
Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave- Language development –
prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing meanings of words in context.
UNIT III GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure- use of
reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening to longer
texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources. Speaking- asking
about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development- degrees of comparison-
pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single word substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12
Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines Writing-
letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email- Listening- listening to
dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them. Speaking- speaking about
oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development- Tenses- simple present-simple past-
present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal
verbs
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing an
outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations- fixed
and semi-fixed expressions
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
• Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
• Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
• Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
• Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.
REFERENCES
1 Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge,2011.
2 Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
3 Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4 Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively : Developing Speaking Skillsfor
BusinessEnglish. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5 Dutt P. Kiranmai and RajeevanGeeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books: 2013
MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modeling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable calculus
and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and computer
science, among other disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12
Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two
variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined
multipliers.
UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals.
UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of parameters
– Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar coordinates, in
addition to change of order and change of variables.
Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions and
integration by parts.
Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent improper
integrals.
Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd Edition,
2014.
2. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6,
3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 -
7.4 and 7.8].
REFERENCES :
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II,
S. Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
4. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
L T P C
PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.
UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9
Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile strength
– torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and experiment -
bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform and non-uniform
bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in beams.
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance angle -
types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical fibers - fibre
optic sensors: pressure and displacement.
UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9
Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic strips
- thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal conductivity -
Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through compound media (series
and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators, ovens and solar
water heaters.
UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9
Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.
UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances -
coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures - crystal
imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of imperfections in
plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth techniques.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of materials
and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal growth
techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage Learning,
2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.
CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and water
treatment techniques.
To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single and
two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and fuel
cells.
UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9
Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external treatment
– Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse Osmosis.
UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9
Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from solutions
– adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption isotherm – contact
theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir - applications of adsorption on
pollution abatement.
Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic
promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis –
Menten equation.
UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9
Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.
UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum - manufacture
of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural
gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values- theoretical
calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive
range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission and
fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder reactor -
solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and supercapacitors: Types of
batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells
– H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for further
learning.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company LTD,
New Delhi, 2015
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) LTD,
New Delhi, 2015
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT, LTD, New
Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, 2015.
GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
To read and write simple Python programs.
To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
To define Python functions and call them.
To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9
Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments; modules
and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments; Illustrative
programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between
two points.
UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9
Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9
Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort, insertion sort, mergesort,
histogram.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9
Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
Decompose a Python program into functions.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated
for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python: An
Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
3. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.
4. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
5. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
6. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
2 0 4 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12
Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects
UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12
Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.
UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.
UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF
SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.
UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics
perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of objects.
project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
50th Edition, 2010.
2. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
4. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
5. N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
6. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1. IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will
be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Use functions for structuring Python programs.
Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS
1. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
2. Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
3. Exponentiation (power of a number)
4. Find the maximum of a list of numbers
5. Linear search and Binary search
6. Selection sort, Insertion sort
7. Merge sort
8. First n prime numbers
9. Multiply matrices
10. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
11. Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
12. Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
13. Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
Read and write data from/to files in Python.
TOTAL :60 PERIODS
BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in
optics, thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
3. (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
5. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
6. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
7. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
8. Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)
OBJECTIVES:
To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality parameters
through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by
viscometery.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
5. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
6. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
7. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
8. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
9. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1, 10-
Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
11. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
12. Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
13. Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
14. Determination of CMC.
15. Phase change in a solid.
16. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
OUTCOMES:
The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)
HS8251 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester Engineering and Technology students to:
• Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering and
technology texts.
• Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
• Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations , participate in group discussions.
• Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their areas
of specialisation.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12
Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts from
journals- newspapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary Language
Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12
Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking –
describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in a
text- paragraphing- Writing- interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-vocabularyused in
formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal passive voice, numerical
adjectives.
UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12
Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking – introduction
to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical, practice in speed
reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary Development- sequence
words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded sentences
UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of presentations-
Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job application – cover letter
–Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and issue based essays--
Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development-
clauses- if conditionals.
UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12
Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and survey-
Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course learners will be able to:
Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
Write reports and winning job applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology. Orient
Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges. Cengage
Learning, USA: 2007
Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for supplementary reading.
MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex Analysis
and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical problems
arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modeling the various laws of
physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be used for efficiently
solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigen values
and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12
Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w z c, cz, , z 2 - Bilinear transformation.
z
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12
Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series
– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real
integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12
Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and unit
impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and integrals –
Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic
functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of the following
topics and their applications:
Eigen values and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive
definite matrices and similar matrices.
Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s theorems
and their verification.
Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
10th Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India
Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
MATERIALS SCIENCE L T P C
(Common to courses offered in Faculty of Mechanical
PH8251
Engineering 3 0 0 3
Except B.E. Materials Science and Engineering )
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the essential principles of materials science for mechanical and related engineering
applications.
UNIT I PHASE DIAGRAMS 9
Solid solutions - Hume Rothery's rules – the phase rule - single component system - one-component
system of iron - binary phase diagrams - isomorphous systems - the tie-line rule - the lever rule -
application to isomorphous system - eutectic phase diagram - peritectic phase diagram - other
invariant reactions – free energy composition curves for binary systems - microstructural change
during cooling.
UNIT II FERROUS ALLOYS 9
The iron-carbon equilibrium diagram - phases, invariant reactions - microstructure of slowly cooled
steels - eutectoid steel, hypo and hypereutectoid steels - effect of alloying elements on the Fe-C
system - diffusion in solids - Fick's laws - phase transformations - T-T-T-diagram for eutectoid steel –
pearlitic, baintic and martensitic transformations - tempering of martensite – steels – stainless steels –
cast irons.
UNIT III MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9
Tensile test - plastic deformation mechanisms - slip and twinning - role of dislocations in slip -
strengthening methods - strain hardening - refinement of the grain size - solid solution strengthening -
precipitation hardening - creep resistance - creep curves - mechanisms of creep - creep-resistant
materials - fracture - the Griffith criterion - critical stress intensity factor and its determination - fatigue
failure - fatigue tests - methods of increasing fatigue life - hardness - Rockwell and Brinell hardness -
Knoop and Vickers microhardness.
UNIT IV MAGNETIC, DIELECTRIC AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Ferromagnetism – domain theory – types of energy – hysteresis – hard and soft magnetic materials –
ferrites - dielectric materials – types of polarization – Langevin-Debye equation – frequency effects on
polarization - dielectric breakdown – insulating materials – Ferroelectric materials - superconducting
materials and their properties.
UNIT V NEW MATERIALS 9
Ceramics – types and applications – composites: classification, role of matrix and reinforcement,
processing of fiber reinforced plastics – metallic glasses: types , glass forming ability of alloys, melt
spinning process, applications - shape memory alloys: phases, shape memory effect, pseudoelastic
effect, NiTi alloy, applications – nanomaterials: preparation (bottom up and top down approaches),
properties and applications – carbon nanotubes: types.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
the students will have knowledge on the various phase diagrams and their applications
the students will acquire knowledge on Fe-Fe3C phase diagram,various microstructures and
alloys
the students will get knowledge on mechanical properties of materials and their measurement
the students will gain knowledge on magnetic, dielectric and superconducting properties of
materials
the students will understand the basics of ceramics, composites and nanomaterials.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Balasubramaniam, R. “Callister's Materials Science and Engineering”. Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
2014.
2. Raghavan, V. “Physical Metallurgy: Principles and Practice”. PHI Learning, 2015.
3. Raghavan, V. “Materials Science and Engineering : A First course”. PHI Learning, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. Askeland, D. “Materials Science and Engineering”. Brooks/Cole, 2010.
2. Smith, W.F., Hashemi, J. & Prakash, R. “Materials Science and Engineering”.
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2014.
3. Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”.
Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
BE8253 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T PC
ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on
• Electric circuit laws, single and three phase circuits and wiring
• Working principles of Electrical Machines
• Working principle of Various electronic devices and measuring instruments
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9
Basic circuit components -, Ohms Law - Kirchoff’s Law – Instantaneous Power – Inductors -
Capacitors – Independent and Dependent Sources - steady state solution of DC circuits - Nodal
analysis, Mesh analysis- Thevinin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem, Maximum Power transfer theorem-
Linearity and Superposition Theorem.
UNIT II AC CIRCUITS 9
Introduction to AC circuits – waveforms and RMS value – power and power factor, single phase and
three-phase balanced circuits – Three phase loads - housing wiring, industrial wiring, materials of
wiring
UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9
Principles of operation and characteristics of ; DC machines, Transformers (single and three phase )
,Synchronous machines , three phase and single phase induction motors.
UNIT IV ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS 9
Types of Materials – Silicon & Germanium- N type and P type materials – PN Junction –Forward and
Reverse Bias –Semiconductor Diodes –Bipolar Junction Transistor – Characteristics – Field Effect
Transistors – Transistor Biasing –Introduction to operational Amplifier –Inverting Amplifier –Non
Inverting Amplifier –DAC – ADC .
UNIT V MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION 9
Introduction to transducers - Classification of Transducers: Resistive, Inductive, Capacitive,
Thermoelectric, piezoelectric, photoelectric, Hall effect and Mechanical - ,Classification of instruments
- Types of indicating Instruments - multimeters –Oscilloscopes- – three-phase power measurements–
instrument transformers (CT and PT )
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
Understand electric circuits and working principles of electrical machines
Understand the concepts of various electronic devices
Choose appropriate instruments for electrical measurement for a specific application
TEXT BOOKS
1. Leonard S Bobrow, “ Foundations of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2013
2. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, ”Electrical Machines “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”,
McGraw Hill Education(India) Private Limited, Third Reprint ,2016
3. Thereja .B.L., “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd.,
2008
REFERENCES
1. Del Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007
2. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology”, Elsevier, First Indian Edition, 2006
3. Allan S Moris, “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Elseveir, First Indian Edition, 2006
4. Rajendra Prasad, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006
5. A.E.Fitzgerald, David E Higginbotham and Arvin Grabel, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw
Hill Education(India) Private Limited, 2009
6. N K De, Dipu Sarkar, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Universities Press (India)Private Limited 2016
GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study the nature and facts about environment.
To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and waste
management.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive use,
productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local
levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat
loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India –
conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common
plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid waste
management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an individual in
prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone
and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.
UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral
resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources,
case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case
studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources,
use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation,
man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in conservation of
natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to
document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on the
following after completing the course.
Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India
PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.
GE8292 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To develop capacity to predict the effect of force and motion in the course of carrying out the
design functions of engineering.
UNIT I STATICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lami’s theorem, Parallelogram and
triangular Law of forces – Vectorial representation of forces – Vector operations of forces -additions,
subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces – rectangular components – Equilibrium of
a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces –
Principle of transmissibility .
UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 9+6
Free body diagram – Types of supports –Action and reaction forces –stable equilibrium – Moments
and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of
moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Single equivalent
force -Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions
UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 9+6
Centroids and centre of mass – Centroids of lines and areas - Rectangular, circular, triangular areas
by integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula –
Theorems of Pappus - Area moments of inertia of plane areas – Rectangular, circular, triangular
areas by integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula –
Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas –
Principal axes of inertia-Mass moment of inertia –mass moment of inertia for prismatic, cylindrical and
spherical solids from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia.
UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9+6
Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion -
Newton’s laws of motion – Work Energy Equation– Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic
bodies.
UNIT V FRICTION AND RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 9+6
Friction force – Laws of sliding friction – equilibrium analysis of simple systems with sliding friction –
wedge friction-. Rolling resistance -Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and
acceleration – General Plane motion of simple rigid bodies such as cylinder, disc/wheel and sphere.
TOTAL : 45+30=75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
illustrate the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments
analyse the rigid body in equilibrium
evaluate the properties of surfaces and solids
calculate dynamic forces exerted in rigid body
determine the friction and the effects by the laws of friction
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Beer, F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R., “Vector Mechanics for Engineers (In SI Units): Statics and
Dynamics”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi (2004).
2. Vela Murali, “Engineering Mechanics”, Oxford University Press (2010)
REFERENCES:
1. Bhavikatti, S.S and Rajashekarappa, K.G., “Engineering Mechanics”, New Age International (P)
Limited Publishers, 1998.
2. Hibbeller, R.C and Ashok Gupta, “Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics”, 11 th Edition,
Pearson Education 2010.
3. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao. G., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and
Dynamics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education 2006.
4. Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G., “ Engineering Mechanics- Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics- Volume
2”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,1993.
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G., “Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics”, 3rd
Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Buildings:
(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings. Safety
aspects.
Plumbing Works:
(a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers,
elbows in household fittings.
(b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
(c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
(d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with different
joining components.
(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
(a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
(b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18
Welding:
(a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
(b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
(a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
(b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:
(a) Forming & Bending:
(b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
(c) Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
(a) Study of centrifugal pump
(b) Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
(a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
(b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
(c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC
circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of
AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose
PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
use welding equipments to join the structures.
Carry out the basic machining operations
Make the models using sheet metal works
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and fittings
Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
Measure the electrical quantities
Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply
BE8261 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To train the students in performing various tests on electrical drives, sensors and circuits.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Load test on separately excited DC generator
2. Load test on Single phase Transformer
3. Load test on Induction motor
4. Verification of Circuit Laws
5. Verification of Circuit Theorems
6. Measurement of three phase power
7. Load test on DC shunt motor.
8. Diode based application circuits
9. Transistor based application circuits
10. Study of CRO and measurement of AC signals
11. Characteristics of LVDT
12. Calibration of Rotometer
13. RTD and Thermistor
Minimum of 10 Experiments to be carried out :-
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to determine the speed characteristic of different electrical machines
Ability to design simple circuits involving diodes and transistors
Ability to use operational amplifiers
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 D. C. Motor Generator Set 2
2 D.C. Shunt Motor 2
3 Single Phase Transformer 2
4 Single Phase Induction Motor 2
5 Ammeter A.C and D.C 20
6 Voltmeters A.C and D.C 20
7. Watt meters LPF and UPF 4
8. Resistors & Breadboards -
9. Cathode Ray Oscilloscopes 4
10. Dual Regulated power supplies 6
11. A.C. Signal Generators 4
12. Transistors (BJT, JFET) -
MA8353 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations that
model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.
UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of
second and higher order with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.
UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.
UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of
two dimensional equation of heat conduction.
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s
identity.
UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12
Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial fraction and residues) –
Initial and final value theorems - Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations – Solution
of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using
Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
REFERENCES :
1. Andrews, L.C and Shivamoggi, B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 9th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
3. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
4. James, G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2016.
6. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
CE8395 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS FOR L T P C
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of stress, strain, principal stresses and principal planes.
To study the concept of shearing force and bending moment due to external loads in
determinate beams and their effect on stresses.
To determine stresses and deformation in circular shafts and helical spring due to torsion.
To compute slopes and deflections in determinate beams by various methods.
To study the stresses and deformations induced in thin and thick shells.
UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9
Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of
simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic constants – Volumetric strains –Stresses
on inclined planes – principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stress.
UNIT II TRANSVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAM 9
Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams
– Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple
bending– bending stress distribution – Load carrying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched
beams – Shear stress distribution.
UNIT III TORSION 9
Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts–
Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical
springs, carriage springs.
UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of
slopes and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy – Maxwell’s reciprocal
theorems.
UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9
Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure circumferential and longitudinal stresses
and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal pressure –
Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to
Understand the concepts of stress and strain in simple and compound bars, the importance of
principal stresses and principal planes.
Understand the load transferring mechanism in beams and stress distribution due to shearing
force and bending moment.
Apply basic equation of simple torsion in designing of shafts and helical spring
Calculate the slope and deflection in beams using different methods.
Analyze and design thin and thick shells for the applied internal and external pressures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal, R.K., "Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 2016
2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
REFERENCES:
1. Egor. P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002
2. Ferdinand P. Been, Russell Johnson, J.r. and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing ‘co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, Low Price Edition, 2013
4. Subramanian R., "Strength of Materials", Oxford University Press, Oxford Higher Education
Series, 2010.
CE8394 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The properties of fluids and concept of control volume are studied
The applications of the conservation laws to flow through pipes are studied.
To understand the importance of dimensional analysis
To understand the importance of various types of flow in pumps.
To understand the importance of various types of flow in turbines
UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 12
Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mass density, specific weight, specific volume,
specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility, vapor pressure, surface tension and capillarity. Flow
characteristics – concept of control volume - application of continuity equation, energy equation
and momentum equation.
UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 12
Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli-Boundary
layer concepts – types of boundary layer thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation –friction factor-
Moody diagram- commercial pipes- minor losses – Flow through pipes in series and parallel.
UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12
Need for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similitude – types of similitude -
Dimensionless parameters- application of dimensionless parameters – Model analysis.
UNIT IV PUMPS 12
Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various efficiencies– velocity
components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps– working principle -
work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump- working principle – Rotary
pumps – classification.
UNIT V TURBINES 12
Classification of turbines – heads and efficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed flow
turbines. Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work done by water
on the runner – draft tube. Specific speed - unit quantities – performance curves for turbines –
governing of turbines.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Apply mathematical knowledge to predict the properties and characteristics of a fluid.
Can analyse and calculate major and minor losses associated with pipe flow in piping
networks.
Can mathematically predict the nature of physical quantities
Can critically analyse the performance of pumps
Can critically analyse the performance of turbines.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House, New Delhi
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Graebel. W.P, "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 2011
2. Kumar K. L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi
2016
3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, 2011.
4. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co. 2010
EC8392 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To present the Digital fundamentals, Boolean algebra and its applications in digital systems
To familiarize with the design of various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
To introduce the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous
sequential circuits
To explain the various semiconductor memories and related technology
To introduce the electronic circuits involved in the making of logic gates
UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 9
Number Systems – Decimal, Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal, 1‘s and 2‘s complements, Codes –
Binary, BCD, Excess 3, Gray, Alphanumeric codes, Boolean theorems, Logic gates, Universal
gates, Sum of products and product of sums, Minterms and Maxterms, Karnaugh map
Minimization and Quine-McCluskey method of minimization.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel Adder – Carry look
ahead Adder, BCD Adder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Magnitude Comparator, Decoder,
Encoder, Priority Encoder.
UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D, Master/Slave FF – operation and excitation tables, Triggering of FF,
Analysis and design of clocked sequential circuits – Design - Moore/Mealy models, state
minimization, state assignment, circuit implementation – Design of Counters- Ripple Counters,
Ring Counters, Shift registers, Universal Shift Register.
UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9
Stable and Unstable states, output specifications, cycles and races, state reduction, race free
assignments, Hazards, Essential Hazards, Pulse mode sequential circuits, Design of Hazard
free circuits.
UNIT V MEMORY DEVICES AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 9
Basic memory structure – ROM -PROM – EPROM – EEPROM –EAPROM, RAM – Static and
dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) -
Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation
of combinational logic circuits using PLA, PAL.
Digital integrated circuits: Logic levels, propagation delay, power dissipation, fan-out and fan-in,
noise margin, logic families and their characteristics-RTL, TTL, ECL, CMOS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course:
Use digital electronics in the present contemporary world
Design various combinational digital circuits using logic gates
Do the analysis and design procedures for synchronous and asynchronous sequential
circuits
Use the semiconductor memories and related technology
Use electronic circuits involved in the design of logic gates
TEXT BOOK:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2014.
REFERENCES
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, 2013.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education Inc, 2011
3. S.Salivahanan and S.Arivazhagan“Digital Electronics”, Ist Edition, Vikas Publishing
House pvt Ltd, 2012.
4. Anil K.Maini “Digital Electronics”, Wiley, 2014.
5. A.Anand Kumar “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 4th Edition, PHI Learning Private
Limited, 2016.
6. Soumitra Kumar Mandal “ Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2016.
MT8301 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the working principle and performance characteristics of DC Generator and DC
Motor.
To understand the working principle of induction motor and synchronous machines.
To provide knowledge in the area of special electrical machines and drives.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND TRANSFORMERS 6
D.C. Voltage, current, power – Ohms law – series, parallel circuits – Kirchhoff’s laws – mesh analysis –
A.C. voltage – sinusoidal waves, – power factor – complex power – basic operation of transformers –
simple problems.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MOTORS 12
Constructional details, principle of operation and performance characteristics of D.C. motors, single
phase induction motor, three phase induction motor, synchronous motors, universal motors, stepper
motors and reluctance motor.
UNIT III SPEED CONTROL AND STARTING 9
Speed control of D.C. motors – three phase induction motors – starting methods of D.C. motor and
three phase induction motor – electrical braking – simple problems.
UNIT IV ELECTRICAL DRIVES 9
Type of Electrical Drives – Selection & factors influencing the selection – heating and cooling curves –
loading condition and classes of duty – determination of power rating – simple problems.
UNIT V SOLID STATE DRIVES (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 9
Advantages of solid state drives – D.C. motor control using rectifiers and choppers – control of induction
motor by V, V/f and slip power recovery scheme using inverters and A.C. power regulators.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1: Get the basic knowledge about the Electric circuits and transformers.
CO2: Understand the various types of electrical motors.
CO3: Know about speed control and starting methods DC and induction motors
CO4: Understand about various types of electrical drives
CO5: Get exposure with solid state drives
TEXT BOOKS:
1. De. N.K., & Sen. P.K “Electric Drives”, Prentice Hall India Pvt Limited 2002.
2. Vedam Subramaniam. "Electric Drives", Tata McGraw Hill , New Delhi , 2007.
3. Vukosavic, "Digital Control of Electrical Drives", Springer, Indian Reprint, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhattacharya S.K. & Brinjinder Singh , "Control of Electrical Machines", New Age International
Publishers, 2002.
2. Crowder, "Electric Drives and Electromechanical Systems", Elsevier, Indian Reprint,2009.
3. Dubey.G.K. “Fundamental Electrical Drives” 2nd Edition, Narosa Publications, 2002
4. Metha. V.K. & Rohit Metha, "Principle of Electrical Engineering", S.Chand & Co .2006.
MT8302 ANALOG DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic principle of switching devices
To study various types of amplifiers.
To understand the various functionalities of ICs and Waveform generators.
To study the characteristics of various electronic devices.
UNIT I ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9
Switching Devices: SCR, TRIAC, JFET, MOSFET - Rectifiers and Filters - Regulated Power Supply –
Switching Power Supplies, Thermal Considerations - Feedback and power amplifiers - Oscillators:
Colpitts oscillator, Hartley oscillator and Wien bridge oscillator
UNIT II OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS AND APPLICATIONS 9
Operational amplifiers – Principles, Specifications, characteristics and ,applications-. Arithmetic
Operations, Integrator, Differentiator, Comparator, Schmitt Trigger, Instrumentation Amplifier, A/D & D/A
converters
UNIT III WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND ICs 9
Triangular, Saw tooth and Sine wave generators - Multivibrators - Function generator ICs – Timer ICs –
Voltage regulator ICs: fixed, Adjustable and General purpose - V/F and F/V convertors – Optocouplers
UNIT IV TEST AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 9
Measurement of voltage, current ,frequency and power using Multi meters , oscilloscopes, recorders,
data loggers, signal sources, counters, analyzers and printers.
UNIT V DISPLAY DEVICES 9
Introduction, Photo Luminescence, Cathode Luminescence, Electro Luminescence, Injection
Luminescence, LED, Plasma Display, Liquid Crystal Displays, Numeric Displays, Photo transistor, Solar
cell, CCD
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Apply the various switching devices in electronic circuits.
CO2: Work with various applications of amplifiers
CO3: Design various circuits using ICs.
CO4: Test and measure different parameters available in electronic circuits.
CO5: Explain the principles of various display devices.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, Fourth Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Inc.
2012.
2. Roy Chowdhury D. and Jain Shail B., Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age Int. Pub., 5th edition,
2018.
3. Salivahanan S., Suresh kumar N. and Vallavaraj A., Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata Mc
Graw Hill publishing company, New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2012
REFERENCES
1. Albert Malvino and Bates J., Electronic Principles, Tata McGraw- Hill Pub. Company Ltd.,
7th edition, 2013.
2. Millman J., Halkias C.C. and Satyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2010.
3. Thomas L. Floyd, Electronic Devices, Pearson Education Asia, 9th edition, 2010.
CE8381 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND FLUID MECHANICS L T P C
& MACHINERY LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To study the mechanical properties of materials when subjected to different types of
loading.
To verify the principles studied in Fluid Mechanics theory by performing experiments in
lab.
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Tension test on a mild steel rod
2. Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminium rods
3. Torsion test on mild steel rod
4. Impact test on metal specimen
5. Hardness test on metals - Brinnell and Rockwell Hardness Number
6. Deflection test on beams
7. Compression test on helical springs
8. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge
9. Effect of hardening- Improvement in hardness and impact resistance of steels.
10. Tempering- Improvement Mechanical properties Comparison
(i) Unhardened specimen
(ii) Quenched Specimen and
(iii) Quenched and tempered specimen.
11. Microscopic Examination of
(i) Hardened samples and
(ii) Hardened and tempered samples.
OUTCOME:
Ability to perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on Solid
materials.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Universal Tensile Testing machine with double 1 shear attachment – 1
40 Ton Capacity
2 Torsion Testing Machine (60 NM Capacity) 1
3 Impact Testing Machine (300 J Capacity) 1
4 Brinell Hardness Testing Machine 1
5 Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine 1
6 Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads (2500 N) 1
7 Metallurgical Microscopes 3
8 Muffle Furnace (800 C) 1
FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINES LABORATORY 30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter.
2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter.
3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter.
4. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.
5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/
submergible pump
6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump.
7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump.
8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.
9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine.
10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
Perform Tension, Torsion, Hardness, Compression, and Deformation test on Solid materials.
Use the measurement equipments for flow measurement.
Perform test on different fluid machinery.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NO. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Orifice meter setup 1
2 Venturi meter setup 1
3 Rotameter setup 1
4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1
5 Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 1
6 Reciprocating pump setup 1
7 Gear pump setup 1
8 Pelton wheel setup 1
9 Francis turbine setup 1
10 Kaplan turbine setup 1
MT8311 ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the basic concepts of electrical circuits and associated theorems.
To understand the fundamentals of DC shunt motors and induction motors.
To understand the load test and performance characteristics of DC shunt motor, stepper motor
and induction motors.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Load test on D.C. shunt motor.
2. Speed control of D.C. shunt motor.
3. Swinburne’s test.
4. Load test on three phase induction motor.
5. No load and blocked rotor tests on three – phase induction motor.
6. Load test on single phase induction motor.
7. No load and blocked rotor tests on single phase induction motor.
8. Load test on Synchronous motors.
9. Performance characteristics of Stepper motor.
10. Performance characteristics of single phase transformer.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Test and assess the performances of the DC motors and single phase AC motor for varying load.
CO2: Control the speed of AC and DC motor.
CO3: Analyze and present the findings of experimental observations in both written and oral format.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty
NO
1 Shunt motor 5HP 3
2 Single phase Induction Motor 2HP 2
3 Three phase induction Motor 5HP 2
4 Single phase transformer 2KVA 1
5 Three phase auto transformer 2
6 Single phase auto transformer 2
7 3 point starter 3
8 DPST, TPST Each 2
9 DC source 300v, 100A 1
10 Ammeter(0-5A),(0-10A)MC Each 2
11 Ammeter(0-5A),(0-10A)MI Each 2
12 Voltmeter(0-300V) MC 3
13 Voltmeter(0-150V),(0-300V),(0-600V)MI Each 2
14 Wattmeter 150/300V, 5/10A UPF 2
15 Wattmeter 300/600V,5/10A UPF 2
16 Wattmeter 150/300V,5/10A LPF 2
17 Wattmeter 300/600V,5/10A LPF 2
18 Stepper motor 5Kg 1
19 Synchronous motor 5KW 1
20 Rheostat 360 ohm/1.2A 3
21 Tachometer 5
22 Rheostat 50 ohm/5A 3
HS8381 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS/LISTENING & SPEAKING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: The Course will enable learners to:
• Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking of
academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
• Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to engage in
specific academic speaking activities.
• improve general and academic listening skills
• Make effective presentations.
UNIT I
Listening as a key skill- its importance- speaking - give personal information - ask for personal
information - express ability - enquire about ability - ask for clarification Improving pronunciation -
pronunciation basics taking lecture notes - preparing to listen to a lecture - articulate a complete idea
as opposed to producing fragmented utterances.
UNIT II
Listen to a process information- give information, as part of a simple explanation - conversation
starters: small talk - stressing syllables and speaking clearly - intonation patterns - compare and
contrast information and ideas from multiple sources- converse with reasonable accuracy over a wide
range of everyday topics.
UNIT III
Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors influence fluency, deliver a five-minute informal talk
- greet - respond to greetings - describe health and symptoms - invite and offer - accept - decline -
take leave - listen for and follow the gist- listen for detail
UNIT IV
Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback - participating in a group discussion -
summarizing academic readings and lectures conversational speech listening to and participating in
conversations - persuade.
UNIT V
Formal and informal talk - listen to follow and respond to explanations, directions and instructions in
academic and business contexts - strategies for presentations and interactive communication -
group/pair presentations - negotiate disagreement in group work.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Listen and respond appropriately.
• Participate in group discussions
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University Press,
Oxford: 2011.
2. Richards,C. Jack. & David Bholke. Speak Now Level 3. Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2010
REFERENCES
1. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.
2. Hughes, Glyn and Josephine Moate. Practical English Classroom. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014.
3. Vargo, Mari. Speak Now Level 4. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2013.
4. Richards C. Jack. Person to Person (Starter). Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2006.
5. Ladousse, Gillian Porter. Role Play. Oxford University Press: Oxford, 2014
MA8452 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and numerical
methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in
engineering and technology.
To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays
an important role in real life problems.
To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering and
technology disciplines.
To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
.
UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12
Sampling distributions - Estimation of parameters - Statistical hypothesis - Large sample tests based
on Normal distribution for single mean and difference of means -Tests based on t, Chi-square and F
distributions for mean, variance and proportion - Contingency table (test for independent) - Goodness
of fit.
UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12
One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 12
Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method - Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION 12
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.
UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Single step methods : Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods : Milne’s and Adams
- Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal. B.S. and Grewal. J.S., “Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science ", 10 th Edition,
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCES :
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2006.
4. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and Statistics ",
Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
5. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", 8th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2007.
ME8392 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The automobile components such as piston, connecting rod, crankshaft, engine block, front axle,
frame, body etc., are manufactured by various types of production processes involving casting,
welding, machining, metal forming, power metallurgy etc.
UNIT I CASTING 8
Casting types, procedure to make sand mould, types of core making, moulding tools, machine
moulding, special moulding processes – CO2 moulding; shell moulding, investment mounding,
permanent mould casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting, continuous casting, casting
defects.
UNIT II WELDING 8
Classification of welding processes. Principles of Oxy-acetylene gas welding. A.C metal arc welding,
resistance welding, submerged arc welding, tungsten inert gas welding, metal inert gas welding,
plasma arc welding, thermit welding, electron beam welding, laser beam welding, defects in welding,
soldering and brazing.
UNIT III MACHINING 13
General principles (with schematic diagrams only) of working and commonly performed operations in
the following machines: Lathe, Shaper, Planer, Horizontal milling machine, Universal drilling machine,
Cylindrical grinding machine, Capstan and Turret lathe. Basics of CNC machines. General principles
and applications of the following processes: Abrasive jet machining, Ultrasonic machining, Electric
discharge machining, Electro chemical machining, Plasma arc machining, Electron beam machining
and Laser beam machining.
UNIT IV FORMING AND SHAPING OF PLASTICS 7
Types of plastics - Characteristics of the forming and shaping processes – Moulding of
Thermoplastics – Working principles and typical applications of - Injection moulding – Plunger and
screw machines – Blow moulding – Rotational moulding – Film blowing – Extrusion - Typical industrial
applications – Thermoforming – Processing of Thermosets – Working principles and typical
applications - Compression moulding – Transfer moulding – Bonding of Thermoplastics – Fusion and
solvent methods – Induction and Ultrasonic methods
UNIT V METAL FORMING AND POWDER METALLURGY 9
Principles and applications of the following processes: Forging, Rolling, Extrusion, Wire drawing and
Spinning, Powder metallurgy – Principal steps involved advantages, disadvantages and limitations of
powder metallurgy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The Students can able to use different manufacturing process and use this in industry for
component production
TEXT BOOKS
1. Hajra Choudhury, “Elements of Workshop Technology”, Vol. I and II, Media Promoters and
Publishers Pvt., Ltd., Mumbai, 2005.
2. Nagendra Parashar B.S. and Mittal R.K., “Elements of Manufacturing Processes”, Prentice-Hall
of India Private Limited, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Adithan. M and Gupta. A.B., “Manufacturing Technology”, New Age, 2006.
2. “H.M.T. Production Technology – Handbook”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3. Jain. R.K. and S.C. Gupta, “Production Technology”, Khanna Publishers. 16th Edition,2001.
4. Roy. A. Linberg, “Process and Materials of Manufacture”, PHI, 2000.
5. Serope Kalpajian, Steven R.Schmid, “Manufacturing Processes for Engineering Materials”,
Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, Inc. 2007.
MT8491 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Through the use of assembly language, by the end of the course students will become thoroughly
familiar with the elements of microprocessor and microcontroller software and hardware. They will
be able to:
Understand fundamental operating concepts behind microprocessors and microcontrollers.
Emphasis on the hardware features of Microprocessor 8085, 8086 and Microcontroller 8051
with their functions
Understand commonly used peripheral / interfacing
UNIT I 8085 PROCESSOR 9
Hardware Architecture, pin diagram – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING OF 8085 PROCESSOR 9
Instruction - format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data
manipulation& control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing – Look
up table - Subroutine instructions - stack.
UNIT III 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9
Hardware Architecture, pin diagram – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Serial Communication – Interrupts-Introduction
to Arduino.
UNIT IV PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 9
Introduction on Architecture, configuration and interfacing, with ICs: 8255 , 8259 , 8254,8237,8251,
8279 ,- A/D and D/A converters.
UNIT V MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9
Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control Algorithms& I/O instructions – Simple programming exercises-
key board and display interface – Closed loop control of servo motor- stepper motor control –
Washing Machine Control.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Distinguish the feature of the 8085 microprocessor, Hardware Architecture and PIN diagram.
CO2: Demonstrate programming proficiency using the various addressing modes and data transfer
instructions of 8085 microprocessor
CO3: Acquaint the knowledge on architecture and programming of Microcontroller 8051.
CO4: Illustrate the interrupts handling and demonstrate peripherals applications in different IC and
Know about A/D and D/A converters.
CO5:Apply the programming concepts to interface the hardware units with microprocessor and
Microcontroller
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller and
Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
3 R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with 8085, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013
REFERENCES:
1. N.Senthil Kumar, M.Saravanan, S.Jeevananthan, ‘Microprocessors and Microcontrollers’,
Oxford, 2013.
2. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, Microprocessor & Microcontroller Architecture, Programming &
Interfacing using 8085,8086,8051,McGraw Hill Edu,2013.
3. Valder – Perez, “Microcontroller – Fundamentals and Applications with Pic,”
Yeesdee Publishers, Tayler & Francis, 2013.
ME8492 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic components and layout of linkages in the assembly of a system
machine.
To understand the principles in analyzing the assembly with respect to the displacement,
velocity, and acceleration at any point in a link of a mechanism.
To understand the motion resulting from a specified set of linkages, design few linkage
mechanisms and cam mechanisms for specified output motions.
To understand the basic concepts of toothed gearing and kinematics of gear trains and the
effects of friction in motion transmission and in machine components.
UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS 9
Classification of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitions – Degree of freedom,
Mobility – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler’s criterion – Grashof’s Law – Kinematic inversions of four-bar
chain and slider crank chains – Limit positions – Mechanical advantage – Transmission Angle –
Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line generators,
Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.
UNIT II KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 9
Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method–
Velocity and acceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic
analysis of simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Acceleration –
Introduction to linkage synthesis problem.
UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 9
Classification of cams and followers – Terminology and definitions – Displacement diagrams –
Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of follower motions
– Layout of plate cam profiles – Specified contour cams – Circular arc and tangent cams – Pressure
angle and undercutting – sizing of cams.
UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9
Law of toothed gearing – Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles –Spur Gear terminology and
definitions –Gear tooth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercutting. Helical, Bevel,
Worm, Rack and Pinion gears [Basics only]. Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis
gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains.
UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 9
Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –
Bearings and lubrication – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – Friction in brakes- Band and
Block brakes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Discuss the basics of mechanism
CO2 Calculate velocity and acceleration in simple mechanisms
CO3 Develop CAM profiles
CO4 Solve problems on gears and gear trains
CO5 Examine friction in machine elements
TEXT BOOKS:
1. F.B. Sayyad, “Kinematics of Machinery”, MacMillan Publishers Pvt Ltd., Tech-max Educational
resources, 2011.
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
3. Uicker,
th J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
4 Edition, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Allen S. Hall Jr., “Kinematics and Linkage Design”, Prentice Hall, 1961
2. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2014
3. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", 3 r d Edition Affiliated East-
West Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
4. John Hannah and Stephens R.C., "Mechanics of Machines", Viva Low-Prices Student Edition,
1999.
5. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", 3rd Edition, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2005.
MT8401 THERMODYNAMICS AND HEAT TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To acquire knowledge on laws of thermodynamics, types of I.C engines, refrigeration techniques, air
conditioning system and heat transfer concepts, principles and mechanism for physical systems.
UNIT I FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 8
Thermodynamics – microscopic and macroscopic point of view – systems, properties, process, path,
cycle. Units – pressure, temperature – Zeroth law. First law – application to closed and open systems,
internal energy, specific heat capacities CV and CP – enthalpy
UNIT II SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 8
Second Law of thermodynamics – statements – equivalents of Kelvin Plank and Clausius statements.
Reversibility – Irreversibility, reversible cycle – Carnot cycle and theorem.
UNIT III INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES(Qualitative Treatment Only) 12
Classification of IC engine - IC engine components and functions. Valve timing diagram and port timing
diagram - Comparison of two stroke and four stroke engines, Comparison of petrol & diesel engine,
Fuel supply systems, total fuel consumption, specific fuel consumption, mechanical efficiency, BHP,
IHP, FP - Ignition Systems, Lubrication system, Cooling system, MPFI, DTSI, CRDI.
UNIT IV REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING 8
Principles of refrigeration, refrigerator& heat pump cycle, refrigerants, refrigerant properties,
refrigerant selection, vapour compression refrigeration cycle, vapour absorption cycle, dry bulb
temperature, wet bulb temperature, relative humidity, comfort air-conditioning, Psychometric chart,
humidification, de-humidification, air coolers, cooling towers.
UNIT V HEAT TRANSFER (Qualitative Treatment Only) 9
Heat transfer through conduction and convection, Fourier’s law of conduction - Problems on one
dimensional heat conduction through plain walls, composite walls, cylinder walls, spheres. Extended
surfaces: Fins. Problems on heat transfer through rectangular fin, triangular fin, circumferential fin, pin
fin, fin efficiency, fin effectiveness. Heat transfer through radiation, Stefan Boltzman Law, black body,
grey body, shape factor. Types of Heat Exchangers.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to
CO1: Understand the basic concepts associated first law of thermodynamics
CO2: Understand basic concepts associated with second law of thermodynamics
CO3: Describing the working of I.C engines and to determine its performance parameters
CO4: Basic principles of refrigeration, air conditioning and psychometric chart
CO5: Distinguishing the various modes of heat transfer and its applications
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nag P. K, ‘Engineering Thermodynamics’ Tata McGraw-Hill, 6thEdition, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Holman.J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 4th Edition. McGraw-Hill, 1988.
2. Kothandaraman. C.P., Domkundwar. S. & Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in Thermal
Engineering” Dhanpatrai & Co (P) Ltd, Fifth edition, Reprint 2004.
3. Kothandaraman. C.P., “Heat and Mass Transfer”, New Age International (P) Publishers,
4thEdition Reprint 2015.
4. Michael A. Boles, Yunus A. Cengel, YunusCengel, “Thermodynamics”, 8th Edition, Mc Graw-Hill
India, 2017.
MT8411 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To focus on the implementation of arithmetic operations using microprocessors and
microcontroller.
To simulate assembly language programs.
To implement various on-chip and off-chip interfacing and algorithms
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Simple arithmetic operations: addition / subtraction / multiplication / division.
2. Programming with control instructions
(i) Ascending / Descending order, Maximum / Minimum of numbers
(ii) Programs using Rotate instructions.
(iii) Hex / ASCII / BCD code conversions
3. Interface Experiments: with 8085
(i) A/D Interfacing. & D/A Interfacing.
4. Traffic light controller
5. I/O Port / Serial communication
6. Programming Practices with Simulators/Emulators/open source
7. Read a key interface display
8. Demonstration of basic instructions with 8051 Micro controller execution, including:
i) Conditional jumps, looping
ii) Calling subroutines
9. Programming I/O Port 8051
i) study on interface with A/D & D/A
ii) study on interface with DC & AC motor
10. Mini project development with processors
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Solve the arithmetic operations using microcontrollers and various on-chip and off-chip interfacing
and algorithms.
CO2: Design the digital and analog hardware interface for microcontroller-based systems
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.NO NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty
1 8085 Microprocessor Trainer with Power Supply 15
2 8051 Micro Controller Trainer Kit with power supply 15
3 8255 Interface board 5
4 8251 Interface board 5
5 8259 Interface board 5
6 8279 Keyboard / Display Interface board 5
7 8254 timer counter 5
8 ADC and DAC card 5
19 AC & DC motor with Controller 5
10 Traffic Light Control System 5
ME8461 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
Demonstration and study of the VARIOUS machines. The Main emphasis will be on a complete
understanding of the machine capabilities and processes.
UNIT I LATHE PRACTICE
1. Plain Turning
2. Taper Turning
3. Thread Cutting
Estimation of machining time for the above turning processes.
UNIT II DRILLING PRACTICE
1. Drilling
2. Tapping
3. Reaming.
UNIT III MILLING
1. Surface Milling.
2. Gear Cutting.
3. Contour Milling.
UNIT IV PLANNING AND SHAPING
1. Cutting Key Ways.
2. Dovetail machining.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to use different machine tools to manufacturing gears.
Ability to use different machine tools for finishing operations
Ability to manufacture tools using cutter grinder
Develop CNC part programming
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty
1 Lathe 15 Nos.
2 Drilling Machine 1 No
3 Milling Machine 2 Nos.
4 Planning Machine 1 No
5 Shaping Machine 2 Nos.
ME8381 COMPUTER AIDED MACHINE DRAWING L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand and interpret drawings of machine components
To prepare assembly drawings both manually and using standard CAD packages
To familiarize the students with Indian Standards on drawing practices and standard
components
To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modeling software systems.
UNIT I DRAWING STANDARDS & FITS AND TOLERANCES 12
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints,
keys, fasteners – Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts,
nuts, screws, keys etc. - Limits, Fits – Tolerancing of individual dimensions – Specification of Fits –
Preparation of production drawings and reading of part and assembly drawings, basic principles of
geometric dimensioning & tolerancing.
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO 2D DRAFTING 16
Drawing, Editing, Dimensioning, Layering, Hatching, Block, Array, Detailing, Detailed
drawing.
Bearings - Bush bearing, Plummer block
Valves – Safety and non-return valves.
UNIT III 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING AND ASSEMBLY 32
Sketcher - Datum planes – Protrusion – Holes - Part modeling – Extrusion – Revolve – Sweep –
Loft – Blend – Fillet - Pattern – Chamfer - Round - Mirror – Section - Assembly
Couplings – Flange, Universal, Oldham’s, Muff, Gear couplings
Joints – Knuckle, Gib & cotter, strap, sleeve & cotter joints
Engine parts – Piston, connecting rod, cross-head (vertical and horizontal), stuffing box,
multi-plate clutch
Miscellaneous machine components – Screw jack, machine vice, tail stock, chuck, vane
and gear pump
TOTAL:60 PERIODS
Note: 25% of assembly drawings must be done manually and remaining 75% of assembly drawings
must be done by using any CAD software. The above tasks can be performed manually and using
standard commercial 2D / 3D CAD software
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Follow the drawing standards, Fits and Tolerances
CO2 Re-create part drawings, sectional views and assembly drawings as per standards
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Machine Drawing”, 22nd Edition, Subhas Stores Books Corner,
Bangalore, 2013
REFERENCES:
1. Junnarkar, N.D., “Machine Drawing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004
2. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, 48th Edition, Charotar Publishers,2013
3. N. Siddeshwar, P. Kanniah, V.V.S. Sastri, ”Machine Drawing” , published by Tata Mc
GrawHill,2006
4. S. Trymbaka Murthy, “A Text Book of Computer Aided Machine Drawing”, CBS Publishers, New
Delhi, 2007
HS8461 ADVANCED READING AND WRITING L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
• Strengthen the reading skills of students of engineering.
• Enhance their writing skills with specific reference to technical writing.
• Develop students’ critical thinking skills.
• Provide more opportunities to develop their project and proposal writing skills.
UNIT I
Reading - Strategies for effective reading-Use glosses and footnotes to aid reading comprehension-
Read and recognize different text types-Predicting content using photos and title Writing-Plan before
writing- Develop a paragraph: topic sentence, supporting sentences, concluding sentence –Write a
descriptive paragraph
UNIT II
Reading-Read for details-Use of graphic organizers to review and aid comprehension Writing-State
reasons and examples to support ideas in writing- Write a paragraph with reasons and examples-
Write an opinion paragraph
UNIT III
Reading- Understanding pronoun reference and use of connectors in a passage- speed reading
techniques-Writing- Elements of a good essay-Types of essays- descriptive-narrative- issue-based-
argumentative-analytical.
UNIT IV
Reading- Genre and Organization of Ideas- Writing- Email writing- resumes – Job application- project
writing-writing convincing proposals.
UNIT V
Reading- Critical reading and thinking- understanding how the text positions the reader- identify
Writing- Statement of Purpose- letter of recommendation- Vision statement
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Write different types of essays.
• Write winning job applications.
• Read and evaluate texts critically.
• Display critical thinking in various professional contexts.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gramer F. Margot and Colin S. Ward Reading and Writing (Level 3) Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2011
2. Debra Daise, CharlNorloff, and Paul Carne Reading and Writing (Level 4) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2011
REFERENCES
1. Davis, Jason and Rhonda LIss.Effective Academic Writing (Level 3) Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2006
2. E. Suresh Kumar and et al. Enriching Speaking and Writing Skills. Second Edition. Orient Black
swan: Hyderabad, 2012
3. Withrow, Jeans and et al. Inspired to Write. Readings and Tasks to develop writing skills.
Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, 2004
4. Goatly, Andrew. Critical Reading and Writing. Routledge: United States of America, 2000
5. Petelin, Roslyn and Marsh Durham. The Professional Writing Guide: Knowing Well and
Knowing Why. Business & Professional Publishing: Australia, 2004
EE8552 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Different types of power semiconductor devices and their switching
Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
Operation, switching techniques and basics topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand
harmonic reduction methods.
Operation of AC voltage controller and various configurations.
UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Study of switching devices, SCR, TRIAC, GTO, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT and IGCT- Static
characteristics: SCR, MOSFET and IGBT - Triggering and commutation circuit for SCR- Introduction
to Driver and snubber circuits.
UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9
2-pulse, 3-pulse and 6-pulseconverters– performance parameters –Effect of source inductance––
Firing Schemes for converter–Dual converters, Applications-light dimmer, Excitation system, Solar
PV systems.
UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTERS 9
Step-down and step-up chopper-control strategy– Introduction to types of choppers-A, B, C, D and E
-Switched mode regulators- Buck, Boost, Buck- Boost regulator, Introduction to Resonant
Converters, Applications-Battery operated vehicles.
UNIT IV INVERTERS 9
0 0
Single phase and three phase voltage source inverters (both120 mode and 180 mode)–Voltage&
harmonic control--PWM techniques: Multiple PWM, Sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM –
Introduction to space vector modulation –Current source inverter, Applications-Induction heating,
UPS.
UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase and Three phase AC voltage controllers–Control strategy- Power Factor Control –
Multistage sequence control -single phase and three phase cyclo converters –Introduction to
Matrix converters, Applications –welding .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to analyse AC-AC and DC-DC and DC-AC converters.
Ability to choose the converters for real time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.H. Rashid, ‘Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications’, Pearson Education,
Third Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
2. P.S.Bimbra “Power Electronics” Khanna Publishers, third Edition, 2003.
3. Ashfaq Ahmed ‘Power Electronics for Technology’, Pearson Education, Indian reprint, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Joseph Vithayathil,’ Power Electronics, Principles and Applications’, McGraw Hill Series, 6th
Reprint, 2013.
2. Philip T. Krein, “Elements of Power Electronics” Oxford University Press, 2004 Edition.
3. L. Umanand, “Power Electronics Essentials and Applications”, Wiley, 2010.
4. Ned Mohan Tore. M. Undel and, William. P. Robbins, ‘Power Electronics: Converters,
Applications and Design’, John Wiley and sons, third edition, 2003.
5. S.Rama Reddy, ‘Fundamentals of Power Electronics’, Narosa Publications, 2014.
6. M.D. Singh and K.B. Khanchandani, “Power Electronics,” Mc Graw Hill India, 2013.
7. JP Agarwal,” Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design” 1e, Pearson Education, 2002.
MT8591 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concepts of measurement technology.
• To learn the various sensors used to measure various physical parameters.
• To learn the fundamentals of signal conditioning, data acquisition and communication systems
used in mechatronics system development.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of Measurement – Classification of errors – Error analysis – Static and dynamic
characteristics of transducers – Performance measures of sensors – Classification of sensors –
Sensor calibration techniques – Sensor Output Signal Types.
UNIT II MOTION, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9
Motion Sensors – Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical, Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive,
LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – GPS, Bluetooth, Range Sensors – RF
beacons, Ultrasonic Ranging, Reflective beacons, Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR).
UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 7
Strain Gage, Load Cell, Magnetic Sensors –types, principle, requirement and advantages: Magneto
resistive – Hall Effect – Current sensor Heading Sensors – Compass, Gyroscope, Inclinometers.
UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS 11
Photo conductive cell, photo voltaic, Photo resistive, LDR – Fiber optic sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm, Bellows, Piezoelectric – Tactile sensors, Temperature – IC, Thermistor, RTD,
Thermocouple. Acoustic Sensors – flow and level measurement, Radiation Sensors - Smart
Sensors - Film sensor, MEMS & Nano Sensors, LASER sensors.
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING AND DAQ SYSTEMS 9
Amplification – Filtering – Sample and Hold circuits – Data Acquisition: Single channel and multi
channel data acquisition – Data logging - applications - Automobile, Aerospace, Home appliances,
Manufacturing, Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Familiar with various calibration techniques and signal types for sensors.
CO2: Apply the various sensors in the Automotive and Mechatronics applications
CO3: Describe the working principle and characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
CO4: Understand the basic principles of various pressure and temperature, smart sensors.
CO5: Ability to implement the DAQ systems with different sensors for real time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ernest O Doebelin, “Measurement Systems – Applications and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
2009
2. Sawney A K and Puneet Sawney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation
and Control”, 12th edition, Dhanpat Rai & Co, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. C. Sujatha ... Dyer, S.A., Survey of Instrumentation and Measurement, John Wiley & Sons,
Canada, 2001
2. Hans Kurt Tönshoff (Editor), Ichiro, “Sensors in Manufacturing” Volume 1, Wiley-VCH April
2001.
3. John Turner and Martyn Hill, “Instrumentation for Engineers and Scientists”, Oxford Science
Publications, 1999.
4. Patranabis D, “Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2011.
5. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communication Technology Handbook” 2nd edition, CRC Press,
2015
ME8594 DYNAMICS OF MACHINES L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the force-motion relationship in components subjected to external forces and
analysis of standard mechanisms.
To understand the undesirable effects of unbalances resulting from prescribed motions in
mechanism.
To understand the effect of Dynamics of undesirable vibrations.
To understand the principles in mechanisms used for speed control and stability control.
UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 12
Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic Analysis
in reciprocating engines – Gas forces – Inertia effect of connecting rod– Bearing loads – Crank shaft
torque – Turning moment diagrams –Fly Wheels – Flywheels of punching presses- Dynamics of
Cam- follower mechanism.
UNIT II BALANCING 12
Static and dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating masses – Balancing a single cylinder engine –
Balancing of Multi-cylinder inline, V-engines – Partial balancing in engines – Balancing of linkages –
Balancing machines-Field balancing of discs and rotors.
UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 12
Basic features of vibratory systems – Degrees of freedom – single degree of freedom – Free
vibration– Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped vibration–
Torsional vibration of shaft – Critical speeds of shafts – Torsional vibration – Two and three
rotor torsional systems.
UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION 12
Response of one degree freedom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –
Disturbance caused by unbalance – Support motion –transmissibility – Vibration isolation vibration
measurement.
UNIT V MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 12
Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal
governors – Characteristics – Effect of friction – Controlling force curves. Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic
forces and torques – Gyroscopic stabilization – Gyroscopic effects in Automobiles, ships
and airplanes.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Calculate static and dynamic forces of mechanisms.
CO2 Calculate the balancing masses and their locations of reciprocating and rotating masses.
CO3 Compute the frequency of free vibration.
CO4 Compute the frequency of forced vibration and damping coefficient.
CO5 Calculate the speed and lift of the governor and estimate the gyroscopic effect on
automobiles, ships and airplanes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. F. B. Sayyad, “Dynamics of Machinery”, McMillan Publishers India Ltd., Tech-Max Educational
resources, 2011.
2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
3. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,
4th Edition, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Cleghorn. W. L, “Mechanisms of Machines”, Oxford University Press, 2014
2. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", 3 r d Edition Affiliated
East-West Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
3. Khurmi, R.S.,”Theory of Machines”, 14th Edition, S Chand Publications, 2005.
4. V.Ramamurthi, "Mechanics of Machines", Narosa Publishing House, 2002.
5. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipati.R.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi, 1992.
6. Robert L. Norton, "Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery", Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009.
EC8391 CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the components and their representation of control systems
To learn various methods for analyzing the time response, frequency response and stability of
the systems.
To learn the various approach for the state variable analysis.
UNIT I SYSTEMS COMPONENTS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9
Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feed forward and Feedback control theory-
Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs
models-DC and AC servo Systems-Synchros -Multivariable control system
UNIT II TIME REPONSE ANALYSIS 9
Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the standard first order and
second order system-effect on an additional zero and an additional pole-steady error constant and
system- type number-PID control-Analytical design for PD,PI,PID control systems
UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9
Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency domain-Frequency
response of standard second order system- Bode Plot - Polar Plot- Nyquist plots-Design of
compensators using Bode plots-Cascade lead compensation-Cascade lag compensation-Cascade
lag-lead compensation
UNIT IV CONCEPTS OF STABILITY ANALYSIS 9
Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh stability criterion-Relative
stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for sketching root locus-Nyquist stability criterion.
UNIT V CONTROL SYSTEM ANALYSIS USING STATE VARIABLE METHODS 9
State variable representation-Conversion of state variable models to transfer functions-Conversion
of transfer functions to state variable models-Solution of state equations-Concepts of Controllability
and Observability-Stability of linear systems-Equivalence between transfer function and state
variable representations-State variable analysis of digital control system-Digital control design using
state feedback.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Identify the various control system components and their representations.
Analyze the various time domain parameters.
Analysis the various frequency response plots and its system.
Apply the concepts of various system stability criterions.
Design various transfer functions of digital control system using state variable models.
TEXT BOOK:
1. M.Gopal, “Control System – Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age International Publishers, 5
th Edition, 2007.
2. K. Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, 5th edition, PHI, 2012.
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, Control System Engineering, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2013.
4. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic control systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th Edition,1995.
MT8511 POWER ELECTRONICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the students different power electronics components an duse of them in
electronic circuits.
To study characteristic of different power electronics of components.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of SCR, MOSFET & IGBT characteristics
2. UJT, R, RC firing circuits for SCR
3. Voltage & current commutated chopper
4. SCR phase control circuit
5. TRIAC phase control circuit
6. Study of half controlled & fully controller converters
7. Study of three phase AC regulator
8. Speed control of DC shunt motor using three phase fully controlled converter.
9. SCR single-phase cyclo converter
10. SCR series and parallel inverters
11. IGBT Chopper
12. IGBT based PWM inverter (single phase)
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to use SCR, MOSFET, TRIAC in electronic circuit
Ability to perform characteristic study on the electronics components.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.No Name of the Equipment Qty
1 Study of SCR, MOSFET & IGBT characteristics module 1
2 UJT, R, RC firing circuits for SCR module 1
3 Voltage & current commutated chopper module 1
4 SCR phase control circuit module 1
5 TRIAC phase control circuit module 1
6 Study of half controlled & fully controller converters module 1
7 Study of three phase AC regulator module 1
8 Speed control of DC shunt motor using three phase fully 1
controlled converter module
9 SCR single phase cyclo converter module 1
10 SCR series and parallel inverters module 1
11 IGBT chopper module 1
12 IGBT based PWM inverter (single phase) module 1
13 Ammeter (0-5A) MC, (0-2A) MC, (0-2A) MI, (0-5V) MI 15
14 Voltmeter (0-300V) MC, (0-600V) MC, (0-300V) MI, (0- 16
600V) MI, Multimeter
15 CRO ,Transformer 1KVA, 1:1, 230V Each 3
MT8512 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge about sensors and actuators
To provide hands on experience to measure different signal using sensor and processing them
in required form.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Design and testing of Digital Comparator
2. Design and testing of Voltage to frequency converter and frequency to voltage converter.
3. Design and testing of sample and hold circuit.
4. Design and testing of Flash type Analog to Digital Converters.
5. Design and testing of instrumentation amplifier using OP-AMP.
6. Displacement measurement using potentiometer and LVDT and plotting the characteristic
curves.
7. Study of Characteristics and calibration of strain gauge and Load Cell
a. Measurement of strain using resistive type strain gauges with temperature compensation
and various bridge configurations.
8. Temperature measurement using Thermocouple, Thermistor and RTD and comparing the
characteristics.
9. Comparison of capacitive and resistive type transducer for humidity measurement with their
characteristics.
10. Measurement of sound using microphones and sound level meter.
11. Conversation of time domain audio signal into frequency domain signal (FFT).
12. Measurements of 3 phase power and power factor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course the students will be able to:
CO1: Generate appropriate design procedure, suitable for signal conversion to interface with
computer.
CO2: Design appropriate circuits by using conventional formulas used in signal conditioning and
conversion.
CO3: Implement their design in bread board and test it.
CO4: Generate appropriate design procedure to obtain a required measurement data for temperature,
force, humidity, displacement and sound.
CO5: Log the data in computer using LABVIEW/ MATLAB/PSILAB.
CO6: Present data in a clear and meaningful manner.
CO7: Use transducers to create simple Mechatronics applications using data logging software.
EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
Sl.No Name of the Equipment Qty
1 Digital Signal Oscilloscope 6
2 Function Generator 5
3 Breadboard 10
4 Regulated Power supply 6
5 LVDT 1
6 Thermistor 1
7 Thermocouple 1
8 RTD 1
9 Load cell setup 1
10 4 Channel data acquisition system for strain gauge 1
11 Sound level meter 1
12 Computer with LABVIEW/ MATLAB/SCILAB 1
13 Prony brake dynamometer 1
14 Hygrometer 1
ME8481 DYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To supplement the principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.
• To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Study of gear parameters.
b) Experimental study of velocity ratios of simple, compound, Epicyclic and differential gear
trains.
2. a) Kinematics of Four Bar, Slider Crank, Crank Rocker, Double crank, Double rocker,
Oscillating cylinder Mechanisms.
b) Kinematics of single and double universal joints.
3. a) Determination of Mass moment of inertia of Fly wheel and Axle system.
b) Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia of axisymmetric bodies using Turn Table
apparatus.
c) Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia using bifilar suspension and
compound pendulum.
4. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic effect and couple.
5. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell, and
Hartnell Governors.
6. Cams – Cam profile drawing, Motion curves and study of jump phenomenon
7. a) Single degree of freedom Spring Mass System – Determination of natural
Frequency and verification of Laws of springs – Damping coefficient determination.
b) Multi degree freedom suspension system – Determination of influence coefficient.
8. a) Determination of torsional natural frequency of single and Double Rotor systems.-
Undamped and Damped Natural frequencies. b) Vibration Absorber – Tuned vibration
absorber.
9. Vibration of Equivalent Spring mass system – undamped and damped vibration.
10. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critical speeds of shafts with concentrated loads.
11. a) Balancing of rotating masses. (b) Balancing of reciprocating masses.
12. a) Transverse vibration of Free-Free beam – with and without concentrated masses.
b) Forced Vibration of Cantilever beam – Mode shapes and natural frequencies.
c) Determination of transmissibility ratio using vibrating table.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to demonstrate the principles of kinematics and dynamics of machinery
Ability to use the measuring devices for dynamic testing.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.No. NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT Qty.
1 Cam follower setup. 1 No.
2 Motorised gyroscope. 1 No.
3 Governor apparatus - Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell governors. 1 No.
4 Whirling of shaft apparatus. 1 No.
5 Dynamic balancing machine. 1 No.
6 Two rotor vibration setup. 1 No.
7 Spring mass vibration system. 1 No.
8 Torsional Vibration of single rotor system setup. 1 No.
9 Gear Models 1 No.
10 Kinematic Models to study various mechanisms. 1 No.
11 Turn table apparatus. 1 No.
12 Transverse vibration setup of 1 No.
a) cantilever
b) Free-Free beam
c) Simply supported beam.
HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES: The course aims to:
Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employable Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.
UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs
UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the topic –
answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute
presentations
UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics
- brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to improve GD skills
UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews
UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-term
career plan-making career changes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be able to:
• Make effective presentations
• Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
• Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
• Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace
Recommended Software
1. Globearena
2. Win English
REFERENCES:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,
2015
3. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad, 2016.
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University Press:
Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
ME8591 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
This course will give an appreciation of the fundamental principles, design and operation of
hydraulic and pneumatic components and systems and their application in manufacturing and
mechanical systems.
UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINCIPLES AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS 9
Introduction to Fluid power- Advantages and Applications- Fluid power systems – Types of fluids-
Properties of fluids – Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law- Principles of flow – Friction loss- Work,
Power and Torque. Problems Sources of Hydraulic power: Pumping Theory – Pump Classification-
Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance, Selection criterion of
Linear, Rotary- Fixed and Variable displacement pumps-Problems
UNIT II HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND VALVES 9
Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders– Types and construction, Application, Hydraulic cushioning - Hydraulic
motors Control Components: Direction control, Flow control and Pressure control valves-Types,
Construction and Operation- Servo and Proportional valves - Applications – Types of actuation.
Accessories: Reservoirs, Pressure Switches- Applications- Fluid Power ANSI Symbols - Problems
UNIT III HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 9
Accumulators, Intensifiers, Industrial hydraulic circuits- Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double-pump,
Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-safe, Speed control,
Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems.
UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS 9
Properties of air– Perfect Gas Laws - Compressors- Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air control
Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Design of pneumatic circuit cascade method-
Electro pneumatic circuits, Introduction to Fluidics, Pneumatic logic circuits.
UNIT V TROUBLE SHOOTING AND APPLICATIONS 9
Installation, Selection, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting and Remedies in Hydraulic and Pneumatic
systems. Design of hydraulic circuits for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Surface grinding, Press and
Forklift applications. Design of Pneumatic circuits for a Pick and Place application and tool handling in
a CNC machine. - Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs- case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understanding operating principles and constructional features of hydraulic and pneumatic
systems.
Knowledge with selection of hydraulic / pneumatic components
understanding of designing and layout of Hydraulic Power package and trouble shooting.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Prentice Hall, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Chand & Co, 2006.
2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems- Principles and Maintenance”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2001
3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
4. Dudelyt, A Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
5. Srinivasan.R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls”, Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008.
6. Joji.P, “Pneumatic Controls”, John Wiley & Sons India, 2008
MT8601 DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Mechatronics system design and simulation, ergonomics and safety
Theoretical and practical aspects of computer interfacing, real time data acquisition and control
Design of motion control, motion converter and temperature control.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 9
Key elements – Mechatronics design process – design parameters – mechatronics and traditional
design – Advanced approaches in mechatronics design – Introduction to industrial design, modelling,
simulation and analysis – Ergonomics and safety.
UNIT II BASIC SYSTEM MODELLING 9
Introduction – model catagories – model development – Simulation using softwares – verification and
validation – Mathematical modelling : Basic system modelling – mechanical electrical, fluid and
thermal.
UNIT III MECHATRONIC SYSTEM MODELLING 7
Engineering systems: Rotational – translational, electro-mechanical, pneumatic-mechanical,
hydraulic-mechanical, micro electro mechanical system – Dynamic responses of system: first order,
second order system – Performance measures
UNIT IV REAL TIME INTERFACING 11
Introduction – Selection of interfacing standards- elements of data acquisition and control systems –
Overview of I/O process – general purpose I/O cards and its installation – Data conversion process –
Application softwares – Man machine interface
UNIT V CASE STUDIES ON DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 9
Motion control using DC Motor, AC Motor and Servomotor - Temperature control of hot/cold
reservoir – Pick and place robot – Car parking barriers – Motion and temperature control of washing
machine – Auto focus camera, exposure control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Students will be able to understand the mechatronics design
CO1: Understand the basics and key elements of Mechatronics design process
CO2: Familiar with basic system modelling
CO3: Understand the concepts of engineering system and dynamic response of the system
CO4: Realize the concepts of real time interfacing and data acquisition
CO5: Understanding the concepts of design of Mechatronics system through case studies
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Devdas shetty, Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, 2nd Edition,Cengage Learning
2011.
2. Georg pelz, "Mechatronic Systems: Modeling and simulation" with HDL’s, John wiley and sons
Ltd, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Bishop, Robert H, "Mechatronics Hand book", CRC Press, 2002.
2. Bradley, D.Dawson, N.C. Burd and A.J. Loader, "Mechatronics: Electronics in Products and
Processes", CRC Press 1991 , First Indian print 2010.
3. De Silva, "Mechatronics: A Foundation Course", Taylor & Francis, Indian Reprint, 2013.
ME8593 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
• To familiarize the various steps involved in the Design Process
• To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a
component to satisfy functional and strength requirements.
• To learn to use standard practices and standard data
• To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components
(Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted)
UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 9
Introduction to the design process - factors influencing machine design, selection of materials
based on mechanical properties - Preferred numbers, fits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and
torsional stress equations – Impact and shock loading – calculation of principle stresses for various
load combinations, eccentric loading – curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame- Factor of
safety - theories of failure – Design based on strength and stiffness – stress concentration –
Design for variable loading.
UNIT II SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 9
Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Keys, keyways
and splines - Rigid and flexible couplings.
UNIT III TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9
Threaded fastners - Bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints –
Welded joints, riveted joints for structures - theory of bonded joints.
UNIT IV ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS 9
Various types of springs, optimization of helical springs - rubber springs - Flywheels
considering stresses in rims and arms for engines and punching machines- Connecting Rods and
crank shafts.
UNIT V BEARINGS 9
Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings - Hydrodynamic journal bearings, Sommerfeld
Number, Raimondi and Boyd graphs, -- Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the influence of steady and variable stresses in machine component design.
CO2 Apply the concepts of design to shafts, keys and couplings.
CO3 Apply the concepts of design to temporary and permanent joints.
CO4 Apply the concepts of design to energy absorbing members, bearings and connecting
rod.
CO5 Apply the concepts of design to bearings.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2016.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical
Engineering Design”, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill
BookCo.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010
2. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book
Co, 2003.
3. P.C. Gope, “Machine Design – Fundamental and Application”, PHI learning private ltd, New Delhi,
2012.
4. R.B. Patel, “Design of Machine Elements”, MacMillan Publishers India P Ltd., Tech-Max
Educational resources, 2011.
5. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, 4th Edition, Wiley,
2005
6. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,
Chennai, 2015.
MT8602 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the construction, operation and installation of PLCs.
• To provide the knowledge on interfacing the PLCs and field devices with communication
protocols.
• To understand the concepts of DCS and SCADA systems.
UNIT I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9
Introduction –– Principles of operation – PLC Architecture and specifications – PLC hardware
components Analog & digital I/O modules, CPU & memory module – Programming devices – PLC
ladder diagram, Converting simple relay ladder diagram into ladder diagram. PLC programming-
Simple instructions – Manually operated switches – Mechanically operated switches - Latching
relays.
UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF PLC 9
Timer instructions - On delay, Off delay, Cyclic and Retentive timers, Up /Down Counters, control
instructions – Data manipulating instructions, math instructions; Applications of PLC – Motor start
and stop, Simple materials handling applications, Automatic water level controller, Automatic
lubrication of supplier Conveyor belt, Automatic car washing machine, Bottle label detection and
process control application.
UNIT III SCADA SYSTEM & ARCHITECTURE 9
Data acquisition systems, Evolution of SCADA, Communication technologies, Monitoring and
supervisory functions, SCADA applications in Utility Automation, Industries - SCADA System
Components: Schemes- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED),
Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA/HMI Systems Various SCADA architectures,
advantages and disadvantages of each system
UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9
Introduction to DCS – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing
issues – Communication facilities Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces
– Displays - Engineering interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – Factors to
be considered in selecting DCS – Case studies – Sugar industry and Power plant
UNIT V INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL 9
Study of Advanced Process control blocks: Statistical Process Control, Model Predictive Control,
Fuzzy Logic Based Control, Neural-Network Based Control, PID Control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Choose appropriate PLC and explain the architecture, installation procedures and trouble
shooting.
CO2: Develop PLC programs using various functions of PLCs for a given application.
CO3: Explain the application development procedures in SCADA and manage data, alarm and
storage.
CO4: Distinguish DCS, SCADA and PLC and explain the architecture of DCS
CO5: Describe the controller elements and program methods.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gary Dunning, “Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers”,3rd India edition, Cengage
Learning, 2007
2. John Webb, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications”,5th edition
Prentice Hall of India, 2012.
3. Krishna Kant “Computer Based Process Control”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
4. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986
REFERENCES
1. B. G. Liptak “Instrument Engineer’s Handbook – Process Software and Digital Network”, 3rd
edition, CRC Press,2002.
2. Jose A. Romagnoli, Ahmet Palazoglu, “Introduction to Process control”, CRC Taylor and
Francisgroup, 2005.
3. Richard Cox, “Programmable Controllers”, Delmer Thomson learning, 2001.
4. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communication Technology Handbook” 2nd edition, CRC Press,
2015.
5. William T. Shaw, Cybersecurity for SCADA systems, Penn Well Books, 2006
MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions
and principles of management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9
Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers
- managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment –
Current trends and issues in Management.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives –
setting objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career
planning and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication
– communication and IT.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use
of computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control
and performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same
basic knowledge on international aspect of management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10th
Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”,
7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
4. Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999
MT8611 APPLIED HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
To design and test the hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using MATLAB/LABVIEW software and
simulate the circuits using Automation studio software.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Design and testing of hydraulic circuits such as
Pressure control
Flow control
Direction control
Design of circuit with programmed logic sequence, using an optional PLC in hydraulic Electro
hydraulic Trainer.
2. Design and testing of pneumatic circuits such as
Pressure control
Flow control
Direction control
Circuits with logic controls
Circuits with timers
Circuits with multiple cylinder sequences in Pneumatic Electro pneumatic Trainer.
Modeling and analysis of basic electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic systems using
MATLAB/LABVIEW software.
3. Simulation of basic hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical circuits using Automation studio software.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Select the actuators and valves for the design of fluid power circuits.
CO2: Design and simulate the fluid power circuits using software tool.
CO3:Test the simulated output by constructing the fluid power circuits using suitable actuators and
valves.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
S.NO Name of the Equipment Qty
Hydraulic equipments
1 Pressure relief valve 4
2 Pressure reducing valves 2
3 Flow control valves 2
4 Pressure switch 1
5 Limit switches 2
6 Linear actuator 1
7 Rotary actuator 1
8 Double solenoid actuated DCV 1
9 Single solenoid actuated DCV 1
10 Hydraulic power pack with pump and pressure relief valve 1
11 PLC 1
Pneumatics equipments
1 Pneumatic trainer kit with FRL Unit, Single acting cylinder, push 1
button
2 Pneumatic training kit with FRL unit, Double acting cylinder, 1
manually actuated DCV
3 Pneumatic trainer kit with FRL unit, Double acting cylinder, Pilot 1
actuated DCV
4 Pneumatic trainer kit with FRL unit Double acting cylinder, Double 1
solenoid actuated DCV, DCV with sensor / magnetic reed switches
5 PLC with interface card 1
6 LABVIEW software 1
7 Automation studio software 1
MT8612 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To identify the differences between various PLCs.
To provide the skills to install and trouble shoot PLC systems.
To provide working experience in various programming techniques.
To control some process parameters and test PID algorithm.
To use the VFD to control the speed of AC motor.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of different PLCs and their specification
2. Study of installations and troubleshooting of PLC.
3. Development of Ladder Diagram (LD) and Structured Text (ST) programming in PLC for
simple applications.
4. Development of an application by using timer and counter of PLC.
5. Solving simple problems using Functional Block Diagram (FBD) programming in PLC
6. Interfacing between PLC and Process loop (temperature)
7. Interfacing between PLC and Process loop (level)
8. Interfacing between PLC and Process loop (flow)
9. Verification and testing of PID controller in a process loop.
10. Develop one application using SCADA system.
11. AC motor speed control using PLC and VFD
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Carryout wiring connections and troubleshoot in different PLCs.
CO2: Develop simple applications using LD, ST and FBD mode of programming.
CO3: Use timers and counter functions of PLC to construct simple applications.
CO4: Integrate and control process station with PLC.
CO5: Develop SCADA application using open source software.
CO6: Perform speed control on AC motor using VFD and PLC.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
S.No Name of the Equipment Qty
Hardware:
1 PLC panel board kit with power supply 7
Any three PLCs from the following list can be used but not limited to
1.Allen Bradley (Micro Logix 1200)
2. Siemens ( SIMATIC S7 200) PLC
3. DELTA (DVP-SS Series) PLC
4. Schineder Modicon (M238 series) PLC
5. Mitsubishi Nexgenie (1000 series)
2 PLC panel board kit with power supply 7
Any three PLCs from the following list can be used but not limited to
1.Allen Bradley (Micro Logix 1200)
2. Siemens ( SIMATIC S7) PLC
3. DELTA (DVP-SS Series) PLC
4. Schineder Modicon (M238 series) PLC
5. Mitsubishi Nexgenie (1000 series)
3 Process control station 1
4 ½ HP AC motor 1
5 VFD to control ½ HP AC motor 1
Software:
1 Delta PLC software – free ware and corresponding PLC programming 1
software.
2 Open source SCADA software such as Free SCADA, Open SCADA, 1
Indigo SCADACodeSys Open source for PLC programming and
interfacing with real time PLC.
ME8682 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
The main objective is to give an opportunity to the student to get hands on training in
the fabrication of one or more components of a complete working model, which is designed
by them.
GUIDELINE FOR REVIEW AND EVALUATION
The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor. The device/
system/component(s) to be fabricated may be decided in consultation with the supervisor and if
possible with an industry. A project report to be submitted by the group and the fabricated model,
which will be reviewed and evaluated for internal assessment by a Committee constituted by
the Head of the Department. At the end of the semester examination the project work is evaluated
based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners
constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 design and Fabricate the machine element or the mechanical product.
CO2 demonstrate the working model of the machine element or the mechanical product.
ME8691 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component design
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz., Design,
Proper planning, Manufacturing cost, Layout & Material Handling system.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Product cycle- Design process- sequential and concurrent engineering- Computer aided design –
CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D transformations-
homogeneous coordinates - Line drawing -Clipping- viewing transformation-Brief introduction to CAD
and CAM – Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control- Introduction to CAD/CAM –CAD/CAM
concepts ––Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics – Mathematical models of
Production Performance
UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING 9
Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-Techniques
for surface modeling – surface patch- Coons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-spline surfaces. Solid
modeling techniques- CSG andB-rep
UNIT III CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) - standards for exchange
images- Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) - Data exchange standards - IGES, STEP, CALS etc. -
communication standards.
UNIT IV FUNDAMENTAL OF CNC AND PART PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction to NC systems and CNC - Machine axis and Co-ordinate system- CNC machine tools-
Principle of operation CNC- Construction features including structure- Drives and CNC controllers-
2D and 3D machining on CNC- Introduction of Part Programming, types - Detailed Manual part
programming (FANUC) on Lathe & Milling machines using G codes and M codes- Cutting Cycles,
Loops, Sub program and Macros- Introduction of CAM package.
UNIT V CELLULAR MANUFACTURING AND FLEXIBLE
MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) 9
Group Technology(GT),Part Families–Parts Classification and coding–Simple Problems in Opitz Part
Coding system–Production flow Analysis–Cellular Manufacturing–Composite part concept–Types of
Flexibility - FMS – FMS Components – FMS Application & Benefits – FMS Planning and Control–
Quantitative analysis in FMS
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the 2D and 3D transformations, clipping algorithm, Manufacturing models and
Metrics
CO2 Explain the fundamentals of parametric curves, surfaces and Solids
CO3 Summarize the different types of Standard systems used in CAD
CO4 Apply NC & CNC programming concepts to develop part programme for Lathe & Milling
Machines
CO5 Summarize the different types of techniques used in Cellular Manufacturing and FMS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hill PublishingCo.2007
2. Mikell.P.Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
3. Radhakrishnan P, SubramanyanS.andRaju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 2nd Edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd, New Delhi,2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and Manufacturing
management “ Second Edition, Pearson Education, 1999.
2. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics”’. Prentice Hall, Inc,1992.
3. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice" Pearson
Education -2003
4. William M Neumann and Robert F.Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill
Book Co. Singapore, 1989.
MT8701 ROBOTICS AND MACHINE VISION SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
Students will learn about basics of robots, programming and machine vision applications in robots
UNIT I BASICS OF ROBOTICS 9
Introduction- Basic components of robot-Laws of robotics- classification of robot-work space-accuracy-
resolution –repeatability of robot. Power transmission system: Rotary to rotary motion, Rotary to linear
motion, Harmonics drives – gear system - belt drives.
UNIT II ROBOT END EFFECTORS 9
Robot End effectors: Introduction- types of End effectors- Mechanical gripper- types of gripper
mechanism- gripper force analysis- other types of gripper- special purpose grippers.
UNIT III ROBOT MECHANICS 10
Robot kinematics: Introduction- Matrix representation- rigid motion & homogeneous transformation-
forward & inverse kinematics- trajectory planning. Robot Dynamics: Introduction - Manipulator dynamics –
Lagrange - Euler formulation- Newton - Euler formulation
UNIT IV ROBOT PROGRAMMING 8
Robot programming: Robot Languages- Classification of robot language-Computer control and
robot software-Val system and Languages- application of robots.
UNIT V MACHINE VISION FUNDAMENTALS 9
Machine vision: image acquisition, digital images-sampling and quantization-levels of computation
Feature extraction-windowing technique- segmentation- Thresholding- edge detection- binary morphology
- grey morphology
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to
CO1: Express the basic concepts, laws, components and parameters of robots
CO2: Explain the types of grippers and its functions.
CO3: Evaluate the kinematic calculations and apply Lagrangian and Newton-Euler methods to analyze
dynamic characteristics of robots
CO4: Describing the various programming techniques used in industrial robots
CO5: Basis of machine vision and apply the concept of image processing
TEXT BOOK:
1. M.P.Groover, M.Weiss ,R.N. Nagal, N.G.Odrey, "Industrial Robotics - Technology, programming and
Applications" Tata , McGraw-Hill Education Pvt Limited 2ndEdition, 2012
REFERENCES:
1. John.J.Craig, " Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics & control"Pearson Publication, Fourth edition,
2018.
2. Jazar, "Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control", Springer, 2ndEdition, 2010
3. K.S.Fu, R.C.Gonzalez, C.S.G.Lee, "Robotics: Sensing, Vision & Intelligence", Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication, First Edition, 1987.
4. Sathya Ranjan Deb, "Robotics Technology & flexible Automation" Second edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication, 2009.
MT8791 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN L T PC
2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the overview of embedded system design principles
To understand the concepts of real time operating systems
To provide exposure to embedded system development tools with hands on experience in
using basic programming techniques.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 7
Overview of embedded systems, embedded system design process, challenges - common design
metrics and optimizing them. Hardware - Software codesign embedded product development.
UNIT II REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM 7
Real time operating systems Architecture - Tasks and Task states - Tasks and Data - Semaphone
and shared data - Message queues, mail boxes and pipes - Encapsulating semaphores and queues -
interrupt routines in an RTOS Environment. Introduction to Vx works, RT Linux.
UNIT III PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture - Instruction set - Addressing modes - Timers - Interrupt logic - CCP modules - ADC.
UNIT IV EMBEDDED NETWORKING 7
Introduction - CAN BUS - I2C - GSM - GPRS - Zig bee.
UNIT V EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY : LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 30
I/O Programming
Interrupts and Timer application
Interfacing Keypad
Interfacing LCD
Interfacing ADC/DAC
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1. Explain the need of embedded systems and their development procedures.
CO2. Summaries the concepts involved in Real time operating systems.
CO3. Use various tools for developing embedded applications.
CO4. Explain the construction, addressing modes and instructions sets of PIC micro controller.
CO5. Conduct experiments with I/O systems used in embedded systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Vahid, Tony John Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/ Software
Introduction - Wiley & Sons, Inc.2002 .
2. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded System – Architecture, Programming, Design’, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2011
3. John B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers” Prentice Hall, 2003.
REFERENCES
1. Steve Heath, ‘Embedded System Design’, II edition, Elsevier, 2003.
2. David E. Simon, “An embedded software primer”, Addison – Wesley, Indian Edition Reprint
(2009).
3. Robert Foludi “Building Wireless Sensor Networks”, O’Reilly, 2011.
MT8711 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and interpret drawings of machine components for the preparation of assembly
drawings using standard CAD packages.
To gain practical experience in handling 3D modelling software systems.
To learn basic principles of finite element analysis procedure and enable the students to
formulate the design problems into FEA.
To understand and interpret program codes for manufacturing different machine components
using standard CAM packages.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Modelling of a part using any CAD package.
2. Modelling and assembling of the mechanical assembly using any CAD package.
3. Structural analysis using FEA software – any analysis package.
4. Beam deflection analysis using FEA software – any analysis package.
5. Modelling and tool path simulation – turning using any CAM package.
6. Modelling and tool path simulation – milling using any CAM package.
7. NC code generation for milling using any CAM package.
8. NC code generation for turning using any CAM package.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
NOTE - Any solid modelling and analysis using suitable software packages can be used for exercise.
CNC lathe – 1 no
CNC milling machine – 1 no
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Model and assemble a given three dimensional engineering components
CO2: Perform various analyses on simple structures for the application of different loads.
CO3: Generate CNC programs for a given components to work with CNC machines
MT8781 ROBOTICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce different types of robotics and demonstrate them to identify different parts and
components.
To write programming for simple operations.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of maximum and minimum position of links.
2. Verification of transformation (Position and orientation) with respect to gripper and world coordinate
system
3. Estimation of accuracy, repeatability and resolution.
4. Robot programming and simulation for pick and place
5. Robot programming and simulation for Colour identification
6. Robot programming and simulation for Shape identification
7. Robot programming and simulation for machining (cutting, welding)
8. Robot programming and simulation for writing practice
9. Robot programming and simulation for any industrial process (Packaging, Assembly)
10. Robot programming and simulation for multi process.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1:Use of any robotic simulation software to model the different types of robots and calculate work
volume for different robots
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
ROS ( Robotic Operating System)
30 Systems with server
Verification of direct kinematics equations and inverse kinematics equations of 1DOF “R-
configuration” robot.
Verification of direct kinematics equations and inverse kinematics equations of 2DOF “R-R-
configuration” robot.
MT8801 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The intention and purpose of this course is to study the basics of electronics, emission controls and
its Importance in automobiles.
To study the various sensors and actuators used in automobiles for improving fuel economy and
emission control.
To study the various blocks of control units used for control of fuel, ignition and exhaust systems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Evolution of electronics in automobiles – emission laws – introduction to Euro I, Euro II, Euro III, Euro IV,
Euro V standards – Equivalent Bharat Standards. Charging systems: Working and design of charging
circuit diagram – Alternators – Requirements of starting system - Starter motors and starter circuits.
UNIT II IGNITION AND INJECTION SYSTEMS 10
Ignition systems: Ignition fundamentals - Electronic ignition systems - Programmed Ignition – Distribution
less ignition - Direct ignition – Spark Plugs. Electronic fuel Control: Basics of combustion – Engine fuelling
and exhaust emissions – Electronic control of carburetion – Petrol fuel injection – Diesel fuel injection.
UNIT III SENSOR AND ACTUATORS IN AUTOMOTIVES 7
Working principle and characteristics of Airflow rate, Engine crankshaft angular position, Hall effect,
Throttle angle, temperature, exhaust gas oxygen sensors – study of fuel injector, exhaust gas recirculation
actuators, stepper motor actuator, vacuum operated actuator.
UNIT IV ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS 10
Control modes for fuel control-engine control subsystems – ignition control methodologies – different ECU’s
used in the engine management – block diagram of the engine management system. In vehicle networks:
CAN standard, format of CAN standard – diagnostics systems in modern automobiles.
UNIT V CHASSIS AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 10
Traction control system – Cruise control system – electronic control of automatic transmission – antilock
braking system – electronic suspension system – working of airbag and role of MEMS in airbag systems –
centralized door locking system – climate control of cars.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1: Know the importance of emission standards in automobiles.
CO2: Understand the electronic fuel injection/ignition components and their function.
CO3: Choose and use sensors and equipment for measuring mechanical quantities, temperature and
appropriate actuators.
CO4: Diagnose electronic engine control systems problems with appropriate diagnostic tools.
CO5: Analyses the chassis and vehicle safety system.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics", 8th Edition, Elsevier, Indian Reprint, 2013
REFERENCES
1. Barry Hollembeak, “Automotive Electricity, Electronics & Computer Controls”, Delmar Publishers,
2001.
2. Richard K. Dupuy “Fuel System and Emission controls”, Check Chart Publication, 2000.
3. Ronald. K. Jurgon, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw-Hill, 1999.
4. Tom Denton, “Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems”, Edward Arnold Publishers, 2000.
MT8811 PROJECT WORK L T P C
0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVES:
To develop knowledge to formulate a real world problem and project's goals.
To identify the various tasks of the project to determine standard procedures.
To identify and learn new tools, algorithms and techniques.
To understand the various procedures for validation of the product and analysis the cost
effectiveness.
To understand the guideline to Prepare report for oral demonstrations.
Students in the form of group, not exceeding 3 members in a group to carry out their main project. It should
be a Mechatronics project. However, special considerations can be given for interdisciplinary measurement
and computer based simulation projects. This exception should be recorded and approved by the
department committee. Management related projects will not be allowed. The interdisciplinary projects will
carry more weight age. It is mandatory to publish their main project in national/international level
conferences to appear in the viva-voce exam.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1: Design, analyze, realize / simulate a physical system by using the technology they learnt during the
program.
CO2: Integrate various systems into one Mechatronics product.
CO3: Work in a team with confined time duration.
CO4: Disseminate his work both in oral and written format.
IT8071 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of discrete time signals, systems and their classifications.
To analyze the discrete time signals in both time and frequency domain.
To design lowpass digital IIR filters according to predefined specifications based on analog filter
theory and analog-to-digital filter transformation.
To design Linear phase digital FIR filters using fourier method, window technique
To realize the concept and usage of DSP in various engineering fields.
UNIT I DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to DSP – Basic elements of DSP– Sampling of Continuous time signals–Representation,
Operation and Classification of Discrete Time Signal–Classification of Discrete Time Systems–Discrete
Convolution: Linear and Circular–Correlation.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF LTI DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9
Analysis of LTI Discrete Time Systems using DFT–Properties of DFT–Inverse DFT– Analysis of LTI
Discrete Time Systems using FFT Algorithms– Inverse DFT using FFT Algorithm.
UNIT III INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9
Frequency response of Analog and Digital IIR filters–Realization of IIR filter–Design of analog low pass
filter–Analog to Digital filter Transformation using Bilinear Transformation and Impulse Invariant
method–Design of digital IIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF, and BRF) using various transformation techniques.
UNIT IV FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9
Linear Phase FIR filter–Phase delay–Group delay–Realization of FIR filter–Design of Causal and Non-
causal FIR filters (LPF, HPF, BPF and BRF) using Window method (Rectangular, Hamming window,
Hanning window) –Frequency Sampling Technique.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF DSP 9
Multirate Signal Processing: Decimation, Interpolation, Spectrum of the sampled signal –Processing of
Audio and Radar signal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Perform mathematical operations on signals.
Understand the sampling theorem and perform sampling on continuous-time signals to get
discrete time signal by applying advanced knowledge of the sampling theory.
Transform the time domain signal into frequency domain signal and vice-versa.
Apply the relevant theoretical knowledge to design the digital IIR/FIR filters for the given analog
specifications.
TEXT BOOK:
1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing – Principles, Algorithms &
Applications”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2007.
REFERENCES
1. Richard G. Lyons, “Understanding Digital Signal Processing”. Second Edition, Pearson
Education.
2. A.V.Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, “Discrete-Time Signal Processing”, 8th Indian
Reprint, Pearson, 2004.
3. Emmanuel C.Ifeachor, & Barrie.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
4. William D. Stanley, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition, Reston Publications.
MT8001 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the C++ programming and its use in object oriented environment
UNIT I OOP PARADIGM 9
Software crisis – Software evolution – A look at procedure oriented programming – Object oriented
programming paradigm – Basic concepts of object oriented programming – Benefits of OOP –
Reusability – Security – Object oriented programming fundamental – Abstraction – Encapsulation –
Derivation – Object oriented languages and packages–Applications of OOP – A simple C++ program –
More C++ statements – Structure of C++ Program
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO C++ 10
Tokens – Keywords – Identifiers and constants – Basic data types – User defined data types – Derived
data types – Symbolic constants – Declaration of variables – Dynamic initialization of variables –
Reference variables – Operators in C++ – Scope resolution operator – Manipulators– Type cast
operator – Expressions and their types – Special assignment expressions – Control structures - The
main function – Function prototyping – Call by reference – Return by reference – Inline functions –
Default arguments – Function overloading
UNIT III CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9
Specifying a class – Defining member functions – Private member functions –Arrays within a class –
Memory allocation for objects – Static data members – Static member functions – Arrays of objects –
Objects as function arguments –Friendly functions – Returning objects. Constructors: Parameterized
constructors – Multiple constructors in a class – Constructors with default arguments – Dynamic
initialization of objects – Copy constructor – Dynamic constructors– Destructors
UNIT IV OPERATOR OVERLOADING, INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM 10
Defining operator overloading: Overloading unary, binary operators. Manipulation of strings using
operators – Rules for overloading operators – Type Conversions - Defining derived classes – Single
inheritance – Multilevel inheritance – Multiple inheritance – Hierarchical inheritance – Hybrid inheritance
– Virtual base classes – Abstract classes - Introduction to pointers to objects: This pointer – Pointers to
derived classes – Virtual functions – Pure virtual functions
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 7
Over view of typical object oriented systems – Case studies- Applications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Distinguish between Structured and Object Oriented problem solving approaches and apply them
based on the problem given
CO2: Define the fundamental concepts in programming with C++.
CO3: Identify classes and objects from the given problem description and able to create classes and
objects using C++
CO4: Achieve code reusability and extensibility by means of Inheritance and Polymorphism.
CO5: Translate the informal description of an algorithm to solutions for problems in engineering, science
and text processing using Object Oriented Programming.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Balagurusamy E, ―Object Oriented Programing with C++‖Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.Ltd ,
Fourth Edition 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Baarkakati. N., ‘Object Oriented Programming in C++’, Prentice Hall of India, 1997.
2. Bjanne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, 4th Edition, Addison Wesley,2013.
3. Herbert Schildt,”C++ The Complete Reference”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Edition, 2003
4. Stanley, B.Lippman,JoveLagrie,”C++Primer”,3rd Edition, Addison Wesley,1998
ME8091 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING LT P C
3P 0 3
0
OBJECTIVES: 0
To understand the construction and working principle of various parts of an automobile.
To have the practice for assembling and dismantling of engine parts and transmission system
UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9
Types of automobiles vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body, Vehicle
aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC engines –components-functions and
materials, variable valve timing (VVT).
UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9
Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines, Electronically
controlled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type
and common rail direct injection system), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil ignition
system, capacitive discharge ignition system), Turbo chargers (WGT, VGT), Engine emission
control by three way catalytic converter system, Emission norms (Euro and BS).
UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9
Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over
drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints,
Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive.
UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9
Steering geometry and types of steering gear box-Power Steering, Types of Front Axle,
Types of Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System
(ABS), electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9
Use of Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Bio-diesel, Bio-ethanol, Gasohol
and Hydrogen in Automobiles- Engine modifications required –Performance, Combustion and
Emission Characteristics of SI and CI engines with these alternate fuels - Electric and Hybrid
Vehicles, Fuel Cell Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and
Transmission Systems should be given to the students.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 recognize the various parts of the automobile and their functions and materials.
CO2 discuss the engine auxiliary systems and engine emission control.
CO3 distinguish the working of different types of transmission systems.
CO4 explain the Steering, Brakes and Suspension Systems.
CO5 predict possible alternate sources of energy for IC Engines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jain K.K. and Asthana .R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol 1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard Publishers, New
Delhi, 13th Edition 2014. .
REFERENCES:
1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA, 1998.
3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, 1999.
4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The Good
heart - Will Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.
5. Newton ,Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers,1989.
GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from WTO
to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological Research,
Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.
UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10
Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad
UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10
International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act of
India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition and
IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7
Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
2. S.V. Satarkar, Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002
REFERENCES
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli,”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”, McGraw
Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.
GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-
Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-
multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).
UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12
Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-
functionalization and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and
applications.
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targetted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition, Nanoparticles for
sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition, Weinheim
Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia,“The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure, Theory,
Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
AN8091 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices adapted in industry
for the successful management of maintenance activities.
To explain the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, condition
monitoring and repair of machine elements.
To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in industry.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9
Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance activity
– Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine availability –
MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance organization – Maintenance
economics.
UNIT II MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9
Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,
maintenance schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.
UNIT III CONDITION MONITORING 9
Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and offload testing –
Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol thermometers – wear- debris
analysis
UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10
Repair methods for beds, slide ways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis –
Failures and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location.
UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 8
Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of
computers in maintenance
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the programme, the students can able to implement the maintenance function
and different practices in industries for the successful management of maintenance activities
To identify the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance, condition monitoring
and repair of machine elements.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srivastava S.K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, S. Chand and Co., 1981
2. Venkataraman .K “Maintenance Engineering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt.Ltd., 2007
REFERENCES:
1. Armstrong, “Condition Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 1988.
2. Bhattacharya S.N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., 1995
3. Davies, “Handbook of Condition Monitoring”, Chapman &Hall, 1996.
4. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand & Co., 1986.
5. Higgins L.R., “Maintenance Engineering Hand book”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 1988.
6. White E.N., “Maintenance Planning”, I Documentation, Gower Press, 1979
7. “Advances in Plant Engineering and Management”, Seminar Proceedings - IIPE, 1996.
ME8793 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the process planning concepts to make cost estimation for various products
after process planning
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS PLANNING 9
Introduction- methods of process planning-Drawing interpretation-Material evaluation – steps in
process selection-.Production equipment and tooling selection
UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9
Process parameters calculation for various production processes-Selection jigs and fixtures
election of quality assurance methods - Set of documents for process planning-Economics of
process planning- case studies
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9
Importance of costing and estimation –methods of costing-elements of cost estimation –Types of
estimates – Estimating procedure- Estimation labor cost, material cost- allocation of over
head charges- Calculation of depreciation cost
UNIT IV PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9
Estimation of Different Types of Jobs - Estimation of Forging Shop, Estimation of Welding Shop,
Estimation of Foundry Shop
UNIT V MACHINING TIME CALCULATION 9
Estimation of Machining Time - Importance of Machine Time Calculation- Calculation of Machining
Time for Different Lathe Operations ,Drilling and Boring - Machining Time Calculation for Milling,
Shaping and Planning -Machining Time Calculation for Grinding.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 select the process, equipment and tools for various industrial products.
CO2 prepare process planning activity chart.
CO3 explain the concept of cost estimation.
CO4 compute the job order cost for different type of shop floor.
CO5 calculate the machining time for various machining operations.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter scalon, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Books, Dec 2002.
2. Sinha B.P, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata-McGraw Hill publishing co, 1995.
REFERENCES:
1. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2002.
2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John Wiley,
1998.
3. Russell R.S and Tailor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2003.
4. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production, Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Pearson Education 2001.
5. K.C. Jain & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,Khanna
Publishers 1990.
MG8491 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
0
OBJECTIVE:
To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources
for the engineering and business problems.
UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15
The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitivity analysis.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8
Transportation Assignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest
route – Minimal spanning tree – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT
networks – Critical path scheduling – Sequencing models.
UNIT III INVENTORY MODELS 6
Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models –
Stochastic inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6
Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and
multi server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite
population – Simulation.
UNIT V DECISION MODELS 10
Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life –
Economic life– Single / Multi variable search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of this course, the students can able to use the optimization techniques
for use engineering and Business problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hillier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 2005
2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1. Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley,
2009.
2. Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 1990.
3. Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992.
4. Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern,
1994.
5. Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantitative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 2002.
MT8002 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of forming and sheet metal working of metals with its different
types of operations and simultaneously to know about various non-traditional machining
processes, surface finishing and surface hardening processes with its types and various
applications.
To understand the work and tool holding devices with its principles and its industrial
applications
UNIT I SHEET METAL WORKING OF METALS 8
Hot and Cold Working- rolling, forging, wire drawing, extrusion-types-forward, backward & tube
extrusion. Blanking-blank size calculation, draw ratio, drawing force, piercing, punching, trimming,
stretch forming, tube bending, tube forming -embossing & coining-explosive forming electro hydraulic
forming-electromagnetic forming
UNIT II NON TRADITIONAL MACHINING 9
Ultrasonic machining (USM) – process and description of USM-applications and limitations- Electron
Beam Machining (EBM)-Process principles of EBM-applications-process principles- Laser Beam
Machining (LBM)-Laser beam production-applications-laser beam welding-Plasma Arc Machining
(PAM)-Generation of plasma arc-process parameters-applications
UNIT III SURFACE FINISHING AND SURFACE HARDENING PROCESS 10
Grinding process, various types of grinding machine-grinding wheel-types-selection of grinding wheel
for different applications-selection of cutting speed and work speed- mounting of grinding wheel-
galvanizing, electroplating, anodising. Surface hardening- carburizing, carbonitriding, cyaniding,
nitriding, ion nitriding, boronizing, laser hardening, thin film coating (PVD, CVD).
UNIT IV EDM AND ECM 10
Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) - Description of EDM equipment-electrical circuits - electrolyte-
metal removal rate-applications-EDWC - process principles – equipments - applications. Electro
Chemical Machining (ECM) - Description of the equipment-electrolyte-metal removal rate -accuracy
and surface finish obtained. Electro Chemical grinding (ECG) – Chemical machining-electro chemical
grinding equipment-application-electro chemical deburring - honing applications.
UNIT V JIGS AND FIXTURES 8
Jigs-Locating and Clamping devices-principles-elements-mechanical-pneumatic and hydraulic
actuation-types of Jigs-general consideration in Jig design-jig bushing, types- methods of
construction. Fixtures-types of fixtures- fixture for machine tools –lathe, milling, boring, broaching,
grinding-assembly inspection of welding fixture design.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basics and working principles of various sheet metal working and forming
processes
CO2: Knowledge on various non-traditional machining processes with its applications
CO3: Understand the various type of surface finishing and surface hardening process
CO4: Understand the concept of EDM and ECM with its characteristics and application
CO5: Understand the work and tool holding devices used for different machine tools
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology, Metal cutting and Machine Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2013
2. Sharma .P.C., “A text book of Production Technology- vol I &II ”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2014
REFERENCES
1. Donaldson. C. “Tool design”, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd.,2003
2. HajraChoudhary.S.K. and Hajra Choudhary.A.K, “workshop Technology”, Vol-I&Vol-II”, Media
Publishers 2008
3. H.M.T Bangalore "Production Technology" Tata McGraw Hill, 2016.
AE8751 AVIONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data buses
To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9
Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – integrated avionics and weapon
systems – typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to digital computer and
memories.
UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9
Avionics system architecture – data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420 – ARINC – 629.
UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9
Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen – Direct
voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9
Radio navigation – ADF, DME, VOR, LORAN, DECCA, OMEGA, ILS, MLS – Inertial Navigation
Systems (INS) – Inertial sensors, INS block diagram – Satellite navigation systems – GPS.
UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9
Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach Number, Total air temperature, Mach
warning, Altitude warning – Auto pilot – Basic principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to built Digital avionics architecture
Ability to Design Navigation system
Ability to design and perform analysis on air system.
Integrate avionics systems using data buses.
Analyze the performance of various cockpit display technologies.
Design autopilot for small aircrafts using MATLAB
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Albert Helfrick.D., "Principles of Avionics", Avionics Communications Inc., 2004
2. Collinson.R.P.G. "Introduction to Avionics", Chapman and Hall, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Middleton, D.H., Ed., "Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical", Longman Group UK
Ltd., England, 1989.
2. Pallet.E.H.J., "Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems", Pearsons, Indian edition 2011.
3. Spitzer, C.R. "Digital Avionics Systems", Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,U.S.A. 1993.
4. Spitzer. C.R. "The Avionics Hand Book", CRC Press, 2000
MF8071 L T PC
ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the principle, methods, possibilities and limitations as well as environmental effects of
Additive Manufacturing technologies.
• To be familiar with the characteristics of the different materials those are used in Additive
Manufacturing technologies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview – Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing Technology -Principle – AM Process
Chain- Classification –Rapid Prototyping- Rapid Tooling – Rapid Manufacturing – Applications-
Benefits – Case studies.
UNIT II DESIGN FOR ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9
Design tools: Data processing - CAD model preparation – Part orientation and support structure
generation – Model slicing –Tool path generation- Design for Additive Manufacturing: Concepts and
objectives- AM unique capabilities – DFAM for part quality improvement- Customised design and
fabrication for medical applications.
UNIT III PHOTO POLYMERIZATION AND POWDER BED FUSION PROCESSES 9
Photo polymerization: SLA-Photo curable materials – Process - Advantages and Applications. Powder
Bed Fusion: SLS-Process description – powder fusion mechanism – Process Parameters
– Typical Materials and Application. Electron Beam Melting.
UNIT IV EXTRUSION BASED AND SHEET LAMINATION PROCESSES 9
Extrusion Based System: FDM-Introduction – Basic Principle – Materials – Applications and
Limitations – Bioextrusion. Sheet Lamination Process:LOM- Gluing or Adhesive bonding – Thermal
bonding.
UNIT V PRINTING PROCESSES AND BEAM DEPOSITION PROCESSES 9
Droplet formation technologies – Continuous mode – Drop on Demand mode – Three Dimensional
Printing – Advantages – Bioplotter - Beam Deposition Process:LENS- Process description – Material
delivery – Process parameters – Materials – Benefits – Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of this course, students will learn about a working principle and construction of
Additive Manufacturing technologies, their potential to support design and manufacturing, modern
development in additive manufacturing process and case studies relevant to mass customized
manufacturing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, Third
edition, World Scientific Publishers, 2010.
2 Ian Gibson, David W.Rosen, Brent Stucker “Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid
Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing” Springer , 2010.
REFERENCES:
1 Andreas Gebhardt “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing” Hanser Gardner Publication 2011.
2 Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3 Liou L.W. and Liou F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications :A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press, 2007.
4 Tom Page “Design for Additive Manufacturing” LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, 2012.
GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product and
service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer
complaints, Customer retention.
UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9
Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee involvement
- Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal -
Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier partnership - Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.
UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9
Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function -
TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001—
Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to
manufacturing and services processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe and
Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised Third
Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
4. ISO 9001-2015 standards
EC8093 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To become familiar with digital image fundamentals
To get exposed to simple image enhancement techniques in Spatial and Frequency domain.
To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
To study the image segmentation and representation techniques.
To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods
UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9
Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual Perception – Image Sensing
and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships between pixels - Color image
fundamentals - RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D transforms -
DFT, DCT.
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial Filtering–
Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency Domain: Introduction to Fourier Transform–
Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth and Gaussian filters,
Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.
UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9
Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean Filters – Order Statistics
– Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum Notch Filtering
– Inverse Filtering – Wiener filtering
UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9
Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region based segmentation –
Region growing – Region splitting and merging – Morphological processing- erosion and dilation,
Segmentation by morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction – Watershed
segmentation algorithm.
UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9
Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding, JPEG
standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional
Descriptors – Topological feature, Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on
matching.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Know and understand the basics and fundamentals of digital image processing, such as
digitization, sampling, quantization, and 2D-transforms.
Operate on images using the techniques of smoothing, sharpening and enhancement.
Understand the restoration concepts and filtering techniques.
Learn the basics of segmentation, features extraction, compression and recognition
methods for color models.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, Third Edition,
2010.
2. Anil K. Jain, ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, ‘Digital Image Processing using
MATLAB’, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and RM. Mersereau, ‘Multidimensional Digital Signal Processing’, Prentice Hall
Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, ‘Digital Image Processing’, John Wiley, New York, 2002
5. Milan Sonka et al ‘Image processing, analysis and machine vision’, Brookes/Cole, Vikas
Publishing House, 2nd edition, 1999
MT8003 MEDICAL MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand how to measure biochemical parameters and various physiological
information.
To study the need and technique of electrical safety in Hospitals.
To study the use of radiation for diagnostic and therapy.
To study about recorders and advanced equipment in medicine
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Cell structure – electrode – electrolyte interface, electrode potential, resting and action potential –
electrodes for their measurement, ECG, EEG, EMG – machine description – methods of
measurement – three equipment failures and trouble shooting
UNIT II TRANSDUCERS FOR BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9
Basic transducer principles Types – source of bioelectric potentials – resistive, inductive,
capacitive, fiber-optic, photoelectric and chemical transducers – their description and feature
applicable for biomedical instrumentation – Bio & Nano sensors & application
UNIT III SIGNAL CONDITIONING, RECORDING AND DISPLAY 9
Input isolation, DC amplifier, power amplifier, and differential amplifier – feedback, op-Amp-
electrometer amplifier, carrier Amplifier – instrument power supply. Oscillagraphic – galvanometric
- X-Y, magnetic recorder, storage oscilloscopes – electron microscope – PMMC writing systems –
Telemetry principles – Bio telemetry.
UNIT IV MEDICAL SUPPORT 10
Electrocardiograph measurements – blood pressure measurement: by ultrasonic method –
plethysonography – blood flow measurement by electromagnetic flow meter cardiac output
measurement by dilution method – phonocardiography – vector cardiography. Heart lung machine
– artificial ventilator – Anesthetic machine – Basic ideas of CT scanner – MRI and ultrasonic
scanner – Bio-telemetry – laser equipment and application – cardiac pacemaker – DC– defibrillator
patient safety - electrical shock hazards. Centralized patent monitoring system.
UNIT V BIO-MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTATION 8
Introduction – computers in medicine – basis of signal conversion and digital filtering data
reduction technique – time and frequency domain technique – ECG Analysis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After successful completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1: Explain different measurement techniques used in physiological parameters measurement.
CO2: Describe the sensors and signal conditioning circuits used in biomedical engineering.
CO3:. Understand about various amplifiers, recording and display devices.
CO4: Differentiate the working of recorders and explain the advanced systems used in medicine
CO5: Understand about various Bio- medical diagnostics instrumentation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arumugam M., “Bio Medical Instrumentation”, Anuradha agencies Pub., 2003
2. Cromwell, Weibell and Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, 2nd
Edition, Printice Hall of india , 2012.
3. Siamak Najarian “ Mechatronics in Medicine – A Bio medical engg approach" , McGraw – Hill
Education , 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Geddes L.A., and Baker, L.E., “Principles of Applied Bio-medical Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition,
John Wiley and Sons, 2010
2. Khandpur, R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, TMH, 2009.
3. Tompkins W.J., “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, 1998
MT8071 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
Introduce the principle, programming technique with instrument interfaces and applications of
virtual instruments and to understand the basics of data acquisition are introduced in
mechatronics systems.
UNIT I REVIEW OF VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 9
Historical perspectives, advantages, block diagram and architecture of a virtual instrument, data -flow
techniques, graphical programming in data flow, comparison with conventional programming.
UNIT II VI PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES 9
VIS and sub-VIS loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula
nodes, local and global variables, string and file I/O.
UNIT III DATA ACQUISTION BASICS 9
AOC.OAC. 010. Counters & timers. PC Hardware structure, timing. Interrupts OMA, software and
hardware installation
UNIT IV COMMON INSTRUMENT INTERFACES 9
Current loop, RS.232C/RS.485, GPIB, System buses, interface buses: USB, PCMCIA, VXI, SCXI, PXI,
etc., networking basics for office &.Industrial applications, Visa and IVI, image acquisition and
processing. Motion control.
UNIT V USE OF ANALYSIS TOOLS 9
Fourier transforms, power spectrum correlation methods, windowing & filtering, VI application in various
fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the evolution, advantages, techniques, architecture and applications of visual
instrumentation
CO2: Acquiring knowledge on VI programming techniques
CO3: Study about the basics of data acquisition
CO4: Understanding the concept of common instrument interfaces with industrial applications
CO5: Study about the use of analysis tools with various applications.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gupta ,” Virtual Instrumentation Using Lab view” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2010
REFERENCES:
1. Gary Jonson, "Labview Graphical Programming", Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 2006
2. Gupta.S., Gupta.J.P., "PC interfacing for Data Acquisition & Process Control", Second Edition,
Instrument Society of America, 1994.
3. Sokoloff; "Basic concepts of Labview 4", Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey 1998
IT8075 L T P C
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation techniques.
To plan and manage projects at each stage of the software development life cycle (SDLC).
To learn about the activity planning and risk management principles.
To manage software projects and control software deliverables.
To develop skills to manage the various phases involved in project management and people
management.
To deliver successful software projects that support organization’s strategic goals.
UNIT I PROJECT EVALUATION AND PROJECT PLANNING 9
Importance of Software Project Management – Activities Methodologies – Categorization of Software
Projects – Setting objectives – Management Principles – Management Control – Project portfolio
Management – Cost-benefit evaluation technology – Risk evaluation – Strategic program
Management – Stepwise Project Planning.
UNIT II PROJECT LIFE CYCLE AND EFFORT ESTIMATION 9
Software process and Process Models – Choice of Process models - Rapid Application development
– Agile methods – Dynamic System Development Method – Extreme Programming– Managing
interactive processes – Basics of Software estimation – Effort and Cost estimation techniques –
COSMIC Full function points - COCOMO II - a Parametric Productivity Model.
UNIT III ACTIVITY PLANNING AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9
Objectives of Activity planning – Project schedules – Activities – Sequencing and scheduling –
Network Planning models – Formulating Network Model – Forward Pass & Backward Pass
techniques – Critical path (CRM) method – Risk identification – Assessment – Risk Planning –Risk
Management – PERT technique – Monte Carlo simulation – Resource Allocation – Creation of critical
paths – Cost schedules.
UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL 9
Framework for Management and control – Collection of data – Visualizing progress – Cost monitoring
– Earned Value Analysis – Prioritizing Monitoring – Project tracking – Change control – Software
Configuration Management – Managing contracts – Contract Management.
UNIT V STAFFING IN SOFTWARE PROJECTS 9
Managing people – Organizational behavior – Best methods of staff selection – Motivation – The
Oldham – Hackman job characteristic model – Stress – Health and Safety – Ethical and Professional
concerns – Working in teams – Decision making – Organizational structures – Dispersed and Virtual
teams – Communications genres – Communication plans – Leadership.
TOTAL 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand Project Management principles while developing software.
Gain extensive knowledge about the basic project management concepts, framework and the
process models.
Obtain adequate knowledge about software process models and software effort estimation
techniques.
Estimate the risks involved in various project activities.
Define the checkpoints, project reporting structure, project progress and tracking mechanisms
using project management principles.
Learn staff selection process and the issues related to people management
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell and Rajib Mall: Software Project Management – Fifth Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES
1. Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Managing Global Software Projects” – McGraw Hill Education
(India), Fourteenth Reprint 2013.
2. Robert K. Wysocki “Effective Software Project Management” – Wiley Publication, 2011.
3. Walker Royce: “Software Project Management”- Addison-Wesley, 1998.
GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C
DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of
products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive
at requirements for new product development and convert them in to design
specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and
arrive at the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
- Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.
UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.
UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9
Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
- Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning –
Concepts”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013
GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.
UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; collective /
Solidarity Rights.
UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.
UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9
Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.
UNIT V 9
Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabled
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National and
State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational Institutions, Social
Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.
REFERENCES:
1. Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
2. Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
3. Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.
To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9
Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of caste,
class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics,
complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of Disasters.
UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community based
DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj
Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processess and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management
Authority(SDMA) – Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.
UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as dams,
embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and Scenarios
in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology and local
resources.
UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9
Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes and
legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.
UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD
WORKS 9
Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and field
works related to disaster management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster
damage assessment and management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13:
978-9380386423
2. Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
3. Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM,
New Delhi, 2011
4. Kapur Anu Vulnerable India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C
CS8691 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
To learn the different search strategies in AI
To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
To understand the different ways of designing software agents
To know about the various applications of AI.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction–Definition - Future of Artificial Intelligence – Characteristics of Intelligent Agents–Typical
Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to Typical AI problems.
UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9
Problem solving Methods - Search Strategies- Uninformed - Informed - Heuristics - Local Search
Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial Observations - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems – Constraint Propagation - Backtracking Search - Game Playing - Optimal
Decisions in Games – Alpha - Beta Pruning - Stochastic Games
UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9
First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Unification – Forward Chaining-Backward
Chaining – Resolution – Knowledge Representation - Ontological Engineering-Categories and
Objects – Events - Mental Events and Mental Objects - Reasoning Systems for Categories -
Reasoning with Default Information
UNIT IV SOFTWARE AGENTS 9
Architecture for Intelligent Agents – Agent communication – Negotiation and Bargaining –
Argumentation among Agents – Trust and Reputation in Multi-agent systems.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
AI applications – Language Models – Information Retrieval- Information Extraction – Natural
Language Processing - Machine Translation – Speech Recognition – Robot – Hardware – Perception
– Planning – Moving
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
Represent a problem using first order and predicate logic
Provide the apt agent strategy to solve a given problem
Design software agents to solve a problem
Design applications for NLP that use Artificial Intelligence.
TEXT BOOKS:
1 S. Russell and P. Norvig,”Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Third Edition,
2009.
2 I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence”, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. M. Tim Jones, “Artificial Intelligence: A Systems Approach(Computer Science)”, Jones and
Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008
2. Nils J. Nilsson, “The Quest for Artificial Intelligence”, Cambridge University Press,
2009.
3. William F. Clocksin and Christopher S. Mellish,” Programming in Prolog: Using the ISO
Standard”, Fifth Edition, Springer, 2003.
4. Gerhard Weiss, “Multi Agent Systems”, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2013.
5. David L. Poole and Alan K. Mackworth, “Artificial Intelligence: Foundations of Computational
Agents”, Cambridge University Press, 2010.
MG8091 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students and to impart
basic entrepreneurial skills and understanding to run a business efficiently and effectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur
Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth.
UNIT II MOTIVATION 9
Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, Self Rating, Business
Games, Thematic Apperception Test – Stress Management, Entrepreneurship Development
Programs – Need, Objectives.
UNIT III BUSINESS 9
Small Enterprises – Definition, Classification – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project
Formulation – Steps involved in setting up a Business – identifying, selecting a Good Business
opportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment – Preparation of
Preliminary Project Reports – Project Appraisal – Sources of Information – Classification of Needs
and Agencies.
UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9
Need – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Institution, Management of
working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.
UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9
Sickness in small Business – Concept, Magnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corrective Measures
- Business Incubators – Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in small
industry – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub Contracting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to gain knowledge and skills needed to
run a business successfully.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Khanka S.S., “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd.,Ram Nagar, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Donald F Kuratko, “ Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process and Practice”, Cengage Learning 9th
edition, 2014.
REFERENCES :
1. EDII “Faulty and External Experts – A Hand Book for New Entrepreneurs Publishers:
2. Entrepreneurship Development”, Institute of India, Ahmadabad, 1986.
3. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013.
4. Mathew J Manimala, Enterprenuership theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis” 2nd Edition,
Dream Tech, 2005.
5. Rajeev Roy, ‘Entrepreneurship’ 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.
RO8791 MODELING AND SIMULATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component design
with the use of various CAD standards and to introduce the concepts of Mathematical
Modelling of Engineering Problems using FEM with 2D scalar and vector variables problems
respectively.
UNIT I MODELLING AND ASSEMBLEY 9
Assembly modelling – interferences of positions and orientation – tolerance analysis-mass property
calculations – mechanism simulation and interference checking
UNIT II CAD STANDARDS 9
Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) - standards for exchange images-
Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) - Data exchange standards - IGES, STEP, CALS etc. -
communication standards
UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO ANALYSIS 9
Basic concepts of the Finite Element Method - Discretization -Meshing – Mesh refinement- Mesh
Enrichment- Natural co-ordinate systems -Types of elements- Special Elements- Crack tip Element-
Introduction to Analysis Software.
UNIT IV TWO DIMENSIONAL SCALAR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Second Order 2D Equations involving Scalar Variable Functions – Variational formulation –Finite
Element formulation – Triangular elements – Shape functions and element matrices and vectors.
Application to Field Problems - Thermal problems.
UNIT V TWO DIMENSIONAL VECTOR VARIABLE PROBLEMS 9
Equations of elasticity – Plane stress, plane strain and axisymmetric problems – Body forces and
temperature effects – Stress calculations - Plate and shell elements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: To know the basic concepts of modelling and assembly for different mechanical components
CO2: To know the different types of CAD standards used in modeling of mechanical components
CO3: To know about basic concepts of FEA and analysis software for analyzing mechanical
components
CO4: To know about different mathematical techniques used in finite element analysis to solve
structural and thermal problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.2007
2. Rao, S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, 5th Edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
2010
REFERENCES
1. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics”’. Prentice Hall, Inc, 1996.
2. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice" Pearson,
2nd edition, 1995.
3. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Witt, “Concepts and
Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, 4th Edition, Wiley Student Edition, 2002.
EE8091 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C
VANCED I.C ENGINES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.
To educate on the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques.
To introduce various sensors and actuators
To introduce different materials used for MEMS
To educate on the applications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and
Mechanical engineering.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and Actuators –
Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes – New Materials – Review of
Electrical and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stress and strain analysis
– Flexural beam bending- Torsional deflection.
UNIT II SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I 9
Electrostatic sensors – Parallel plate capacitors – Applications – Interdigitated Finger
capacitor – Comb drive devices – Micro Grippers – Micro Motors - Thermal Sensing and Actuation
– Thermal expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal resistors – Thermal Bimorph - Applications –
Magnetic Actuators – Micromagnetic components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators-
Actuation using Shape Memory Alloys
UNIT III SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-II 9
Piezoresistive sensors – Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stress analysis of mechanical elements
– Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors – Piezoelectric sensors and actuators
– piezoelectric effects – piezoelectric materials – Applications to Inertia , Acoustic, Tactile and Flow
sensors.
UNIT IV MICROMACHINING 9
Silicon Anisotropic Etching – Anisotrophic Wet Etching – Dry Etching of Silicon – Plasma Etching
– Deep Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching – Gas Phase Etchants – Case studies
- Basic surface micro machining processes – Structural and Sacrificial Materials – Acceleration of
sacrificial Etch – Striction and Antistriction methods – LIGA Process - Assembly of 3D MEMS –
Foundry process.
UNIT V POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS 9
Polymers in MEMS– Polimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene
– Fluorocarbon - Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS –
Lenses and Mirrors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Ability to understand and apply basic science, circuit theory, Electro-magnetic field
theory control theory and apply them to electrical engineering problems.
Ability to understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chang Liu, "Foundations of MEMS", Pearson Education Inc., 2006.
2. Stephen D Senturia, "Microsystem Design", Springer Publication, 2000.
3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2002.
REFERENCES:
1. James J.Allen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Press Publisher, 2010
2. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,2002
3. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000
4. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
2000.
5. Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and Application,”
Springer 2012.
CS8492 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To learn the fundamentals of data models and to represent a database system using ER
diagrams.
To study SQL and relational database design.
To understand the internal storage structures using different file and indexing
techniques which will help in physical DB design.
To understand the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency control
techniques and recovery procedures.
To have an introductory knowledge about the Storage and Query processing Techniques
UNIT I RELATIONAL DATABASES 10
Purpose of Database System – Views of data – Data Models – Database System Architecture –
Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – Relational Algebra – SQL
fundamentals – Advanced SQL features – Embedded SQL– Dynamic SQL
UNIT II DATABASE DESIGN 8
Entity-Relationship model – E-R Diagrams – Enhanced-ER Model – ER-to-Relational Mapping –
Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – First, Second, Third Normal Forms,
Dependency Preservation – Boyce/Codd Normal Form – Multi-valued Dependencies and Fourth
Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form
UNIT III TRANSACTIONS 9
Transaction Concepts – ACID Properties – Schedules – Serializability – Concurrency Control – Need
for Concurrency – Locking Protocols – Two Phase Locking – Deadlock – Transaction Recovery -
Save Points – Isolation Levels – SQL Facilities for Concurrency and Recovery.
UNIT IV IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES 9
RAID – File Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Indexing and Hashing –Ordered Indices
– B+ tree Index Files – B tree Index Files – Static Hashing – Dynamic Hashing – Query Processing
Overview – Algorithms for SELECT and JOIN operations – Query optimization using Heuristics and
Cost Estimation.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS 9
Distributed Databases: Architecture, Data Storage, Transaction Processing – Object-based
Databases: Object Database Concepts, Object-Relational features, ODMG Object Model, ODL, OQL -
XML Databases: XML Hierarchical Model, DTD, XML Schema, XQuery – Information Retrieval: IR
Concepts, Retrieval Models, Queries in IR systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Classify the modern and futuristic database applications based on size and complexity
Map ER model to Relational model to perform database design effectively
Write queries using normalization criteria and optimize queries
Compare and contrast various indexing strategies in different database systems
Appraise how advanced databases differ from traditional databases.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, Sixth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Sixth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2011.
REFERENCES:
1. C.J.Date, A.Kannan, S.Swamynathan, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systems‖, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill
College Publications, 2015.
3. G.K.Gupta,”Database Management Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
MG8892 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable students to deal with newer concepts of marketing concepts like strategic marketing
segmentation, pricing, advertisement and strategic formulation. The course will enable a
student to take up marketing as a professional career.
UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9
Definition, Marketing process, dynamics, needs, wants and demands, marketing concepts,
environment, mix, types. Philosophies, selling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus
consumer marketing, consumer goods, industrial goods, product hierarchy.
UNIT II BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9
Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic -
Psycho graphic and geographic segmentation, process, patterns.
UNIT III PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9
Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, process
of marketing research.
UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9
Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing process, implementations,
portfolio analysis, BCG, GEC grids.
UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9
Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions - point of purchase - unique selling
proposition. Characteristics, wholesaling, retailing, channel design, logistics, and modern trends in
retailing, Modern Trends, e-Marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The learning skills of Marketing will enhance the knowledge about Marketer’s Practices and
create insights on Advertising, Branding, Retailing and Marketing Research.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Philip Kolter & Keller, “Marketing Management”, 14th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2012.
2. Chandrasekar, K.S., “Marketing Management Text and Cases”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
– Vijaynicole 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Adrain palmer, “ Introduction to Marketing Theory and practice”, Oxford university press IE 2004.
2. Czinkota & Kotabe, “Marketing Management”, Thomson learning, Indian edition 2007
3. Donald S. Tull and Hawkins, “Marketing Research”, Prentice Hall of India-1997.
4. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor, "Introduction to marketing concepts", Elsevier, Indian
Reprint, 2007.
5. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hall of India, 2000.
6. Ramasamy and Nama kumari, “Marketing Environment: Planning, implementation and control the
Indian context”, 1990.
7. Steven J.Skinner, “Marketing”, All India Publishers and Distributes Ltd. 1998.
IM8071 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The course aims at providing the basic concepts of product design, product features and its
architecture so that student can have a basic knowledge in the common features a product
has and how to incorporate them suitably in product.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer, designer,
material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – Behaviour analysis. Understanding
customer – prompting customer understanding – involve customer in development and managing
requirements – Organization – process management and improvement – Plan and establish product
specifications.
UNIT II CONCEPT GENERATION AND SELECTION 9
Task – Structured approaches – clarification – search – externally and internally – explore
systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection – methodology – benefits.
UNIT III PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9
Implications – Product change – variety – component standardization – product performance –
manufacturability – product development management – establishing the architecture – creation –
clustering – geometric layout development – fundamental and incidental interactions – related system
level design issues – secondary systems – architecture of the chunks – creating detailed interface
specifications.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9
Integrate process design – Managing costs – Robust design – Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools –
Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Need for industrial
design – impact – design process – investigation of for industrial design – impact – design process –
investigation of customer needs – conceptualization – refinement – management of the industrial
design process – technology driven products – user – driven products – assessing the quality of
industrial design.
UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9
Definition – Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and assembly costs –
Minimize system complexity – Prototype basics – principles of prototyping – planning for prototypes –
Economic Analysis – Understanding and representing tasks – baseline project planning – accelerating
the project – project execution.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student will be able to design some products for the given set of applications; also the
knowledge gained through prototyping technology will help the student to make a prototype of
a problem and hence product design and development can be achieved.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Kari T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, ”Product Design and Development”, McGraw-Hill
International Edns. 1999.
REFERENCES:
1. Kemnneth Crow, “Concurrent Engg./Integrated Product Development”, DRM Associates, 26/3,Via
Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274(310) 377-569, Workshop Book.
2. Stephen Rosenthal, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business One Orwin, Home
wood, 1992, ISBN 1-55623-603-4.
3. Staurt Pugh, “Tool Design –Integrated Methods for Successful Product Engineering”, Addison
Wesley Publishing, New york, NY.
GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values to instill
Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.
UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.
UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics –
A Balanced Outlook on Law.
UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational
Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to apply ethics in society, discuss the
ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the society.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
4. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
5. Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity
and Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
6. World Community Service Centre, ‘Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.
Web sources:
1. www.onlineethics.org
2. www.nspe.org
3. www.globalethics.org
4. www.ethics.org
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS - 2017
M.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):
I. PEO 1: Successful Moulding of Graduate into Aeronautical Engineering Professional:
Graduates of the programme will acquire adequate knowledge both in practical and
theoretical domains in the field of Aeronautical Engineering through rigorous post
graduate education.
II. PEO 2: Successful Career Development:
Graduates of the programme will have successful technical and managerial career in
Aeronautical Engineering industries and the allied management.
III. PEO 3: Contribution to Aeronautical Engineering Field:
Graduates of the programme will have innovative ideas and potential to contribute
for the development and current needs of the Aviation industries.
IV. PEO 4: Sustainable interest for Lifelong learning:
Graduates of the programme will have sustained interest to learn and adapt new
Technology developments to meet the changing industrial scenarios.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On successful completion of the programme,
1. Post Graduate will acquire the ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to
analyze and interpret data in the field of Aeronautical Engineering.
2. Post Graduate will have the ability to design a system or a component to meet the design
requirements with constraints exclusively meant for Aeronautical Engineering.
3. Post Graduate will become familiar with modern engineering tools and analyze problems
within the domains of Aeronautical Engineering
4. Post Graduate will acquire an understanding of professional and ethical responsibility with
reference to their career in the field of Aeronautical Engineering and other allied
professional fields.
5. Post Graduate will be able to communicate effectively both in verbal and nonverbal forms.
6. Post Graduate will be trained towards developing and understanding the importance of
design and development of Airplanes from system integration point of view.
7. Post Graduate will be capable of understanding the value of lifelong learning.
8. Post Graduate will exhibit the awareness of contemporary issues focusing on the necessity
to develop new materials, design and testing methods for the solution of problems related
to aircraft industry.
9. Post Graduate will have a firm scientific, technological and communication base that helps
him to find a placement in the aircraft industry and Research & Development organizations
related to Aeronautical Engineering and other professional fields.
10. Post Graduate will be capable of doing doctoral studies and research in inter and
multidisciplinary areas.
1
Mapping of PEOs with Pos
Programme Programme Outcomes
Educational PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
Objectives
I
II
III
IV
MAPPING OF POS WITH SUBJECTS
Y
E
COURSE TITLE PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
A
SEM
R
Advanced
Mathematical
Methods
Aerodynamics
Aircraft Structural
Mechanics
Aerospace
SEM
Propulsion
I
Theory of Vibrations
Professional
Elective I
Practical
Aerodynamics
Laboratory
Y
Technical Seminar - I
E
Flight Mechanics
A
Finite Element
R
I Methods
Computational Fluid
Dynamics for
Aerospace
Applications
Composite Materials
SEM
and Structures
II
Professional
Elective II
Professional
Elective III
Practical
Structures
Laboratory
CFD/FEA Laboratory
Professional
Elective IV
Y
Professional
E SEM
Elective V
A III
Practical
R
Project Work Phase I
Technical Seminar II
II
SEM Project Work
IV Phase II
2
List of Electives
MAPPING OF POS WITH SUBJECTS
Semester: I Electives
S.No. Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
1 Boundary Layer Theory
2 Aircraft Design
3 Theory of Elasticity
4 Rocketry and Space
Mechanics
5 Experimental Stress
Analysis
Semester: II Electives
S.No Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
1 Theory of Plates and
Shell
2 High Temperature
Problems in Structures
3 Fatigue and Fracture
Mechanics
4 Industrial Aerodynamics
5 Hypersonic
Aerodynamics
6 Computational Heat
Transfer
7 Wind power Engineering
8 Advanced Propulsion
System
9 Data Analytics
Semester: III Electives
S.No Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10
1 Aero Elasticity
2 Design and Analysis of
Turbo Machines
3 Helicopter Aerodynamics
4 Experimental
Aerodynamics
5 High Temperature Gas
Dynamics
6 High Speed Jet Flows
7 Combustion in Jet and
Rocket Engines
8 Propeller Aerodynamics
9 Aircraft Guidance and
Control
10 Avionics
3
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS 2017
M.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEMS
I TO IV SEMESTERS (FULL TIME) CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS
SEMESTER I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIOD
THEORY
1. MA5151 Advanced Mathematical Methods FC 4 4 0 0 4
2. AO5151 Aerodynamics PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. AO5101 Aircraft Structural Mechanics PC 5 3 2 0 4
4. AO5102 Aerospace Propulsion FC 5 3 2 0 4
5. AO5103 Theory of Vibrations PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7. AO5161 Aerodynamics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. AO5111 Technical Seminar – I EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 29 19 4 6 24
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIOD
THEORY
1. AO5251 Flight Mechanics PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. AO5252 Finite Element Methods PC 5 3 2 0 4
3. AO5253 Computational Fluid Dynamics PC
3 3 0 0 3
for Aerospace Applications
4. AO5254 Composite Materials and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Structures
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective III PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
7 AO5261 Structures Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8 AO5211 CFD/FEA Laboratory EEC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 28 18 2 8 23
4
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIOD
THEORY
1. Professional Elective IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. AO5312 Project Work Phase I EEC 12 0 0 12 6
4. AO5311 Technical Seminar - II EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 20 6 0 14 13
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIOD
PRACTICAL
1. AO5411 Project Work Phase II EEC 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL CREDITS TO BE EARNED FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE = 72
5
FOUNDATION COURSES (FC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
MA5151 Advanced Mathematical FC 4
1. 4 0 0 4
Methods
2. AO5102 Aerospace Propulsion FC 5 3 2 0 4
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AO5151 Aerodynamics PC 5 3 2 0 4
AO5101 Aircraft Structural
2. PC 5 3 0 0 3
Mechanics
3. AO5103 Theory of Vibrations PC 3 3 0 0 3
AO5161 Aerodynamics PC 4
4. 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. AO5251 Flight Mechanics PC 5 3 0 0 3
6. AO5252 Finite Element Methods PC 5 3 2 0 4
AO5253 Computational Fluid PC
7. Dynamics for Aerospace 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
AO5254 Composite Materials and PC
8. 3 3 0 0 3
Structures
9. AO5261 Structures Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
6
LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR M.E. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER I (Elective I)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIOD
1 AO5001 Boundary Layer Theory PE 3 3 0 0 3
2 AO5002 Aircraft Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
3 AO5003 Theory of Elasticity PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 AO5071 Rocketry and Space Mechanics PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 AO5004 Experimental Stress Analysis PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER II (Elective II & III)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIOD
1 AO5005 Theory of Plates and Shells PE 3 3 0 0 3
2 AO5006 High Temperature Problems in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Structures
3 AO5074 Fatigue and Fracture Mechanics PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 AO5007 Industrial Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 AO5091 Hypersonic Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6 AO5072 Computational Heat Transfer PE 3 3 0 0 3
7 AO5008 Wind Power Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3
8 AO5073 Advanced Propulsion Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
9 IL5091 Data Analytics PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER III (Elective IV & V)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIOD
1 AO5010 Aero Elasticity PE 3 3 0 0 3
2 EY5092 Design and Analysis of
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Turbomachines
3 AO5011 Helicopter Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
4 AO5012 Experimental Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
5 AO5013 High Temperature Gas Dynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6 AO5075 High Speed Jet Flows PE 3 3 0 0 3
7 AO5014 Combustion in Jet and Rocket
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Engines
8 AO5015 Propeller Aerodynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3
9 AO5009 Aircraft Guidance and Control PE 3 3 0 0 3
10 AO5092 Avionics PE 3 3 0 0 3
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. AO5211 CFD/FEA Laboratory EEC 4 0 0 4 2
2. AO5312 Project Work Phase I EEC 12 0 0 12 6
3. AO5311 Technical Seminar - II EEC 2 0 0 2 1
4. AO5411 Project Work Phase II EEC 24 0 0 24 12
7
MA5151 ADVANCED MATHEMATICAL METHODS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The main objective of this course is to provide the student with a repertoire of mathematical
methods that are essential to the solution of advanced problems encountered in the fields of
applied physics and engineering. This course covers a broad spectrum of mathematical
techniques such as Laplace Transform, Fourier Transform, Calculus of Variations, Conformal
Mapping and Tensor Analysis. Application of these topics to the solution of problems in physics
and engineering is stressed.
UNIT I LAPLACE TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES FOR PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS 12
Laplace transform : Definitions – Properties – Transform error function – Bessel’s function - Dirac
delta function – Unit step functions – Convolution theorem – Inverse Laplace transform : Complex
inversion formula – Solutions to partial differential equations : Heat equation – Wave equation.
UNIT II FOURIER TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES FOR PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS 12
Fourier transform : Definitions – Properties – Transform of elementary functions – Dirac delta
function – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity – Solutions to partial differential equations :
Heat equation – Wave equation – Laplace and Poisson’s equations.
UNIT III CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS 12
Concept of variation and its properties – Euler’s equation – Functional dependant on first and
higher order derivatives – Functionals dependant on functions of several independent variables –
Variational problems with moving boundaries – Isoperimetric problems – Direct methods – Ritz
and Kantorovich methods.
UNIT IV CONFORMAL MAPPING AND APPLICATIONS 12
Introduction to conformal mappings and bilinear transformations – Schwarz Christoffel
transformation – Transformation of boundaries in parametric form – Physical applications : Fluid
flow and heat flow problems.
UNIT V TENSOR ANALYSIS 12
Summation convention – Contravariant and covariant vectors – Contraction of tensors – Inner
product – Quotient law – Metric tensor – Christoffel symbols – Covariant differentiation – Gradient
- Divergence and curl.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Application of Laplace and Fourier transforms to initial value, initial–boundary value and
boundary value problems in Partial Differential Equations.
Maximizing and minimizing the functional that occur in various branches of Engineering
Disciplines.
Construct conformal mappings between various domains and use of conformal mapping in
studying problems in physics and engineering particularly to fluid flow and heat flow
problems.
Understand tensor algebra and its applications in applied sciences and engineering and
develops ability to solve mathematical problems involving tensors.
Competently use tensor analysis as a tool in the field of applied sciences and related fields.
8
REFERENCES :
1. Andrews L.C. and Shivamoggi, B., "Integral Transforms for Engineers”, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Elsgolc, L.D., “Calculus of Variations", Dover Publications Inc., New York, 2007.
3. Mathews, J. H., and Howell, R.W., “Complex Analysis for Mathematics and Engineering",
5th Edition, Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2006.
4. Kay, D. C., "Tensor Calculus”, Schaum's Outline Series, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2014.
5. Naveen Kumar, “An Elementary Course on Variational Problems in Calculus ", Narosa
Publishing House, 2005.
6. Saff, E.B and Snider, A.D, “Fundamentals of Complex Analysis with Applications in
Engineering, Science and Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2014.
7. Sankara Rao, K., “Introduction to Partial Differential Equations”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
8. Spiegel, M.R., “Theory and Problems of Complex Variables and its Applications”, Schaum’s
Outline Series, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1981.
9. Ramaniah. G. “Tensor Analysis”, S. Viswanathan Pvt. Ltd., 1990.
AO5151 AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To introduce the students the fundamental concepts and topic related to aerodynamics of
flight vehicles like fundamental forms of flow, aerodynamic coefficient, incompressible and
compressible flow theories, viscous flow measurements and various configuration of
aircraft and wings.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AERODYNAMICS 9
Hot air balloon and aircrafts, Various types of airplanes, Wings and airfoils, lift and Drag, Centre of
pressure and aerodynamic centre, Coefficient of pressure, moment coefficient, Continuity and
Momentum equations, Point source and sink, doublet, Free and Forced Vortex, Uniform parallel
flow, combination of basic flows, Pressure and Velocity distributions on bodies with and without
circulation in ideal and real fluid flows, Magnus effect
UNIT II INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW THEORY 9
Conformal Transformation, Kutta condition, Karman – Trefftz profiles, Thin aerofoil Theory and its
applications. Vortex line, Horse shoe vortex, Biot - Savart law, lifting line theory
UNIT III COMPRESSIBLE FLOW THEORY 9
Compressibility, Isentropic flow through nozzles, shocks and expansion waves, Rayleigh and
Fanno Flow, Potential equation for compressible flow, small perturbation theory, Prandtl- Glauert
Rule, Linearised supersonic flow, Method of characteristics
UNIT IV AIRFOILS, WINGS AND AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION IN HIGH SPEED
FLOWS 9
Critical Mach number, Drag divergence Mach number, Shock stall, super critical airfoils, Transonic
area rule, Swept wings (ASW and FSW), supersonic airfoils, wave drag, delta wings, Design
considerations for supersonic airplanes
UNIT V VISCOUS FLOW AND FLOW MEASUREMENTS 9
Basics of viscous flow theory – Boundary Layer – Displacement, momentum and Energy
Thickness – Laminar and Turbulent boundary layers – Boundary layer over flat plate – Blasius
Solution Introduction to wind tunnel, Types of wind tunnel, Scale model, Important testing
parameters, Calibration of test section, Measurement of force, moment and pressure, scale effect,
Flow visualization techniques
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
9
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will understand the behaviour of airflow over bodies with
particular emphasis on airfoil sections in the incompressible flow regime.
REFERENCES
1. E.L. Houghton and N.B. Caruthers, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, Edward Arnold
Publishers Ltd., London (First Indian Edition), 1988
2. J.D. Anderson, “Fundamentals of Aerodynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York,1985.
3. Rathakrishnan.E., Gas Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, 1995.
4. Shapiro, A.H., Dynamics & Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid Flow, Ronald Press, 1982.
5. W.H. Rae and A. Pope, “Low speed Wind Tunnel Testing”, John Wiley Publications, 1984.
6. Zucrow, M.J., and Anderson, J.D., Elements of gas dynamics McGraw-Hill Book Co., New
York, 1989.
AO5101 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL MECHANICS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVE
To make students learn important technical aspects on theory of bending, shear flow in
open and closed sections, stability problems in structures with various modes of loading
and also impart knowledge on how to analyze aircraft structural components under various
forms of loading.
UNIT I BENDING OF BEAMS 12
Elementary theory of bending – Introduction to semi-monocoque structures - Stresses in beams of
symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections -Box beams – General formula for bending stresses-
principal axes method – Neutral axis method.
UNIT II SHEAR FLOW IN OPEN SECTIONS 9
Shear stresses in beams – Shear flow in stiffened panels - Shear flow in thin walled open tubes –
Shear centre – Shear flow in open sections with stiffeners.
UNIT III SHEAR FLOW IN CLOSED SECTIONS 15
Shear flow in closed sections with stiffeners– Angle of twist - Shear flow in two flange and three
flange box beams – Shear centre - Shear flow in thin walled closed tubes - Bredt-Batho theory -
Torsional shear flow in multi cell tubes - Flexural shear flow in multi cell stiffened structures.
UNIT IV STABILITY PROBLEMS 12
Stability problems of thin walled structures– Buckling of sheets under compression, shear, bending
and combined loads - Crippling stresses by Needham’s and Gerard’s methods–Sheet stiffener
panels-Effective width, Inter rivet and sheet wrinkling failures-Tension field web beams(Wagner’s).
UNIT V ANALYSIS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 12
Loads on Wings – Schrenk’s curve - Shear force, bending moment and torque distribution along
the span of the Wing. Loads on fuselage - Shear and bending moment distribution along the length
of the fuselage. Analysis of rings and frames.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will get knowledge on different types of beams and
columns subjected to various types of loading and support conditions with particular emphasis on
aircraft structural components.
10
REFERENCES
1. E.F. Bruhn, “Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures”, Tristate Offset Co., 1980.
2. Megson, T.M.G; Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students, Edward Arnold, 1995.
3. Peery, D.J. and Azar, J.J., Aircraft Structures, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1993.
4. Rivello, R.M., Theory and Analysis of Flight structures, McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 1993.
5. Stephen P. Tinnoshenko & S.woinowsky Krieger, Theory of Plates and Shells, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, Singapore, 1990.
AO5102 AEROSPACE PROPULSION L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to students about fundamental principles of aircraft hypersonic and
rocket propulsion and also to make them familiarize with electric nuclear and solar space
propulsion methods.
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF AIRCRAFT PROPULSION 12
Classification of power plants - Methods of aircraft propulsion – Propulsive efficiency – Specific
fuel consumption - Thrust and power- Factors affecting thrust and power- Illustration of working of
Gas turbine engine - Characteristics of turboprop, turbofan and turbojet , Ram jet, Scram jet –
Methods of Thrust augmentation.
UNIT II PROPELLER THEORY 12
Momentum theory, Blade element theory, combined blade element and momentum theory,
propeller power losses, propeller performance parameters, prediction of static thrust- and in flight,
negative thrust, prop fans, ducted propellers, propeller noise, propeller selection, propeller charts.
UNIT III INLETS, NOZZLES AND COMBUSTION CHAMBERS 12
Subsonic and supersonic inlets – Relation between minimum area ratio and external deceleration
ratio – Starting problem in supersonic inlets –Modes of inlet operation, jet nozzle – Efficiencies –
Over expanded, under and optimum expansion in nozzles – Thrust reversal. Classification of
Combustion chambers - Combustion chamber performance – Flame tube cooling – Flame
stabilization.
UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS, FANS AND TURBINES 12
Introduction to centrifugal compressors- Axial flow compressor- geometry- twin spools- three
spools- stage analysis- velocity polygons- degree of reaction – radial equilibrium theory-
performance maps- axial flow turbines- geometry- velocity polygons- stage analysis- performance
maps- thermal limit of blades and vanes.
UNIT V ROCKET AND ELECTRIC PROPULSION 12
Introduction to rocket propulsion – Reaction principle – Thrust equation – Classification of rockets
based on propellants used – solid, liquid and hybrid – Comparison of these engines with special
reference to rocket performance – electric propulsion – classification- electro thermal – electro
static – electromagnetic thrusters- geometries of Ion thrusters- beam/plume characteristics – hall
thrusters.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the principles of operation and design of aircraft
and spacecraft power plants.
11
REFERENCES
1. Cohen, H. Rogers, G.F.C. and Saravanamuttoo,H.I.H, Gas Turbine Theory, Longman,1989
2. G.C. Oates, “Aerothermodynamics of Aircraft Engine Components”, AIAA Education Series,
1985.
3. G.P.Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 5th Edition,
1986.
4. Hill, P.G. and Peterson, C.R. Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Addison –
Wesley Longman Inc. 1999
5. W.P.Gill, H.J.Smith & J.E. Ziurys, “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines as applied to
Reciprocating, Gas turbine & Jet Propulsion Power Plants”, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co.,
1980.
AO5103 THEORY OF VIBRATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the effect of time dependent forces on mechanical systems and to get the natural
characteristics of system with more degree of freedom systems.
To study the aeroelastic effects of aircraft wing.
UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 10
Simple harmonic motion, definition of terminologies, Newton’s Laws, D’Alembert’s principle,
Energy methods. Free and forced vibrations with and without damping, base excitation, and
vibration measuring instruments.
UNIT II MULTI-DEGREES OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 12
Two degrees of freedom systems, Static and dynamic couplings, eigen values, eigen vectors and
orthogonality conditions of eigen vectors, Vibration absorber, Principal coordinates, Principal
modes. Hamilton’s Principle, Lagrange’s equation and its applications.
UNIT III VIBRATION OF ELASTIC BODIES 10
Transverse vibrations of strings, Longitudinal, Lateral and Torsional vibrations. Approximate
methods for calculating natural frequencies.
UNIT IV EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS & DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF
LARGE SYSTEMS 8
Eigen value extraction methods – Subspace hydration method, Lanczos method – Eigen value
reduction method – Dynamic response of large systems – Implicit and explicit methods.
UNIT V ELEMENTS OF AEROELASTICITY 5
Aeroelastic problems – Collar’s triangle of forces – Wing divergence – Aileron control reversal –
Flutter.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the dynamic behaviour of different aircraft
components and the interaction among the aerodynamic, elastic and inertia forces
REFERENCES
1. F.S. Tse., I.F. Morse and R.T. Hinkle, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Prentice-Hall of India, 1985.
2. Fung, Y.C., “An Introduction to the Theory of Aeroelasticity”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New
York, 1985.
3. Kenneth G. McConnell, Paulo S. Varoto Vibration Testing: Theory and Practice 2nd Edition,
2008
4. Meirovitch, L. “Elements of Vibration Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1986.
12
5. Rao.J.S. and Gupta.K. “Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibrations”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1999.
6. Thomson W.T, Marie Dillon Dahleh, “Theory of Vibrations with Applications”, Prentice Hall,
1997
7. Timoshenko, S. “Vibration Problems in Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1987.
AO5161 AERODYNAMICS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of subsonic wind tunnel
2. Pressure distribution over a smooth and rough cylinders
3. Pressure distribution over a symmetric aerofoil section
4. Pressure distribution over a cambered aerofoil section
5. Force and moment measurements using wind tunnel balance
6. Pressure distribution over a wing of symmetric aerofoil section
7. Pressure distribution over a wing of cambered aerofoil section
8. Flow visualization studies in incompressible flows
9. Calibration of supersonic wind tunnel
10. Supersonic flow visualization studies
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS REQUIREMENTS
1. Subsonic wind tunnel
2. Rough and smooth cylinder
3. Symmetrical Cambered aerofoil
4. Wind tunnel balance
5. Schlieren system
6. Pressure Transducers
7. Supersonic wind tunnel
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be in a position to use wind tunnel for pressure
and force measurements on various models
AO5251 FLIGHT MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE
To impart knowledge to students on aircraft performance in level, climbing, gliding and
accelerated flight modes and also various aspects of stability and control in longitudinal,
lateral and directional modes.
UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 9
Physical properties and structure of the atmosphere, International Standard Atmosphere,
Temperature, pressure and altitude relationship, Measurement of speed – True, Indicated and
Equivalent air speed, Streamlined and bluff bodies, Various Types of drag in airplanes, Drag
polar, Methods of drag reduction of airplanes.
UNIT II AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE IN LEVEL, CLIMBING AND
GLIDING FLIGHTS 8
Straight and level flight, Thrust required and available, Power required and available, Effect of
altitude on thrust and power, Conditions for minimum drag and minimum power required, Gliding
and Climbing flight, Range and Endurance
13
UNIT III ACCELERATED FLIGHT 9
Take off and landing performance, Turning performance, horizontal and vertical turn, Pull up and
pull down, maximum turn rate, V-n diagram with FAR regulations.
UNIT IV LONGITUDINAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 10
Degrees of freedom of a system, static and dynamic stability, static longitudinal stability,
Contribution of individual components, neutral point, static margin, Hinge moment, Elevator control
effectiveness, Power effects, elevator angle to trim, elevator angle per g, maneuver point, stick
force gradient, aerodynamic balancing, Aircraft equations of motion, stability derivatives, stability
quartic, Phugoid motion
UNIT V LATERAL, DIRECTIONAL STABILITY AND CONTROL 9
Yaw and side slip, Dihedral effect, contribution of various components, lateral control, aileron
control power, strip theory, aileron reversal, weather cock stability, directional control, rudder
requirements, dorsal fin, One engine inoperative condition, Dutch roll, spiral and directional
divergence, autorotation and spin
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will understand the static, dynamic longitudinal,
directional and lateral stability and control of airplane, effect of maneuvers.
REFERENCES
1. Babister, A.W. Aircraft stability and response, Pergamon Press, 1980.
2. Clancey,L.J. Aerodynamics, Pitman, 1986.
3. Houghton, E.L., and Caruthers, N.B., Aerodynamics for engineering students, Edward Arnold
Publishers, 1988.
4. Kuethe, A.M., and Chow, C.Y., Foundations of Aerodynamics, John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
5. McCormic, B.W., Aerodynamics, Aeronautics & Flight Mechanics John Wiley, 1995.
6. Nelson, R.C. Flight Stability & Automatic Control, McGraw-Hill, 1989.
7. Perkins C.D., & Hage, R.E. Airplane performance, stability and control, Wiley Toppan, 1974.
AO5252 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To make students learn using Finite element techniques to solve problems related to
discrete, continuum and isoparametric elements. And also to introduce solution schemes
for static, dynamic and stability problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Review of various approximate methods – Rayleigh-Ritz, Galerkin and Finite Difference Methods -
Stiffness and flexibility matrices for simple cases - Basic concepts of finite element method -
Formulation of governing equations and convergence criteria.
UNIT II DISCRETE ELEMENTS 14
Structural analysis of bar and beam elements for static and dynamic loadings. Bar of varying
section – Temperature effects
Program Development and use of software package for application of bar and beam elements for
static, dynamic and stability analysis.
UNIT III CONTINUUM ELEMENTS 14
Plane stress, Plane strain and Axisymmetric problems – CST Element – LST Element. Consistent
and lumped load vectors. Use of local co-ordinates. Numerical integration. Application to heat
transfer problems.
Solution for 2-D problems (static analysis and heat transfer) using software packages.
14
UNIT IV ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS 12
Definition and use of different forms of 2-D and 3-D elements. - Formulation of element stiffness
matrix and load vector.
Solution for 2-D problems (static analysis and heat transfer) using software packages.
UNIT V SOLUTION SCHEMES 8
Different methods of solution of simultaneous equations governing static, dynamics and stability
problems. General purpose Software packages.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the concept of numerical analysis of structural
components
REFERENCES
1. C.S. Krishnamurthy, “Finite Elements Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1987.
2. K.J. Bathe and E.L. Wilson, “Numerical Methods in Finite Elements Analysis”, Prentice Hall of
India Ltd., 1983.
3. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha and Robert J. Witt “Concepts and
Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
4. S.S.Rao, “Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Butterworth, Heinemann Publishing, 3rd
Edition, 1998
5. Segerlind,L.J. “Applied Finite Element Analysis”, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc.,
New York, 1984.
6. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla and Ashok D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering, Prentice Hall, 2002
AO5253 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS FOR L T P C
AEROSPACE APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce to the students various numerical solution methods pertaining to grid
generation, time dependant and panel methods and also techniques pertaining to transonic
small perturbation force.
UNIT I NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF SOME FLUID DYNAMICAL PROBLEMS 9
Basic fluid dynamics equations, Equations in general orthogonal coordinate system, Body fitted
coordinate systems, Stability analysis of linear system. Finding solution of a simple gas dynamic
problem, Local similar solutions of boundary layer equations, Numerical integration and shooting
technique.
Numerical solution for CD nozzle isentropic flows and local similar solutions of boundary layer
equations.
UNIT II GRID GENERATION 9
Need for grid generation – Various grid generation techniques – Algebraic, conformal and
numerical grid generation – importance of grid control functions – boundary point control –
orthogonality of grid lines at boundaries.
Elliptic grid generation using Laplace’s equations for geometries like airfoil and CD nozzle.
UNIT III TRANSONIC RELAXATION TECHNIQUES 9
Small perturbation flows, Transonic small perturbation (TSP) equations, Central and backward
difference schemes, conservation equations and shockpoint operator, Line relaxation techniques,
Acceleration of convergence rate, Jameson’s rotated difference scheme -stretching of coordinates,
shock fitting techniques Flow in body fitted coordinate system.
15
Numerical solution of 1-D conduction- convection energy equation using time dependentmethods
using both implicit and explicit schemes – application of time split method for the above equation
and comparison of the results.
UNIT IV TIME DEPENDENT METHODS 9
Stability of solution, Explicit methods, Time split methods, Approximate factorization scheme,
Unsteady transonic flow around airfoils. Some time dependent solutions of gas dynamic problems.
Numerical solution of unsteady 2-D heat conduction problems using SLOR methods
UNIT V PANEL METHODS 9
Elements of two and three dimensional panels, panel singularities. Application of panel methods to
incompressible, compressible, subsonic and supersonic flows.
Numerical solution of flow over a cylinder using 2-D panel methods using both vertex and source
panel methods for lifting and non lifting cases respectively.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the flow of dynamic fluids by computational
methods.
REFERENCES
1. A.A. Hirsch, ‘Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill, 1989.
2. C.Y.Chow, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, John Wiley, 1979.
3. H.J. Wirz and J.J. Smeldern “Numerical Methods in Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill & Co., 1978.
4. John D. Anderson, JR” Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, 1995.
5. T.J. Chung, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press, 2002
6. T.K.Bose, “Computation Fluid Dynamics” Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988.
AO5254 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND STRUCTURES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge to the students on the macro mechanics of composite materials,
analysis and manufacturing methods of composite materials and introduce failure theories
of composites.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Classification and characteristics of composite materials - Types of fiber and resin materials,
functions and their properties – Application of composite to aircraft structures-Micromechanics-
Mechanics of materials, Elasticity approaches-Mass and volume fraction of fibers and resins-Effect
of voids, Effect of temperature and moisture.
UNIT II MACROMECHANICS 10
Hooke’s law for orthotropic and anisotropic materials-Lamina stress-strain relations referred to
natural axes and arbitrary axes.
UNIT III ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED COMPOSITES 10
Governing equations for anisotropic and orthotropic plates- Angle-ply and cross ply laminates-
Analysis for simpler cases of composite plates and beams - Interlaminar stresses- Netting
analysis.
UNIT IV MANUFACTURING & FABRICATION PROCESSES 8
Manufacture of glass, boron and carbon fibers-Manufacture of FRP components- Open mould and
closed mould processes. Properties and functions of resins.
16
UNIT V FAILURE THEORY AND NDE 7
Failure criteria-Flexural rigidity of Sandwich beams and plates – composite repair- Ultra Sonic
Technique - AE technique.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will understand the fabrication, analysis and design of
composite materials & structures.
REFERENCES
1. Autar K. Kaw, Mechanics of Composite Materials, CRC Press LLC, 1997
2. B.D. Agarwal and L.J. Broutman, “Analysis and Performance of fiber composites”, John-Wiley
and Sons, 1990.
3. G.Lubin, “Hand Book on Fibre glass and advanced plastic composites”, Van Nostrand Co.,
New York, 1989.
4. J Prasad & CGK Nair Non-Destructive Testing and Evaluation of Material, Second Edition
Paperback –ISBN-13: 978-0070707030,Amazon,2011
5. L.R. Calcote, “Analysis of laminated structures”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,1989.
6. Michael Chun-Yung Niu Composite Airframe Structures Third Edition Conmilit Publishers 1997
7. P. Fordham, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques” Business Publications, London, 1988.
8. R.M. Jones, “Mechanics of Composite Materials”, 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis, 1999
AO5261 STRUCTURES LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To impart practical knowledge to the students on calibration of photoelastic materials
determination of elastic constant for composite lamina, unsymmetrical bending of beams,
determination of shear centre locations for closed and open sections and experimental
studies.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Constant strength Beams
2. Buckling of columns
3. Unsymmetrical Bending of Beams
4. Shear Centre Location for Open Section
5. Shear Centre Location for Closed Section
6. Flexibility Matrix for Cantilever Beam
7. Combined Loading
8. Calibration of Photo Elastic Materials
9. Stresses in Circular Disc Under Diametrical Compression – Photo Elastic Method
10. Vibration of Beams with Different Support Conditions
11. Fabrication and Determination of elastic constants of a composite laminate.
12. Wagner beam
NOTE: Any TEN experiments will be conducted out of 12.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS REQUIREMENTS
1. Constant strength beam setup
2. Column setup
3. Unsymmetrical Bending setup
4. Experimental setup for location of shear centre (open & close section)
5. Cantilever beam setup
6. Experimental setup for bending and torsional loads
7. Diffuser transmission type polariscope with accessories
17
8. Experimental setup for vibration of beams
9. Universal Testing Machine
10. Wagner beam setup
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will acquire experimental knowledge on the
unsymmetrical bending of beams, finding the location of shear centre, obtaining the stresses in
circular discs and beams using photoelastic techniques, calibration of photo – elastic materials.
AO5211 CFD / FEA LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be in a position to use Computational fluid dynamics
software and Finite Element Analysis software for solving various aeronautical problems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Fatigue analysis of aircraft landing gear using FEM Software.
2. Rotor dynamic analysis of jet engine compressor blade using FEM Software
3. Rotor dynamic analysis of jet engine Turbine blade using FEM Software
4. Fracture Mechanics analysis of aircraft skin structure using FEM Software.
5. Random Vibration analysis of Aircraft Wing Structure.
6. Weight Optimization of Aircraft fuselage frame structure using FEM Software.
7. Stress Optimization of Aircraft fuselage frame structure using FEM Software.
8. Heat transfer analysis of Turbine blade using FEM Software.
9. Heat transfer analysis of rocket thrust chamber using FEM Software.
10. Prediction of Drag and lift on typical aircraft using CFD Software
11. Prediction of Drag and lift typical automobile using CFD Software
12. Flow simulation of propeller using CFD Software
13. Flow simulation of wind Turbine blade using CFD Software
14. Combustion simulation of mini jet engine using CFD Software
15. Combustion simulation of pulse jet engine using CFD Software
16. Acoustic study of jet engine using CFD Software.
NOTE: Any TEN experiments will be conducted out of 16.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS REQUIREMENTS
1. Internal Server or Workstation
2. Computers
3. CAD Modelling Software
4. FEA Analysis Software
5. CFD Analysis Software
AO5001 BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will acquire knowledge on viscous fluid flow, development
of boundary layer for 2D flows.
UNIT I VISCOUS FLOW EQUATIONS 9
Navier-Stokes Equations, Creeping motion, Couette flow, Poiseuille flow through ducts, Ekman
drift.
18
UNIT II LAMINAR BOUNDARY LAYER 9
Development of boundary layer – Estimation of boundary layer thickness, Displacement thickness
- Momentum and energy thicknesses for two dimensional flow – Two dimensional boundary layer
equations – Similarity solutions - Blasius solution.
UNIT III TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYER 9
Physical and mathematical description of turbulence, two-dimensional turbulent boundary layer
equations, Velocity profiles – Inner, outer and overlap layers, Transition from laminar to turbulent
boundary layers, turbulent boundary layer on a flat plate, mixing length hypothesis.
UNIT IV APPROXIMATE SOLUTION TO BOUNDARY LAYER EQUATIONS 9
Approximate integral methods, digital computer solutions – Von Karman – Polhausen method.
UNIT V THERMAL BOUNDARY LAYER 9
Introduction to thermal boundary layer – Heat transfer in boundary layer - Convective heat
transfer, importance of non dimensional numbers – Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Lewis
number etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. A.J. Reynolds, “Turbulent flows in Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, 1980.
2. Frank White – Viscous Fluid flow – McGraw Hill, 1998
3. H. Schlichting, “Boundary Layer Theory”, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1979.
4. Ronald L., Panton, “Incompressible fluid flow”, John Wiley & Sons, 1984.
5. Tuncer Cebeci and Peter Bradshaw, “Momentum transfer in boundary layers”, Hemisphere
Publishing Corporation, 1977.
AO5002 AIRCRAFT DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to the students on various types of power plant types and also to
expose them principles of aerodynamics and structural design aspects.
UNIT I REVIEW OF DEVELOPMENTS IN AVIATION 9
Categories and types of aircrafts – various configurations – Layouts and their relative merits –
strength, stiffness, fail safe and fatigue requirements – Manoeuvering load factors – Gust and
manoeuverability envelopes – Balancing and maneuvering loads on tail planes.
UNIT II POWER PLANT TYPES AND CHARACTERISTICS 9
Characteristics of different types of power plants – Propeller characteristics and selection –
Relative merits of location of power plant.
UNIT III PRELIMINARY DESIGN 9
Selection of geometric and aerodynamic parameters – Weight estimation and balance diagram –
Drag estimation of complete aircraft – Level flight, climb, takeoff and landing calculations – range
and endurance – static and dynamic stability estimates – control requirements.
UNIT IV SPECIAL PROBLEMS 9
Layout peculiarities of subsonic and supersonic aircraft – optimization of wing loading to achieve
desired performance – loads on undercarriages and design requirements.
UNIT V STRUCTURAL DESIGN 9
Estimation of loads on complete aircraft and components – Structural design of fuselage, wings
and undercarriages, controls, connections and joints. Materials for modern aircraft – Methods of
analysis, testing and fabrication.
19
PRACTICALS
Conceptual design of an aircraft for given specifications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will get the basic concept of aircraft design.
REFERENCES
1. A.A. Lebedenski, “Notes on airplane design”, Part-I, I.I.Sc., Bangalore, 1971.
2. D.P. Raymer, “Aircraft conceptual design”, AIAA Series, 1988.
3. E. Torenbeek, “Synthesis of Subsonic Airplane Design”, Delft University Press, London, 1976.
4. E.F. Bruhn, “Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures”, Tristate Offset Co., U.S.A.,
1980.
5. G. Corning, “Supersonic & Subsonic Airplane Design”, II Edition, Edwards Brothers Inc.,
Michigan, 1953.
6. H.N.Kota, Integrated design approach to Design fly by wire” Lecture notes Interline Pub.
Bangalore, 1992.
7. Michael Niu , Michael C.Y. Niu ,Airframe Stress Analysis & Sizing 1st Edition 1997
AO5003 THEORY OF ELASTICITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart knowledge to students on basic governing equations of elasticity, solving of 2D
problems in Cartesian and polar coordinates and also to introduce various theories and
methods to solve torsion related problems.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Definition, notations and sign conventions for stress and strain – Stress - strain relations, Strain-
displacement relations- Elastic constants.
UNIT II BASIC EQUATIONS OF ELASTICITY 10
Equations of equilibrium – Compatibility equations in strains and stresses –Boundary Conditions -
Saint-Venant’s principle - Stress ellipsoid – Stress invariants – Principal stresses in 2-D and 3-D.
UNIT III 2 - D PROBLEMS IN CARTESIAN COORDINATES 9
Plane stress and plain strain problems - Airy’s stress function – Biharmonic equations – 2-D
problems – Cantilever and simply supported beams.
UNIT IV 2 - D PROBLEMS IN POLAR COORDINATES 12
Equations of equilibrium – Strain – displacement relations – Stress – strain relations – Airy’s stress
function – Use of Dunder’s table. - Axisymmetric problems - Bending of Curved Bars - Circular
Discs and Cylinders – Rotating Discs and Cylinders - Kirsch, Boussinasque’s and Michell’s
problems.
UNIT V TORSION 8
Coulomb’s theory-Navier’s theory-Saint Venant’s Semi-Inverse method – Torsion of Circular,
Elliptical and Triangular sections - Prandtl’s theory-Membrane analogy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will understand the theoretical concepts of material
behaviour with particular emphasis on their elasticity property.
REFERENCES
1. E. Sechler, “Elasticity in Engineering” John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1980.
2. Enrico Volterra and Caines, J.H, Advanced strength of Materials, Prentice Hall,1991.
20
3. S.P. Timoshenko and J.N. Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, McGraw-Hill, 1985.
4. Ugural, A.C and Fenster, S.K, Advanced Strength and Applied Elasticity, Prentice hall, 2003
5. Wang, C.T. Applied elasticity, McGraw Hill 1993
AO5071 ROCKETRY AND SPACE MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the students on fundamental aspects of rocket propulsion, multi stating of rocket
vehicle and spacecraft dynamics.
UNIT I ORBITAL MECHANICS 9
Description of solar system – Kepler’s Laws of planetary motion – Newton’s Law of Universal
gravitation – Two body and Three-body problems – Jacobi’s Integral, Librations points - Estimation
of orbital and escape velocities
UNIT II SATELLITE DYNAMICS 9
Geosynchronous and geostationary satellites- factors determining life time of satellites – satellite
perturbations – methods to calculate perturbations- Hohmann orbits – calculation of orbit
parameters – Determination of satellite rectangular coordinates from orbital elements
UNIT III ROCKET MOTION 10
Principle of operation of rocket motor - thrust equation – one dimensional and two dimensional
rocket motions in free space and homogeneous gravitational fields – Description of vertical,
inclined and gravity turn trajectories determinations of range and altitude – simple approximations
to burnout velocity.
UNIT IV ROCKET AERODYNAMICS 9
Description of various loads experienced by a rocket passing through atmosphere – drag
estimation – wave drag, skin friction drag, form drag and base pressure drag – Boat-tailing in
missiles – performance at various altitudes – conical and bell shaped nozzles – adapted nozzles –
rocket dispersion – launching problems.
UNIT V STAGING AND CONTROL OF ROCKET VEHICLES 8
Need for multi-staging of rocket vehicles – multistage vehicle optimization – stage separation
dynamics and separation techniques- aerodynamic and jet control methods of rocket vehicles -
SITVC.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will have an idea about solar system, basic concepts of
orbital mechanics with particular emphasis on interplanetary trajectories.
REFERENCES
1. E.R. Parker, “Materials for Missiles and Spacecraft”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1982.
2. G.P. Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 5th Edition,
1986.
3. J.W. Cornelisse, “Rocket Propulsion and Space Dynamics”, J.W. Freeman & Co., Ltd.,
London, 1982
4. Van de Kamp, “Elements of Astro-mechanics”, Pitman Publishing Co., Ltd., London, 1980.
21
AO5004 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students learn basic principles of operation, electrical resistance strain
gauges, photoelasticity and interferometric techniques and non destructive methods.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Principle of measurements-Accuracy, sensitivity and range- Mechanical, Optical, Acoustical and
Electrical extensometers.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE STRAIN GAUGES 12
Principle of operation and requirements-Types and their uses-Materials for strain gauge-
Calibration and temperature compensation-Cross sensitivity-Rosette analysis-Wheatstone bridge-
Potentiometer circuits for static and dynamic strain measurements-Strain indicators- Application of
strain gauges to wind tunnel balance.
UNIT III PRINCIPLES OF PHOTOELASTICITY 9
Two dimensional photo elasticity-Concepts of photoelastic effects-Photoelastic materials-Stress
optic law-Plane polariscope–Circular polariscope-Transmission and Reflection type-Effect of
stressed model in Plane and Circular polariscope. Interpretation of fringe pattern Isoclinics and
Isochromatics.-Fringe sharpening and Fringe multiplication techniques-Compensation and
separation techniques-Introduction to three dimensional photoelasticity.
UNIT IV PHOTOELASTICITY AND INTERFEROMETRY TECHNIQUES 9
Fringe sharpening and Fringe multiplication techniques-Compensation and separation techniques-
Calibration methods –Photo elastic materials. Introduction to three dimensional photoelasticity.
Moire fringes – Laser holography – Grid methods-Stress coat
UNIT V NON DESTRUCTIVE TECHNIQUES 7
Radiography- Ultrasonics- Magnetic particle inspection- Fluorescent penetrant technique-Eddy
current testing– thermography– MICRO FOCUS CT scan.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to appreciate use of strain gauges and its
principles, principle of photoelasticity and its use, NDT techniques.
REFERENCES
1. A.J. Durelli and V.J. Parks, “Moire Analysis of Strain”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs,
New Jersey, 1980.
2. G.S. Holister, “Experimental Stress Analysis, Principles and Methods”, Cambridge University
Press, 1987.
3. J Prasad & CGK Nair Non-Destructive Testing and Evaluation of Material, Second Edition
Paperback –ISBN-13: 978-0070707030,Amazon,2011
4. J.W. Dally and M.F. Riley, “Experimental Stress Analysis”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York,
1988.
5. M. Hetenyi, “Handbook of Experimental Stress Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,
1980.
6. P. Fordham, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques” Business Publications, London, 1988.
7. Srinath,L.S., Raghava,M.R., Lingaiah,K. Gargesha,G.,Pant B. and Ramachandra,K. –
Experimental Stress Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1984
8. U. C. Jindal Experimental Stress Analysis, Pearson India, ISBN: 9789332503533, 2012
22
AO5005 THEORY OF PLATES AND SHELLS L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I CLASSICAL PLATE THEORY 8
Classical Plate Theory – Assumptions – Differential Equations – Boundary Conditions.
UNIT II PLATES OF VARIOUS SHAPES 10
Navier’s Method of Solution for Simply Supported Rectangular Plates – Levy’s Method of Solution
for Rectangular Plates under Different Boundary Conditions – Circular plates.
UNIT III EIGEN VALUE ANALYSIS 8
Stability and Free Vibration Analysis of Rectangular Plates with various end conditions.
UNIT IV APPROXIMATE METHODS 10
Rayleigh – Ritz, Galerkin Methods– Finite Difference Method – Application to Rectangular Plates
for Static, Free Vibration and Stability Analysis.
UNIT V SHELLS 9
Basic Concepts of Shell Type of Structures – Membrane and Bending Theories for Circular
Cylindrical Shells.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will get knowledge on the behaviour of plates and shells
with different geometry under various types of loads
REFERENCES
1. Flugge, W. Stresses in Shells, Springer – Verlag, 1985.
2. Harry Kraus, ‘Thin Elastic Shells’, John Wiley and Sons, 1987.
3. T.K.Varadan & K. Bhaskar, “Análysis of plates – Theory and problems”, Narosha Publishing
Co., 1999.
4. Timoshenko, S.P. and Gere, J.M., Theory of Elastic Stability, McGraw Hill Book Co. 1986.
5. Timoshenko, S.P. Winowsky. S., and Kreger, Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill Book
Co., 1990.
AO5006 HIGH TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS IN STRUCTURES L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I TEMPERATURE EQUATIONS & AERODYNAMIC HEATING 9
Basics of conduction, radiation and convection – Fourier’s equation – Boundary and initial
conditions – One-dimensional problem formulations – Methods and Solutions. Heat balance
equation for idealised structures – Adiabatic temperature – Variations – Evaluation of transient
temperature.
UNIT II THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS 9
Thermal stresses and strains – Equations of equilibrium – Boundary conditions – Thermoelasticity
– Two dimensional problems and solutions – Airy stress function and applications.
UNIT III THERMAL STRESS IN BEAMS, TRUSSES AND THIN CYLINDERS 9
Analysis of bar, plane truss and beam under mechanical loads and temperature. Thermal stress
analysis of thin cylinder.
UNIT IV THERMAL STRESSES IN PLATES 9
Membrane thermal stresses –Rectangular plates – Circular plates – Thick plates with temperature
varying along thickness.
23
UNIT V SPECIAL TOPICS & MATERIALS 9
Thermal bucking – Analysis including material properties variation with temperature.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the analysis of bar, plane truss and beam under
mechanical and thermal loads.
REFERENCES
1. A.B. Bruno and H.W. Jerome, “Theory of Thermal Stresses”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New
York, 1980.
2. D.J. Johns, “Thermal Stress Analysis”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1985.
3. N.J. Hoff, “High Temperature effects in Aircraft Structures”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., London,
1986.
AO5074 FATIGUE AND FRACTURE MECHANICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To make the students learn about fundamentals of fatigue & fracture mechanics, statistical
aspects of fatigue behaviour & fatigue design and testing of aerospace structures.
UNIT I FATIGUE OF STRUCTURES 10
S.N. curves – Endurance limit – Effect of mean stress – Goodman, Gerber and Soderberg
relations and diagrams – Notches and stress concentrations – Neuber’s stress concentration
factors – plastic stress concentration factors – Notched S-N curves.
UNIT II STATISTICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE BEHAVIOUR 8
Low cycle and high cycle fatigue – Coffin-Manson’s relation – Transition life – Cyclic Strain
hardening and softening – Analysis of load histories – Cycle counting techniques – Cumulative
damage – Miner’s theory – other theories.
UNIT III PHYSICAL ASPECTS OF FATIGUE 5
Phase in fatigue life – Crack initiation – Crack growth – Final fracture – Dislocations – Fatigue
fracture surfaces.
UNIT IV FRACTURE MECHANICS 15
Strength of cracked bodies – potential energy and surface energy – Griffith’s theory – Irwin –
Orwin extension of Griffith’s theory to ductile materials – Stress analysis of cracked bodies – Effect
of thickness on fracture toughness – Stress intensity factors for typical geometries.
UNIT V FATIGUE DESIGN AND TESTING 7
Safe life and fail safe design philosophies – Importance of Fracture Mechanics in aerospace
structure – Application to composite materials and structures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about fracture behaviour, fatigue design and
testing of structures.
REFERENCES
1. C.G.Sih, “Mechanics of Fracture”, Vol.1 Sijthoff and Noordhoff International Publishing Co.,
Netherland, 1989.
2. D.Brock, “Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics”, Noordhoff International Publishing
Co., London, 1994.
3. J.F.Knott, “Fundamentals of Fracture Mechanics”, Butterworth & Co., (Publishers) Ltd.,
London, 1983.
4. W.Barrois and L.Ripley, “Fatigue of Aircraft Structures”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1983.
24
AO5007 INDUSTRIAL AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I ATMOSPHERE 9
Types of winds, Causes of variation of winds, Atmospheric boundary layer, Effect of terrain on
gradient height, Structure of turbulent flows.
UNIT II WIND ENERGY COLLECTORS 9
Horizontal axis and vertical axis machines, Power coefficient, Betz coefficient by momentum
theory.
UNIT III VEHICLE AERODYNAMICS 9
Power requirements and drag coefficients of automobiles, Effects of cut back angle, Aerodynamics
of trains and Hovercraft.
UNIT IV BUILDING AERODYNAMICS 9
Pressure distribution on low rise buildings, wind forces on buildings. Environmental winds in city
blocks, Special problems of tall buildings, Building codes, Building ventilation and architectural
aerodynamics.
UNIT V FLOW INDUCED VIBRATIONS 9
Effects of Reynolds number on wake formation of bluff shapes, Vortex induced vibrations,
Galloping and stall flutter.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about non-aeronautical uses of aerodynamics
such as road vehicle, building aerodynamics and problems of flow induced vibrations.
REFERENCES
1. M.Sovran (Ed), “Aerodynamics and drag mechanisms of bluff bodies and road vehicles”,
Plenum press, New York, 1978.
2. N.G. Calvent, “Wind Power Principles”, Charles Griffin & Co., London, 1979.
3. P. Sachs, “Winds forces in engineering”, Pergamon Press, 1978.
4. R.D. Blevins, “Flow induced vibrations”, Van Nostrand, 1990.
AO5091 HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make students learn the peculiar hypersonic speed flow characteristics pertaining to flight
vehicles and the approximate solution methods for hypersonic flows. The objective is also to
impart knowledge on hypersonic viscous interactions and their effect on aerodynamic heating.
UNIT I BASICS OF HYPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS 8
Thin shock layers – entropy layers – low density and high density flows – hypersonic flight paths
hypersonic flight similarity parameters – shock wave and expansion wave relations of inviscid
hypersonic flows.
UNIT II SURFACE INCLINATION METHODS FOR HYPERSONIC INVISCID FLOWS 9
Local surface inclination methods – modified Newtonian Law – Newtonian theory – tangent wedge
or tangent cone and shock expansion methods – Calculation of surface flow properties
25
UNIT III APPROXIMATE METHODS FOR INVISCID HYPERSONIC FLOWS` 9
Approximate methods hypersonic small disturbance equation and theory – thin shock layer theory
– blast wave theory - entropy effects - rotational method of characteristics - hypersonic shock
wave shapes and correlations.
UNIT IV VISCOUS HYPERSONIC FLOW THEORY 10
Navier–Stokes equations – boundary layer equations for hypersonic flow – hypersonic boundary
layer – hypersonic boundary layer theory and non similar hypersonic boundary layers – hypersonic
aerodynamic heating and entropy layers effects on aerodynamic heating – heat flux estimation.
UNIT V VISCOUS INTERACTIONS IN HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9
Strong and weak viscous interactions – hypersonic shockwaves and boundary layer interactions –
Estimation of hypersonic boundary layer transition- Role of similarity parameter for laminar viscous
interactions in hypersonic viscous flow.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn basics of hypersonic flow, shock wave -
boundary layer interaction and hypersonic aerodynamic heating.
REFERENCES
1. John D. Anderson, Jr, Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics, McGraw-Hill Series,
New York, 1996.
2. John T. Bertin, Hypersonic Aerothermodynamics, 1994 AIAA Inc., Washington D.
3. John.D.Anderson, Jr., Modern Compressible Flow with Historical perspective Hypersonic
Series.
4. William H. Heiser and David T. Pratt, Hypersonic Air Breathing propulsion, AIAA Education
Series.
AO5072 COMPUTATIONAL HEAT TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students learn to solve conductive, transient conductive, convective, radiative
heat transfer problems using computational methods.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Finite Difference Method-Introduction-Taylor’s series expansion - Discretisation Methods Forward,
backward and central differencing scheme for Ist order and second order Derivatives – Types of
partial differential equations-Types of errors. Solution to algebraic equation-Direct Method and
Indirect Method-Types of boundary condition.
FDM - FEM - FVM.
UNIT II CONDUCTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9
General 3D-heat conduction equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates.
Computation (FDM) of One – dimensional steady state heat conduction –with Heat generation-
without Heat generation- 2D-heat conduction problem with different boundary conditions-
Numerical treatment for extended surfaces. Numerical treatment for 3D- Heat conduction.
Numerical treatment to 1D-steady heat conduction using FEM.
UNIT III TRANSIENT HEAT CONDUCTION 9
Introduction to Implicit, explicit Schemes and crank-Nicolson Schemes Computation(FDM) of One
–dimensional un-steady heat conduction –with heat Generation-without Heat generation - 2D-
transient heat conduction problem with different boundary conditions using Implicit, explicit
Schemes. Importance of Courant number. Analysis for I-D,2-D transient heat Conduction
problems.
26
UNIT IV CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9
Convection- Numerical treatment(FDM) of steady and unsteady 1-D and 2-d heat convection-
diffusion steady-unsteady problems- Computation of thermal and Velocity boundary layer flows.
Upwind scheme. Stream function-vorticity approach-Creeping flow.
UNIT V RADIATIVE HEAT TRANSFER 9
Radiation fundamentals-Shape factor calculation-Radiosity method- Absorption Method-
Montacalro method-Introduction to Finite Volume Method- Numerical treatment of radiation
enclosures using finite Volume method. Developing a numerical code for 1D, 2D heat transfer
problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn the concepts of computation applicable to heat
transfer for practical applications.
REFERENCES
1. C.Y.Chow, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics”, John Wiley, 1979.
2. J.P. Holman, “Heat Transfer”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New York, 6th Edition, 1991.
3. John D. Anderson, JR” Computational Fluid Dynamics”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., New
York, 1995.
4. John H. Lienhard, “A Heat Transfer Text Book”, Prentice Hall Inc., 1981.
5. Pletcher and Tennahils “ Computational Heat Trasnfer”…..
6. S.C. Sachdeva, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat & Mass Transfer”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1981.
7. T.J. Chung, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University Press, 2002
8. Yunus A. Cengel, Heat Transfer – A Practical Approach Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2003.
AO5008 WIND POWER ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WIND ENERGY 8
Background,Motivations, and Constraints, Historical perspective, Modern wind turbines,
Components and geometry, Power characteristics.
UNIT II WIND CHARACTERISTICS AND RESOURCES 8
General characteristics of the wind resource, Atmospheric boundarylayer characteristics, Wind
data analysis and resource estimation, Wind turbine energy production estimates using statistical
techniques
UNIT III AERODYNAMICS OF WIND TURBINES 12
Overview , 1-D Momentum theory,Ideal horizontal axis wind turbine with wake rotation, Airfoils and
aerodynamic concepts -Momentum theory and blade element theory General rotor blade shape
performance prediction - Wind turbine rotor dynamics
UNIT IV WIND TURBINE DESIGN & CONTROL 9
Brief design overview – Introduction -Wind turbine control systems -Typical grid-connected turbine
operation -Basic concepts of electricpower- Power transformers -Electrical machines
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND SITE ASPECTS 8
Overview- Wind turbine siting - Installation and operation- Wind farms- Overview of wind energy
economics-Electromagnetic interference-noise-Land use impacts - Safety
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
27
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about aerodynamics, design and control of wind
turbines.
REFERENCES:
1. Emil Simiu & Robert H Scanlan, Wind effects on structures - fundamentals and applications to
design, John Wiley & Sons Inc New York, 1996.
2. IS: 875 (1987) Part III Wind loads, Indian Standards for Building codes.
3. N J Cook, Design Guides to wind loading of buildings structures Part I & II, Butterworths,
London, 1985
4. Tom Lawson Building Aerodynamics Imperial College Press London, 2001
AO5073 ADVANCED PROPULSION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the students on advanced air breathing propulsion systems like air
augmented rockets, scramjets and also to introduce the students various technical details
and operating principles of nuclear and electric propulsion.
UNIT I THERMODYNAMIC CYCLE ANALYSIS OF AIR-BREATHING PROPULSION
SYSTEMS 8
Air breathing propulsion systems like Turbojet, turboprop, ducted fan, Ramjet and Air augmented
rockets – Thermodynamic cycles – Pulse propulsion – Combustion process in pulse jet engines –
inlet charging process – Subcritical, Critical and Supercritical charging.
UNIT II RAMJETS AND AIR AUGMENTED ROCKETS 8
Preliminary performance calculations – Diffuser design with and without spike, Supersonic inlets –
combustor and nozzle design – integral Ram rocket.
UNIT III SCRAMJET PROPULSION SYSTEM 12
Fundamental considerations of hypersonic air breathing vehicles – Preliminary concepts in engine
airframe integration – calculation of propulsion flow path – flowpath integration – Various types of
supersonic combustors – fundamental requirements of supersonic combustors – Mixing of fuel jets
in supersonic cross flow – performance estimation of supersonic combustors.
UNIT IV NUCLEAR PROPULSION 9
Nuclear rocket engine design and performance – nuclear rocket reactors – nuclear rocket nozzles
– nuclear rocket engine control – radioisotope propulsion – basic thruster configurations – thruster
technology – heat source development – nozzle development – nozzle performance of
radiosotope propulsion systems.
UNIT V ELECTRIC AND ION PROPULSION 8
Basic concepts in electric propulsion – power requirements and rocket efficiency – classification of
thrusters – electrostatic thrusters – plasma thruster of the art and future trends – Fundamentals of
ion propulsion – performance analysis – ion rocket engine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn in detail about gas turbines, ramjet,
fundamentals of rocket propulsion and chemical rockets.
28
REFERENCES
1. Cumpsty, Jet propulsion, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
2. Fortescue and Stark, Spacecraft Systems Engineering, 1999.
3. G.P. Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,1998.
4. William H. Heiser and David T. Pratt, Hypersonic Airbreathing propulsion, AIAA Education
Series, 2001.
IL5091 DATA ANALYTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The Student should be made to:
Be exposed to big data
Learn the different ways of Data Analysis
Be familiar with data streams
Learn the mining and clustering
Be familiar with the visualization
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA 8
Introduction to Big Data Platform – Challenges of conventional systems - Web data – Evolution
of Analytic scalability, analytic processes and tools, Analysis vs reporting - Modern data analytic
tools, Stastical concepts: Sampling distributions, resampling, statistical inference, prediction
error.
UNIT II DATA ANALYSIS 12
Regression modeling, Multivariate analysis, Bayesian modeling, inference and Bayesian
networks, Support vector and kernel methods, Analysis of time series: linear systems analysis,
nonlinear dynamics - Rule induction - Neural networks: learning and generalization, competitive
learning, principal component analysis and neural networks; Fuzzy logic: extracting fuzzy
models from data, fuzzy decision trees, Stochastic search methods.
UNIT III MINING DATA STREAMS 8
Introduction to Streams Concepts – Stream data model and architecture - Stream Computing,
Sampling data in a stream – Filtering streams – Counting distinct elements in a stream –
Estimating moments – Counting oneness in a window – Decaying window - Realtime Analytics
Platform(RTAP) applications - case studies - real time sentiment analysis, stock market
predictions.
UNIT IV FREQUENT ITEMSETS AND CLUSTERING 9
Mining Frequent itemsets - Market based model – Apriori Algorithm – Handling large data sets in
Main memory – Limited Pass algorithm – Counting frequent itemsets in a stream – Clustering
Techniques – Hierarchical – K- Means – Clustering high dimensional data – CLIQUE and
PROCLUS – Frequent pattern based clustering methods – Clustering in non-euclidean space –
Clustering for streams and Parallelism.
UNIT V FRAMEWORKS AND VISUALIZATION 8
MapReduce – Hadoop, Hive, MapR – Sharding – NoSQL Databases - S3 - Hadoop Distributed
file systems – Visualizations - Visual data analysis techniques, interaction techniques; Systems
and applications:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
29
OUTCOMES:
The student should be made to:
Apply the statistical analysis methods.
Compare and contrast various soft computing frameworks.
Design distributed file systems.
Apply Stream data model.
Use Visualisation techniques
REFERENCES:
1. Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, Mining of Massive Datasets, Cambridge
University Press, 2012.
2. Bill Franks, Taming the Big Data Tidal Wave: Finding Opportunities in Huge Data Streams
with advanced analystics, John Wiley & sons, 2012.
3. Glenn J. Myatt, Making Sense of Data, John Wiley & Sons, 2007 Pete Warden, Big
Data Glossary, O‟Reilly, 2011.
4. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Second Edition,
Elsevier, Reprinted 2008.
5. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, Intelligent Data Analysis, Springer, 2007.
AO5010 AERO ELASTICITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students understand aero elastic phenomena, flutter and to make them to
solve steady state aero elastic problems.
UNIT I AEROELASTIC PHENOMENA 6
Stability versus response problems – The aero-elastic triangle of forces – Aeroelasticity in Aircraft
Design – Prevention of aeroelastic instabilities. Influence and stiffness co-efficients. Flexure –
torsional oscillations of beam – Differential equation of motion of beam.
UNIT II DIVERGENCE OF A LIFTING SURFACE 10
Simple two dimensional idealisations-Strip theory – Integral equation of the second kind – Exact
solutions for simple rectangular wings – ‘Semirigid’ assumption and approximate solutions –
Generalised coordinates – Successive approximations – Numerical approximations using matrix
equations.
UNIT III STEADY STATE AEROLASTIC PROBLEMS 9
Loss and reversal of aileron control – Critical aileron reversal speed – Aileron efficiency – Semi
rigid theory and successive approximations – Lift distribution – Rigid and elastic wings. Tail
efficiency. Effect of elastic deformation on static longitudinal stability.
UNIT IV FLUTTER PHENOMENON 14
Non-dimensional parameters – Stiffness criteria – Dynamic mass balancing – Dimensional
similarity. Flutter analysis – Two dimensional thin airfoils in steady incompressible flow –
Quasisteady aerodynamic derivatives. Galerkin method for critical flutter speed – Stability of
disturbed motion – Solution of the flutter determinant – Methods of determining the critical flutter
speeds – Flutter prevention and control.
UNIT V EXAMPLES OF AEROELASTIC PROBLEMS 6
Galloping of transmission lines and Flow induced vibrations of transmission lines, tall slender
structures and suspension bridges, VIV.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
30
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, Students can understand the theoretical concepts of material
behaviour with particular emphasis on their elasticity property.
REFERENCES
1. E.G. Broadbent, “Elementary Theory of Aeroelasticity”, Bun Hill Publications Ltd., 1986.
2. R.D.Blevins, “Flow Induced Vibrations”, Krieger Pub Co., 2001
3. R.H. Scanlan and R.Rosenbaum, “Introduction to the study of Aircraft Vibration and Flutter”,
Macmillan Co., New York, 1981.
4. R.L. Bisplinghoff, H.Ashley, and R.L. Halfmann, “Aeroelasticity”, II Edition Addison Wesley
Publishing Co., Inc., 1996.
5. Y.C. Fung, “An Introduction to the Theory of Aeroelasticity”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York,
2008.
EY5092 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF TURBOMACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To design and analyse the performance of Turbo machines for engineering applications
To understand the energy transfer process in Turbomachines and governing equations of
various forms.
To understand the structural and functional aspects of major components of Turbomachines.
To design various Turbomachines for power plant and aircraft applications
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Basics of isentropic flow – static and stagnation properties – diffuser and nozzle configurations -
area ratio – mass flow rate – critical properties. Energy transfer between fluid and rotor velocity
triangles for a generalized turbomachines - velocity diagrams. Euler's equation for turbomachines
and its different forms. Degree of reaction in turbo-machines – various efficiencies – isentropic,
mechanical, thermal, overall and polytropic
UNIT II CENTRIFUGAL AND AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS 9
Centrifugal compressor - configuration and working – slip factor - work input factor – ideal and
actual work - pressure coefficient - pressure ratio. Axial flow compressor – geometry and working
– velocity diagrams – ideal and actual work – stage pressure ratio - free vortex theory –
performance curves and losses
UNIT III COMBUSTION CHAMBER 9
Basics of combustion. Structure and working of combustion chamber – combustion chamber
arrangements - flame stability – fuel injection nozzles. Flame stabilization - cooling of combustion
chamber
UNIT IV AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9
Elementary theory of axial flow turbines - stage parameters- multi-staging - stage loading and flow
coefficients. Degree of reaction - stage temperature and pressure ratios – single and twin spool
arrangements – performance. Matching of components. Blade Cooling. Radial flow turbines.
UNIT V GAS TURBINE AND JET ENGINE CYCLES 9
Gas turbine cycle analysis – simple and actual. Reheated, Regenerative and Intercooled cycles for
power plants. Working of Turbojet, Turbofan, Turboprop, Ramjet, Scarmjet and Pulsejet Engines
and cycle analysis – thrust, specific impulse, specific fuel consumption, thermal and propulsive
efficiencies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
31
OUTCOMES:
When a student completes this subject, he / she can
Understand the design principles of the turbomachines
Analyse the turbomachines to improve and optimize its performance
REFERENCES:
1. Austin H. Chruch, Centrifugal pumps and blowers, John wiley and Sons, 1980.
2. Cohen H., Rogers, G F C. and Saravanmotto H I H., Gas Turbine Theory-5th Edition, John
Wiely, 2001.
3. Csanady G.T., Theory of Turbo machines, McGraw Hill, 1964.
4. Ganesan V., Gas Turbines, Tata McGrawHill, 2011.
5. Hill P G. and Peterson C R., Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion, Addition-Wesley,
1970.
6. Khajuria P.R. and Dubey S.P., Gas Turbines and Propulsive Systems, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, 2003.
7. Mattingly J D., Elements of Gas turbine Propulsion-1st Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.
AO5011 HELICOPTER AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to the students and fundamental aspects of helicopter aerodynamics,
performance of helicopters, stability and control aspects and also to expose them basic
and aerodynamic design aspects.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Types of rotorcraft – autogyro, gyrodyne, helicopter, Main rotor system – articulated, semi rigid,
rigid rotors, Collective pitch control, cyclic pitch control, anti torque pedals.
UNIT II HELICOPTER AERODYNAMICS 12
Momentum / actuator disc theory, Blade element theory, combined blade element and momentum
theory, vortex theory, rotor in hover, rotor model with cylindrical wake and constant circulation
along blade, free wake model, Constant chord and ideal twist rotors, Lateral flapping, Coriolis
forces, reaction torque, compressibility effects, Ground effect.
UNIT III PERFORMANCE 9
Hover and vertical flight, forward level flight, Climb in forward flight, optimum speeds, Maximum
level speed, rotor limits envelope – performance curves with effects of altitude
UNIT IV STABILITY AND CONTROL 9
Helicopter Trim, Static stability – Incidence disturbance, forward speed disturbance, angular
velocity disturbance, yawing disturbance, Dynamic Stability.
UNIT V AERODYNAMIC DESIGN 8
Blade section design, Blade tip shapes, Drag estimation – Rear fuselage upsweep,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about the basic ideas of evolution, performance
and associated stability problems of helicopter.
32
REFERENCES
1. A. Gessow and G.C.Meyers, “Aerodynamics of the Helicopter”, Macmillan and Co., New York,
1982.
2. J. Seddon, “ Basic Helicopter Aerodynamics”, AIAA Education series, Blackwell scientific
publications, U.K, 1990.
3. John Fay, “The Helicopter”, Himalayan Books, New Delhi, 1995.
4. Lalit Gupta, “Helicopter Engineering”, Himalayan Books, New Delhi, 1996.
5. Lecture Notes on “Helicopter Technology”, Department of Aerospace Engineering, IIT –Kanpur
and Rotary Wing aircraft R&D center, HAL, Bangalore, 1998.
AO5012 EXPERIMENTAL AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students learn basic wind tunnel measurements and flow visualization
methods, flow measurement variables and data acquisition method pertaining to
experiments in aerodynamics.
UNIT I BASIC MEASUREMENTS IN FLUID MECHANICS 8
Objective of experimental studies – Fluid mechanics measurements – Properties of fluids –
Measuring instruments – Performance terms associated with measurement systems – Direct
measurements - Analogue methods – Flow visualization –Components of measuring systems –
Importance of model studies - Experiments on Taylor-Proudman theorem and Ekman layer –
Measurements in boundary layers -
UNIT II WIND TUNNEL MEASEUREMENTS 8
Characteristic features, operation and performance of low speed, transonic, supersonic and
special tunnels - Power losses in a wind tunnel – Instrumentation and calibration of wind tunnels –
Turbulence- Wind tunnel balance – Principle and application and uses – Balance calibration.
UNIT III FLOW VISUALIZATION AND ANALOGUE METHODS 10
Visualization techniques – Smoke tunnel – Hele-Shaw apparatus - Interferometer – Fringe-
Displacement method – Shadowgraph - Schlieren system – Background Oriented Schliren (BOS)
System - Hydraulic analogy – Hydraulic jumps – Electrolytic tank
UNIT IV PRESSURE, VELOCITY AND TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS 10
Pitot-Static tube characteristics - Velocity measurements - Hot-wire anemometry – Constant
current and Constant temperature Hot-Wire anemometer – Hot-film anemometry – Laser Doppler
Velocimetry (LDV) – Particle Image Velocimetry (PIV) – Pressure Sensitive Paints - Pressure
measurement techniques - Pressure transducers – Temperature measurements.
UNIT V DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS AND UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS 9
Data acquisition and processing – Signal conditioning - Estimation of measurement errors –
Uncertainty calculation - Uses of uncertainty analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about the measurement of flow properties in
wind tunnels and their associated instrumentation.
REFERENCES
1. Rathakrishnan, E., “Instrumentation, Measurements, and Experiments in Fluids,”CRC Press –
Taylor & Francis, 2007.
2. Robert B Northrop, “Introduction to Instrumentation and Measurements”, Second Edition, CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis, 2006.
33
AO5013 HIGH TEMPERATURE GAS DYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students learn the kinetic theory of hypersonic flows and statistical
thermodynamic aspects of flows at very high temperatures and also to make them
familiarize the calculations transport properties of gases high temperature.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Nature of high temperature flows – Chemical effects in air – Real perfect gases – Gibb’s free
energy and entropy by chemical and non equilibrium – Chemically reacting mixtures and boundary
layers.
UNIT II STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS 8
Introduction to statistical thermodynamics – Relevance to hypersonic flow - Microscopic
description of gases – Boltzman distribution – Cartesian function
UNIT III KINETIC THEORY AND HYPERSONIC FLOWS 9
Chemical equilibrium calculation of equilibrium composition of high temperature air – equilibrium
properties of high temperature air – collision frequency and mean free path – velocity and speed
distribution functions.
UNIT IV INVISCID HIGH TEMPERATURE FLOWS 10
Equilibrium and non – equilibrium flows – governing equations for inviscid high temperature
equilibrium flows – equilibrium normal and oblique shock wave flows – frozen and equilibrium
flows – equilibrium conical and blunt body flows – governing equations for non equilibrium inviscid
flows.
UNIT V TRANSPORT PROPERTIES IN HIGH TEMPERATURE GASES 10
Transport coefficients – mechanisms of diffusion – total thermal conductivity – transport
characteristics for high temperature air – radiative transparent gases – radiative transfer equation
for transport, absorbing and emitting and absorbing gases.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn statistical thermodynamics and the transport
properties of high temperature gases.
REFERENCES
1. John D. Anderson, Jr., Hypersonic and High Temperature Gas Dynamics, McGraw-Hill Series,
New York, 1996.
2. John D. Anderson, Jr., Modern Compressible Flow with Historical perspective, McGraw-Hill
Series, New York, 1996.
3. John T. Bertin, Hypersonic Aerothermodynamics publishers - AIAA Inc., Washington,
D.C.,1994.
4. T.K.Bose, High Temperature Gas Dynamics,
5. William H. Heiser and David T. Pratt, Hypersonic Air breathing propulsion, AIAA Education
Series.
34
AO5075 HIGH SPEED JET FLOWS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To make the students learn about various jet control methods, jet acoustics aspects and
free shear layer flow theory pertaining to turbulent jets with high speed.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Types of nozzles – over expanded and underexpanded flows - Isentropic flow through nozzles–
Interaction of nozzle flows over adjacent surfaces – Mach disk - Jet flow – types - Numerical
problems.
UNIT II COMPRESSIBLE FLOW THEORY 9
One-dimensional compressible fluid flow – flow through variable area passage – nozzles and
diffusers – normal and oblique shock waves and calculation of flow and fluid properties across the
shocks and expansion fans. Interaction of shocks with solid and fluid surface.
UNIT III JET CONTROL 9
Types of jet control - single jet, multi jet, co-flow jet, parallel flow jet. Subsonic jets- Mathematical
treatment of jet profiles- Theory of Turbulent jets- Mean velocity and mean temperature-
Turbulence characteristics of free jets- Mixing length- Experimental methods for studying jets and
the Techniques used for analysis- Expansion levels of jets- Overexpanded, Correctly expanded,
Underexpanded jets - Control of jets. Centre line decay, Mach number Profile, Iso-Mach (or iso-
baric) contours, Shock cell structure in underexpanded and overexpanded jets, Mach discs.
UNIT IV BOUNDARY LAYER CONCEPT 9
Boundary Layer – displacement and momentum thickness- laminar and turbulent boundary layers
over flat plates – velocity distribution in turbulent flows over smooth and rough boundaries- laminar
sublayer. Shock-boundary layer interactions.
UNIT V JET ACOUSTICS 9
Introduction to Acoustic – Types of noise – Source of generation- Traveling wave solution-
standing wave solution – multi-dimensional acoustics -Noise suppression techniques– applications
to problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand various jet control methods, jet
acoustics aspects and free shear layer flow theory pertaining to turbulent jets with high speed.
REFERENCES
1. Ethirajan Rathakrishnan, “Applied Gas Dynamics”, John Wiley, NY,, 2010.
2. Liepmann and Roshko, “Elements of Gas Dynamics”, John Wiley, NY, 1963.
3. Rathakrishnan E., “Gas Dynamics”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Shapiro, AH, “Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible Fluid Flow”, Vols. I & II,
Ronald Press, New York, 1953.
AO5014 COMBUSTION IN JET AND ROCKET ENGINES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To impart knowledge to the students and basic principles of combustion, types of flames
and also make them familiarize the combustion process in gas turbine, ramjet, scram jet
and rocket engines.
35
UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS OF COMBUSTION 8
Staichiometry – absolute enthalpy- enthalpy of formation- enthalpy of combustion- laws of
thermochemistry- pressure and temperature effect on enthalpy of formation, adiabatic flame
temperature, chemical and equillibrium products of combustion.
UNIT II PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF COMBUSTION 9
Fundamental laws of transport phenomena, Conservations Equations, Transport in Turbulent
Flow. Basic Reaction Kinetics, Elementary reactions, Chain reactions, Multistep
reactions,simplification of reaction mechanism, Global kinetics.
UNIT III PREMIXED AND DIFFUSED FLAMES 12
One dimensional combustion wave, Laminar premixed flame, Burning velocity measurement
methods, Effects of chemical and physical variables on Burning
velocity,Flame extinction, Ignition, Flame stabilizations, Turbulent Premixed flame.
Gaseous Jet diffusion flame, Liquid fuel combustion, Atomization, Spray Combustion, Solid fuel
combustion.
UNIT IV COMBUSTION IN GAS TURBINE , RAMJET AND SCRAMJET 8
Combustion in gas turbine chambers, recirculation, combustion efficiency, flame holders, subsonic
combustion in ramjet, supersonic combustion in scramjet. Subsonic and supersonic combustion
controlled by decision mixing and heat convection.
UNIT V COMBUSTION IN CHEMICAL ROCKET 8
Combustion in liquid propellant rockets. Combustion of solid propellants- application of laminar
flame theory to the burning of homogeneous propellants, Combustion in hybrid rockets.
combustion instability in rockets.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about the thermodynamics, physics and
chemistry of combustion.
REFERENCES
1. D. P. Mishra . “ Fundamentals of Combustion”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008.
2. H. S. Mukunda, “Understanding Combustion”, 2nd edition, Orient Blackswan,2009.
3. Kuo K.K. “Principles of Combustion” John Wiley and Sons,2005.
4. Warren C. Strahle , “An Introduction to Combustion”, Taylor & Francis, 1993.
AO5015 PROPELLER AERODYNAMICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I AIR SCREW THEORY 8
Introduction – Non-Dimensional Coefficients – Air screw design – development of airscrew theory.
The actuator- disc theory, working states of rotor, optimum rotor, Efficiency of rotor.
UNIT II THE AXIAL MOMENTUM THEORY 10
The rankine-Froude theory- The momentum Equation – Ideal efficiency of a propeller. The general
momentum theory- General equations – constant circulation- approximate solution- minimum loss
of energy- constant efficiency. Propeller efficiency- Energy equation – approximate solution-
efficiency- numerical results.
UNIT III THE BLADE ELEMENT THEORY 9
Primitive Blade Element Theory- Efficiency of the blade element- Blade interface- The vortex
system of a propeller- induced velocity- The airfoil characteristics- Multi plane Interference-
cascade of airfoils – Airfoil characteristics in a cascade.
36
UNIT IV THE VORTEX THEORY 9
The propeller blades- Energy and Momentum- Propeller characteristics – The application of the
Vortex theory- The effect of solidity and pitch – Approximate method of solution- Effective Aspect
ratio of the blades. Propellers of highest efficiency- Minimum loss of energy- Lightly loaded
Propellers- Effect of profile drag- The effect of number of blades- Application of Prandtl’s Formula.
UNIT V EXPERIMENTAL AND SIMULATION APPROACH OF PROPELLERS 9
Experimental Methods- Wind tunnel interference- Thrust and Torque distribution- Scale effect-
Compressibility Effect. Basics of propeller simulations- Domain selection- Grid independency
study- Turbulence model investigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will gain knowledge on various Propeller theories and
propeller simulations
REFERENCES:
1. Durand, W.F., “Applied Aerodynamics- Volume IV”, Stanford University, California, 1934.
2. “Modeling Propeller Flow-Fields Using CFD” – AIAA 2008-402.
3. Kerwin, Justin, “lecture Notes on Hydrofoils and Propellers”, Cambridge, 2001.
4. Seddon, J., “Basic Helicopter Aerodynamics”, BSP Professional Books, Oxford London, 1990.
AO5009 AIRCRAFT GUIDANCE AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 4
Introduction to Guidance and control - definition, Historical background
UNIT II AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS 7
Need for automatic flight control systems, Stability augmentation systems, control augmentation
systems, Gain scheduling concepts.
UNIT III LONGITUDINAL AUTOPILOT 12
Displacement Autopilot-Pitch Orientation Control system, Acceleration Control System, Glide
Slope Coupler and Automatic Flare Control and Flight path stabilization, Longitudinal control law
design using back stepping algorithm.
UNIT IV LATERAL AUTOPILOT 10
Damping of the Dutch Roll, Methods of Obtaining Coordination, Yaw Orientation Control system,
turn compensation, Automatic lateral Beam Guidance. Introduction to Fly-by-wire flight control
systems, Lateral control law design using back stepping algorithm.
UNIT V MISSILE AND LAUNCH VEHICLE GUIDANCE 12
Operating principles and design of guidance laws, homing guidance laws- short range, Medium
range and BVR missiles, Launch Vehicle- Introduction, Mission requirements, Implicit guidance
schemes, Explicit guidance, Q guidance schemes
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon completion of the course, students will learn about longitudinal and lateral autopilot,
guidance of missile and launch vehicles.
37
REFERENCES:
1. Bernad Etikin,’Dynamic of flight stability and control’, John Wiley, 1972.
2. Blake Lock, J.H ‘Automatic control of Aircraft and missiles ‘, John Wiley Sons, New York, 1990.
3. Collinson R.P.G, ‘Introduction to Avionics’, Chapman and Hall, India, 1996.
4. Garnel.P. & East.D.J, ‘Guided Weapon control systems’, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1977.
5. Nelson R.C ‘Flight stability & Automatic Control’, McGraw Hill, 1989.
6. Stevens B.L & Lewis F.L, ‘Aircraft control & simulation’, John Wiley Sons, New York, 1992.
AO5092 AVIONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data buses
To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AVIONICS 9
Need for avionics in civil and military aircraft and space systems – integrated avionics and weapon
systems – typical avionics subsystems, design, technologies – Introduction to digital computer and
memories.
UNIT II DIGITAL AVIONICS ARCHITECTURE 9
Avionics system architecture – data buses – MIL-STD-1553B – ARINC – 420, ARINC-429 –
ARINC – 629.
UNIT III FLIGHT DECKS AND COCKPITS 9
Control and display technologies: CRT, LED, LCD, EL and plasma panel – Touch screen – Direct
voice input (DVI) – Civil and Military Cockpits: MFDS, HUD, MFK, HOTAS.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO NAVIGATION SYSTEMS 9
Radio navigation – ADF, DME, VOR, LORAN, DECCA, OMEGA, TACAN, ILS, MLS, Hyperbolic
navigation systems, Ground Control Approach Systems. Dead reckoning navigation systems,
Doppler navigational and inertial navigation– Inertial Navigation Systems (INS) – INS block
diagram – Satellite navigation systems – Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS),
GPS.
UNIT V AIR DATA SYSTEMS AND AUTO PILOT 9
Air data quantities – Altitude, Air speed, Vertical speed, Mach meter, Total air temperature, Mach
warning, Altitude warning – Auto pilot – Basic principles, Longitudinal and lateral auto pilot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To introduce the basic of avionics and its need for civil and military aircrafts
To impart knowledge about the avionic architecture and various avionics data buses
To gain more knowledge on various avionics subsystems
REFERENCES:
1. Albert Helfrick.D., "Principles of Avionics", Avionics Communications Inc., 2004
2. Collinson.R.P.G. "Introduction to Avionics", Chapman and Hall, 1996.
3. Middleton, D.H., Ed., "Avionics systems, Longman Scientific and Technical", Longman Group
UK Ltd., England, 1989.
4. Spitzer, C.R. "Digital Avionics Systems", Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., U.S.A. 1993.
5. Spitzer. C.R. "The Avionics Hand Book", CRC Press, 2000
6. Pallet.E.H.J. "Aircraft Instruments and Integrated Systems", Longman Scientific.
38
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
M.E. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):
To provide students with strong fundamental concepts and also advanced techniques and
tools to build various communication systems.
To enable graduates to attain successful professional careers by applying their engineering
skills in communication system design to meet out the challenges in industries and academia.
To engage graduates in lifelong learning, adapt emerging technology and pursue research for
the development of innovative products.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POS):
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and
synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities
with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant
to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need
for sustainable development.
1
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and
receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES (PSOs)
To inculcate the ability in graduates to design and analyze the subsystems such as RF, Signal
Processing, Modern communication systems and networks.
To enhance problem solving skills in communication systems design using latest hardware
and software tools.
To apply communication engineering principles and practices for developing products for
scientific and business applications.
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) WITH PROGRAMME
OUTCOMES (POs):
The mapping between the Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs) and the Programme
Outcomes (POs) is given in the following table
Programme Outcomes (POs)
PEOs PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PEO 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 2 - - 2
PEO 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 1
PEO 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 3
2
The mapping between the Programme Specific Objectives (PSOs) and the Programme
Outcomes (POs) is given in the following table
Programme Outcomes (POs)
PSOs PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PSO 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - 1
PSO 2 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 - 1 - - 1
PSO 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
3
M.E. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
SEMESTER COURSE WISE PO MAPPING
Programme Outcomes
SUBJECTS
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO5
PO8 PO9 PO10
PO11 PO12
Applied Mathematics for
3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1
Communication Engineers
Advanced Radiation Systems 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 2
Advanced Digital Communication
3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 2 - - 2
Techniques
Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2
SEMESTER I
Optical Networks 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - 2
Professional Elective I
Advanced Satellite Communication
3 3 1 1 2 1 - - 2 1 - 2
and Navigation Systems
I DSP Processor Architecture and
Y 2 1 3 3 3 1 - - 2 1 - 2
Programming
E Analog and Mixed Mode VLSI
A 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 2 1 - - 2
Design
R Real Time Embedded Systems 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 3
MEMS and NEMS 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1
Communication Systems
3 3 1 1 2 1 1 - 2 - 1 3
Laboratory
Advanced Wireless Communication
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 2
Systems
SEMESTER II
MIC and RF System Design 2 2 3 3 2 3 - 1 2 1 1 3
Electromagnetic Interference and
3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 - - 2
Compatibility
Professional Elective II
Communication Network Modeling
3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 2 - - 2
and Simulation
4
Digital Communication Receivers 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
Detection and Estimation Theory 3 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 1 2 1 2
VLSI for Wireless Communication 1 2 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
Cognitive Radio Networks 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - 3
Professional Elective III
Advanced Antenna Design 2 2 3 3 2 3 - 1 2 1 1 3
Advanced Digital Image Processing 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
Radar Signal Processing 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 - 2 2 1 2
Speech Processing and Synthesis 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 3
Advanced Wireless Networks 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 - 1 2
Professional Elective IV
Wavelet Transforms and its
2 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 2 2 1 3
Applications
Spectrum Management Techniques
Broadband Access Technologies 3 1 1 1 1 1 - - 2 1 - 2
Software Defined Radio 3 1 1 1 2 1 - - 2 1 - 2
Space Time Wireless
2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 3
Communication
RF System Design Laboratory 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Term Paperwriting and Seminar 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3
Millimeter Wave Communication 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 2
Professional Elective V
SEMESTER III
II Network Routing Algorithms 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 2 - - 2
Y Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
E 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 2 - - 2
Networks
A Internet of Things 3 2 1 1 3 2 - - 2 1 - 2
R Multimedia Compression
3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 3
Techniques
Ultra Wide Band Communication 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - 1 - 1 2
5
Professional Elective VI
Soft Computing Techniques 3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Network Processors 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1
Network Management 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 - 1 2
Communication Network Security 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 3
High Performance Switching
3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3
Architectures
SEMESTER IV
Project Work Phase – II
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
6
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
M.E. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER - I
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA5154 Applied Mathematics for
FC 4 4 0 0 4
Communication Engineers
2. CU5191 Advanced Radiation Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CU5151 Advanced Digital
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Techniques
4. AP5152 Advanced Digital Signal
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Processing
5. CU5192 Optical Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CU5161 Communication Systems
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 25 19 2 4 22
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. CU5291 Advanced Wireless
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication Systems
2. CU5201 MIC and RF System Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. CU5292 Electromagnetic Interference
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Compatibility
4. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective III PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. CU5211 RF System Design Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
8. CP5281 Term Paper Writing and
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Seminar
TOTAL 24 18 0 6 21
7
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. CU5301 Millimeter Wave
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
2. Professional Elective V
PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. Professional Elective VI
PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
4. CU5311 Project Work Phase I EEC 12 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 21 9 0 12 15
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. CU5411 Project Work Phase II
EEC 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 70
8
FOUNDATION COURSES (FC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. Applied Mathematics
MA5154 for Communication FC 4 4 0 0 4
Engineers
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CU5191 Advanced Radiation
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
2. CU5151 Advanced Digital
Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
3. AP5152 Advanced Digital
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Signal Processing
4. CU5192 Optical Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. CU5161 Communication
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
6. CU5291 Advanced Wireless
Communication PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
7. CU5201 MIC and RF System
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Design
8. CU5292 Electromagnetic
Interference and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Compatibility
9. CU5211 RF System Design
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
10. CU5301 Millimeter Wave
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSE (EEC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. Term Paper Writing
CP5281 EEC 2 0 0 2 1
and Seminar
2. CU5311 Project Work
EEC 12 0 0 12 6
Phase – I
3. CU5411 Project Work
EEC 24 0 0 24 12
Phase – II
9
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)*
SEMESTER I
ELECTIVE I
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CU5091 Advanced Satellite
Communication and Navigation PE 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
2. DS5191 DSP Processor Architecture
PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Programming
3. CU5001 Analog and Mixed Mode VLSI
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Design
4. CU5092 Real Time Embedded Systems PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. VL5091 MEMS and NEMS PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER II
ELECTIVE II
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CU5002 Communication Network
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Modeling and Simulation
2. CU5071 Digital Communication
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Receivers
3. CU5072 Detection and Estimation
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Theory
4. CU5073 VLSI for Wireless
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
5. NC5251 Cognitive Radio Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER II
ELECTIVE III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CU5003 Advanced Antenna Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. DS5291 Advanced Digital Image
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
3. DS5292 Radar Signal Processing PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CP5096 Speech Processing and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Synthesis
5. NC5252 Advanced Wireless Networks PE 3 3 0 0 3
10
SEMESTER II
ELECTIVE IV
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. CU5093 Wavelet Transforms and its
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
2. EL5071 Broadband Access
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Technologies
3. CU5094 Software Defined Radio PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. CU5095 Space Time Wireless
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
5. CU5096 Pattern Recognition and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Machine Learning
SEMESTER III
ELECTIVE V
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. NC5071 Network Routing Algorithms PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. CU5097 Wireless Adhoc and Sensor
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
3. CP5292 Internet of Things PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. MU5091 Multimedia Compression
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
5. CU5074 Ultra Wide Band
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
SEMESTER III
ELECTIVE VI
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MP5092 Soft Computing Techniques PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. NC5072 Network Processors PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. NE5071 Network Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. NC5291 Communication Network
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Security
5. CU5004 High Performance Switching
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Architectures
11
MA5154 APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR COMMUNICATION ENGINEERS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The primary objective of this course is to demonstrate various analytical skills in applied mathematics
and extensive experience with the tactics of problem solving and logical thinking applicable in
communication engineering. This course also will help the students to identify, formulate, abstract,
and solve problems in electrical engineering using mathematical tools from a variety of mathematical
areas, including linear algebra, matrix linear programming, probability, numerical solution of ordinary
differential equations and queuing models.
UNIT I LINEAR ALGEBRA 12
Vector spaces – Norms – Inner products – Eigenvalues using QR transformations – QR factorization -
Generalized eigenvectors – Canonical forms – Singular value decomposition and applications -
Pseudo inverse – Least square approximations - Toeplitz matrices and some applications.
UNIT II LINEAR PROGRAMMING 12
Formulation – Graphical solution – Simplex method – Big M method - Two phase method -
Transportation problems - Assignment models.
UNIT III NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12
Runge - Kutta method of fourth order for system of IVPs - Numerical stability of Runge - Kutta method
- Adams - Bashforth multistep method - Shooting method, BVP : Finite difference method and
collocation method and orthogonal collocation method.
UNIT IV PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – Axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Random variables -
Probability function - Two dimensional random variables - Joint distributions – Marginal and
conditional distributions – Functions of two dimensional random variables – Regression curve –
Correlation.
UNIT V QUEUEING MODELS 12
Poisson Process – Markovian queues – Single and multi - server models – Little’s formula - Machine
interference model – Steady state analysis – Self service queue.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Concepts on vector spaces, linear transformation, inner product spaces, eigenvalues and
generalized eigenvectors.
Apply various methods in linear algebra to solve system of linear equations.
Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving
linear programming problems.
Numerical solution of differential equations by single and multistep methods.
Computation of probability, random variables and their associated distributions, correlations
and regression.
Conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
Exposing the basic characteristic features of a queuing system and acquire skills in analyzing
queuing models.
Using discrete time Markov chains to model computer systems.
12
REFERENCES:
1. Bronson, R. and Costa, G. B., “Linear Algebra”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 2007.
2. Burden, R. C. and Faires, J. D., "Numerical Analysis ", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
3. Gross, D., Shortle, J.F., Thompson, J. M. and Harris, C. M., "Fundamentals of Queueing
Theory “, 4th Edition, Wiley, 2014.
4. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
5. Sastry, S. S., "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis ", 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
6. Taha H.A., “Operations Research: An Introduction”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, New
Delhi, 2016.
CU5191 ADVANCED RADIATION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand antenna radiation and its parameters.
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of various antenna design.
• To design mono pole, dipole and patch antenna and to impart the knowledge about modern
antennas.
UNIT I ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Wave equations, radiation pattern, HPBW,FNBW, gain and directivity, polarization, equivalent circuit,
radiation resistance, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface and line current distributions – dipole,
monopole, loop antenna, Antenna parameters, Image theory; Induction, reciprocity theorem, Balance
to unbalance transformer, Introduction to numerical techniques.
UNIT II RADIATION FROM APERTURES 9
Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform aperture,
distribution on an infinite ground plane; Slot antenna; Horn antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture
blockage, design considerations.
UNIT III ARRAYS 9
Introduction-General structure of phased array, linear array theory, variation of gain as a function of
pointing direction, effects of phase quantization, frequency scanned arrays, analog beamforming
matrices-Active modules, digital beam forming, MEMS technology in phased arrays-Retrodirective
and self phased arrays.
UNIT IV MICRO STRIP ANTENNA 9
Radiation mechanism from patch; Excitation techniques; Microstrip dipole; Rectangular patch, Circular
patch, and Ring antenna – radiation analysis from transmission line model, cavity model; input
impedance of rectangular and circular patch antenna; Microstrip array and feed network; Applications
of microstrip array antenna.
UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Mobile phone antenna ,base station, hand set antenna, UWB antenna, PIFA, Vivaldi antenna,
Antenna for automobiles, Broadband antenna, antenna factor, Gain, impedance and radiation pattern
measurements, Test sites and anechoic chamber.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
13
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand antenna concepts
Ability to design antenna for various applications
Knowledge of modern antenna design
REFERENCES:
1. Balanis.A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1982.
2. Hubregt.J.Visser “Antenna Theory and Applications” 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons
Ltd,New York,2012.
3. S.Drabowitch et.al., ”Modern Antennas”, 2nd Edition Springer science business
Media,Inc.2005
4. Xavier Begaud, “Ultra Wide Band Antennas” , 1st Edition, ISTE Ltd and John Wiley &
Sons Ltd, New York,2013.
5. Zhijun Zhang” Antenna Design for Mobile Devices” 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons
(Asia) Ltd, New York,2011.
ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES L T P C
CU5151
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of signal-space analysis and digital transmission.
To understand the coherent and noncoherent receivers and its impact on different channel
characteristics.
To understand the different Equalizers
To understand the different block coded and convolutional coded digital communication
systems.
To understand the basics of Multicarrier and Multiuser Communications.
UNIT I COHERENT AND NON-COHERENT COMMUNICATION 9
Coherent receivers – Optimum receivers in WGN – IQ modulation & demodulation – Noncoherent
receivers in random phase channels; MFSK receivers – Rayleigh and Rician channels – Partially
coherent receivers – DPSK; M-PSK; M-DPSK-BER Performance Analysis. Carrier Synchronization-
Bit synchronization.
UNIT II EQUALIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Band Limited Channels- ISI – Nyquist Criterion- Controlled ISI-Partial Response signals- Equalization
algorithms – Viterbi Algorithm – Linear equalizer – Decision feedback equalization – Adaptive
Equalization algorithms.
UNIT III BLOCK CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 9
Architecture and performance – Binary block codes; Orthogonal; Biorthogonal; Transorthogonal –
Shannon’s channel coding theorem; Channel capacity; Matched filter; Concepts of Spread spectrum
communication – Coded BPSK and DPSK demodulators– Linear block codes; Hammning; Golay;
Cyclic; BCH ; Reed – Solomon codes. Space time block codes.
14
UNIT IV CONVOLUTIONAL CODED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 9
Representation of codes using Polynomial, State diagram, Tree diagram, and Trellis diagram –
Decoding techniques using Maximum likelihood, Viterbi algorithm, Sequential and Threshold methods
– Error probability performance for BPSK and Viterbi algorithm, Turbo Coding.
UNIT V MULTICARRIER AND MULTIUSER COMMUNICATIONS 9
Single Vs multicarrier modulation, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM), Modulation and
demodulation in an OFDM system, An FFT algorithmic implementation of an OFDM system, Bit and
power allocation in multicarrier modulation, Peak-to-average ratio in multicarrier modulation.
Introduction to CDMA systems, multiuser detection in CDMA systems – optimum multiuser receiver,
suboptimum detectors, successive interference cancellation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop the ability to understand the concepts of signal space analysis for coherent
and non- coherent receivers.
Conceptually appreciate different Equalization techniques
Possess knowledge on different block codes and convolutional codes.
Comprehend the generation of OFDM signals and the techniques of multiuser
detection.
REFERENCES:
1. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications”, second edition, Pearson Education, 2001.
2. John G. Proakis, “Digital Communication”, Fifth Edition, Mc Graw Hill Publication,
2008.
3. M.K.Simon, S.M.Hinedi and W.C.Lindsey, “Digital communication techniques; Signal
Design and Detection”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1995.
4. Richard Van Nee & Ramjee Prasad, “OFDM for Multimedia Communications” Artech
House Publication, 2001.
5. Stephen G. Wilson, “Digital Modulation and Coding”, First Indian Reprint, Pearson
Education, 2003.
6. Simon Haykin, “Digital communications”, John Wiley and sons, 1998.
7. Theodore S.Rappaport, ‘Wireless Communications”, 2nd edition, Pearson Education,
2002.
AP5152 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The student comprehends mathematical description and modelling of discrete time random
signals.
The student is conversant with important theorems and random signal processing algorithms.
The student learns relevant figures of merit such as power, energy, bias and consistency.
The student is familiar with estimation, prediction, filtering, multirate concepts and
techniques.
UNIT I DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING 9+6
Discrete random processes – Ensemble averages – Wide sense stationary process – Properties -
Ergodic process – Sample mean & variance - Auto-correlation and Auto-correlation matrices-
Properties – White noise process – Weiner Khitchine relation - Power spectral density – Filtering
random process – Spectral Factorization Theorem – Special types of Random Processes – AR,MA,
ARMA Processes – Yule-Walker equations.
15
UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 9+6
Bias and Consistency of estimators - Non-Parametric methods – Periodogram – Modified
Periodogram – Barlett’s method – Welch’s mehod – Blackman-Tukey method – Parametric
methods – AR, MA and ARMA spectrum estimation - Performance analysis of estimators.
UNIT III SIGNAL MODELING AND OPTIMUM FILTERS 9+6
Introduction- Least square method – Pade approximation – Prony’s method – Levinson Recursion –
Lattice filter - FIR Wiener filter – Filtering – Linear Prediction – Non Causal and Causal IIR Weiner
Filter -– Mean square error – Discrete Kalman filter.
UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9+6
FIR Adaptive filters - Newton's steepest descent method – Widrow Hoff LMS Adaptive algorithm –
Convergence – Normalized LMS – Applications – Noise cancellation - channel equalization – echo
canceller – Adaptive Recursive Filters - RLS adaptive algorithm – Exponentially weighted RLS-
sliding window RLS.
UNIT V MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 9+6
Decimation - Interpolation – Sampling Rate conversion by a rational factor I/D – Multistage
implementation of sampling rate conversion – Polyphase filter structures – Applications of multirate
signal processing.
TOTAL45+30: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Formulate time domain and frequency domain description of Wide Sense Stationary process
in terms of matrix algebra and relate to linear algebra concepts.
State W-K theorem, spectral factorization theorem, spectrum estimation, bias and
consistency of estimators.
Wiener filtering, LMS algorithms, Levinson recursion algorithm, applications of adaptive filters
Decimation, interpolation, Sampling rate conversion, Applications of multirate signal
processing
REFERENCES:
1. Johna. G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Monson H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., New York, 2006.
3. P. P.
a. Vaidyanathan, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks”, Prentice Hall, 1992.
4. S. Kay,”
a. Modern spectrum Estimation theory and application”, Prentice Hall, Englehood
Cliffs, NJ1988.
5. Simon
a. Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, Prentice Hall, Englehood Cliffs, NJ1986.
6. Sophoncles
a. J. Orfanidis, “Optimum Signal Processing “, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
CU5192 OPTICAL NETWORKS LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to understand:
Optical system components like optical amplifiers, wavelength converters.
Up-to-date survey of development in Optical Network Architectures.
Packet switching.
16
Network design perspectives.
Different Optical Network management techniques and functions.
UNIT I 9
Introduction to Optical Networks: Telecommunications Networks Architecture, Services, circuit
switching and packet switching, Optical Networks: Multiplexing Techniques, Second generation
Optical Networks, Optical Packet Switching, Transmission Basics: Wavelength, frequencies, and
channel spacing, Wavelength standards, Optical power and loss, Network Evolution, Nonlinear
Effects: Self-phase Modulation, Cross-phase Modulation, Four Wave mixing, Solitons. Components:
Couplers, Isolators and Circulators, Multiplexers and Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Transmitters,
Detectors, Switches, Wavelength Converters.
UNIT II 9
Transmission System Engineering: System Model, Power Penalty, Transmitter, Receiver, Optical
Amplifiers, Crosstalk, Dispersion, Wavelength Stabilization, Overall Design Considerations. Optical
Internets: Migration to IP optical networking, IP and Optical backbone, IP Routing table, MPLS and
optical cross connect table, Protocol stack Alternatives, Internetworking SS7 and Legacy Transport,
Internet transport network protocol stack.
UNIT III 9
SONET, SDH and Optical Transport Networks (OTNs): SONET and SDH: SONET multiplexing
hierarchy, Frame structure, Functional Component, problem detection, concatenation. Architecture of
Optical Transport Networks (OTNs): Digital wrapper, in-band and out-of band control signalling,
Importance of Multiplexing and multiplexing hierarchies, SONET multiplexing hierarchies, SDH
multiplexing hierarchies, New Optical Transport, OTN layered Model, Generic Framing Procedure
(GFP)
UNIT IV 9
WDM, Network topologies, MPLS and Optical Networks: WDM: WDM operation, Dense Wavelength
Division Multiplexing (DWDM), Erbium-doped Fiber (EDF), WDM amplifiers, Add-Drop Multiplexers,
Wavelength Continuity Property, Higher dispersion for DWDM, Tunable DWDM Lasers.
UNIT V 9
Network topologies and protection schemes: Robust networks, Line and path protection switching,
Types of topology, Point to point topology, bi-directional line-switched ring (BLSR), meshed topology,
Passive optical networks, Metro optical networks 28 MPLS and Optical Networks: IS label switching,
Forwarding equivalence class (FEC), Types of MPLS nodes, Label distribution and binding, label
swapping and traffic forwarding, MPLS support of Virtual Private Networks (VPN), MPLS traffic
engineering, Multi protocol Lambda switching (MPIS).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Design and Analyze Network Components
Assess and Evaluate optical networks
REFERENCES:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar Sivarajan, "Optical Networks – Practical Perspective", 3rd Edition,
Morgan - Kaufmann Publishers.
2. Optical Networks, Third Generation Transport Systems, Uyless Black, Pearson
17
CU5161 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC
0 0 42
OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on Transmission line and S- parameter estimation of microwave
devices.
To introduce the basics of Microstrip Patch Antenna and its analysis .
To study & measure the performance of digital communication systems.
To provide a comprehensive knowledge of Wireless Communication.
To learn about the design of digital filter and its adaptive filtering algorithms.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
USE NETWORK ANALYSER FOR THE FOLLOWING EXPERIMENTS:
1. Measurement of transmission line parameters.
2. S-parameter estimation of Microwave devices.
3. Design and testing of a Microstrip coupler.
4. Characteristics of Microstrip patch antenna.
USE APPROPRIATE SIMULATION TOOLS FOR THE FOLLOWING EXPERIMENTS:
1. Generation & detection of binary digital modulation techniques.
2. Spread Spectrum communication system-Pseudo random binary sequence generation-Baseband
DSSS.
3. Digital Filter Design
4. Performance evaluation of simulated CDMA system
5. Channel equalizer design(LMS,RLS)
6. Antenna Radiation Pattern measurement
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of course, students are able to
Measure and analyze various transmission line parameters.
Design Microstrip patch antennas.
Implement the adaptive filtering algorithms
To generate and detect digital communication signals of various modulation techniques using
MATLAB.
Evaluate cellular mobile communication technology and propagation model.
CU5291 ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to:
Understand Concepts of MIMO diversity and spatial multiplexing.
Learn Massive MIMO system
Know millimeter wave communication
18
UNIT I INFORMATION THEORETIC ASPECTS OF MIMO 10
Review of SISO fading communication channels, MIMO Channel models, Classical i.i.d. and extended
channels, Frequency selective and correlated channels models, Capacity of MIMO channels,
Erogodic and outage capacity, capacity bounds and influence of channel properties on the capacity.
UNIT II MIMO DIVERSITY AND SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING 10
Sources and types of diversity, analysis under Rayleigh fading, Diversity and channel knowledge.
Alamouti space time code. MIMO spatial multiplexing: Space time receivers, ML, ZF, MMSE and
Sphere decoding, BLAST receivers and Diversity multiplexing trade - off.
UNIT III MASSIVE MIMO SYSTEM 9
Introduction - MIMO for LTE, capacity of massive MIMO, Pilot Design for massive MIMO, Resource
allocation and transceivers design, Base band and RF implementation, Channel Models.
UNIT IV MILLIMETER WAVE COMMUNICATION 8
Spectrum regulation, Channel propagation, Hardware technology for mmW systems, architecture and
mobility, Beam forming techniques, Beam finding, Physical layer techniques - Duplex scheme and
Transmission Scheme.
UNIT V SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO AND COGNITIVE RADIO 8
SDR - Definition, Origin, key characteristic, hardware and software architecture, waveforms. Cognitive
Radio - Definitions, Cognitive theories, architectures, Cognitive radio as self controlling system,
Ontology based cognitive radio.
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze MIMO system.
Discuss millimeter wave communication.
Demonstrate software defined radio and cognitive radio.
REFERENCES:
1. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, "Fundamentals of Wireless Communication", Cambridge
University Press 2005.
2. Hamid Jafarkhani, "Space - Time Coding: Theory and Practices", Cambridge University Press
2005.
3. Mischa Dohler, Jose F. Monserrat Afif Osseiran " 5G Mobile and Wireless Communication
Technology", Cambridge University Press 2016.
4. Mieczyslaw M Kokar, Lezek Lechowicz, "Cognitive Radio Interoperability through Waveform
Reconfiguration" ARTECH House 2016.
CU5201 MIC AND RF SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the fundamentals of RF design and Microwave integrated circuits.
• To understand the various components of RF system for Wireless Communications.
• To know the basic techniques needed for analysis of RF systems.
19
UNIT I CMOS PHYSICS, TRANSCEIVER SPECIFICATIONS AND 9
ARCHITECTURES
CMOS: Introduction to MOSFET Physics, Noise: Thermal, shot, flicker, popcorn noise
transceiver Specifications: Two port Noise theory, Noise Figure, THD, IP2, IP3, Sensitivity,
SFDR, Phase noise. Transceiver Architectures: Receiver: Homodyne, Heterodyne, Image
reject, Low IF Architectures, Transmitter: Direct up conversion, Two step up conversion
schemes.
UNIT II IMPEDANCE MATCHING AND AMPLIFIERS 9
Review of S-parameters and Smith chart, Passive IC components, Impedance matching
networks, Amplifiers: Common Gate, Common Source Amplifiers, OC Time constants in
bandwidth estimation and enhancement , High frequency amplifier design, Low Noise
Amplifiers: Power match and Noise match , Single ended and Differential schemes.
UNIT III FEEDBACK SYSTEMS AND POWER AMPLIFIERS 9
Feedback Systems: Stability of feedback systems: Gain and phase margin, Root-locus
techniques, Time and Frequency domain considerations , Compensation Power
Amplifiers: General model – Class A, AB, B, C, D, E and F amplifiers, Linearization
Techniques, Efficiency boosting techniques, ACPR metric, Design considerations
UNIT IV RF FILTER , OSILLATOR, MIXER 9
Overview-basic resonator and filter configuration, special filter realizations, filter
implementation. Basic oscillator model, high frequency oscillator configuration, basic
characteristics of mixers, phase locked loops, RF directional couplers, hybrid couplers,
detector and demodulator circuits.
UNIT V MIC COMPONENTS 9
Introduction to MICs, Fabrication Technology, Advantages and applications, MIC
components- Micro strip components, Coplanar circuits: Transistors, switches, active filters.
Coplanar microwave amplifiers: LNA design and Medium power amplifiers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Capability to design RF circuits.
• To be able to analyze RF circuits.
REFERENCES:
1. B.Razavi, “RF Microelectronics”, Pearson Education, 1997.
2. Ingo Wolff,” Coplanar Microwave Integrated circuits”, John Wiley and sons, New
Jersey, 2006.
3. T. Lee,”Design of CMOS RF Integrated Circuits”, Cambridge, 2004.
CU5292 ELECTRO MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND COMPATIBILITY LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to be familiar with:
The basics of EMI
EMI sources.
20
EMI problems.
Solution methods in PCB.
Measurements techniques for emission.
Measurement techniques for immunity.
UNIT I BASIC THEORY 9
Introduction to EMI and EMC, Intra and inter system EMI, Elements of Interference, Sources and
Victims of EMI, Conducted and Radiated EMI emission and susceptibility, Case Histories, Radiation
hazards to humans, Various issues of EMC, EMC Testing categories EMC Engineering Application.
UNIT II COUPLING MECHANISM 9
Electromagnetic field sources and Coupling paths, Coupling via the supply network, Common mode
coupling, Differential mode coupling, Impedance coupling, Inductive and Capacitive coupling,
Radioactive coupling, Ground loop coupling, Cable related emissions and coupling, Transient
sources, Automotive transients.
UNIT III EMI MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 9
Working principle of Shielding and Murphy‟s Law, LF Magnetic shielding, Apertures and shielding
effectiveness, Choice of Materials for H, E, and free space fields, Gasketting and sealing, PCB Level
shielding, Principle of Grounding, Isolated grounds, Grounding strategies for Large systems,
Grounding for mixed signal systems, Filter types and operation, Surge protection devices, Transient
Protection.
UNIT IV STANDARD AND REGULATION 9
Need for Standards, Generic/General Standards for Residential and Industrial environment, Basic
Standards, Product Standards, National and International EMI Standardizing Organizations; IEC,
ANSI, FCC, AS/NZS, CISPR, BSI, CENELEC, ACEC. Electro Magnetic Emission and susceptibility
standards and specifications, MIL461E Standards.
UNIT V EMI TEST METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION 9
Fundamental considerations, EMI Shielding effectiveness tests, Open field test, TEM cell for immunity
test, Shielded chamber , Shielded anechoic chamber, EMI test receivers, Spectrum analyzer, EMI test
wave simulators, EMI coupling networks, Line impedance stabilization networks, Feed through
capacitors, Antennas, Current probes, MIL -STD test methods, Civilian STD test methods.
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Identify Standards
Compare EMI test methods
Discuss EMI mitigation techniques
21
REFERENCES:
1. Bemhard Keiser, “Principles of Electromagnetic Compatibility”, 3rd Ed, Artech house, Norwood,
1986.
2. Clayton Paul, “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility”, Wiley Interscience, 2006.
3. Daryl Gerke and William Kimmel, “EDN‟s Designer‟s Guide to Electromagnetic Compatibility”,
Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2002
4. Dr Kenneth L Kaiser, “The Electromagnetic Compatibility Handbook”, CRC Press 2005.
5. Electromagnetic Compatibility by Norman Violette ,Published by Springer, 2013
6. Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility: Electrical noise and EMI specifications Volume 1
of A Handbook Series on Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility, Donald R. J. White
Publisher-Don white consultants Original from the University of Michigan Digitized 6
Dec 2007
7. Henry W. Ott, “Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, Newyork,
2009
8. V Prasad Kodali, “Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility”, IEEE Press, Newyork, 2001.
9. W Scott Bennett, “Control and Measurement of Unintentional Electromagnetic Radiation”, John
Wiley & Sons Inc., (Wiley Interscience Series) 1997.
CU5211 RF SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
• To enable the students to verify the basic principles and design aspects involved in high
frequency communication systems components
• To expose the student to different high frequency components and conduct the
experiments to analyze and interpret data to produce meaningful conclusion and match
with theoretical concepts.
• To design and develop RF components using microstrip technology
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
(ADS/IE3D/HFSS or any similar/ equivalent tool may be used for the design)
1. Measurement of S parameters for a) Inductor b) Capacitor c) impedance matching
circuits, filters using network analyzer
2. Design of λ/2, λ/4 micro strip transmission line.
3. Design of microstrip inductor and capacitor.
4. Design of impedance matching network.
5. Design of low pass, high pass, band pass and band stop filter at RF .
6. Design and characterization of micro strip patch antennas
7. Design and characterization of LNA
8. Design and characterization of Mixer
9. Design and characterization of VCO
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
22
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Apply knowledge to identify a suitable architecture and systematically design an RF
system.
Comprehensively record and report the measured data, and would be capable of
analyzing, interpreting the experimentally measured data and produce the meaningful
conclusions.
Design and develop microstrip filters.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
Network analyser Equipment - 1.5 GHz (Minimum) - 1 No
ADS/IE3D/HFSS or any similar / equivalent Electromagnetic Simulation tool
for Design experiments - 10 User license
Desktop PC’s for hosting Electromagnetic simulation tool – 10 Numbers
Inductor, Capacitor, matching circuits, filters capable of operating at 500 MHz or above
CP5281 TERM PAPER WRITING AND SEMINAR LTPC
0 02 1
In this course, students will develop their scientific and technical reading and writing skills that they
need to understand and construct research articles. A term paper requires a student to obtain
information from a variety of sources (i.e., Journals, dictionaries, reference books) and then place it in
logically developed ideas. The work involves the following steps:
1. Selecting a subject, narrowing the subject into a topic
2. Stating an objective.
3. Collecting the relevant bibliography (atleast 15 journal papers)
4. Preparing a working outline.
5. Studying the papers and understanding the authors contributions and critically analysing each
paper.
6. Preparing a working outline
7. Linking the papers and preparing a draft of the paper.
8. Preparing conclusions based on the reading of all the papers.
9. Writing the Final Paper and giving final Presentation
Please keep a file where the work carried out by you is maintained.
Activities to be carried Out.
Activity Instructions Submission Evaluation
week
Selection of You are requested to select an area of 2nd week 3%
area of interest, topic and state an objective Based on clarity of
interest and thought, current
Topic relevance and clarity
Stating an in writing
Objective
23
Collecting 1. List 1 Special Interest Groups or 3rd week 3%
Information professional society ( the selected
about your 2. List 2 journals information must be
area & topic 3. List 2 conferences, symposia or area specific and of
workshops international and
4. List 1 thesis title national standard)
5. List 3 web presences (mailing lists,
forums, news sites)
6. List 3 authors who publish regularly in
your area
7. Attach a call for papers (CFP) from
your area.
Collection of You have to provide a complete list of 4th week 6%
Journal references you will be using- Based on ( the list of standard
papers in the your objective -Search various digital papers and reason for
topic in the libraries and Google Scholar selection)
context of the When picking papers to read - try to:
objective – Pick papers that are related to each
collect 20 & other in some ways and/or that are in
then filter the same field so that you can write a
meaningful survey out of them,
Favour papers from well-known
journals and conferences,
Favour “first” or “foundational” papers
in the field (as indicated in other
people’s survey paper),
Favour more recent papers,
Pick a recent survey of the field so you
can quickly gain an overview,
Find relationships with respect to each
other and to your topic area
(classification scheme/categorization)
Mark in the hard copy of papers whether
complete work or section/sections of the
paper are being considered
Reading and Reading Paper Process 5th week 8%
notes for first For each paper form a Table answering ( the table given
5 papers the following questions: should indicate your
What is the main topic of the article? understanding of the
What was/were the main issue(s) the paper and the
author said they want to discuss? evaluation is based on
Why did the author claim it was your conclusions
important? about each paper)
How does the work build on other’s
work, in the author’s opinion?
What simplifying assumptions does the
author claim to be making?
What did the author do?
How did the author claim they were
going to evaluate their work and
24
compare it to others?
What did the author say were the
limitations of their research?
What did the author say were the
important directions for future
research?
Conclude with limitations/issues not
addressed by the paper ( from the
perspective of your survey)
Reading and Repeat Reading Paper Process 6th week 8%
notes for ( the table given
next5 papers should indicate your
understanding of the
paper and the
evaluation is based on
your conclusions
about each paper)
Reading and Repeat Reading Paper Process 7th week 8%
notes for final ( the table given
5 papers should indicate your
understanding of the
paper and the
evaluation is based on
your conclusions
about each paper)
Draft outline Prepare a draft Outline, your survey goals, 8th week 8%
1 and Linking along with a classification / categorization ( this component will
papers diagram be evaluated based
on the linking and
classification among
the papers)
Abstract Prepare a draft abstract and give a 9th week 6%
presentation (Clarity, purpose and
conclusion)
6% Presentation &
Viva Voce
Introduction Write an introduction and background 10th week 5%
Background sections ( clarity)
Sections of Write the sections of your paper based on 11thweek 10%
the paper the classification / categorization diagram in (this component will
keeping with the goals of your survey be evaluated based
on the linking and
classification among
the papers)
Your Write your conclusions and future work 12th week 5% ( conclusions –
conclusions clarity and your ideas)
Final Draft Complete the final draft of your paper 13th week 10% (formatting,
English, Clarity and
linking)
4% Plagiarism Check
Report
25
Seminar A brief 15 slides on your paper 14th & 15th 10%
week (based on
presentation and
Viva-voce)
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
CU5301 MILLIMETER WAVE COMMUNICATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the fundamentals of Millimeter wave devices and circuits.
• To understand the various components of Millimeter wave Communications system.
• To know the antenna design at Millimeter wave frequencies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Millimeter wave characteristics- millimeter wave wireless, implementation challenges, Radio
wave propagation for mm wave: Large scale propagation channel effects, small scale
channel effects, Outdoor and Indoor channel models, Emerging applications of millimeter
wave communications.
UNIT II MM WAVE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS 9
Millimeter wave generation and amplification: Peniotrons, Ubitrons, Gyrotrons and Free
electron lasers. HEMT, models for mm wave Transistors, transistor configurations, Analog
mm wave components: Amplifiers, Mixers, VCO, PLL. Metrics for analog mm wave devices,
Consumption factor theory, Trends and architectures for mm wave wireless, ADC’s and
DAC’s.
UNIT III MM WAVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9
Modulations for millimeter wave communications: OOK, PSK, FSK, QAM, OFDM, Millimeter
wave link budget, Transceiver architecture, Transceiver without mixer, Receiver without
Oscillator, Millimeter wave calibration, production and manufacture, Millimeter wave design
considerations.
UNIT IV MM WAVE MIMO SYSTEMS 9
Massive MIMO Communications, Spatial diversity of Antenna Arrays, Multiple Antennas,
Multiple Transceivers, Noise coupling in MIMO system, Potential benefits for mm wave
systems, Spatial, Temporal and Frequency diversity, Dynamic spatial, frequency and
modulation allocation.
UNIT V ANTENNAS FOR MM WAVE SYSTEMS 9
Antenna beamwidth, polarization, advanced beam steering and beam forming, mm wave
design consideration, On-chip and In package mm wave antennas, Techniques to improve
gain of on-chip antennas, Implementation for mm wave in adaptive antenna arrays, Device
to Device communications over 5G systems, Design techniques of 5G mobile.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
26
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand Millimeter devices and circuits
Ability to design antenna for Millimeter wave frequencies
Knowledge of Millimeter wave technology
REFERENCES:
1. K.C. Huang, Z. Wang, "Millimeter Wave Communication Systems", Wiley-IEEE
Press, March 2011.
2. Robert W. Heath, Robert C. Daniel, James N. Theodore S. Rappaport, Murdock,
"Millimeter Wave Wireless Communication", Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. Xiang, W; Zheng, K; Shen, X.S; "5G Mobile Communications: Springer, 2016.
CU5091 ADVANCED SATELLITE COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION SYSTEMS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to be
Learn M2M developments and satellite applications
Understand Satellite Communication In Ipv6 Environment
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 9
Overview of satellite communication and orbital mechanics Link budget Parameters, Link budget
calculations, Auxiliary Equations, Performance Calculations.
UNIT II M2M DEVELOPMENTS AND SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9
Overview of the Internet of Things and M2M- M2M Applications Examples and Satellite Support-
Satellite Roles Context and Applications- Antennas for Satellite M2M Applications- M2M Market
Opportunities for Satellite Operators- Ultra HD Video/TV and Satellite Implications- High Throughput
Satellites (HTS) and Ka/Ku Spot Beam Technologies- Aeronautical, Maritime and other Mobility
Services.
UNIT III SATELLITE COMMUNICATION IN IPV6 ENVIRONMENT 9
Overview of IPv6 and its benefits for Satellite Networks - Migration and Coexistence--Implementation
scenarios and support- Preparations for IPv6 in Satellite communication- Satellite specific Protocol
issues in IPv6 – Impact of IPv6 on Satellite Network architecture and services-Detailed transitional
plan- IPv6 demonstration over satellites - Key results and recommendations.
UNIT IV SATELLITE NAVIGATION AND GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM 9
Over view of Radio and Satellite Navigation, GPS Principles, Signal model and Codes, Satellite Signal
Acquisition, Mathematical model of GPS observables, Methods of processing GPS data , GPS
Receiver Operation and Differential GPS. IRNSS, GAGAN, GLONASS and Galileo.
UNIT V DEEP SPACE NETWORKS AND INTER PLANETARY MISSIONS 9
Introduction – Functional description - Design procedure and performance criterion-Mars exploration
Rover- Mission and space craft summary-Telecommunication subsystem overview-Ground
Subsystem-Telecom subsystem and Link performance Telecom subsystem Hardware and software
Chandrayaan-1 Mission - Mission and space craft summary-Telecommunication subsystem overview-
Ground Subsystem-Telecom subsystem and Link performance. Mangalyaan Mission - Mission and
space craft summary-Telecommunication subsystem overview- Ground Subsystem-Telecom
subsystem and Link performance.
27
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Discuss satellite navigation and global positioning system
Outline deep space networks and inter planetary missions
REFERENCES:
1. Adimurthy.V,” Concept design and planning of India’s first interplanetary mission” Current
Science, VOL. 109, NO. 6, 1054 25 SEPTEMBER 2015.
2. Anil K. Maini, Varsha Agrawal, ‘Satellite Technology: Principles and Applications’, Third Edition,
Wiley, 2014.
3. Daniel Minoli’ “Innovations in Satellite Communication and Satellite Technology” Wiley, 2015
4. Daniel Minoli, “Satellite Systems Engineering in an IPv6 Environment”, CRC Press, First
Edition, 2009.
5. Hofmann-Wellenhof B., Lichtenegger H., and Elmar Wasle, “Global Navigational Satellite
Systems” Springer-Verlag, 2008.
6. Jim Taylor, “ Deep Space Communications” John Wiley & Sons, 2016.
7. Louis J. Ippolito, Jr. “Satellite Communications Systems Engineering: Atmospheric Effects,
Satellite Link Design and System Performance”, Second Edition, 2017
8. http://www.isro.gov.in/pslv-c25-mars-orbiter-mission
9. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mars_Orbiter_Mission
10. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chandrayaan-1
DS5191 DSP PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND L T P C
PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to provide in-depth knowledge on
Digital Signal Processor basics
Third generation DSP Architecture and programming skills
Advanced DSP architectures and some applications.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSPs 9
Multiplier and Multiplier accumulator – Modified Bus Structures and Memory access in PDSPs –
Multiple access memory – Multi-port memory – VLIW architecture- Pipelining – Special
Addressing modes in P-DSPs – On chip Peripherals.
UNIT II TMS320C5X PROCESSOR 9
Architecture – Assembly language syntax - Addressing modes – Assembly language
Instructions - Pipeline structure, Operation – Block Diagram of DSP starter kit – Application
Programs for processing real time signals.
UNIT III TMS320C6X PROCESSOR 9
Architecture of the C6x Processor - Instruction Set - DSP Development System: Introduction –
DSP Starter Kit Support Tools- Code Composer Studio - Support Files - Programming
Examples to Test the DSK Tools – Application Programs for processing real time signals.
UNIT IV ADSP PROCESSORS 9
Architecture of ADSP-21XX and ADSP-210XX series of DSP processors- Addressing modes
and assembly language instructions – Application programs –Filter design, FFT calculation.
28
UNIT V ADVANCED PROCESSORS 9
Architecture of TMS320C54X: Pipe line operation, Code Composer studio – Architecture of
TMS320C6X - Architecture of Motorola DSP563XX – Comparison of the features of DSP family
processors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students should be able to:
Become Digital Signal Processor specialized engineer
DSP based System Developer
REFERENCES:
1. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Digital Signal Processing – Implementations using
DSPMicroprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx, cengage Learning India
PrivateLimited, Delhi 2012
2. B.Venkataramani and M.Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors – Architecture,
3. Programming and Applications” – Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited.
NewDelhi, 2003.
4. RulphChassaing, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and
C6416, DSK, A John Wiley & Sons, INC., Publication, 2005
5. User guides Texas Instrumentation, Analog Devices, Motorola.
CU5001 ANALOG AND MIXED MODE VLSI DESIGN LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To study the concepts of MOS large signal model and small signal model
To understand the concepts of D/A conversion methods and their architectures.
To learn filters for ADC.
To study about the switched capacitor circuits.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND BASIC MOS DEVICES 9
Challenges in analog design-Mixed signal layout issues- MOS FET structures and characteristics-
large signal and small signal model of single stage Amplifier-Source follower- Common gate stage –
Cascode Stage – large and small signal analysis of differential amplifier with active load, pole-zero
estimation, zero value time constant method, frequency response of CS, cascade and cascade
amplifiers
UNIT II SUBMICRON CIRCUIT DESIGN 9
Submicron CMOS process flow, Capacitors and resistors, Current mirrors, Digital Circuit Design,
Delay Elements – Adders- OP Amp parameters and Design
UNIT III DATA CONVERTERS 9
Static and dynamic errors in DAC and ADC – Architectures & Characteristics of Sample and Hold-
Digital to Analog Converters- DAC- R-2R, weighted DAC, multiplying DAC, segmented DAC and
sigma delta DAC. ADC – Flash ADC, pipelined ADC, successive approximation ADC, sigma delta
ADC.
29
UNIT IV SNR IN DATA CONVERTERS 9
Overview of SNR of Data Converters- Clock Jitters- Improving Using Averaging – Decimating Filters
for ADC- Band pass and High Pass Sinc Filters- Interpolating Filters for DAC
UNIT V SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS 9
Resistors, First order low pass Circuit, Switched capacitor Amplifier, Switched Capacitor Integrator –
Design of flip around sample and hold circuit – pipelined ADC.
TOTAL: 45PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Discuss submicron circuit design
Compare data converters
Design and analyze switched capacitor circuits
REFERENCES:
1. J. Jacob Wikner, Mikael Gustavsson, Nianxiong Tan “CMOS Data Converters for
Communications” Springer, 2000.
2. Van de Plassche, Rudy J., “CMOS Integrated Analog-to-Digital and Digital-to-Analog
Converters” Springer, 2003.
CU5092 REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To study the basic concepts of ARM processors
To understand the computing platform and design analysis of ARM processors
To study the concepts of Operating systems in ARM
To study the concept of embedded networks
To understand case studies related to embedded systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ARM PROCEESORS 9
Fundamentals of ARM, ARM Instruction set, Thumb Instruction set, ARM assembly language
programming, Digital Signal Processing in ARM, Exceptions & Interrupt Handling.
UNIT II COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS 9
CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Memory Protection Units – Memory Management Units
– Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors – Development and Debugging – Program
design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation techniques – Analysis and
optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program validation and testing.
UNIT III PROCESS AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Scheduling policies -
Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system
performance – Power optimization strategies for processes – Firmware and Operating Systems for
ARM processor.
UNIT IV HARDWARE ACCELERATES & NETWORKS 9
Accelerators – Accelerated system design – Distributed Embedded Architecture – Networks for
Embedded Systems – Network based design – Internet enabled systems.
30
UNIT V CASE STUDY 9
Hardware and software co-design - Data Compressor - Software Modem – Personal Digital Assistants
– Set–Top–Box. – System-on-Silicon – FOSS Tools for embedded system development.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Revise computing platform and design analysis
Demonstrate multiple tasks and multi processes
Discuss hardware and software co-design
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew N Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM system developer’s guide – Designing
and Optimizing System Software”, Morgan Kaufmann publishers, 2004.
2. David E-Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, dreamtech
press, 2005.
4. Tim Wilmshurst, “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems”, Pal
grave Publisher, 2004.
5. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”,
Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.
VL5091 MEMS AND NEMS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of micro electro mechanical devices.
To know the fabrication process of Microsystems.
To know the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators.
To familiarize concepts of quantum mechanics and nano systems.
UNIT I OVERVIEW 9
New trends in Engineering and Science: Micro and Nanoscale systems, Introduction to Design of
MEMS and NEMS, MEMS and NEMS – Applications, Devices and structures. Materials for MEMS:
Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals.
UNIT II MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Microsystem fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation. Thin film
depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching techniques: Dry and wet
etching, electrochemical etching; Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining,
High Aspect- Ratio (LIGA and LIGA-like) Technology; Packaging: Microsystems packaging, Essential
packaging technologies, Selection of packaging materials
UNIT III MICRO SENSORS 9
MEMS Sensors: Design of Acoustic wave sensors, resonant sensor, Vibratory gyroscope, Capacitive
and Piezo Resistive Pressure sensors- engineering mechanics behind these Microsensors. Case
study: Piezo-resistive pressure sensor.
31
UNIT IV MICRO ACTUATORS 9
Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys, Actuation
using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces (Parallel plate, Torsion bar, Comb
drive actuators), Micromechanical Motors and pumps. Case study: Comb drive actuators.
UNIT V NANOSYSTEMS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics, Molecular and Nanostructure Dynamics: Schrodinger
Equation and Wave function Theory, Density Functional Theory, Nanostructures and Molecular
Dynamics, Electromagnetic Fields and their quantization, Molecular Wires and Molecular Circuits.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to:
Discuss micro sensors
Explain micro actuators
Outline nanosystems and Quantum mechanics
REFERENCES:
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson education India limited, 2006.
2. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC press 1997.
3. Stephen D. Senturia,” Micro system Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
4. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and Structures” CRC Press,
2002.
5. Tai Ran Hsu ,”MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture” ,Tata Mcraw Hill, 2002.
CU5002 COMMUNICATION NETWORKS MODELLING AND SIMULATION L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to be
Learn modeling and simulation
Understand Monte Carlo simulation
Study channel modeling and mobility modeling
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MODELING AND SIMULATION 9
Introduction, Discrete-event Simulation, Modeling for Computer Simulation, Tools and Methods for
Network Simulation, The Simulation Platform, Simulation Framework, Tools and Modeling
Approaches for Simulating Hardware.
UNIT II MONTE CARLO SIMULATION 9
Fundamental concepts, Application to communication systems, Monte Carlo integration, Semianalytic
techniques, Case study: Performance estimation of a wireless system.
UNIT III LOWER LAYER & LINK LAYER WIRELESS MODELING 9
Physical Layer Modeling, Description of the Main Components of the PHY Layer, Accurate Simulation
of Physical Layers, Physical Layer Modeling for Network Simulations, Link Layer Modeling, Medium
Access Control (MAC) Protocols, Logical Link Control, Forward Error Detection and Correction,
Backward Error Detection and Correction, Queueing and Processing Delay.
32
UNIT IV CHANNEL MODELING & MOBILITY MODELING 9
Channel Modeling :The Physics of Radiation, The Nature of Electromagnetic Radiation, Classification
of Propagation Models, Deterministic Approaches by Classical Field Theory, Deterministic Geometric
Optical Approaches, Empirical Path Loss Approaches, Stochastic Shadowing Models, Stochastic
Fading Models, MIMO Channel Models.
Mobility modeling :Categorization of Mobility Models, Mobility Models, Random Walk Model, Random
Waypoint Model, Random Direction Model, Gauss-Markov Model, Manhattan Model, Column Model ,
Pursue Model, Nomadic Community Model, Selection of Appropriate Mobility Models.
UNIT V HIGHER LAYER MODELING & MODELING THE NETWORK
TOPOLOGY 9
Higher Layer Modeling :Modeling the Network Layer and Routing Protocols, Components of a Routing
Protocol, Metrics, Virtual Routing on Overlays, Modeling Transport Layer Protocols, Modeling
Application Traffic.
Modeling the Network Topology : Abstraction of Network Topologies by Graphs, Characterizing
Graphs, Common Topology Models, Geometric Random Graphs – The Waxman Model, Hierarchical
Topologies, Preferential Linking – The Barabási-Albert Model , Modeling the Internet.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to
Apply Monte Carlo simulation
Discuss Lower Layer and Link Layer Wireless Modeling
Compare channel modeling and mobility modeling
REFERENCES:
1. Irene Karzela, “Modeling and Simulating Communications Networks”, Prentice Hall India, 1998
2. K.Wehrie. Gunes, J.Gross, “Modeling and Tools for Network simulation”, Springer, 2010.
3. M.C. Jeruchim, P.Balaban and K. Sam Shanmugam, “Simulation of Communication Systems:
Modeling, Methodology and Techniques”, Plenum Press, New York, 2001.
4. Nejat; Bragg, Arnold, “Recent Advances in Modeling and Simulation Tools for Communication
Networks and Services”, Springer, 2007
5. William.H.Tranter, K. Sam Shanmugam, Theodore. S. Rappaport, Kurt L. Kosbar, “Principles of
Communication Systems Simulation”, Pearson Education (Singapore) Pvt. Ltd, 2004.
CU5071 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS LTPC
30 03
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic principles of digital communication techniques.
To gain knowledge about receivers for AWGN channel and Fading channels.
To understand the concepts of synchronization and adaptive equalization techniques.
UNIT I REVIEW OF DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES 9
Base band communication; signal space representation, linear and nonlinear modulation techniques,
Error tracking and Spectral characteristics of digital modulation.
UNIT II OPTIMUM RECEIVERS FOR AWGN CHANNEL 9
Correlation demodulator, matched filter , maximum likelihood sequence detector, optimum receiver for
CPM signals, optimum receivers for signals with random phase in AWGN channel, envelope detection
of M-ary orthogonal signals and correlated binary signals.
33
UNIT III RECEIVERS FOR FADING CHANNELS 9
Characterization of fading multiple channels, statistical models, flat and frequency selective fading,
diversity technique, parameter synchronization for flat fading channels, digital signaling over a
frequency selective and slowly fading channel ,coded waveform for fading channel.
UNIT IV SYNCHRONIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Carrier and signal synchronization, carrier phase estimation-PLL, Decision directed loops, symbol
timing estimation, maximum likelihood and non-decision directed timing estimation, joint estimation.
UNIT V ADAPTIVE EQUALIZATION 9
Zero forcing algorithm, LMS algorithm, adaptive decision-feedback equalizer and Equalization of
Trellis-coded signals. Kalman algorithm, blind equalizers and stochastic gradient algorithm.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
Apply basic principles of digital communication techniques.
Discuss on receivers for AWGN & Fading channel
Describe various synchronization techniques.
Design adaptive equalization algorithms to satisfy the evolving demands in digital
communication.
REFERENCES:
1. Heinrich Meyer, Mare Moeneclacy, Stefan.A.Fechtel, " Digital communication receivers ", Vol
I & Vol II, John Wiley, New York, 1997.
2. H.Meyr & G.Ascheid, Synchronization in Digital Communications, John Wiley, 1990
3. John.G.Proakis, “Digital communication “4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2001.
4. R.G. Gallager, "Principles of Digital Communication", Newyork, Cambridge University Press,
2008
5. Simon Marvin, “Digital communication over fading channel; An unified approach to
performance Analysis ", John Wiley, New York, 2000.
6. U.Mengali & A.N.D’Andrea, Synchronization Techniques for Digital Receivers, Kluwer, 1997.
CU5072 DETECTION AND ESTIMATION THEORY LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of detection and estimation.
To learn the basics of multi-user detection theory
To understand the theory behind various estimation techniques.
To understand Wiener filter and Kalman filter in detail.
UNIT I REVEIW OF PROBABILITY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESS 9
Conditional Probability, Bayes' Theorem , Random Variables, Conditional Distributions and
Densities, moments and distribution of random variables., Stationary Processes Cyclostationary
Processes Averages and Ergodicity Autocorrelation Function Power Spectral Density Discrete
Time Stochastic Processes, Spatial Stochastic Processes, Random Signals, Relationship of Power
Spectral Density and Autocorrelation Function.
34
UNIT II SINGLE AND MULTIPLE SAMPLE DETECTION 9
Hypothesis Testing and the MAP Criterion, Bayes Criterion, Minimax Criterion, Neyman-Pearson
Criterion, Sequential Detection, The Optimum Digital Detector in Additive Gaussian Noise ,
Performance of Binary Receivers in AWGN.
UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF ESTIMATION THEORY 9
Formulation of the General Parameter Estimation Problem, Relationship between Detection and
Estimation Theory, Types of Estimation Problems, Properties of Estimators, Bayes estimation,
Minimax Estimation, Maximum-Likelihood Estimation, Comparison of Estimators of Parameters.
UNIT IV WIENER AND KALMAN FILTERS 9
Orthogonality Principle, Autoregressive Techniques, Discrete Wiener Filter, Continuous Wiener
Filter, Generalization of Discrete and Continuous Filter Representations , Linear Least-Squares
Methods, Minimum-Variance Weighted Least-Squares Methods, Minimum-Variance,
LeastSquares, Kalman Algorithm - Computational Considerations, Signal Estimation, Continuous
Kalman Filter, Extended Kalman Filter.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Detector Structures in Non-Gaussian Noise , Examples of Noise Models, Receiver Structures, and
Error-Rate Performance, Estimation of Non-Gaussian Noise Parameters Fading Multipath
Channel Models, Receiver Structures with Known Channel Parameters, Receiver Structures
without Knowledge of Phase, Receiver Structures without Knowledge of Amplitude or Phase,
Receiver Structures and Performance with No Channel Knowledge.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To be able to apply detection and estimation theory to solve communication problems.
To apply probability and stochastic process concepts in detection and estimation.
To design Wiener and Kalman filters to solve linear estimation problems.
REFERENCES:
1. Harry L. Van Trees, "Detection, Estimation and Modulation Theory", Part I John Wiley
\ and Sons, New York, 2004.
2. Ludeman, Lonnie C. Random processes: filtering, estimation, and detection. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2003
3. Sergio Verdu “ Multi User Detection” Cambridge University Press, 1998
4. Steven M. Kay, "Fundamentals of Statistical Processing, Volume I: Estimation Theory”,
Prentice Hall Signal Processing Series, Prentice Hall, PTR, NewJersy, 1993.
5. Thomas Schonhoff, "Detection and Estimation Theory”, Prentice Hall, NewJersy, 2007.
CU5073 VLSI FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of basic wireless communication concepts.
To study the parameters in receiver and low noise amplifier design.
To study the various types of mixers designed for wireless communication.
To study and design PLL and VCO.
To understand the concepts of transmitters and power amplifiers in wireless communication.
35
UNIT I COMMUNICATION CONCEPTS 9
Introduction – Overview of Wireless systems – Standards – Access Methods – Modulation schemes –
Classical channel – Wireless channel description – Path loss – Multipath fading – Standard
Translation.
UNIT II RECEIVER ARCHITECTURE & LOW NOISE AMPLIFIERS 9
Receiver front end – Filter design – Non-idealities – Design parameters – Noise figure & Input
intercept point. LNA Introduction – Wideband LNA design – Narrow band LNA design: Impedance
matching & Core amplifier.
UNIT III MIXERS 9
Balancing Mixer - Qualitative Description of the Gilbert Mixer - Conversion Gain – Distortion – Noise -
A Complete Active Mixer. Switching Mixer – Distortion, Conversion Gain & Noise in Unbalanced
Switching Mixer - A Practical Unbalanced Switching Mixer. Sampling Mixer - Conversion Gain,
Distortion, Intrinsic & Extrinsic Noise in Single Ended Sampling Mixer.
UNIT IV FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS 9
PLL – Phase detector – Dividers – Voltage Controlled Oscillators – LC oscillators – Ring Oscillators –
Phase noise – Loop filters & design approaches – A complete synthesizer design example (DECT) –
Frequency synthesizer with fractional divider.
UNIT V TRANSMITTER ARCHITECTURES & POWER AMPLIFIERS 9
Transmitter back end design – Quadrature LO generator – Power amplifier design.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to
Design LNA and Mixers
Evaluate frequency synthesizers
Design and analyze power amplifiers
REFERENCES:
1. Bosco H Leung “VLSI for Wireless Communication”, Pearson Education, 2002.
2. B.Razavi ,”RF Microelectronics” , Prentice-Hall ,1998.
3. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits” McGraw-Hill, 1999.
4. Emad N Farag and Mohamed I Elmasry, “Mixed Signal VLSI wireless design – Circuits &
Systems”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000.
5. J. Crols and M. Steyaert, “CMOS Wireless Transceiver Design,” Boston, Kluwer Academic
Pub., 1997.
6. Thomas H.Lee, “The Design of CMOS Radio – Frequency Integrated Circuits”, Cambridge
University Press ,2003.
COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS L T P C
NC5251
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to be
Understand the concepts of cognitive radio
Learn spectrum sensing and dynamic spectrum access
36
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE-DEFINED RADIO AND 9
COGNITIVE RADIO
Evolution of Software Defined Radio and Cognitive radio: goals, benefits, definitions,
architectures, relations with other radios, issues, enabling technologies, radio frequency
spectrum and regulations.
UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE 9
Cognitive Radio – functions, components and design rules, Cognition cycle – orient, plan,
decide and act phases, Inference Hierarchy, Architecture maps, Building the Cognitive
Radio Architecture on Software defined Radio Architecture, Overview of IEEE 802.22
standard for broadband wireless access in TV bands.
UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS 9
Introduction – Primary user detection techniques – energy detection, feature detection,
matched filtering, cooperative detection , Bayesian Approach, Neyman Pearson fusion rule
for spectrum sensing, Optimum spectrum sensing - Kullback Leibler Divergence and other
approaches, Fundamental Tradeoffs in spectrum sensing, Spectrum Sharing Models of
Dynamic Spectrum Access - Unlicensed and Licensed Spectrum Sharing, Fundamental
Limits of Cognitive Radio.
UNIT IV MAC AND NETWORK LAYER DESIGN FOR COGNITIVE RADIO 9
MAC for cognitive radios – Multichannel MAC - slotted ALOHA – CSMA, Network layer
design – routing in cognitive radios, flow control and error control techniques.
UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Cognitive radio for Internet of Things - Features and applications – Enabling technologies
and protocols – M2M technologies - Data storage and analysis techniques - Requirement
and challenges of IoT – Energy efficiency– MIMO Cognitive Radio – Power allocation
algorithms.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to
Compare MAC and network layer design for cognitive radio
Discuss cognitive radio for Internet of Things and M2M technologies
REFERENCES:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, Thomas Hou, “Cognitive Radio
Communications and Networks”, Academic Press, Elsevier, 2010.
2. Bruce Fette, “Cognitive Radio Technology”, Newnes, 2006.
3. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2009.
4. Huseyin Arslan (Ed.), “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio, and Adaptive
Wireless Systems, Springer, 2007.
5. S.Shanmugavel, M.A.Bhagyaveni, R.Kalidoss, “Cognitive Radio-An Enabler for
Internet of things”, River Publishers, 2017.
37
CU5003 ADVANCED ANTENNA DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the antenna radiation characteristics and arrays.
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of various antenna design.
• To enhance the student knowledge in the area of antenna for practical applications.
UNIT I ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS AND ARRAYS 9
Review of Electromagnetic Wave equations, Radiation integrals, Radiation from surface
and line current distributions – dipole, monopole, loop antenna, Antenna parameters, linear
array theory, frequency scanned arrays, phased arrays-Retro directive and self phased
arrays. Introduction to numerical techniques.
UNIT II MICRO STRIP ANTENNA 9
Radiation Mechanism from patch; transmission line model based analysis, cavity model,
Excitation techniques; Microstrip dipole; Rectangular patch, Circular patch, Microstrip Yagi
antenna, Microstrip array, Gain improvement techniques in microstrip antenna.
UNIT III APERTURES AND REFLECTOR ANTENNAS 9
Field equivalence principle, Radiation from Rectangular and Circular apertures, Uniform
aperture distribution on an infinite ground plane, Babinets principle, Slot antenna; Horn
antenna; Reflector antenna, aperture blockage, and design consideration, Design of C
band and Ku band reflector antenna.
UNIT IV MODERN ANTENNA STRUCTURES 9
Frequency independent antenna, spiral antenna, active antenna, dielectric antenna, Leaky
wave antenna, Plasma antenna, wearable antenna, reconfigurable antenna, meta material,
EBG antenna, Frequency selective structures, Broad band and multi band antenna,
Antenna for cellular base stations, MIMO antennas.
UNIT V ANTENNA FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS 9
Antenna for EMI/EMC testing, Antenna for EM issues in medical diagnosis and treatment,
Antenna for MRI systems, Antenna for 60 GHz applications, RFID antenna, Antenna for
wireless charging systems, Antenna for automobile radar, Terahertz antennas, antenna for
sensor applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• The student would be able to understand recent design techniques in antenna.
• Ability to design and assess the performance of various antenna
• The student would be able to design the antenna for various industrial, medical and
sensor applications.
REFERENCES:
1. Balanis.A, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1982.
2. Hubregt.J.Visser “Antenna Theory and Applications” 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons
Ltd,Newyork,2012.
3. John D Krauss, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S. Khan, "Antennas and Wave
Propagation: Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.
4. Zhijun Zhang” Antenna Design for Mobile Devices” 1st Edition, John Wiley & Sons
(Asia) Ltd, Newyork, 2011.
38
DS5291 ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the image fundamentals.
To understand the various image segmentation techniques.
To extract features for image analysis.
To introduce the concepts of image registration and image fusion.
To illustrate 3D image visualization.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band effect, 2D image
transforms-DFT, DCT, KLT,SVD. Image enhancement in spatial and frequency domain, Review of
Morphological image processing.
UNIT II SEGMENTATION 9
Edge detection, Thresholding, Region growing, Fuzzy clustering, Watershed algorithm, Active contour
models, Texture feature based segmentation, Graph based segmentation, Wavelet based
Segmentation - Applications of image segmentation.
UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION 9
First and second order edge detection operators, Phase congruency, Localized feature extraction -
detecting image curvature, shape features, Hough transform, shape skeletonization, Boundary
descriptors, Moments, Texture descriptors- Autocorrelation, Co-occurrence features, Runlength
features, Fractal model based features, Gabor filter, wavelet features.
UNIT IV REGISTRATION AND IMAGE FUSION 9
Registration - Preprocessing, Feature selection - points, lines, regions and templates Feature
correspondence - Point pattern matching, Line matching, Region matching, Template matching.
Transformation functions - Similarity transformation and Affine Transformation. Resampling – Nearest
Neighbour and Cubic Splines. Image Fusion - Overview of image fusion, pixel fusion, wavelet based
fusion -region based fusion.
UNIT V 3D IMAGE VISUALIZATION 9
Sources of 3D Data sets, Slicing the Data set, Arbitrary section planes, The use of color, Volumetric
display, Stereo Viewing, Ray tracing, Reflection, Surfaces, Multiple connected surfaces, Image
processing in 3D, Measurements on 3D images.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
Explain the fundamentals digital image processing.
Describe image various segmentation and feature extraction techniques for image analysis.
Discuss the concepts of image registration and fusion.
Explain 3D image visualization.
39
REFERENCES:
1. Ardeshir Goshtasby, “ 2D and 3D Image registration for Medical, Remote Sensing and
Industrial Applications”,John Wiley and Sons,2005.
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing', Pearson Education, Inc., 2002.
3. John C.Russ, “The Image Processing Handbook”, CRC Press,2007.
4. Mark Nixon, Alberto Aguado, “Feature Extraction and Image Processing”, Academic
Press,2008.
5. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image Processing', Pearson,Education,
Inc.,Second Edition, 2004.
6. Rick S.Blum, Zheng Liu, “Multisensor image fusion and its Applications“, Taylor&
Francis,2006.
DS5292 RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of Radar systems and Signal models.
To illustrate the concepts of Sampling and Quantization of pulsed radar signals.
To provide in-depth knowledge in Radar waveforms and Doppler processing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO RADAR SYSTEMS 9
Basic radar function, elements of pulsed radar, review of signal processing concepts and operations,
A preview of basic radar signal processing, radar system components, advanced radar signal
processing
UNIT II SIGNAL MODELS 9
Components of a radar signal, amplitude models, types of clutters, noise model and signal-to noise
ratio, jamming, frequency models: the doppler shift, spatial models, spectral model
UNIT III SAMPLING AND QUANTIZATION OF PULSED RADAR SIGNALS 9
Domains and criteria for sampling radar signals, Sampling in the fast time dimension, Sampling in
slow time: selecting the pulse repetition interval, sampling the doppler spectrum, Sampling in the
spatial and angle dimension, Quantization, I/Q Imbalance and Digital I/Q
UNIT IV RADAR WAVEFORMS 9
Introduction, The waveform matched filter, Matched filtering of moving targets, The ambiguity function,
The pulse burst waveform, frequency-modulated pulse compression waveforms, Range sidelobe
control for FM waveforms, the stepped frequency waveform, Phase-modulated pulse compression
waveforms, COSTAS Frequency codes.
UNIT V DOPPLER PROCESSING 9
Alternate forms of the Doppler spectrum, Moving target indication (MTI), Pulse Doppler processing,
dwell-to-dwell stagger, Pulse pair processing, additional Doppler processing issues, clutter mapping
and the moving target detector, MTI for moving platforms: adaptive displaced phase center antenna
processing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
40
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Explain the principles of elements and functions involved in radar signal processing.
Describe different types of radar waveforms.
Discuss on Doppler processing and its issues
REFERENCES:
1. Francois Le Chevalier, "Principles of Radar and Sonar Signal Processing", Artech House
2. Fred E. Nathanson, "Radar Design Principles-Signal Processing and the Environment", , PHI
3. Mark A. Richards, "Fundamentals of Radar Signal Processing", McGraw-Hill, New York, 2005
4. Michael O Kolawole, Radar systems, Peak Detection and Tracking, 2010,Elseveir
Introduction to Radar Systems 3rd Edition, Skolnik, McGraw Hill.
5. Peyton Z. Peebles, "Radar Principles", 2009 Wiley India
CP5096 SPEECH PROCESSING AND SYNTHESIS LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce speech production and related parameters of speech.
To illustrate the concepts of speech signal representations and coding.
To understand different speech modeling procedures such Markov and their implementation
issues.
To gain knowledge about text analysis and speech synthesis.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEECH PROCESSING 9
Introduction – Spoken Language Structure – Phonetics and Phonology – Syllables and Words –
Syntax and Semantics – Probability, Statistics and Information Theory – Probability Theory –
Estimation Theory – Significance Testing – Information Theory.
UNIT II SPEECH SIGNAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CODING 9
Overview of Digital Signal Processing – Speech Signal Representations – Short time Fourier Analysis
– Acoustic Model of Speech Production – Linear Predictive Coding – Cepstral Processing – Formant
Frequencies – The Role of Pitch – Speech Coding – LPC Coder, CELP, Vocoders.
UNIT III SPEECH RECOGNITION 9
Hidden Markov Models – Definition – Continuous and Discontinuous HMMs – Practical Issues –
Limitations. Acoustic Modeling – Variability in the Speech Signal – Extracting Features – Phonetic
Modeling – Adaptive Techniques – Confidence Measures – Other Techniques.
UNIT IV TEXT ANALYSIS 9
Lexicon – Document Structure Detection – Text Normalization – Linguistic Analysis – Homograph
Disambiguation – Morphological Analysis – Letter-to-sound Conversion – Prosody – Generation
schematic – Speaking Style – Symbolic Prosody – Duration Assignment – Pitch Generation
UNIT V SPEECH SYNTHESIS 9
Attributes – Formant Speech Synthesis – Concatenative Speech Synthesis – Prosodic Modification of
Speech – Source-filter Models for Prosody Modification – Evaluation of TTS Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
41
OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
Model speech production system and describe the fundamentals of speech.
Extract and compare different speech parameters.
Choose an appropriate statistical speech model for a given application.
Design a speech recognition system.
Use different text analysis and speech synthesis techniques.
REFERENCES:
1. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing, Processing and
Perception of Speech and Music”, Wiley- India Edition, 2006
2. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition”, John Wiley and Sons, 1999.
3. Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing – An Introduction to
Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition”, Pearson
Education, 2002.
4. Frederick Jelinek, “Statistical Methods of Speech Recognition”, MIT Press, 1997.
5. Lawrence Rabiner and Biing-Hwang Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Pearson
Education, 2003.
6. Steven W. Smith, “The Scientist and Engineer‟s Guide to Digital Signal Processing”, California
Technical Publishing, 1997.
7. Thomas F Quatieri, “Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing – Principles and Practice”,
Pearson Education, 2004.
NC5252 ADVANCED WIRELESS NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To study about advanced wireless network, LTE, 4G and Evolutions from LTE to
LTE.
To study about wireless IP architecture, Packet Data Protocol and LTE network
architecture
To study about adaptive link layer, hybrid ARQ and graphs routing protocol.
To study about mobility management, cellular network, and micro cellular networks
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
. Introduction to 1G/2G/3G/4G Terminology. Evolution of Public Mobile Services -Motivation
for IP Based Wireless Networks -Requirements and Targets for Long Term Evolution (LTE)
- Technologies for LTE- 4G Advanced Features and Roadmap Evolutions from LTE to LTE-
A - Wireless Standards. Network Model-Network Connectivity-Wireless Network Design with
Small World Properties
UNIT II WIRELESS IP NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9
3GPP Packet Data Networks - Network Architecture - Packet Data Protocol (PDP) Context
-Configuring PDP Addresses on Mobile Stations - Accessing IP Networks through PS
Domain – LTE network Architecture - Roaming Architecture- Protocol Architecture- Bearer
Establishment Procedure -Inter-Working with other RATs.
42
UNIT III ADAPTIVE LINK AND NETWORK LAYER 9
Link Layer Capacity of Adaptive Air Interfaces-Adaptive Transmission in Ad Hoc Networks-
Adaptive Hybrid ARQ Schemes for Wireless Links-Stochastic Learning Link Layer Protocol-
Infrared Link Access Protocol-Graphs and Routing Protocols-Graph Theory-Routing with
Topology Aggregation-Network and Aggregation Models
UNIT IV MOBILITY MANAGEMENT 9
Cellular Networks-Cellular Systems with Prioritized Handoff-Cell Residing Time Distribution-
Mobility Prediction in Pico- and Micro-Cellular Networks
UNIT V QUALITY OF SERVICE 9
QoS Challenges in Wireless IP Networks - QoS in 3GPP - QoS Architecture, Management
and Classes -QoS Attributes - Management of End-to-End IP QoS - EPS BearersandQoSin
LTE networks.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Familiar with the latest 4G networks and LTE
Understand about the wireless IP architecture and LTE network architecture.
Familiar with the adaptive link layer and network layer graphs and protocol.
Understand about the mobility management and cellular network.
Understand about the wireless sensor network architecture and its concept.
REFERENCES:
1. Ayman ElNashar, Mohamed El-saidny, Mahmoud Sherif, “Design, Deployment and
Performance of 4G-LTE Networks: A Practical Approach”, John Wiley & Sons, 2014.
2. Crosspoint Boulevard, “Wireless and Mobile All-IP Networks”, Wiley Publication,
2005.
3. Jyh-Cheng Chen and Tao Zhang, “IP-Based Next-Generation Wireless Networks
Systems, Architectures, and Protocols”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Publication,2006.
4. Minoru Etoh, “Next Generation Mobile Systems3G and Beyond,” Wiley
Publications,2005.
5. Savo Glisic,” advanced wireless networks-technology and business models”, Third
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2016
6. Savo Glisic,”Advanced Wireless Networks-4G Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons,
Ltd,2006.
7. StefaniaSesia, IssamToufik and Matthew Baker, “LTE – The UMTS Long Term
Evolution From Theory to Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Publication, Second
Edition, 2011.
CU5093 WAVELET TRANSFORMS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P C
3 00 3
OBJECTIVE:
To introduce the fundamentals concepts of wavelet transforms.
To study system design using Wavelets
To learn the different wavelet families & their applications.
43
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WAVELETS 9
Introduction to Multirate signal processing- Decimation and Interpolation, Quadrature Mirror Filters,
Subband coding, Limitations of Fourier transform, Short time Fourier transform and its drawbacks,
Continuous Wavelet transform, Time frequency representation, Wavelet System and its
characteristics, Orthogonal and Orthonormal functions and function space
UNIT II MULTIRESOLUTION CONCEPT AND DISCRETE WAVELET
TRANSFORM 9
Multiresolution formulation of wavelet systems- signal spaces, scaling function, wavelet function and
its properties, Multiresolution analysis, Haar scaling and wavelet function, Filter banks-Analysis and
Synthesis, 1D and 2D Discrete wavelet transform, Wavelet Packets, Tree structured filter bank,
Multichannel filter bank, Undecimated wavelet transform.
UNIT III WAVELET SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Refinement relation for orthogonal wavelet systems, Restrictions on filter coefficients, Design
of Daubechies orthogonal wavelet system coefficients, Design of Coiflet and Symlet wavelets.
UNIT IV WAVELET FAMILIES 9
Continuous Wavelets- Properties of Mexican hat wavelet, Morlet, Gaussian and Meyer wavelets.
Orthogonal wavelets- Properties of Haar wavelets, Daubechies wavelets, Symlets, Coiflets and
Discrete Meyer wavelets. Properties of Biorthogonal wavelets, Applications of wavelet families.
UNIT V WAVELET APPLICATIONS 9
Denoising of Signals and Images, Image enhancement, Edge detection, Image Fusion, Image
compression, Wavelet based feature extraction, Analysis of phonocardiogram signals, Analysis of
EEG signals, Speech enhancement for hearing aids
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The students will be able to apprehend the detailed knowledge about the Wavelet transforms &
its applications.
REFERENCES:
1. C.Sidney Burrus, Ramesh Gopinath & Haito Guo, ‗Introduction to wavelets and wavelet
transform‘, Prentice Hall, 1998.
2. G.Strang and T.Nguyen, ‗Wavelet and filter banks‘, Wesley and Cambridge Press.
3. Metin Akay, ‗Time frequency and wavelets in biomedical signal processing‘, Wiley-IEEE
Press, October 1997.
4. M.Vetterli and J. Kovacevic, ‗Wavelets and sub band coding‘, Prentice Hall, 1995.
5. P.P.Vaidyanathan, ‗Multi rate systems and filter banks‘, Prentice Hall 1993
4. Raguveer m Rao & Ajith S. Bopardikar, ‗Wavelet transforms – Introduction to theory and
applications‘, Addison Wesley, 1998
5. S.Mallet, ‗A Wavelet tour of Signal Processing‘, Academic Press 1998
44
L T P C
EL5071 BROADBAND ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To give fundamental concepts related to broadband access technologies.
To understand the current and emerging wired and wireless access technologies.
To acquire knowledge about cable modems and fiber access technologies.
To have an exposure to different systems standards for next generation broadband
access networks.
UNIT I REVIEW OF ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES 5
Phone-Line modem, cable-access, ISDN, Emerging Broad band Technologies, Cable DSL, Fiber
and Wireless, Standards for access network.
UNIT II DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER LINES 10
Asymmetric Digital subscriber lines (ADSL) – Rate Adaptive subscriber line (RADSL)-ISDN
Digital subscriber line (IDSL) - High bit rate DSL (HDSL)-Single line DSL (SDSL) - very high bit
rate DSL (VDSL) - Standards for XDSL & Comparison.
UNIT III CABLE MODEM 10
Cable Modem, DOCSIS – Physical Cabling, Dual Modem Operation, Hub Restriction, Upstream
Operation – Downstream operation – Access control – framing Security sub layer – Data link
layer – LLC & Higher layers – ATM centric VS IP – centric cable modem.
UNIT IV FIBER ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES 10
Optical Fiber in access networks, Architecture and Technologies- Hybrid fiber – Coax (HFC)
system, Switched Digital Video (SDV) – Passive optical networks (PON) – FTTX (FTTH, FTTB,
FTTC, FTT cab) comparison, Broadband PON , Gigabit-Capable PON.
UNIT V BROAD BAND WIRELESS 10
Fixed Wireless, Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS), Multi channel multi point distribution services
(MMDS), Local multi point distribution services (LMDS), and Wideband integrated Digital
Interactive Services (WIDIS), Mobile Wireless 3G – IMT 2000, Introduction to LTE-A.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To able to design systems meeting out the requirements of the recent standards.
To meet out the industry requirements for man power in next generation networks.
To be able to contribute towards the enhancement of the existing wireless
technologies.
REFERENCES:
1. Dennis J. Rauschmayer, “ADSL/VDSL Principles: A Practical and Precise Study of
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Lines and Very High Speed Digital Subscriber Lines”,
Macmillan Technology Series, 1998.
2. Gilbert Held, “Next Generation Modems: A Professional Guide to DSL and Cable
Modems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
3. Leonid G. Kazovsky, Ning Cheng, Wei-Tao Shaw, David Gutierrez, Shing-Wa Wong,
“Broadband Optical Access Networks”, John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey, 2011.
4. Martin P. Clarke, “Wireless Access Network: Fixed Wireless Access and WLL
Network Design and Operation”, John Wiley & Sons 2000.
5. Niel Ransom and Albert A. Azzam, “Broadband Access Technologies: ADSL, VDSL
Cable Modem, Fiber and LMDS", McGraw Hill, 1999.
6. Sassan Ahmadi, “LTE-Advanced – A practical systems approach to understanding
the 3GPP LTE Releases 10 and 11 radio access technologies”, Elsevier, 2014.
45
7. Walter J Woralski, “ADSL and DSL Technologies”, McGraw Hill Computer
Communication Series, Second Edition Oct 2001.
8. William Webb, “Introduction to Wireless Local Loop Broadband and Narrow Band
System”, Mobile Communication Series, Artech House Publishers, Second Edition
2000.
CU5094 SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made to:
Understand radio frequency implementation
Learn multi rate signal processing and digital generation of signals
UNIT I INTRODUCTION & CASE STUDIES 9
Introduction to software Radio concepts: Need for software Radios, Definition of software Radio,
Characteristics and Benefits. Design Principles. Case studies: SPEAK easy, JTRS, SDR-3000.
UNIT II RADIO FREQUENCY IMPLEMENTATION 9
The purpose of the RF Front End, Dynamic Range, RF receivers front end Topologies, Importance of
the components to Overall performance, Transmitter Architecture, Noise and Distortion in the RF
Chain, ADC and DAC Distortion, Flexible RF systems using MEMS.
UNIT III MULTI RATE SIGNAL PROCESSING AND DIGITAL GENERATION OF
SIGNALS. 9
Sample rate conversion principles. Digital filter Banks. Timing recovery in Digital Receivers using Multi
rate Digital filters. Approaches to Direct Digital Synthesis. Analysis of spurious signal Band pass
signal generation, Generation of Random sequences.
UNIT IV DATA CONVERTERS AND SMART ANTENNAS 9
Parameters of Ideal and practical Data Converters, Techniques to Improve Data Converter
performance, Common ADC and DAC Architectures. Smart Antennas- Hardware implementation of
Smart Antennas.
UNIT V DIGITAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE CHOICES 9
DSP Processors, FPGA, ASIC s. Trade offs, Object oriented programming, Object Brokers, GNU
Radio-USRP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
Design data converters
Evaluate smart antennas
Discuss digital hardware and software choices
46
REFERENCES:
1. Jeffrey H.Reed, "Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering, Prentice
Hall,2002.
2. Joseph Mitola, "Software Radio Architecture: Object Oriented Approaches to Wireless System
Engineering", Wiley-Inter science; I Edition 2000,ISBN:0471384925
3. Radio, G. N. U. "The gnu software radio." Available from World Wide Web: https://gnuradio.
org (2007).
4. S.Shanmugavel, M.A.Bhagyaveni, R.Kalidoss, “Cognitive Radio-An Enabler for Internet of
things”, River Publishers, 2017.
CU5095 SPACE TIME WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To acquire the knowledge on various modulation and coding schemes for space-time Wireless
Communications.
To understand transmission and decoding techniques associated with Wireless
Communications.
To understand multiple-antenna systems such as multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO)
and Space-Time Codes.
UNIT I MULTIPLE ANTENNA PROPAGATION AND ST CHANNEL
CHARACTERIZATION 9
Wireless channel, Scattering model in macrocells, Channel as a ST random field, Scattering
functions, Polarization and field diverse channels, Antenna array topology, Degenerate channels,
reciprocity and its implications, Channel definitions, Physical scattering model, Extended channel
models, Channel measurements, sampled signal model, ST multiuser and ST interference
channels, ST channel estimation.
UNIT II CAPACITY OF MULTIPLE ANTENNA CHANNELS 8
Capacity of frequency flat deterministic MIMO channel: Channel unknown to the transmitter,
Channel known to the transmitter, capacity of random MIMO channels, Influence of ricean fading,
fading correlation, XPD and degeneracy on MIMO capacity, Capacity of frequency selective MIMO
channels.
UNIT III SPATIAL DIVERSITY 8
Diversity gain, Receive antenna diversity, Transmit antenna diversity, Diversity order and channel
variability, Diversity performance in extended channels, Combined space and path diversity,
Indirect transmit diversity, Diversity of a space-time- frequency selective fading channel.
UNIT IV MULTIPLE ANTENNA CODING AND RECEIVERS 10
Coding and interleaving architecture, ST coding for frequency flat channels, ST coding for
frequency selective channels, Receivers(SISO,SIMO,MIMO),Iterative MIMO receivers, Exploiting
channel knowledge at the transmitter: linear pre-filtering, optimal pre-filtering for maximum rate,
optimal pre-filtering for error rate minimization, selection at the transmitter, Exploiting imperfect
channel knowledge.
47
UNIT V ST OFDM, SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MIMO MULTIUSER DETECTION 10
SISO-OFDM modulation, MIMO-OFDM modulation, Signaling and receivers for
MIMOOFDM,SISO-SS modulation, MIMO-SS modulation, Signaling and receivers for MIMO- SS.
MIMOMAC, MIMO-BC, Outage performance for MIMO-MU, MIMO-MU with OFDM, CDMA and
multiple antennas.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To be able to design and evaluate receiver and transmitter diversity techniques.
To be able to design and develop OFDM based MIMO systems.
To be able to calculate capacity of MIMO systems.
REFERENCES:
1. Andre Viterbi “ Principles of Spread Spectrum Techniques” Addison Wesley 1995
2. Jafarkhani, Hamid. Space-time coding: Theory and Practice. Cambridge University Press,
2005.
3. Paulraj, Rohit Nabar, Dhananjay Gore., “Introduction to Space Time Wireless
Communication Systems”, Cambridge University Press, 2003
4. Sergio Verdu “ Multi User Detection” Cambridge University Press, 1998
CU5096 PATTERN RECOGNITION AND MACHINE LEARNING LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
Study the fundamental of pattern classifier.
To know about various clustering concepts.
To originate the various structural pattern recognition and feature extraction.
To understand the basic of concept learning and decision trees
To explore recent advances in pattern recognition.
UNIT I PATTERN CLASSIFIER 9
Overview of Pattern recognition – Discriminant functions – Supervised learning –Parametric
estimation – Maximum Likelihood Estimation – Bayesian parameter Estimation – Problems with
Bayes approach– Pattern classification by distance functions –Minimum distance pattern classifier.
UNIT II CLUSTERING 9
Clustering for unsupervised learning and classification -Clustering concept – C-means algorithm –
Hierarchical clustering procedures -Graph theoretic approach to pattern clustering -Validity of clusters.
UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION AND STRUCTURAL PATTERN
RECOGNITION 9
KL Transforms – Feature selection through functional approximation – Binary selection -Elements of
formal grammars - Syntactic description - Stochastic grammars –Structural representation.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION, CONCEPT LEARNING AND DECISION TREES 9
Learning Problems – Designing Learning systems, Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning –
Version Spaces and Candidate Elimination Algorithm – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning –
Representation – Algorithm – Heuristic Space Search
48
UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES 9
Neural network structures for pattern recognition -Neural network based pattern associators –
Unsupervised learning in neural pattern recognition -Self organizing networks -Fuzzy logic -Fuzzy
pattern classifiers -Pattern classification using Genetic Algorithms.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
Classify the data and identify the patterns.
Utilize the given data set to extract and select features for Pattern recognition.
Describe the decision tree and concept learning.
Discuss on recent advances in pattern recognition.
REFERENCES:
1. Duda R.O., and Hart.P.E., Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis, Wiley, New York, 1973.
2. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1993.
3. Narasimha Murty M and Susheela Devi V, “Pattern Recognition – An Algorithmic Approach”,
Springer, Universities Press, 2011
4. Robert J.Schalkoff, Pattern Recognition : Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches, John
Wiley &Sons Inc., New York, 2007.
5. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill Education (Indian Edition), 2013.
6. Tou and Gonzalez, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication Company, London,
1974.
NC5071 NETWORK ROUTING ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the layered architecture for communication networks and
the specific functionality of the network layer.
To enable the student to understand the basic principles of routing and the manner
this is implemented in conventional networks and the evolving routing algorithms
based on internetworking requirements, optical backbone and the wireless access
part of the network.
To enable the student to understand the different routing algorithms existing and
their performance characteristics.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
ISO OSI Layer Architecture, TCP/IP Layer Architecture, Functions of Network layer, General
Classification of routing, Routing in telephone networks, Dynamic Non hierarchical Routing
(DNHR), Trunk status map routing (TSMR), real-time network routing (RTNR), Distance
vector routing, Link state routing, Hierarchical routing.
UNIT II INTERNET ROUTING 10
Interior protocol : Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF),
Bellman Ford Distance Vector Routing. Exterior Routing Protocols: Exterior Gateway
Protocol (EGP) and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). Multicast Routing: Pros and cons of
Multicast and Multiple Unicast Routing, Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
(DVMRP), Multicast Open Shortest Path First (MOSPF), MBONE, Core Based Tree
Routing.
49
UNIT III ROUTING IN OPTICAL WDM NETWORKS 10
Classification of RWA algorithms, RWA algorithms, Fairness and Admission Control,
Distributed Control Protocols, Permanent Routing and Wavelength Requirements,
Wavelength Rerouting- Benefits and Issues, Lightpath Migration, Rerouting Schemes,
Algorithms- AG, MWPG.
UNIT IV MOBILE - IP NETWORKS 9
Macro-mobility Protocols, Micro-mobility protocol: Tunnel based : Hierarchical Mobile IP,
Intra domain Mobility Management, Routing based: Cellular IP, Handoff Wireless Access
Internet Infrastructure (HAWAII).
UNIT V MOBILE AD –HOC NETWORKS 9
Internet-based mobile ad-hoc networking communication strategies, Routing algorithms –
Proactive routing: destination sequenced Distance Vector Routing (DSDV), Reactive
routing:Dynamic Source Routing (DSR), Ad hoc On-Demand Distance Vector Routing
(AODV), Hybrid Routing: Zone Based Routing (ZRP).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to
Given the network and user requirements and the type of channel over which the
network has to operate, the student would be in a position to apply his knowledge for
identifying a suitable routing algorithm, implementing it and analyzing its
performance.
The student would also be able to design a new algorithm or modify an existing
algorithm to satisfy the evolving demands in the network and by the user
applications.
REFERENCES:
1. A.T Campbell et al., ― Comparison of IP Micromobility Protocols, IEEE Wireless
Communications Feb.2002, pp 72-82.
2. C.E Perkins, “Ad Hoc Networking”, Addison – Wesley, 2001.
3. C.Siva Rama Murthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks – Concepts,
Design and Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi –2002.
4. Ian F. Akyildiz, Jiang Xie and Shantidev Mohanty, “A Survey of mobility Management
in Next generation All IP- Based Wireless Systems”, IEEE Wireless Communications
Aug.2004, pp 16-27.
5. M. Steen Strub, “Routing in Communication network”, Prentice Hall International,
Newyork,1995.
6. S. Keshav, “An engineering approach to computer networking”, Addison Wesley
1999.
7. William Stallings, “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles”,
Prentice Hall, New York, 1995.
8. William Stallings, “High speed networks and Internets Performance and Quality of
Service”, II Edition, Pearson Education Asia. Reprint India 2002.
50
L T P C
CU5097 WIRELESS ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Ad-hoc & Sensor Networks.
To learn various fundamental and emerging protocols of all layers.
To study about the issues pertaining to major obstacles in establishment and
efficient management of Ad-hoc and sensor networks.
To understand the nature and applications of Ad-hoc and sensor networks.
To understand various security practices and protocols of Ad-hoc and Sensor
Networks.
UNIT I MAC & TCP IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9
Fundamentals of WLANs – IEEE 802.11 Architecture - Self configuration and Auto
configuration-Issues in Ad-Hoc Wireless Networks – MAC Protocols for Ad-Hoc Wireless
Networks – Contention Based Protocols - TCP over Ad-Hoc networks-TCP protocol
overview - TCP and MANETs – Solutions for TCP over Ad-Hoc Networks.
UNIT II ROUTING IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9
Routing in Ad-Hoc Networks- Introduction-Topology based versus Position based
Approaches-Proactive, Reactive, Hybrid Routing Approach-Principles and issues – Location
services - DREAM – Quorums based location service – Grid – Forwarding strategies –
Greedy packet forwarding – Restricted directional flooding- Hierarchical Routing- Issues
and Challenges in providing QoS.
UNIT III MAC, ROUTING & QOS IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Introduction – Architecture - Single node architecture – Sensor network design
considerations – Energy Efficient Design principles for WSNs – Protocols for WSN –
Physical Layer : Transceiver Design considerations – MAC Layer Protocols – IEEE
802.15.4 Zigbee – Link Layer and Error Control issues - Routing Protocols – Mobile Nodes
and Mobile Robots - Data Centric & Contention Based Networking – Transport Protocols &
QOS – Congestion Control issues – Application Layer support.
UNIT IV SENSOR MANAGEMENT 9
Sensor Management - Topology Control Protocols and Sensing Mode Selection Protocols -
Time synchronization - Localization and positioning – Operating systems and Sensor
Network programming – Sensor Network Simulators.
UNIT V SECURITY IN AD HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 9
Security in Ad-Hoc and Sensor networks – Key Distribution and Management – Software
based Anti-tamper techniques – water marking techniques – Defense against routing
attacks - Secure Adhoc routing protocols – Broadcast authentication WSN protocols –
TESLA – Biba – Sensor Network Security Protocols – SPINS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students should be able to
Identify different issues in wireless ad hoc and sensor networks.
To analyze protocols developed for ad hoc and sensor networks.
To identify and address the security threats in ad hoc and sensor networks.
Establish a Sensor network environment for different type of applications.
51
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian Perrig, J. D. Tygar, "Secure Broadcast Communication: In Wired and Wireless
Networks", Springer, 2006.
2. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal “Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks:
Theory and Applications (2nd Edition), World Scientific Publishing, 2011.
3. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures
and Protocols”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. C.K.Toh, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education, 2002.
5. Erdal Çayırcı , Chunming Rong, “Security in Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
6. Holger Karl, Andreas willig, Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks, John Wiley & Sons, Inc .2005.
7. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T G Basavaraju, C Puttamadappa, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless
Networks”, Auerbach Publications, 2008.
8. Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, “Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor
Networks Theory and Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
CP5292 INTERNET OF THINGS LT
P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of Internet of Things
To learn about the basics of IOT protocols
To build a small low cost embedded system using Raspberry Pi.
To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real world scenario.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO IoT 9
Internet of Things - Physical Design- Logical Design- IoT Enabling Technologies - IoT Levels &
Deployment Templates - Domain Specific IoTs - IoT and M2M - IoT System Management with
NETCONF-YANG- IoT Platforms Design Methodology
UNIT II IoT ARCHITECTURE 9
M2M high-level ETSI architecture - IETF architecture for IoT - OGC architecture - IoT reference model
- Domain model - information model - functional model - communication model - IoT reference
architecture
UNIT III IoT PROTOCOLS 9
Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID Protocols –
Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNet Protocol – Modbus– Zigbee
Architecture – Network layer – 6LowPAN - CoAP - Security
UNIT IV BUILDING IoT WITH RASPBERRY PI & ARDUINO 9
Building IOT with RASPERRY PI- IoT Systems - Logical Design using Python – IoT Physical Devices
& Endpoints - IoT Device -Building blocks -Raspberry Pi -Board - Linux on Raspberry Pi - Raspberry
Pi Interfaces -Programming Raspberry Pi with Python - Other IoT Platforms - Arduino.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES AND REAL-WORLD APPLICATIONS 9
Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industrial automation, smart grid,
Commercial building automation, Smart cities - participatory sensing - Data Analytics for IoT –
Software & Management Tools for IoT Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT -
52
Amazon Web Services for IoT.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze various protocols for IoT
Develop web services to access/control IoT devices.
Design a portable IoT using Rasperry Pi
Deploy an IoT application and connect to the cloud.
Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”,
Universities Press, 2015
2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the
Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011.
3. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective”, CRC
Press, 2012.
4. Jan Ho¨ ller, Vlasios Tsiatsis , Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis , Karnouskos, Stefan
Avesand. David Boyle, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things -
Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence", Elsevier, 2014.
5. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012.
MU5091 L T P C
MULTIMEDIA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic ideas of compression algorithms related to multimedia
components – Text, speech, audio, image and Video.
To understand the principles and standards and their applications with an emphasis
on underlying technologies, algorithms, and performance.
To appreciate the use of compression in multimedia processing applications
To understand and implement compression standards in detail.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPRESSION 9
Introduction To multimedia – Graphics, Image and Video representations – Fundamental
concepts of video, digital audio – Storage requirements of multimedia applications – Need
for compression – Taxonomy of compression Algorithms - Elements of Information Theory
– Error Free Compression – Lossy Compression.
UNIT II TEXT COMPRESSION 9
Huffman coding – Adaptive Huffman coding – Arithmetic coding – Shannon-Fano coding
– Dictionary techniques – LZW family algorithms.
UNIT III IMAGE COMPRESSION 9
Image Compression: Fundamentals –– Compression Standards – JPEG Standard –
Sub-band coding – Wavelet Based compression – Implementation using Filters – EZW,
SPIHT coders – JPEG 2000 standards – JBIG and JBIG2 standards.
53
UNIT IV AUDIO COMPRESSION 9
Audio compression Techniques – law, A-Law companding – Frequency domain and filtering
– Basic sub-band coding – Application to speech coding – G.722 – MPEG audio –
progressive encoding – Silence compression, Speech compression – Formant and CELP
vocoders.
UNIT V VIDEO COMPRESSION 9
Video compression techniques and Standards – MPEG video coding: MPEG-1 and MPEG-
2 video coding: MPEG-3 and MPEG-4 – Motion estimation and compensation techniques –
H.261 Standard – DVI technology – DVI real time compression – Current Trends in
Compression standards.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students should be able to
Implement basic compression algorithms with MATLAB and its equivalent open
source environments.
Design and implement some basic compression standards
Critically analyze different approaches of compression algorithms in multimedia
related mini projects.
REFERENCES:
1. David Solomon, “Data Compression – The Complete Reference”, Fourth Edition,
Springer Verlog, New York, 2006.
2. Darrel Hankerson, Greg A Harris, Peter D Johnson, ‘Introduction to Information
Theory and Data Compression’ Second Edition, Chapman and Hall ,CRC press,
2003.
3. Khalid Sayood: Introduction to Data Compression”, Morgan Kauffman Harcourt India,
Third Edition, 2010.
4. Mark S. Drew, Ze-Nian Li, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, PHI, 2009.
5. Peter Symes : Digital Video Compression, McGraw Hill Pub., 2004.
6. Yun Q.Shi, Huifang Sun, “Image and Video Compression for Multimedia
Engineering, Algorithms and Fundamentals”, CRC Press, 2003.
CU5074 ULTRA WIDEBAND COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To give fundamental concepts related to Ultra wide band
• To understand the channel model and signal processing for UWB.
• To acquire knowledge about UWB antennas and regulations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO UWB 9
History, Definition, FCC Mask, UWB features, UWB Interference: IEEE 802.11.a
Interference, Signal to Interference ratio calculation, Interference with other wireless
services.
UNIT II UWB TECHNOLOGIES AND CHANNEL MODELS 9
Impulse Radio, Pulsed Multiband, Multiband OFDM, features : Complexity, Power
Consumption, Security and achievable data rate. MIMO Multiband OFDM, Differential
multiband OFDM, Performance characterization, Ultra Wide Band Wireless Channels
54
Channel model: Impulse Response Modeling of UWB Wireless Channels, IEEE UWB
channel model, Path loss, Delay profiles, Time and frequency modeling.
UNIT III UWB SIGNAL PROCESSING 9
Data Modulation schemes, UWB Multiple Access Modulation, BER, Rake Receiver,
Transmit- Reference (T-R) Technique, UWB Range- Data Rate Performance, UWB
Channel Capacity, UWB Wireless Locationing: Position Locationing Methods, Time of
Arrival Estimation, NLOS Location Error , Locationing with OFDM
UNIT IV UWB ANTENNAS 9
Antenna Requirements, Radiation Mechanism of the UWB Antennas, Types of Broad
band antennas, Parameters, Analysis of UWB Antennas, Link Budget for UWB
System. Design examples of broad band UWB antennas.
UNIT V UWB APPLICATIONS AND REGULATIONS 9
Wireless Ad hoc Networking, UWB Wireless Sensor, RFID, Consumer Electronics and
Personal, Asset Location, Medical applications, UWB Regulation and standards in various
countries , UWB Regulation in ITU, IEEE Standardization
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student would be able to understand UWB technologies.
Ability to assess the performance of UWB channels.
The student would be able to design UWB antenna for various applications.
REFERENCES:
1. Homayoun Nikookar and Ramjee Prasad, “Introduction to Ultra Wideband for
Wireless Communications”1st Edition, Springer Science & Business Media B.V.
2010.
2. Thomas Kaiser, Feng Zheng “Ultra Wideband Systems with MIMO”, 1st Edition, John
Wiley & Sons Ltd, New York, 2010.
3. W. Pam Siriwongpairat and K. J. Ray Liu, “Ultra-Wideband Communications
Systems: Multiband OFDM approach” John Wiley and IEEE press, New York 2008.
MP5092 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the basics of artificial neural networks
To provide adequate knowledge about feed forward /feedback neural networks
To apply the concept of fuzzy logic in various systems.
To have the idea about genetic algorithm
To provide adequate knowledge about the applications of Soft Computing.
UNIT I ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK 9
Introduction-Basic concepts of Neural Network-Model of an Artificial Neuron-Characteristics
of Neural Network-Learning Methods-Backpropagation Network Architecture-
Backpropagation Learning-Counter Propagation Network-Hopfield/Recurrent Network-
Adaptive Resonance Theory.
55
UNIT II FUZZY LOGIC 9
Basic concepts of Fuzzy Logic-Fuzzy Sets and Crisp Sets-Fuzzy Set Theory and
Operations-Properties of Fuzzy Sets-Fuzzy and Crisp relations, Fuzzy to Crisp Conversion-
Membership Functions-Interference in Fuzzy Logic-Fuzzy if-then Rules, Fuzzy implications
and Fuzzy Algorithms,Fuzzification & Defuzzification-Fuzzy Controller.
UNIT III NEURO-FUZZY MODELLING 9
ANFIS Architecture-Classification and Regression Trees-Data Clustering algorithms-
Rulebase Structure Identification.
UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Basic concepts-Working Principle-Inheritance Operators-Cross Over-Inversion & Deletion-
Mutation Operator-Generation Cycle.
UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF SOFTCOMPUTING 9
Genetic Algorithm Application- Bagley and Adaptive Game-Playing Program- Greg Viols
Fuzzy Cruise Controller-Air Conditioner Controller-Application of Back Propagation Neural
Network.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Knowledge on concepts of soft computational techniques.
Able to apply soft computational techniques to solve various problems.
Motivate to solve research oriented problems.
REFERENCES:
1. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, ‘Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic Theory and Applications’,
Printice Hall of India, 2002.
2. J.S.R.Jang,C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani,"Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing",PHI,2004,
Pearson Education 2004.
3. Laurene Fausett,”Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms and Applications”,
Pearson Education India, 2006.
4. S.Rajasekaran and G.A.V.Pai."Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic
Algorithms", PHI, 2010.
3. Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy logic with Engineering Applications”, John Wiley and Sons,
2009.
4. Zimmermann H.J."Fuzzy Set Theory and Its Application" Springer International
Edition, 2011.
NC5072
L T P C
NETWORK PROCESSORS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
The students should be made to:
Learn network processors
Study commercial network processors
Understand network processor architecture
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Traditional protocol processing Systems – Network processing Hardware – Basic Packet
Processing Algorithms and data Structures - Packet processing functions – Protocol
56
Software – Hardware Architectures for Protocol processing – Classification and Forwarding
– Switching Fabrics.
UNIT II NETWORK PROCESSOR TECHNOLOGY 9
Network Processors: Motivation and purpose - Complexity of Network Processor Design –
Network Processor Architectures architectural variety, architectural characteristics
Peripheral Chips supporting Network Processors: Storage processors, Classification
Processors, Search Engines, Switch Fabrics, Traffic Managers.
UNIT III COMMERCIAL NETWORK PROCESSORS 9
Multi-Chip Pipeline, Augmented RISC processor, Embedded Processor plus Coprocessors,
Pipelilne of Flomogeneous processors. Configurable Instruction set processors – Pipeline of
Electrogeneous processors – Extensive and Diverse processors – Flexible RISC plus
Coprocessors – Scalability issues – Design Tradeoffs and consequences.
UNIT IV NETWORK PROCESSOR: ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING 9
Architecture: Intel Network Processor: Multi headed Architecture Overview – Features-
Embedded EISC processor - Packet Processor Hardware – Memory interfaces – System
and Control Interface Components – Bus Interface. Programming Software Development
Kit-IXP Instruction set – register formats – Micro Engine Programming – Intra thread and
Inter-thread communication– thread synchronization – developing sample applications –
control plane – ARM programming.
UNIT V IOS TECHNOLOGIES 9
CISCO COS – Connectivity and scalability – high availability – IP routing – IP services –
IPV6 –Mobile IP – MPLS – IP Multicast 0 Manageability – QoS – Security – Switching –
Layer VPN2.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
Discuss network processor architecture
Compare different programming
Explain IOS technologies
REFERENCES:
1. Douglas E.Comer “Networks Systems Design using Network Processors” Prentice
Hall JaN. 2003.
2. Erik, J.Johnson and Aaron R.Kunze, “IXP2400/2806 Programming: The Microengine
Coding Grade” Intel Press.
3. Hill Carlson, “Intel Internet Exchange Architecture & Applications a Practical Guide to
Intel’s network Processors” Intel press. www.cisco.com
4. Panas C. Lekkas, “Network Processors: Architectgures, Protocols and Paradigms
Telecom Engineering)”, McGraw Hill, Professional, 2003.
5. Patrick Crowley, M aEranklin, H. Hadminglu, PZ Onfryk, “Network Processor Design,
Issues and Practices Vol-1” Morgan Kaufman, 2002.
6. Patrick Crowley, M a Frankliln, H. Hadimioglyum PZ Onufryk, Network Processor
Design, Issues and Prentices vol.II, Morgan Kaufman, 2003.
7. Ran Giladi, Network Processors: Architecture, Programming, and Implementation,
Morgan Kauffmann, 2008.
57
NE5071 NETWORK MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To appreciate the need for interoperable network management as a typical distributed
application
To familiarize concepts and terminology associated with SNMP
To be aware of current trends in network management technologies
UNIT I OSI NETWORK MANAGEMENT 8
OSI Network management model - Organizational model - Information model, Communication
model. Abstract Syntax Notation - Encoding Structure, Macros Functional Model CMIP/CMIS
UNIT II BROADBAND NETWORK MANAGEMENT 9
Broadband networks and services, ATM Technology - VP, VC, ATM Packet, Integrated
service, ATM LAN emulation, Virtual LAN, ATM Network Management - ATM Network
reference model, Integrated local Management Interface. ATM Management Information
base, Role of SNMP and ILMI in ATM Management, M1, M2, M3, M4 interface. ATM Digital
Exchange Interface Management.
UNIT III SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL 10
SNMPv1 Network Management: Communication and Functional Models. The SNMP
Communication Model, Functional model. SNMP Management SNMPv2: Major Changes in
SNMPv2, SNMPv2 System Architecture, SNMPv2 Structure of Management Information, The
SNMPv2 Management Information Base,SNMPv2 Protocol, Compatibility With
SNMPv1.Configuration management, Fault management, Performance management, Event
Correlation Techniques 168 security management, Accounting management, Report
Management, Policy Based Management, Services Level Management.
UNIT IV NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9
Network Management Tools, Network Statistics Measurement Systems, History of Enterprise
Management, Commercial Network management Systems, System Management and
Enterprise Management Solutions.
UNIT V WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT 9
NMS with Web Interface and Web-Based Management, Web Interface to SNMP
Management, Embedded Web-Based Management, Desktop management Interface, Web-
Based Enterprise Management, WBEM: Windows Management Instrumentation, Java
management Extensions, Management of a Storage Area Network.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to
Diagnose problems and make minor repairs to computer networks using appropriate
diagnostics software b
Demonstrate how to correctly maintain LAN computer systems
Maintain the network by performing routine maintenance tasks
Apply network management tools
58
REFERENCES:
1. Lakshmi G Raman, "Fundamentals of Telecommunication Network Management",
Eastern Economy Edition IEEE Press, New Delhi, 1999.
2. Mani Subramanian, "Network Management - Principles and Practice", Pearson
Education, Second edition, 2010.
3. Mani Subramanian, "Network Management Principles and Practice", Addison Wesley,
Second edition, 2010.
4. Mark Burges, "Principles of Network System Administration", Wiley, 2000.
5. Salah Aiidarons and Thomas Plevayk, "Telecommunications Network Technologies
and Implementations”, Eastern Economy Edition IEEE press, New Delhi, 1998.
6. Stephen Morris, "Network Management, MIBs and MPLS - Principles, Design and
Implementation", Pearson Education, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.apps.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1095.html
2. ycchen.im.ncnu.edu.tw/nm/ch_5x.ppt
3. en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Systems_Management
4. www.rivier.edu/faculty/vriabov/NWM_ch_14.ppt 169
NC5291 COMMUNICATION NETWORK SECURITY LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES :
The students should be made to:
Understand the need and concept of security
Learn cryptosystems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND NUMBER THEORY 9
Introduction to Information Security, Computer Security & Network Security. Need For Security.
Security – Goals, Attacks, Security Services and Mechanisms, and Techniques. Number Theory and
Mathematics for Symmetric Cryptography- Finite Arithmetic, Congruence Arithmetic-Linear
Congruence and Quadratic Congruence. Mathematics for Asymmetric-Key Cryptography: Fermat‟s
Theorem and Euler‟s Theorem, Primes, Primality Testing, Factorization, CRT, Exponentiation.
Classical Symmetric-Key Ciphers –Substitution Ciphers, Transposition Ciphers.
UNIT II SYMMETRIC AND ASYMMETRIC CRYPTOSYSTEMS 9
Modern Symmetric-Key Cipher - Block Ciphers (DES, 3DES, AES and its mode of operations),
Stream Ciphers, Asymmetric-Key Cryptosystem- RSA, ElGamal, ECC, Key Management - Diffie-
Hellman (DH) Mechanism, Kerberos – Needham Schroeder Protocol.
UNIT III AUTHENTICATION, DIGITAL SIGNATURES AND CERTIFICATES 9
Message Integrity & Message Authentication - Message Authentication Code (MAC), Cryptographic
Hash Functions – Birthday Attacks, Digital Signatures - Digital Signature Standards (FIPS 186-2),
DSA (ANSI X9.30), RSA (ANSI X9.31) – Public Key Distribution – RSA schemes, Digital Certificates -
PKI Certificates, PKI Life Cycle Management .
UNIT IV TRUSTED IDENTITY 9
Entity Authentication: Password System- Fixed and One time Passwords (S/Key) RFC 2289 –
Callback Systems, Zero Knowledge, Challenge and Response Systems – RADIUS –– ITU-T X.509.
59
UNIT V SECURITY AT LAYERS 9
Network Layer Security - IPSec, Transport Layer Security- SSL/TLS, SSH, Application Layer Security
–PGP, S/MIME, Firewall - Concepts, Architecture, Packet Filtering, Proxy Services and Bastion Hosts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
Explain digital signature standards
Discuss authentication
Explain security at different layers
REFERENCES:
1. Behrouz A.Forouzan, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Special Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2007.
2. Bruce Scheneier, “Applied Cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994.
3. Charlie Kaufmann, Radia Perlman, Mike Speciner, "Network Security", Second Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2002
4. Douglas R.Stinson, “Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, CRC Press Series on Discrete
Mathematics and its Applications, 1995.
5. David M. Durton, “Elementary Number Theory”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Sixth Edition, 2009.
6. William Stallings “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice”, 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2002.
7. William Stallings “Network Security Essentials: Applications and Standards”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.
CU5004 HIGH PERFORMANCE SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the student to understand the basics of switching technologies and their implementation
LANs, ATM networks and IP networks.
To enable the student to understand the different switching architectures and queuing strategies
and their impact on the blocking performances.
To expose the student to the advances in packet switching architectures and IP addressing and
switching solutions and approaches to exploit and integrate the best features of different
architectures for high speed switching.
UNIT I LAN SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY 9
Switching Concepts, LAN Switching, switch forwarding techniques - cut through and store and
forward, Layer 3 switching, Loop Resolution, Switch Flow control, virtual LANs.
UNIT II ATM SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES 9
Blocking networks - basic - and- enhanced banyan networks, sorting networks - merge sorting, re-
arrangable networks - full-and- partial connection networks, non blocking networks - Recursive
network construction, comparison of non-blocking network, Switching with deflection routing - shuffle
switch, tandem banyan switch.
60
UNIT III QUEUES IN ATM SWITCHES 9
Internal Queueing -Input, output and shared queueing, multiple queueing networks – combined Input,
output and shared queueing - performance analysis of Queued switches.
UNIT IV PACKET SWITCHING ARCHITECTURES 9
Architectures of Internet Switches and Routers- Bufferless and buffered Crossbar switches, Multi-
stage switching, Optical Packet switching; Switching fabric on a chip; Internally buffered Crossbars.
UNIT V IP SWITCHING 9
Addressing model, IP Switching types - flow driven and topology driven solutions, IP Over ATM
address and next hop resolution, multicasting, Ipv6 over ATM.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The student would be able to identify suitable switch architectures for a specified networking scenario
and demonstrate its blocking performance.
The student would be in a position to apply his knowledge of switching technologies, architectures
and buffering strategies for designing high speed communication networks and analyse their
performance
REFERENCES
1. Achille Pattavina, “Switching Theory: Architectures and performance in Broadband ATM networks
",John Wiley & Sons Ltd, New York. 1998
2. Christopher Y Metz, “Switching protocols & Architectures”, McGraw - Hill Professional Publishing,
NewYork.1998.
3. Elhanany M. Hamdi, “High Performance Packet Switching architectures”, Springer Publications,
2007.
4. Rainer Handel, Manfred N Huber, Stefan Schroder, “ATM Networks - Concepts Protocols,
Applications”, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, New York. 1999.
5. Rich Siefert, Jim Edwards, “The All New Switch Book – The Complete Guide to LAN Switching
Technology”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Second Edition, 2008.
61
ANNA UNIVERSITY
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
M.E. EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES
Programme Educational Objective
1) To prepare students for successful careers in industry that meets the needs of Indian and
global industries as employable professionals.
2) To develop the ability among students to synthesize data and technical concepts for
application to product design, system development of societal importance.
3) To provide opportunity for students to work as part of teams on multi disciplinary projects to
solve engineering, technical issues of societal demands.
4) To provide the P.G students with a sound foundation in the mathematical, scientific and
engineering fundamentals necessary to formulate, solve and analyze engineering problems
and to prepare them for employability and higher studies.
5) To promote student awareness of the life long learning and to introduce them to professional
ethics and codes of professional practice.
Program Outcomes
a) To Offer the P.G Program in Embedded System Technology with imparting domain knowledge
in Electrical circuits, electronic devices, information technology and communication
engineering to develop inter-process communication techniques based on hardware– software
approaches for real time process automations.
b) To enhance teaching & research contributions in Embedded System Technology with an
ability to design and construct hardware and software systems, component or process
keeping in tune with the latest developments and Industry requirements particularly for
electrical and allied consumer electronics industries.
c) An ability to design and conduct experiments as well as to organize, analyze and interpret data
on multidisciplinary domains onto role of electronics, computer science, communication
engineering for electrical applications.
d) Be able to identify problems in major issues of Electrical Systems , analyse problems, co-
ordinate through all options in design & developments and solve them using the knowledge
base of Embedded Technology.
e) To extend advanced teaching & training sessions with promoting industry based internships,
leading to development of self-employable entrepreneurs and globally employable
professionals.
f) To provide guidance and supervision in identified domains of Embedded Application
Development for Electrical & related Industries with realistic concerns such as economic,
environmental, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability and technology sustainability.
g) An ability to effectively communicate technical information in speech, presentation, and in
writing.
1
h) An understanding of professional, legal and ethical issues and responsibilities as it pertains to
engineering profession with engaging in life-long learning with knowledge of contemporary
issues.
Programme Programme Outcomes
Educational
Objectives a b c d e f g h
1
2
3
4
5
MAPPING – PG- EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES
POa POb POc POd POe POf POg POh
SEM Applied Mathematics for
1 Electrical Engineers
Advanced Digital Principles
and Design
Microcontroller Based System
Design
Design of Embedded Systems
Software for Embedded Systems
Elective I
Embedded System Lab I
YEAR 1
SEM Real Time Operating System
2 Pervasive Devices and
Technology
RISC Processor Architecture
and Programming
Internet of Things
Elective II
Elective III
Embedded System Lab II
Technical Seminar
SEM Elective IV
3 Elective V
Elective VI
YEAR 2
Technical Seminar
Project Work Phase I
SEM
Project Work Phase II
4
2
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
M.E. EMBEDDED SYSTEM TECHNOLOGIES (FULL TIME)
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS I TO IV SEMESTERS
SEMESTER I
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA5155 Applied Mathematics for FC 4 4 0 0 4
Electrical Engineers
2. ET5101 Advanced Digital PC 5 3 2 0 4
Principles and Design
3. ET5151 Microcontroller Based PC 3 3 0 0 3
System Design
4. ET5152 Design of Embedded PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
5. ET5191 Software for Embedded PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
6. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. ET5111 Embedded System PC 4 0 0 4 2
Lab I
TOTAL 25 19 2 4 22
SEMESTER II
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. ET5251 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Real Time Operating
Systems
2. ET5201 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Pervasive Devices and
Technology
3. ET5202 RISC Processor PC 5 3 2 0 4
Architecture and
Programming
4. ET5203 Internet of Things PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. Professional Elective III PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
7. ET5211 Embedded System Lab II PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 24 18 2 4 21
3
SEMESTER III
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Professional Elective IV PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. Professional Elective VI PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
4. ET5311 Project Work Phase I EEC
12 0 0 12 6
5. ET5312 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL
23 9 0 14 16
SEMESTER IV
SI.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. ET5411 Project Work Phase II EEC 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS : 71
4
FOUNDATION COURSES (FC)
S.No Course COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
Code PERIODS
1. MA5155 Applied Mathematics
for Electrical FC 4 4 0 0 4
Engineers
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
S.No Course COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
Code PERIODS
1. Advanced Digital PC 5 3 2 0 4
ET5101 Principles and
Design
2. Microcontroller PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5151 Based System
Design
3. Design of Embedded PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5152
Systems
4. Software for PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5191
Embedded Systems
5. Embedded System PC 4 0 0 4 2
ET5111
Lab I
6. Real Time Operating PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5251
Systems
7. Pervasive Devices PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5201
and Technology
8. RISC Processor PC 5 3 2 0 4
ET5202 Architecture and
Programming
9. Internet of Things PC 3 3 0 0 3
ET5203
10. Embedded System PC 4 0 0 4 2
ET5211
Lab II
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)*
SEMESTER I
ELECTIVE I
S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. ET5091 MEMS Technology PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. ET5001 Advanced PE 3 3 0 0 3
Computer
Architecture and
Parallel Processing
3. IN5092 Digital PE 3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
5
SEMESTER II
ELECTIVE II AND III
1. ET5002 Embedded Linux PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. ET5071 Advanced Digital PE 3 3 0 0 3
Signal Processing
3. ET5003 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
4. ET5004 Embedded Product PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
5. ET5005 Automotive Embedded PE 3 3 0 0 3
System
6. ET5006 Reconfigurable PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processor and SoC
Design
SEMESTER III
ELECTIVE IV, V AND VI
1. ET5092
Digital Image
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
2. ET5007 Embedded Networking
and Automation of PE 3 3 0 0 3
Electrical System
3. ET5008 Smart System Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. ET5009 Entrepreneurship
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
5. ET5010 Nano Electronics PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. ET5011 Distributed Embedded
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Computing
7. PS5091 Smart Grid PE 3 3 0 0 3
8. PS5073 Electric Vehicles and
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Power Management
9. ET5012 Soft Computing and
Optimization PE 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
10. ET5013 Wireless And Mobile
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
11. ET5014 Cryptography And
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Network Security
12. IN5079 Robotics and Control
PE 3 3 0 0 3
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
S.No Course COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
Code PERIODS
1. ET5311 Project Work Phase I EEC 12 0 0 12 6
2. ET5312 Technical Seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1
3. ET5411 Project Work Phase II EEC 24 0 0 24 12
6
MA5155 APPLIED MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
The main objective of this course is to demonstrate various analytical skills in applied mathematics
and extensive experience with the tactics of problem solving and logical thinking applicable for the
students of electrical engineering. This course also will help the students to identify, formulate,
abstract, and solve problems in electrical engineering using mathematical tools from a variety of
mathematical areas, including matrix theory, calculus of variations, probability, linear programming
and Fourier series.
UNIT I MATRIX THEORY 12
Cholesky decomposition - Generalized Eigenvectors - Canonical basis - QR Factorization - Least
squares method - Singular value decomposition.
UNIT II CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS 12
Concept of variation and its properties – Euler’s equation – Functional dependant on first and higher
order derivatives – Functionals dependant on functions of several independent variables – Variational
problems with moving boundaries – Isoperimetric problems - Direct methods : Ritz and Kantorovich
methods.
UNIT III PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12
Probability – Axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Random variables -
Probability function – Moments – Moment generating functions and their properties – Binomial,
Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions – Function of a random
variable.
UNIT IV LINEAR PROGRAMMING 12
Formulation – Graphical solution – Simplex method – Big M method - Two phase method -
Transportation and Assignment models.
UNIT V FOURIER SERIES 12
Fourier trigonometric series : Periodic function as power signals – Convergence of series – Even and
odd function : Cosine and sine series – Non periodic function : Extension to other intervals - Power
signals : Exponential Fourier series – Parseval’s theorem and power spectrum – Eigenvalue problems
and orthogonal functions – Regular Sturm - Liouville systems – Generalized Fourier series.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Apply various methods in matrix theory to solve system of linear equations.
Maximizing and minimizing the functional that occur in electrical engineering discipline.
Computation of probability and moments, standard distributions of discrete and continuous
random variables and functions of a random variable.
Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop a
linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for solving
linear programming problems.
Fourier series analysis and its uses in representing the power signals.
7
REFERENCES :
1. Andrews L.C. and Phillips R.L., "Mathematical Techniques for Engineers and Scientists",
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
2. Bronson, R. “Matrix Operation”, Schaum’s outline series, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Elsgolc, L. D. "Calculus of Variations", Dover Publications, New York, 2007.
4. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
5. O'Neil, P.V., "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2003.
6. Taha, H.A., “Operations Research, An Introduction”, 9th Edition, Pearson education, New Delhi,
2016.
ET5101 ADVANCED DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND DESIGN LT P C
3204
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To expose the students to the fundamentals of sequential system design, Asynchronous
circuits, switching errors .
To teach the fundamentals of modeling through comparative study on the classification of
commercial family of Programmable Device
To study on Fault identification in digital switching circuits
To introduce logics for design of Programmable Devices
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 12
Analysis of Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks (CSSN) Modeling of CSSN – State table
Assignment and Reduction – Design of CSSN – ASM Chart – ASM Realization.
UNIT II ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 12
Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential Circuit (ASC) – Flow Table Reduction – Races in ASC – State
Assignment Problem and the Transition Table – Design of ASC – Static and Dynamic Hazards –
Essential Hazards – Designing Hazard free circuits
UNIT III FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND TESTABILITY ALGORITHMS 12
Fault Table Method – Path Sensitization Method – Boolean Difference Method – Kohavi Algorithm –
Tolerance Techniques –Built-in Self Test.
UNIT IV ARCHITECTURES &DESIGN USING PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES 12
Realize combinational, Arithmetic, Sequential Circuit with Programmable Array Logic; Architecture
and application of Field Programmable Logic Sequence. Architecture of EPLD, Programmable
Electrically Erasable Logic – Programming Techniques -Re-Programmable Devices Architecture-
Function blocks, I/O blocks, Interconnects- Xilinx FPGA – Xilinx 2000 - Xilinx 4000 family.
8
UNIT V HDL PROGRAMMING 12
Overview of digital design with VHDL, hierarchical modelling concepts, gate level modelling, data
flow modelling, behavioural modelling, task & functions, logic synthesis-simulation-Design
examples,Ripple carry Adders, Carry Look ahead adders, Multiplier, ALU, Shift Registers, Multiplexer,
Comparator, Test Bench
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Discussions / Practice on Workbench : Logic Synthesis and Simulation for
digital designs
TOTAL : 45+ 30=75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Analyze and design sequential digital circuits
Design and use programming tools for implementing digital circuits of industry standards
Identify the requirements and specifications of the system required for a given application
Learners can acquire knowledge about HDL programming.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge upgradation on
recent trends in digital design for embedded systems.
REFERENCES:
1. Donald G. Givone, “Digital principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill 2002.
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2002
3. William J. Dally / Curtis Harting / Tor M. Aamodt,” Digital Design Using VHDL:A Systems
Approach, Cambridge Univerity Press,2015.
4. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Digital Systems design using VHDL”, Cengage Learning, 2010.
5. Mark Zwolinski, “Digital System Design with VHDL”, Pearson Education, 2004
6. Parag K Lala, “Digital System design using PLD”, BS Publications, 2003
7. Stephen M.Trimberger,FPGA Technology,Springer,1994
8. Nripendra N Biswas, “Logic Design Theory”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001
9. Charles H. Roth Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic design”, Thomson Learning, 2004.
10. John V.Oldfeild ,Richard C.Dorf,”Field Programmable Gate Arrays”,Wiley India Edition,2008
ET5151 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the fundamentals of microcontroller based system design.
To teach I/O and RTOS role on microcontroller.
To know Microcontroller based system design, applications.
To teach I/O interface in system Design
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
9
UNIT I 8051 ARCHITECTURE 9
Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – instruction set – Timers - Interrupts - I/O
ports, Interfacing I/O Devices – Serial Communication.
UNIT II 8051 PROGRAMMING 9
Assembly language programming – Arithmetic Instructions – Logical Instructions –Single bit
Instructions – Timer Counter Programming – Serial Communication Programming, Interrupt
Programming, LCD digital clock, thermometer – Significance of RTOS for 8051
UNIT III PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – instruction set – PIC progrmming in
Assembly & C –I/O port, Data Conversion, RAM & ROM Allocation, Timer programming, practice in
MP-LAB.
UNIT IV PERIPHERAL OF PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9
Timers – Interrupts, I/O ports- I2C bus-A/D converter-UART- CCP modules -ADC, DAC and Sensor
Interfacing –Flash and EEPROM memories.
UNIT V SYSTEM DESIGN – CASE STUDY 9
Interfacing LCD Display – Keypad Interfacing - Generation of Gate signals for converters and
Inverters - Motor Control – Controlling DC/ AC appliances – Measurement of frequency - Stand alone
Data Acquisition System.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :
Discussions/Practice on Workbench : 8051/PIC/ATMEL/other Microcontroller based Assembly/C
language programming – Arithmetic Programming– Timer Counter Programming – Serial
Communication- Programming Interrupt –RTOS basis in Task creation and run – LCD digital
clock/thermometer- Motor Control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
8-bit microcontrollers, learn assembly and C-programming of PIC.
learn Interfacing of Microcontroller.
Learners will study about PIC microcontroller and system design.
The course would enable students to enrich their knowledge with hands on experiments and
project based learning
Effectively utilize microcontroller software development tools such as a compiler, make files, or
compile scripts
REFERENCES:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey ‘ PIC Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18’, Pearson Education 2008
2. Rajkamal,”Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming Interfacing,& System Design,
Pearson,2012.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi ,Sepehr Naimi‘ AVR Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems using Assembly and C”, Pearson Education 2014.
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice G. Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, ‘The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems’ Prentice Hall, 2005.
5. John Iovine, ‘PIC Microcontroller Project Book ’, McGraw Hill 2000
6. Senthil Kumar,Saravanan,Jeevanathan,”microprocessor & microcontrollers,Oxford,2013.
7. Myke Predko, “Programming and customizing the 8051 microcontroller”, TMcGraw Hill 2001.
10
ET5152 DESIGN OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LTPC
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To provide a clear understanding on the basic concepts, Building Blocks of Embedded
System
To teach the fundamentals of Embedded processor Modeling , Bus Communication in
processors, Input/output interfacing
To introduce on processor scheduling algorithms , Basics of Real time operating system
To discuss on aspects required in developing a new embedded processor, different Phases
& Modeling of embedded system
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Embedded Systems –Structural units in Embedded processor, selection of processor
& memory devices- DMA, Memory management methods- memory mapping, cache replacement
concept, Timer and Counting devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock
UNIT II EMBEDDED NETWORKING AND INTERRUPTS SERVICE MECHANISM 9
Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication protocols -
RS232 standard – RS485 –USB – Inter Integrated Circuits (I2C) – interrupt sources , Programmed-I/O
busy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism- ISR concept-– multiple interrupts – context
and periods for context switching, interrupt latency and deadline -Introduction to Basic Concept
Device Drivers.
UNIT III RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9
Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling, Task communication-
shared memory, message passing-, Interprocess Communication – synchronization between
processes-semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority inheritance-comparison of
commercial RTOS features - RTOS Lite, Full RTOS, VxWorks, µC/OS-II, RT Linux,
UNIT IV SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT TOOLS 9
Software Development environment-IDE, assembler, compiler, linker, simulator, debugger, Incircuit
emulator, Target Hardware Debugging, need for Hardware-Software Partitioning and Co-Design.
Overview of UML, Scope of UML modeling, Conceptual model of UML, Architectural, UML basic
elements-Diagram- Modeling techniques - structural, Behavioral, Activity Diagrams.
UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 9
Objectives, different Phases & Modeling of the Embedded product Development Life Cycle (EDLC),
Case studies on Smart card- Adaptive Cruise control in a Car -Mobile Phone software for key inputs.
Note: Class Room Discussions and Tutorials can include the following Guidelines for improved
Teaching /Learning Process: Practice through any of Case studies through Exercise/Discussions on
Design , Development of embedded Products like : Smart card -Adaptive Cruise control in a Car -
Mobile Phone -Automated Robonoid
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
11
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
An ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic
constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety,
manufacturability, and sustainability
Describe the differences between the general computing system and the embedded
system, also recognize the classification of embedded systems
Design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS.
Foster ability to understand the role of embedded systems in industry
REFERENCES
1. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design’, TMH,2011.
2. Peckol, “Embedded system Design”,JohnWiley&Sons,2010
3. Shibu.K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, TataMcgraw Hill,2009
4. Lyla B Das,” Embedded Systems-An Integrated Approach”,Pearson2013
5. Elicia White,”Making Embedded Systems”,O’Reilly Series,SPD,2011
6. Bruce Powel Douglass,”Real-Time UML Workshop for Embedded Systems,Elsevier,2011
7. Simon Monk, “Make: Action, Movement, Light and Sound with Arduino and Raspberry Pi”,
O’Reilly Series ,SPD,2016.
8. Tammy Noergaard, ”Embedded System Architecture, A comprehensive Guide for
Engineers and Programmers”, Elsevier, 2006
9. Jonathan W.Valvano,”Embedded Microcomputer Systems ,Real Time Interfacing”,Cengage
Learning,3rd edition,2012
10. Michael Margolis,”Arduino Cookbook, O’Reilly Series ,SPD,2013.
ET5191 SOFTWARE FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Programming.
To Introduce the GNU C Programming Tool Chain in Linux.
To study basic concepts of embedded C , Embedded OS&Python Programming
To introduce time driven architecture, Serial Interface with a case study.
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 9
C and Assembly - Programming Style - Declarations and Expressions - Arrays, Qualifiers and
Reading Numbers - Decision and Control Statements - Programming Process - More Control
Statements - Variable Scope and Functions - C Preprocessor - Advanced Types - Simple Pointers -
Debugging and Optimization – In-line Assembly.
UNIT II. C PROGRAMMING TOOL CHAIN IN LINUX 9
C preprocessor - Stages of Compilation - Introduction to GCC - Debugging with GDB - The Make
utility - GNU Configure and Build System - GNU Binary utilities - Profiling - using gprof - Memory Leak
Detection with valgrind - Introduction to GNU C Library
12
UNIT III EMBEDDED C 9
Adding Structure to ‘C’ Code: Object oriented programming with C, Header files for Project and Port,
Examples. Meeting Real-time constraints: Creating hardware delays - Need for timeout mechanism -
Creating loop timeouts - Creating hardware timeouts.
UNIT IV EMBEDDED OS 9
Creating embedded operating system: Basis of a simple embedded OS, Introduction to sEOS, Using
Timer 0 and Timer 1, Portability issue, Alternative system architecture, Important design
considerations when using sEOS- Memory requirements - embedding serial communication &
scheduling data transmission - Case study: Intruder alarm system.
UNIT V PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9
Basics of PYTHON Programming Syntax and Style – Python Objects– Dictionaries – comparison with
C programming on Conditionals and Loops – Files – Input and Output – Errors and Exceptions –
Functions – Modules – Classes and OOP – Execution Environment.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process:
Discussions/Practice on Workbench : Program Development and practice in exercises with C, C++
Linux and Python Programming Environments.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Ability to use GNU C to develop embedded software.
knowledge and understanding of fundamental embedded systems design paradigms,
architectures, possibilities and challenges, both with respect to software and hardware
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES
1. Steve Oualline, ‘Practical C Programming 3rd Edition’, O’Reilly Media, Inc, 2006.
2. Michael J Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Christian Hill, Learning Scientific Programming with Python , CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY
PRESS ,2016.
4. Wesley J.Chun, “Core python application Programming 3rd Edition”, Pearson Educat, 2016.
5. Mark J.Guzdial,” introduction to computing and programming in python – a Multimedia
approach ,4th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
6. Stephen Kochan, “Programming in C”, 3rd Edition, Sams Publishing, 2009.
7. Mark Lutz,”Learning Python,Powerful OOPs,O’reilly,2011.
8. Peter Prinzs, Tony Crawford, “C in a Nutshell”,O’Reilly,2016.
9. Dr.Bandu Meshram, “Object Oriented Paradigm C++ BeginnersGuide C&C++”,SPD, 2016.
10. David Griffiths, Dawn Griffiths, “Head First C”, O’reilly,2015.
13
ET5111 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LAB I LT P C
0042
Experiment Detail Equipment/ Supports Training outcomes Related
Sl.No Required programme
outcomes
1. Programming in C/C++/Java/Embedded The students will learn a,b,c.d
Higher Level C/Embedded Java/ design with simulators/
Languages/ Compilers&Platforms programming
Platforms environments
2. Programming 8051 Microcpontrollers with 2,3,4,a,c,d
. with 8 bit peripherals; ;IDE, Board
Microcontrollers Support Software Tools /C The students will learn
: Compiler/others design with
Assembly simulators/experiments,in
programmi programming
ng processor boards,
processor interfacing/
Study on incircuit designing digital controllers
Emulators,
crosscompilers,
debuggers
3. . I/O Programming 8051 Microcpontrollers with a,f
with 8 bit peripherals;Board Support
Microcontrollers Software Tools, peripherals
I/O Interfacing : with interface
Timers/ Interrupts/
Serial port
programming/PW
M Generation/
Motor
Control/ADC/DAC
/ LCD/ RTC
Interfacing/
Sensor Interfacing
4. . Programming AVR/ PIC Microcpontrollers a,b,c.d
with AVR/ PIC with peripherals; ;IDE,
Microcontrollers : Board Support Software
Assembly Tools /C Compiler/others
C
programmi
ng
programmi
ng
Interfacing
peripherals
Study on incircuit The students will learn
Emulators, design with
crosscompilers, simulators/experiments,in
14
debuggers programming
5. . I/O Programming AVR/ PIC Microcpontrollers processor boards, 2,3,4,a,c,d
with AVR/ PIC with peripherals;Board processor interfacing/
Microcontrollers Support Software Tools, designing digital controllers
I/O Interfacing : peripherals with interface
Timers/ Interrupts/
Serial port
programming/PW
M Generation/
Motor
Control/ADC/DAC
/ LCD/ RTC
Interfacing/
Sensor Interfacing
6. Programming Arduino Boards with a,f
with Arduino peripherals ;IDE, Board
Microcontroller Support Software Tools
Board : /Compiler/others
Study on incircuit
Emulators,
crosscompilers,
debuggers
7. . VHDL Processor Boards with The students will learn a,f
Programming in Board Support Tools & design ,modeling &
FPGA processors Interfaces simulation of
Combinational, Sequential,
Synchronous,
Asynchronous circuits with
simulators/experiments ,in
programming processor
boards, processor
interfacing/designing
reprogrammable system
8. Verilog HDL Processor Boards with The students will learn a,f
Programming in Board Support Tools & design ,modeling &
FPGA processors Interfaces simulation of
Combinational, Sequential,
Synchronous,
Asynchronous circuits with
simulators/experiments ,in
programming processor
boards, processor
interfacing/designing
reprogrammable system
9. .. Programming & Simulation Tools as a,b,c.d
Simulation in Proteus/ ORCAD The students will learn
Simulators design with
/Tools/others experiments,in
programming
10. . Programming & Simulation Tools as Matlab suites/ simulators/Tool 2,3,4,a,c,d
15
Simulation in /others Bench.
Simulators
/Tools/others
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
Note: Note:Laboratory training, discussions can include the given guidelines for improved teaching
/learning process :Hands on experiences can be with Case specific experiments in domains on range
of processors,programmes,simulators,circuits that support theory subjects.
REFERENCE:
1. Mohamammad Ali Mazidi & Mazidi ‘ 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems’, Pearson
Education
2. Mohammad Ali Mazidi, Rolind Mckinley and Danny Causey, ‘PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems’ Pearson Education
3. Simon Monk,” Make Action-with Arduino and Raspberry Pi,SPD ,2016.
4. Wesley J.Chun,”Core Python Applications Programming,3rd ed,Pearson,2016
5. Kraig Mitzner, ‘Complete PCB Design using ORCAD Capture and Layout’, Elsevier
6. Vinay K.Ingle,John G.Proakis,”DSP-A Matlab Based Approach”,Cengage Learning,2010
7. Taan S.Elali,”Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with Matlab”,CRC Press2009.
8. Jovitha Jerome,”Virtual Instrumentation using Labview”PHI,2010.
9. Woon-Seng Gan, Sen M. Kuo, ‘Embedded Signal Processing with the Micro Signal
Architecture’, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey 2007
10. Dogan Ibrahim, ‘Advanced PIC microcontroller projects in C’, Elsevier 2008
ET5251 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of interaction of OS with a computer and User
computation.
To teach the fundamental concepts of how process are created and controlled with OS.
To study on programming logic of modeling Process based on range of OS features
To compare types and Functionalities in commercial OS, application development using
RTOS
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I REVIEW OF OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Basic Principles - Operating System structures – System Calls – Files – Processes – Design and
Implementation of processes – Communication between processes – Introduction to Distributed
operating system – issues in distributed system:states,events,clocks-Distributed scheduling-Fault
&recovery.
16
UNIT II OVERVIEW OF RTOS 9
RTOS Task and Task state –Multithreaded Preemptive scheduler- Process Synchronisation-
Message queues– Mail boxes -pipes – Critical section – Semaphores – Classical synchronisation
problem – Deadlocks
UNIT III REAL TIME MODELS AND LANGUAGES 9
Event Based – Process Based and Graph based Models – Real Time Languages – RTOS Tasks –
RT scheduling - Interrupt processing – Synchronization – Control Blocks – Memory Requirements.
UNIT IV REAL TIME KERNEL 6
Principles – Design issues – RTOS Porting to a Target – Comparison and Basic study of various
RTOS like – VX works – Linux supportive RTOS – C Executive.
UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED OS 12
Discussions on Basics of Linux supportive RTOS – uCOS-C Executive for development of RTOS
Application –introduction to Android Environment -The Stack – Android User Interface – Preferences,
the File System, the Options Menu and Intents, with one Case study
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Discussions/Practice on Workbench :on understanding the scheduling
techniques, timing circuitary, memory allotment scheme , overview of commercial Embedded OS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Real-time scheduling and schedulability analysis, including clock-driven and priority-driven
scheduling
Theoretical background (specification/verification) and practical knowledge of real-time
operating systems.
After completing the course students will appreciate the use of multitasking techniques in real-
time systems, understand the fundamental concepts of real-time operating systems
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Silberschatz,Galvin,Gagne” Operating System Concepts,6th ed,John Wiley,2003
2. Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems-A Design Oriented approach” McGraw Hill,1997
3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems- Architecture, Programming and Design” Tata McGraw
Hill,2006.
4. Karim Yaghmour,Building Embedded Linux System”,O’reilly Pub,2003
5. C.M. Krishna, Kang, G.Shin, “Real Time Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
6. Marko Gargenta,”Learning Android “,O’reilly 2011.
7. Herma K., “Real Time Systems – Design for distributed Embedded Applications”,
Kluwer Academic, 1997.
8. Corbet Rubini, Kroah-Hartman, “Linux Device Drivers”, O’reilly, 2016.
9. Mukesh Sighal and N G Shi “Advanced Concepts in Operating System”, McGraw Hill,2000
10. D.M.Dhamdhere,” Operating Systems,A Concept-Based Approch,TMH,2008
17
ET5201 PERVASIVE DEVICES AND TECHNOLOGY LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the fundamentals of wireless sensor technology, classification
To teach the infrastructure of WSN processor and its functions in networking
To study on challenges in on interconnectivity of networks &Network communication
To discuss on commercial wireless technology
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I WIRELESS SENSOR DEVICES & NETWORKING 12
Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks- Characteristic requirements for WSN ,WSN vs Adhoc
Networks - introduction to Sensor node networking with any Commercially available sensor nodes –
Physical layer and transceiver design considerations in WSNs, -Applications of sensor networks
UNIT II BUILDING PERVASIVE SENSOR NETWORK 12
Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, constraints & challenges in resources- Energy
Consumption of Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems for Wireless Sensor Networks – Introduction -
Operating System Design Issues - Network Architecture -Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization
Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway Concepts. Data Dissemination-Flooding and Gossiping-Data
gathering Sensor Network Scenarios –Optimization, Goals and Figures of Merit – Design Principles
for WSNs- Gateway Concepts – Need for gateway
UNIT III. WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY 6
Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 System Architecture , protocol Architecture – Services , AdHoc
Networks, Hiper LAN , Bluetooth , Wireless PAN, Wireless MAN, Wireless Backbone Networks ,
Wireless Access Technology
UNIT IV OVERVIEW OF SENSOR NETWORK PROTOCOLS 9
Introduction to fundamentals of Wireless sensor network MAC Protocols - Low duty cycle protocols
and wakeup concepts - Contention-based protocols - Schedule-based protocols - IEEE 802.15.4
MAC protocol- Energy usage profile, Choice of modulation scheme-basic principle for data transfer
and energy management for SMAC , Leach & Zigbee communication
UNIT V WIRELESS NETWORKING OF DEVICES 6
Classification of Wireless Networking of Devices, introduction to RF WPAN 802.15.1 &Blutooth -
protocol stack,frame, link manager layer –Bluetooth piconet–application.
Note:Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process : Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench : on the basics of Zigbee
protocols, sensor motes, role of special microcontrollers for Zigbee communication etc
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Relate to current trends in pervasive computing and develop a sense of their practicality
Identify distinguishing features of the different mobile device categories, namely, Pocket PCs,
Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs), and wireless phones.
18
Recognize the difference between writing code for workstations and servers on one hand and
for resource-constrained devices on the other hand.
The learning process delivers insight onto building of sensor networks, communication in zigbee
network and sensor netwoks protocols are studied.
Design and develop a pervasive computing device for a specific need.
Develop a framework for pervasive computing.
REFERENCES
1. Holger Karl,Andreas Willig,”Protocols & Architectures for WSN”,John Wiley,2012
2. Mark Ciampa,Jorge Olenewa,”Wireless Communications,Cengage Learning,2009.
3. Frank Adelstein,SandeepK.S Gupta etal,”Fundamentals of Mobile & Pervasive
Computing,TMcHill,2010.
4. Jaganathan Sarangapani,Wireless AdHoc & Sensor N/Ws-Protocols&Control,CRC2007.
5. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prasanth Krishnamoorthy, “ Principles of Wireless Networks’ PHI/Pearson
Education, 2003
6. Natalia Olifer and Victor Olifer,”Computer Networks principles.technologies and protocols for
network design”, Wiley, 2015
7. Feng Zhao,Leonidas Guibas”Wireless Sensor Networks”,Elsevier,2005.
8. William Stallings, “ Wireless communications and Networks”, PHI/Pearson Education, 2002.
9. Mullet,”Introduction to wireless telecommunications systems and networks", cengage learning,
2010
10. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks- An Information Processing
Approach", Elsevier, 2007.
ET5202 RISC PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING LT P C
3204
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To teach the architecture of general AVR processor
To teach the architecture and programming of 8/16 bit RISC processor
To teach the implementation of DSP in ARM processor
To discuss on memeroy management, application development in RISC processor
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I AVR MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE 12
Architecture – memory organization – addressing modes – I/O Memory – EEPROM – I/O Ports –
SRAM –Timer –UART – Interrupt Structure- Serial Communication with PC – ADC/DAC Interfacing
UNIT II ARM ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING ` 12
Arcon RISC Machine – Architectural Inheritance – Core & Architectures -- The ARM Programmer’s
model -Registers – Pipeline - Interrupts – ARM organization - ARM processor family – Co-processors.
Instruction set – Thumb instruction set – Instruction cycle timings
UNIT III ARM APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 12
Introduction to RT implementation with ARM – –Exception Handling – Interrupts – Interrupt handling
schemes- Firmware and bootloader – Free RTOS Embedded Operating Systems concepts –example
on ARM core like ARM9 processor
19
UNIT IV MEMORY PROTECTION AND MANAGEMENT 12
Protected Regions-Initializing MPU, Cache and Write Buffer-MPU to MMU-Virtual Memory-Page
Tables-TLB-Domain and Memory Access Permission-Fast Context Switch Extension.
UNIT V DESIGN WITH ARM MICROCONTROLLERS 12
Assembler Rules and Directives- Simple ASM/C programs- Hamming Code- Division-Negation-
Simple Loops –Look up table- Block copy- subroutines-application.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench : on Programming practices
on the KEIL Work Bench for Simple ASM/C / Input & output interfacing programs with ARM 7/ARM
9/Nuvoton Processors
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Describe the programmer’s model of ARM processor and create and test assembly level
programming.
Analyze various types of coprocessors and design suitable co-processor interface to ARM
processor.
Identify the architectural support of ARM for operating system and analyze the function of
memory Management unit of ARM.
Students will develop more understanding on the concepts ARM Architecture, programming and
application development.
The learning process delivers insight into various embedded processors of RISC architecture /
computational processors with improved design strategies.
REFERENCES
1. Steve Furber, ‘ARM system on chip architecture’, Addision Wesley
2. Andrew N. Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, John Rayfield ‘ARM System
3. Developer’s Guide Designing and Optimizing System Software’, Elsevier 2007.
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad Naimi ,Sepehr Naimi‘ AVR Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems using Assembly and C”, Pearson Education 2014.
5. ARM Architecture Reference Manual, LPC213x User Manual
6. www.Nuvoton .com/websites on Advanced ARM Cortex Processors
7. Trevor Martin, ‘The Insider's Guide To The Philips ARM7-Based Microcontrollers,
8. An Engineer's Introduction To The LPC2100 Series’ Hitex (UK) Ltd.,
ET5203 INTERNET OF THINGS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To Study about Internet of Things technologies and its role in real time applications
To familiarize the accessories and communication techniques for IOT.
To familiarize the different platforms and Attributes for IOT
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 6
Overview, Technology drivers , Business drivers,Typical IoT applications , Trends and implications
20
UNIT II IOT ARCHITECTURE: 12
Node Structure - Sensing, Processing, Communication, Powering, Networking - Topologies,
Layer/Stack architecture ,IoT standards,Cloud computing for IoT,Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy,
beacons.
UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY FOR IOT 9
Protocols : NFC, RFID, Zigbee MIPI, M-PHY, UniPro, SPMI, SPI, M-PCIe Wired vs. Wireless
communication,GSM, CDMA, LTE, GPRS, small cell.
Wireless technologies for IoT: WiFi (IEEE 802.11), Bluetooth/Bluetooth Smart, ZigBee/ZigBee
Smart, UWB (IEEE 802.15.4), 6LoWPAN, Proprietary systems.
UNIT IV DATA ANALYSTICS FOR IOT 9
Services/Attributes: Big-Data Analytics and Visualization,Dependability,Security,Maintainability.
Data analytics for IoT: A framework for data-driven decision making , Descriptive, Predictive and
Prescriptive Analytics , Business Intelligence and Artificial Intelligence Importance of impact and
open innovation in data-driven decision making.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Home Automation, smart cities, Smart Grid, Electric vehicle charging, Environment, Agriculture,
Productivity Applications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Students will develop more understanding on the concepts of IOT and its present
developments.
Students will study about different IOT technologies.
Students will acquire knowledge about different platforms and Infrastructure for IOT
Students will learn the art of implementing IOT for smart applications and control
Note: Class Room Discussions and Tutorials can include the following Guidelines for improved
Teaching /Learning Process: Practice through any of Case studies through Exercise/Discussions on
Design , Development of embedded solutions using wireless communication by processor support
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga and Vijai Madisetti : A Hands-on Approach “Internet of Things”,Universities
Press 2015.
2. Oliver Hersent , David Boswarthick and Omar Elloumi “ The Internet of Things”, Wiley,2016.
3. Samuel Greengard, “ The Internet of Things”, The MIT press, 2015
4. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally “Designing the Internet of Things “Wiley,2014.
5. Jean- Philippe Vasseur, Adam Dunkels, “Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next
Internet” Morgan Kuffmann Publishers, 2010.
6. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, “Designing the Internet of Things”, John Wiley and
sons, 2014
7. Lingyang Song/Dusit Niyato/ Zhu Han/ Ekram Hossain,” Wireless Device-to-Device
Communications and Networks, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS,2015
8. OvidiuVermesan and Peter Friess (Editors), “Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for
Smart Environments and Integrated Ecosystems”, River Publishers Series in Communication,
2013
9. Vijay Madisetti , ArshdeepBahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands on-Approach)”, 2014
21
10. Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, “6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet”, John Wiley
and sons, 2009
11. Lars T.Berger and Krzysztof Iniewski, “Smart Grid applications, communications and
security”, Wiley, 2015
12. Janaka Ekanayake, Kithsiri Liyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama and Nick Jenkins, “
Smart Grid Technology and Applications”, Wiley, 2015.
13. Upena Dalal,”Wireless Communications & Networks,Oxford,2015
ET5211 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LAB II LT P C
0042
Sl. Experiment Detail Equipment/ Supports Required Training Related
No outcomes programme
outcomes
a,b,c.d
1. Programming ARM processor : Microcpontrollers with
ARM7 / ARM9/ARM Cortex peripherals; ;IDE, Board
Support Software Tools
Study on incircuit Emulators, /Keil/uCOS Compiler/others
crosscompilers, debuggers
I/O Programming with ARM ARM processor : ARM7 / 2,3,4,a,c,d
processor : ARM7 / ARM9/ARM Cortex
ARM9/ARM Microcpontrollers with
CortexMicrocontrollers peripherals;Board Support
I/O Interfacing : Timers/ Software Tools, peripherals
Interrupts/ Serial port with interface
programming/PWM Generation/
Motor Control/ADC/DAC/ LCD/
RTC Interfacing/ Sensor The students
Interfacing will learn
design with
2. Programming with Rasberry Pi Rasberry Pi Boards with simulators/ex a,f
Microcontroller Board : peripherals ;IDE, Board periments,in
Support Software Tools programming
Study on incircuit Emulators, /Compiler/others processor
crosscompilers, debuggers boards,
processor
3. I/O Programming with Arduino Arduino,Rasberry Pi interfacing/ a,f
,Rasberry Pi Microcontroller Microcontroller Boards with designing
Boards I/O Interfacing : Timers/ peripherals;Board Support digital
Interrupts/ Serial port Software Tools, peripherals controllers
programming/PWM Generation/ with interface
Motor Control/ADC/DAC/ LCD/
RTC Interfacing/ Sensor
Interfacing
4. Programming with DSP Processor Boards with Board The students a,b,c.d
22
processors Support Tools & Interfaces will learn
design &
simulation of
Arithmetic
,Logic
programs,
Filters,
Signal
anaysis with
simulators/ex
periments ,in
programming
processor
boards,
processorint
erfacing/
Tools
5. Programming in Freeware Programming 2,3,4,a,c,d
softwares/ Platforms Compilers&Platforms on The students
freeware will learn
6. Software & Modelling tools Personal Computers, programming a,f
Study on MEMS Tools Licenced software & , compiling
Study on process programming/modelling tools in various
Controller modeling tools &
PLC/SCADA/PCB software
one type CAD Tool domains
7. Programming & Simulation in Simulation Tools as Labview a,f
GUI Simulators /Tools/others /others
Graphical User interface
simulations & modeling
of instrumentation & The students
controllers will learn
8. Study of one type of Real Time Compilers & Platforms programming a,b,c.d
Operating Systems (RTOS) with VXWorks/ Keil/ Android/ , compiling
Tiny OS/ Linux Support/any in various
RTOS tools &
9. Programming & Simulation in Programming in Python software 2,3,4,a,c,d
Python Simulators/Tools/others Platform domains
10 Programming with Learning Communication Learning a,f
wired/wireless communication Protocols & Support Software Communicati
protocol/Network Simulators Tools for BUS & network on Protocols
communication &
Experimentin
g with
Support
Software
Tools for
communicati
on interfaces
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
23
Note: Laboratory training, discussions can include the given guidelines for improved teaching
/learning process :Hands on experiences with Case specific experiments in domains on range of work
Benches,programmable Test suites,simulators,circuit boards that support the practical skill training
supportive to theory subjects .
REFERENCES:
1. Mohamammad Ali Mazidi & Mazidi ‘ 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems’, Pearson
Education
2. Mohammad Ali Mazidi, Rolind Mckinley and Danny Causey, ‘PIC Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems’ Pearson Education
3. Simon Monk,” Make Action-with Arduino and Raspberry Pi,SPD ,2016.
4. Wesley J.Chun,”Core Python Applications Programming,3rd ed,Pearson,2016
5. Kraig Mitzner, ‘Complete PCB Design using ORCAD Capture and Layout’, Elsevier
6. Vinay K.Ingle,John G.Proakis,”DSP-A Matlab Based Approach”,Cengage Learning,2010
7. Taan S.Elali,”Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with Matlab”,CRC Press2009.
8. Jovitha Jerome,”Virtual Instrumentation using Labview”PHI,2010.
9. Woon-Seng Gan, Sen M. Kuo, ‘Embedded Signal Processing with the Micro Signal
Architecture’, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey 2007
10. Dogan Ibrahim, ‘Advanced PIC microcontroller projects in C’, Elsevier 2008
ET5311 PROJECT WORK PHASE I LT P C
0 0 12 6
Pre-requisites: choice of project title for project can also be done as per broad domain of research
topic listed.
domains Course objectives : to expose to many of Training outcomes Related
the following by choice for learning programme
outcomes
1.0 Programming in C/ Embedded C / a,b,c.d
C++ / JAVA Skill development in software
Network Simulators programming/working in
Network programming simulators, emulators, learn
Python programming using the commercial
Programming on Pervasive packages for wired, wireless
Computing communications
Java for Wireless Devices
2.0 Embedded Processors The students will learn design 2,3,4,a,c,d
uC, ARM processors with
DSP / Image / Video Processorssimulators/experiments,in
VHDL Programming in processorsprogramming
processor boards, processor
interfacing/designing
reprogrammable system
3.0 Android / LINUX OS The students will skill through a,f
Internals/VxWorks/Keil OS programming through
MPLAB/Os/any RTOS tool suite API, libraries
24
4.0 Virtual Instrumentation The students will apply a,f
programming programming logic for
Simulink/Matlab Tools modeling/simulating for
Study on MEMS Tools embedded application
Study on process Controller /products & service
modeling development
PLC/SCADA/PCB/ORCAD
one CAD Tool
5.0 Entrepreneurship Skill The students will know to d,e,f,g,h,
development pickup skills for product
development/establish
consultancy services with an
outlook into
selecting commercially viable
market for technical demands
Guidelines onto Topics:
1. Network Simulators-Design and Implement many processor based network deployment
/involve IOT or sensor network with use of monitoring tool to record sensor values, establish
communication,get network statistics like packets sent and received, percentage errors,
desktop grabbing, remote monitoring etc.
2. Embedded Processors- Implement an IO peripheral interface ARM/ PIC / MSP 430
/Arduino/RPi/ other advanced embedded Processor through Study of CAN / I2C / Ethernet/any
serial bus communication /any other communication protocol for IO interface
3. Virtual Instrumentation programming to design smart metering Design and Implement though
GUI suite /tool to record Sensor data recording with signal analysis to discuss on system
performance and implement controller scheme.
4. Study on process Controller modelling -with math lab suite with modeling, analysis for
Embedded control of systems/vehicle modeling/communication of systems
5. VHDL Programming on Programmable Logic Devices -Design and Implementation with using
Xilinx/Altera FPGA / CPLD on Design ,verification of simple Combinational/Sequential Circuits
6. Study on CAD Tool- device modeling,codesign ,verification,analysis on Tools.
7. DSP / Image / Video Processing - Simulation / Implementation of any fewof its algorithms
8. Network simulation- using NS2/ Programming of TCP/IP protocol stack /any network simulator
tools -Network Deployment /Design and Implement a GUI or text based network monitoring
tool to record network statistics like packets sent and received, percentage errors,, security
concepts,.
9. Programming in C/ Embedded C / Python/C++ / JAVA/others- Embedded Application
development
10. Android / LINUX OS Internals/VxWorks/Keil -Study on programming of the OS through one
API for Driver interfaces, Disk driver and Terminal drivers
25
11. Programming on Pervasive Computing on mobile device application Platform through any one
Operating System /Palm OS / Windows CE/ Embedded Linux -J2ME / Symbian
/Android/others
12. Java for Wireless Devices to Set up the development environment with Basic Data types,
Libraries ,Wireless Messaging,Architecture for messaging application,Messaging API, Making
a device connection using HTTP
13. Study on MEMS –device,structural modeling & analysis using CAD lab SUITE
14. PLC/SCADA/PCB study-develop one Case Study as Application with suitable platform.
15. Entrepreneurship Skill development through Product Design with Cost Estimation – Learn
through survey on : project/product identification, development plan and execution, the
Activity planning, schedule development ,Integration Management configuration management,
Time management-,Cost estimation, Service&Quality Management planning , Human
Resource Management- Organizational planning , staff acquisition, Communication -
Information distribution , reporting, Risk Management,Environment Safety Management
Procurement Management- contract, Ethics,Legal & Government rules on administration.
ET5091 MEMS TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To teach the students properties of materials ,microstructure and fabrication methods.
To teach the design and modeling of Electrostatic sensors and actuators.
To teach the characterizing thermal sensors and actuators through design and modeling
To teach the fundamentals of piezoelectric sensors and actuators through exposure to
different MEMS and NEMS devices
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I MICRO-FABRICATION, MATERIALS AND ELECTRO-MECHANICAL CONCEPTS 9
Overview of micro fabrication – Silicon and other material based fabrication processes – Concepts:
Conductivity of semiconductors-Crystal planes and orientation-stress and strain-flexural beam
bending analysis-torsional deflections-Intrinsic stress- resonant frequency and quality factor.
UNIT II ELECTROSTATIC SENSORS AND ACTUATION 9
Principle, material, design and fabrication of parallel plate capacitors as electrostatic sensors and
actuators-Applications
UNIT III THERMAL SENSING AND ACTUATION 9
Principle, material, design and fabrication of thermal couples, thermal bimorph sensors, thermal
resistor sensors-Applications.
UNIT IV PIEZOELECTRIC SENSING AND ACTUATION 9
26
Piezoelectric effect-cantilever piezoelectric actuator model-properties of piezoelectric materials-
Applications.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Piezoresistive sensors, Magnetic actuation, Micro fluidics applications, Medical applications, Optical
MEMS.-NEMS Devices
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench: on the basics /device
model design aspects of thermal/peizo/resistive sensors etc.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Understand basics of microfabrication, develop models and simulate electrostatic and
electromagnetic sensors and actuators
Understand material properties important for MEMS system performance, analyze dynamics of
resonant micromechanical structures
The learning process delivers insight onto design of micro sensors, embedded sensors &
actuators in power aware systems like grid.
Understand the design process and validation for MEMS devices and systems, and learn the
state of the art in optical microsytems
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES
1. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson International Edition, 2006.
2. Marc Madou , “Fundamentals of microfabrication”,CRC Press, 1997.
3. Boston , “Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook”,WCB McGraw Hill, 1998.
4.M.H.Bao “Micromechanical transducers :Pressure sensors, accelerometers and gyroscopes”,
Elsevier, Newyork, 2000.
ET5001 ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND LT P C
PARALLEL PROCESSING 3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To educate the students to the fundamentals of parallel processing
To teach the fundamentals of network topologies for multiprocessors
To introduce different pipeline designs
To introduce features of parallel processors , memory technologies, OS for multiprogrammed
computer
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I THEORY OF PARALLELISM 9
Parallel Computer models – the state of computing-introduction to parallel processing- parallelism in
uniprocessors& Multiprocessors,-parallel architectural classification schemes-speedup performance
laws- -Program and Network Properties-H/W-S/W Parallelism
27
UNIT II SYSTEM INTERCONNECT ARCHITECTURES 9
System interconnect Architectures-Network Properties and routing-Static Interconnection Networks-
Dynamic Interconnection Networks-Multiprocessor System Interconnects-interprocessor
communication network-Structure of Parallel Computers; Hierarchical bus systems-Crossbar switch
and multiport memory-multistage and combining network
UNIT III PIPELINING AND SUPERSCALAR TECHNOLOGIES 6
Pipeline principle and implementation-classification of pipeline processor-introduction of
arithmetic,instruction,processor pipelining-pipeline mechanisms-hazards
UNIT IV HARDWARE TECHNOLOGIES 15
Introduction to features of advanced embedded processors through Basic Comparative study : of
Architectures -addressing modes -instruction types-performance of- Parallel and scalable
architectures, Multiprocessor and SIMD ,MIMD computers, RISC,CISC,Superscalar,VLIW , Vector,
Systolic processors of their unique features -Scalable, Multithreaded and data flow Architectures-inter
PE communication-interconnection networks- Array & vector processors, vector instruction types-
performance modeling-design of vectorising compiler- case Architecture of Itanium processor,
Pentium Processor, SPARC Processor.
UNIT V OS ISSUES FOR MULTI PROCESSOR 6
Introduction-Need for Pre emptive OS – Synchronising and Scheduling in Multiprocessor OS-, Usual
Os scheduling Techniques, threads – Classification of multi processor OS – Software requirements of
multiprocessor OS, Distributed scheduler – PVM – PT Threads in shared memory systems
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: :Discussions/Practice on Workbench : modelling of Computing
Algorithms /ALU Functional Blocks
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
An ability to understand the operations of multiprocessor and multicomputer systems.
To understand the various advanced processor technology, pipelining and scalable
architectures.
To know the working of superscalar pipeline, cache memory organization.
To understand the principles of multithreading, multithread architecture, static and dynamic data
flow.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on recent
trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Kai Hwang “Advanced Computer Architecture”.Tata McGraw Hill 2000
2. Advanced Computer architecture , By Rajiv Chopra, S Chand , 2010
3. John L. Hennessy, David A. Petterson, “Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach”, 4th
Edition, Elsevier, 2007
4. Dezso Sima, Terence Fountain, Peter Kacsuk, “Advanced computer Architecture – A design
Space Approach”. Pearson Education,2003.
5. Sajjan G. Shiva “Advanced Computer Architecture”, Taylor & Francis, 2008
6. Rajaraman, C.Siva Ram Murthy, “Parallel Computers- Architecture and Programming”, Prentice
Hall India, 2008
7. Carl Homacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Sefwat Zaky, “Computer Organisation”, 5th Edition, TMH, 2002.
28
8. David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh with Anoop Gupta “Parallel Computer Architecture” ,Elsevier,
2004.
9. John P. Shen. “Modern processor design Fundamentals of super scalar processors”, Tata
McGraw Hill 2003.
10. Harry F. Jordan Gita Alaghaband, “Fundamentals of Parallel Processing”. Pearson Education,
2003.
11. Richard Y. Kain, “Advanced computer architecture – A system Design Approach”, PHI, 2003.
IN5092 DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To discuss to the students on the fundamentals building blocks of a digital instrument
To teach the digital data communication techniques
To study on bus communication standards and working principles
To teach Graphical programming using GUI for instrument building
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS 10
Overview of A/D converter, types and characteristics – Sampling, Errors. Objective – Building blocks
of Automation systems -Calibration, Resolution, Data acquisition interface requirements.–Counters –
Modes of operation- Frequency, Period, Time interval measurements, Prescaler, Heterodyne
converter for frequency measurement, Single and Multi channel Data Acquisition systems-Digital
storage Oscilloscope-digital display interface.
UNIT II INSTRUMENT COMMUNICATION 10
Introduction, Modem standards, Data transmission systems- Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) –
Digital Modulation Basic requirements of Instrument Bus Communications standards, interrupt and
data handshaking , serial bus- basics, Message transfer, - RS-232, USB, RS-422, Ethernet Bus- CAN
standards interfaces .General considerations -advantages and disadvantages-Instrumentation
network design ,advantages and limitations ,general considerations, architecture, model, and system
configuration of : HART network, Mod Bus, Fieldbus
UNIT III VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION BASICS 12
Block diagram ,role,and Architecture for VI–– tool bar,Graphical system design &programming
usingGUI – Virtual Instrumentation for test, control design-modular programming-conceptual and prog
approaches for creation of panels,icons-Loops-Arrays-clusters-plotting data-structures-strings and File
I/O- Instrument Drivers
UNIT IV CONFIGURING PROGRAMMABLE INSTRUMENTATION 7
Microprocessor based system design –Peripheral Interfaces systems and instrument communication
standards –Data acquisition with processor and with VI – Virtual Instrumentation Software and
hardware simulation of I/O communication blocks-peripheral interface – ADC/DAC – Digital I/O –
Counter , Timer-servo motor control-PID control.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 6
Processor based DAS, Data loggers, VI based process measurements like temperature, pressure and
level development system- DSO interface -digital controller for colour video display.
29
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench for Digital Control of
Relays/Solenoids, Digital I/O – Counter , Timer-servo motor control-PID control.
/ LCD graphics Interface/storage interface,
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Use digital integrated circuit logic family chips.
Perform computational and measurement activities using digital techniques, build sequential
and combinational logic circuits.
Analyse working of A/D and D/A converters, use display devices for digital circuits, use digital
meters for measurements.
Graduates will understand the fundamental principles of electrical and electronics circuits and
instrumentation, enabling them to understand current technology and to adapt to new devices
and technologies.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Mathivanan, “PC based Instrumentation Concepts and practice”, Prentice-Hall India, 2009
2. Jovitha Jerome,”Virtual Instrumentation using Labview”PHI,2010.
3. Gregory J. Pottie / William J. Kaiser, Principles Of Embedded Networked Systems Design,
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS (CUP),2016
4. Jonathan W Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer systems”, Brooks/Cole, Thomson, 2010.
5. Cory L.Clark,”Labview Digital Signal Processing & Digital Communication,TMcH,2005
6. Lisa K. wells & Jeffrey Travis, Lab VIEW for everyone, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,1997.
7. H S Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation” Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,2006.
8. K.Padmanabhan, S.Ananthi A Treatise on Instrumentation Engineering ,I K Publish,2011
9. Gary Johnson, LabVIEW Graphical Programming, Second edition, McG Hill,Newyork, 1997.
ET5002 EMBEDDED LINUX LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of Linux Operating system, its basic commands
and shell programming
To teach the history of embedded Linux, various distributions and basics of GNU Cross
Platform Tool Chain.
To study on different Host-Target setup, debug and various memory device, file systems and
performance tuning .
To introduce the concept of configuring kernel using the cross-platform tool chain.
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF LINUX 9
Basic Linux System Concepts: Working with Files and Directories - Introduction to Linux File system -
Working with Partitions and File systems - Understanding Linux Permissions; Using Command Line
Tools: Executing Commands from the Command Line - Getting to a Shell - Popular Command-Line
Commands - Working with the Bash Shell
30
UNIT II VARIOUS DISTRIBUTIONS AND CROSS PLATFORM TOOL CHAIN 9
Introduction - History of Embedded Linux - Embedded Linux versus Desktop Linux - Commercial
Embedded Linux Distribution - Choosing a distribution - Embedded Linux Distributions - Architecture
of Embedded Linux - Linux Kernel Architecture - Porting Roadmap - GNU Cross Platform Toolchain
UNIT III HOST-TARGET SETUP AND OVERALL ARCHITECTURE 9
Real Life Embedded Linux Systems - Design and Implementation Methodology - Types of Host/Target
Development Setups - Types of Host/Target Debug Setups - Generic Architecture of an Embedded
Linux System - System Startup - Types of Boot Configurations - System Memory Layout - Processor
Architectures - Buses and Interfaces - I/O – Storage
UNIT IV KERNEL CONFIGURATION 9
A Practical Project Workspace - GNU Cross-Platform Development Toolchain - C Library Alternatives
- Other Programming Languages - Eclipse: An Integrated Development Environment - Terminal
Emulators - Selecting a Kernel - Configuring the Kernel - Compiling the Kernel - Installing the Kernel -
Basic Root Filesystem Structure - Libraries - Kernel Modules and Kernel Images - Device Files - Main
System Applications - System Initialization
UNIT V LINUX DRIVERS 9
Introduction in to basics on Linux drivers, introduction to GNU cross platform Toolchain- Case study
on programming one serial driver for developing application using Linux Driver
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Discussions/Practice on Workbench : on design of Algorithms for
Practicing Shell Programming in Linux / Developing programs in GCC and Eclipse / Learning
Debugging and Profiling/Linux Driver interface
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
To use Linux desktop and GNU tool chain with Eclipse IDE
Cross compile Linux kernel and port it to target board.
Add applications and write customized application for the Linux kernel in the target board.
Students will study about distributions and cross platform tool chain.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Karim Yaghmour, Jon Masters, Gilad Ben-Yossef, and Philippe Gerum, ‘Building Embedded Linux
Systems 2nd Edition’, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2008
2. P.Raghavan,Amol Lad,Sriram Neelakandan,”EmbeddedLinux System Design &
Development,Auerbach Publications, 2012
3. William von Hagen, ‘Ubuntu Linux Bible 3rd Edition’, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010
4. Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini & Greg Kroah-Hartman, ‘Linux Device Drivers 3rd Edition’,
SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2011
5. Robert Love,”Linux System Programming, SPD -O’Reilly Publications, 2010
31
ET5071 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of digital signal processing in frequency domain&
its application
To teach the fundamentals of digital signal processing in time-frequency domain& its
application
To compare Architectures & features of Programmable DSprocessors & develop logical
functions of DSProcessors
To discuss on Application development with commercial family of DS Processors
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF DSP 12
Frequency interpretation, sampling theorem, aliasing, discrete-time systems, constant-coefficient
difference equation. Digital filters: FIR filter design – rectangular,Hamming,Hanning windowing
technique. IIR filter design – Butterworth filter, bilinear transformation method, frequency
transformation. Fundamentals of multirate processing – decimation and interpolation.
UNIT II TRANSFORMS AND PROPERTIES 9
Discrete Fourier transform (DFT): - properties, Fast Fourier transform (FFT), DIT-FFT, and DIF-FFT.
Wavelet transforms:Introduction, wavelet coefficients – orthonormal wavelets and their relationship to
filter banks, multi-resolution analysis, and Haar and Daubechies wavelet.
UNIT III ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9
Wiener filters – an introduction. Adaptive filters: Fundamentals of adaptive filters, FIR adaptive filter –
steepest descent algorithm, LMS algorithm, NLMS, applications – channel equalization. Adaptive
recursive filters – exponentially weighted RLS algorithm.
UNIT IV ARCHITECTURE OF COMMERCIAL DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9
Introduction to commercial digital signal processors, Categorization of DSP processor – Fixed point
and floating point, Architecture and instruction set of the TI TMS 320 C54xx and TMS 320 C6xxx DSP
processors, On-chip and On-board peripherals – memory (Cache, Flash, SDRAM), codec,
multichannel buffered I/O serial ports (McBSPs), interrupts, direct memory access (DMA), timers and
general purpose I/Os.
UNIT V INTERFACING I/O PERIPHERALS FOR DSP BASED APPLICATIONS 6
Introduction, External Bus Interfacing Signals, Memory Interface, I/O Interface, Programmed I/O,
Interrupts, Design of Filter, FFT Algorithm, ,Application for Serial Interfacing, DSP based Power
Meter, Position control , CODEC Interface .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Note: Discussions / Exercise / practice on signal analysis, transforms, filter design concepts with
simulation tools such as Matlab / Labview / CC studio will help the student understand signal
processing concepts and DSP processors.
Overview of TMS320C54xx and TMS320C67xx /other DSP Starter Kits, Introduction to code
composer studio (CCS), Board support library, Chip support library and Runtime support library,
Generating basic signals, Digital filter design, Spectrum analysis, Adaptive filters, Speech and Audio
processing applications.
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
32
Students will learn the essential advanced topics in DSP that are necessary for successful
Postgraduate level research.
Students will have the ability to solve various types of practical problems in DSP
Comprehend the DFTs and FFTs, design and Analyze the digital filters, comprehend the Finite
word length effects in Fixed point DSP Systems.
The conceptual aspects of Signal processing Transforms are introduced.
The comparison on commercial available DSProcessors helps to understand system design
through processor interface.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. John. G. Proakis, Dimitris G. Manolakis, “Digital signal processing”, Pearson Edu, 2002
2. Sen M.Kuo,Woon-Seng S.Gan, “Digital Signal Processors- Pearson Edu, 2012
3. Ifeachor E. C., Jervis B. W ,”Digital Signal Processing: A practical approach, Pearson-
Education, PHI/ 2002
4. Shaila D. Apte, “ Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition, Wiley, 2016.
5. Robert J.Schilling,Sandra L.Harris,”Introd. To Digital Signal Processing with
Matlab”,Cengage,2014.
6. Steven A. Tretter, “Communication System Design Using DSP Algorithms with Laboratory
Experiments for the TMS320C6713™ DSK”, Springer, 2008.
7. RulphChassaing and Donald Reay, “Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the
TMS320C6713 and TMS320C6416 DSK”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey,
2008.
8. K.P. Soman and K.L. Ramchandran,Insight into WAVELETS from theory to practice, Eastern
Economy Edition, 2008
9. B Venkataramani and M Bhaskar “Digital Signal Processors”, TMH, 2nd, 2010
10. Vinay K.Ingle,John G.Proakis,”DSP-A Matlab Based Approach”,Cengage Learning,2010
11. Taan S.Elali,”Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with Matlab”,CRC Press2009.
12. Monson H. Hayes, “Statistical Digital signal processing and modelling”, John Wiley & Sons,
2008.
13. Avatar Sing, S. Srinivasan, “Digital Signal Processing- Implementation using DSP
Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx”, Thomson India,2004.
ET5003 PYTHON PROGRAMMING LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Students will learn the grammar of Python programming language.
Students will understand and be able to use the basic programming principles such as data
types, variable, conditionals, loops, recursion and function calls.
Students will learn how to use basic data structures such as List, Dictionary and be able to
manipulate text files and images.
Students will understand the process and will acquire skills necessary to effectively attempt a
programming problem and implement it with a specific programming language - Python.
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
33
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON 9
Introduction to Python language – Using the interpreter – Python data types and functions – Working
with Data – List, Dictionary and Set – Processing Primitives – List comprehensions – File Handling –
Object model including Variables, Reference counting, Copying, and Type checking – Error handling.
UNIT II PROGRAM ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS 9
Organize Large programs into functions – Python functions including scoping rules and
documentation strings – Modules and Libraries – Organize programs into modules – System
administration, Text processing, Subprocesses, Binary data handling, XML parsing and Database
Access – Installing third-party libraries.
UNIT III CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9
Introduction to Object-oriented programming – Basic principles of Object-oriented programming in
Python – Class definition, Inheritance, Composition, Operator overloading and Object creation –
Python special modules – Python Object System – Object representation, Attribute binding, Memory
management, and Special properties of classes including properties, slots and private attributes.
UNIT IV TESTING, DEBUGGING, AND SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PRACTICE 9
Python Software development – Use of documentation string – Program testing using doctest and
unittest modules – Effective use of assertions – Python debugger and profiler – Iterators and
Generators to set up data processing pipelines – An effective technique for addressing common
system programming problems (e.g. processing large datafiles, handling infinite data streams, etc.)
UNIT V TEXT I/O HANDLING 9
Text generation, Template strings and Unicode-packages – Python Integration Primer – Network
programming – Accessing C code – Survey on how Python interacts with other language programs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Class Room Discussions and Tutorials can include the following Guidelines for improved
Teaching /Learning Process: Practice through any of Case studies through Exercise/Discussions on
Design , Development of embedded solutions with improved programming skill learnt through python
that can be adopted while programming on other domains.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to develop skill in system administration and network programming by
learning Python.
Students will also learn how to effectively use Python’s very powerful processing primitives,
modeling etc.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on recent
trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Mark Lutz,”Learning Python,Powerful OOPs,O’reilly,2011
2. Robert Sedgewick,Kevin Wayne ,Robert Dondero,Intr Programming in Python, Pearson,2016.
3. Mark J.Guzdial,Barbara Ericson,”Introduction to Computing & Programming in Python,4th Edition
Pearson,2015.
4. Budd, Timothy. Exploring Python. McGraw-Hill science,2009.
5. Guttag, John. Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python. MIT Press, 2013.
6. Zelle, John M. Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science. 1st ed. Franklin
Beedle& Associates, 2003
34
ET5004 EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVE
The course aims at providing the basic concepts of product design, product features and its
architecture so that student can have a basic knowledge in the common features a product
has and how to incorporate them suitably in product.
UNIT I CONCEPTS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 12
Need for PD- Generic product Development Process Phases- Product Development Process Flows-
Product Development organization structures-Strategic importance of Product Planning process –
Product Specifications-Target Specifications-Plan and establish product specifications - integration of
customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer - Understanding
customer and behavior analysis. Concept Generation,Five Step Method-Basics of Concept selection-
Creative thinking –creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods- generating design
concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition – physical decomposition
UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO APPROACHES IN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 12
Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - Product Architecture
changes - variety – component standardization , clustering -geometric layout development -
Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level design issues - secondary systems -
architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio Architecture-
competitive benchmarking- Approach for the benchmarking process-Design for manufacturing -
Industrial Design-Robust Design – Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for
prototypes- Economic & Cost Analysis -Testing Methodologies- Product Branding
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN STRATEGIES 6
Role of Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools for Simulating product performance and manufacturing
processes electronically- Basics on reverse engineering – Reverse engineering strategies – Finding
reusable software components – Recycling real-time embedded software based approach and its
logical basics- Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product development –case study on
DeskJet Printer
UNIT IV ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STAGES 6
Product Development Stages-Embedded product modeling- Linear, Iterative, Prototyping, Spiral -
Selection of Sensor, Voltage Supply, Power supply protection, Grounding and noise elimination
methods, Thermal protection with heat management – PCB design steps – Software design and
testing method – documentation.
UNIT V EMBEDDED PRODUCTS DESIGN 9
Creating general Embedded System Architecture(with Case study example: Mobile Phone / DeskJet
Printer./ Robonoid as a product) -Architectural Structures- Criteria in selection of Hardware &
Software Components, processors, input/output interfaces & connectors, ADC System ,Memory
,choosing Bus Communication Standards, Criteria in selection of Embedded OS/Device Drivers, Need
for Developing with IDE, Translation & Debugging Tools & Application Software, Performance
Testing, Costing, Benchmarking ,Documentation
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Term Project/Presentation on specific product design can be given for
Assessment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
35
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the student will be able to
understand the integration of customer requirements in product design
Apply structural approach to concept generation, creativity,selection and testing
Understand various aspects of design such as industrial design, design of Consumer specific
product , its Reverse Engineering manufacture ,economic analysis and product architecture
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
REFERENCES
1. "Product Design and Development", Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, McGraw –Hill
International Edns.1999/ Tata McGrawEducation, ISBN-10-007-14679-9
2. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B. Baru, “ Electronic Product Design”, Wiley, 2014
3. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International Edition,4th
Edition, 2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9
4. Stephen Armstrong, Engineering and Product Development Management ; The Holistic
Approach, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS (CUP),2014
5. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design’, TMH,2011.
6. KEVIN OTTO & KRISTIN WOOD, “Product Design and Development“, 4th Edition,2009, Product
Design Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New Product Development, , Pearson Education
(LPE),2001./ISBN 9788177588217
7. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd Edition Reprint, Cengage
Learning, 2010, ISBN 0495668141
8. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based Introduction”, 3rd Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 2009, ISBN 978-0-470-22596-7
ET5005 AUTOMOTIVE EMBEDDED SYSTEM LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals and building of Electronic Engine Control systems .
To teach on functional components and circuits for vehicles
To discuss on programmable controllers for vehicles
To teach logics of automation & commercial techniques for vehicle communication
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I BASICS OF ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMS 9
Motivation ,concept for electronic engine controls and management-Standards; introduction to fuel
economy- automobile sensors-volumetric, thermal, air-fuel ratio, solenoid ,hall effect- exhaust gas
oxygen sensors, Oxidizing catalytic efficiency, emission limits and vehicle performance; advantages of
using Electronic engine controls – open and closed loop fuel control; Block diagram of Electronic
ignition system and Architecture of a EMS with multi point fuel injection system, Direct injection;
programmed ignition- actuators interface to the ECU; starter motors and circuits - sensors interface to
the ECU; Actuators and their characteristics – exhaust gas recirculation.
UNIT II FUEL CELL FOR AUTOMOTIVE POWER 9
Fuel cell-Introduction-Proton exchange membrane FC (PEM), Solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC)-properties
of fuel cells for vehicles-power system of an automobile with fuel cell based drive, and their
characteristics
36
UNIT III VEHICLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9
Electronic Engine Control-engine mapping,air/fuel ratio spark timing control strategy, fuel control,
electronic ignition-Vehicle cruise control- speed control-anti-locking braking system-electronic
suspension - electronic steering , wiper control ; Vehicle system schematic for interfacing with EMS,
ECU. Energy Management system for electric vehicles- for sensors, accelerators, brake-Battery
management, Electric Vehicles-Electrical loads, power management system-electrically assisted
power steering system.
UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE TELEMATICS 9
Role of Bluetooth, CAN, LIN and flex ray communication protocols in automotive applications;
Multiplexed vehicle system architecture for signal and data / parameter exchange between EMS,
ECUs with other vehicle system components and other control systems; Realizing bus interfaces for
diagnostics, dashboard display ,multimedia electronics- Introduction to Society of Automotive
Engineers(SAE). J1850 message with(IFR) in frame response in protocol-Local Interconnect n/w [LI
N], Bluetooth.
UNIT V ELECTRONIC DIAGNOSTICS FOR VEHICLES 9
System diagnostic standards and regulation requirements –On board diagnosis of vehicles electronic
units &electric units-Speedometer, oil and temperature gauges, and audio system .
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process : Discussions//Practice on Workbench/Exercise/ AUTOSAR/ Vehicle
simulators :on the basics of interfacing sensors, actuators to special automobile-microcontrollers, role
of Instrumentation software packages / special automobile-microcontrollers for i/o port communication
applicable to vehicles
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Design and develop automotive embedded systems.
Analyze various embedded products used in automotive industry.
Evaluate the opportunities involving technology, a product or a service required for developing
a startup idea used for automotive applications
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES
1. William B. Ribbens ,”Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Elseiver,2012
2. Ali Emedi, Mehrded ehsani, John M Miller , “Vehicular Electric power system- land, Sea, Air
and Space Vehicles” Marcel Decker, 2004.
3. L.Vlacic,M.Parent,F.Harahima,”Intelligent Vehicl Technologies”,SAE International,2001.
4. Jack Erjavec,Jeff Arias,”Alternate Fuel Technology-Electric ,Hybrid& Fuel Cell
Vehicles”,Cengage ,2012
5. Electronic Engine Control technology – Ronald K Jurgen Chilton’s guide to Fuel Injection –
Ford
rd
6. Automotive Electricals / Electronics System and Components, Tom Denton, 3 Edition, 2004.
7. Uwe Kiencke, Lars Nielsen, “Automotive Control Systems: For Engine, Driveline, and Vehicle”,
Springer; 1 edition, March 30, 2000 .
th
8. Automotive Electricals Electronics System and Components, Robert Bosch Gmbh, 4 Edition,
2004.
9. Automotive Hand Book, Robert Bosch, Bently Publishers, 1997.
10. Jurgen, R., Automotive Electronics Hand Book.
37
ET5006 RECONFIGURABLE PROCESSOR AND SOC DESIGN LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the Reconfigurable Processor technologies
To familiarize the need and role of Reconfigurable Processor for embedded system applications.
To impart the knowledge of Reconfigurable embedded Processor for real time applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to reconfigurable processor- Reconfigurable Computing-Programming elements and
Programming Tools for Reconfigurable Processors, ASIC design flow- Hardware/Software Codesign-
FPAA Architecture overview- recent trends in Reconfigurable Processor & SoC.
UNIT II PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES CPLD 9
Introduction to Programmable logic devices, SPLDs, CPLD building blocks- Architectures and
features of Altera:MAX 7000, MAX V- Xilinx XC 9500, CoolRunner-II.
UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES FPGA 9
FPGA architecture overview- Challenges of FPGA processor design-Opportunities of FPGA processor
design- Designing SoftCore Processors – Designing Hardcore Processors –hardware/software co
simulation- FPGA to multi core embedded computing- FPGA based on-board computer system.
UNIT IV RECONFIGURABLE SOC PROCESSORS 9
SoC Overview –Architecture and applications of Xilinx Virtex II pro ,Zynq-7000, Altera Excalibur,
Cyclone V -Triscend A7, E5- Atmel FPSLIC- Multicore SoCs.
UNIT V RECONFIGURABLE PROCESSOR AND SOC APPLICATIONS 9
Reconfigurable processor based DC motor control- digital filter design- mobile phone development-
High Speed Data Acquisition -Image Processing application-controller implementation for mobile
robot.
Note: Class Room Discussions and Tutorials can include the following Guidelines for improved
Teaching /Learning Process: Practice through any of Case studies through Exercise/Discussions on
Design , Development of embedded solutions using reconfigurable processor support
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Adaptability, in its complete strength, is present in reconfigurable processors, which makes it
an important IP in modern System-on-Chips (SoCs).
Reconfigurable processors have risen to prominence as a dominant computing platform
across embedded, general-purpose, and high-performance application domains during the last
decade
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES
1. Nurmi, Jari (Ed.) "Processor Design System-On-Chip Computing for ASICs and FPGAs"
Springer, 2007.
2. Ian Grout , “Digital system design with FPGAs and CPLDs” Elsevier, 2008.
38
3. Joao Cardoso, Michael Hübner, "Reconfigurable Computing: From FPGAs to
Hardware/Software Codesign" Springer, 2011.
4. Ron Sass and Anderew G.Schmidt, “ Embedded System design with platform FPGAs:
Principles and Practices”, Elsevier, 2010.
5. Steve Kilts, "Advanced FPGA Design: Architecture, Implementation, and Optimization" Willey,
2007
ET5092 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course to impart knowledge in
the fundamentals of image processing
the techniques involved in image enhancement
the low and high-level features for image analysis
the fundamentals and significance of image compression
the hardware for image processing applications
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Introduction to image processing systems, sampling and quantization, color fundamentals and
models, image operations – arithmetic, geometric and morphological. Multi-resolution analysis –
image pyramids
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial domain; Gray-level transformations – histogram processing – spatial filtering, smoothing and
sharpening. Frequency domain: filtering in frequency domain – DFT, FFT, DCT – smoothing and
sharpening filters – Homomorphic filtering. Image enhancement for remote sensing images and
medical images.
UNIT III IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND FEATURE ANALYSIS 9
Detection of discontinuities – edge operators – edge linking and boundary detection, thresholding –
feature analysis and extraction – region based segmentation – morphological watersheds – shape
skeletonization, phase congruency. Number plate detection using segmentation algorithm.
UNIT IV IMAGE COMPRESSION 9
Image compression: fundamentals – models – elements of information theory – error free
compression – lossy compression – compression standards. Applications of image compression
techniques in video and image transmission.
UNIT V EMBEDDED IMAGE PROCESSING 9
Introduction to embedded image processing. ASIC vs FPGA - memory requirement, power
consumption, parallelism. Design issues in VLSI implementation of Image processing algorithms -
interfacing. Hardware implementation of image processing algorithms: Segmentation and
compression
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
NOTE:Discussions / Exercise / practice on Image enhancement, segmentation and compression with
simulation tools such as Matlab/ Raspberry pi (python programming) will help the student understand
image processing concepts and hardware implementation using relevant processors
39
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will comprehend
Fundamentals of image processing and techniques involved in image enhancement,
segmentation and compression and their real-time applications
The implementation of image processing applications using software and hardware.
REFERENCES:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image processing”, 2nd edition, Pearson
education, 2003
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of digital image processing”, Pearson education, 2003
3. Milan Sonka, ValclavHalavac and Roger Boyle, “Image processing, analysis and machine
vision”, 2nd Edition, Thomson learning, 2001
4. Mark Nixon and Alberto Aguado,“Feature extraction & Image processing for computer
vision”,3rd Edition, Academic press, 2012
5. Donald G. Bailey, “Design for Embedded Image processing on FPGAs” John Wiley and Sons,
2011.
ET5007 EMBEDDED NETWORKING AND AUTOMATION OF LT P C
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of wired embedded networking techniques.
To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless embedded networking
To study on design of automation in instrumentation
To introduce design of Programmable measurement & control of electrical Devices & grid
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I EMBEDDED PROCESS COMMUNICATION WITH INSTRUMENT BUS 9
Embedded Networking: Introduction – Cluster of Instruments in System: introduction to bus protocols,
connectors, Bus Architecture & Interfacing of external instruments to – RS 232C,RS – 422, RS 485
and USB standards – embedded ethernet – MOD bus and CAN bus.
UNIT II WIRELESS EMBEDDED NETWORKING 9
Wireless sensor networks – Introduction – Sensor node architecture – Commercially available sensor
nodes -Network Topology –Localization –Time Synchronization - Energy efficient MAC protocols –
SMAC –Energy efficient and robust routing – Data Centric routing Applications of sensor networks;
Applications - Home Control - Building Automation - Industrial Automation
UNIT III BUILDING SYSTEM AUTOMATION 9
Concept of Uc Based & PC based data acquisition – Concept of Virtual Instrumentation -
Programming Environment to build a Virtual Instrumentation, Building system automation with
graphical user interface programming-Programmable Logic Controllers-introduction-Ladder&
Functional Block programming-Case study on Temperature control,Valve sequencing control
40
UNIT IV MEASUREMENT AND EMBEDDED CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS 9
Sensor Types & Charecteristics:Sensing Voltage, Current, flux, Torque, Position, Proximity, Force,
Data acquisition & Display system- Signal conditioning circuit design- computers/ embedded
processor interfacing circuit -design automation and protection of electrical appliances –processor
based digital controllers for switching Actuators: Servo motors, Stepper motors, Relays
UNIT V COMMUNICATION FOR LARGE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AUTOMATION 9
Data Acquisition, Monitoring, Communication, Event Processing, and Polling Principles, SCADA
system principles – outage management– Decision support application for substation automation,
extended control feeder automation, Performance measure and response time, SCADA Data Models,
need, sources, interface.
NOTE
Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench /simulators: on the basics interface of sensors,
actuators to microcontrollers, role of virtual Instrumentation software packages/ simulators/ special
microcontrollers for i/o port communication with electrical loads.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
The learning process delivers insight into categorizing various i/p-o/p configurations of
computational processors with improved communication strategies
Improved Employability and enterprenership capacity due to knowledge upgradation on recent
trends in embedded systems design .
REFERENCES:
1. Control and automation of electrical power distribution systems, James Northcote-Green, Robert
Wilson, CRC, Taylor and Francis, 2006
2. Krzysztof Iniewski,”Smart Grid ,Infrastructure & Networking”,TMcGH,2012
3. Robert Faludi,”Building Wireless Sensor Networks,O’Reilly,2011
4. W.Bolton,Programmable Logic Controllers,5th Ed,Elseiver,2010.
5. Shih-Lin Wu,Yu-Chee Tseng,{“Wireless Ad Hoc Networking,PAN,LAN,SAN,Aurebach Pub,2012
6. Jan Axelson ‘Embedded Ethernet and Internet Complete’, Penram publications
7. Bhaskar Krishnamachari, ‘Networking wireless sensors’, Cambridge press 2005
8. Robert H. Bishop, “Learning with Lab-View” Preticee Hall, 2009
9. Sanjay Gupta, “Virtual Instrumentation, LABVIEW”, TMH, New Delhi, 2003
10 Ernest O. Doeblin and Dhanesh N Manik, “ Measrement Systems – Application and Design”,
5th Edn, TMH, 2007.
ET5008 SMART SYSTEM DESIGN LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To under stand about the smart system technologies and its role in real time applications
To expose students to different open source platforms and Attributes.
To familiarize the design and development of embedded system based system design.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview of smart system design and requirements- Hardware and software selection & co-design-
Communications-smart sensors and actuators-Open-source resources for embedded system- android
41
for embedded system - Embedded system for Ecommerce- Embedded system for Smart card design
and development –Recent trends.
UNIT II MOBILE EMBEDDED SYSTEM 9
Design requirements-Hardware platform- OS and Software development platform- Mobile Apps
development- Applications: heart beat monitoring, blood pressure monitoring, mobile banking and
appliances control.
UNIT III HOME AUTOMATION: 9
Home Automation System Architecture-Essential Components- Linux and Raspberry Pi – design and
real time implementation.
UNIT IV SMART APPLIANCES AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9
Overview- functional requirements-Embedded and Integrated Platforms for Energy Management-
Energy Measurement Techniques for Smart Metering-Smart Embedded Appliances Networks –
Security Considerations.
UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEMS AND ROBOTICS 9
Robots and Controllers-components - Aerial Robotics -Mobile Robot Design- Three-Servo Ant Robot-
Autonomous Hexacopter System.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions on integration of H/W & S/W technology in automation of
system/process.
OUTCOMES
Students will develop more understanding on the concepts of smart system design and its
present developments.
Students will study about different embedded open source and cost effective techniques for
developing solution for real time applications.
Students will acquire knowledge on different platforms and Infrastructure for Smart system
design.
Students will learn the art of implementing embedded system for smart applications and
control.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomas Bräunl, Embedded Robotics ,Springer, 2003.
2. Grimm, Christoph, Neumann, Peter, Mahlknech and Stefan, Embedded Systems for Smart
Appliances and Energy Management , Springer 2013.
3. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems - Architecture,. Programming and Design" , McGraw- Hill, 2008
4. Nilanjan Dey, Amartya Mukherjee, Embedded Systems and Robotics with Open Source Tools,
CRC press, 2016.
5. Karim Yaghmour, Embedded Android , O'Reilly, 2013.
6. Steven Goodwin ,Smart Home Automation with Linux and Raspberry Pi, Apress, 2013
7. C.K.Toh, “ AdHoc mobile wireless networks”, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2002.
8. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli and Taieb Znati, “ Wireless Sensor Networks Technology,
Protocols, and Applications“, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
9. Anna Ha´c, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2003.
10. Robert Faludi,”Wireless Sensor Networks”,O’Reilly,2011.
42
ET5009 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To develop an understanding on business promotion process.
To expose students on the skills required for success in business.
To impart embedded system technology based entrepreneurship.
UNIT I BASICS FOR ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
The entrepreneurial culture and structure -theories of entrepreneurship -entrepreneurial traits - types
-behavioural patterns of entrepreneurs -entrepreneurial motivation -establishing entrepreneurial
systems -idea processing, personnel, financial information and intelligence, rewards and motivation -
concept bank -Role of industrial Fairs.
UNIT II CHALLENGES FOR ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Setting quality standards- recruitment strategies- time schedules- Financial analysis - credit facilities-
Marketing channel – advertisement- institutions providing technical, financial and marketing
assistance- factory design -design requirements -applicability of the Factories Act.
UNIT III RESPONSIBILITIES IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9
Steps for starting a small industry -selection of type of organization -Incentives and subsidies - Central
Govt. schemes and State Govt. Schemes -incentives to SSI -registration, Registration and Licensing
requirements for sales tax, CST, Excise Duty -Power -Exploring export possibilities- incentives for
exports -import of capital goods and raw materials- Entrepreneurship development programmes in
India- Role and Improvement in Indian Economy.
UNIT IV SCOPE IN EMBEDDED SYSTEM FIELD 9
Entrepreneurship opportunities in Embedded system technologies - embedded systems design,
modeling, Feasibility study on embedded system products- Entrepreneurial skills for embedded
system hardware and software architecture, software and hardware co-design and challenges;
problems of entrepreneurship in Embedded system field.
UNIT V SCOPE THROUGH EMBEDDED PRODUCTS 9
Embedded system Product development- feature driven development- release management-market
pull product search ,Entrepreneurial case studies: Mobile phone development- automation
components-Washing machine- Food Processing system and devices- High Performance embedded
computers- Industrial Controllers.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions with Case studies on establishing entrepreneurial
development through Government supported schemes for utilizing technology.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Manage people, processes, and resources within a diverse organization.
Apply knowledge of leadership concepts in an integrated manner.
Analyze the internal/external factors affecting a business/organization to evaluate business
opportunities.
demonstrate extemporaneous speaking skills developed through in-class discussion of text
materials, case study analyses, and current entrepreneurship-related issues.
43
demonstrate basic computer proficiency, including the use of word processing, presentation,
and spreadsheet software packages, as well as a basic facility with the internet and other
research tools.
Key concepts underpinning entrepreneurship and its application in the recognition and
exploitation of product/ service/ process opportunities
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES
1 Kuratko, Enmterpreneurship : A Contemporary Approach, Thomson Learning, 2001.
2 Thomas Zimmerer et.al., Essentials of Entrepreneurship and small business Management 3rd Ed.
Pearson Education, 2002.
3 Greene, Entrepreneurship: Ideas in Action, Thomson Learning, Mumbai, 2000
4 Jeffry Timmons, New Ventrure creation, McGraw Hill, 1999.
5 Gupta and Smivasan, Entrepreneurial Development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand, 1992
6. LyLa B. Das "Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach" Pearson, 2013
7. James K.peckol ,” Embedded Systems: A contemporary Design Tool”, Wiley,2014
ET5010 NANO ELECTRONICS LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce the properties of electron and its implication for electronics
To teach the importance and the issues of Nanoscale CMOS technology.
To introduce the characteristics and applications of nano electronic devices, nano fabrication
methods and techniques.
To teach the circuits and architectural features of nano memory devices.
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts acquired
over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Particles, waves, Wave mechanics, schrodinger equation, free and confined electrons, particle
statistics and density of states. Electron transport in semiconductors and nanostructures, Quantum
dots, Quantum Well, Quantum wire , materials and its properties, Ballistic electron transport, 1D
transport , Spin electronics- Electrical and Electronics Applications of Nanotechnology.
UNIT II NANOSCALE CMOS 9
Survey of modern electronics and trends towards nanoelectronics CMOS scaling, challenges and
limits, static power, device variability, interconnect - CNT-FET, HEMT , pHEMT FinFET, FerroFET-
nanoscale CMOS ciruit design and analysis
UNIT III NANOELECTRONIC STRUCTURE AND DEVICES. 9
Resonant-tunneling diodes- Resonant Tunneling Transistor-Single-electron transfer devices-Potential
effect transistors- Quantum-dot cellular automata, Nano Photonic Devices-Molecular electronic
devices -Nano-electromechanical system devices
UNIT IV NANOELECTRONIC MEMORIES 6
44
Nano tube for memories- Nano RAM- Nanoscale DRAM, SRAM, Tunnel magnetoresistance-Giant
magnetoresistance- design and applications.
UNIT V FABRICATION TECHNIQUES 9
Clean room standards-Microfabrication –nanofabrication- nanofabrication issues- E-beam lithography-
X-ray and ion-beam lithography- nanoimprint lithography- Scanning probe lithography- dip-pen
nanolithography- Nano-characterization techniques.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions/Practice on Workbench : on modelling of nano/micro analog
&digital devices.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Students will understand the divers electronic device fabrication.
The students should be able to understand basic and advanced concepts of nanoelectronic
devices, sensors and transducers and their applications in nanotechnology
The concepts of a quantum well, quantum transport and tunnelling effects.
Understand the impact of nanoelectronics onto information technology, communication and
computer science.
Design integrated circuits (micro chip) using state-of-the-art CMOS technology
The learning process delivers insight into categorizing various nano configurations of
computational processors with improved design strategies.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES :
1. Hagelstein, Peter L., Stephen D. Senturia, and Terry P. Orlando, “Introduction to Applied
Quantum and Statistical Physics.”, New York, NY: Wiley, 2004.
2. Rainer Waser, “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology”, Wiley 2005
3. Michael A. Nielsen and Isaac L. Chuang, “Quantum Computation and Quantum Information”,
Cambridge University Press, 2000.
4. Adrian Ionesu and Kaustav Banerjee eds. “ Emerging Nanoelectronics: Life with
and after CMOS” , Vol I, II, and III, Kluwer Academic, 2005.
5. Kiyoo Itoh Masashi Horiguchi ,Hitoshi Tanaka, Ultra Low voltage nano scale memories. Spl Indian
Edition, Springer.
6. George W. Hanson, Fundamental of nanoelectronics, Pearson education.
ET5011 DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED COMPUTING LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of Network communication technologies and
distributed computing.
To teach the fundamentals of Internet
To study on Java based Networking and distributed computing
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
45
UNIT I DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM 9
Introduction- Communication in distribution system-Client/Server Model-Synchronization in distributed
system
UNIT II EMBEDDED JAVA 9
Overview of JAVA – Programs- Multithreaded programming- APPLET programming- I/O streaming-
RMI- Introduction to Embedded JAVA
UNIT III DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING 9
Definition- Model of distributed computation- Distributed shared memory- Authentication in distributed
system
UNIT IV SECURITY IN COMPUTING 9
Security meaning- Threads in networks- Network security control- Firewall- Authentication- E-mail
security- Security in web services- Case studies
UNIT V WEB BASED HOME AUTOMATION 9
Components of Distributed Embedded - Protocols & Standards - Hardware/Software selection for
Distributed Embedded – case study : Web based Home Automation
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following
guidelines for improved teaching /learning process :Discussions/Practice on Workbench : Program
Development and practice in exercises with XML/HTML/Java Programming Environments.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Able to apply knowledge from undergraduate engineering and other disciplines to identify,
formulate, solve novel advanced electronics engineering along with soft computing problems that
require advanced knowledge within the field.
Able to understand and integrate new knowledge within the field and advanced technical
knowledge in multiple contexts.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on recent
trends in embedded systems design.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Distributed operating systems”, Pearson 2013
2. E Balagurusamy,” Programming with JAVA”, Mc Graw Hill 2013
3. Ajay D Kshemkalyani,Mukesh Singhal, “Distributed Computing” – Principles, Algorithm and
systems, Cambridge university press 2008
4. Charles P. Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”, Pearson 2009.
PS5091 SMART GRID LT P C
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To Study about Smart Grid technologies, different smart meters and advanced
metering infrastructure.
To familiarize the power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
To familiarize the high performance computing for Smart Grid applications
46
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID 9
Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept, Definitions and Need for Smart Grid, Smart grid drivers,
functions, opportunities, challenges and benefits, Difference between conventional & Smart
Grid, National and International Initiatives in Smart Grid.
UNIT II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 9
Technology Drivers, Smart energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation,
Feeder Automation ,Transmission systems: EMS, FACTS and HVDC, Wide area monitoring,
Protection and control, Distribution systems: DMS, Volt/Var control, Fault Detection, Isolation
and service restoration, Outage management, High-Efficiency Distribution Transformers,
Phase Shifting Transformers, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV).
UNIT III SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Introduction to Smart Meters, Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits,
AMI protocols, standards and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement
Unit(PMU), Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) & their application for monitoring & protection.
UNIT IV POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID 9
Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable
Energy Sources, Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality
monitoring, Power Quality Audit.
UNIT V HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING FOR SMART GRID 9
APPLICATIONS
Local Area Network (LAN), House Area Network (HAN), Wide Area Network (WAN),
Broadband over Power line (BPL), IP based Protocols, Basics of Web Service and CLOUD
Computing to make Smart Grids smarter, Cyber Security for Smart Grid.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners will develop more understanding on the concepts of Smart Grid and its present
developments.
Learners will study about different Smart Grid technologies.
Learners will acquire knowledge about different smart meters and advanced metering
infrastructure.
Learners will have knowledge on power quality management in Smart Grids
Learners will develop more understanding on LAN, WAN and Cloud Computing for
Smart Grid applications.
REFERENCES
1 Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid :Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”, CRC Press 2012.
2 Janaka Ekanayake, Nick Jenkins, KithsiriLiyanage, Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama,
“Smart Grid: Technology and Applications”, Wiley 2012.
3 Vehbi C. Güngör, DilanSahin, TaskinKocak, Salih Ergüt, Concettina Buccella, Carlo
Cecati, and Gerhard P. Hancke, “Smart Grid Technologies: Communication
Technologies and Standards” IEEE Transactions On Industrial Informatics, Vol. 7, No. 4,
November 2011.
4 Xi Fang, Satyajayant Misra, Guoliang Xue, and Dejun Yang “Smart Grid – The New and
Improved Power Grid: A Survey” , IEEE Transaction on Smart Grids, vol. 14, 2012.
47
PS5073 ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND POWER MANAGEMENT LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concept of electrical vehicles and its operations
To understand the need for energy storage in hybrid vehicles
To provide knowledge about various possible energy storage technologies that can be
used in electric vehicles
UNIT I ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND VEHICLE MECHANICS 9
Electric Vehicles (EV), Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV), Engine ratings, Comparisons of EV
with internal combustion Engine vehicles, Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics
UNIT II ARCHITECTURE OF EV’s AND POWER TRAIN COMPONENTS 9
Architecture of EV’s and HEV’s – Plug-n Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train
components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and Brakes
UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC DRIVES 9
DC/DC chopper based four quadrant operations of DC drives – Inverter based V/f Operation
(motoring and braking) of induction motor drive system – Induction motor and permanent
motor based vector control operation – Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives
UNIT IV BATTERY ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM 9
Battery Basics, Different types, Battery Parameters, Battery modeling, Traction Batteries.
UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Fuel cell – Characteristics- Types – hydrogen Storage Systems and Fuel cell EV – Ultra
capacitors
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners will understand the operation of Electric vehicles and various energy storage
technologies for electrical vehicles
REFERENCES
1 Iqbal Hussain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, Second
Edition” CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, Second Edition (2011).
2 Ali Emadi, Mehrdad Ehsani, John M.Miller, “Vehicular Electric Power Systems”, Special
Indian Edition, Marcel dekker, Inc 2010.
ET5012 SOFT COMPUTING AND OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course is to make the students
Understand the fundamental concepts of soft computing, artificial neural networks and
optimization techniques
Familiarize with recent advancements in Artificial neural networks and optimization techniques
48
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING AND NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Introduction to soft computing: soft computing vs. hard computing – various types of soft computing
techniques, from conventional AI to computational intelligence, applications of soft computing.
Fundamentals of neural network: biological neuron, artificial neuron, activation function, single layer
perceptron – limitations. Multi-layer perceptron – back propagation algorithm.
UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Radial basis function networks – reinforcement learning. Hopfield / recurrent network – configuration –
stability constraints, associative memory and characteristics, limitations and applications. Hopfield vs.
Boltzmann machine. Advances in neural networks – convolution neural networks. Familiarization of
Neural network toolbox.
UNIT III FUZZY LOGIC AND NEURO FUZZY SYSTEMS 9
Fundamentals of fuzzy set theory: fuzzy sets, operations on fuzzy sets, scalar cardinality, union and
intersection, complement, equilibrium points, aggregation, projection, composition. Fuzzy membership
functions. Fundamentals of neuro-fuzzy systems – ANFIS. Familiarization of ANFIS Toolbox.
UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Classification of optimization problems – classical optimization techniques. Linear programming –
simplex algorithm. Non-linear programming – steepest descent method, augmented Lagrange
multiplier method – equality constrained problems.
UNIT V ADVANCED OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
Simple hill climbing algorithm, Steepest ascent hill climbing – algorithm and features. Simulated
annealing – algorithm and features. Genetic algorithm: working principle, fitness function.
Familiarization with Optimization Toolbox.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions/Practice on Workbench : on role of Fuzzy,Neural ,Genetic
algorithms and Concepts in design of intelligent systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course students will
Comprehend the fundamentals of artificial neural network, fuzzy systems and optimization
techniques
Understand the significance of various optimization algorithms applied to engineering
problems.
Be capable of developing ANN-based models
Be capable of choosing appropriate optimization techniques for engineering applications. .
REFERENCES:
1. Laurene V. Fausett, “Fundamentals of neural networks, architecture, algorithms and
applications, Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, EijiMizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and soft computing”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
3. Simon Haykin, “Neural Networks – A comprehensive foundation”, Pearson Education, 2005.
4. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic algorithms in search, optimization and machine learning”,
Pearson Education, 2009.
5. Singiresu S. Rao, “Engineering Optimization – Theory and Practice”, 4th edition, John Wiley &
Sons, 2009.
6. Thomas Weise, “Global Optimization algorithms – Theory and applications”, self-published,
2009
49
ET5013 WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of wireless communication technologies.
To teach the fundamentals of wireless mobile network protocols
To study on wireless network topologies
To introduce network routing protocols
To study the basis for classification of commercial family of wireless communication
technologies
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Wireless Transmission – signal propagation – Free space and two ray models – spread spectrum –
Satellite Networks – Capacity Allocation – FDMA –TDMA- SDMA – DAMA
UNIT II MOBILE NETWORKS 9
Cellular Wireless Networks – GSM – Architecture – Protocols – Connection Establishment –
Frequency Allocation – Handover – Security – GPRA.
UNIT III WIRELESS NETWORKS 9
Wireless LAN – IEEE 802.11 Standard-Architecture – Services – Hiper LAN, Bluetooth
UNIT IV ROUTING 9
Mobile IP- SIP – DHCP – AdHoc Networks – Proactive and Reactive Routing Protocols – Multicast
Routing - WSN routing – LEACH- SPIN- PEGASIS
UNIT V TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS 9
TCP over Adhoc Networks – WAP – Architecture – WWW Programming Model – WDP – WTLS –
WTP – WSP – WAE – WTA Architecture – WML – WML scripts.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions on wireless technology ,its integration for multi system by
networked communication.
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Knowledge of basic and advanced theories on wireless communications systems in physical, link
and network layer.
Ability to understand, model, and design mobile networks.
Ability to understand and apply mathematically model in wireless communications.
Wireless communication transceiver algorithm design
Mobile system design methodology, link level simulation for wireless communications.
Fundamentals of mobile communication including various propagation path loss models under
different operating conditions and their impact on received signal strength
The learning process delivers insight into categorizing various embedded & communication
protocols for networking of distributed static & mobile systems.
50
REFERENCES
1. Kaveh Pahlavan, Prasanth Krishnamoorthy, “ Principles of Wireless Networks’ PHI/Pearson
Education, 2003
2. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S. Manoj, AdHoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and
protocols, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004
3. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nicklons and Thomas Stober, “ Principles of Mobile
computing”, Springer, New york, 2003.
4. C.K.Toh, “ AdHoc mobile wireless networks”, Prentice Hall, Inc, 2002.
5. Charles E. Perkins, “ Adhoc Networking”, Addison-Wesley, 2001.
6. Jochen Schiller, “ Mobile communications”, PHI/Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003.
7. William Stallings, “ Wireless communications and Networks”, PHI/Pearson Education, 2002.
ET5014 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY LT P C
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the fundamentals of data security.
To teach the fundamentals of mathematical aspects in creating Encryption keys
To teach the fundamentals of Security in data& wireless communication.
To teach the fundamentals of Secured system operation.
To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing the concepts
acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved employability skills
UNIT I SYMMETRIC CIPHERS 9
Overview – classical Encryption Techniques – Block Ciphers and the Data Encryption standard –
Introduction to Finite Fields – Advanced Encryption standard – Contemporary,Symmetric Ciphers –
Confidentiality using Symmetric Encryption.
UNIT II PUBLIC-KEY ENCRYPTION AND HASH FUNCTIONS 9
Introduction to Number Theory – Public-Key Cryptography and RSA – Key Management – Diffie-
Hellman Key Exchange – Elliptic Curve Cryptography – Message Authentication and Hash Functions
– Hash Algorithms – Digital Signatures and Authentication Protocols.
UNIT III NETWORK SECURITY PRACTICE 9
Authentication Applications – Kerberos – X.509 Authentication Service – Electronic mail Security –
Pretty Good Privacy – S/MIME – IP Security architecture – Authentication Header – Encapsulating
Security Payload – Key Management.
UNIT IV SYSTEM SECURITY 9
Intruders – Intrusion Detection – Password Management – Malicious Software – Firewalls – Firewall
Design Principles – Trusted Systems.
UNIT V WIRELESS SECURITY 9
Introduction to Wireless LAN Security Standards – Wireless LAN Security Factors and Issues.
Note: Class room discussions and tutorials can include the following guidelines for improved
teaching /learning process :Discussions/Exercise/Practice on Workbench : on the basics /numerical
design aspects of encryption,decryption keys/password creation etc
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
51
OUTCOMES : After the completion of this course the student will be able to:
Identify the major types of threats to information security and the associated
attacks,understand how security policies, standards and practices are developed.
Describe the major types of cryptographic algorithms and typical applications, write code to
encrypt and decrypt information using some of the standard algorithms
To be exposed to original research in network security and master information security
governance, and related legal and regulatory issues
The learning process delivers insight onto role of security aspects during data transfer and
communication in systems like grid.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge upgradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
REFERRENCES:
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security – Principles And Practices”, Pearson
Education, 3rd Edition, 2003.
2. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
3. Natalia Olifer and Victor Olifer,”Computer Networks principles.technologies and protocols for
network design”, Wiley, 2015
4. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography”, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2001.
5. Stewart S. Miller, “Wi-Fi Security”, McGraw Hill, 2003.
6. Charles B. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security In Computing”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education, 2003.
7. Mai, “Modern Cryptography: Theory and Practice”, First Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
IN5079 ROBOTICS AND CONTROL LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To introduce robot terminologies and robotic sensors To educate direct and inverse
kinematic relations
To educate on formulation of manipulator Jacobians and introduce path planning
techniques
To educate on robot dynamics
To introduce robot control techniques
UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND TERMINOLOGIES 9
Definition-Classification-History- Robots components-Degrees of freedom-Robot joints-coordinates-
Reference frames-workspace-Robot languages-actuators-sensors-Position, velocity and acceleration
sensors-Torque sensors-tactile and touch sensors-proximity and range sensors- vision system-social
issues.
UNIT II KINEMATICS 9
Mechanism-matrix representation-homogenous transformation-DH representation-Inverse kinematics
solution and programming-degeneracy and dexterity
UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL MOTION AND PATH PLANNING 9
Jacobian-differential motion of frames-Interpretation-calculation of Jacobian-Inverse Jacobian- Robot
Path planning
52
UNIT IV DYNAMIC MODELLING 9
Lagrangian mechanics- Two-DOF manipulator- Lagrange-Euler formulation – Newton- Euler
formulation – Inverse dynamics
UNIT V ROBOT CONTROL SYSTEM 9
- Linear control schemes- joint actuators- decentralized PID control- computed torque control – force
control- hybrid position force control- Impedance/ Torque control
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the components and basic terminology of Robotics
Ability to model the motion of Robots and analyze the workspace and trajectory panning of robots
Ability to develop application based Robots
Abiilty to formulate models for the control of mobile robots in various industrial
applications
REFERENCES
1. R.K. Mittal and I J Nagrath, “ Robotics and Control”, Tata MacGraw Hill, Fourth edition.
2. Saeed B. Niku ,''Introduction to Robotics '', Pearson Education, 2002.
3. Fu, Gonzalez and Lee Mcgrahill ,''Robotics ", international edition.
4. R.D. Klafter, TA Chmielewski and Michael Negin, "Robotic Engineering, An Integrated
approach",Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
53
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (GENERAL)
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) :
MBA programme curriculum is designed to prepare the post graduate students
I. To have a thorough understanding of the core aspects of the business.
II. To provide the learners with the management tools to identify, analyze and create
business opportunities as well as solve business problems.
III. To prepare them to have a holistic approach towards management functions.
IV. To motivate them for continuous learning.
V. To inspire and make them practice ethical standards in business.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs):
On successful completion of the programme,
1. Ability to apply the business acumen gained in practice.
2. Ability to understand and solve managerial issues.
3. Ability to communicate and negotiate effectively, to achieve organizational and
individual goals.
4. Ability to upgrade their professional and managerial skills in their workplace.
5. Ability to explore and reflect about managerial challenges, develop informed
managerial decisions in a dynamically unstable environment.
6. Ability to take up challenging assignments.
7. Ability to understand one’s own ability to set achievable targets and complete them.
8. Ability to pursue lifelong learning.
9. To have a fulfilling business career.
Programme Programme Outcomes
Educational
Objectives PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
I
II
III
IV
V
1
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
SEM 1 Principles of Management
Accounting for Management
Economic Analysis for Business
Legal Aspects of Business
Organizational Behaviour
Statistics for Management
Total Quality Management
YEAR 1
Spoken and Written Communication
SEM 2 Applied Operations Research
Business Research Methods
Financial Management
Human Resource Management
Information Management
Operations Management
Marketing Management
Data Analysis and Business Modeling
SEM 3 International Business Management
Strategic Management
Elective I
Elective II
YEAR 2
Elective III
Given below for each stream/Specialization
Elective IV
Elective V
Elective VI
Summer Training
SEM 4 Project Work
2
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
Stream/ Specialization : Marketing Management
Brand Management
Consumer Behaviour
Customer Relationship Management
Integrated Marketing Communication
Retail Marketing
Services Marketing
Social Marketing
Stream/ Specialization : Financial Management
Banking Financial Services Management
Corporate Finance
Derivatives Management
Merchant Banking and Financial Services
Security Analysis and Portfolio
Management
Strategic Investment and Financing
Decisions
International Trade Finance
Stream/ Specialization : Human Resource Management
Entrepreneurship Development
Industrial Relations and Labour Welfare
Labour Legislations
Managerial Behaviour and Effectiveness
Organizational Theory, Design and
Development
Strategic Human Resource Management
Stream/ Specialization : Systems Management
Advanced Database Management System
Data mining for Business Intelligence
E-Business Management
3
Software Project Management and Quality
Enterprise Resource Planning
Stream/ Specialization : Operations Management
Logistics Management
Materials Management
Product Design
Project Management
Services Operations Management
Supply Chain Management
4
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (FULL TIME)
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI I TO IV SEMESTERS
SEMESTER - I
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. BA5101 Economic Analysis for PC 4 4 0 0 4
Business
2. BA5102 Principles of Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. BA5103 Accounting for Management PC 4 4 0 0 4
4. BA5104 Legal Aspects of Business PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. BA5105 Organizational Behaviour PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. BA5106 Statistics for Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
7. BA5107 Total Quality Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
8 BA5111 Spoken and Written EEC 4 0 0 4 2
Communication #
TOTAL 27 23 0 4 25
# No end semester examination is required for this course.
SEMESTER - II
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT
L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. BA5201 Applied Operations Research PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. BA5202 Business Research Methods PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. BA5203 Financial Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. BA5204 Human Resource PC 3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. BA5205 Information Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
6. BA5206 Operations Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
7 BA5207 Marketing Management PC 4 4 0 0 4
PRACTICALS
8 BA5211 Data Analysis and Business EEC 4 0 0 4 2
Modelling
TOTAL 26 22 0 4 24
SUMMER SEMESTER (4 WEEKS)
SUMMER TRAINING
Summer Training – The training report along with the company certificate should be submitted
within the two weeks of the reopening date of 3rd semester. The training report should be around
40 pages containing the details of training undergone, the departments wherein he was trained with
duration (chronological diary), along with the type of managerial skills developed during training. The
training report should be sent to the Controller of Examinations by the HOD through the Principal,
before the last working day of the 3rd Semester.
5
SEMESTER - III
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. BA5301 International Business PC 3 3 0 0 3
Management
2 BA5302 Strategic Management PC 3 3 0 0 3
3 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective I ***
4 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective II***
5 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III***
6 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective IV***
7 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective V***
8 Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective VI***
PRACTICALS
9 BA5311 Summer Training EEC 2 0 0 2 1
TOTAL 26 24 0 2 25
*** Chosen electives should be from two streams of management of three electives each.
SEMESTER - IV
SI. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. BA5411 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL 0 0 24 12
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS:86
6
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT
L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
1. Principles of PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
2. Accounting for PC 4
4 0 0 4
Management
3. Economic Analysis PC 4
4 0 0 4
for Business
4. Legal Aspects of PC 3
3 0 0 3
Business
5. Organizational PC 3
3 0 0 3
Behaviour
6. Statistics for PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
7. Marketing PC 4
4 0 0 4
Management
8. Spoken and Written PC 4
0 0 4 2
Communication
9. Applied Operations PC 3
3 0 0 3
Research
10. Business Research PC 3
3 0 0 3
Methods
11. Strategic PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
12. Financial PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
13. Human Resource PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
14. Information PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
15. Operations PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
16. International PC 3
Business 3 0 0 3
Management
17. Total Quality PC 3
3 0 0 3
Management
7
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)
FUNCTIONAL SPECIALIZATIONS
1. Students can take three electives subjects from two functional specializations
Or
2. Students can take six elective subjects from any one sectoral specializations
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
Stream/ Specialization : Marketing Management
1. BA5001 Brand Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. BA5002 Consumer Behaviour PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. BA5003 Customer PE 3 3 0 0 3
Relationship
Management
4. BA5004 Integrated Marketing PE 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
5. BA5005 Retail Marketing PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. BA5006 Services Marketing PE 3 3 0 0 3
7. BA5007 Social Marketing PE 3 3 0 0 3
Stream/ Specialization : Financial Management
8. BA5008 Banking Financial PE 3 3 0 0 3
Services
Management
9. BA5009 Corporate Finance PE 3 3 0 0 3
10. BA5010 Derivatives PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
11. BA5011 Merchant Banking PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Financial
Services
12. BA5012 Security Analysis PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Portfolio
Management
13. BA5013 Strategic Investment PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Financing
Decisions
14. BA5031 International Trade PE 3 3 0 0 3
Finance
Stream/ Specialization : Human Resource Management
15. BA5014 Entrepreneurship PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
16. BA5015 Industrial Relations PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Labour Welfare
17. BA5016 Labour Legislations PE 3 3 0 0 3
18. BA5017 Managerial PE 3 3 0 0 3
8
Behaviour and
Effectiveness
19. BA5018 Organizational PE 3 3 0 0 3
Theory, Design and
Development
20. BA5019 Strategic Human PE 3 3 0 0 3
Resource
Management
Stream/ Specialization : Systems Management
21. BA5020 Advanced Database PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management System
22. BA5021 Datamining for PE 3 3 0 0 3
Business Intelligence
23. BA5022 Enterprise Resource PE 3 3 0 0 3
Planning
24. BA5023 Software Project PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management and
Quality
25. BA5024 E-Business PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
Stream/ Specialization : Operations Management
26. BA5025 Logistics PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
27. BA5026 Materials PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
28. BA5027 Product Design PE 3 3 0 0 3
29. BA5028 Project Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
30. BA5029 Services Operations PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
31. BA5030 Supply Chain PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
9
SECTORAL SPECIALIZATIONS
1. Students can take three electives subjects from two functional specializations
or
2. Students can take six elective subjects from any one sectoral specializations
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
Sectoral Specialization : Logistics and Supply Chain Management
1. BA5051 Supply Chain Concepts and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Planning
2. BA5052 Sourcing and Supply PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
3. BA5053 Supply Chain Inventory PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
4. BA5054 Supply Chain Information System PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. BA5055 Warehouse Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. BA5056 Transportation and Distribution PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
7. BA5057 Reverse and Contract Logistics PE 3 3 0 0 3
8. BA5058 Air Cargo Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
9. BA5059 Containerization and Allied PE 3 3 0 0 3
Business
10. BA5060 Exim Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
11. BA5061 Fundamentals of Shipping PE 3 3 0 0 3
12. BA5062 Port and Terminal Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
Sectoral Specialization :Infrastructure and Real Estate Management
13. BA5063 Infrastructure Planning Scheduling PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Control
14. BA5064 Contracts and Arbitration PE 3 3 0 0 3
15. BA5065 Project Management for PE 3 3 0 0 3
Infrastructure
16. BA5066 Management of Human PE 3 3 0 0 3
Resources, Safety and Quality
17. BA5067 Disaster Mitigation and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
18. BA5068 Economics and Financial PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management in Construction
19. BA5069 Urban Environmental PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
20. BA5070 Smart Materials, Techniques and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Equipments for Infrastructure
21. BA5071 Strategic Airport Infrastructure PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
22. BA5072 Real Estate Marketing and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
23. BA5073 Infrastructure and Real Estate PE 3 3 0 0 3
Entrepreneurship
24. BA5074 Valuation of Real Estate and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Infrastructure Assets
10
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)
SL. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
NO. CODE PERIODS
Spoken and Written EEC 4 0 0 4 2
1. BA5111
Communication #
Data Analysis and EEC 4 0 0 4 2
2. BA5211
Business Modeling
3. BA5311 Summer Training EEC 2 0 0 2 1
4. BA5411 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12
11
BA5101 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS FOR BUSINESS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of scarcity and efficiency; to explain principles of micro economics
relevant to managing an organization; to describe principles of macro economics to have the
understanding of economic environment of business.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
The themes of economics – scarcity and efficiency – three fundamental economic problems – society’s
capability – Production possibility frontiers (PPF) – Productive efficiency Vs economic efficiency –
economic growth & stability – Micro economies and Macro economies – the role of markets and
government – Positive Vs negative externalities.
UNIT II CONSUMER AND PRODUCER BEHAVIOUR 13
Market – Demand and Supply – Determinants – Market equilibrium – elasticity of demand and supply –
consumer behaviour – consumer equilibrium – Approaches to consumer behaviour – Production –
Short-run and long-run Production Function – Returns to scale – economies Vs diseconomies of scale
– Analysis of cost – Short-run and long-run cost function – Relation between Production and cost
function.
UNIT III PRODUCT AND FACTOR MARKET 13
Product market – perfect and imperfect market – different market structures – Firm’s equilibrium and
supply – Market efficiency – Economic costs of imperfect competition – factor market – Land, Labour
and capital – Demand and supply – determination of factor price – Interaction of product and factor
market – General equilibrium and efficiency of competitive markets.
UNIT IV PERFORMANCE OF AN ECONOMY – MACRO ECONOMICS 13
Macro-economic aggregates – circular flow of macroeconomic activity – National income determination
– Aggregate demand and supply – Macroeconomic equilibrium – Components of aggregate demand
and national income – multiplier effect – Demand side management – Fiscal policy in theory.
UNIT V AGGREGATE SUPPLY AND THE ROLE OF MONEY 13
Short-run and Long-run supply curve – Unemployment and its impact – Okun’s law – Inflation and the
impact – reasons for inflation – Demand Vs Supply factors –Inflation Vs Unemployement tradeoff –
Phillips curve –short- run and long-run –Supply side Policy and management- Money market- Demand
and supply of money – money-market equilibrium and national income – the role of monetary policy.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Students are expected to become familiar with both principles of micro and macro economics. They
would also become familiar with application of these principles to appreciate the functioning of both
product and input markets as well as the economy.
REFERENCES :
1. Paul A. Samuelson, William D. Nordhaus, Sudip Chaudhuri and Anindya Sen, Economics,
19thedition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
2. William Boyes and Michael Melvin, Textbook of economics, Biztantra,9th Edition , 2012.
3. N. Gregory Mankiw, Principles of Economics, 7th edition, Cengage, New Delhi, 2014
4. Richard Lipsey and Alec Charystal, Economics, 12th edition, Oxford, University Press, New
Delhi, 2011.
5. Karl E. Case and Ray C. fair, Principles of Economics, 12th edition, Pearson, Education
Asia, New Delhi, 2014.
12
BA5102 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the students to the basic concepts of management in order to aid in understanding
how an organization functions, and in understanding the complexity and wide variety of issues
managers face in today’s business firms.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9
Organization- Management- Role of managers- Evolution of management thought- Organization and
the environmental factors- Managing globally- Strategies for International business.
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning- Planning process- Types of plans- Objectives- Managing by Objective
(MBO) strategies- Types of strategies – Policies – Decision Making- Types of decision- Decision
making process- Rational decision making process- Decision making under different conditions.
UNIT III ORGANISING 9
Nature and purpose of organizing- Organization structure- Line and staff authority- Departmentation-
Span of control- Centralization and decentralization- Delegation of authority- Staffing- Selection and
Recruitment- Career development- Career stages- Training- Performance appraisal
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Managing people- Communication- Hurdles to effective communication- Organization culture-
Elements and types of culture- Managing cultural diversity.
UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
Process of controlling- Types of control- Budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques - Managing
productivity- Cost control- Purchase control- Maintenance control- Quality control- Planning operations.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
i) The students should be able to describe and discuss the elements of effective management,
ii) discuss and apply the planning, organizing and control processes, iii) describe various theories
related to the development of leadership skills, motivation techniques, team work and effective
communication, iv) communicate effectively through both oral and written presentation.
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew J. Dubrin, Essentials of Management, Thomson Southwestern, 9th edition,2012.
2. Samuel C. Certo and Tervis Certo, Modern management: concepts and skills, Pearson
education, 12th edition, 2012.
3. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of management: An International & Leadership
Perspective, 9th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.
4. Don Hellriegel, Susan E. Jackson and John W. Slocum, Management- A competency-based
approach, Thompson South Western,11 th edition, 2008.
5. Heinz Weihrich, Mark V Cannice and Harold Koontz, Management- A global entrepreneurial
perspective, Tata McGraw Hill, 13th edition, 2010.
6. Stephen P. Robbins, David A.De Cenzo and Mary Coulter, Fundamentals of Management,
Prentice Hall of India, 2012.
13
BA5103 ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGEMENT L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :
Acquire a reasonable knowledge in accounts
Analysis and evaluate financial statements
UNIT I FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 12
Introduction to Financial, Cost and Management Accounting- Generally accepted accounting
principles, Conventions and Concepts-Balance sheet and related concepts- Profit and Loss account
and related concepts - Introduction to inflation accounting- Introduction to human resources
accounting.
UNIT II COMPANY ACCOUNTS 12
Meaning of Company -Maintenance of Books of Account-Statutory Books- Profit or Loss Prior to
incorporation- Final Accounts of Company- Alteration of share capital- Preferential allotment,
Employees stock option- Buyback of securities.
UNIT III ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 12
Analysis of financial statements – Financial ratio analysis, cash flow (as per Accounting Standard 3)
and funds flow statement analysis.
UNIT IV COST ACCOUNTING 12
Cost Accounts - Classification of manufacturing costs - Accounting for manufacturing costs. Cost
Accounting Systems: Job order costing - Process costing- Activity Based Costing- Costing and the
value chain- Target costing- Marginal costing including decision making- Budgetary Control & Variance
Analysis - Standard cost system.
UNIT V ACCOUNTING IN COMPUTERISED ENVIRONMENT 12
Significance of Computerised Accounting System- Codification and Grouping of Accounts-Maintaining
the hierarchy of ledgers- Prepackaged Accounting software.
TOTAL: 45+15 = 60 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Possess a managerial outlook at accounts.
REFERENCES :
1. M.Y.Khan & P.K.Jain, Management Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. R.Narayanaswamy, Financial Accounting – A managerial perspective, PHI Learning, New
Delhi, 2011.
3. Jan Williams, Financial and Managerial Accounting – The basis for business Decisions,
15thedition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2010.
4. Horngren, Surdem, Stratton, Burgstahler, Schatzberg, Introduction to Management Accounting,
PHI Learning, 2011.
5. Stice & Stice, Financial Accounting Reporting and Analysis, 8th edition, Cengage, 2010.
6. Singhvi Bodhanwala, Management Accounting -Text and cases, PHI Learning, 2009.
7. Ashish K. Battacharya, Introduction to Financial Statement Analysis, Elsevier, 2009.
8. Sawyers, Jackson, Jenkins, Arora, Managerial Accounting, 2nd edition, Cengage, 2011
9. Godwin, Alderman, Sanyal , Financial Accounting, 2nd edition, Cengage, 2011
10. Narashiman.M.S, Financial statement analysis, Cengage, 2016.
14
BA 5104 LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To create the knowledge of Legal perspective and its practices to improvise the business.
UNIT I COMMERCIAL LAW 9
THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT 1872
Definition of contract, essentials elements and types of a contract, Formation of a contract,
performance of contracts, breach of contract and its remedies, Quasi contracts - Contract Of Agency:
Nature of agency, Creation and types of agents, Authority and liability of Agent and principal: Rights
and duties of principal and agents, termination of agency.
THE SALE OF GOODS ACT 1930
Nature of Sales contract, Documents of title, risk of loss, Guarantees and Warranties, performance of
sales contracts, conditional sales and rights of an unpaid seller - Negotiable Instruments Act 1881:
Nature and requisites of negotiable instruments. Types of negotiable instruments, liability of parties,
holder in due course, special rules for Cheque and drafts, discharge of negotiable instruments-GST
UNIT II COMPANY LAW 2013 (amended on 03.05.18) 9
Major principles – Nature and types of companies, Formation, Memorandum and Articles of
Association, Prospectus, Power, duties and liabilities of Directors, winding up of companies, Corporate
Governance. Amendments of Companies Act, 2013
UNIT III INDUSTRIAL LAW 9
An Overview of Factories Act - Payment of Wages Act - Payment of Bonus Act - Industrial Disputes
Act.
UNIT IV CORPORATE TAX AND GST (amended on 03.05.18) 9
Corporate Tax planning, Income Tax, Goods and Services Tax – Introduction, Objective, Classification
and practical implications of GST
UNIT V CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT AND INTRODUCTION OF CYBER LAWS 9
Consumer Protection Act – Consumer rights, Procedures for Consumer greivances redressal, Types
of consumer Redressal Mechanism and Forums- Competition Act 2002 - Cyber crimes, IT Act 2000
and 2002, Cyber Laws, Introduction of IPR – Copy rights, Trade marks, Patent Act.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Legal insight will be established in the business practices according to the situation of changing
environment.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Kapoor, N. D.; Elements of Mercanlite Law, 30th edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, NewDelhi,2015
2. P. K. Goel, Business Law for Managers, Biztantatara Publishers, India, 2008.
3. Akhileshwar Pathack, Legal Aspects of Business, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. P. P. S. Gogna, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., India, 11th Edition, 2015
5. Maheshwari, S.N. and S.K. Maheshwari; A Manual of Business Law, 6th Edition, Himalaya
Publishing House, 2015.
6. V.S.Datey, GST Ready Reckoner, Taxmann Publishing, July 2017.
15
BA5105 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide an overview of theories and practices in organizational behavior in individual, group and
organizational level.
UNIT I FOCUS AND PURPOSE 5
Definition, need and importance of organizational behaviour – Nature and scope – Frame work –
Organizational behaviour models.
UNIT II INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR 12
Personality – types – Factors influencing personality – Theories – Learning – Types of learners – The
learning process – Learning theories – Organizational behaviour modification.
Misbehaviour – Types – Management Intervention. Emotions - Emotional Labour – Emotional
Intelligence – Theories. Attitudes – Characteristics – Components – Formation – Measurement-
Values. Perceptions – Importance – Factors influencing perception – Interpersonal perception-
Impression Management. Motivation – Importance – Types – Effects on work behavior.
UNIT III GROUP BEHAVIOUR 10
Organization structure – Formation – Groups in organizations – Influence – Group dynamics –
Emergence of informal leaders and working norms – Group decision making techniques – Team
building - Interpersonal relations – Communication – Control.
UNIT IV LEADERSHIP AND POWER 8
Meaning – Importance – Leadership styles – Theories – Leaders Vs Managers – Sources of power –
Power centers – Power and Politics.
UNIT V DYNAMICS OF ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 10
Organizational culture and climate – Factors affecting organizational climate – Importance. Job
satisfaction – Determinants – Measurements – Influence on behavior. Organizational change –
Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs Reaction change – the change process – Resistance
to change – Managing change. Stress – Work Stressors – Prevention and Management of stress –
Balancing work and Life. Organizational development – Characteristics – objectives –. Organizational
effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will have a better understanding of human behavior in organization. They will know the
framework for managing individual and group performance.
REFERENCES :
1. Stephen P. Robins, Organisational Behavior, PHI Learning / Pearson Education,
Edition 17, 2016 (Global edition)
2. Fred Luthans, Organisational Behavior, McGraw Hill, 12th Edition,
3. Mc Shane & Von Glinov, Organisational Behaviour, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
4. Nelson, Quick, Khandelwal. ORGB – An innovative approach to learning and teaching. Cengage,
2nd edition. 2012
5. Ivancevich, Konopaske & Maheson, Oranisational Behaviour & Management, 7th edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Udai Pareek, Understanding Organisational Behaviour, 3rd Edition, Oxford Higher Education, 2011.
7. Jerald Greenberg, Behaviour in Organization, PHI Learning. 10th edition. 2011
16
BA5106 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic definitions and rules for probability, conditional probability independence of events, Baye’s
theorem, and random variables, Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal
distributions.
UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9
Introduction to sampling distributions, sampling distribution of mean and proportion, application of
central limit theorem, sampling techniques. Estimation: Point and Interval estimates for population
parameters of large sample and small samples, determining the sample size.
UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9
Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means and proportions of large samples (z-
test), one sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), F-test for two sample
standard deviations. ANOVA one and two way.
UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9
Chi-square test for single sample standard deviation. Chi-square tests for independence of attributes
and goodness of fit. Sign test for paired data. Rank sum test. Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for goodness
of fit, comparing two populations. Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test. One sample run test.
UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9
Correlation – Coefficient of Determination – Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression
line – Method of Least Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making under subjective conditions.
REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Sanjay Rastogi Masood Husain Siddiqui, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2016.
2. Prem.S.Mann, Introductory Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India, 2016.
3. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, An Introduction to Statistical
Learning with Applications in R, Springer, 2016.
4. Aczel A.D. and Sounderpandian J., “Complete Business Statistics”, 6th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
5. Anderson D.R., Sweeney D.J. and Williams T.A., Statistics for business and economics, 11th
edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia, Singapore, 2012.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
7. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
17
BA5107 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn the quality philosophies and tools in the managerial perspective.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Quality – vision, mission and policy statements. Customer Focus – customer perception of quality,
Translating needs into requirements, customer retention. Dimensions of product and service quality.
Cost of quality.
UNIT II PRINCIPLES AND PHILOSOPHIES OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Overview of the contributions of Deming, Juran Crosby, Masaaki Imai, Feigenbaum, Ishikawa, Taguchi
techniques – introduction, loss function, parameter and tolerance design, signal to noise ratio.
Concepts of Quality circle, Japanese 5S principles and 8D methodology.
UNIT III STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL 9
Meaning and significance of statistical process control (SPC) – construction of control charts for
variables and attributed. Process capability – meaning, significance and measurement – Six sigma -
concepts of process capability. Reliability concepts – definitions, reliability in series and parallel,
product life characteristics curve.Total productive maintenance (TMP), Terotechnology. Business
process Improvement (BPI) – principles, applications, reengineering process, benefits and
limitations.
UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES FOR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Quality functions development (QFD) – Benefits, Voice of customer, information organization, House
of quality (HOQ), building a HOQ, QFD process. Failure mode effect analysis (FMEA) – requirements
of reliability, failure rate, FMEA stages, design, process and documentation. Seven Tools (old & new).
Bench marking and POKA YOKE.
UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS ORGANIZING AND IMPLEMENTATION 9
Introduction to IS/ISO 9004:2000 – quality management systems – guidelines for performance
improvements. Quality Audits. TQM culture, Leadership – quality council, employee involvement,
motivation, empowerment, recognition and reward - TQM framework, benefits, awareness and
obstacles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
To apply quality philosophies and tools to facilitate continuous improvement and ensure customer
delight.
REFERENCES :
1. Dale H.Besterfield, Carol Besterfield – Michna, Glen H. Besterfield, Mary Besterfield – Sacre,
Hermant – Urdhwareshe, Rashmi Urdhwareshe, Total Quality Management, Revised Third edition,
Pearson Education, 2011
2. Shridhara Bhat K, Total Quality Management – Text and Cases, Himalaya Publishing House, II
Edition 2010
3. Douglas C. Montgomory, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, Wiley Student Edition,
4th Edition, Wiley India Pvt Limited, 2008.
4. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, The Management and Control of Quality,Sixth Edition,
Thomson, 2005.
5. Poornima M.Charantimath, Total Quality Management, Pearson Education, Second Edition , 2011
6. Indian standard – quality management systems – Guidelines for performance improvement (Fifth
Revision), Bureau of Indian standards, New Delhi.
18
BA5111 SPOKEN AND WRITTEN COMMUNICATION L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES :
To familiarize learners with the mechanics of writing
To enable learners to write in English precisely and effectively.
To enable learners to speak fluently and flawlessly in all kinds of communicative contexts with all
nationalities.
UNIT I PERSONAL COMMUNICATION 12
Day-to-day conversation with family members, neighbours, relatives, friends on various topics, context
specific - Journal writing, mails/emails, SMS, greeting cards, situation based – accepting/declining
invitations, congratulating, consoling, conveying information, oral reports, extempore.
UNIT II EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS 12
Interview skills – HR and technical – Types of interview, preparation for interview, mock interview,
Group Discussion – Communication skills in Group Discussion, Structure of GD, GD process,
successful GD techniques. Time management and effective planning – identifying barriers to effective
time management, time management techniques, relationship between time management and stress
management.
UNIT III WORK PLACE COMMUNICATION 12
e-mails, minutes, reports of different kinds – annual report, status report, survey report, proposals,
memorandums, presentations, interviews, profile of institutions, speeches, responding to enquiries,
complaints, resumes, applications, summarizing, strategies for writing.
UNIT IV RESEARCH WRITING 12
Articles for publication (Journals), developing questionnaire, writing abstract, dissertation, qualities of
research writing, data (charts, tables) analysis, documentation.
UNIT V WRITING FOR MEDIA AND CREATIVE WRITING 12
Features for publication (Newspapers, magazines, newsletters, notice-board), case studies, short
stories, travelogues, writing for children, translation, techniques of writing.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Note: It is an activity based course. Student individually or as a group can organize event(s), present
term papers etc. This will be evaluated by the faculty member(s) handling the course and the
consolidated marks can be taken as the final mark.
No end semester examination is required for this course.
OUTCOMES :
Learners should be able to
Get into the habit of writing regularly.
Express themselves in different genres of writing from creative to critical to factual writing.
Take part in print and online media communication
Read quite widely to acquire a style of writing and
Identify their area of strengths and weaknesses in writing.
Speak confidently with any speakers of English, including native speakers.
Speak effortlessly in different contexts – informal and formal.
19
REFERENCES :
1. Raymond V Lesikar, John D Pettit, and Mary E Flatly, 2009. Lesikar’s Basic Business
Communication, 11th ed. Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. E.H. McGrath, S.J. 2012, Basic Managerial Skills for All. 9th ed. Prentice-Hall of India, New
Delhi.
Management books
Robin Sharma - The greatness guide
Steven Covey - 7 Habits of Effective people
Arindham Chaudhuri- Count your chickens before they hatch
Ramadurai - TCS Story
Blogs : Seth Godwin, Guy Kawasaki, Kiruba Shankar
Review : Harvard Business review
Reports : Deloitte Netsis
Magazines : Bloomberg Businessweek, Economist
3. Richard Denny, ‘Communication to Win; Kogan Page India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
BA5201 APPLIED OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn the concepts of operations research applied in business decision making.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR PROGRAMMING (LP) 9
Introduction to applications of operations research in functional areas of management. Linear
Programming-formulation, solution by graphical and simplex methods (Primal - Penalty, Two Phase),
Special cases. Dual simplex method. Principles of Duality. Sensitivity Analysis.
UNIT II LINEAR PROGRAMMING EXTENSIONS 9
Transportation Models (Minimising and Maximising Problems) – Balanced and unbalanced Problems –
Initial Basic feasible solution by N-W Corner Rule, Least cost and Vogel’s approximation methods.
Check for optimality. Solution by MODI / Stepping Stone method. Case of Degeneracy. Transhipment
Models. Assignment Models (Minimising and Maximising Problems) – Balanced and Unbalanced
Problems. Solution by Hungarian and Branch and Bound Algorithms. Travelling Salesman problem.
Crew Assignment Models.
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY 9
Solution to pure and mixed integer programming problem by Branch and Bound and cutting plane
algorithms. Game Theory-Two person Zero sum games-Saddle point, Dominance Rule, Convex Linear
Combination (Averages), methods of matrices, graphical and LP solutions.
UNIT IV INVENTORY MODELS, SIMULATION AND DECISION THEORY 9
Inventory Models – EOQ and EBQ Models (With and without shortages), Quantity Discount Models.
Decision making under risk – Decision trees – Decision making under uncertainty.
Monte-carlo simulation.
UNIT V QUEUING THEORY AND REPLACEMENT MODELS 9
Queuing Theory - single and Multi-channel models – infinite number of customers and infinite calling
source. Replacement Models-Individuals replacement Models (With and without time value of money)
– Group Replacement Models.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
20
OUTCOME:
To facilitate quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of certainty, risk
and uncertainty.
REFERENCES :
1. Paneerselvam R., Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, Fourth Print, 2008.
2. N. D Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management,Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2010.
3. Hamdy A Taha, Introduction to Operations Research, Prentice Hall India, Ninth Edition, 2010.
4. Anderson , Sweeney Williams Solutions Manual to Accompany AnIntroduction to Management
Science Quantitative Approaches To Decision, Cengage , 12th edition , 2012
5. G. Srinivasan, Operations Research – Principles and Applications, II edition , PHI, 2010.
6. Bernard W.Taylor ,Introduction to Management Science , 12 th edition, 2012
BA5202 BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To familarise the students to the principles of scientific methodology in business enquiry; to
develop analytical skills of business research; to develop the skills for scientific communications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Business Research – Definition and Significance – the research process – Types of Research –
Exploratory and causal Research – Theoretical and empirical Research – Cross –Sectional and time –
series Research – Research questions / Problems – Research objectives – Research hypotheses –
characteristics – Research in an evolutionary perspective – the role of theory in research.
UNIT II RESEARCH DESIGN AND MEASUREMENT 9
Research design – Definition – types of research design – exploratory and causal research design –
Descriptive and experimental design – different types of experimental design – Validity of findings –
internal and external validity – Variables in Research – Measurement and scaling – Different scales –
Construction of instrument – Validity and Reliability of instrument.
UNIT III DATA COLLECTION 9
Types of data – Primary Vs Secondary data – Methods of primary data collection – Survey Vs
Observation – Experiments – Construction of questionaire and instrument – Validation of questionaire
– Sampling plan – Sample size – determinants optimal sample size – sampling techniques –
Probability Vs Non–probability sampling methods.
UNIT IV DATA PREPARATION AND ANALYSIS 9
Data Preparation – editing – Coding –Data entry – Validity of data – Qualitative Vs Quantitative data
analyses – Bivariate and Multivariate statistical techniques – Factor analysis – Discriminant analysis –
cluster analysis – multiple regression and correlation – multidimensional scaling – Conjoint Analysis -
Application of statistical software for data analysis.
UNIT V REPORT DESIGN, WRITING AND ETHICS IN BUSINESS RESEARCH 9
Research report – Different types – Contents of report – need of executive summary – chapterization –
contents of chapter – report writing – the role of audience – readability – comprehension – tone – final
proof – report format – title of the report – ethics in research – ethical behaviour of research –
subjectivity and objectivity in research.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
21
OUTCOME:
Students would become acquainted with the scientific methodology in business domain. They
would also become analytically skillful. They would become familiar with the nuances of scientific
communications.
REFERENCES :
1. Donald R. Cooper, Pamela S. Schindler and J K Sharma, Business Research methods,
11th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Alan Bryman and Emma Bell, Business Research methods, 3rd Edition, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi, 2011.
3. Uma Sekaran and Roger Bougie, Research methods for Business, 5th Edition, Wiley India, New
Delhi, 2012.
4. William G Zikmund, Barry J Babin, Jon C.Carr, Atanu Adhikari,Mitch Griffin, Business Research
methods, A South Asian Perspective, 8th Edition, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2012.
BA5203 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
Facilitate student to
Understand the operational nuances of a Finance Manager
Comprehend the technique of making decisions related to finance function
UNIT I FOUNDATIONS OF FINANCE: 9
Introduction to finance- Financial Management – Nature, scope and functions of Finance, organization
of financial functions, objectives of Financial management, Major financial decisions – Time value of
money – features and valuation of shares and bonds – Concept of risk and return – single asset and
of a portfolio.
UNIT II INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9
Capital Budgeting: Principles and techniques - Nature of capital budgeting- Identifying relevant cash
flows - Evaluation Techniques: Payback, Accounting rate of return, Net Present Value, Internal Rate of
Return, Profitability Index - Comparison of DCF techniques Concept and measurement of cost of
capital - Specific cost and overall cost of capital.
UNIT III FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION: 9
Leverages - Operating and Financial leverage – measurement of leverages – degree of Operating &
Financial leverage – Combined leverage, EBIT – EPS Analysis- Indifference point.
Capital structure – Theories – Net Income Approach, Net Operating Income Approach, MM Approach
– Determinants of Capital structure.
Dividend decision- Issues in dividend decisions, Importance, Relevance & Irrelevance theories –
Walter‟s – Model, Gordon‟s model and MM model. – Factors determining dividend policy – Types of
dividend policies – forms of dividend
UNIT IV WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT: 9
Principles of working capital: Concepts, Needs, Determinants, issues and estimation of working capital
- Accounts Receivables Management and factoring - Inventory management - Cash management -
Working capital finance : Trade credit, Bank finance and Commercial paper.
22
UNIT V LONG TERM SOURCES OF FINANCE: 9
Indian capital and stock market, New issues market Long term finance: Shares, debentures and term
loans, lease, hire purchase, venture capital financing, Private Equity.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Possess the techniques of managing finance in an organization
REFERENCES :
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Problems and cases Tata McGraw Hill, 6th
edition, 2011.
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 10th edition, 2012.
3. Aswat Damodaran, Corporate Finance Theory and practice, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
4. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning, 11th Edition, 2012.
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 9th edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
6. G.Sudersena Reddy, Financial Management- Principles & Practices, Himalaya Publishing House,
2nd Edition, 2010
7. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011
8. Parasuraman.N.R, Financial Management, Cengage, 2014.
9. William R.Lasher, Financial Management, 7th Edition, Cengage, 2014 .
10. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management, 14th edition, Cengage, 2015.
BA5204 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing, training, performance,
compensation, human factors consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.
UNIT I PERSPECTIVES IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 5
Evolution of human resource management – The importance of the human factor – Challenges –
Inclusive growth and affirmative action -Role of human resource manager – Human resource policies –
Computer applications in human resource management – Human resource accounting and audit.
UNIT II THE CONCEPT OF BEST FIT EMPLOYEE 8
Importance of Human Resource Planning – Forecasting human resource requirement –matching
supply and demand - Internal and External sources. Recruitment - Selection – induction –
Socialization benefits.
UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 10
Types of training methods –purpose- benefits- resistance. Executive development programmes –
Common practices - Benefits – Self development – Knowledge management.
UNIT IV SUSTAINING EMPLOYEE INTEREST 12
Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Application of theories of motivation – Career
management – Development of mentor – Protégé relationships.
UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL PROCESS 10
Method of performance evaluation – Feedback – Industry practices. Promotion, Demotion, Transfer
and Separation – Implication of job change. The control process – Importance – Methods –
Requirement of effective control systems grievances – Causes – Implications – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
23
OUTCOME:
Students will gain knowledge and skills needed for success as a human resources professional
REFERENCES :
1. Dessler Human Resource Management, Pearson Education Limited, 14th Edition, 2015.
2. Decenzo and Robbins, Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, Wiley, 11th Edition,
2013.
3. Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI Learning.
2012
4. Bernadin , Human Resource Management ,Tata Mcgraw Hill ,8th edition 2012.
5. Wayne Cascio, Managing Human Resource, McGraw Hill, 2007.
6. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill 2012.
7. Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012
BA5205 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the importance of information in business
To know the technologies and methods used for effective decision making in an organization.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10
Data, Information, Intelligence, Information Technology, Information System, evolution, types based on
functions and hierarchy, System development methodologies, Functional Information Systems, DSS,
EIS, KMS, GIS, International Information System.
UNIT II SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 10
Case tools - System flow chart, Decision table, Data flow Diagram (DFD), Entity Relationship (ER),
Object Oriented Analysis and Design(OOAD), UML diagram.
UNIT III DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9
DBMS – HDBMS, NDBMS, RDBMS, OODBMS, Query Processing, SQL, Concurrency Management,
Data warehousing and Data Mart
UNIT IV SECURITY, CONTROL AND REPORTING 8
Security, Testing, Error detection, Controls, IS Vulnerability, Disaster Management, Computer Crimes,
Securing the Web, Intranets and Wireless Networks, Software Audit, Ethics in IT, User Interface and
reporting.
UNIT V NEW IT INITIATIVES 8
Role of information management in ERP, e-business, e-governance, Data Mining, Business
Intelligence, Pervasive Computing, Cloud computing, CMM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Gains knowledge on effective applications of information systems in business
REFERENCES :
1. Robert Schultheis and Mary Summer, Management Information Systems – The Managers View,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
24
2. Kenneth C. Laudon and Jane Price Laudon, Management Information Systems – Managing the
digital firm, PHI Learning / Pearson Education, PHI, Asia, 2012.
3. Rahul de, MIS in Business, Government and Society, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2012
4. Gordon Davis, Management Information System : Conceptual Foundations, Structure and
Development, Tata McGraw Hill, 21st Reprint 2008.
5. Haag, Cummings and Mc Cubbrey, Management Information Systems for the Information Age,
McGraw Hill, 2005. 9th edition, 2013.
6. Turban, McLean and Wetherbe, Information Technology for Management –Transforming
Organisations in the Digital Economy, John Wiley, 6th Edition, 2008.
7. Raymond McLeod and Jr. George P. Schell, Management Information Systems,Pearson
Education, 2007.
8. James O Brien, Management Information Systems – Managing Information Technology in the E-
business enterprise, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
9. Raplh Stair and George Reynolds, Information Systems, Cengage Learning, 10th Edition, 2012
10. Corey Schou and Dan Shoemaker, Information Assurance for the Enterprise – A Roadmap to
Information Security, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
11. Frederick Gallegor, Sandra Senft, Daniel P. Manson and Carol Gonzales,Information
Technology Control and Audit, Auerbach Publications, 4th Edition, 2013.
BA5206 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide a broad introduction to the field of operations management and explain the concepts,
strategies , tools and techniques for managing the transformation process that can lead to
competitive advantage.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9
Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy – Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain Management
UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9
Demand Forecasting – Need, Types, Objectives and Steps. Overview of Qualitative and Quantitative
methods. Capacity Planning – Long range, Types, Developing capacity alternatives. Overview of sales
and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II and ERP.
Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout – Principles, Types,
Planning tools and techniques.
UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9
Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues. Process –
Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – Objectives, Procedure. Method Study
and Motion Study. Work Measurement and Productivity – Measuring Productivity and Methods to
improve productivity.
UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9
Materials Management – Objectives, Planning, Budgeting and Control. Purchasing – Objectives,
Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis. Stores Management – Nature, Layout,
Classification and Coding. Inventory – Objectives, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.
25
UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers – nature,
importance; Priority rules and techniques, shop floor control; Flow shop scheduling – Johnson’s
Algorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Understanding of the strategic and operational decisions in managing manufacturing and service
organizations and appreciation of the role of operations management function in an organization.
REFERENCES :
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano, Operations and
Supply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western Cengage, 2002.
3. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 11th Edition, 2015.
4. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, 8th Edition, 2015.
5. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University,3rd Edition, 2013.
6. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2013.
7. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management, Himalaya
Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
8. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2015
9. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.
BA5207 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
Developing an understanding of ideas and nuances of modern marketing
Describe the process to formulate and manage the B2B marketing strategy including all key
components.
Explain the techniques to conduct market analysis practices including market segmentation and
targeting.
Compare and contrast different perspectives that characterize the study of consumer behavior.
Explain the role of IMC in the overall marketing program.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12
Marketing – Definitions - Conceptual frame work – Marketing environment : Internal and External -
Marketing interface with other functional areas – Production, Finance, Human Relations Management,
Information System. Marketing in global environment – Prospects and Challenges.
UNIT II MARKETING STRATEGY 12
Marketing strategy formulations – Key Drivers of Marketing Strategies - Strategies for Industrial
Marketing – Consumer Marketing –– Services marketing – Competitor analysis - Analysis of
consumer and industrial markets – Strategic Marketing Mix components.
UNIT III MARKETING MIX DECISIONS 12
Product planning and development – Product life cycle – New product Development and Management
– Market Segmentation – Targeting and Positioning – Channel Management – Advertising and sales
promotions – Pricing Objectives, Policies and methods.
26
UNIT IV BUYER BEHAVIOUR 12
Understanding industrial and individual buyer behavior - Influencing factors – Buyer Behaviour
Models – Online buyer behaviour - Building and measuring customer satisfaction – Customer
relationships management – Customer acquisition, Retaining, Defection.
UNIT V MARKETING RESEARCH & TRENDS IN MARKETING 12
Marketing Information System – Research Process – Concepts and applications : Product –
Advertising – Promotion – Consumer Behaviour – Retail research – Customer driven organizations -
Cause related marketing - Ethics in marketing –Online marketing trends.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
knowledge of analytical skills in solving marketing related problems
awareness of marketing management process
REFERENCES :
1. Philip Kotler and Kevin Lane Keller, Marketing Management, PHI 14th Edition, 2012
2. KS Chandrasekar, “Marketing management-Text and Cases”, Tata McGraw Hill, First edition,2010
3. Lamb, hair, Sharma, Mc Daniel– Marketing – An Innovative approach to learning and teaching-A
south Asian perspective, Cengage Learning –– 2012
4. Paul Baines, Chris Fill and Kelly Page, Marketing, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition,2011.
5. Micheal R.Czinkota & Masaaki Kotabe, Marketing Management, Cengage, 2000.
BA5211 DATA ANALYSIS AND BUSINESS MODELING L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE :
to have hands-on experience on decision modeling.
[Business models studied in theory to be practiced using Spreadsheet / Analysis Software]
Details of experiments
S.No. Exp. No. Duration
Name
1 1 Descriptive Statistics 4
2 2 Hypothesis - Parametric 4
3 3 Hypothesis – Non-parametric 4
4 4 Correlation & Regression 4
5 5 Forecasting 4
6 - Extended experiment – 1 4
7 6 Portfolio Selection 4
8 7 Risk Analysis & Sensitivity Analysis 4
9 8 Revenue Management 4
10 - Extended experiment – 2 4
11 9 Transportation & Assignment 4
12 10 Networking Models 4
13 11 Queuing Theory 4
14 12 Inventory Models 4
15 - Extended experiments – 3 4
Spreadsheet Software and
Data Analysis Tools
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
27
OUTCOME
Knowledge of spreadsheets and data analysis software for business modeling.
TEXTBOOKS
1. David M. Levine et al, “Statistics for Managers using MS Excel’ (6th Edition) Pearson, 2010
2. David R. Anderson, et al, ‘An Introduction to Management Sciences: Quantitative approaches to
Decision Making, (13th edition) South-Western College Pub, 2011.
3. Hansa Lysander Manohar , “ Data Analysis and Business Modelling using MS Excel “,PHI
Learning private Ltd, 2017.
4. William J. Stevenson, Ceyhun Ozgur, ‘Introduction to Management Science with Spreadsheet’,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
5. Wayne L. Winston, Microsoft Excel 2010: Data Analysis & Business Modeling, 3rd edition,
Microsoft Press, 2011.
6. Vikas Gupta, Comdex Business Accounting with Ms Excel, 2010 and Tally ERP 9.0 Course Kit,
Wiley India, 2012
7. Kiran Pandya and Smriti Bulsari, SPSS in simple steps, Dreamtech, 2011.
BA5301 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To familiarize the students to the basic concepts of international business management.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
International Business –Definition – Internationalizing business-Advantages – factors causing
globalization of business- international business environment – country attractiveness –Political,
economic and cultural environment – Protection Vs liberalization of global business environment.
UNIT II INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT 11
Promotion of global business – the role of GATT/WTO – multilateral trade negotiation and agreements
– VIII & IX, round discussions and agreements – Challenges for global business – global trade and
investment – theories of international trade and theories of international investment – Need for global
competitiveness – Regional trade block – Types – Advantages and disadvantages – RTBs across the
globe – brief history.
UNIT III INTERNATIONAL STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 11
Strategic compulsions-Standardization Vs Differentiation – Strategic options – Global portfolio
management- global entry strategy – different forms of international business – advantages -
organizational issues of international business – organizational structures – controlling of international
business – approaches to control – performance of global business- performance evaluation system.
UNIT IV PRODUCTION, MARKETING, FINANCIAL AND HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT OF GLOBAL BUSINESS 11
Global production –Location –scale of operations- cost of production – Make or Buy decisions – global
supply chain issues – Quality considerations- Globalization of markets, marketing strategy –
Challenges in product development , pricing, production and channel management- Investment
decisions – economic- Political risk – sources of fund- exchange –rate risk and management –
strategic orientation – selection of expatriate managers- Training and development – compensation.
28
UNIT V CONFLICT MANAGEMENT AND ETHICS IN INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MANAGEMENT 6
Disadvantages of international business – Conflict in international business- Sources and types of
conflict – Conflict resolutions – Negotiation – the role of international agencies –Ethical issues in
international business – Ethical decision-making.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students would be familiar with global business environment, global strategic management
practices and get acquainted with functional domain practices. They would be familiar with conflicts
situations and ethical issues in global business.
REFERENCES :
1. Charles W.I. Hill and Arun Kumar Jain, International Business, 6th edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
2. John D. Daniels and Lee H. Radebaugh, International Business, Pearson Education Asia, 12th
Edition,New Delhi, 2010
3. K. Aswathappa, International Business,6th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2015.
4. Michael R. Czinkota, Ilkka A. Ronkainen and Michael H. Moffet, International Business, 7th
Edition, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Rakesh Mohan Joshi, International Business, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2009.
6. Vyuptakesh Sharan, International Business, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education in South Asia, New
Delhi, 2011.
BA5302 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn the major initiatives taken by a company's top management on behalf of corporates,
involving resources and performance in external environments. It entails specifying
the organization's mission, vision and objectives, developing policies and plan to understand the
analysis and implementation of strategic management in strategic business units.
UNIT I STRATEGY AND PROCESS 9
Conceptual framework for strategic management, the Concept of Strategy and the Strategy Formation
Process – Stakeholders in business – Vision, Mission and Purpose – Business definition, Objectives
and Goals - Corporate Governance and Social responsibility-case study.
UNIT II COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE 9
External Environment - Porter’s Five Forces Model-Strategic Groups Competitive Changes during
Industry Evolution-Globalisation and Industry Structure - National Context and Competitive advantage
Resources- Capabilities and competencies–core competencies-Low cost and differentiation Generic
Building Blocks of Competitive Advantage- Distinctive Competencies-Resources and Capabilities
durability of competitive Advantage- Avoiding failures and sustaining competitive advantage-Case
study.
UNIT III STRATEGIES 10
The generic strategic alternatives – Stability, Expansion, Retrenchment and Combination strategies -
Business level strategy- Strategy in the Global Environment-Corporate Strategy-Vertical Integration-
Diversification and Strategic Alliances- Building and Restructuring the corporation- Strategic analysis
and choice - Environmental Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP) - Organizational Capability Profile -
Strategic Advantage Profile - Corporate Portfolio Analysis - SWOT Analysis - GAP Analysis - Mc
29
Kinsey's 7s Framework - GE 9 Cell Model - Distinctive competitiveness - Selection of matrix - Balance
Score Card-case study.
UNIT IV STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION & EVALUATION 9
The implementation process, Resource allocation, Designing organisational structure-Designing
Strategic Control Systems- Matching structure and control to strategy-Implementing Strategic change-
Politics-Power and Conflict-Techniques of strategic evaluation & control-case study.
UNIT V OTHER STRATEGIC ISSUES 8
Managing Technology and Innovation-Strategic issues for Non Profit organisations. New Business
Models and strategies for Internet Economy-case study
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
This Course will create knowledge and understanding of management concepts principles and
skills from a people, finance, marketing and organisational perspectives the development of
appropriate organisational policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder
interests information systems to learn from failure key tools and techniques for the analysis and
design of information systems, including their human and organisational as well as technical
aspects.
REFERENCES :
1. Hill. Strategic Management : An Integrated approach, 2009 Edition Wiley (2012).
2. John A.Parnell. Strategic Management, Theory and practice Biztantra (2012).
3. Azhar Kazmi, Strategic Management and Business Policy, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,2008
4. Adriau HAberberg and Alison Rieple, Strategic Management Theory & Application, Oxford
University Press, 2008.
5. Gupta, Gollakota and Srinivasan, Business Policy and Strategic Management – Concepts and
Application, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.
6. Dr.Dharma Bir Singh, Strategic Management & Business Policy, KoGent Learning Solutions Inc.,
Wiley, 2012.
7. John Pearce, Richard Robinson and Amitha Mittal, Strategic Management, McGraw Hill,
12th Edition, 2012
30
FUNCTIONAL SPECIALIZATIONS
BA5001 BRAND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the basic Principles of branding.
To understand the key issues in crafting and evaluating brand strategies
To improve the skills in delivering persuasive brand presentations.
To evaluate brand extension and its contribution to parent brand
To develop an understanding of brand equity and a range of performance related outcomes.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Basics Understanding of Brands – Definitions - Branding Concepts – Functions of Brand - Significance
of Brands – Different Types of Brands – Co branding – Store brands.
UNIT II BRAND STRATEGIES 10
Strategic Brand Management process – Building a strong brand – Brand positioning – Establishing
Brand values – Brand vision – Brand Elements – Branding for Global Markets – Competing with
foreign brands.
UNIT III BRAND COMMUNICATIONS 8
Brand image Building – Brand Loyalty programmes – Brand Promotion Methods – Role of Brand
ambassadors, celebrities – On line Brand Promotions.
UNIT IV BRAND EXTENSION 9
Brand Adoption Practices – Different type of brand extension – Factors influencing Decision for
extension – Re-branding and re-launching.
UNIT V BRAND PERFORMANCE 10
Measuring Brand Performance – Brand Equity Management - Global Branding strategies - Brand Audit
– Brand Equity Measurement – Brand Leverage -Role of Brand Managers– Branding challenges &
opportunities.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Have a solid understanding of the key ‘branding’ concepts, methods and tools used by
marketing practitioners.
Be able to more confidently engage in and contribute to ‘brand building’ projects,
developments, and discussions.
REFERENCES :
1. Kevin Lane Keller, Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring and Managing Brand Equity,
Pearson, 4th Edition, 2013.
2. Aker, David, Building Strong Brands, Simon and Schuster,1995
3. Kapferer J.N, Strategic Brand Management, 4th edition, Kogan Press, 2008
4. Moorthi YLR, Brand Management – I edition, Vikas Publishing House 2001.
31
BA5002 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the concepts of consumer behaviour and its application in purchase decisions.
To Analyse of the reasons and motives for consumer buying behaviour
To analyse the relationship between psychological social and cultural drivers behind consumer
behaviour and marketing
To identify the dynamics of human behaviour and the basic factors that influence the consumers
decision process.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concepts – Significance – Dimensions of Consumer Behavior – Application of knowledge of Consumer
Behaviour in marketing decisions.
UNIT II CONSUMER BEHAVIOR MODELS 9
Industrial and individual consumer behaviour models - Howard- Sheth, Engel – Kollat, Webstar and
wind Consumer Behaviour Models – Implications of the models on marketing decisions.
UNIT III INTERNAL INFLUENCES 9
Psychological Influences on consumer behavior – motivation – perception – personality Learning and
Attitude- Self Image and Life styles – Consumer expectation and satisfaction.
UNIT IV EXTERNAL INFLUENCES 9
Socio-Cultural, Cross Culture - Family group – Reference group – Communication - Influences on
Consumer behavior
UNIT V PURCHASE DECISION PROCESS 9
High and low involvement - Pre-purchase and post-purchase behavior – Online purchase decision
process – Diffusion of Innovation – Managing Dissonance - Emerging Issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Identify the major individual, social and cultural factors that affect consumers’ decision making
process;
Explain and analyze the major stages which consumers usually go through when making a
consumption-related decision
Understand the essence of how consumers make decisions and assess the relevant
implications for marketing practitioners
REFERENCES :
1. Leon G Schiffman, Joseph Wisemblit, S Ramesh Kumar , Consumer Behaviour, 11th edition,
Pearson, 2015
2. Barry J.Babin, Eric G.Harris, Ashutosh Mohan, Consumer Behavior: A South Asian Perspective,
Cengage Learning, Indian Edition, 6th Edition, 2016
3. P.C.Jain and Monika Bhatt., Consumer Behavior in Indian Context, S.Chand & Company, 2013.
4. Srabanti Mukherjee, Consumer behavior, Cengage Learning, 2012.
5. Assael, Consumer Behavior - A Strategic Approach, Biztranza, 2008
6. Dinesh kumar ,Consumer Behaviour, Oxford University Press,2015.
32
BA5003 CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the need and importance of maintaining a good customer relationship.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Definitions - Concepts and Context of relationship Management – Evolution - Transactional Vs
Relationship Approach – CRM as a strategic marketing tool – CRM significance to the stakeholders.
UNIT II UNDERSTANDING CUSTOMERS 9
Customer information Database – Customer Profile Analysis - Customer perception, Expectations
analysis – Customer behavior in relationship perspectives; individual and group customer’s - Customer
life time value – Selection of Profitable customer segments.
UNIT III CRM STRUCTURES 9
Elements of CRM – CRM Process – Strategies for Customer acquisition – Retention and Prevention of
defection – Models of CRM – CRM road map for business applications.
UNIT IV CRM PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION 9
Strategic CRM planning process – Implementation issues – CRM Tools- Analytical CRM – Operational
CRM – Call center management – Role of CRM Managers.
UNIT V TRENDS IN CRM 9
e- CRM Solutions – Data Warehousing – Data mining for CRM – an introduction to CRM software
packages.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
To use strategic customer acquisition and retention techniques in CRM.
REFERENCES :
1. G.Shainesh, Jagdish, N.Sheth, Customer Relationship Management A Strategic Prespective,
Macmillan 2010
2. Alok Kumar et al, Customer Relationship Management : Concepts and applications, Biztantra,
2008
3. H.Peeru Mohamed and A.Sahadevan, Customer Relation Management, Vikas Publishing 2005.
4. Jim Catheart, The Eight Competencies of Relationship selling, Macmillan India, 2005.
5. Assel, Consumer Behavior, Cengage, 6th Edition.
6. Kumar, Customer Relationship Management - A Database Approach, Wiley India, 2007.
7. Francis Buttle, Customer Relationship Management : Concepts & Tools, Elsevier, 2004.
8. Zikmund. Customer Relationship Management, Wiley 2012 ..
33
BA5004 INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
This course introduces students to the basic concepts of advertising and sales promotion and how
business organizations and other institutions carry out such activities.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISEMENT 9
Concept –definition-scope-Objectives-functions-principles of advertisement – Social, Economic and
Legal Implications of advertisements – setting advertisement objectives – Advertisement Agencies –
Selection and remuneration – Advertisement campaigns – case studies.
UNIT II ADVERTISEMENT MEDIA 9
Media plan – Type and choice criteria – Reach and frequency of advertisements – Cost of
advertisements - related to sales – Media strategy and scheduling. design and execution of
advertisements -Message development – Different types of advertisements – Layout – Design appeal
– Copy structure – Advertisement production – Print – Radio. T.V. and Web advertisements – Media
Research – Testing validity and Reliability of ads – Measuring impact of advertisements – case
studies.
UNIT III SALES PROMOTION 9
Scope and role of sale promotion – Definition – Objectives of sales promotion - sales promotion
techniques – Trade oriented and consumer oriented. Sales promotion – Requirement identification –
Designing of sales promotion campaign – Involvement of salesmen and dealers – Out sourcing sales
promotion national and international promotion strategies – Integrated promotion – Coordination within
the various promotion techniques – Online sales promotions- case studies.
UNIT IV PERSONAL SELLING 9
Introduction – Meaning – Functions- Personal selling process – Evaluation – Compensation –
Motivation- Territory Management – Sales Report Preparation and Presentation- Ethical Issues
UNIT V PUBLICITY AND PUBLIC RELATIONS 9
Introduction – Meaning – Objectives –Scope-Functions-integrating PR in to Promotional Mix-Marketing
Public Relation function- Process of Public Relations-advantages and disadvantages of PR-Measuring
the Effectiveness of PR- PR tools and techniques. Difference between Marketing, PR and Publicity --
Social publicity – Web Publicity and Social media – Publicity Campaigns
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Insight into the importance of advertising and sales promotion campaigns planning and objective
setting in relation to consumer decision making processes.
REFERENCES :
1. George E Belch and Michel A Belch, Advertising & Promotion, Tata McGraw Hill,
10th edition, 2014
2. Wells, Moriarty & Burnett, Advertising, Principles & Practice, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kenneth Clow. Donald Baack, Integrated Advertisements, Promotion and Marketing
communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2006.
4. Terence A. Shimp and J.Craig Andrews, Advertising Promotion and other aspects of Integrated
Marketing Communications, CENGAGE Learning, 9th edition, 2016
5. S. H. H. Kazmi and Satish K Batra, Advertising & Sales Promotion, Excel Books, New Delhi, 3rd
Revised edition edition, 2008.
6. Julian Cummings, Sales Promotion: How to Create, Implement and Integrate Campaigns that
Really Work, Kogan Page, London, Fifth Edition Edition ,2010.
7. Jaishri Jefhwaney, Advertising Management, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2013.
34
BA5005 RETAIL MARKETING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the concepts of effective retailing
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
An overview of Global Retailing – Challenges and opportunities – Retail trends in India – Socio
economic and technological Influences on retail management – Government of India policy
implications on retails.
UNIT II RETAIL FORMATS 9
Organized and unorganized formats – Different organized retail formats – Characteristics of each
format – Emerging trends in retail formats – MNC's role in organized retail formats.
UNIT III RETAILING DECISIONS 9
Choice of retail locations - internal and external atmospherics – Positioning of retail shops – Building
retail store Image - Retail service quality management – Retail Supply Chain Management – Retail
Pricing Decisions. Mercandising and category management – buying.
UNIT IV RETAIL SHOP MANAGEMENT 9
Visual Merchandise Management – Space Management – Retail Inventory Management – Retail
accounting and audits - Retail store brands – Retail advertising and promotions – Retail Management
Information Systems - Online retail – Emerging trends .
UNIT V RETAIL SHOPPER BEHAVIOUR 9
Understanding of Retail shopper behavior – Shopper Profile Analysis – Shopping Decision Process -
Factors influencing retail shopper behavior – Complaints Management - Retail sales force
Management – Challenges in Retailing in India.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
To manage the retail chains and understand the retail customer’s behavior
REFERENCES :
1. Michael Havy ,Baston, Aweitz and Ajay Pandit, Retail Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Sixth
Edition, 2007
2. J K Nayak, Prakash C.Dash, Retail Management, Cengage, 2017
3. Dr.Harjit Singh, Retail Management A Global Perspective, S.Chand Publishing, 3rd Edition,2014
4. Patrick M. Dunne and Robert F Lusch, Retailing, Cengage, 8th edition, 2013.
5. Chetan Bajaj, Rajnish Tow and Nidhi V. Srivatsava, Retail Management, Oxford University Press,
3rd Edition 2016.
6. Swapna Pradhan, Retail Management -Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2012.
7. Ramkrishnan and Y.R.Srinivasan, Indian Retailing Text and Cases, Oxford University Press,
2008
35
BA5006 SERVICES MARKETING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To understand the meaning of services and the significance of marketing the services.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Definition – Service Economy – Evolution and growth of service sector – Nature and Scope of
Services – Unique characteristics of services - Challenges and issues in Services Marketing.
UNIT II SERVICE MARKETING OPPORTUNITIES 9
Assessing service market potential - Classification of services – Expanded marketing mix – Service
marketing – Environment and trends – Service market segmentation, targeting and positioning.
UNIT III SERVICE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Service Life Cycle – New service development – Service Blue Printing – GAP model of service quality
– Measuring service quality – SERVQUAL – Service Quality function development.
UNIT IV SERVICE DELIVERY AND PROMOTION 9
Positioning of services – Designing service delivery System, Service Channel – Pricing of services,
methods – Service marketing triangle - Integrated Service marketing communication.
UNIT V SERVICE STRATEGIES 9
Service Marketing Strategies for health – Hospitality – Tourism – Financial – Logistics - Educational –
Entertainment & public utility Information technique Services
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Will be able to apply the concepts of services marketing in promoting services.
REFERENCES :
1. Chiristropher H.Lovelock and Jochen Wirtz, Services Marketing, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 7th
edition, 2011.
2. Hoffman, Marketing of Services, Cengage, 4th Edition, 2010.
3. Kenneth E Clow, et al, Services Marketing Operation Management and Strategy, Biztantra, 2nd
Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Valarie Zeithaml et al, Services Marketing, 5th International Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. Gronroos, Service Management and Marketing –Wiley India, 3rd Edition, 2009.
BA5007 SOCIAL MARKETING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To enhance Competiveness in Social Marketing by ethical values and social media in Marketing.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Social marketing - Definition - Scope and concept - Evolution of Social marketing - Need for Social
marketing - A comparative study between Commercial and Social marketing - Use of market research
- social change tools - Factors influencing Social marketing - Challenges and opportunities.
36
UNIT II SOCIAL MARKETING PROCESS AND PLANNING 9
Introduction - Environment Monitoring - Social Class and self-efficacy - social capital - Social ecology -
Advocacy - A global phenomenon - Social marketing Process - Stages - Ethical considerations.
Planning - Formative Research in Social marketing. Analysis - Problem - Environment - Resource.
Segmentation - Motives and benefits - Sheth’s and Frazier’s attitude - behavior segmentation - Stage
approach to segmentation - Selecting target audiences - Cross cultural targeting - cultural and
individual tailoring.
UNIT III SOCIAL MARKETING MIX 9
Social marketing mix - policy - product - place - price - promotion - people - partnership.
Rating & Reviews - Virtual world - Using media in social marketing - Importance - effectiveness of
mass media in social marketing - Practical model for media use in social marketing - Advertisement -
Publicity - Edutainment - Civic or Public - Choosing media & methods.
Role of media in social marketing campaigns - planning and developing Social media campaigning –
Campaign vs Programme - Programme planning models – conceptual model Lawrence Green’s
PRECEDE-PROCEED model.
UNIT IV ETHICAL ISSUES AND CHALLENGES 9
Ethical principles - Codes of behaviour - Critics of social marketing - Critic of power imbalance in social
marketing - Criticism of unintended consequences - Competition in social marketing- Definition -
monitoring - countering competition - competition and principle of differential advantage - Internal
competition.
UNIT V TRENDS IN SOCIAL MARKETING 9
Future of Social marketing - setting priorities in social marketing - Repositioning strategies- Future of
Public sector – NGO – Private sector social marketing.
Social Media marketing - Importance - Big Brands & Small business - E mail marketing -Social Media
Tools –Marketing with Social network sites, blogging, micro blogging, podcasting with Podomatic
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Applying Ethical Principles in Social Marketing through advanced marketing medias
REFERENCES :
1. Rob Donovan & Nadine Henley. (2011). Principles and Practice of Social Marketing-an
international perspective. Cambridge University Press.
2. Kotler, P., Roberto, N., & Lee, N. (2008). Social Marketing – Influencing Behaviors for Good. (3rd
ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, Inc.
3. French, J., Blair-Stevens, C., McVey, D., & Merritt, R. Social Marketing and Public Health. Oxford,
UK: University Press 2010.
4. Hastings, G. Social Marketing: Why should the Devil Have All the Best Tunes, Routledge 2013
5. Social marketing in the 21st Century- Alan R. Andreasen- sage Publication, 2012
37
BA5008 BANKING FINANCIAL SERVICES MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it and manage the associated risks
Understand e-banking and the threats that go with it.
UNIT I OVERVIEW OF INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9
Overview of Indian Banking System, Functions of banks, key Acts governing the functioning of Indian
banking system – RBI Act 1934, Negotiable Instruments Act 1881, Banking Regulations Act 1948 –
Rights and obligations of a banker, Overview of Financial statement of banks – Balance sheet and
Income Statement.
UNIT II SOURCES AND APPLICATION OF BANK FUNDS 9
Capital adequacy, Deposits and non-deposit sources, Designing of deposit schemes and pricing of
deposit services, application of bank funds – Investments and Lending functions, Types of lending –
Fund based, non-fund based, asset based – Different types of loans and their features, Major
components of a typical loan policy document, Steps involved in Credit analysis, Credit delivery and
administration, Pricing of loans, Customer profitability analysis.
UNIT II CREDIT MONITORING AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9
Need for credit monitoring, Signals of borrowers‟ financial sickness, Financial distress prediction
models – Rehabilitation process, Risk management – Interest rate, liquidity, forex, credit, market,
operational and solvency risks – risk measurement process and mitigation, Basic understanding of
NPAs and ALM.
UNIT IV MERGERS, DIVERSIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 9
Mergers and Diversification of banks into securities market, underwriting, Mutual funds and Insurance
business, Risks associated therewith. Performance analysis of banks – background factors, ratio
analysis and CAMELS.
UNIT V HIGH TECH E-BANKING 9
Payment system in India – Paper based, e-payments – Electronic banking – advantages – Plastic
money, E-money – Forecasting of cash demand at ATMs – Security threats in e-banking and RBI‟s
initiatives.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Price various types of loans proposed by banks to various prospective borrowers with different
risk profiles and evaluate the performance of banks
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services,
Pearson, Delhi, 2012.
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
4. Madura, Financial Institutions & Markets, 10th edition, Cengage, 2016.
38
BA5009 CORPORATE FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
Student will acquire
Nuances involved in short term corporate financing
Good ethical practices
UNIT I INDUSTRIAL FINANCE 9
Indian Capital Market – Basic problem of Industrial Finance in India. Equity – Debenture financing –
Guidelines from SEBI, advantages and disadvantages and cost of various sources of Finance -
Finance from international sources, financing of exports – role of EXIM bank and commercial banks.–
Finance for rehabilitation of sick units.
UNIT II SHORT TERM-WORKING CAPITAL FINANCE 6
Estimating working capital requirements – Approach adopted by Commercial banks, Commercial
paper- Public deposits and inter corporate investments.
UNIT III ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 12
Appraisal of Risky Investments - certainty equivalent of cash flows and risk adjusted discount rate -
risk analysis in the context of DCF methods using Probability information - nature of cash flows -
Sensitivity analysis - Simulation and investment decision, Decision tree approach in investment
decisions.
UNIT IV FINANCING DECISION 10
Simulation and financing decision - cash inadequacy and cash insolvency - determining the probability
of cash insolvency- Financing decision in the Context of option pricing model and agency costs- Inter-
dependence of investment- financing and Dividend decisions.
UNIT V CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 8
Corporate Governance - SEBI Guidelines- Corporate Disasters and Ethics-Corporate Social
Responsibility- Stakeholders and Ethics- Ethics, Managers and Professionalism.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Good ethical corporate manager
REFERENCES :
1. Richard A.Brealey, Stewat C.Myers and Mohanthy, Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata
McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2011
2. I.M.Pandey, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt., Ltd., 12th Edition, 2012.
3. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Corporate Finance - A focused Approach, Cengage Learning, 2nd Edition,
2011.
4. M.Y Khan, Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th Edition, 2011
5. Smart, Megginson, and Gitman, Corporate Finance, 2nd Edition, 2011.
6. Krishnamurthy and Viswanathan, Advanced Corporate Finance, PHI Learning, 2011.
7. Website of SEBI
8. Besley, Brigham, Parasuraman, Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 2015
9. Michael C.Ehrhardt, Eugene F.Brigham, Corporate Finance – A focused approach, Cengage
Learning, 2011.
10. Madura, International Corporate Finance, 10th edition, Cengage Learning, 2014.
39
BA5010 DERIVATIVES MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
To understand the nuances involved in derivatives and to understand the basic operational
mechanisms in derivatives.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Derivatives – Definition – Types – Forward Contracts – Futures Contracts – Options – Swaps –
Differences between Cash and Future Markets – Types of Traders – OTC and Exchange Traded
Securities – Types of Settlement – Uses and Advantages of Derivatives – Risks in Derivatives.
UNIT II FUTURES CONTRACT 9
Specifications of Futures Contract - Margin Requirements – Marking to Market – Hedging uses Futures
– Types of Futures Contracts – Securities, Stock Index Futures, Currencies and Commodities –
Delivery Options – Relationship between Future Prices, Forward Prices and Spot Prices.
UNIT III OPTIONS 9
Definition – Exchange Traded Options, OTC Options – Specifications of Options – Call and Put
Options – American and European Options – Intrinsic Value and Time Value of Options – Option
payoff, options on Securities, Stock Indices, Currencies and Futures – Options pricing models –
Differences between future and Option contracts.
UNIT IV SWAPS 9
Definition of SWAP – Interest Rate SWAP – Currency SWAP – Role of Financial Intermediary –
Warehousing – Valuation of Interest rate SWAPs and Currency SWAPs Bonds and FRNs – Credit
Risk.
UNIT V DERIVATIVES IN INDIA 9
Evolution of Derivatives Market in India – Regulations - Framework – Exchange Trading in Derivatives
– Commodity Futures – Contract Terminology and Specifications for Stock Options and Index Options
in NSE – Contract Terminology and specifications for stock futures and Index futures in NSE –
Contract Terminology and Specifications for Interest Rate Derivatives.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
This course aims at providing an in-depth understanding of financial derivatives in terms of
concepts, structure, instruments and trading strategies for profit and risk management.
REFERENCES :
1. David Dubofsky – ‘Option and Financial Futures – Valuation and Uses, McGraw Hill International
Edition.
2. Don M. Chance, Robert Brooks, An Introduction to Derivatives and Risk Management, 9th edition,
Cengage, 2015.
3. John. C. Hull, Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities’, PHI Learning, 9th Edition, 2012
4. Keith Redhead, ‘Financial Derivatives – An Introduction to Futures, Forwards, Options and
SWAPs’,– PHI Learning, 2011.
5. S. L. Gupta, Financial Derivatives- Theory, Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
6. Stulz, Risk Management and Derivatives, Cengage, 2nd Edition, 2011.
7. Varma, Derivatives and Risk Management, 2nd Edition, 2011.
8. Website of NSE, BSE.
40
BA5011 MERCHANT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To enable student
Understand the modes of issuing securities
Acquire financial evaluation technique of leasing and hire purchase
UNIT I MERCHANT BANKING 5
Introduction – An Over view of Indian Financial System – Merchant Banking in India – Recent
Developments and Challenges ahead – merchant banking services offered by banks – NBFC’S
offering merchant banking – Banking system – types of banks – payment banking -Legal and
Regulatory Framework – Relevant Provisions of Companies Act- SERA- SEBI guidelines- FEMA, etc. -
Relation with Stock Exchanges and OTCEI.
UNIT II ISSUE MANAGEMENT 12
Role of Merchant Banker in Appraisal of Projects, Designing Capital Structure and Instruments – Issue
Pricing – Book Building – Preparation of Prospectus Selection of Bankers, Advertising Consultants,
etc. - Role of Registrars –Bankers to the Issue, Underwriters, and Brokers. – Offer for Sale – Green
Shoe Option – E-IPO, Private Placement – Bought out Deals – Placement with FIs, MFs, FIIs, etc. Off
- Shore Issues. – Issue Marketing – Advertising Strategies – NRI Marketing – Post Issue Activities.
UNIT III OTHER FEE BASED SERVICES 10
Mergers and Acquisitions – Portfolio Management Services – Credit Syndication – Credit Rating –
Mutual Funds - Business Valuation.
UNIT IV FUND BASED FINANCIAL SERVICES 10
Leasing and Hire Purchasing – Basics of Leasing and Hire purchasing – Financial Evaluation.
UNIT V OTHER FUND BASED FINANCIAL SERVICES 8
Consumer Credit – Credit Cards – Real Estate Financing – Bills Discounting – factoring and Forfeiting
– Venture Capital - venture debt funds – start up financing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Good knowledge on merchant banking activities
REFERENCES :
1. M.Y.Khan, Financial Services, Tata McGraw-Hill, 12th Edition, 2012
2. Nalini Prava Tripathy, Financial Services, PHI Learning, 2011.
3. Machiraju, Indian Financial System, Vikas Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2010.
4. J.C.Verma, A Manual of Merchant Banking, Bharath Publishing House, New Delhi,
5. Varshney P.N. & Mittal D.K., Indian Financial System, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
6. Sasidharan, Financial Services and System, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2011.
7. Website of SEBI
8. Madura, Financial Institutions & Markets, 10th edition, Cengage, 2016.
41
BA5012 SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
Enables student to
Understand the nuances of stock market operations.
Understand the techniques involved in deciding upon purchase or sale of securities.
UNIT I INVESTMENT SETTING 8
Financial and economic meaning of Investment – Characteristics and objectives of Investment – Types
of Investment – Investment alternatives – Choice and Evaluation – Risk and return concepts.
UNIT II SECURITIES MARKETS 10
Financial Market - Segments – Types - - Participants in financial Market – Regulatory
Environment, Primary Market – Methods of floating new issues, Book building – Role of primary
market – Regulation of primary market, Stock exchanges in India – BSE, OTCEI , NSE, ISE, and
Regulations of stock exchanges – Trading system in stock exchanges –SEBI.
UNIT III FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS 9
Economic Analysis – Economic forecasting and stock Investment Decisions – Forecasting techniques.
Industry Analysis : Industry classification, Industry life cycle – Company Analysis Measuring Earnings
– Forecasting Earnings – Applied Valuation Techniques – Graham and Dodds investor ratios.
UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9
Fundamental Analysis Vs Technical Analysis – Charting methods – Market Indicators. Trend – Trend
reversals – Patterns - Moving Average – Exponential moving Average – Oscillators – Market Indicators
– Efficient Market theory.
UNIT V PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT 9
Portfolio analysis – Portfolio Selection –Capital Asset Pricing model – Portfolio Revision Portfolio
Evaluation – Mutual Funds.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Become a good investment analyst
REFERENCES :
1. Donald E.Fischer & Ronald J.Jordan, Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, PHI Learning.,
New Delhi, 8th edition, 2011.
2. Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Reilly & Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, Cengage, 10th edition, 2016.
4. S. Kevin , Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management , PHI Learning , 2012.
42
BA5013 STRATEGIC INVESTMENT AND FINANCING DECISIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
Enable students to acquire techniques of evaluating strategic investment decisions understand
the causes of prediction modes of financial distress.
UNIT I INVESTMENT DECISIONS 9
Project Investment Management Vs Project Management – Introduction to profitable projects –
evaluation of Investment opportunities – Investment decisions under conditions of uncertainty – Risk
analysis in Investment decision – Types of investments and disinvestments.
UNIT II CRITICAL ANALYSIS OF APPRAISAL TECHNIQUES 10
Significance of Information and data bank in project selections – Investment decisions under capital
constraints – capital rationing, Portfolio – Portfolio risk and diversified projects.
UNIT III STRATEGIC ANALYSIS OF SELECTED INVESTMENT DECISIONS 10
Lease financing – Lease Vs Buy decision – Hire Purchase and installment decision – Hire Purchase
Vs Lease Decision – Mergers and acquisition – Cash Vs Equity for mergers.
UNIT IV FINANCING DECISIONS 8
Capital Structure – Capital structure theories – Capital structure Planning in Practice.
UNIT V FINANCIAL DISTRESS 8
Consequences, Issues, Bankruptcy, Settlements, reorganization and Liquidation in bankruptcy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Possess good knowledge in techniques for making strategic investment decision and tackling
financial distress
REFERENCES:
1. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2012.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning, Analysis, Financing Implementation and Review, TMH,
New Delhi, 2011.
3. Bodie, Kane, Marcus: Investment, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
4. Brigham E. F & Houston J.F. Financial Management, Thomson Publications, 9 th edition, 2010.
5. M. Pandey, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, 10th edition, 2010.
6. M. Y. Khan and P. K. Jain, Financial Management Text and Problems, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co, 2011.
7. Website of IDBI Related to Project Finance.
BA5031 INTERNATIONAL TRADE FINANCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To enable student
• Understand export import finance and forex management
• Understand the documentation involved in international trade
43
UNIT I INTERNATIONAL TRADE 9
International Trade – Meaning and Benefits – Basis of International Trade –Foreign Trade and
Economic Growth – Balance of Trade – Balance of Payment – Current Trends in India – Barriers to
International Trade – WTO – Indian EXIM Policy.
UNIT II EXPORT AND IMPORT FINANCE 9
Special need for Finance in International Trade – INCO Terms (FOB, CIF, etc.,) – Payment Terms –
Letters of Credit – Pre Shipment and Post Shipment Finance – Fortfaiting – Deferred Payment Terms
– EXIM Bank – ECGC and its schemes Import Licensing – Financing methods for import of Capital
goods
UNIT III FOREX MANAGEMENT 9
Foreign Exchange Markets – Spot Prices and Forward Prices – Factors influencing Exchange rates –
The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade – Tools for hedging against Exchange rate variations –
Forward, Futures and Currency options – FEMA – Determination of Foreign Exchange rate and
Forecasting.
UNIT IV DOCUMENTATION IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE 9
Export Trade Documents: Financial Documents – Bill of Exchange- Type- Commercial Documents -
Proforma, Commercial, Consular, Customs, Legalized Invoice, Certificate of Origin Certificate Value,
Packing List, Weight Certificate, Certificate of Analysis and Quality, Certificate of Inspection, Health
certificate. Transport Documents -Bill of Lading, Airway Bill, Postal Receipt, Multimodal Transport
Document. Risk Covering Document: Insurance Policy, Insurance Cover Note. Official Document:
Export Declaration Forms, GR Form, PP Form, COD Form, Softer Forms, Export Certification, GSPS –
UPCDC Norms.
UNIT V EXPORT PROMOTION SCHEMES 9
Government Organizations Promoting Exports – Export Incentives : Duty Exemption – IT Concession
– Marketing Assistance – EPCG, DEPB – Advance License – Other efforts I Export Promotion – EPZ –
EQU – SEZ and Export House.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
• Possess good knowledge on international trade and the documentation involved in it.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Apte P.G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Jeff Madura, International Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES
1. Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, PHI Learning, 5th Edition, 2010.
2. Eun and Resnik, International Financial Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2011.
3. Website of Indian Government on EXIM policy
44
BA5014 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students. To impart basic
entrepreneurial skills and understandings to run a business efficiently and effectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURAL COMPETENCE 6
Entrepreneurship concept – Entrepreneurship as a Career – Entrepreneurial Personality -
Characteristics of Successful, Entrepreneur – Knowledge and Skills of Entrepreneur.
UNIT II ENTREPRENEURAL ENVIRONMENT 12
Business Environment - Role of Family and Society - Entrepreneurship Development Training and
Other Support Organisational Services - Central and State Government Industrial Policies and
Regulations - International Business.
UNIT III BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION 12
Sources of Product for Business - Prefeasibility Study - Criteria for Selection of Product - Ownership -
Capital - Budgeting Project Profile Preparation - Matching Entrepreneur with the Project - Feasibility
Report Preparation and Evaluation Criteria.
UNIT IV LAUNCHING OF SMALL BUSINESS 10
Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning - Market and Channel Selection -
Growth Strategies - Product Launching – Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups.
UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS 5
Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business Units-
Effective Management of small Business.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will gain knowledge and skills needed to run a business.
REFERENCES:
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Edition 9, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014
2. S.S.Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, (Revised
Edition) 2013.
3. Mathew Manimala, Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads, Paradigms & Praxis, Biztrantra,
2nd Edition ,2005
4. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 1996.
5. P.Saravanavel, Entrepreneurial Development, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai
6. 1997.
7. Arya Kumar. Entrepreneurship. Pearson, 2012.
8. Donald F Kuratko, T.V Rao. Entrepreneurship: A South Asian perspective. Cengage, 2012
45
BA5015 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR WELFARE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To explore contemporary knowledge and gain a conceptual understanding of industrial relations.
UNIT I INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 7
Concepts – Importance – Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector – Growth of Trade Unions
– Codes of conduct.
UNIT II INDUSTRIAL CONFLICTS 12
Disputes – Impact – Causes – Strikes – Prevention – Industrial Peace – Government Machinery –
Conciliation – Arbitration – Adjudication.
UNIT III LABOUR WELFARE 8
Concept – Objectives – Scope – Need – Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory Welfare Measures –
Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training Schemes.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL SAFETY 9
Causes of Accidents – Prevention – Safety Provisions – Industrial Health and Hygiene – Importance –
Problems – Occupational Hazards – Diseases – Psychological problems – Counseling – Statutory
Provisions.
UNIT V WELFARE OF SPECIAL CATEGORIES OF LABOUR 9
Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction Labour – Agricultural Labour –
Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO Labour - Social Assistance – Social Security – Implications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will know how to resolve industrial relations and human relations problems and
promote welfare of industrial labour.
REFERENCES :
1. Mamoria C.B., Sathish Mamoria, Gankar, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial relations & Labour Laws. Tata
McGraw Hill. 2012.
3. Ratna Sen, Industrial Relations in India, Shifting Paradigms, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi,
2007.
4. C.S.Venkata Ratnam, Globalisation and Labour Management Relations, Response Books, 2007.
5. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour laws, Vikas, 2007.
6. P.N.Singh, Neeraj Kumar. Employee relations Management. Pearson. 2011.
7. P.R.N Sinha, Indu Bala Sinha, Seema Priyardarshini Shekhar. Industrial Relations, Trade Unions
and Labour Legislation. Pearson. 2004
46
BA5016 LABOUR LEGISLATIONS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To have a broad understanding of the legal principles governing the employment relationship at
individual and collective level.
To familarise the students to the practical problems inherent in the implementation of labour
statutes.
Contained in the following acts are to be studied.
Periods
1. The Factories Act, 1948 3
2. The Trade Unions Act, 1926 4
3. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936 3
4. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 2
5. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 5
6. The Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 2
7. The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 3
8. The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 3
9. The Employee’s Provident Fund & Misc. Act, 1952 3
10. The Employees State Insurance Act, 1948 4
11. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946 3
12. The Apprentices Act, 1961 2
13. The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 2
14. The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 2
15. Contract Labour Regulations and Abolition Act, 1970 2
16. The Child Labour Prevention and Regulation Act, 1986 2
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To appreciate the application of labour laws.
Legal Provision relating to
a) Wages
b) Working Conditions and Labour Welfare
c) Industrial Relations
d) Social Security
REFERENCES :
1. P.K. Padhi, Industrial Laws, PHI, 2008.
2. Kapoor N. D , Elements of Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand, 2008
3. Tax Mann, Labour Laws, 2008.
4. D. R. N. Sinha, Indu Balasinha & Semma Priyadarshini Shekar, Industrial Relation,Trade
unions and Labour Legislation, 2004.
5. Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial relations & Labour Laws.
Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
6. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour laws, Vikas, 2007.
7. Respective Bare Acts.
47
BA5017 MANAGERIAL BEHAVIOUR AND EFFECTIVENESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To examine managerial styles in terms of concern for production and concern for people. To
assess different systems of management and relate these systems to organisational
characteristics.
UNIT I DEFINING THE MANAGERIAL JOB 8
Descriptive Dimensions of Managerial Jobs – Methods – Model – Time Dimensions in Managerial Jobs
– Effective and Ineffective Job behaviour – Functional and level differences in Managerial Job
behaviour.
UNIT II DESIGNING THE MANAGERIAL JOB 12
Identifying Managerial Talent – Selection and Recruitment – Managerial Skills Development – Pay and
Rewards – Managerial Motivation – Effective Management Criteria – Performance Appraisal Measures
– Balanced Scorecard - Feedback – Career Management – Current Practices.
UNIT III THE CONCEPT OF MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS 7
Definition – The person, process, product approaches – Bridging the Gap – Measuring Managerial
Effectiveness – Current Industrial and Government practices in the Management of Managerial
Effectiveness- the Effective Manager as an Optimizer.
UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES IN MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS 8
Organisational Processes – Organisational Climate – Leader – Group Influences – Job Challenge –
Competition – Managerial Styles.
UNIT V DEVELOPING THE WINNING EDGE 10
Organisational and Managerial Efforts – Self Development – Negotiation Skills – Development of the
Competitive Spirit – Knowledge Management – Fostering Creativity and innovation.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will gain knowledge about appropriate style of managerial behaviour.
REFERENCES:
1. Peter Drucker, Management, Harper Row, 2006.
2. Milkovich and Newman, Compensation, McGraw-Hill International, 2013.
3. Blanchard and Thacker, Effective Training Systems, Strategies and Practices Pearson 2012.
4. Dubrin, Leadership, Research Findings, Practices & Skills, Biztantra, 2015.
5. Joe Tidd , John Bessant, Keith Pavitt , Managing Innovation ,Wiley 3rd edition,2006.
6. T.V.Rao,Appraising and Developing Managerial Performance, Excel Books,2002.
7. R.M.Omkar, Personality Development and Career Management, S.Chand 1stedition,2008.
8. Richard L.Daft, Leadership, Cengage, 1 st Indian Reprint 2008.
48
BA5018 ORGANISATIONAL THEORY, DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn how an organization can be designed and developed to deal with the challenges from
environment, technology, and its own processes.
UNIT I ORGANISATION & ITS ENVIRONMENT 8
Meaning of Organisation – Need for existence - Organisational Effectiveness – Creation of Value –
Measuring Organisational Effectiveness – External Resources Approach, Internal Systems Approach
and Technical approach - HR implications.
UNIT II ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN 15
Organizational Design – Determinants – Components – Types - Basic Challenges of design –
Differentiation, Integration, Centralization, Decentralization, Standardization, Mutual adjustment-
Mechanistic and Organic Structures- Technological and Environmental Impacts on Design-
Importance of Design – Success and Failures in design - Implications for Managers.
UNIT III ORGANISATIONAL CULTURE 6
Understanding Culture – Strong and Weak Cultures – Types of Cultures – Importance of Culture -
Creating and Sustaining Culture - Culture and Strategy - Implications for practicing Managers.
UNIT IV ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE 6
Meaning – Forces for Change - Resistance to Change – Types and forms of change – Evolutionary
and Revolutionary change – Change process -Organisation Development – HR functions and Strategic
Change Management - Implications for practicing Managers.
UNIT V ORGANISATION EVOLUTION AND SUSTENANCE 10
Organizational life cycle – Models of transformation – Models of Organizational Decision making –
Organizational Learning – Innovation, Intrapreneurship and Creativity-HR implications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will be able to analyze organizations more accurately and deeply by applying organization
theory.
REFERENCES:
1. Thomson G. Cummings and Christopher G. Worley, Organisational development and Change,
Cengage, 9th edition 2011
2. Robbins Organisation Theory; Structure Design & Applications, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
3. Bhupen Srivastava, Organisational Design and Development: Concepts application, Biztantra ,
2010.
4. Robert A Paton, James Mc Calman, Change Management, A guide to effective implementation,
Response Books, 2012.
5. Adrian Thorn Hill, Phil Lewis, Mike Mill more and Mark Saunders, Managing Change -A Human
Resource Strategy Approach, Wiley, 2010.
6. Gareth R.Jones, Organisational Theory, Design & Change, Pearson Education, 6th Edition 2011.
7. Richard L. Daft, Understanding theory & Design of Organisations, Cengage, Western, 10th Edition
2012.
49
BA5019 STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To help students understand the transformation in the role of HR functions from being a support
function to strategic function.
UNIT I HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT 10
Meaning – Strategic framework for HRM and HRD – Vision, Mission and Values – Importance –
Challenges to Organisations – HRD Functions - Roles of HRD Professionals - HRD Needs
Assessment - HRD practices – Measures of HRD performance – Links to HR, Strategy and Business
Goals – HRD Program Implementation and Evaluation – Recent trends – Strategic Capability , Bench
Marking and HRD Audit.
UNIT II E-HRM 6
e- Employee profile– e- selection and recruitment - Virtual learning and Orientation – e - training
and development – e- Performance management and Compensation design – Development and
Implementation of HRIS – Designing HR portals – Issues in employee privacy – Employee surveys
online.
UNIT III CROSS CULTURAL HRM 7
Domestic Vs International HRM - Cultural Dynamics - Culture Assessment - Cross Cultural Education
and Training Programs – Leadership and Strategic HR Issues in International Assignments - Current
challenges in Outsourcing, Cross border Mergers and Acquisitions - Repatriation etc - Building
Multicultural Organisation - International Compensation.
UNIT IV CAREER & COMPETENCY DEVELOPMENT 10
Career Concepts – Roles – Career stages – Career planning and Process – Career development
Models– Career Motivation and Enrichment –Managing Career plateaus- Designing Effective Career
Development Systems – Competencies and Career Management – Competency Mapping Models –
Equity and Competency based Compensation.
UNIT V EMPLOYEE COACHING & COUNSELING 12
Need for Coaching – Role of HR in coaching – Coaching and Performance – Skills for Effective
Coaching – Coaching Effectiveness– Need for Counseling – Role of HR in Counseling - Components
of Counseling Programs – Counseling Effectiveness – Employee Health and Welfare Programs – Work
Stress – Sources - Consequences – Stress Management Techniques.- Eastern and Western
Practices - Self Management and Emtional Intelligence.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will have a better understanding of the tools and techniques used by organizations to
meet current challenges.
REFERENCES :
1. Randy L. Desimone, Jon M. Werner – David M. Mathis, Human Resource Development,
Cengage Learning, Edition 6, 2012.
2. Paul Boselie. Strategic Human Resource Management. Tata McGraw Hill. 2012.
3. Jeffrey A Mello, Strategic Human Resource Management, Cengage, Southwestern 2007.
4. Robert L. Mathis and John H. Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage, 2007.
5. Monir Tayeb. International Human Resource Management. Oxford. 2007
6. Randall S Schuler and Susan E Jackson. Strategic Human Resource Management. Wiley
India. 2nd edition
7. McLeod. The Counsellor’s workbook. Tata McGraw Hill. 2011
50
BA5020 ADVANCED DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the various advanced databases used in the organization
To be aware of recent trends in database management.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
DBMS Models - Multimedia Databases, Parallel Databases, embedded, web, spatial, temporal
databases, Virtualization, Active Databases - Embedded databases - Web databases.
UNIT II DATABASE IMPLEMENTATION 9
Query Processing basics and optimization – Heuristic Optimization – Transactions Models –
Concurrency Control – Recovery – Security and Authorization – Storage – Indexing and Hashing –
ISAM – B-Trees – Kd Trees – X Trees – Dynamic Hashing.
UNIT III DISTRIBUTED DATABASES 9
Distributed Databases – Queries – Optimization Access Strategies – Distributed Transactions
Management – Concurrency Control – Reliability
UNIT IV OBJECT ORIENTED DATABASES 9
Object Oriented Concepts – Data Object Models –Object Oriented Databases – Issues in OODBMS -
Object Oriented Relational Databases – Object Definition Languages – Object Query Languages
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9
Data Mining – Data warehousing – Star, Snowflake, Fact Constellation; open source database
systems, Scripting Language, JDBC, ODBC
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Awareness of database models
Knowledge of database technologies
REFERENCES :
1. Peter Rob, Carlos Coronel, Database System and Design, Implementation and Management,8 th
edition, Cengage,
2. Ramez Elmasri and Shamkant B. Navethe,Fundamentals of Database Systems,7th edition ,
Pearson Education, 2015.
3. Jeffrey A Hoffer et al, Modern Database Management, 12th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016,
4. Abraham Silberchatz, Henry F. Korth and S.Sudarsan, Database System Concepts, 6th Edition,
McGraw-Hill, 2015.
5. Thomas M. Connolly and Carolyn E. Begg, Database Systems – A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management, 6 th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
6. Jefrey D. Ullman and Jenifer Widom, A First Course in Database Systems, 3 rd edition, Pearson
Education Asia, 2013.
7. Stefano Ceri and Giuseppe Pelagatti, Distributed Databases Principles and Systems, McGraw-Hill
International Editions, 2008.
8. Rajesh Narang, Object Oriented Interfaces and Databases, 1st edition ,Prentice Hall of India,
2004.
9. Mark L.Gillenson & el, Introduction to database management, 2 nd edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd,
2012
10. Charkrabarti, Advanced Database Management Systems, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2011
51
BA5021 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information
To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Spatial mining, Process mining, BI process- Private and Public
intelligence, Strategic assessment of implementing BI
UNIT II DATA WAREHOUSING 9
Data ware house – characteristics and view - OLTP and OLAP - Design and development of data
warehouse, Meta data models, Extract/ Transform / Load (ETL) design
UNIT III DATA MINING TOOLS, METHODS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Regression and correlation; Classification- Decision trees; clustering –Neural networks; Market basket
analysis- Association rules-Genetic algorithms and link analysis, Support Vector Machine, Ant Colony
Optimization
UNIT IV MODERN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ITS BUSINESS 9
OPPORTUNITIES
Business intelligence software, BI on web, Ethical and legal limits, Industrial espionage, modern
techniques of crypto analysis, managing and organizing for an effective BI Team.
UNIT V BI AND DATA MINING APPLICATIONS 9
Applications in various sectors – Retailing, CRM, Banking, Stock Pricing, Production, Crime,
Genetics, Medical, Pharmaceutical.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Big Data Management
Appreciate the techniques of knowledge discovery for business applications
REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann Publishers
3 rd edition, 2011
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence, 3rd
edition,Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 2005.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 3 nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 3 rd edition 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2014.
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, edition 2016
11. Galit Shmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India ,3rd edition, 2016
52
BA5022 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the business process of an enterprise
To grasp the activities of erp project management cycle
To understand the emerging trends in erp developments
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Overview of enterprise systems – Evolution - Risks and benefits - Fundamental technology - Issues to
be consider in planning design and implementation of cross functional integrated ERP systems.
UNIT II ERP SOLUTIONS AND FUNCTIONAL MODULES 10
Overview of ERP software solutions- Small, medium and large enterprise vendor solutions, BPR, and
best business practices - Business process Management, Functional modules.
UNIT III ERP IMPLEMENTATION 10
Planning Evaluation and selection of ERP systems - Implementation life cycle - ERP implementation,
Methodology and Frame work- Training – Data Migration. People Organization in implementation-
Consultants, Vendors and Employees.
UNIT IV POST IMPLEMENTATION 8
Maintenance of ERP- Organizational and Industrial impact; Success and Failure factors of ERP
Implementation.
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS ON ERP 9
Extended ERP systems and ERP add-ons -CRM, SCM, Business analytics- Future trends in ERP
systems-web enabled, Wireless technologies, cloud computing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Knowledge of ERP implementation cycle
Awareness of core and extended modules of ERP
REFERENCES :
1. Alexis Leon, ERP demystified, second Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.
2. Sinha P. Magal and Jeffery Word, Essentials of Business Process and Information System, Wiley
India, 2012
3. Jagan Nathan Vaman, ERP in Practice, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
4. Alexis Leon, Enterprise Resource Planning, third edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
5. Mahadeo Jaiswal and Ganesh Vanapalli, first edition,ERP Macmillan India, 2013
6. Vinod Kumar Grag and N.K. Venkitakrishnan, ERP- Concepts and Practice, second edition
Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
7. Summer, ERP, Pearson Education, 2016
53
BA5023 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various project management phases – Initiation, Planning, Tracking and
Closure
To study various project estimation methodologies, process models and risk management
To understand quality assurance in software development
UNIT I PROJECT MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW 8
What is Project and Project Management, Various phase of Project Management, Project
Stakeholders, Project Management Organisation (PMO);Roles and Responsibilities of Project
Manager. Brief introduction to various process models - Waterfall, RAD, V, Spiral, Incremental,
Prototyping, Agile– SCRUM, Extreme Programming (XP) and Kanban Project Initiation - Project
Charter; Statement of Work (SoW)
UNIT II PROJECT PLANNING 10
Project Planning Activities- Project Scope, Work Breakdown Structures (WBS), Software estimation
methodologies - COCOMO Model and Function Point
Project Scheduling Techniques – Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Gantt Chart
and Critical Path Method (CPM)
UNIT III PROJECT TRACKING 10
Monitoring and Control, Project Status Reporting; Project Metrics; Earned Value Analysis (EVA);
Project Communication Plan & Techniques; Steps for Process Improvement.
Risk Management: Concepts of Risks and Risk Management; Risk Management Activities; Effective
Risk Management; Risk Categories; Aids for Risk Identification; Potential Risk Treatments; Risk
Components and Drivers; Risk Prioritization.
UNIT IV PROJECT CLOSURE 8
Project Closure Analysis, Lesson Learnt
Software Quality Assurance-Software Quality Assurance Activities; Software Qualities; Software
Quality Standards – ISO Standards for Software Organization, Capability Maturity Model (CMM),
Comparison between ISO 9001 & SEI CMM, Other Standards.
UNIT V AGILE PROJECT MANAGEMENT WITH SCRUM 9
Agile Manifesto and Agile Principles
Agile Scrum - Purpose, Values, Scrum Framework, Scrum Roles – Product Owner, Scrum Master &
Team, Scrum Events – Sprint Planning, Daily Scrum/Stand-up Meeting, Sprint Review, Sprint
Retrospective, Scrum Artefacts – Product Backlog, Sprint Backlog, Increment and Definition of Done
(DoD), Agile estimation – Story Point
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, student should be able to:
Manage different phases of Software Project Management
Identify Risk and create risk mitigation plan
Apply software quality assurance for better quality software delivery
REFERENCES:
th
Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, Software Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 Edition
Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education
Ramesh, Gopalaswamy, "Managing Global Projects", Tata McGraw Hill
Ken Schwaber, Agile Project Management with Scrum, Microsoft Press
Mike Cohn, Agile Estimating & Planning, Pearson
Royce, “Software Project Management”, Pearson Education, 1999.
54
ONLINE RESOURCES:
http://agilemanifesto.org/
https://www.scrum.org/Resources/What-is-Scrum
http://www.scrumguides.org/scrum-guide.html#purpose
BA5024 E- BUSINESS MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the practices and technology to start an online business
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO e-BUSINESS 8
e-business,e-businessvse-commerce,Economicforces–advantages–myths–e-business models, design,
develop and manage-business, Web2.0andSocialNetworking,Mobile Commerce, S-commerce.
UNIT II TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE 10
Internet and World Wide Web, internet protocols- FTP, intranet and extranet, Cloud Service Models –
SAAS, PAAS, IAAS, Cloud Deployment Models – Public Cloud, Private Cloud, Hybrid Cloud, Auto-
Scaling in the Cloud, Internet information publishing technology- basics of web server hardware and
software
UNIT III BUSINESS APPLICATIONS 10
Consumer oriented e-business–e-tailing and models-Marketing on web–advertising, e-mail marketing,
affiliated programs - e-CRM; online services, Business oriented e-business, e- governance, EDI on the
internet, Delivery management system, Web Auctions, Virtual communities and Web portals–social
media marketing
UNIT IV e-BUSINESS PAYMENTS AND SECURITY 9
E-payments -Characteristics of payment of systems, protocols, e-cash, e-cheque, e-Wallets and
Micro payment systems- internet security–cryptography –security protocols–network security.
UNIT V LEGAL AND PRIVACY ISSUES 8
Legal, Ethics and privacy issues – Protection needs and methodology – consumer protection, cyber
laws, contracts and warranties, Taxation and encryption policies.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, student should be able to know how to build and manage an e-business
REFERENCES
1. Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J.Deitel, Kate Steinbuhler, e-business and e-commerce for managers,
Pearson, 2011.
2. EfraimTurban, Jae K.Lee, DavidKing,TingPengLiang,DeborrahTurban,ElectronicCommerce–
Amanagerial perspective, Pearson Education Asia,2010.
3. Kelly Goetsch - e Commerce in the Cloud, O Reilly Media,2014.
4. Parag Kulkarni, Sunita Jahirabad kao, Pradeep Chande, ebusiness, Oxford University Press, 2012.
5. Hentry Chan &el, E-Commerce–fundamentals and Applications, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
6. GaryP.Schneider,Electroniccommerce,Thomsoncoursetechnology,Fourthannualedition,2007
7. Bharat Bhasker, Electronic Commerce, Framework technologies and Applications, 3rd Edition. Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, 2009
8. Kamlesh K. Bajajand DebjaniNag, Ecommerce- the cutting edge of Business, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 7threprint, 2009.
55
9. Kalakotaet al, Frontiers ofElectronicCommerce,AddisonWesley,2004
10. Micheal Papaloelon and Peter Robert, e-business, Wiley India, 2006.
11. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing: Web-Based Applications That Change the Way You Work and
Collaborate Online, Que Publishing, 2009
BA5025 LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
To learn the need and importance of logistics in product flow.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Definition and Scope of Logistics – Functions & Objectives – Customer Value Chain – Service
Phases and attributes – Value added logistics services – Role of logistics in Competitive strategy –
Customer Service
UNIT II DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS AND OUTSOURCING LOGISTICS 9
Distribution channel structure - channel members, channel strategy, role of logistics and support in
distribution channels. Logistics requirements of channel members.
Logistics outsourcing – catalysts, benefits, value proposition. Third and fourth party logistics.
Selection of service provider.
UNIT III TRANSPORTATION AND PACKAGING 9
Transportation System – Evolution, Infrastructure and Networks. Freight Management – Vehicle
Routing – Containerization. Modal Characteristics, Inter-modal Operators and Transport Economies.
Packaging- Design considerations, Material and Cost. Packaging as Unitisation. Consumer and
Industrial Packaging.
UNIT IV PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND COSTS 9
Performance Measurement – Need, System, Levels and Dimensions. Internal and External
Performance Measurement. Logistics Audit. Total Logistics Cost – Concept, Accounting Methods.
Cost – Identification, Time Frame and Formatting.
UNIT V CURRENT TRENDS 9
Logistics Information Systems – Need, Characteristics and Design. E-Logistics – Structure and
Operation. Logistics Resource Management eLRM. Automatic Identification Technologies. Reverse
Logistics – Scope, design and as a competitive tool. Global Logistics – Operational and Strategic
Issues, ocean and air transportation. Strategic logistics planning. Green Logistics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
To enable an efficient method of moving products with optimization of time and cost.
REFERENCES :
1. Bowersox Donald J, Logistics Management – The Integrated Supply Chain Process, Tata
McGraw Hill,3rd edition 2016
2. Sople Vinod V, Logistics Management – The Supply Chain Imperative, Pearson Education,
3rd Edition, 2012.
3. Coyle et al., The Management of Business Logistics, Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, 2004.
4. Ailawadi C Sathish & Rakesh Singh, Logistics Management, PHI, 2011.
5. Bloomberg David J et al., Logistics, Prentice Hall India, 2005.
6. Ronald H. Ballou, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education, 5th
Edition, 2007.
56
BA5026 MATERIALS MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE :
Understand how material management should be considered for profitability
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Operating environment-aggregate planning-role, need, strategies, costs techniques, approaches-master
scheduling-manufacturing planning and control system-manufacturing resource planning-enterprise
resource planning-making the production plan
UNIT II MATERIALS PLANNING 9
Materials requirements planning-bill of materials-resource requirement planning-manufacturing resource
planning-capacity management-scheduling orders-production activity control-codification.
UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9
Policy Decisions–objectives-control -Retail Discounting Model, Newsvendor Model; EOQ and EBQ
models for uniform and variable demand With and without shortages -Quantity discount models.
Probabilistic inventory models.
UNIT IV PURCHASING MANAGEMENT 9
Establishing specifications-selecting suppliers-price determination-forward buying-mixed buying strategy-
price forecasting-buying seasonal commodities-purchasing under uncertainty-demand management-
price forecasting-purchasing under uncertainty-purchasing of capital equipment-international purchasing
UNIT V WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT 9
Warehousing functions – types - Stores management-stores systems and procedures-incoming
materials control-stores accounting and stock verification-Obsolete, surplus and scrap-value analysis-
material handling-transportation and traffic management -operational efficiency-productivity-cost
effectiveness-performance measurement
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Student gains knowledge on effective utilisation of materials in manufacturing and service
organisation
REFERENCES :
1. J.R.Tony Arnold, Stephen N. Chapman, Lloyd M. Clive, Materials Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. P. Gopalakrishnan, Purchasing and Materials Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012
3. A.K.Chitale and R.C.Gupta, Materials Management, Text and Cases, PHI Learning, 2nd Edition, 2006
4. A.K.Datla, Materials Management, Procedure, Text and Cases, PHI Learning, 2nd Edition, 2006
5. Ajay K Garg, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill , 2012
6. Ronald H. Ballou and Samir K. Srivastava, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management,
Pearson education, Fifth Edition
7. S. N. Chary, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill , 2012
57
BA5027 PRODUCT DESIGN L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
Understand the application of structured methods to develop a product.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Defining Product, Types of products. Product development – characteristics, duration and cost,
challenges. Development Process: Generic Process- Adapting to product types. Evaluation – decay
curve – cost expenditure curve.
UNIT II PRODUCT PLANNING 9
Product Planning Process – Steps. Opportunity identification – breakdown structure- product
development charter. Product Life Cycle. Technology Life Cycle - Understanding Customer Needs -
Disruptive Technologies- Product Specification - Concept Generation – Activity- Steps- Techniques.
UNIT III PRODUCT CONCEPT 9
Concept Selection – Importance, Methodology, concept Screening, Concept Scoring. Concept Testing.
Product Architecture- Definition, Modularity, implication, Establishment, Delayed Differentiation, Platform
Planning.
UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DESIGN AND DESIGN TOOLS 9
Industrial Design, Design for Manufacturing-Value Engineering-Ergonomics-Prototyping-Robust Design-
Design for X-failure rate curve-product use testing-Collaborative Product development- Product
development economics-scoring model- financial analysis.
UNIT V PATENTS 9
Defining Intellectual Property and Patents, Patent Searches and Application, Patent Ownership and
Transfer, Patent Infringement, New Developments and International Patent Law.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
Student gains knowledge on how a product is designed based on the needs of a customer.
REFERENCES :
1. Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D. Eppinger, Anita Goyal Product Design and Development, Tata McGraw –
Hill, Fourth Edition, reprint 2009.
2. Kenneth B.Kahn, New Product Planning, Sage, 2nd Edition 2011.
3. A.K. Chitale and R.C. Gupta, Product Design and Manufacturing, PHI, 2008.
4. Deborah E. Bouchoux, Intellectual Property Rights, Delmar, Cengage Learning, 2005.
5. Anil Mital. Anoop Desai, Anand Subramanian, Aashi Mital, Product Development, Elsevier, 2009.
6. Michael Grieves, Product Life Cycle Management, Tata McGraw Hill , 2006.
7. Kerber, Ronald L, Laseter, Timothy M., Strategic Product Creation, Tata-McGraw Hill, 2007.
58
BA5028 PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To learn the concepts of managing projects.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management – Definition –Goal - Lifecycles. Project Selection Methods. Project Portfolio Process
– Project Formulation. Project Manager – Roles- Responsibilities and Selection – Project Teams.
UNIT II PLANNING AND BUDGETING 9
The Planning Process – Work Break down Structure – Role of Multidisciplinary teams. Budget the
Project – Methods. Cost Estimating and Improvement. Budget uncertainty and risk management.
UNIT III SCHEDULING & RESOURCE ALLOCATION 9
PERT & CPM Networks - Crashing – Project Uncertainty and Risk Management – Simulation – Gantt
Charts – Expediting a project – Resource loading and leveling. Allocating scarce resources – Goldratt’s
Critical Chain.
UNIT IV CONTROL AND COMPLETION 9
The Plan-Monitor-Control cycle – Data Collecting and reporting – Project Control – Designing the control
system. Project Evaluation, Auditing and Termination.
UNIT V PROJECT ORGANISATION & CONFLICT MANAGEMENT 9
Formal Organisation Structure – Organisation Design – Types of project organizations. Conflict – Origin
& Consequences. Managing conflict – Team methods for resolving conflict.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
To apply project management principles in business situations to optimize resource utilization and
time optimisation.
REFERENCES :
1. Clifford Gray and Erik Larson, Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 6e,2014.
2. John M. Nicholas, Project Management for Business and Technology - Principles and Practice,
Second Edition, Pearson Education,5th Edition 2016
3. Gido and Clements, Successful Project Management, sixth Edition, Cengage, 2015.
4. Harvey Maylor, Project Management, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010
BA5029 SERVICES OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To help understand how service performance can be improved by studying services operations
management
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Services – Importance, role in economy, service sector – growth; Nature of services -Service
classification , Service Package, distinctive characteristics , open-systems view; Service Strategy –
Strategic service vision, competitive environment, generic strategies, winning customers; Role of
information technology; stages in service firm competitiveness; Internet strategies - Environmental
strategies.
59
UNIT II SERVICE DESIGN 9
New Service Development – Design elements – Service Blue-printing - process structure – generic
approaches –Value to customer; Retail design strategies – store size – Network configuration ;
Managing Service Experience –experience economy, key dimensions ; Vehicle Routing and Scheduling
UNIT III SERVICE QUALITY 9
Service Quality- Dimensions, Service Quality Gap Model; Measuring Service Quality –SERVQUAL -
Walk-through Audit; Quality service by design - Service Recovery - Service Guarantees; Service
Encounter – triad, creating service orientation, service profit chain; Front-office Back-office Interface –
service decoupling.
UNIT IV SERVICE FACILITY 9
Services capes – behaviour - environmental dimensions – framework; Facility design – nature,
objectives, process analysis – process flow diagram, process steps, simulation; Service facility layout;
Service Facility Location – considerations, facility location techniques – metropolitan metric, Euclidean,
centre of gravity, retail outlet location , location set covering problem
UNIT V MANAGING CAPACITY AND DEMAND 9
Managing Demand – strategies; Managing capacity – basic strategies, supply management tactics,
operations planning and control; Yield management; Inventory Management in Services– Retail
Discounting Model, Newsvendor Model; Managing Waiting Lines –Queuing systems, psychology of
waiting; Managing for growth- expansion strategies, franchising , globalization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
To design and operate a service business using the concepts, tools and techniques of service
operations management.
REFERENCES :
1. James A. Fitzsimmons, Service Management – Operations, Strategy, Information Technology, Tata
McGraw-Hill – 7th Edition 2013.
2. Richard Metters, Kathryn King-Metters, Madeleine Pullman, Steve Walton Successful Service
Operations Management, South-Western, Cengage Learning, 2nd Edition ,2012
3. Cengiz Haksever, Barry Render, Roberta S. Russell, Rebert G. Murdick, Service Management and
Operations, Pearson Education – Second Edition.
4. Robert Johnston, Graham Clark, Service Operations Management, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,
2005.
5. Bill Hollins and Sadie Shinkins, Managing Service Operations, Sage, 2006
6. J.Nevan Wright and Peter Race, The management of service operations, Cengage, 2nd Edition, 2004
BA5030 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To help understand the importance of and major decisions in supply chain management for
gaining competitive advantage.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Supply Chain – Fundamentals –Evolution- Role in Economy - Importance - Decision Phases - Supplier-
Manufacturer-Customer chain. - Enablers/ Drivers of Supply Chain Performance. Supply chain strategy -
Supply Chain Performance Measures.
60
UNIT II STRATEGIC SOURCING 9
Outsourcing – Make Vs buy - Identifying core processes - Market Vs Hierarchy - Make Vs buy continuum
-Sourcing strategy - Supplier Selection and Contract Negotiation. Creating a world class supply base-
Supplier Development - World Wide Sourcing.
UNIT III SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9
Distribution Network Design – Role - Factors Influencing Options, Value Addition – Distribution
Strategies - Models for Facility Location and Capacity allocation. Distribution Center Location Models.
Supply Chain Network optimization models. Impact of uncertainty on Network Design - Network Design
decisions using Decision trees.
UNIT IV PLANNING DEMAND, INVENTORY AND SUPPLY 9
Managing supply chain cycle inventory. Uncertainty in the supply chain –- Analyzing impact of supply
chain redesign on the inventory - Risk Pooling - Managing inventory for short life - cycle products -
multiple item -multiple location inventory management. Pricing and Revenue Management
UNIT V CURRENT TRENDS 9
Supply Chain Integration - Building partnership and trust in SC Value of Information: Bullwhip Effect -
Effective forecasting - Coordinating the supply chain. . SC Restructuring - SC Mapping -SC process
restructuring, Postpone the point of differentiation – IT in Supply Chain - Agile Supply Chains -Reverse
Supply chain. Agro Supply Chains.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to build and manage a competitive supply chain using strategies, models, techniques and
information technology.
REFERENCES :
1. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management – Text and Cases, Pearson Education, 2009.
2. Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and Operation, PHI
Learning / Pearson Education, Sixth edition, 2015.
3. Ballou Ronald H, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education,
5th Edition, 2007.
4. David Simchi-Levi, Philip Kaminsky, Edith Simchi-Levi, Designing and Managing the Supply Chain:
Concepts, Strategies, and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.
5. Altekar Rahul V, Supply Chain Management-Concept and Cases, PHI, 2005.
6. Shapiro Jeremy F, Modeling the Supply Chain, Cengage, Second Reprint , 2002.
7. Joel D. Wisner, G. Keong Leong, Keah-Choon Tan, Principles of Supply Chain Management- A
Balanced Approach, South-Western, Cengage, 2012.
61
SECTORAL SPECIALISATION IN LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
BA5051 SUPPLY CHAIN CONCEPTS AND PLANNING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To describe the various streams of the supply chain
• To describe the drivers of the supply chain
• To describe the concepts employed in the supply chain
• To explain about the strategies employed in the supply chain
UNIT- I CONCEPTS OF SUPPLY CHAIN 9
Service and manufacturing supply chain dynamics - Evolution of supply chain management -Multiple
views and flows - Service supply chains -Manufacturing supply chains - Measures of supply chain
performance - Differentiation-Bullwhip effect
UNIT - II SUPPLY CHAIN PROCESSES AND STRATEGIES 9
Integrated supply chains design - Customer relationship process - Order fulfilment process - Supplier
relationship process - Supply chain strategies - Strategic focus - Mass customization - Lean supply
chains - Outsourcing and offshoring - Virtual supply chains.
UNIT - III SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCE DRIVERS AND FORECASTING 9
Drivers of supply chain performance - Logistics drivers (Location, inventory and transportation) -Cross
functional drivers (Pricing, information and sourcing) – Forecasting introduction -Framework for a
forecast system - Choosing right forecasting technique - Judgment methods (Composite Forecasts,
Surveys, Delphi Method, Scenario Building, Technology Forecasting, Forecast by Analogy) - Causal
methods (Regression Analysis -Linear & Non-Linear Regression, Econometrics) - Time series analysis
(Autoregressive Moving Average (ARMA), Exponential Smoothing, Extrapolation, Linear Prediction,
Trend Estimation, Growth Curve, Box-Jenkins Approach) – CPFR
UNIT - IV SALES AND OPERATIONS PLANNING 9
Introduction to Sales and operations planning - Purpose of sales and operations plans -Decision
context - Sales and operations planning as a process - Overview of decision support tools
UNIT- V RESOURCE PLANNING AND SCHEDULING 9
Enterprise resource planning - Planning and control systems for manufacturers – Materials
requirement planning - Drum – Buffer – Rope system – Scheduling - Scheduling service and
manufacturing processes - Scheduling customer demand - Scheduling employees - Operations
scheduling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
Identify the concepts of supply chain.
Analyze supply chain dynamics and various issues of supply chain performance.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and Operation,
Pearson, 2010.
2. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education India, 2009
3. Supply Chain management, Chandrasekaran,N., Oxford University Publications, 2010
4. Supply Chain Management for The 21st Century by B S SAHAY. Macmillan Education, 2001
62
BA5052 SOURCING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES
To provide understanding of the framework.
To illustrate current practices in industries.
To provide knowledge on certain tools & techniques
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION TO PURCHASING AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 9
The Purchasing Process. Purchasing Policies and Procedures. Supply Management Integration for
Competitive Advantage, Purchasing and Supply Management Organization.
UNIT - II STRATEGIC SOURCING 9
Supply Management and Commodity Strategy Development, Supplier Evaluation and Selection
Supplier Quality Management Supplier Management and Development, Creating a World-Class
Supply Base, Worldwide Sourcing.
UNIT - III STRATEGIC SOURCING PROCESS 9
Strategic Cost Management, Purchasing and Supply Chain Analysis: Tools and Techniques,
Negotiation and Conflict Management Contract Management Purchasing Law and Ethics.
UNIT - IV SUPPLIER PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Performance Measurement and Evaluation: Strategies, tools and techniques for measuring and
managing supplier performance, Supplier performance evaluation, Purchasing services, Supply Chain
Information Systems and Electronic Sourcing.
UNIT - V FUTURE DIRECTIONS 9
Purchasing and Supply Strategy Trends Green Buying, Sustainability, material research, Lean supply
Chain Management
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To Understand basic functions and nuances.
To Understand the holistic dimensions of SCM & corporate perspectives.
Learn to acquire skills to become a sourcing professional.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, Robert .M. Monczka, Handfield, GIunipero Paterson,
Waters, 6th Edition, Cengage Publication
2. Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, . Benton, 3 rd Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
3. World Class Supply Chain Management, Burt, Dobler, Starling, 7th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Supply Chain Management For The 21st Century by B S SAHAY. Macmillan Education,2001
63
BA5053 SUPPLY CHAIN INVENTORY MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
This course provides you the basic concepts and advanced models in inventory management. This
course discusses issues related to inventory in a supply chain context. It also gives a multi-
dimensional view to approach a problem with case studies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9
Inventory in SCM, Cash to cash cycle time, measure of inventory in terms of days, Inventory turnover
ratio and its relationship with working capital, Review of models, Q-models and P-models Aggregation
of Inventory, Cycle stock concepts, Ordering multiple items in a single order to reduce cycle stock
UNIT II INVENTORY MODELS 9
Safety stock issues Safety stock with lead time and demand uncertainty (for Q-models), Short term
discounting & Forward Buying, Periodic review models with safety stock, Comparison of P and Q
systems
UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES 9
Single period models, Inventory management for fashion supply chains, Postponement strategies to
reduce inventory, Examples of Fashion supply chains: NFL Reebok, ZARA and Sport Obermeyor Risk
Pooling, Applications, Risk pooling in different forms-Substitution, Specialisation, Postponement and
Information pooling
UNIT IV INVENTORY OPTIMIZATION 9
Distribution resource planning techniques, Inventory and transportation integration decisions, Vendor
Managed Inventory, Product availability measures, Product fill rate, order fill rate, Cycle service level.
UNIT V LATEST TRENDS IN INVENTORY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9
Industry initiatives, Efficient consumer Response and Quick response ,CPFR and other industry
initiatives, Inventory reduction strategies, Managing inventory in Reverse Logistics and
Remanufacturing situations , Best practices in Inventory Management in a Supply Chain
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
At the end of this course, the students can confidently approach their supply chain inventory issues
and they can use different tools appropriately to solve the problems and enhance the performance of
their supply chains.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and Operation,
Pearson, 2010.
2. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education India, 2009
3. Supply chain management, Chandrasekaran,N., Oxford University Publications, 2010
4. Supply Chain Management For The 21st Century by B S SAHAY. Macmillan Education,2001
64
BA5054 SUPPLY CHAIN INFORMATION SYSTEM L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To explain the various technological aspects that are described in the different logistical
background
To explain the real time description updated technologies in the logistics sector and supply
chain industry
UNIT - I ELECTRONIC SCM, COMMUNICATION NETWORKS 9
Introduction e-SCM – e-SCM framework - Key success factors for e-SCM - Benefits of e-SCM-
Positioning information in Logistics - Strategic information linkage - Supply chain communication
networks - Role of communication networks in supply chains - Overview of telecommunication
networks –EDI - Data security in supply chain networks - Overview of internet able models
UNIT - II ENTERPRISE INFORMATION SYSTEMS 9
Overview of enterprise information systems - Information functionality and principles -Introduction
enterprise information systems -Classification of enterprise information systems- Information
architecture -Framework for managing supply chain information - Describe on popular enterprise
application packages -Benefits of enterprise information systems
UNIT - III SCM SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT, DEPLOYMENT AND MANAGEMENT 9
Stakeholders in supply chain information systems - Stakeholders in SCM - Stakeholders in supply
chain information systems - Information systems development- Logistics information systems design-
Defining enterprise architecture - Choosing appropriate system development methodologies - Adopting
relevant systems development model
UNIT - IV DEPLOYMENT AND MANAGEMENT 9
Information systems deployment - IT Operations and infrastructure management - Portfolio,
programme and project management - Management of risk - Management of value
UNIT - V INFORMATION INTEGRATION 9
Enterprise application integration and supply chain visibility - Enterprise application integration - Supply
chain visibility - Supply chain event management -Supply chain performance -Planning and design
methodology - Problem definition and planning - Data collection and analysis - Recommendations and
implementation -Decision support systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The students will be able to understand the various enterprise information system and its architecture
and benefits. Students can gain knowledge about various e-commerce models, e-SCM, benefits and
communication networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bowersox & Closs, Logistical Management, McGraw-Hill Companies, 1996.
2. R.H.Ballou, Business Logistics Management, Prentice-Hall, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Strauss,E-Marketing, 4/e, Pearson Education 2008
2. Chaffey, E- Business and E- Commerce Management, 3/e, Pearson Education 2008
3. Blanchard, Logistics Engineering & Management, 6/e, Pearson Education 2008
4. Statistics for Managers Using MS Excel, 4/e, Levine, Pearson Education 2007
5. Donald J. Bowersox and David J. Closs, Logistical Management - The Integrated Supply chain
65
BA5055 WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To help the students in explaining the significance of Warehousing.
• To provide timely customer service,
• Tokeep track of items so they can be found readily & correctly
• Tominimize the total physical effort
• To minimize the cost of moving goods in & out of stage.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION WAREHOUSING 9
Introduction Warehousing – Basic Warehousing Decisions – Warehouse Operations – Types of
Warehouses – Functions – Centralized & Decentralized – S rage Systems – Warehousing Cost
Analysis – Warehouse Layout – Characteristics if Ideal Warehouse
UNIT - II INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9
Inventory: Basic Concepts – Role in Supply Chain – Role in Competitive Strategy – Independent
Demand Systems – Dependent Demand Systems – Functions – Types _ Cost – Need for Inventory –
Just in Time
UNIT - III INVENTORY CONTROL 9
Inventory Control – ABC Inventory Control – Multi-Echelon Inventory Systems – Distribution
Requirement Planning – Bull Whip Effect – Using WMS for Managing Warehousing Operations
UNIT - IV MATERIALS HANDLING 9
Principles and Performance Measures Of Material Handling Systems – Fundamentals of Material
Handling – Various Types of Material Handling Equipments – Types of Conveyors – Refrigerated
Warehouses- Cold Chain- Agri SCM
UNIT - V MODERN WAREHOUSING METHODS 9
Modern Warehousing – Au mated S rage & Retrieval Systems & their Operations – Bar Coding
Technology & Applications in Logistics Industry – RFID Technology & Applications – Advantages of
RFID
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to get complete insight in to warehouse concepts,
various inventory control techniques and application of inventory management in supply chain.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Vinod.V.Sople, Logistics Management, Pearson Education, 2004.
2. Arnold, Introduction Materials Management, Pearson Education, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Frazelle, World Class Warehousing & Material Handling, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008
2. Satish K. Kapoor and PurvaKansal, Basics of Distribution Management - A Logistical Approach,
Prentice Hall, 2003
3. Satish K. Kapoor and PurvaKansal Marketing, Logistics - A Supply Chain Approach , Pearson
Education, 2003
66
BA5056 TRANSPORTATION AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To explore the fundamental concepts of transportation and distribution management
To gain knowledge in network planning, routing and scheduling and application of IT in
transportation and distribution management.
UNIT - I DISTRIBUTION 9
Role of Distribution in Supply chain, Distribution channels – Functions, resources, Operations in
Distribution, Designing Distribution network models - its features - advantages and disadvantages.
UNIT - II PLANNING 9
Distribution network planning, Distribution network decisions, Distribution requirement planning (DRP)
UNIT - III TRANSPORTATION 9
Role of Transportation in Logistics and Business, Principle and Participants-Scope and
relationshipwith other business functions, Modes of Transportation - Mode and Carrier selection,
Routing and scheduling.
UNIT - IV TRANSPORTATION 9
International transportation, Carrier, Freight and Fleet management, Transportation management
systems-Administration, Rate negotiation, Trends in Transportation.
UNIT - V INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) 9
Usage of IT applications -E commerce – ITMS, Communication systems-Automatic vehicle location
systems, Geographic information Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: The students will be able to:
Gain knowledge about the distribution requirements planning.
Predict the scope and relationship of transportation with other business functions
Make use of the advantages and disadvantages of the various models.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Raghuram and N. Rangaraj, Logistics and Supply chain Management – Leveraging Mathematical
and Analytical Models: Cases and Concepts, New Delhi: Macmillan, 2000.
2. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education India, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and Operation,
Pearson, 2010.
2. Michael B Stroh, Practical Guide to Transportation and Logistics, Logistics Network, 2006.
3. Alan Rushton, John Oxley, Handbook of Logistics & Distribution Management, Kogan Page
Publishers, 2000.
67
BA5057 REVERSE AND CONTRACT LOGISTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To prepare students successfully implement a contract logistics and closed supply chain in
Retail, FMCG and Automobile sectors.
To explain the concept and principle of contract logistics and closed supply chain
UNIT - I CONTRACT LOGISTICS 9
Third party logistics industry overview - A framework for strategic alliances - Evolution of contract
logistics - Types of third party logistics providers – Automobile, FMCG and Retail-Third party services
and integration
UNIT - II CLOSED LOOP SUPPLY CHAINS AND LOGISTICS 9
Introduction closed loop supply chains and logistics – Logistics and closed loop supply chain service -
Overview of return logistics and closed loop supply chain models – Introduction product returns -
Product Vs Parts returns - Strategic issues in closed loop supply chains
UNIT - III BUSINESS AND MARKET 9
Overview - Introduction life cycle management - Trends and opportunities – Auto Warranty
management, return process and benchmarks - Market overview - Reasons for using reverse logistics
- General characteristics - Consumer goods Depot repair and value added services - Operating
dynamics - Competitive evaluation - Secondary markets and final disposal.
UNIT - IV EMERGING TRENDS 9
Emerging trends in Retail, E-Commerce- FMCG and Automobile sectors- Systems and technology -
For consumer goods operations, High tech logistics system - Impact and value of advanced logistics
UNIT - V MANAGING PROCESSES 9
Managing processes - Step by step process - Use of third party service providers - Additional factors –
Contemporary issues – Make in India and its impact on Countries GDP and Economic Growth.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The students will be able to understand the basics of contract logistics, third party logistics industry
and third party logistics providers. And it helps to gain knowledge about Make in India concept and its
impact on the GDP growth
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases, Pearson Education India, 2009
2. John Manners-Bell, Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets, Kogan Page, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Coyle et.al, Management Of Transportation, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2011
2. D. F. Blumberg, Reverse Logistics & Closed Loop Supply Chain Processes, Taylor and
Francis, 2005
3. Hsin-I Hsiao, Wageningen, Logistics Outsourcing in the Food Processing Industry, Academic
Pub, 2009.
4. Surendra M. Gupta, Sustainability in Supply Chain Management Casebook: Applications in
SCM, McGraw Hill, 2013
68
BA5058 AIR CARGO MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the participants with a good knowledge of airfreight operations, services and
management that can support them in various business functions and roles such as operations,
customer service, account management and sales.
To create awareness about the Air Cargo management.
To provide general information or a framework on the setup of air cargo processes, for
business.
UNIT - I AIR PORTS AND SHIPMENT 9
Ground Handling Agencies - Air Craft - Advantage of Air shipment - Economics of Air Shipment -
Sensitive Cargo by Air shipment - Do's and Don'ts in Air Cargo Business
UNIT - II AIR CARGO 9
Air Cargo Console - Freighting of Air Cargo - Volume based Calculation of Freight - Weight based
Calculation of Freight - Import Documentation - Export Documentation
UNIT- III AIRWAY BILLS 9
Airway Bills - FIATA - IATA - History of IATA - Mission of IATA - Price setting by IATA -Licensing of
Agencies - Sub Leasing of Agencies - freight carriers by scheduled freight tonne kilometers flown
UNIT - IV CARGO VILLAGE 9
History of Dubai Cargo Village - Location of DCV - Equipment and Handling at DCV - Operations -
Advantage of Sea Air Cargo - Why Sea Air Cargo is Cheaper - Why Air freight from Dubai is Cheaper?
UNIT - V DG CARGO 9
DG Cargo by Air - Classification and labelling - Types of Labels according Cargo – Samples of Labels
- Packing and Transportation of DG Goods by Air
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The outcome of this course will provide the basics concepts of airports and aircrafts and various
participants in air cargo transportation. Students will come to know about roles of the customs and the
government in air transport.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yoon SeokChang,Air Cargo Management, CRC Press, 2015.
2. Xie Chun Xun Zhu, Air Cargo Management Introduction - Aviation Logistics, Management Series
(Chinese Edition), Southeast University Press, 2006.
3. Hampton Simon Taylor, Air transport logistics, CRC Press, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul, Air cargo distributions: a management analysis of its economic and marketing benefits,
Jackson and William Brackenridge (Gower Press), 1988.
2. Peter S. Smith, Air freight: operations, marketing and economics, Chu (Boston : Kluwer Academic
Publishers), 2004.
3. John Walter wood, Airports; some elements of designs and future development, Chu(Boston :
Kluwer Academic Publishers), 1981.
69
BA5059 CONTAINERIZATION AND ALLIED BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an overview of the various elements of containerization and allied businesses
To realize the potential of containerization and allied businesses
UNIT –I BASIC CONCEPT OF CONTAINERIZATION 9
Introduction to Liner Shipping industry - Unitization concept and methods - Malcolm Mclean and the
birth of containerization - Generations of container ships and their specification - Container types,
their specifications and cargoes carried in them.
UNIT –II FREIGHTING AND SIZE OF CONTAINER 9
Container shipping business - FCL and LCL sea freight products - Freighting of FCL and LCL cargo -
Slot utilization strategies - Estimation of optimum container fleet size - Multiport LCL consolidation
UNIT – III CHARACTERISTICS AND PHYSICAL OPERATIONS 9
Containerisation: Concept, Classification, Benefits and Constraints, Container terminal business-
World’s leading container terminals and location characteristics - container terminal infrastructure -
container terminal productivity and profitability-Inland container Depots(ICD)Roles and functions -
Container Freight Stations(CFS),Clearance at ICD, CONCOD,ICD's under CONCOD, Charting: Kinds
of Charter, Charter Party and Arbitration.
UNIT – IV CONTAINER TYPES AND BUSINESS 9
Container manufacturing trends - Container leasing business - Types of container leasing and their
terms - maintenance and repair of containers - tracking of container movements - Container
interchange.
UNIT – V MULTIMODAL TRANSPORT 9
Alternate uses of containers -marketing of used containers -carriage of shipper own containers -
multimodal transport options for containers -Insurance for containers -strategies for managing
container imbalance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will learn the practices and ways to promote containerization and allied businesses
The learners will have a complete idea about the different concepts, trends and strategies used for
containerization and allied businesses
REFERENCES:
1. Marc Levinson, The Box: How the Shipping Container Made the World Smaller and the World
Economy Bigger, Princeton University Press, 2008.
2. Dr. K. V. Hariharan, Containerisation, Multimodal Transport & Infrastructure Development In India,
Sixth Edition, Shroff Publishers and Distributors, 2015.
3. Lee, C.-Y., Meng, Q. (Eds.), Handbook of Ocean Container Transport Logistics Making Global
Supply Chains Effective, Springer, 2015
4. Coyle et.al, Management Of Transportation, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2011
70
BA5060 EXIM MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enlighten the students about the major functions in export and import processes.
To provide the expertise for solving issues related to requirements in EXIM management.
UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF IMPORT AND EXPORT 9
Role of Import and Export Trade in an Economy - Institutional Framework for Foreign trade in India
-Role of Director General of Foreign Trade and Commerce - Objectives of EXIM Policy - Global
trade flows - Contract of International Sale of Goods - INCOTERMS 2010
UNIT - II OVERVIEW OF EXPORT AND IMPORT 9
Marketing for Exports - Negotiation and finalization of Export contract - Export Documentation
Procedures - Cargo Insurance - Export Promotion Councils and incentive schemes- Role of
Logistics in Exports- Export Houses / Trading Houses
UNIT - III DOCUMENTATION FRAMEWORK 9
Import for industrial use / trading - Import Documentation and Customs clearance procedures -
Types of Imports - Import Licenses - Cargo Insurance - Role of Logistics in Import
UNIT - IV CREDIT AND PAYMENTS 9
Payment methods in Foreign Trade - Documentary Credit / Letter of Credit–LOU-UCP 600 with
respect to Shipping Documents and L/C Negotiation – Export / import financing strategies -
Managing payment risks.
UNIT - V CUSTOMS CLEARANCE AND AGENCIES 9
Roles of Service providers in EXIM transactions – Global Traders – Commodity Brokers - Custom
House Agents – Transport Operators – Freight Forwarders – Warehousing and 3PL service
providers – Liners /Ship Agencies – Container Freight Stations - Port – Inspection Agencies/
surveyors – Quarantine Agencies – Pest Control Agencies – Chamber of Commerce.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students would be aware about the formalities of export and import industry
The students will be able to comprehend the importance of exim management.
REFERENCES:
1. Justin Pauland Rajiv Aserkar, Export Import Management, Second Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2013.
2. UshaKiranRai, Export - Import and Logistics Management, Second Edition, PHI Learning,
2010.
3. Director General of Foreign Trade, Foreign Trade Policy and Handbook of Procedures, 2015
4. Coyle et.al, Management Of Transportation, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2011
BA5061 FUNDAMENTALS OF SHIPPING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the knowledge about fundamentals of shipping management
To equip the students with the knowledge of shipping, ship building and repair
71
UNIT – I INTERDICTION OF SHIPPING 9
Role of Shipping in International trade-Types of ships and cargoes carried by them - International
Organizations serving the shipping industry (IMO, BIMCO, ICS, IACS, IAPH)- Ship Registration
and Classification.
UNIT – II LINER SHIPPING OPERATIONS 9
Liner shipping business - Types of Liner services - Container shipping lines and their services -
Break bulk, Ro-Ro and project cargo services - Liner freight rates - Liner cargo documentation -
Liner agency functions
UNIT – III DRY BULK BUSINESS 9
Dry Bulk shipping business- World's leading dry bulkports and cargoes handled by them - Types of
Dry bulk ships and the Dry Bulk industry structure - Dry bulk market indices - Types of Chartering -
Port agency functions.
UNIT – IV TANKER OPERATIONS AND BUSINESS 9
Liquid Bulk shipping business - World's leading wet bulk ports and cargoes handled by them-
Types of tankers and gas carriers - Tanker freighting system (worldscale) -Factors affecting
Tanker markets-Marine pollution conventions.
UNIT – V SHIP BUILDING AND REPAIR 9
Service providers to shipping industry -Ship management companies -Ports, inland terminals and
Container Freight Stations- Ship building and repair yards -Financing the Shipping industry -
Marine insurance providers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students would be acquainted with the basics of shipping management
The students will learn the skills needed for shipping industry
REFERENCES:
1. Michael Robarts, Branch‟s Elements of Shipping, Ninth Edition, Routledge, 2014.
2. Peter Brodie, Commercial Shipping Handbook, Third Edition, Informa Law from Routledge,
2014.
3. Review of Maritime Transport, UNCTAD, 2014.
4. Coyle et.al, Management Of Transportation, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2011
BA5062 PORT AND TERMINAL MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To enlighten the students about the major functions in the port and terminal management
To expose the students on the trends in port and terminal management
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO PORT AND TERMINAL 9
Role of ports in international trade and transport - Economic impact of ports on the regional
economy - Multiplier effect - Location characteristics of ports - Different types of ports (natural,
manmade, river, estuary).
UNIT – II PORT OPERATIONS 9
Design features of facilities in ports for handling various cargoes - Organization structure in Ports -
Delivery of port services and the relationship between various departments - Marine Department –
Traffic Department – other departments.
72
UNIT – III PORT MARKETING AND SERVICES 9
Marketing of Port services - Pricing of Port services - Components of port tariff - Concept of
hinterland – Identifying the needs of ship owners and operators, ship agents, forwarders, truckers,
rail and barge operators - Concept of Total Logistics cost.
UNIT – IV PORT PERFORMANCE 9
Measurement of port performance - vessel turn round time, cargo volume, speed of cargo handling
- Information flow requirements of the port, statutory bodies and port users - Port community
computer systems and EDI applications.
UNIT – V PORT SECURITY AND ISSUES 9
Environmental issues connected with Ports & Terminals - Health and safety issues - Port security
issues - International Ships and Port facility security (ISPS) code - Role of national, regional and
local governments in owning / operating / managing ports.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students would be aware about skills pertaining to port and terminal management
The students should be able to understand the principles and applications for port and
terminal management
REFERENCES:
1. Maria G. Burns, Port Management and Operations, CRC Press, 2014.
2. Patrick Alderton, Port Management and Operations, Third Edition, Lloyd's Practical
Shipping Guides, 2008
3. H. Ligteringen, H. Velsink, Ports and Terminals, VSSD Publishers, 2012.
4. Coyle et.al, Management Of Transportation, 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2011
SECTORAL SPECIALISATION IN
INFRASTRUCTURE AND REAL ESTATE MANAGEMENT
BA5063 INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an exposure to the students on the concept and the principles of planning,
scheduling and control about infrastructure industry.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to infrastructure - Need and importance of infrastructure in India - Overview of power
sector - Overview of water supply and sanitation sector-Overview of road, rail, air and port
transportation sectors-Overview of telecommunication sector-Overview of rural and urban
infrastructure-Introduction to special economic zones-Organizations and players in infrastructure
field -Overview of infrastructure project finance.
UNIT II INFRASTRUCTURE PRIVATIZATION 9
Privatization of infrastructure in India - Benefits of privatization-Problems with privatization-
Challenges in privatization of water supply projects- Challenges in privatization of power sector
projects – Challenges in privatization of road transportation projects.
73
UNIT III RISKS IN INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9
Economic and demand risks, political risks, socio-economic risks and cultural risks in infrastructure
projects -Legal and contractual issues in infrastructure projects- Challenges in construction of
infrastructure projects.
UNIT IV RISK MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK 9
Planning to mitigate risk-Designing sustainable contracts-Introduction to fair process and
negotiation-Negotiation with multiple stakeholders - Sustainable development- Information
technology and systems for successful management.
UNIT V DESIGN & MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Innovative design and maintenance of infrastructure facilities- Modeling and life cycle analysis
techniques-Capacity building and improving Government’s role in implementation- Integrated
framework for successful planning and management.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
explain the basic concepts related to infrastructure and understand management.
explain the benefits and problems with infrastructure
identify the challenges and strategies for successful planning and implementation of
infrastructure.
apply the above concepts to various infrastructure domains.
REFERENCES
1. Raina V.K, “Construction Management Practice – The inside Story”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Limited, 2005
2. Leslie Feigenbaum, “Construction Scheduling With Primavera Project Planner”, Prentice Hall,
2002
3. W.Ronald Hudson, Ralph Haas, Waheed Uddin, “Infrastructure Management: Integrating,
Design, Construction, Maintenance, Rehabilitation and renovation”, McGraw Hill Publisher,
2013
4. Prasanna Chandra, “Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation Review”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 2006.
5. Joy P.K., “Total Project Management - The Indian Context”, Macmillan India Ltd., 1992
6. Report on Indian Urban Infrastructure and Services – The High Powered Expert Committee for
estimating the Investment Requirements for Urban Infrastructure Services, March 2011
7. Urban Water Development in India 2011 – Published and Distributed by India Infrastructure
Research
8. Manual on sewerage and sewage treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of urban affairs and
employment, Govt.of India, New Delhi, 2012
9. Manual of National Highway Authority of India, 1988
BA5064 CONTRACTS AND ARBITRATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To create awareness on contracts for construction industry, impart knowledge on tender
preparation, tendering process, laws on arbitration, arbitration procedure and laws on
dispute resolution in India.
74
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CONTRACTS IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9
Brief details of engineering contracts -Definition, types and essentials of contracts and clauses for
contracts - Preparation of tender documents and contract documents - Issues related to tendering
process- Awarding contract, e-tendering process - Time of performance - Provisions of contract
law - Breach of contract - Performance of contracts - Discharge of a contract- Indian contract Act
1872 - Extracts and variations in engineering contracts - Risk management in contracts.
UNIT II LAWS RELATED TO CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9
Labor and industrial laws - Payment of wages act, contract labor - Workmen’s compensation act -
Insurance, industrial dispute act- Role of RERA
UNIT III ARBITRATION OF ENGINEERING CONTRACTS 9
Background of Arbitration in India - Indian Arbitration Act 1937 - UNCITRAL model law -Forms of
arbitration - Arbitration agreement - Commencement of arbitral proceedings - Constitution of
arbitral tribunal - Institutional procedure of arbitration -Impartiality and independence of arbitrators
jurisdiction of arbitral tribunal - Interim measures - Enforcement of awards.
UNIT IV NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND CONCILIATION 9
Concepts and purpose - Statutory back ground ADR and mediation rules - Duty of mediator and
disclose facts - Power of court in mediation.
UNIT V ALTERNATE DISPUTE RESOLUTION 9
Structure of Indian Judicial - The arbitration and reconciliation ordinance 1996 -Dispute resolution
mechanism under the Indian judicial system - Litigation in Indian courts - Case studies.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
understand the laws on contracts for construction industry in india
apply knowledge of contracts in preparation of contract document and tendering process
apply appropriate methods to assess the critical factors in contracts leading to arbitration
and disputes between the parties
suggest suitable type of arbitration or dispute resolution for the situation of problem
REFERENCES
1. American Arbitration Association, “Construction industry arbitration rules andmediation
procedures”, 2007
2. Case study of Southern Railway Arbitration Caseswiki.iricen.gov.in/doku/lib/exe/fetch.php
3. Collex.K, “Managing Construction Contracts”, Reston publishing company, Virginia,1982
4. Eastern Book Company “Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996”, June 2008
5. International Federation of Consulting Engineers (FIDIC) documents, Geneva,2009
(http://www.fidic.org)
6. Gajaria. G.T., “ Laws relating to building and Engineer’s Contracts”, M.M. TripathiPvt Ltd.,
Mumbai, 1985
7. Horgon.M.O and Roulstion F.R., “Project Control of Engineering Contracts” E andFN, SPON,
Norway, 1988
8. Krishna Sharma, Momota Oinam and Angshuman Kaushik, “Development andPractice of
Arbitration in India- Has it evolved as an effective legal Institution”,CDDRL, Stanford, 103, Oct
2009
9. Park.W.B., “Construction Bidding for Projects”, John Wiley, Norway, 1978
10. Roshan Namavati, “Professional Practice”, Anuphai Publications, Lakhani BookDepot, 2013
11. Vasavada.B.J. “Engineering Contracts and Arbitration” , March 1996
75
BA5065 PROJECT MANAGEMENT FOR INFRASTRUCTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To impart projects types, time & resource management, resource optimization and new
trends in project management.
UNIT I PROJECT AND ITS PROCESS
Define project and process -Boundaries of project - Objectives and functions of project
management -Characteristics and types of projects -Organization structure / styles -Roles of
project management group - Project management office and its role - Project knowledge area -
Project integration- Process group interaction -project flow - Project life cycle- Influencing factors. -
Case study.
UNIT II PROJECT TIME MANAGEMENT
Project scope management - Work break down structure - Activity/Task – Events - Case study -
Project planning tools - Rolling wave planning - Gantt charts, Milestone chart, Program progress
chart- Creating milestone plan - Project network- Fulkerson’s rules - A-O-A and A-O-N networks -
Analyze project time- Critical path method (deterministic approach) - Activity oriented network
analysis- 80-20 rule- Case study - Type of time estimates & square network diagram - Project
updating and monitoring- Case study - Estimate time- Program Evaluation & Review Technique
(Probabilistic approach)- Event oriented network analysis- Optimistic, pessimistic and most likely
time - Degree of variability in average time - Probabilistic estimate - % utilization of resources.
UNIT III RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Types of Resource- Time, Men, Material, Machinery, Money, Space - Balancing of resource -
Resource smoothing technique- Time constraint - Resource leveling technique- Resource
constraint- Case study.
UNIT IV RESOURCE OPTIMIZATION
Types of cost – Direct, indirect and total cost - Variation of cost with time - Schedule compression
techniques- Crashing, fast tracking & Re-estimation- Crash timeand crash cost - Optimize project
cost for time and resource - CPM cost model - Life cycle assessment - Impacts and economical
assessment - Life cycle cost- Maintenance and operation -Life cycle forecasting – Concept and
applications.
UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AGILE Project management and Project Management using latest tools- Case study.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
explain the concept of projects, its process, objectives and functions of project
management
analyze and manage time in projects through gantt charts, cpm and pert techniques
balance resource requirements of projects so as to avoid idling of resources
update projects and determine revised schedule of activities and critical path, if any
crash projects to determine its optimum time-minimum cost relationships
REFERENCES
1. "A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide) – Fourth Edition, An
American National Standard, ANSI/PMI 990001-2008"
2. A Risk Management Standard, AIRMIC Publishers, ALARM, IRM: 2002
3. Gene Dixon, “Service Learning and Integrated Collaborative Project Management”, Project
Management Journal, DOI:10.1002/pmi, February 2011, pp.42-58
4. Jerome D. Wiest and Ferdinand K. Levy, “A Management Guide to PERT/CPM”, Prentice Hall
of India Publishers Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
76
5. Punmia B. C. and Khandelwal K.K., “Project Planning and Control with PERT/CPM”, Laxmi
publications, New Delhi, 1989.
6. Srinath L.S., “PERT & CPM- Principles and Applications”, Affiliated East West Press Pvt., Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008
7. Sengupta. B and Guha. H, “Construction Management and Planning”, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 1995
8. SangaReddi. S and Meiyappan. PL, “Construction Management”, Kumaran Publications,
Coimbatore, 1999
BA5066 MANAGEMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCES, SAFETY AND QUALITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
to impart knowledge on management of human resources, labor legislation, safety and
quality aspects in construction
UNIT I HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9
Introduction - Concept- Growth - Role and function - Manpower planning for construction
companies - Line and staff function - Recruitment, selection, placement, induction and training;
over staffing; Time office and establishment functions; wage and salary administration - Discipline
- Separation process.
UNIT II LABOR LEGISLATION 9
Labor laws- Labor law relating to construction industry- Interstate migration- Industrial relations-
Collective bargaining- Worker’s participation in management - Grievance handling - Discipline -
Role of law enforcing agencies and judiciary -Women in construction industry.
UNIT III SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9
Importance of safety- Causes of accidents -Responsibility for safety - Role of various parties in
safety management -Safety benefits- Approaches to improve safety in construction for different
works - Measuring safety.
UNIT IV SAFETY IMPLEMENTATION 9
Application of ergonomics to the construction industry - Prevention of fires at construction site-
Safety audit.
UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION 9
Importance of quality - Elements of quality - Quality characteristics- Quality by design - Quality
conformance -Contractor quality control - Identification and traceability - Continuous chain
management - Brief concept and application - Importance of specifications- Incentives and
penalties in specifications - Workmanship as a mark of quality - Final inspection - Quality
assurance techniques - Inspection, testing, sampling - Documentation - Organization for quality
control, Cost of quality - Introduction to TQM, Six sigma concept- ISO 14000 in quality
management.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
Identify the need and importance of human resource management, labour laws relating to
construction industry
Identify the need and measures to improve safety in construction industry and safety audit
Identify the need for applying ergonomics to construction industry
Enumerate the need, importance, elements of quality and significance of quality assurance
in industry
77
REFERENCES
1. Arya Ashok, “Human Resources Management – Human Dimensions in Management”March
24-26, 2011, Organizational Development Programme Division – New Delhi
2. Arya Ashok, “Essence of Labour Laws”- www.odiindia.in/about-the-books.pdf
3. Arya Ashok “Discipline & Disciplinary procedure” Organisation Development Institute,
1998
4. Arya Ashok, “Management case studies – An analytical and Developmental Tool”Organisation
Development Institute, New Delhi, 1999
5. Corlecton Coulter, Jill Justice Coulter, The Complete Standard Hand Book ofConstruction
Management”, Prentice Hall, (1989)
6. Dwivedi R.S., “Human Relations and Organisational Behaviour”, (BH – 1987)
7. Grant E.L., and Leavens worth, “Statistical Quality Control”, Mc Graw Hill, 1984.
8. James J Obrien, “Construction Inspection Hand Book – Quality Assurance and QualityControl”,
Van NOstrand, New York, 1989
9. Josy J. Farrilaro, “Hand Book of Human Resources Administration” Mc.Graw Hill(International
Edition) 1987.
10. Juran Frank, J.M. and Gryna F.M. “Quality Planning and Analysis”, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
1982.
11. Malik, P.L., “Handbook of Labour & Industrial Law”, Eastern book company, Lalbagh,
Lucknow, 2010
12. Manoria C.B., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing House, 1992.
BA5067 DISASTER MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To create an awareness on the various types of disasters and to expose the students
about the measures, its effect against built structures, and hazard assessment procedure
in India.
To impart knowledge on the methods of mitigating various hazards such that their impact
on communities is reduced.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Difference between hazards and disaster -Types of disasters-Phases of disaster management -
Hazards - Classification of hazards - Hazards affecting buildings - Building safety against hazards
- Floods - Cyclone - Landslides -Tsunami - Fire.
UNIT II EARTHQUAKE DISASTER 9
Earthquake hazard map -Causes of earthquakes -Classification of earthquakes -Seismic waves -
Energy release - Inertia forces - Natural period - Resonance - Damping -Seismic response of free
vibration -Seismic response of damped vibration -Performance of ground and buildings in past
earthquakes-Earthquake resistant measures in RC and masonry buildings - Potential deficiencies
of RC and masonry buildings.
UNIT III OTHER DISASTERS 9
Landslides-Landslide zoning map - Causes -Protection measures Floods -Flood zone map -
Effects on buildings -Protection measures from damage to buildings -Mitigation strategies -Tropical
cyclones - Effects on buildings -Protection measures from damage to buildings - Tsunami -
Tsunami wave characteristics -Peculiarities of tsunami deposits -Tsunami impact on coastal lines-
Effects of Tsunami on built structures - Fire disaster - Causes and effects of fire disaster -
Preventive mechanism .
78
UNIT IV HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9
Visual inspection and study of available documents -Detailed in-situ investigation planning and
interpretation of results-Foundation capability -Non-structural components - Seismic strengthening
of buildings –Repairs, restoration and strengthening of existing buildings - Strengthening materials
-Retrofitting of load bearing wall buildings - Retrofitting of RC Buildings-RVS method of screening -
RC and masonry structures -Seismic hazard assessment - Deterministic seismic hazard analysis -
PSHA.
UNIT V LAND USE ZONING REGULATIONS , QUALITY CONTROL AND DISASTER
MANAGEMENT POLICY 9
Introduction-Community planning - Community contingency plan - Report building and initial
awareness - Recommendations for land use zoning regulations - Construction quality control -
Evolution of quality management -Reasons for poor construction -Construction of quality control in
masonry structures - Disaster management policy and procedure -Legal frame work - Institutional
mechanism - Schemes and grants on DM - Recommendation of 13th finance commission -Plan
schemes - Non plan schemes - Externally aided schemes Role of NDRF in Disaster Management
- Medical First Responder - Flood Rescue &Relief Management.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
understand the various types of disaster viz hydrological, coastal and marine disasters,
atmospheric disasters, geological, mass movement and land disasters, wind and water
driven disasters.
to identify the potential deficiencies of existing buildings for eq disaster and suggest
suitable remedial measures.
derive the guide lines for the precautionary measures and rehabilitation measures for eq
disaster.
understand the effects of disasters on built structures
derive the protection measures against floods, cyclone and land slides
understand the hazard assessment procedure
get the awareness regarding landuse zoning regulations &quality control
REFERENCES
1. Annual Report, Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India, 2009-10
2. Ayaz Ahmad, “Disaster Management: Through the New Millennium” Anmol Publications, 2003
3. Berg.GV, “Seismic Design codes and procedures”, EERI, CA,1982
4. Booth, Edmund, “Concrete Structures in earthquake regions; Design and Analysis”, Longman,
1994
5. Dowrick. D.J, “Earthquake resistant design for Engineers and Architects”, John Wiley &
Sons, Second Edition, 1987.
6. Ghosh G.K. “Disaster Management”, A.P.H. Publishing Corporation, 2006
7. Goel, S. L. “Encyclopaedia of Disaster Management”, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt Ltd.,2006
8. Jaikrishna & A.R.Chandrasekaran, “Elements of Earthquake Engineering”, Sarita Prakashan,
Meerut,1996
9. Singh R.B, “Disaster Management”, Rawat Publications, 2008
10. Thirteenth Finance Commision Report, Ministry of Finance, Government of India, 2010-15
79
BA5068 ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT IN CONSTRUCTION L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To study the concepts of construction economics and finance such as comparing
alternatives proposals, evaluating alternative investments, management of funds,
Insurance procedures, risks involved and economics of costing.
UNIT I BASIC PRINCIPLES 9
Time Value of Money - Cash flow diagram - Nominal and effective Interest - Continuous interest -
Nominal and effective interest- continuous interest . Single Payment Compound Amount Factor
(P/F,F/P) – Uniform series of Payments (F/A,A/F,F/P,A/P)– Problem time zero (PTZ)- equation
time zero (ETZ). Constant increment to periodic payments – Arithmetic Gradient(G), Geometric
Gradient (C)
UNIT II MARKET STRUCTURE AND CONSTRUCTION ECONOMICS 9
Types of Market Structure in the Construction Industry – Markets and the competitive
environment- Perfect competition -. Monopolistic competition - Oligopoly - Monopoly –
Characteristics and economic Profit – Construction Economics – BOOT, BOT, BOO Methods -
Depreciation - Inflation-Taxes
UNIT III EVALUATING ALTERNATIVE INVESTMENTS 9
Present worth analysis, Annual worth analysis, Future worth analysis, Rate of Return Analysis
(ROR) and Incremental Rate of Return (IROR) Analysis, Benefit/Cost Analysis, Break Even
Analysis - Replacement Analysis- Equipment Replacement Analysis.
UNIT IV FUNDS MANAGEMENT 9
Project Finance - Sources - Working capital management- Inventory Management- Mortgage
Financing-- Interim construction financing - Security and risk aspects
UNIT V ECONOMICS OF COSTING 9
Construction accounting-Chart of accounts- Meaning and definition of costing - Types of costing -
Methods of calculation (Marginal costing, cost sheet, budget preparation) – Equipment Cost-
Replacement Analysis - Role of costing technique in real estate and infrastructure management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of this course the students will be able to know the concepts in Economics and
Finance in Construction.
REFERENCES
1. Pandey, I.M, Financial Management, 12th Edition Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 9th edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Paul A. Samuelson, William D. Nordhaus, Sudip Chaudhuri and Anindya Sen, Economics, 19th
edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. Blank, L.T., and Tarquin,a.J , Engineering Economy,4th Edn. Mc-Graw Hill, 1988.
5. Patel, B M, Project management- strategic Financial Planning, Evaluation and Control, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2000.
6. Shrivastava,U.K., Construction Planning and Management,2nd Edn. Galgotia Publications Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi, 2000.
7. Steiner, H.M.,Engineering Economic principles, 2nd Edn. Mc-Graw Hill Book, New York, 1996.
80
BA5069 URBAN ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To create an awareness on the various environmental issues in an urban scenario and give
an exposure to the urban water resources and its management.
To impart knowledge on the stages of works involved in a water supply project of a city,
safe wastewater collection system for generated wastewater and its management, solid
waste and their safe disposal beyond urban limit to be free from pollution is also addressed
in the course work.
UNIT I URBAN ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES 9
Urbanization- Population growth scenario -Migration - Pollution of surface water resources -
Rivers, tanks, channels -Ground water exploitation - Waste water -Characteristics -Pollution
problems - Solid waste -Air pollution - CPCB norms.
UNIT II URBAN MASTER PLANS 9
Planning and organizational aspects -Urban waste resources management - Water in urban
ecosystem -Urban water resources planning and organization aspects -Storm water management
practices -Types of storage -Magnitude of storage -Storage capacity of urban components -
Percolation ponds -Temple tanks -Rainwater harvesting -Urban water supply - Demand estimation
-Population forecasting -Source identification -Water conveyance -Storage reservoirs -Fixing
storage capacity - Distribution network -Types -Analysis -Computer applications - Conservation
techniques -Integrated urban water planning - Smart city project planning - Green Building - LEED
certification - Green audit
UNIT III URBAN WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT 9
Sewage generation -Storm drainage estimation -Industry contribution -Wastewater collection
system -Separate and combined system -Hydraulic design of sewer and storm drain -Wastewater
treatment -Disposal methods -Concept of decentralization - 3R concepts.
UNIT IV MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 9
Sources of solid waste -Characteristics -Rate of generation -Segregation at source -Collection of
solid waste -Methods of collection -Route analysis -Transfer and transfer stations -Processing and
disposal of solid waste.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Environmental economics- Social and physiological aspects of pollution - Successful urban
management -Models- Urban management-Case studies from developed nations -Software.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
understand planning of a city and identify various urban environmental issues
apply and prepare project plans to integrate urban water resource
develop water resource management using available water resources
understand and apply the principles of solid waste management
REFERENCES
1. George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A, Vigil “Integrated Solid Waste
Management”, McGraw Hill Publishers, New York, 1993.
2. McGhee J., “Water supply and sewerage”, McGraw Hill Publishers, 1991
3. Martin P. Wanelista and Yousef. “Storm Water Management and Operations”, John Wiley and
Sons, 1993.
4. Neil S. Grigg., “Urban Water Infrastructure Planning – Management and Operations”,
John Wiley and Sons, 1986.
81
BA5070 SMART MATERIALS, TECHNIQUES AND EQUIPMENTS L T P C
FOR INFRASTRUCTURE 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To give an exposure on the advanced materials, techniques and equipments used in
infrastructure industry.
UNIT I SPECIAL CONCRETES 9
Concrete -Behavior of concrete - High strength and high performance concrete - Fibre reinforced
concrete - Self compacting concrete - Bacterial concrete -Reactive powder concrete - Ready mix
concrete -Geopolymer concrete -Alternative materials for concrete.
UNIT II METALS 9
Steels - New alloy steels - Coatings to reinforcement - Cold formed steel -Aluminum and its
products -Applications. Composites: Plastics - Reinforced polymers- FRP -Applications. Smart and
intelligent materials: smart and intelligent materials for intelligent buildings - Special features.
UNIT III ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES 9
Sub structure construction: Box jacking- Pipe jacking- Under water construction of diaphragm walls
and basement- Tunneling techniques-Cable anchoring and grouting- Driving diaphragm walls,
sheet piles, laying operations for built up offshore system- Shoring for deep cutting- Large
reservoir construction -Trenchless technology.
UNIT IV SUPERSTRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION FOR BUILDINGS 9
Vacuum dewatering of concrete flooring- Concrete paving technology- Techniques of construction
for continuous concreting operation in tall buildings of various shapes and varying sections -
Launching techniques suspended form work -Erection techniques of tall structures, large span
structures- Launching techniques for heavy decks -Inset pre-stressing in high rise structures, aerial
transporting, handling, erecting lightweight components on tall structures.
UNIT V CONSTRUCTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES 9
Erection of lattice towers and rigging of transmission line structures- Construction sequence in
cooling towers, silos, chimney, sky scrapers, bow string bridges, cable stayed bridges - Launching
and pushing of box decks -Advanced construction techniques of offshore structures- Construction
sequence and methods in domes and prestress domes -Support structure for heavy equipment
and conveyor and machinery in heavy industries -Erection of articulated structures, braced domes
and space decks. Demolition Techniques -Advanced techniques and sequence in demolition and
dismantling.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
explain the properties and applications of special concretes, composites, smart and
intelligent materials
identify and explain advanced construction techniques used for sub structure construction
select appropriate techniques for super structure construction of buildings
select suitable techniques for construction of special structures
choose relevant technique for demolition and dismantling works
REFERENCES
1. Jerry Irvine, “Advanced Construction Techniques”, C.A. Rocketr, 1984
2. Patrick Powers, “Construction Dewatering: New Methods and Applications”, John Wiley &
Sons, 1992
3. Robertwade Brown, “Practical foundation Engineering handbook”, McGraw Hill Publications,
1995.
4. Sankar S.K. and Saraswathi. S, “Construction Technology”, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi, 2008.
82
BA5071 STRATEGIC AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide the participants with a good knowledge on strategic planning and marketing in
airport organizations.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Growth of air transport, Airport organization and associations, Classification of airports airfield
components, Air traffic zones and approach areas. Context of airport system planning -
Development of airport planning process - Ultimate consumers - Airline decision - Other airport
operations.
UNIT II AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE CAPACITY DESIGN 9
Components, size, turning radius, speed, airport characteristics. Capacity and Delay - Factors
affecting capacity, determination of runway capacity related to delay, gate capacity and taxiway
capacity.
UNIT III AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING AND SURVEYS 9
Runway length and width, sight distances, longitudinal and transverse, runway intersections,
taxiways, clearances, aprons, numbering, holding apron. Planning and design of the terminal area:
Operational concepts, space relationships and area requirements, noise control, vehicular traffic
and parking at airports. Air traffic control and aids: Runways and taxiways markings, day and night
landing aids, airport lighting and other associated aids.
UNIT IV AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE ENTERPRISE 9
The economic impact on countries and regions - the main governance patterns in the airport
business - The International path of evolution in the airport business - Airport transport value chain
- Air enterprises - two primary actors in the air transport value chain - Skipping peripheral positions
in the value chain. Rise of airport marketing for the aviation related business - Airport revenue
management- Airport alliances- management contract.
UNIT V THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE NON AVIATION INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Related value Proposition. Evolution of traditional Airport - Evolutionary patterns for airport
enterprises- Commercial Airport Philosophy - tourist and conference service - logistic services-
property management- consulting services - BAA and the non aviation business - best airport in
the world: The case of Singapore Airport - Role and meaning of loyalty for a service company-
Bench marking airline experience - Provider - Customer relational link - benefits from ALPS
implementation of ALPS.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
explain the classification of airports airfield components
explain the main governance patterns in the airport business
identify the evolutionary patterns for airport enterprises.
explain the primary actors in the air transport value chain
REFERENCES
1. Aviation Safety Programs A Management Hand Book: Richard H. Wood - Jeppesen
Sanderson Inc.
2. Airport Systems,: Planning, Design and Management, Second Edition, Richard L. De
Neufville , Amedeo R. Odoni, Peter Belobaba,& Tom G. Reynolds ), 2013.
3. Airport Planning and Management, Sixth Edition, Seth B. Young, Ph.D., Alexander T. Wells,
Ed.D., McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
4. Asset and Infrastructure Management for Airports—Primer and Guidebook, The national
academic press.
83
BA5072 REAL ESTATE MARKETING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To provide the participants with a good knowledge on real estate marketing and
management.
UNIT I CONCEPT 9
Fundamental concepts and techniques involved in real estate development process- Role of
various organizations - CREDAI- BAI etc
UNIT II EVENTS AND PRE-PROJECT STUDIES 9
Modeling sequential events in real estate development process - Site evaluation - Land
procurement - Development Team assembly - Market study
UNIT III DEVELOPMENT PLANNING & APPROVAL PROCESS 9
Identifying technical inputs required, planning objectives, front end clearances from various
authorities, timing of the project and scheduling
UNIT IV CONSTRUCTION AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Identifying the elements of infrastructure and the resource mobilization, disaggregating the project
components, mobilizing the human and fiscal resources procuring and storing materials
UNIT V PROJECT MARKETING & HANDING OVER 9
Over of the completed project- Communication tools required for presenting the project -In house
sales promotion -Franchisee system -Joint venture and sharing issues - Procedure and laws
relating to transfer of completed project.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course, students will be able to
Explain the fundamental concepts and techniques involved in real estate development
process
Explain the procedure and laws relating to transfer of completed project
Identify the fiscal resources procuring and storing materials process.
REFERENCES:
1. Gerald R. Cortesi, “Mastering real estate principles” (2001); Dearborn Trade Publising, New
York, USA.
2. Fillmore W Galaty, “Modern real estate practice” (2002); Dearborn Trade publishing, New
York, USA
3. Tanya Davis, “Real estate developer’s handbook” (2007), Atlantic pub company, Ocala, USA.
4. Mike E. Miles, “Real estate development - Principles & process 3rd edition” (2000); Urban Land
Institute, ULI, Washington DC.
84
BA5073 INFRASTRUCTURE AND REAL ESTATE ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality and motivation in students.
To impart basic entrepreneurial skills and understandings to run a business efficiently and
effectively.
UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE 9
Entrepreneurship concept - Entrepreneurship as a Career - Entrepreneurial Personality -
Characteristics of Successful, Entrepreneur - Knowledge and Skills of Entrepreneur.
UNIT II ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT 9
Business Environment - Role of Family and Society - Entrepreneurship Development Training and
Other Support Organizational Services - Central and State Government Industrial Policies and
Regulations - International Business.
UNIT III BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION 9
Sources of Product for Business - Prefeasibility Study - Criteria for Selection of Product -
Ownership - Capital - Budgeting Project Profile Preparation - Matching Entrepreneur with the
Project - Feasibility Report Preparation and Evaluation Criteria.
UNIT IV LAUNCHING OF SMALL BUSINESS 9
Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning - Market and Channel Selection -
Growth Strategies - Product Launching -Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups.
UNIT V MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS 9
Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business Units-
Effective Management of small Business.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will gain knowledge and skills needed to start and run an enterprise.
REFERENCES
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
2. S.S.Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Mathew Manimala, Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads, Paradigms & Praxis,
Biztrantra ,2nd Edition ,2005
4. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews,
Tata McGraw-Hill, 1996.
5. P.Saravanavel, Entrepreneurial Development, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai -1997.
6. Arya Kumar. Entrepreneurship. Pearson. 2012
7. Donald F Kuratko, T.V Rao. Entrepreneurship: A South Asian perspective. Cengage Learning.
2012
85
BA5074 VALUATION OF REAL ESTATE AND INFRASTRUCTURE ASSETS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
To gain knowledge about the valuation of different infrastructure assets
UNIT I REAL ESTATE VALUATION 9
Scope and objectives -Concepts of valuation - Types of value - Value vs Price vs Cost-Different
methods of valuation- SWOT analysis
UNIT II APPROACHES TO REAL ESTATE VALUATION 9
Sales comparison approach - Cost approach - Income approach - SWOT analysis
UNIT III VALUATION OF VARIOUS CATEGORIES OF REAL ESTATE 9
Residential real estate valuation - Commercial real estate valuation - Industrial real estate
valuation - Retail real estate valuation- Mixed-use real estate valuation
UNIT IV INFRASTRUCTURE ASSET VALUATION 9
Objective and approaches-Different categories of infrastructure assets- Valuation methodology-
Key operational and financial parameters -Valuation framework and models.
UNIT V SECTORAL INFRASTRUCTURE VALUATION 9
Power sector- IT sector - Telecom sector - Aviation-Education sector- Other service sectors- Plant
and Machinery -Case studies
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Students will gain knowledge and skills in connection to the valuation of different types of
real estates and infrastructure assets.
REFERENCES :
1. Infrastructure valuation –Frederic Blanc - Brude and Majid Hasan, EDHEC Risk Institute
2. Infrastructure Asset Management - Frederic Blanc - Brude and Majid Hasan, EDHEC Risk
Institute
3. Valuation techniques for infrastructure investment decisions, Michael J. Garvin, Department
of Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics , Columbia University
4. https://www.thebalance.com/different-types-of-real-estate-investments-you-can-make-357986
5. http://rbsa.in/valuation_of_infrastructure_assets_specialized_assets.html
6. http://edhec.infrastructure.institute/wp-content/uploads/publications/blanc-brude_2015a.pdf
7. Application of Real Options in Infrastructure Projects Charles Y.J. Cheah, PhD, CFA
86
ANNA UNIVERSITY
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS I TO VI SEMESTERS (FULL TIME)
MASTER OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) :
I. To prepare students to excel in the computing profession by providing solid technical
foundations in the field of computer applications.
II. To provide students various computing skills like the analysis, design and development of
innovative software products to meet the industry needs.
III. To motivate students to pursue lifelong learning and to do research as computing
professionals and scientists.
IV. To motivate students to communicate and function effectively in teams in multidisciplinary
fields within the global, societal and environmental context.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POS):
On successful completion of the program:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with
an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions
in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for
sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms
of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
1
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective
reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES (PSOs):
1. Enable the students to select the suitable data model, appropriate architecture and platform to
implement a system with good performance.
2. Enable the students to design and integrate various system based components to provide
user interactive solutions for various challenges.
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
AND PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES:
Programme Programme Outcomes PSO
Educational
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Objectives
1 3 2 2 1 1 3 3
2 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 1 1
4 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 2
2
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
Mathematical
Foundations of
3 2 1
Computer
Science
Computer
3 2 1
Organization`
Problem
Solving and 3 3 2 2 1
Programming
Database
SEM
Management 3 2 2 2 1 1 1
1
Systems
Data Structures 3 2
Data Structures
3 2 1
Laboratory
Database
Management
3 2 1 1 1
Systems
Laboratory
Communication
2 2 1 2 3 2
Skills Laboratory
YEAR 1
Object Oriented
3 3 2 1
Programming
Embedded
2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
Systems
Software
3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
Engineering
Operating
3 2 2 1
Systems
Computer
Graphics and 3 2 1 2 1 2
Multimedia
SEM Object Oriented
2 Programming 3 2 2 2 1 2
Laboratory
Graphics and
Multimedia 3 2 2 2 1 1
Laboratory
Operating
Systems and
Embedded
Systems 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
Laboratory
3
Advanced
Data Structures 3 2 2 1 2
and Algorithms
Computer
3 2 2 2 1 2
Networks
Web
Programming 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
Essentials
Programming
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
with Java
Object
SEM Oriented
3 2 2 3 2
3 Analysis and
Design
Data
Structures and
3 2 2 2 2
Algorithms
Laboratory
Web
Programming 3 2 2 2 1 2 2
Laboratory
Programming
with Java 3 2 2 2 2 2
Laboratory
YEAR 2
Resource
Management 3 2 2 2
Techniques
Mobile
3 2 3 1 1 1 2 2
Computing
Advanced
Databases and
3 2 2 3 1 2 2 1
Data mining
Techniques
Web
Application 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Development
SEM
Professional
4
Elective - I
Mobile
Application
3 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
Development
Laboratory
Web
Application
3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Development
Laboratory
Technical
Seminar and 2 1 2 2 3 2
Report Writing
4
Cloud
3 2 2 2 2 1
Computing
Big Data
3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1
Analytics
Software
Testing and
3 2 2 2 2 1 2
Quality
Assurance
Professional
SEM Elective II
YEAR 3
V Professional
Elective III
Cloud and Big
3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1
Data laboratory
Software
Testing 3 2 2 2 1 1 2
Laboratory
Mini Project 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
SEM
Project Work 3 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
VI
5
ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
MASTER OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA5161 Mathematical
Foundations for FC 4 4 0 0 4
Computer Applications
2. MC5101 Computer Organization PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MC5102 Problem Solving and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
4. MC5103 Database Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
5. MC5104 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICALS
6. MC5111 Data Structures
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. MC5112 Database Management
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
8. MC5113 Communication Skills
EEC 3 1 0 2 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 27 17 0 10 22
SEMESTER II
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MC5201 Object Oriented PC
3 3 0 0 3
Programming
2. MC5202 Embedded Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MC5203 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
4. MC5204 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. MC5205 Computer Graphics and PC
3 3 0 0 3
Multimedia
PRACTICALS
6. MC5211 Object Oriented
Programming PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. MC5212 Graphics and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Multimedia Laboratory
8. MC5213 Operating Systems and
Embedded Systems PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 27 15 0 12 21
6
SEMESTER III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MC5301 Advanced Data
Structures and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
2. MC5302 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MC5303 Web Programming
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Essentials
4. MC5304 Programming with
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Java
5. MC5305 Object Oriented
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Analysis and Design
PRACTICALS
6. MC5311 Data Structures and PC
4 0 0 4 2
Algorithms Laboratory
7. MC5312 Web Programming PC
4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. MC5313 Programming with PC
4 0 0 4 2
Java Laboratory
TOTAL 29 15 2 12 22
SEMESTER IV
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MC5401 Resource Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
2. MC5402 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MC5403 Advanced Databases
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Datamining
4. MC5404 Web Application
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Development
5. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective - I
PRACTICALS
6. MC5411 Mobile Application
Development PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. MC5412 Web Application
Development PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. MC5413 Technical Seminar
PC 2 0 0 2 1
and Report Writing
TOTAL 27 15 2 10 21
7
SEMESTER V
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. MC5501 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. MC5502 Big Data Analytics PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. MC5503 Software Testing and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Quality Assurance
4. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective II
5. Professional
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III
PRACTICALS
6. MC5511 Cloud and Big Data
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. MC5512 Software Testing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. MC5513 Mini Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 27 15 0 12 21
SEMESTER VI
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. MC5611 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL 24 0 0 24 12
TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS:119
8
FOUNDATION COURSES (FC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MA5161 Mathematical
Foundations for FC 4 4 0 0 4
Computer Applications
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MC5101 Computer
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Organization
2. MC5102 Problem Solving and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
3. MC5103 Database Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. MC5104 Data Structures PC 3 3 0 0 3
5. MC5111 Data Structures
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
6. MC5112 Database
Management Systems PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
7. MC5201 Object Oriented
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
8. MC5202 Embedded Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
9. MC5203 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
10. MC5204 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
11. MC5205 Computer Graphics
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Multimedia
12. MC5211 Object Oriented
Programming PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
13. MC5212 Graphics and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Multimedia Laboratory
14. MC5213 Operating Systems
and Embedded PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory
15. MC5301 Advanced Data
Structures and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Algorithms
16. MC5302 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
17. MC5303 Web Programming
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Essentials
18. MC5304 Programming with
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Java
19. MC5305 Object Oriented
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Analysis and Design
20. MC5311 Data Structures and
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Algorithms Laboratory
21. MC5312 Web Programming
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9
22. MC5313 Programming with
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Java Laboratory
23. MC5401 Resource Management
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Techniques
24. MC5402 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
25. MC5403 Advanced Databases
PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Datamining
26. MC5404 Web Application
PC 5 3 2 0 4
Development
27. MC5411 Mobile Application
Development PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
28. MC5412 Web Application
Development PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
29. MC5501 Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
30. MC5502 Big Data Analytics PC 3 3 0 0 3
31. MC5503 Software Testing and
PC 3 3 0 0 3
Quality Assurance
32. MC5511 Cloud and Big Data
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
33. MC5512 Software Testing
PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSE (EEC)
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MC5413 Technical Seminar and
EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Report Writing
2. MC5113 Communication Skills
EEC 3 1 0 2 2
Laboratory
3. MC5513 Mini Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
4. MC5611 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12
10
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (PE)*
SEMESTER IV
ELECTIVE I
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MC5001 Soft Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MC5002 Accounting and
Financial PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
3. MC5003 Software Project
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
4. MC5004 Security in
PE 3 3 0 0 3
computing
5. MC5005 Adhoc and Sensor
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Network
SEMESTER V
ELECTIVE II
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MC5006 Professional Ethics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MC5007 Health Care
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
3. MC5008 Geological
Information PE 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
4. MC5009 Human Resource
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. MC5010 Internet of Things PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER V
ELECTIVE III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
NO CODE PERIODS
1. MC5011 Semantic Web PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. MC5012 Service Oriented
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Architecture
3. MC5013 Game Programming PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. MC5014 Computational
PE 3 3 0 0 3
Intelligence
5. MC5015 Principles of
Programming PE 3 3 0 0 3
Languages
11
MA5161 MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS FOR COMPUTER APPLICATIONS L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The primary objective of this course is to provide mathematical background and sufficient experience
on various topics of discrete mathematics like matrix algebra, logic and proofs, combinatorics, graphs,
algebraic structures, formal languages and finite state automata. This course will extend student’s
Logical and Mathematical maturity and ability to deal with abstraction and to introduce most of the
basic terminologies used in computer science courses and application of ideas to solve practical
problems.
UNIT I MATRIX ALGEBRA 12
Matrices - Rank of a m atrix - Solving system of equations - Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -
Cayley - Hamilton theorem - Inverse of a matrix.
UNIT II BASIC SET THEORY 12
Basic definitions - Venn diagrams and set operations - Laws of set theory - Principle of inclusion and
exclusion – Partitions - Permutation and combination – Relations - Properties of relations - Matrices
of relations - Closure operations on relations - Functions - Injective, subjective and objective
functions.
UNIT III MATHEMATICAL LOGIC 12
Propositions and logical operators - Truth table - Propositions generated by a set - Equivalence and
implication - Basic laws - Some more connectives - Functionally complete set of connectives - Normal
forms - Proofs in propositional calculus - Predicate calculus.
UNIT IV FORMAL LANGUAGES 12
Languages and g rammars - Phrase s tructure g rammar - Classification of g rammars -Pumping
l emma for regular languages - Context free languages.
UNIT V FINITE STATE AUTOMATA 12
Finite state automata - Deterministic finite state automata (DFA) - Non deterministic finite state
automata (NFA) - Equivalence of DFA and NFA - Equivalence of NFA and Regular Languages.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:
Basic knowledge of matrix, set theory, functions and relations concepts needed for designing
and solving problems.
Logical operations and predicate calculus needed for computing skill
Design and solve Boolean functions for defined problems.
Apply the acquired knowledge of formal languages to the engineering areas like Compiler
Design
Apply the acquired knowledge of finite automata theory and to design discrete problems to
solve by computers.
12
REFERENCES :
1. David Makinson, “Sets, Logic and Maths for Computing”, Springer Indian Reprint, 2011.
2. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V. "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", 5th Edition,
Pearson Education, 2006.
3. Hopcroft J . E and Ullman,J.D, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computation”, Narosa Publishing House, Delhi, 2002.
4. Kenneth H. Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4 th Edition,
2002.
5. Sengadir, T. “Discrete Mathematics and Combinatorics" Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
6. Trembley, J.P. and Manohar, R, "Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
7. Venkataraman, M.K., “Engineering M a t h e m a t i c s ”, 2nd Edition, Volume-I I , N a t i o n a l
Publishing Company, 1989.
MC5101 COMPUTER ORGANISATION LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the various number systems
To become familiar with Boolean algebra
To study the different types of combinational and sequential circuits
To comprehend the basis operations that happen in a CPU
To learn the data path and control path implementation
To become familiar with the memory hierarchy design and I/O design
UNIT I DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS 8
Number Systems and Conversions – Boolean Algebra an Simplifications – Minimization of Boolean
Functions – Karnaugh Map, Quine McClusky Method. Logic Gates – NAND NOR implementation.
UNIT II COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 10
Design of Circuits –Adder /Subtracter – Encoder – Decoder – MUX /DEMUX – Comparators, Flip
flops – Triggering – Master – Slave Flip Flop – State Diagram and Minimization – Counters -
Registers
UNIT III BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTER 9
Functional Units - Basic Operational Concepts – Bus structures – Performance and Metrics –
instruction and instruction sequencing – Hardware Software Interface – Addressing modes –
Instruction Sets – RISC and CISC – ALU Design – Fixed point and Floating point operations
UNIT IV PROCESSOR DESIGN 9
Processor basics –CPU Organization – Data Path Design – Control Design – Basic concepts –
Hardwired control – Micro Programmed control – Pipe control – Hazards super scale operations
UNIT V MEMORY AND I/O SYSTEMS 9
Memory technology – Memory Systems- Virtual Memory – Caches – Design Methods – Associative
memories – Input /output system – Programmed I/O – DMA and interrupts – I/O devices and
Interfaces
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
13
OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
Perform conversions and arithmetic operations in various number systems
Simplify using laws of Boolean algebra and Karnaugh map method
Design various combinational and sequential circuits
Differentiate between various addressing modes
Trace the flow of execution of an instruction in a processor
Differentiate between the various mapping policies used in cache memories
Discuss the implementation of virtual memory
Discuss the various types of I/O transfers
REFERENCES:
1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization
and Embedded Systems”, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko vranesic and Safwat Zaky, fifth edition, “Computer Organisation” Tata
Mc Graw Hill, 2002.
3. Charles H. Roth, Jr., “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai,
Fourth Edition 1992.
4. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface”, Second Edition, Morgan Kaufmann , 2002.Morris Mano “Digital
Design”, Printice Hall of India 1997
5. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organization”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
1998
6. William Stallings,“Computer Organization & Architecture – Designing for Performance” 6th
Edition Pearson Education, 2003.
MC5102 L T P C
PROBLEM SOLVING AND PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of problem solving approaches and to develop the
algorithms.
Apply the techniques of structured (functional) decomposition to break a program into
smaller pieces and describe the mechanics of parameter passing.
To design, implements, test, and apply the basic C programming concepts.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER PROBLEM SOLVING 8
Introduction – The Problem Solving aspect – Top down design – Implementation of
algorithm – Program Verification – The efficiency of algorithms – The analysis of algorithms
– Fundamental Algorithms.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING ANDALGORITHMS 9
Programs and Programming – building blocks for simple programs -pseudo code
representation – flow charts - Programming Languages - compiler –Interpreter, Loader and
Linker - Program execution – Classification of Programming Language - Structured
Programming Concept.
14
UNIT III BASICS OF ‘C’, INPUT / OUTPUT & CONTROL STATEMENTS 9
Introduction- Identifier – Keywords - Variables – Constants – I/O Statements - Operators -
Initialization –Expressions – Expression Evaluation – Lvalues and Rvalues – Type
Conversion in C –Formatted input and output functions - Specifying Test Condition for
Selection and Iteration- Conditional Execution - and Selection – Iteration and Repetitive
Execution- go to Statement – Nested Loops- Continue and break statements.
UNIT IV ARRAYS, STRINGS, FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 10
Array – One dimensional Character Arrays- Multidimensional Arrays- Arrays of Strings –
Two dimensional character array – functions - parameter passing mechanism scope –
storage classes – recursion - comparing iteration and recursion- pointers – pointer
operators - uses of pointers- arrays and pointers – pointers and strings - pointer indirection-
pointers to functions - Dynamic memory allocation.
UNIT V USER-DEFINED DATATYPES & FILES 9
Structures – initialization - nested structures – structures and arrays – structures and
pointers - union– type def and enumeration types - bit fields - File Management in C – Files
and Streams – File handling functions – Sequential access file- Random access file –
Command line arguments.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to design a computational solution for a given problem.
Able to break a problem into logical modules that can be solved (programmed).
Able to transform a problem solution into programs involving programming
constructs.
To write programs using structures, strings, arrays, pointer and files for solving
complex computational problem.
Able to introduce modularity using functions and pointers which permit ad hoc run-
time polymorphism.
REFERENCES:
1. Byron S Gottfried, ―Programming with C‖, Schaums Outlines, Second Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2006.
2. BrianW. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, “The C programming Language”,2006,
Prentice-Hall.
3. Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest, Stein, “ Introduction to Algorithms”, McGraw Hill,
Publishers, 2002.
4. Deitel and Deitel, “C How to Program”, Pearson Education. 2013,7th Edition.
5. How to Solve it by Computer, R.G.Dromey, Pearson education , Fifth Edition, 2007.
6. Kamthane, A.N., “Programming with ANSI and Turbo C”, Pearson Education, Delhi,
2006.
7. Mastering C- by K R Venugopal , Sudeep R Prasad McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited; Second edition 2015.
8. PradipDey, Manas Ghosh, ―Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C,
Second Edition, Oxford University Press, 2013.
9. Peter Norton, “Introduction to Computers”, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2007.
10. ReemaThareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
11. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Understanding Pointers In C”, 4th Revised & Updated Edition,
2011, BPB Publications.
15
MC5103 L T P C
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of data models and conceptualize and depict a database
system using ER diagram.
To make a study of SQL and relational database design.
To know about data storage techniques an query processing.
To impart knowledge in transaction processing, concurrency control techniques and
recovery procedures.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
File systems versus Database systems – Data Models – DBMS Architecture – Data
Independence – Data Modeling using Entity – Relationship Model – Enhanced E-R
Modeling.
UNIT II RELATIONAL MODEL AND QUERY EVALUATION 9
Relational Model Concepts – Relational Algebra – SQL – Basic Queries – Complex SQL
Queries – Views – Constraints – Relational Calculus – Tuple Relational Calculus – Domain
Relational Calculus – Functional Dependencies – Normal Forms – 1NF – 2NF-3NF-BCNF –
4NF-5NF.
UNIT III TRANSACTION PROCESSING 9
Transaction Processing – Properties of Transactions - Serializability – Transaction support in
SQL - Locking Techniques – Time Stamp ordering – Validation Techniques – Granularity of
Data Items – Recovery concepts – Shadow paging – Log Based Recovery.
UNIT IV FILES AND INDEXING 9
File operations – Hashing Techniques – Indexing – Single level and Multi-level Indexes – B+
tree – Static Hashing - Indexes on Multiple Keys.
UNIT V SPECIAL PURPOSE DATABASES 9
OODBMS- - Object-Based Databases - OO Data Model - OO Languages – Persistence –
Object Relational Databases - XML – Structure of XML –– Cloud based systems – NOSQL
introduction - NOSQL key features – Hbase data model – Hbase data operations - Database
Tuning -Case Study for Design and Manage the Database for any Project.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand the basic concepts of the database and data models.
design a database using ER diagrams and map ER into Relations and normalize the
relations
Acquire the knowledge of query evaluation to monitor the performance of the DBMS.
Develop a simple database applications using normalization.
Acquire the knowledge about different special purpose databases and to critique how
They differ from traditional database systems.
16
REFERENCES:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F.Korth and S.Sundarshan “Database System
Concepts”, Sixth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. C.J. Date, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eight Edition, Pearson Education
Delhi, 2003.
3. Frank. P. Coyle, “XML, Web Services And The Data Revolution”, Pearson Education,
2012.
4. Lee Chao, “Database Development and Management”, Auerbach Publications, 2010
5. Peter Rob, Carlos coronel , “Database System Concepts” , Ceange Learning 2008
6. Peter Rob, Carlos Coronel, “Database System Concepts”, Cengage Learning, 2008.
7. Ramez Elamassri and Shankant B-Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”,
Sixth Edition, Pearson Education Delhi, 2010.
8. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systems‖, Fourth Edition, McGraw-
Hill College Publications, 2015.
L T P C
MC5104 3 0 0 3
DATA STRUCTURES
OBJECTIVES:
Be familiar with basic techniques of algorithm analysis.
Be exposed to the concept of ADTs.
Learn linear data structures-List, Stack and Queue.
Learn nonlinear data structures-Tree and Graphs.
Be exposed to sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Abstract Data Types (ADT) – Arrays and its representation –Structures –
Fundamentals of algorithmic problem solving – Important problem
types – Fundamentals of the analysis of algorithm – analysis frame work –
Asymptotic notations, Properties, Recurrence Relation.
UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9
List ADT - Array-based Implementation - Linked list implementation - Singly Linked Lists –
Circularly linked lists – Doubly Linked Lists - Applications of linked list – Polynomial Addition.
UNIT III LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - STACK, QUEUE 9
Stack ADT – Operations on Stack - Applications of stack – Infix to postfix conversion –
evaluation of expression - Queue ADT – Operations on Queue - Circular Queue -
Applications of Queue.
UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - TREES AND GRAPHS 9
Trees and its representation – left child right sibling data structures for general trees- Binary
Tree – Binary tree traversals –- Binary Search Tree - Graphs and its representation - Graph
Traversals - Depth-first traversal – breadth-first traversal-Application of graphs.
UNIT V SORTING, SEARCHING AND HASH TECHNIQUES 9
Sorting algorithms: Insertion sort - Bubble sort - Quick sort - Merge sort - Searching: Linear
search –Binary Search - Hashing: Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing
– Rehashing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
17
OUTCOMES:
Able to analyze algorithms and determines their time complexity.
Able to understand the concepts of data types, data structures and linear structures.
Able to apply data structures to solve various problems
Able to understand non-linear data structures. Able to apply different Sorting,
Searching and Hashing algorithms.
REFERENCES:
1. A.K. Sharma, “Data Structures using C”, Pearson Education Asia, 2013.
2. Anany Levitin “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms” Pearson
Education 2012.
3. E. Horowitz, Anderson-Freed and S.Sahni, “Fundamentals of Data structures in
C”, University Press, 2007
4. E.Balagursamy,” Data Structures using C”, Tata McGraw Hill 2015 Reprint.
5. M. A. Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia,
2013.
6. Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
7. Robert.L..Kruce “Data Structures and Program Design in C”, Pearson Education
2007.
8. Tanaenbaum A.S, Langram Y. Augestein M.J, “ Data Structures using C”,
Pearson Education, 2004.
DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
MC5111 L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To develop skills in design and implementation of data structures and their applications
To learn and implement linear, non linear and tree data structures
To study, implement and analyze the sorting technique.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Array- Insertion and Deletion
2. Application using array of structures
3. Array Implementation of Stack
4. Array Implementation of Queue
5. Infix to postfix conversion
6. Singly Linked List operations
7. Polynomial manipulation- addition, subtraction
8. Binary Tree Traversal
9. Quick Sort
10. Binary Search
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Work with basic data structures that are suitable for the problems to be solved efficiently.
Design and implement linear, and tree and its applications.
Design sorting technique, its algorithm design and analysis.
18
MC5112 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the concepts of DBMS.
To familiarize with SQL queries.
To write stored procedures in DBMS.
To learn front end tools to integrate with databases.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Creation of base tables and views
2. Data Manipulation INSERT, DELETE and UPDATE in Tables. SELECT, Sub Queries and
3. Data Control Commands
4. High level language extensions – PL/SQLOr Transact SQL – Packages
5. Use of Cursors, Procedures and Functions
6. Embedded SQL or Database Connectivity
7. Oracle or SQL Server Triggers – Block Level – Form Level Triggers
8. Working with Forms, Menus and ReportWriters for a application project in any domain
9. Front-end tools – Visual Basic/Developer 2000
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Design and Implement databases
Formulate complex queries using SQL
Design and Implement applications that have GUI and access databases for backend
connectivity
MC5113 L T P C
COMMUNICATION SKILL LABORATORY
1 0 2 2
OBJECTIVES:
To provide opportunities to learners to practice their communicative skills to make
them become proficient users of English.
To enable learners to fine-tune their linguistic skills (LSRW) with the help of
technology to communicate globally.
To enhance the performance of learners at placement interviews and group
discussions and other recruitment procedures.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. PC based session (Weightage 40%)
A. English Language Lab (15)
1. Listening Comprehension:(5) Listening and typing – Listening and sequencing of
sentences – Filling in the blanks - Listening and answering questions.
2. Reading Comprehension:(5) Filling in the blanks - Close exercises – Vocabulary
building - Reading and answering questions.
19
3. Speaking: (5) Phonetics: Intonation – Ear training - Correct Pronunciation – Sound
recognition exercises – Common Errors in English. Conversations: Face to Face
Conversation – Telephone conversation– Role play activities
2. B. Discussion of audio-visual materials (Samples to learn and practice) (6)
1. Resume / Report Preparation / Letter Writing (1)
Structuring the resume / report - Letter writing / Email Communication - Samples.
2. Presentation skills: (1)
Elements of effective presentation – Structure of presentation - Presentation tools –
Voice Modulation – Audience analysis - Body language – Video samples
3. Soft Skills: (2)
Time management – Articulateness – Assertiveness – Psychometrics – Innovation
and Creativity - Stress Management & Poise - Video Samples
4. Group Discussion: (1)
Why is GD part of selection process? - Structure of GD – Moderator – led and other
GDs Strategies in GD – Team work - Body Language - Mock GD –Video samples
5. Interview Skills: (1)
Kinds of interviews – Required Key Skills – Corporate culture – Mock interviews-
Video samples.
3. II. Practice Session (Weightage – 60%)
Resume / Report Preparation / Letter writing: (2)
4. SOFT SKILLS (6)
Hard skills & soft skills – soft skills: self-management skills & people skills - training in soft
skills persuasive skills – sociability skills –interpersonal skills – team building skills –
leadership skills – problem solving skills – adaptability - stress management – motivation
techniques – life skills
5. PRESENTATION SKILLS (6) (6)
Preparing slides with animation related to the topic – organizing the material - Introducing
oneself to the audience – introducing the topic – answering questions – individual
presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively – 5 minute presentation
6. GROUP DISCUSSION SKILLS (5) (5)
Participating in group discussions – understanding group dynamics - brainstorming the
topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies (expressing opinions, accepting or
refusing others opinions, turn taking) – activities to improve GD skills – viewing recorded
GD - mock GD.
7. INTERVIEW SKILLS (5)
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – mock interview -–attending job
interviews – answering questions confidently – technical interview – telephone/Skype
interview - practice in different types of questions – one to one interview &panel interview
– FAQs related to job interview- Emotional and cultural intelligence
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
20
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
• Students will be able to make presentations and participate in group discussions with
high level of self-confidence.
• Students will be able to perform well in the interviews
• They will have adequate reading and writing skills needed for workplace situations
MC5201 L T P C
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn how C++ supports Object Oriented principles such as abstraction,
polymorphism etc
To understand and apply the principles hiding, localization and modularity in
software development.
Use the generic programming features of C++ including the STL.
Design and implement reliable and maintainable object-oriented applications of
moderate complexity composed of several classes.
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 9
Object–Oriented Programming concepts – Encapsulation – Programming Elements –
Program Structure – Enumeration Types –– Functions and Pointers – Function Invocation
– Overloading Functions – Scope and Storage Class – Pointer Types – Arrays and
Pointers – Call–by–Reference – Assertions.
UNIT II IMPLEMENTING ADTS AND ENCAPSULATION 9
Aggregate Type struct – Structure Pointer Operators – Unions – Bit Fields – Data
Handling and Member Functions – Classes – Constructors and Destructors – Static
Member – this Pointer – reference semantics – implementation of simple ADTs.
UNIT III POLYMORPHISM 9
ADT Conversions – Overloading – Overloading Operators – Unary Operator Overloading
– Binary Operator Overloading – Function Selection – Pointer Operators – Visitation –
Iterators – containers – Sequence Containers - List – List Iterators – Associative
Containers
UNIT IV TEMPLATES AND FILE HANDLING 9
Template Class – Function Templates – RTTI Templates - Class Templates –
Parameterizing – STL– Algorithms – Function Adaptors – Streams and Formatted I/O –
I/O Manipulations -File handling – Random Access.
UNIT V INHERITANCE 9
Derived Class – Typing Conversions and Visibility – Code Reuse – Virtual Functions –
Templates andInheritance – Run–Time Type Identifications – Exceptions – Handlers –
Standard Exceptions.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
21
OUTCOMES:
Able to understand and design the solution to a problem using object-oriented
programming concepts.
Able to use proper class protection mechanism to provide security.
Able to demonstrate the use of virtual functions to implement polymorphism.
Understand and implement the features of C++ including templates, exceptions
and file handling for providing programmed solutions to complex problems
Able to reuse the code with extensible Class types, User-defined operators and
function Overloading.
REFERENCES:
1. Bhushan Trivedi, “Programming with ANSI C++”, Oxford Press, Second Edition,
2012.
2. Bhave , “ Object Oriented Programming With C++”, Pearson Education , 2004
3. E Balagurusamy, “Object oriented Programming with C++”, 3 Edition, 2006, Tata
McGraw Hill
4. HM Deitel and PJ Deitel “C++ How to Program”, Seventh Edition, 2010, Prentice Hall
5. Ira Pohl, “Object–Oriented Programming Using C++”, Pearson Education, 2 Edition,
2003
6. Kamthane,” Object Oriented Programming with ANSI and Turbo C++”, Pearson
Education, 2003
7. Ray Lischner, “Exploring C++ : The programmer’s introduction to C++” , apress, 2010
8. Stanley B.Lippman, JoseeLajoie, “C++ Primer”, Pearson Education, Third Edition,
2005
9. S.B Lippman, Josee, JoseeLajoie, Barbara, “ C++ Premier” 4 Edition, Pearson , 2012
MC5202 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the architecture of embedded processors, microcontrollers, and peripheral
devices.
To appreciate the nuances of programming micro-controllers in assembly for embedded
systems.
To understand the challenges in developing operating systems for embedded systems.
To learn about programming these systems in high-level languages such as C.
UNIT I EMBEDDED COMPUTING 9
Challenges of Embedded Systems – Embedded system design process. Embedded processors –
8051 Microcontroller, ARM processor – Architecture, Instruction sets and programming.
UNIT II MEMORY AND INPUT / OUTPUT MANAGEMENT 9
Programming Input and Output – Memory system mechanisms – Memory and I/O devices and
interfacing – Interrupt handling.
UNIT III PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS 9
Multiple tasks and processes – Context switching – Scheduling policies – Interprocess communication
mechanisms – Performance issues.
22
UNIT IV EMBEDDED C PROGRAMMING 9
Programming embedded systems in C – C-looping structures – Register allocation – Function calls –
Pointer aliasing – structure arrangement – bit fields – unaligned data and endianness – inline
functions and inline assembly – portability issues.
UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT 9
Meeting real time constraints – Multi-state systems and function sequences. Embedded software
development tools – Emulators and debuggers. Introduction to Internet of Things - Design issues –
Design methodologies – Case studies using IoT– Complete design of example systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Andrew N Sloss, D. Symes, C. Wright, “ARM System Developers Guide”, Morgan Kauffman/
Elsevier,2006. (unit 4)
2. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities Press,
2015
3. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. Mc Kinlay, “The 8051
4. Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Pearson Education, Second edition, 2007 (unit 1)
5. Michael J. Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education , 2007.
6. Steve Heath, “Embedded System Design”, Elsevier, 2005.
7. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components:Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”,
Elsevier, 2006.
MC5203 L T P C
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide an insight into software life cycle and various software process models
To estimate the resources for developing the application and to prepare the schedule
To know the various designing concepts and notations for modeling the software.
To prepare the test cases for the project, apply various testing techniques, strategies
and metrics to evaluate the software.
To construct software with high quality and reliability.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Software Engineering Paradigms – Waterfall Life Cycle Model – Spiral Model – Prototype
Model – Agile Process Model – Unified Process Model - Planning – Software Project
Scheduling – SRS - Case Study: Project Plan and SRS
UNIT II SOFTWARE DESIGN 9
Designing Concepts - Abstraction – Modularity – Software Architecture – Cohesion –
Coupling – Dataflow Oriented Design - Jackson System Development - Real time and
Distributed System Design – Designing for Reuse –– Case Study : Design for any
Application Oriented Project.
UNIT III SOFTWARE TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9
Software Testing Fundamentals – Software Testing Strategies – Black Box Testing – White
Box Testing – System Testing – Object Orientation Testing – State Based Testing - Testing
Tools – Test Case Management – Types of Maintenance – Case Study: Testing
Techniques.
23
UNIT IV SOFTWARE METRICS 9
Scope – Classification of metrics – Measuring Process and Product attributes – Direct and
Indirect measures – Cost Estimation - Reliability – Software Quality Assurance – Standards –
Case Study for COCOMO model.
UNIT V SCM & WEB ENGINEERING 9
Need for SCM – Version Control – SCM process – Software Configuration Items –
Taxonomy – Re Engineering – Reverse Engineering - Web Engineering - CASE Repository –
Features.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the problem domain to choose process models and to develop
SRS
Able to model software projects using appropriate design notations
Able to measure the product and process performance using various metrics
Able to evaluate the system with various testing techniques and strategies
Able to analyze, design, verify, validate, implement, and maintain software systems.
REFERENCES:
1. Ali Behforroz, Frederick J.Hudson, “Software Engineering Fundamentals”, Oxford
Indian Reprint,2012.
2. Jibitesh Mishra, Ashok Mohanty, “Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, First
Edition, 2011.
3. Kassem A. Saleh, “Software Engineering”, First Edition, J.Ross Publishing, 2009.
4. Pankaj Jalote, “An Integrated approach to Software Engineering”, Third Edition,
Narosa Publications, 2011.
5. Roger S. Pressman, David Lowe, “Web Engineering: A Practitioner’s Approach”,
Special Indian edition, McGrawHill, 2008.
6. Richard Fairley, “Software Engineering Concepts”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2008
7. Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering: A Practitioner Approach”, Seventh
Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill International Edition, 2009.
8. Sommerville, “Software Engineering”, Tenth Edition, Pearson, 2015.
MC5204 OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To be aware of the evolution and fundamental principles of operating system,
processes and their communication
To understand the various operating system components like process management,
memory management and
To know about file management and the distributed file system concepts in operating
systems
To be aware of components of operating system with relevant case study.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction -Types of operating systems-operating systems structures-Systems
components- operating systems services-System calls-Systems programs-Processes-
process concept- process scheduling-operation on processes-co-operating processes-Inter
process communications-CPU Scheduling-Scheduling criteria-Scheduling algorithms-
Multiple-processor Scheduling.
24
UNIT II PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION 9
Process Synchronization –Critical Section problem – Semaphores-Classical problems of
synchronization-critical regions-Monitors-Deadlock Characterization-Deadlock handling-
Deadlock Prevention-Deadlock avoidance-Deadlock Detection-Deadlock Recovery –
Threads-Multithreading Models.
UNIT III MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9
Memory Management-Swapping-Contiguous Memory allocation-Paging-Segmentation-
Virtual Memory-Demand paging-Page Replacement-Thrashing.
UNIT IV DISK SCHEDULING AND DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS 9
Disk Structures-Disk Scheduling-File Systems Interface-File concepts-Access methods-
Directory Structures-File System Implementation-File Systems structures-Directory
Implementation-Allocation Methods-Free Space management-Distributed File systems-
Naming and Transparency-Remote File Accesses- Stateful Versus Stateless Service-File
replication.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9
Linux System-design Principles- process management-File Systems-Windows 7- history-
design Principles –system components –Virtual machine OS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the operating system components and its services
Implement the algorithms in process management and solving the issues of IPC
Able to demonstrate the mapping between the physical memory and virtual memory
Able to understand file handling concepts in OS perspective
Able to understand the operating system components and services with the recent OS
REFERENCES:
1. Abraham Silberschalz Peter B Galvin, G.Gagne, “Operating Systems Concepts”, 9th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
2. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, “Modern operating Systems”, Third Edition, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2008
3. D M Dhamdhere, “ Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Second Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2007
4. H M Deital, P J Deital and D R Choffnes, “Operating Systems”, 3rd edition, Pearson
Education, 2011
5. William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Seventh
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2011
25
MC5205 L T P C
COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge and understanding in the fundamental principles of Computer
Graphics and Mathematical concepts related to Computer graphical operations.
To provide in-depth knowledge of display systems, image synthesis and shape
modelling of 3D applications.
To understand the basic concepts related to Multimedia including data standards,
algorithms and software.
To Experience the development of Multimedia application to display their ability by
using Multimedia tools.
UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9
2D Transformations – Clipping – Point Clipping – Line Clipping – Polygon Clipping – Text
Clipping – Exterior Clipping – Window to View Port Mapping – Interactive Input Methods –
Picture Construction Techniques.
UNIT II 3D GRAPHICS 9
3D Concepts – 3D Transformations – 3D Viewing – Visible Surface Detection Methods –
Back Face Detection Method – Depth Buffer Method – Scan Line Method –Virtual Reality
Environment.
UNIT III MULTIMEDIA BASICS 9
Introduction to Multimedia – Applications– Hypermedia – Authoring –– File formats –Color
Models – Digital Audio– Digital Music Making – MIDI – Digital Video – Video Compression
Techniques – Video Performance Measurements –Multimedia Databases–Animation.
UNIT IV MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION 9
Multimedia Network Services–Network Protocols–Requirements for Multimedia
Communications – Multimedia Conferencing Architectures –QuickTime Movie File Format–
MHEG–Multimedia File Sharing –Multimedia & Internet–Real-Time Interchange.
UNIT V MULTIMEDIA APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 9
Design of a Multimedia System –Content Based Information Retrieval – HDTV, ATV, EDTV,
IDTV Standards –Development of User Interface Design – Multimedia Broadcasting –Social
Media Sharing – Multimedia Development Issues – Sample Multimedia Project.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Gain proficiency in various algorithms of 2D Computer graphics and trend their use in
various real-life systems.
Enhance the perspective of Modern computer system with modelling, analysis and
interpretation of 3D visual information.
Able to understand different forms of Multimedia and gain knowledge about Audio and
Video.
Able to understand the Networks used for Multimedia and to communicate with
Multimedia Applications.
Able to design and implement a number of Multimedia Applications and to do Research
in Multimedia Industry.
26
REFERENCES:
1. Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C Version”, Second
Edition, Pearson Education
2. David Hillman, “Multimedia – Technology and applications”,Galgotia Publications,
Delhi, 2008
3. John F. KoegelBuford , “Multimedia Systems”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 6th Edition,
2009
4. Mohammad Dastbaz, Designing Interactive Multimedia Systems, McGraw-Hill
Publishers, 2002
5. Parag Havaldar and Gerard Medioni, “Multimedia Systems-Algorithms, Standards
and Industry Practices”,Cengage Learning, 2009
6. Ralf Steinmetz and Klara “Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications”,
Pearson Education,2009
7. Tom McReynolds – David Blythe,“ Advanced Graphics Programming Using
OpenGL”, Elsevier, 2005
8. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S Drew and Jiangchuan Liu, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Second
Edition, Springer, 2014
MC5211 L T P C
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To develop skills in object oriented programming
To learn generic data structures using templates
To learn virtual functions and file handling in C++
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a C++ Program to illustrate Enumeration and Function Overloading
2. Write a C++ Program to illustrate Scope and Storage class
3. Implementation of ADT such as Stack and Queues
4. Write a C++ Program to illustrate the use of Constructors and Destructors and Constructor
Overloading
5. Write a Program to illustrate Static member and methods
6. Write a Program to illustrate Bit fields
7. Write a Program to overload as binary operator, friend and member function
8. Write a Program to overload unary operator in Postfix and Prefix form as member and friend
function
9. Write a Program to illustrate Iterators and Containers
10. Write a C++ Program to illustrate function templates
11. Write a C++ Program to illustrate template class
12. Write C++ Programs and incorporating various forms of Inheritance
13. Write a C++ Program to illustrate Virtual functions
14. Exception Handling
15. File Handling – Read, Write, Update
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
27
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop programs in object oriented paradigm
Implement data structure using C++
Suggest appropriate data structure for any given data set
Modify or suggest new data structure for an application.
File handling in object oriented environment.
MC5212 GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To study the graphics techniques and algorithms
To understand the concept of geometric, mathematical and algorithmic concepts necessary
for programming computer graphics
To enable the students to develop their creativity using Multimedia concepts and various I/O
technologies
To apply Multimedia data processing and analysis techniques to real world applications
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Creation of 2Dimensional objects using Graphics functions
2. 2Dimensional Transformations
3. 2Dimensional Composite Transformations
4. Clipping and Windowing of a 2Dimensional Object
5. 3Dimensional Simple Transformations
6. 3Dimensional Composite Transformations
7. Parallel and Perspective Projections
8. Visible Surface Detection of a 3Dimensional Object
a) Color to Gray scale conversion of an image
b) Image optimization
9.
c) Image manipulation using Filters
d) Creation of GIF animated images
a) Image Compression
b) Guide layer effects in an image
10.
c) Frame by Frame Animation
d) Product Advertisement with Multimedia effects
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Function as designers, applying Mathematics knowledge for various calculations,
involving tools for analyzing the world, accessing and interpreting the
information and representing what they know to others.
Gain knowledge about the creation of text, image, graphic and animation files.
Learn about authoring tools for packaging multimedia systems and to use a
variety of common software packages to complete the experiments.
28
LIST OF SOFTWARE:
1. C/C++/Java
2. OpenGL 4.1 (Precompiled GLUT libraries 4.1 – Open source)
3. Any open source software like GIMP 2.8/ Flash 11.9 /Photoshop
LAB EQUIPMENTS:
30 Machines with intel i5/i7 processor with minimum 4GB RAM and 1TB Hard Disk
C/C++/ Java
Any open source software such as GIMP 2.8 / Flash 11.9 / Photoshop
Minimum 4GB Graphics Card
L T P C
MC5213 OPERATING SYSTEMS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To involve the students to Practice on Workbench /Software Tools/ Hardware Processor
Boards with the supporting Peripherals.
To teach the concepts of algorithm development & programming on software tools and
micro controllers with peripheral interfaces.
Learn shell programming and the use of filters in the UNIX environment.
Learn to use the system calls and inter process communication.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 8051 Microcontroller Based 8-bit Addition & Subtraction
2. 8051 Microcontroller Based 8-bit Multiplication & Division
3. 8051 Microcontroller Based I/O Interfacing to verify timer operations
4. Real Time Systems Program Using RTOS (like LED Display)
5. Basics of UNIX commands and Shell Programming
6. Implement the following CPU scheduling algorithms a) Round Robin b) SJF c) FCFS d)
Priority
7. Process creation, Process synchronization & Interprocess communication using
semaphores
8. Pipes and message in UNIX environment
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Perform arithmetic operation using 8085 microprocessor and 8051microcontroller along
with I/O interfacing.
Improved Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge up gradation on
recent trends in embedded systems design.
Create system calls, processes and implement IPC.
Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithm
29
MC5301 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Understand and apply linear data structures-List, Stack and Queue.
Understand the graph algorithms.
Learn different algorithms analysis techniques.
Apply data structures and algorithms in real time applications
Able to analyze the efficiency of algorithm
UNIT I LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES 9
Introduction - Abstract Data Types (ADT) – Stack – Queue – Circular Queue - Double Ended
Queue - Applications of stack – Evaluating Arithmetic Expressions - Other Applications -
Applications of Queue - Linked Lists - Singly Linked List - Circularly Linked List - Doubly
Linked lists – Applications of linked list – Polynomial Manipulation.
UNIT II NON-LINEAR TREE STRUCTURES 9
Binary Tree – expression trees – Binary tree traversals – applications of trees – Huffman
Algorithm - Binary search tree - Balanced Trees - AVL Tree - B-Tree - Splay Trees – Heap-
Heap operations- -Binomial Heaps - Fibonacci Heaps- Hash set.
UNIT III GRAPHS 9
Representation of graph - Graph Traversals - Depth-first and breadth-first traversal -
Applications of graphs - Topological sort – shortest-path algorithms - Dijkstra’s algorithm –
Bellman-Ford algorithm – Floyd's Algorithm - minimum spanning tree – Prim's and Kruskal's
algorithms.
UNIT IV ALGORITHM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS 9
Algorithm Analysis – Asymptotic Notations - Divide and Conquer – Merge Sort – Quick Sort -
Binary Search - Greedy Algorithms – Knapsack Problem – Dynamic Programming – Optimal
Binary Search Tree - Warshall’s Algorithm for Finding Transitive Closure.
UNIT V ADVANCED ALGORITHM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS 9
Backtracking – N-Queen's Problem - Branch and Bound – Assignment Problem - P & NP
problems – NP-complete problems – Approximation algorithms for NP-hard problems –
Traveling salesman problem-Amortized Analysis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Describe, explain and use abstract data types including stacks, queues and lists
Design and Implement Tree data structures and Sets
Able to understand and implement non linear data structures - graphs.
Able to understand various algorithm design and implementation.
30
REFERENCES:
1. Anany Levitin “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms” Pearson
Education, 2015
2. E. Horowitz, S.Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data structures in C++”,
University Press, 2007
3. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajasekaran, “Computer Algorithms/C++”, Second
Edition, University Press, 2007
4. Gilles Brassard, “Fundamentals of Algorithms”, Pearson Education 2015
5. Harsh Bhasin, “Algorithms Design and Analysis”, Oxford University Press 2015
6. John R.Hubbard, “Data Structures with Java”, Pearson Education, 2015
7. M. A. Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in Java”, Pearson Education
Asia, 2013
8. Peter Drake, “Data Structures and Algorithms in Java”, Pearson Education 2014
9. T. H. Cormen, C. E. Leiserson, R. L. Rivest, and C. Stein, "Introduction to
algorithms", Thrid Edition, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2012
10. Tanaenbaum A.S.,Langram Y. Augestein M.J, “Data Structures using C” Pearson
Education , 2004.
11. V. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft, and J. D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education, 1983
MC5302 COMPUTER NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand networking concepts and basic communication model
To understand network architectures and components required for data
communication.
To analyze the function and design strategy of physical, data link, network layer
and transport layer
To acquire basic knowledge of various application protocol for internetsecurity
issues and services.
UNIT I NETWORK FUNDAMENTALS 9
Uses of Networks – Categories of Networks -Communication model –Data transmission
concepts and terminology – Protocol architecture – Protocols – OSI – TCP/IP – LAN
Topology - Transmission media .
UNIT II DATA LINK LAYER 9
Data link control - Flow Control – Error Detection and Error Correction - MAC – Ethernet,
Token ring, Wireless LAN MAC – Blue Tooth – Bridges.
UNIT III NETWORK LAYER 9
Network layer – Switching concepts – Circuit switching – Packet switching –IP ––
Datagrams ––IP addresses- IPV6– ICMP – Routing Protocols – Distance Vector – Link
State- BGP.
31
UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Transport layer –service –Connection establishment – Flow control – Transmission control
protocol – Congestion control and avoidance – User datagram protocol. -Transport for
Real Time Applications (RTP).
UNIT V APPLICATIONS AND SECURITY 9
Applications - DNS- SMTP – WWW –SNMP- Security –threats and services - DES- RSA.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to trace the flow of information from one node to another node in the network
Able to Identify the components required to build different types of networks
Able to understand the functionalities needed for data communication into layers
Able to choose the required functionality at each layer for given application
Able to understand the working principles of various application protocols and
fundamentals of security issues and services available.
REFERENCES:
1. Achyut S Godbole,AtulHahate, “ Data Communications and Networks”, Second
edition 2011
2. Andrew S.Tannenbaum David J. Wetherall, “Computer Networks” Fifth Edition ,
Pearson Education 2011
3. Douglas E. Comer, ―Internetworking with TCP/IP (Volume I) Principles, Protocols
and Architecture‖, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2013.
4. Forouzan, “ Data Communication and Networking”, Fifth Edition , TMH 2012.
5. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top-down Approach,
Pearson Education, Limited, sixth edition,2012.
6. John Cowley, “Communications and Networking : An Introduction”, Springer Indian
Reprint, 2010.
7. Larry L. Peterson & Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks – A systems Approach”,
Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012
8. William Stallings, ―Data and Computer Communications‖, Tenth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013
9. Wayne Tomasi, “ Introduction to Data communications and Networking” , Pearson
2011
MC5303 WEB PROGRAMMING ESSENTIALS LTPC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the concepts and architecture of the World Wide Web.
• To understand and practice markup languages
• To understand and practice embedded dynamic scripting on client side Internet
Programming
• To understand and practice web development techniques on client-side.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WWW 9
Internet Standards – Introduction to WWW – WWW Architecture – SMTP – POP3 – File
Transfer Protocol - Overview of HTTP, HTTP request – response –– Generation of dynamic
web pages.
32
UNIT II UI DESIGN 9
Markup Language (HTML5): Basics of Html -Syntax and tags of Html- Introduction to
HTML5 -Semantic/Structural Elements -HTML5 style Guide and Coding Convention– Html
Svg and Canvas – Html API’s - Audio & Video - Drag/Drop - Local Storage - Web socket
API– Debugging and validating Html.
Cascading Style Sheet (CSS3): The need for CSS – Basic syntax and structure Inline
Styles – Embedding Style Sheets - Linking External Style Sheets - Introduction to CSS3 –
Backgrounds - Manipulating text - Margins and Padding - Positioning using CSS -
Responsive Web Design - Introduction to LESS/SASS
UNIT III OVERVIEW OF JAVASCRIPT 9
Introduction - Core features - Data types and Variables - Operators, Expressions, and
Statements Functions - Objects - Array, Date and Math Related Objects - Document Object
Model - Event Handling - Controlling Windows & Frames and Documents - Form validations.
UNIT IV ADVANCED FEATURES OF JAVASCRIPT 9
Browser Management and Media Management – Classes – Constructors – Object-Oriented
Techniques in JavaScript – Object constructor and Prototyping - Sub classes and Super
classes – Introduction to JSON – JSON Structure –Introduction to jQuery –Introduction to
AJAX-Bootstrap - Bootstrap components.
UNIT V PHP 9
Introduction - How web works - Setting up the environment (LAMP server) - Programming
basics Print/echo - Variables and constants – Strings and Arrays – Operators, Control
structures and looping structures – Functions – Reading Data in Web Pages - Embedding
PHP within HTML - Establishing connectivity with MySQL database.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Create a basic website using HTML and Cascading Style Sheets.
Design and implement dynamic web page with validation using JavaScript objects
and by applying different event handling mechanisms.
Design rich client presentation using AJAX.
Design and implement simple web page in PHP, and to present data in XML format.
Design front end web page and connect to the back end databases
REFERENCES:
1. David Flanagan, “JavaScript: The Definitive Guide, Sixth Edition”, O'Reilly Media,
2011
2. Harvey & Paul Deitel& Associates, Harvey Deitel and Abbey Deitel, “Internet and
World Wide Web - How To Program”, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2011
3. James Lee, BrentWare , “Open Source Development with LAMP: Using Linux,
Apache, MySQL, Perl, and PHP” AddisonWesley, Pearson 2009
4. Thomas A. Powell, “HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, Fifth Edition, 2010
5. Thomas A Powell, Fritz Schneider, “JavaScript: The Complete Reference”, Third
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013
6. Thomas A Powell, “Ajax: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, 2008
33
MC5304 PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To provide an overview of working principles of internet, web related functionalities
• To understand and apply the fundamentals core java, packages, database connectivity
for computing
• To enhance the knowledge to server side programming.
• To Understand the OOPS concept & how to apply in programming.
UNIT I JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 9
Java features – Java Platform – Java Fundamentals – Expressions, Operators, and Control
Structures – Classes, Methods – Inheritance - Packages and Interfaces – Boxing, Unboxing
– Variable-Length Arguments (Varargs), Exception Handling.
UNIT II COLLECTIONS AND ADVANCE FEATURES 9
Utility Packages- Introduction to collection –Hierarchy of Collection framework – Generics,
Array list, LL, HashSet, Treeset, HashMap – Comparators – Java annotations – Premain
method.
UNIT III ADVANCED JAVAPROGRAMMING 9
Input Output Packages – Inner Classes – Java Database Connectivity - Introduction JDBC
Drivers - JDBC connectivity with MySQL/Oracle -Prepared Statement & Result Set – JDBC
Stored procedures invocation - Servlets - RMI – Swing Fundamentals - Swing Classes.
UNIT IV OVERVIEW OF DATA RETRIEVAL & ENTERPRISE APPLICATION 9
DEVELOPMENT
Tiered Application development - Java Servers, containers –Web Container – Creating Web
Application using JSP/Servlets – Web Frameworks Introduction to Spring/ Play Framework –
ORM Layer – Introduction to Hibernate.
UNIT V JAVA INTERNALS AND NETWORKING 9
Java jar Files-Introspection – Garbage collection – Architecture and design – GC Cleanup
process, Invoking GC, Generation in GC - Networking Basics Java and the Net –
InetAddress – TCP/IP Client Sockets – URL –URL Connection – TCP/IP Server Sockets – A
Caching Proxy HTTP Server – Datagrams.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Implement Java programs.
Make use of hierarchy of Java classes to provide a solution to a given set of
requirements found in the Java API
Use the frameworks JSP, Hibernate, Spring
Design and implement server side programs using Servlets and JSP.
REFERENCES:
1. Amritendu De, “Spring 4 and Hibernate 4: Agile Java Design and Development”,
McGraw-Hill Education, 2015
2. Herbert Schildt, The Complete Reference – Java 2, Ninth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2014
3. Joyce Farrell, “Java Programming”, Cengage Learning, Seventh Edition, 2014
34
4. John Dean, Raymond Dean, “Introduction to Programming with JAVA – A Problem
Solving Approach”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2014.
5. Mahesh P. Matha, “Core Java A Comprehensive Study”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011
6. R. Nageswara Rao,“Core Java: An Integrated Approach”, DreamTech Press, 2016
MC5305 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To provide a brief, hands-on overview of object-oriented concepts and its life cycle for
software development.
To learn for modelling the software and to design them using UML diagrams
To understand the problem domain and to identify the objects from the problem
specification.
To understand, how to apply design axioms and corollaries for the classes and object
relational systems.
To gain knowledge about open source tools for Computer Aided Software Engineering
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9+6
An overview – Object basics – Object state and properties – Behaviour – Methods –
Messages – Information hiding – Class hierarchy – Relationships – Associations –
Aggregations- Identity – Dynamic binding – Persistence – Meta classes – Object oriented
system development life cycle.
UNIT II METHODOLOGY AND UML 9+6
Introduction – Survey – Rumbaugh, Booch, Jacobson methods – Unified modelling language
– Static and Dynamic models – Rational Rose Suite - UML diagrams – Static diagram : Class
diagram – Use case diagrams – Behaviour Diagram : Interaction diagram – State chart
diagram – Activity diagram - Implementation diagram: Component diagram – Deployment
diagram – example - Design of online railway reservation system using UML diagrams -
Dynamic modelling – Model organization – Extensibility.
UNIT III OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS 9+6
Identifying Use case – Business object analysis – Use case driven object oriented analysis –
Use case model – Documentation – Classification – Identifying object, relationships,
attributes, methods – Super-sub class – A part of relationships Identifying attributes and
methods – Object responsibility – construction of class diagram for generalization,
aggregation – example – vehicle class.
UNIT IV OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN 9+6
Design process and benchmarking – Axioms – Corollaries – Designing classes – Class
visibility – Refining attributes – Methods and protocols – Object storage and object
interoperability – Databases – Object relational systems – Designing interface objects –
Macro and Micro level processes – The purpose of a view layer interface-OOUI - MVC
Architectural Pattern and Design – Designing the system.
35
UNIT V CASE TOOLS 9+6
Railway domain : Platform assignment system for the trains in a railway station - Academic
domain : Student Marks Analysing System - ATM system - Stock maintenance - Quiz
System - E-mail Client system - Cryptanalysis – Health Care Systems. Use Open source
CASE Tools: StarUML/ UML Graph for the above case studies.
L : 45, T : 30 TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the object oriented concepts and to apply object oriented life cycle
model for a project.
Able to design static and dynamic models using UML diagrams.
Able to perform object oriented analysis to identify the objects from the problem
specification.
Able to identify and refine the attributes and methods for designing the object oriented
system.
Able learn the open source CASE tools and to apply them in various domains.
REFERENCES
1. Ali Bahrami, “Object Oriented System Development”, McGraw Hill International
Edition, 2008
2. Brahma Dathan, Sarnath Ramnath, “Object-Oriented Analysis, Design and
Implementation”, Universities Press, 2010
3. Bernd Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, Object Oriented Software Engineering using UML,
Patterns and Java, Pearson 2004
4. Craig Larman, Applying UML and Patterns – An Introduction to Object-Oriented
Analysis and Design and Iterative Development” , 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,
2005
5. Grady Booch, James Rumbaugh, Ivar Jacobson, “The Unified Modeling Language
User Guide”, Addison Wesley Long man, 1999
6. Martin Fowler, “UML Distilled A Brief Guide to Standard Object Modeling Language”,
3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2003
7. Russ Miles, Kim Hamilton, “Learning UML 2.0”, O’Reilly, 2008
8. http://staruml.sourceforge.net/docs/StarUML_5.0_Developer_Guide.pdf
9. . http://www.spinellis.gr/umlgraph/doc/index.html
MC5311 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To develop skills in design and implementation of data structures.
To learn and implement linear, non linear and tree data structures.
To learn Set ADT and Graph data structures and its applications.
To study, implement and analyze the different sorting techniques.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Array implementation of stack
2. Linked list implementation of Queue
3. Polynomial Addition using Linked List
36
4. Binary Search tree operations
5. AVL Tree operations
6. Graph Traversals
7. Shortest Path using Dijkstra’s Algorithm
8. Minimum Spanning Tree using Prim's Algorithm
9. Dictionary application using any of the data structure
10. Divide and Conquer Method - Merge Sort
11. Back Tracking - 8-Queen's Problem
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Work with basic data structures that are suitable for the problems to be solved efficiently.
Design and implement linear, tree, and graph structures and its applications
Design various sorting techniques, its algorithm design and analysis
MC5312 WEB PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
Try and develop the most important technologies that are being used today by web
developers to build a wide variety of web applications.
To build web applications using proven developer tools and message formats.
To understand and practice web development techniques on client-side
Web applications using technologies such as HTML, CSS, Javascript, AJAX, JQuery
and JSON.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Create your own Resume using HTML 5 Tags
2. Debug and validate your HTML document ( Resume ) using W3C validator and fix the
issues.
(https://validator.w3.org/#validate_by_upload ).
3. Add Styles to your Resume using CSS 3 Properties.
Add External, Internal and Inline CSS styles to know the priority.
Add CSS3 Animation to your profile.
4. (a) Add functionalities that use any 2 of HTML 5 API’s.
(b). Create a student Registration form for Job Application and validate the form fields
using JavaScript.
5. (a) Create a CGPA Calculator in Web Brower using HTML, CSS and JavaScript. Use
functions in JavaScript.
(b) Create a Quiz Program with adaptive questions using JavaScript.
6. Create a Pan Card Validation form using Object Oriented JavaScript, consider the 10th
character to be an alphabet.
Get the user’s First Name, Last Name and other required fields as input
Assume the last digit of the Pan Number to be an alphabet
Validate the PAN Number.
7. (a) Create an online Event Registration form and validate using JQuery
(b) Create an online video Player which will allow you to play videos from the system and
also create custom playlist using JQuery.
37
8. Construct a JSON Structure for a bookstore and validate it using JSON Validator such as
http://jsonlint.com/ and parse the Json file to list the books under the category “Fiction”.
Use Javascript or JQuery for parsing.
9. Create a Single Page application allowing to search for a movie and displaying the trailer,
poster for various movies.
Create an admin login to upload the trailer, poster, keyword and details of the
movie.
Use Bootstrap and JQuery for designing the User Interface.
Form Submission should be handled through Ajax.
10. Using PHP and MySQL, develop a program to accept book information viz. Accession
number, title, authors, edition and publisher from a web page and store the information in
a database and to search for a book with the title specified by the user and to display the
search results with proper headings.
11. Develop a Social Media Web Application using HTML5, CSS3, JQuery, AJAX & PHP.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Develop simple web applications using scripting languages.
Implement server side and client side programming develop web applications with
various web technology concepts.
Design a Web application using various technologies such as AJAX, JQuery and JSON.
Develop an application for social media using HTML5, CSS3, JQuery, AJAX & PHP
MC5313 PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
Try and develop the most important technologies that are being used today by web developers
to build a wide variety of web applications.
To develop Java based web programming.
To understand and apply the fundamentals core java, packages, database connectivity for
computing
To enhance the knowledge to server side programming
To provide knowledge on advanced features like Swing, JavaBeans, Sockets.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Writing Java programs by making use of class, interface, package, etc for the following
● # Different types of inheritance study
● # Uses of ‘this’ keyword
● # Polymorphism
● # Creation of user specific packages
● # Creation of jar files and using them
● # User specific exception handling
2. Writing window based GUI applications using frames and applets such as Calculator
application, Fahrenheit to Centigrade conversion etc.
3. Application of threads examples
4. Create a Personal Information System using Swing
38
5. Event Handling in Swing
6. Reading and writing text files
7. Writing an RMI application to access a remote method
8. Writing a Servlet program with database connectivity for a web based application such as
students result status checking, PNR number enquiry etc.
9. Creation and usage of Java bean
10. Create an Application to search Phone Number using contact Name Using Hash Map.
11. Create an Application which finds the Duplicates in E-mail using Set Interface.
12. FTP Using Sockets.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Apply the Object Oriented features of Java for programming on the internet
Implement, compile, test and run Java program,
Make use of hierarchy of Java classes to provide a solution to a given set of requirements
found in the Java API
Understand the components and patterns that constitute a suitable architecture for a web
application using java servlets
Demonstrate systematic knowledge of backend and front end by developing an appropriate
application.
Implement socket programming and Client side scripting in Java
MC5401 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide the concept and an understanding of basic concepts in Operations
Research Techniques for Analysis and Modeling in Computer Applications.
To understand , develop and solve mathematical model of linear programming
problems
To understand , develop and solve mathematical model of Transport and assignment
problems
To Understand network modeling for planning and scheduling the project activities
UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING MODELS 9
Mathematical Formulation - Graphical Solution of linear programming models – Simplex
method – Artificial variable Techniques.
UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODELS 9
Mathematical formulation of transportation problem- Methods for finding initial basic feasible
solution – optimum solution - degeneracy –Mathematical formulation of assignment models –
Hungarian Algorithm.
UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING MODELS 9
Formulation – Gomory’s IPP method – Gomory’s mixed integer method – Branch and
bound technique.
39
UNIT IV SCHEDULING BY PERT AND CPM 9
Network Construction – Critical Path Method – Project Evaluation and Review Technique –
Resource Analysis in Network Scheduling
UNIT V QUEUEING MODELS 9
Characteristics of Queuing Models – Poisson Queues - (M / M / 1) : (FIFO / ∞ /∞), (M / M /
1) : (FIFO / N / ∞), (M / M / C) : (FIFO / ∞ / ∞), (M / M / C) : (FIFO / N / ∞) models.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
• Understand and apply linear, integer programming to solve operational problem with
constraints
• Apply transportation and assignment models to find optimal solution in warehousing
and Travelling,
• To prepare project scheduling using PERT and CPM
• Identify and analyze appropriate queuing model to reduce the waiting time in queue.
• Able to use optimization concepts in real world problems
REFERENCES:
1. A.M.Natarajan, P.Balasubramani, A.Tamilarasi, “Operations Research”, Pearson
Education, Asia, 2005
2. Gross, D. and Harris, C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, Wiley Student, 3rd
Edition, New Jersy, 2004
3. Ibe, O.C. “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier,
U.P., 1st Indian Reprint, 2007
4. John W. Chinneck “Feasibility and Infeasibility in Optimization Algorithms and
Computational Methods’ Springer, 2008.
5. N. D Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management,Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2010
6. Prem Kumar Gupta, D.S. Hira, “Operations Research”, S.Chand& Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 3rd Edition , 2008
7. Ravindran, Phillips, Solberg,”Operations Research: Principles And Practice”, 2ND
ED, John Wiley & Sons,2007
8. Taha H.A., “Operations Research : An Introduction “ 8th Edition, Pearson Education,
2008
MC5402 MOBILE COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the basic concepts, aware of the GSM, SMS, GPRS Architecture.
To have an exposure about wireless protocols -WLN, Bluetooth, WAP, ZigBee
issues.
To Know the Network, Transport Functionalities of Mobile communication.
To impart knowledge about Mobile Application Development Platform
To impart the knowledge about basic components needed for Mobile App
development
UNIT I WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNDAMENTALS, ARCHITECTURE 9
Frequency Spectrum- Multiplexing- Spread spectrum-GSM vs CDMA - -Comparison of 2G , 3
G, 4G - GSM Architecture-Entities-Call Routing- Address and identifiers- GSM Protocol
architecture-Mobility Management-Frequency Allocation- Security –GPRS Architecture (entity
and Protocol).
40
UNIT II MOBILE WIRELESS SHORT RANGE NETWORKS 9
Introduction-WLAN Equipment-WLAN Topologies-WLAN Technologies-IEEE 802.11
Architecture-WLAN MAC-Security of WLAN, Power Management-Standards- WAP
Architecture- Bluetooth enabled Devices Network-Layers in Bluetooth Protocol-Security in
Bluetooth- IrDA- ZigBee.
UNIT III MOBILE IP NETWORK LAYER, TRANSPORT LAYER 9
IP and Mobile IP Network Layer- Packet delivery and Handover Management-Location
Management- Registration- Tunneling and Encapsulation-Route Optimization- Mobile
Transport Layer-Conventional TCP/IP Transport Layer Protocol-Indirect, Snooping, Mobile
TCP.
UNIT IV MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT USING ANDROID 9
Mobile Applications Development - Understanding the Android Software Stack – Android
Application Architecture –The Android Application Life Cycle – The Activity Life Cycle-
Creating Android Activity -Views- Layout -Creating User Interfaces with basic views- linking
activities with Intents.
UNIT V MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT USING ANDROID 9
Services-Broadcast Receivers – Adapters – Data Storage, Retrieval and Sharing.-Location
based services- Development of simple mobile applications .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Gain the knowledge about various types of Wireless Data Networks and Voice Networks.
understand the architectures, the challenges and the Solutions of Wireless
Communication
Realize the role of Wireless Protocols in shaping the future Internet.
Able to develop simple Mobile Application Using Android
REFERENCES:
1. Asoke K Talukder, Hasan Ahmed,Roopa R Yavagal “Mobile Computing”, Tata
McGraw Hill Pub ,2nd Edition Aug – 2010.
2. Barry A. Burd ,’Android Application Development For Dummies All in One”, Wiley,
2015.
3. Ed Burnette,’Hello, Android: Introducing Google’s Mobile Development Platform’ third
edition’ Pragmatic Programmers,2012.
4. Jochen Schillar “Mobile Communications” Pearson Education second Edition.
5. Jerome(J.F) DiMarzio “Android A programmer’s Guide” Tata McGraw-Hill 2010
Edition.
6. Maritn Sauter, ―From GSM to LTE: An Introduction to Mobile Networks and Mobile
Broadband‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2011 .
7. Raj Kamal “Mobile Computing” Oxford Higher Education, Second Edition, 2012.
8. Reto Meier,Professional Android 2 Application Development, Wrox’s Programmer to
Programmer series.
41
MC5403 ADVANCED DATABASE AND DATA MINING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the underlying principles of Relational Database Management System.
To Understand Data mining principles and techniques and Introduce DM as a cutting
edgebusiness intelligence
To learn to use association rule mining for handling large data
To understand the concept of classification for the retrieval purposes
To know the clustering techniques in details for better organization and retrieval of data
To identify Business applications and Trends of Data mining
UNIT I RELATIONAL MODEL 9
Data Model – Types of Data Models: – Entity Relationship Model – Relational Data Model –
Mapping Entity Relationship Model to Relational Model – Structured Query Language –
Database Normalization – Transaction Management.
UNIT II DATA MINING & DATA PREPROCESSING 9
Introduction to KDD process – Knowledge Discovery from Databases - Need for Data
Preprocessing – Data Cleaning – Data Integration and Transformation – Data Reduction –
Data Discretization andConcept Hierarchy Generation.
UNIT III ASSOCIATION RULE MINING 9
Introduction - Data Mining Functionalities - Association Rule Mining - Mining Frequent
Itemsets withand without Candidate Generation - Mining Various Kinds of Association Rules
- Constraint-BasedAssociation Mining.
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION & PREDICTION 9
Classification vs. Prediction – Data preparation for Classification and Prediction –
Classification byDecision Tree Introduction – Bayesian Classification – Rule Based
Classification – Classification byBack Propagation – Support Vector Machines – Associative
Classification – Lazy Learners – OtherClassification Methods – Prediction – Accuracy and
Error Measures.
UNIT V CLUSTERING 9
Cluster Analysis: - Types of Data in Cluster Analysis – A Categorization of Major Clustering
Methods – Partitioning Methods – Hierarchical methods – Density-Based Methods – Grid-
Based Methods – Model-Based Clustering Methods – Clustering High- Dimensional Data –
Constraint-Based Cluster Analysis – Outlier Analysis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Create relational data models.
Preprocess the data for mining applications.
Apply the association rules for mining the data.
Design and deploy appropriate classification techniques.
Cluster the high dimensional data for better organization of the data.
Discover the knowledge imbibed in the high dimensional system.
Evolve Multidimensional Intelligent model from typical system.
Evaluate various mining techniques on complex data objects.
42
REFERENCES:
1. Berson, Alex & Smith, Stephen J, Data Warehousing, Data Mining, and OLAP, TMH
Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 2012
2. G. K. Gupta, “Introduction to Data Mining with Case Studies”, Easter Economy
Edition, PrenticeHall of India, 2006
3. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques” Second
Edition, Elsevier, Reprinted 2008
4. K.P. Soman, ShyamDiwakar and V. Ajay, “Insight into Data mining Theory and
Practice”, EasterEconomy Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006
5. Marakas, George M, Modern Data Warehousing, Mining, and Visualiza Visualization,
Pearson Education, 2011
6. Pang-Ning Tan, Michael Steinbach and Vipin Kumar, “Introduction to Data Mining”,
PearsonEducation, 2007
7. Prabhu Data Warehousing, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
8. Ponniah, Paulraj, Data Warehousing Fundamentals, John Wiley & Sons, New Delhi,
2011.
9. R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Addison-Wesley,
2011
MC5404 WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 2 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on the usage of recent platforms in developing web applications
To understand architecture of J2EE and design applications using J2EE, Strut and
hypernet
To understand framework of Spring, Hibernate and struts.
To Design and develop interactive, client-side, server-side executable web applications
LAMP Stack
UNIT I J2EE PLATFORM 9+6
Introduction -Enterprise Architecture Styles -J2EE Architecture - Containers - J2EE
Technologies -Developing J2EE Applications - Naming and directory services - Using JNDI -
JNDI Service providers - Java and LDAP - LDAP operations - Searching an LDAP server -
Storing and retrieving java objects in LDAP - Application Servers - Implementing the J2EE
Specifications - J2EE packaging and Deployment - J2EE packaging overview - Configuring
J2EE packages.
UNIT II SPRING 9+6
Web Services - Consuming a RESTfull Web Service Java desktop application /JSP. Building
REST Service with spring -Spring Security Architecture – Accessing relational data using
JDBC with spring- Uploading Files using spring application- Validating form input - Handling
form submission -Creation of Batch Service -Securing web application -Integrating Data -
Accessing data with MongoDB- Creating asynchronous method-Using WebSocket to build an
interactive web application.
43
UNIT III STRUTS AND HIBERNATE 9+6
STRUTS
Introduction to Struts – MVC framework- Struts Architecture – Business Service – Parameter
Passing – Action class & configuration files – Struts.xml Tags – Namespace & Wildcards –
Model Driven Action – Value stack & OGNL – Validation – Interceptors - Inbuilt Interceptors –
Custom Interceptors .
HIBERNATE
HIBERNATE ORM-Persistence-Relational Database-The object relational impedance
mismatch -Using Native Hibernate API’s and hbm.xml-Using the java persistence API’s-
Hibernate Validator – HIBERNATE OGM – configuration of tools -HIBERNATE SEARCH -
Enabling full text search capabilities in entities -Indexing-Searching -Introduction to Full text
search.
UNIT IV PYTHON 9+6
Introduction to python – Why to use python – History of python – Python IDE - Pyscripter IDE –
Hello world program in python – Number & Math function – Variables & Names – String basics
– String features – Conditional Statements – Functions – For & While loop – List,Tuple &
Dictionaries – File handling – Debugging elements breakpoints watch and stepin – debugging
step in & step out – Debugging watch variables – class & objects – Packages & Modules –
Python Pip – Python MySql – Read Excel data in python.
UNIT V DJANGO 9+6
Introduction to Django-Django model layer – View layer – Template Layer – Forms –
Automated admin interface – Django Security – Internationalization and localization – Django
Web application tools – Core functionalities – Geographic Framework.
L : 45, T : 30 TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Design and implement Internet systems for enhancing education and engineering
design
Understand functionality of Internet system
Design a system according to customer needs using the available Internet technologies
Design and develop interactive, client-side, server-side executable web applications.
Develop a rapid application in many areas on most platforms.
Build better Web apps more quickly and with less code
REFERENCES:
1. Ayman Hourieh, “Learning Website Development with Django”, Packt Publishing,
2008.
2. Craig Walls, “Spring in Action, 4th Edition Kindle Edition, Manning Publication, 2015.
3. Jobinesh Purushothaman, “RESTful Java Web Services” Second Edition, Packt
Publishing, 2015
4. James Holmes “Struts: The Complete Reference, " 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007.
5. Jeff Forcier, Paul Bissex, Wesley J Chun, “Python Web Development with Django
(Developer's Library)”, Pearson Education, 2009
6. Mark Summerfield, “Programming in Python 3: A Complete Introduction to the Python
Language”, second edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
7. Patrick Peak and Nick Heudecker, “Hibernate Quickly", Manning Publication, 2007
8. Subrahmanyam Allamaraju and Cedric Buest , "Professional Java Server
Programming (J2EE 1.3 Edition), ", Shroff Publishers & Distributors Pvt Ltd
9. Tony Dahbura, Rob Weltman “LDAP Programming with Java”, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2000
44
MC5411 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
Know the components and structure of mobile application development frameworks like
Android /windows /ios.
Understand how to work with various mobile application development frameworks.
Learn the basic and important design concepts and issues of development of mobile
applications.
Understand the capabilities and limitations of mobile devices.
Write applications for the platforms used, simulate them, and test them on the mobile
hardware where possible.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Develop an application that uses Layout Managers.
2. Develop an application that uses event listeners.
3. Develop an application that uses Adapters ,Toast.
4. Develop an application that makes use of database.
5. Develop an application that makes use of RSS Feed.
6. Implement an application that implements Multi threading.
7. Develop a native application that uses GPS location information.
8. Implement an application that writes data to the SD card.
9. Implement an application that creates an alert upon receiving a message.
10. Develop a game application.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Install and configure Android application development tools.
Design and develop user Interfaces for the Android platform.
Apply Java programming concepts to Android application development.
Familiar with technology and business trends impacting mobile applications.
competent with the characterization and architecture of mobile applications.
MC5412 WEB APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To design applications using J2EE, Struts and Hypernate.
To develop a web application with n-tier architecture.
To develop a simple application using Spring MVC.
To develop a web service using JSON and XML formats.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Develop a car showroom inventory web application with 2-tier architecture. Use JSP and
JDBC.
2. Develop a real estate web application with n-tier architecture. Use JSP, Servlets and
JDBC.
45
The application should be able to add and search all properties such as rental/own,
individual/ apartment and duplex/semi-duplex.
3. Develop a standalone java application or a web application to manage books in an online
library, support CURD operations.
4. Develop a simple Spring MVC application that take user input and checks the input using
standard validation annotations.
5. Develop a simple database application using Spring JDBC/Struts with CURD functionality.
6. Develop any web application which authenticates Spring LDAP.
7. Design a student identity management web application using struts framework. The
application should be able to provide an identity such as student id, access to department
assets with department id, access to lab assets with lab id.
8. Create an simple online bookstore using Spring MVC
9. Build an application that uses Spring’s RestTemplate to retrieve a random Spring Boot
quotation at http://gturnquist-quoters.cfapps.io/api/random
10. Create weather service using spring/struts which will return the temp in JSON format and
XML format.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Design and develop interactive, client-side, server-side executable web applications.
Develop a simple online application using Spring MVC
Create applications using web services such as JSON, WSDL and SOAP
Develop a simple database application using Spring JDBC/Struts with CURD
functionality
MC5501 CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the broad perceptive of cloud architecture and model
To understand the concept of Virtualization and design of cloud Services
To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
To understand the features of cloud simulator
To apply different cloud programming model as per need.
To learn to design the trusted cloud Computing system
UNIT I CLOUD ARCHITECTURE AND MODEL 9
Technologies for Network-Based System – System Models for Distributed and Cloud
Computing – NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture. Cloud Models:- Characteristics
– Cloud Services – Cloud models (IaaS, PaaS, SaaS) – Public vs Private Cloud –Cloud
Solutions - Cloud ecosystem – Service management – Computing on demand.
UNIT II VIRTUALIZATION 9
Basics of Virtualization - Types of Virtualization - Implementation Levels of Virtualization -
Virtualization Structures - Tools and Mechanisms - Virtualization of CPU, Memory, I/O
Devices - Virtual Clusters and Resource management – Virtualization for Data-center
Automation
46
UNIT III CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND IoT 9
Architectural Design of Compute and Storage Clouds – Layered Cloud Architecture
Development – Design Challenges - Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource
Provisioning and Platform Deployment – Global Exchange of Cloud Resources-Enabling
Technologies for the Internet of Things – Innovative Applications of the Internet of Things.
UNIT IV PROGRAMMING MODEL 9
Parallel and Distributed Programming Paradigms – MapReduce, Twister and Iterative
MapReduce – Hadoop Library from Apache – Mapping Applications - Programming Support -
Google App Engine, Amazon AWS - Cloud Software Environments -Eucalyptus, Open
Nebula, OpenStack, Aneka, CloudSim.
UNIT V SECURITY IN THE CLOUD 9
Security Overview – Cloud Security Challenges and Risks – Software-as-a-Service Security
– Security Governance – Risk Management – Security Monitoring – Security Architecture
Design – DataSecurity – Application Security – Virtual Machine Security - Identity
Management and Access Control – Autonomic Security
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Compare the strengths and limitations of cloud computing
Identify the architecture, infrastructure and delivery models of cloud computing
Apply suitable virtualization concept.
Choose the appropriate cloud player, Programming Models and approach.
Address the core issues of cloud computing such as security, privacy and
interoperability.
Design Cloud Services and Set a private cloud
REFERENCES
1. George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and
Infrastructure in theCloud” O'Reilly
2. GautamShroff,Enterprise Cloud Computing,Cambridge University Press,2011
3. James E. Smith, Ravi Nair, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and
Processes”, Elsevier/Morgan Kaufmann, 2005
4. John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation,
Management, and Security”, CRC Press, 2010
5. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing,
From ParallelProcessing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers,
2012
6. Kumar Saurabh, “Cloud Computing – insights into New-Era Infrastructure”, Wiley
India,2011
7. Katarina Stanoevska-Slabeva, Thomas Wozniak, Santi Ristol, “Grid and Cloud
Computing – ABusiness Perspective on Technology and Applications”, Springer
8. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing,Que Publishing,2008
9. Nick Antonopoulos, Cloud computing,Springer Publications,2010
10. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, “Cloud Computing, A Practical
Approach”, TMH, 2009
11. RajkumarBuyya, Christian Vecchiola, S.ThamaraiSelvi, ‘Mastering Cloud Computing”,
TMGH,2013
12. Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to
Secure Cloud Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010
47
MC5502 BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To explore the fundamental concepts of big data analytics
To learn to analyze the big data using intelligent techniques.
To understand the various search methods and visualization techniques.
To learn to use various techniques for mining data stream.
To understand the applications using Map Reduce Concepts
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA 9
Introduction to BigData Platform – Challenges of Conventional Systems - Intelligent data
analysis – Nature of Data - Analytic Processes and Tools - Analysis vs Reporting - Modern
Data Analytic Tools - Statistical Concepts: Sampling Distributions - Re-Sampling - Statistical
Inference - Prediction Error
UNIT II MINING DATA STREAMS 9
Introduction To Streams Concepts – Stream Data Model and Architecture - Stream
Computing - Sampling Data in a Stream – Filtering Streams – Counting Distinct Elements in
a Stream – EstimatingMoments – Counting Oneness in a Window – Decaying Window - Real
time Analytics Platform(RTAP)Applications –- Case Studies - Real Time Sentiment Analysis,
Stock Market Predictions.
UNIT III HADOOP ENVIRONMENT 9
History of Hadoop- The Hadoop Distributed File System – Components of Hadoop-
Analyzing the Data with Hadoop- Scaling Out- Hadoop Streaming- Design of HDFS-Hadoop
filesystems-Java interfaces to HDFS- Basics-Developing a Map Reduce Application-How
Map Reduce Works-Anatomy of a Map Reduce Job run-Failures-Job Scheduling-Shuffle and
Sort – Task execution - Map Reduce Types and Formats- Map Reduce Features - Setting up
a Hadoop Cluster - Cluster specification - Cluster Setup and Installation – Hadoop
Configuration-Security in Hadoop
UNIT IV DATA ANALYSIS SYTEMS AND VISUALIZATION 9
Link Analysis – PageRank - Efficient Computation of PageRank- Topic-Sensitive PageRank
– Link Spam- Recommendation Systems- A Model for Recommendation Systems- Content-
Based Recommendations - Collaborative Filtering- Dimensionality Reduction- Visualizations -
Visual data analysis techniques-interaction techniques- Systems and applications.
UNIT V FRAMEWORKS AND APPLICATIONS 9
IBM for Big Data –Framework - Hive – Sharding – NoSQL Databases –Mango DB-Casandra-
Hbase – Impala – Analyzing big data with twitter – Big data for Ecommerce – Big data for
blogs.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Work with big data platform and Understand the fundamentals of various big data
analysis techniques
Analyze the big data analytic techniques for useful business applications.
Design efficient algorithms for mining the data from large volumes.
Analyze the HADOOP and Map Reduce technologies associated with big data
analytics
Explore the applications of Big Data
48
REFERENCES:
1. AnandRajaraman and Jeffrey David Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”,
CambridgeUniversity Press, 2014
2. Chris Eaton, Dirk DeRoos, Tom Deutsch, George Lapis, Paul Zikopoulos,
“Understanding BigData: Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming Data”,
McGrawHill Publishing, 2012
3. Da Ruan,Guoquing Chen, Etienne E.Kerre, Geert Wets, Intelligent Data Mining,
Springer,2007
4. Franks, “Taming the Big Data Tidal Wave: Finding Opportunities in Huge Data
Streamswith Advanced Analytics”, John Wiley & sons, 2012
5. Glenn J. Myatt, “Making Sense of Data”, John Wiley & Sons, 2007
6. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Second
Edition, Elsevier, Reprinted 2008
7. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, “Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007
8. Michael Minelli , Michele Chambers , AmbigaDhiraj, Big Data, BigAnalytics: Emerging
Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends for Today's
Businesses,WileyPublications,2013
9. Paul Zikopoulos ,DirkdeRoos , Krishnan Parasuraman , Thomas Deutsch , James
Giles , David Corrigan , Harness the Power of Big Data The IBM Big Data Platform,
Tata McGraw HillPublications, 2012
10. Pete Warden, “Big Data Glossary”, O’Reilly, 2011
11. Tom White “ Hadoop: The Definitive Guide” Fourth Edition, O’reilly Media, 2015
12. Zikopoulos, Paul, Chris Eaton, Understanding Big Data: Analytics for Enterprise Class
Hadoopand Streaming Data, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 2011.
L T P C
MC5503 SOFTWARE TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know the behavior of the testing techniques and to design test cases to detect the
errors in the software
To get insight into the levels of testing in the user environment
To understand standard principles to check the occurrence of defects and its removal.
To learn the functionality of automated testing tools to apply in the specialized
environment.
To understand the models and metrics of software quality and reliability.
UNIT I TESTING TECHNIQUES & TEST CASE DESIGN 9
Using White Box Approach to Test design - Test Adequacy Criteria – Static Testing Vs.
Structural Testing – Code Functional Testing – Coverage and Control Flow Graphs –
Covering Code Logic – Paths – Their Role in White box Based Test Design – Code
Complexity Testing – Evaluating Test Adequacy Criteria. Test Case Design Strategies –
Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design – Random Testing – Requirements based
testing – Boundary Value Analysis –Decision tables – Equivalence Class Partitioning – State-
based testing – Cause-effect graphing – Error guessing – Compatibility testing – User
documentation testing – Domain testing – Case study for Control Flow Graph and State-
based Testing.
49
UNIT II LEVELS OF TESTING 9
The Need for Levels of Testing- Unit Test Planning –Designing the Unit Tests – The Test
Harness – Running the Unit tests and Recording Results – Integration Tests – Designing
Integration Tests – Integration Test Planning – Scenario Testing – Defect Bash Elimination.
System Testing – Acceptance testing – Performance testing – Regression Testing -
Internationalization testing - Ad-hoc testing – Alpha, Beta Tests- Testing OO systems –
Usability and Accessibility Testing – Configuration Testing - Compatibility Testing – Testing
the documentation – Website Testing - Case Study for Unit and Integration Testing.
UNIT III TESTING FOR SPECIALIZED ENVIRONMENT 9
Testing Client / Server Systems – Testing in a Multiplatform Environment - Testing Object-
Oriented Software – Object Oriented Testing – Testing Web based systems – Web based
system – Web Technology Evolution – Traditional Software and Web based Software –
Challenges in Testing for Web-based Software – Quality Aspects – Web Engineering –
Testing of Web based Systems. Case Study for Web Application Testing
UNIT IV TEST AUTOMATION 9
Selecting and Installing Software Testing Tools - Software Test Automation – Skills needed
for Automation – Scope of Automation – Design and Architecture for Automation –
Requirements for a Test Tool – Challenges in Automation – Tracking the Bug – Debugging –
Case study using Bug Tracking Tool.
UNIT V SOFTWARE TESTING AND QUALITY METRICS 9
Six-Sigma – TQM - Complexity Metrics and Models – Quality Management Metrics -
Availability Metrics - Defect Removal Effectiveness - FMEA - Quality Function Deployment –
Taguchi Quality Loss Function – Cost of Quality. Case Study for Complexity and Object
Oriented Metrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to test the software by applying various testing techniques.
Able to debug the project and to test the entire computer based systems at all levels.
Able to test the applications in the specialized environment using various automation
tools.
Able to evaluate the web applications using bug tracking tools.
Able to apply quality and reliability metrics to ensure the performance of the software
REFERENCES:
1. Adithya P. Mathur, “ Foundations of Software Testing – Fundamentals algorithms and
techniques”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education, 2008
2. Boris Beizer, “ Software Testing Techniques” , Dream Tech Press, 2009
3. Dale H. Besterfiled , “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Third
Edition, Indian Reprint (2011).
4. Edward Kit, “ Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process”, Pearson
Education, 1995
5. Glenford J. Myers, Tom Badgett, Corey Sandler, “The Art of Software Testing”, 3rd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons Publication, 2012
6. Illene Burnstein, “ Practical Software Testing”, Springer International Edition, Chennai,
2003.
7. Naresh Chauhan , “Software Testing Principles and Practices ” Oxford University
Press , New Delhi ,2010
8. Ron Patton, “Software Testing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
50
9. Renu Rajani,Pradeep Oak, “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and
Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill,2004
10. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “Software Testing – Principles and
Practices”, Pearson Education, 2009
11. Stephan Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality”, Addison – Wesley, Second
Edition, 2004
12. William Perry, “Effective Methods of Software Testing”, Third Edition, Wiley
Publishing.
CLOUD AND BIG DATA LABORATORY L T P C
MC5511 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
Be exposed to tool kits for cloud and hadoop environment.
Be familiar with migration of Virtual Machines from one node to another
Learn to run virtual machines of different configuration.
Learn to use Hadoop Distributed File System(HDFS) to set up single and multi-node
clusters.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Use Eucalyptus or Open Nebula or Open Stack or equivalent to set up the cloud and
demonstrate
1. Find procedure to run the virtual machine of different configuration. Check how many
virtual machines can be utilized at particular time
2. Find procedure to attach virtual block to the virtual machine and check whether it holds the
data even after the release of the virtual machine
3. Install a C compiler in the virtual machine and execute a sample program.
4. Show the virtual machine migration based on the certain condition from one node to the
other
5. Find procedure to install storage controller and interact with it
6. Find procedure to set up the one node Hadoop cluster.
7. Mount the one node Hadoop cluster using FUSE.
8. Write a word count program to demonstrate the use of Map - Reduce tasks.
9. Unstructured data into NoSQL data and do all operations such as NoSQL query with API.
10. K-means clustering using map reduce
11. Page Rank Computation
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Use the cloud and big data tool kits.
Design and Implement applications on the Cloud environment.
Set up and implement Hadoop clusters
Use the map reduce tasks for various applications
LAB EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
SOFTWARE:
Eucalyptus or Open Nebula or equivalent
HARDWARE:
Standalone desktops 30 Nos
51
MC5512 SOFTWARE TESTING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
To apply various testing techniques and to detect the errors in the software.
To generate and apply the test cases using the automated testing tool.
To learn the functionality of automated testing tools to apply in the specialized
environment
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Using Selenium IDE, Write a test suite containing minimum 4 test cases.
2. Install Selenium server and demonstrate it using a script in Java/PHP.
3. Write and test a program to login a specific web page.
4. Write and test a program to update 10 student records into table into Excel file.
5. Write and test a program to select the number of students who have scored more than 60
in any one subject (or all subjects)
6. Write and test a program to provide total number of objects present / available on the page
7. Write and test a program to get the number of list items in a list / combo box.
8. Write and test a program to count number of check boxes on the page checked and
unchecked count
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Able to test the software by applying various testing techniques.
Able to debug the project and to test the entire computer based systems at all levels.
Able to test the applications in the specialized environment using various automation
tools.
Able to evaluate the web applications using bug tracking tools.
Able to apply quality and reliability metrics to ensure the performance of the software
MC5001 SOFT COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the key aspects of Soft computing
To know about the components and building block hypothesis of Genetic algorithm.
To understand the features of neural network and its applications
To study the fuzzy logic components
To gain insight onto Neuro Fuzzy modeling and control.
To gain knowledge in machine learning through Support vector machines
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9
Evolution of Computing – Introduction to Artificial Intelligence – Example problems – tic – tac-
toe – question answering – Turing test - Prepositional and Predicate Calculus Rule Based
knowledge Representation - Knowledge acquisition – Expert system – Introduction –
Example – MYCIN - Soft Computing Constituents – From Conventional AI to Computational
Intelligence - Machine Learning Basics – Case study : Simple artificial intelligence programs
in PROLOG for diagnosis of a disease
52
UNIT II GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction, Building block hypothesis, working principle, Basic operators and terminologies
such as individual, gene, encoding, fitness function and reproduction, Genetic modelling:
Significance of Genetic operators, Inheritance operator, cross over, inversion & deletion,
mutation operator, bitwise operator, GA optimization problems, JSPP (Job Shop Scheduling
Problem), TSP (Travelling Salesman Problem), Differences & similarities between GA &
other traditional methods, Applications of GA.
UNIT III NEURAL NETWORKS 9
Machine learning using Neural Network, Adaptive Networks – Feed Forward Networks
Defuzzification – Supervised Learning Neural Networks – Radial Basis Function Networks -
Reinforcement Learning – Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks – Adaptive Resonance
Architectures – Advances in Neural Networks – Case study : Identification and control of
linear and nonlinear dynamic systems using MATLAB.
UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC 9
Fuzzy Sets – Operations on Fuzzy Sets – Fuzzy Relations – Membership Functions-Fuzzy
Rules and Fuzzy Reasoning – Defuzzification - Fuzzy Inference Systems – Mamdani Fuzzy
Model – Takagi – Sugeno- Kang Fuzzy Model - Fuzzy Expert Systems – Fuzzy Decision
Making - Case Study : implementation of fuzzy logic controller using MATLAB fuzzy logic
toolbox.
UNIT V NEURO-FUZZY MODELING 9
Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference Systems – Coactive Neuro-Fuzzy Modeling – Classification
and Regression Trees – Data Clustering Algorithms – Rule base Structure Identification –
Neuro-Fuzzy Control – Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Implement machine learning through neural networks.
Gain Knowledge to develop Genetic Algorithm and Support vector machine based
machine learning system.
Write Genetic Algorithm to solve the optimization problem.
Understand fuzzy concepts and develop a Fuzzy expert system to derive decisions.
Able to Model Neuro Fuzzy system for data clustering and classification.
REFERENCES:
1. Amos Gilat, “ MATLAB : “An introduction with applications”, John Wiley & Sons Inc,
2011
2. A.E. Eiben and J.E. Smith “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing” Springer, 2003
3. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”,
Addison Wesley, 2007
4. E. Sanchez, T. Shibata, and L. A. Zadeh, Eds., "Genetic Algorithms and Fuzzy Logic
Systems: Soft Computing Perspectives, Advances in Fuzzy Systems - Applications and
Theory", Vol. 7, River Edge, World Scientific, 1997
5. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, Shiva Shankar B. Nair, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw
hill Ltd, 2008
6. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, “Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications”,
Prentice Hall, 1995
7. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2003.
8. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, “Neural Networks Algorithms, Applications,
and Programming Techniques”, Pearson Edn., 2003
53
9. Kwang H.Lee, “First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications”, Springer–Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg, 2005
10. Mitsuo Gen and Runwei Cheng,”Genetic Algorithms and Engineering Optimization”,
Wiley Publishers 2000
11. Melanie, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithm”, Prentice Hall, 1998
12. Ross Timothy J, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi, 2010
13. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2007
MC5002 ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic principles of Double entry system and preparation of balance
sheet.
To understand the process of estimating the cost of a particular product.
To Prepare the estimate for various business activities such as purchase, sale,
production and cash budgets
To ensure decision making process of an organization.
UNIT I FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 9
Meaning and Scope of Accounting-Principles-Concepts-Conventions-Accounting Standards-
Final Accounts-Trail Balance-Trading Account-Profit and Loss Account-Balance Sheet-
Accounting Ratio Analysis-Funds Flow Analysis-Cash Flow Analysis
UNIT II ACCOUNTING 9
Meaning-Objectives-Elements of Cost-Cost Sheet-Marginal Costing and Cost Volume Profit
Analysis- Break Even Analysis-Applications-Limitations-Standard Costing and Variance
Analysis-Material- Labor-Overhead-Sales-Profit Variances
UNIT III BUDGETS AND BUDGETING CONTROL 9
Budgets and Budgetary Control-Meaning-Types-Sales Budget-Production Budget-Cost of
Production Budget-Flexible Budgeting-Cash Budget-Master Budget-Zero Base Budgeting-
Computerized Accounting
UNIT IV INVESTMENT DECISION AND COST OF CAPITAL 9
Objectives and Functions of Financial Management-Risk-Return Relationship-Time Value of
Money Concepts-Capital Budgeting-Methods of Appraisal-Cost of Capital Factors Affecting
Cost of Capital- Computation for Each Source of Finance and Weighted Average Cost of
Capital.
UNIT V FINANCING DECISION AND WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT 9
Capital Structure-Factors Affecting Capital Structure-Dividend Policy-Types of Dividend
Policy- Concepts of Working Capital-Working Capital Policies-Factors affecting Working
Capital-Estimation of Working Capital Requirements
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to understand the balance sheet preparation and do analysis
Able to understand the budget preparation and control of a company
Helps to decide about the state of affairs of a particular firm / company.
Ensures the preparation of fiscal policies of the organization.
Ensures the factors to be considered in investment policies.
54
REFERENCES:
1. Aswat Damodaran, “Corporate Finance Thoery and Practice”, JohnWiley & Sons,
2008
2. Brigham, Ehrhardt, “Financial Management Theory and Practice” 11th Edition,
Cengage Learning, 2008
3. I.M.Pandey, “Management Accounting”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 3rd
Edition, 2009
4. I.M.Pandey, ”Financial Management”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 9th Edition,
2009
5. M.Y.Khan and P.K.Jain, “Financial Management, Text, Problems and Cases”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2008
6. S.N.Maheswari, “Financial and Management Accounting”, Sultan Chand & Sons, 5
edition,2010
7. Srivatsava, Mishra, “Financial Management”, Oxford University
MC5003 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To know of how to do project planning for the software process.
To learn the cost estimation techniques during the analysis of the project.
To understand the quality concepts for ensuring the functionality of the software
UNIT I SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 9
Introduction to Software Project Management: An Overview of Project Planning: Select
Project, Identifying Project scope and objectives, infrastructure, project products and
Characteristics. Estimate efforts, Identify activity risks, and allocate resources- TQM, Six
Sigma, Software Quality: defining software quality, ISO9126, External Standards.
UNIT II SOFTWARE EVALUATION AND COSTING 9
Project Evaluation: Strategic Assessment, Technical Assessment, cost-benefit analysis,
Cash flow forecasting, cost-benefit evaluation techniques, Risk Evaluation. Selection of
Appropriate Project approach: Choosing technologies, choice of process models, structured
methods.
UNIT III SOFTWARE ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES 9
Software Effort Estimation: Problems with over and under estimations, Basis of software
Estimation, Software estimation techniques, expert Judgment, Estimating by analogy. Activity
Planning: Project schedules, projects and activities, sequencing and scheduling Activities,
networks planning models, formulating a network model.
UNIT IV RISK MANAGEMENT 9
Risk Management: Nature of Risk, Managing Risk, Risk Identification and Analysis, Reducing
the Risk. Resource Allocation: Scheduling resources, Critical Paths, Cost scheduling,
Monitoring and Control: Creating Framework, cost monitoring, prioritizing monitoring.
55
UNIT V GLOBALIZATION ISSUES IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Globalization issues in project management: Evolution of globalization- challenges in building
global teams-models for the execution of some effective management techniques for
managing global teams. Impact of the internet on project management: Introduction – the
effect of internet on project management – managing projects for the internet – effect on
project management activities. Comparison of project management software’s: dot Project,
Launch pad, openProj. Case study: PRINCE2.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand the activities during the project scheduling of any software application.
Learn the risk management activities and the resource allocation for the projects.
Can apply the software estimation and recent quality standards for evaluation of the
software
projects
Acquire knowledge and skills needed for the construction of highly reliable software
project
Able to create reliable, replicable cost estimation that links to the requirements of
project planning and managing.
REFERENCES:
1. Bob Hughes & Mike Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, Tata McGraw- Hill
Publications, Fifth Edition 2012
2. Futrell , “Quality Software Project Management”, Pearson Education India, 2008
3. Gobalswamy Ramesh, “Managing Global Software Projects”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, 2003
4. Richard H.Thayer “Software Engineering Project Management”, IEEE Computer
Society
5. S. A. Kelkar,” Software Project Management” PHI, New Delhi, Third Edition ,2013
6. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comparison_of_project_management_software
7. http://www.ogc.gov.uk/methods_prince_2.asp
MC5004 SECURITY IN COMPUTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of cryptography
learn to find the vulnerabilities in programs and to overcome them,
know the different kinds of security threats in networks and its solution
know the different kinds of security threats in databases and solutions available
learn about the models and standards for security
UNIT I ELEMENTARY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9
Terminology and Background – Substitution Ciphers – Transpositions – Making Good
Encryption Algorithms- Data Encryption Standard- AES Encryption Algorithm – Public Key
Encryption – Cryptographic Hash Functions – Key Exchange – Digital Signatures.
UNIT II PROGRAM SECURITY 9
Secure programs – Non-malicious Program Errors – Viruses – Targeted Malicious code –
Controls Against Program Threat – Control of Access to General Objects – User
Authentication – Good Coding Practices – Open Web Application Security Project Flaws .
56
UNIT III SECURITY IN NETWORKS 9
Threats in networks – Virtual Private Networks – PKI – SSL – IPSec – Content Integrity –
Access Controls – Honeypots – Traffic Flow Security – Firewalls – Intrusion Detection
Systems – Secure e-mail.
UNIT IV SECURITY IN DATABASES 9
Security requirements of database systems – Reliability and Integrity in databases –
Redundancy – Recovery – Concurrency/ Consistency – Monitors – Sensitive Data – Types
of disclosures –Inference-finding and confirming sql injection.
UNIT V SECURITY MODELS AND STANDARDS 9
Secure SDLC – Security architecture models – Bell-La Padula Confidentiality Model – Biba
Integrity Model – Graham-Denning Access Control Model – Harrison-Ruzzo-Ulman Model –
Secure Frameworks – COSO – CobiT – Security Standards - ISO 27000 family of standards
– NIST.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Apply cryptographic algorithms for encrypting and decryption for secure data
transmission
Understand the importance of Digital signature for secure e-documents exchange
Understand the program threats and apply good programming practice
Get the knowledge about the security services available for internet and web
applications
Understand data vulnerability and sql injection
Gain the knowledge of security models and published standards
REFERENCES:
1. Education Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing”,
Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2007
2. Michael Whitman, Herbert J. Mattord, “Management of Information Security”,Third
Edition, Course Technology, 2010.
3. Michael Howard, David LeBlanc, John Viega, “24 Deadly Sins of Software Security:
Programming Flaws and How to Fix Them”, First Edition, Mc GrawHill Osborne
Media, 2009.
4. Matt Bishop, “Computer Security: Art and Science”, First Edition, Addison- Wesley,
2002.
5. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security : Principles and Practices”,
Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010.
57
MC5005 AD-HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of Ad-hoc & Sensor Networks
To learn various fundamental and emerging protocols of all layers in ad-hoc network
To study about the issues pertaining to major obstacles in establishment and efficient
management of ad-hoc and sensor networks
To understand the nature and applications of ad-hoc and sensor networks
To understand various security practices and protocols of Ad-hoc and Sensor Networks
UNIT I ADHOC NETWORKS FUNDAMENTALS & COMMUNICATION 9
PROTOCOLS
Fundamentals Of WLANs – IEEE 802.11 Architecture - Self Configuration and Auto
Configuration-issues in Ad-Hoc Wireless Networks – MAC Protocols for Ad-Hoc Wireless
Networks – Contention Based Protocols - TCP Over Ad-Hoc Networks-TCP Protocol
Overview - TCP and MANETs – Solutions for TCP Over Ad-Hoc Networks
UNIT II ADHOC NETWORK ROUTING AND MANAGEMENT 9
Routing in Ad-Hoc Networks- Introduction -Topology based versus Position based
Approaches – Proactive Routing - DSDV, WRP, TBRPF Reactive Routing – DSR,AODV,
Hybrid Routing Approach ZRP, CBRP- Location services - DREAM – Quorums based
Location Service – Forwarding Strategies – Greedy Packet Forwarding, LAR.
UNIT III SENSOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS 9
Introduction – Architecture - Single Node Architecture – Sensor Network Design
Considerations – Energy Efficient Design Principles for WSN’s – Protocols for WSN –
Physical Layer - Transceiver Design Considerations – MAC Protocols for wireless sensor
network – IEEE 802.15.4 Zigbee – Link Layer and Error Control Issues - Routing Protocols –
Gossiping and agent based unicast forwarding, Energy efficient unicast –Transport Protocols
& QoS – Congestion Control Issues – Application specific Support – Target detection and
tracking.
UNIT IV SENSOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND PROGRAMMING 9
Sensor Management - Topology Control Protocols and Sensing Mode Selection Protocols -
Time Synchronization - Localization and Positioning – Operating Systems and Sensor
Network Programming – Sensor Network Simulators- Case study: Industrial automation and
tsunami early warning system with wireless sensor networks.
UNIT V ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORK SECURITY 9
Security in Ad-Hoc and Sensor Networks – Key Distribution and Management – Software
based Anti-tamper Techniques – Water Marking techniques – Defense against Routing
Attacks - Secure Adhoc Routing Protocols – Broadcast Authentication WSN Protocols –
TESLA – Biba – Sensor Network Security Protocols – SPINS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Work with existing Ad-hoc and sensor network protocols and standards.
Create a Sensor network environment for different type of applications
Design ad-hoc and sensor network architectures using QoS and Congestion control
mechanisms
58
Interpret the various control fields of the protocol in each layer
Select appropriate routing algorithms for different network environments
Program ad-hoc and sensor network for various applications
Deploy security mechanisms in the wireless ad-hoc and sensor networks.
REFERENCES:
1. Adrian Perrig, J. D. Tygar, "Secure Broadcast Communication: In Wired and Wireless
Networks", Springer, 2006.
2. Amiya Nayak, Ivan Stojmenovic, : Wireless Sensor and Actuator Networks : Algorithm
and Protocols for Scalable Coordination and Data communication John Wiley & Sons
2010
3. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, “Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks:
Theory and Applications”, Second Edition, World Scientific Publishing, 2011.
4. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and
Protocols”, Pearson Education, 2011.
5. C.K.Toh, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education, 2007
6. Erdal Çayırcı , Chunming Rong, “Security in Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley and Sons, 2009
7. Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Morgan Kaufman
Publishers, 2004.
8. Feng Zhao, Leonidas Guibas, “ Wireless Sensor Networks : An information processing
Approach “ , Elsevier 2004.
9. Holger Karl, Andreas willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc .2007.
10. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, Taieb Znati , Wireless Sensor Networks: Technology,
Protocols and Applications, Wiley Interscience A John Wiley & sons, Inc., Publication
2007.
11. Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, “Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks
Theory and Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010
MC5006 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To Understand the concepts of computer ethics in work environment.
To understand the threats in computing environment
To Understand the intricacies of accessibility issues
To ensure safe exits when designing the software projects
UNIT I COMPUTER ETHICS INTRODCUTION AND COMPUTER HACKING 9
A general Introduction – Computer ethics: an overview – Identifying an ethical issue – Ethics
and law – Ethical theories - Professional Code of conduct – An ethical dilemma – A
framework for ethical decision making - Computer hacking – Introduction – definition of
hacking – Destructive programs – hacker ethics - Professional constraints – BCS code of
conduct – To hack or not to hack? – Ethical positions on hacking.
UNIT II ASPECTS OF COMPUTER CRIME AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9
RIGHTS
Aspects of computer crime - Introduction - What is computer crime – computer security
measures – Professional duties and obligations - Intellectual Property Rights – The nature of
Intellectual property – Intellectual Property – Patents, Trademarks, Trade Secrets, Software
Issues, Copyright - The extent and nature of software piracy – Ethical and professional
issues – free software and open source code.
59
UNIT III REGULATING INTERNET CONTENT, TECHNOLOGY AND SAFETY 9
Introduction – In defence of freedom expression – censorship – laws upholding free speech –
Free speech and the Internet - Ethical and professional issues - Internet technologies and
privacy – Safety and risk – assessment of safety and risk – risk benefit analysis – reducing
risk.
UNIT IV COMPUTER TECHNOLOGIES ACCESSIBILITY ISSUES 9
Introduction – Principle of equal access – Obstacles to access for individuals – professional
responsibility - Empowering computers in the workplace – Introduction – computers and
employment – computers and the quality of work – computerized monitoring in the work
place – telecommuting – social, legal and professional issues - Use of Software, Computers
and Internet-based Tools - Liability for Software errors - Documentation Authentication and
Control – Software engineering code of ethics and practices – IEEE-CS – ACM Joint task
force.
UNIT V SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL NETWORKING 9
Software Development – strategies for engineering quality standards – Quality management
standards – Social Networking – Company owned social network web site – the use of social
networks in the hiring process – Social Networking ethical issues – Cyber bullying – cyber
stalking – Online virtual world – Crime in virtual world - digital rights management - Online
defamation – Piracy – Fraud.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Helps to examine situations and to internalize the need for applying ethical principles,
values to tackle with various situations.
Develop a responsible attitude towards the use of computer as well as the
technology.
Able to envision the societal impact on the products/ projects they develop in their
career
Understanding the code of ethics and standards of computer professionals.
Analyze the professional responsibility and empowering access to information in the
work place.
REFERENCES:
1. Caroline Whitback,” Ethics in Engineering Practice and Research “, Cambridge
University Press, 2011.
2. George Reynolds, “Ethics in Information Technology”, Cengage Learning, 2011.
3. John Weckert and Douglas Adeney, Computer and Information Ethics, Greenwood
Press, 1997.
4. Penny Duquenoy, Simon Jones and Barry G Blundell, “Ethical , legal and
professional issues in computing”, Middlesex University Press, 2008.
5. Richard Spinello, “Case Studies in Information and Computer Ethics”, Prentice Hall,
1997.
6. Sara Baase, “A Gift of Fire: Social, Legal, and Ethical Issues for Computing and the
Internet”, 3rd Edition,Prentice Hall, 2008.
7. http://www.infosectoday.com/Articles/Intro_Computer_Ethics.html
60
MC5007 HEALTH CARE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of health care system.
To know about creating and maintaining health care information systems
To ensure access of clinical information system on the fly
To know social media analytics for health care data.
To learn temporal data mining and visual data analytics for health care.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to health care information – Health care data quality – Health care information
regulations, laws and standards.
UNIT II HEALTH CARE INFORMATION SYSTEMS 9
History and evolution of health care information systems – Current and emerging use of
clinical information systems – system acquisition – System implementation and support.
UNIT III INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 9
Information architecture and technologies that support health care information systems –
Health care information system standards – Security of health care information systems.
UNIT IV MINING AND SOCIAL MEDIA ANALYTICS FOR HEALTH CARE 9
DATA
Resources – Terminology Acquisition and Management – Information Extraction – Text
Mining Environments – Applications – Social Media Analysis for Public Health Research –
Analysis of Social Media use in Healthcare
UNIT V TEMPORAL DATA MINING AND VISUAL ANALYTICS FOR HEALTH 9
CARE
Association Analysis – Temporal Pattern Mining – Sensor Data Analysis – Introduction to
Visual Analysis and Medical Data Visualization – Visual Analytics in Health care – Visual
Analytics for Clinicians.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Develop an understanding of basic research skills applicable to the design, evaluation
and implementation of appropriate Healthcare Information Systems (HIS) ;
Define and analyse the impact, strengths and weaknesses of various HIS in any
healthcare settings
Extract health care data in temporal data mining.
Perform sensor data and visual data analytics.
REFERENCES:
1. Chandan K. Reddy, Charu C. Aggarwal, “Healthcare Data Analytics”, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2015.
2. Kevin Beaver, Healthcare Information Systems, Second edition Best Practices, CRC
Press, 2002
3. Karen A Wager, Frances Wickham Lee, John P Glaser, “ Managing Health Care
Information Systems: A Practical Approach for Health Care Executives”, John Wiley,
2 nd edition 2009.
4. Marion J. BallHealthcare Information Management Systems: A Practical Guide
Springer-Verlag GmbH, 1995
61
5. Marion J. Ball, Charlotte Weaver, Joan Kiel ,”Healthcare Information Management
Systems: Cases, Strategies, and Solutions”, Springer, 2010, 3rd edition
6. Rudi Van De Velde and Patrice Degoulet, “Clinical Information Systems: A
Component based approach”, Springer 2005
MC5008 GEOLOGICAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
Understand the basic concepts of Geological information systems.
To provide an exposure to spatial database structures and their utility in GIS.
Understand the process of scanning, digitizing and georeferencing.
To introduce the raster and vector geoprocessing capabilities of GIS.
UNIT I SPATIAL DATA REPRESENTATION 9
GIS – Definition and related terminology- Digital representation of geospatial data – raster –
vector – object oriented – geo database model-analysis.
UNIT II DATA - DIGITIZATION AND PREPARATION 9
Data – Sources and types. Maps and scales – advantages and limitations. Coordinates,
Datum and projection system. Raster data. Characteristics and file formats. Vector data
characteristics. Scanner: Principles, On Screen Digitization-post scanning-importing- data
editing . Linking digital databases: ODBC – GPS data integration.
UNIT III RASTER DATA ANALYSIS 9
Raster Geospatial Data Analysis-Local operations: Reclassification, Logical and Arithmetic
overlay operations – Neighbourhood operations: Aggregation, Filtering, Slope and Aspect
map – Extended neighbourhood operations: - Statistical Analysis, Proximity, Connectivity
operations, Buffering, Viewshed analysis – Regional operations: Area, Perimeter, Shape,
Identification of region and Classification-output functions of Raster geoprocessing.
UNIT IV VECTOR DATA PROCESSING 9
Non-topological analysis: Attribute database query, SQL, Summary statistics-statistical
computation-calculation-quantification- Address geocoding, -Topological analysis Feature
based topological functions-overlay-buffering- Layer based topological function-
Reclassification, Aggregation, Overlay analysis- Point-in-polygon, Line-in-polygon, Polygon-
on-polygon: Clip, Erase, Identity, Union, Intersection – Network based Geoprocessing –
Output functions.
UNIT V GIS MODELLING AND APPLICATIONS 9
Spatial indexing. Spatial modelling – External, Conceptual, Logical, Internal –GIS Modeling
with case study- spatial data mining-DEM- introduction and applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand GIS concepts and spatial data representation.
Able to design spatial data input in raster form as well as vector form.
Understand vector data analysis and output functions.
Understand raster data geo processing.
Able to design a GIS model for real world problem.
62
REFERENCES:
1. Lo, C.P. and Yeung, Albert K.W., Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems, Prentice Hall, 2/E,2009
2. Kang-Tsung Chang ,Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, 6th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011
3. Peter A. Burrough, Rachael A. McDonnell, Principles of GIS, 3rd Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2015
4. Paul A. Longley, Mike Goodchild, David J. Maguire, Geographic Information Systems
and Science, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc ,2015
5. Robert Laurini and Derek Thompson, Fundamentals of Spatial Information Systems,
Academic Press, 1992
MC5009 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the importance of human resources.
To describe the steps involved in the human resource planning process
To understand the stages of employee socialization and training needs.
To know about the purposes of performance management systems and appraisal.
To know the list of occupational safety and health administration enforcement
priorities
UNIT I UNDERSTANDING HRM WITH LEGAL & ETHICAL CONTEXT 9
Introduction- Importance of HRM – functions – Structure of HRM Department-Trends and
opportunities – External Influences Affect HRM- HRM in global environment – The Changing
World of Technology- HR & Corporate Ethics – Equal Employment Opportunities -Laws
Affecting discriminatory practices – Enforcing Equal Opportunity Employment-Discipline &
Employee Rights.
UNIT II STAFFING, RECRUITING AND FOUNDATIONS OF SELECTION 9
Introduction – An Organizational Framework- Job analysis -Methods -Purpose– Recruiting
Goals – Recruiting Sources – Recruiting A Global Perspective- Selection Process – Selection
from Global Perspective- job offers – Avoiding hiring mistakes - key element for successful
predictors.
UNIT III TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9
Introduction – Socialization Process-Purpose of New employee orientation, Employee
training- Employee Development– Organization development Calm Waters Metaphor –
White-Water Rapids Metaphor – Evaluating training and Development Effectiveness-
international training and development issues – Career Development -Value for organization
and individual – mentoring and coaching – traditional career stages.
UNIT IV PERFORMANCE EVALUATION, REWARDS AND BENEFITS 9
Appraisal process – methods – factors distort appraisal – team appraisal – international
appraisal –-rewards –Theories of motivation - compensation administration – job evaluation
and pay structure – special cases of compensation – executive compensation programs –
employee benefits Voluntary Benefits- International Compensation.
63
UNIT V SAFE AND HEALTHY WORK ENVIRONMENT 9
Occupational safety and health act -Contemporary Health and Safety Issues –Employee
assistance program – International Safety & Health -labor management - employee unions –
labor legislation- Unionizing Employees- Collective Bargaining.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Identify the primary external influences affecting HRM.
Outline the components and the goals of staffing, training and development.
Understand the selection procedure in various organizations.
Understand the practices used to retain the employees and able to evaluate their
performance.
Able to identify the stress and the cause of burn out
REFERENCES:
1. Biswajeet Pattanayak, Human Resource Management, Prentice Hall of India, 2001
2. Decenzo and Robbins, Human Resource Management, Wilsey, 10th edition, 2010
3. Dessler Human Resource Management, Pearson Education Limited, 2002
4. Human Resource Management, Eugence Mckenna and Nic Beach, Pearson
Education Limited, 2002
5. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill 2002.
6. Mamoria C.B. and Mamoria S.Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing
Company, 1997.
7. Wayne Cascio, Managing Human Resource, McGraw Hill, 1998.
64
MC5010 INTERNET OF THINGS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of Internet of Things
To learn about the basics of IOT protocols
To build a small low cost embedded system using Raspberry Pi.
To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real world scenario
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO IoT 9
Internet of Things - Physical Design- Logical Design- IoT Enabling Technologies - IoT Levels &
Deployment Templates - Domain Specific IoTs - IoT and M2M - IoT System Management with
NETCONF-YANG- IoT Platforms Design Methodology.
UNIT II IoT ARCHITECTURE 9
M2M high-level ETSI architecture - IETF architecture for IoT - OGC architecture - IoT reference model
- Domain model - information model - functional model - communication model - IoT reference
architecture
UNIT III IoT PROTOCOLS 9
Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA and RFID Protocols –
Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNet Protocol – Modbus– Zigbee
Architecture – Network layer – 6LowPAN - CoAP - Security
UNIT IV BUILDING IoT WITH RASPBERRY PI & ARDUINO 9
Building IOT with RASPERRY PI- IoT Systems - Logical Design using Python – IoT Physical Devices
& Endpoints - IoT Device -Building blocks -Raspberry Pi -Board - Linux on Raspberry Pi - Raspberry
Pi Interfaces -Programming Raspberry Pi with Python - Other IoT Platforms - Arduino.
UNIT V CASE STUDIES AND REAL-WORLD APPLICATIONS 9
Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industrial automation, smart grid,
Commercial building automation, Smart cities - participatory sensing - Data Analytics for IoT –
Software & Management Tools for IoT Cloud Storage Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT -
Amazon Web Services for IoT.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
Analyze various protocols for IoT
Develop web services to access/control IoT devices.
Design a portable IoT using Rasperry Pi
Deploy an IoT application and connect to the cloud.
Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario
65
REFERENCES:
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”,
Universities Press, 2015
2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the
Internet of Things”, Springer, 2011.
3. Jan Ho¨ ller, Vlasios Tsiatsis , Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis , Karnouskos, Stefan
Avesand. David Boyle, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things -
Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence", Elsevier, 2014.
4. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective”, CRC
Press, 2012.
5. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
MC5011 SEMANTIC WEB L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn the importance of semantic web.
To appreciate the merits of semantic web over traditional web.
To know the methods to discover, classify and build ontology for more reasonable
results in searching.
To learn and appreciate RDF and its taxonomy.
To describe OWL and its usage in semantic web.
To implement applications that can access, use and manipulate the ontology
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to the Syntactic web and Semantic Web – Evolution of the Web – The visual and
syntactic web – Levels of Semantics – Metadata for web information - The semantic web
architecture and technologies –Contrasting Semantic with Conventional Technologies –
Semantic Modeling -Potential of semantic web solutions and challenges of adoption.
UNIT II ONTOLOGICAL ENGINEERING 9
Ontologies – Taxonomies –Topic Maps – Classifying Ontologies – Terminological aspects:
concepts,terms, relations between them – Complex Objects –Subclasses and Sub-properties
definitions–Upper Ontologies – Quality – Uses - Types of terminological resources for
ontology building –Methods and methodologies for building ontologies – Multilingual
Ontologies -Ontology Developmentprocess and Life cycle – Methods for Ontology Learning –
Ontology Evolution – Versioning.
UNIT III DESCRIBING WEB RESOURCES 9
RDF Overview-The basic elements of RDF-RDF triples-Fundamental rules of RDF-
Aggregation and distributed information-RDF tools-RDFS, Taxonomy, and Ontology-Need for
RDFS-Core elements of RDFS .
UNIT IV WEB ONTOLOGY LANGUAGE 9
Requirements for Ontology Languages-OWLSublanguages-Description of the OWL
Language-Layering of OWL-Examples for OWL-OWL in OWL-Namespaces, Classes of
Classes, Class Equivalence, Building Classes from Other Classes, Restricting Properties of
Classes.
66
UNIT V REAL-WORLD EXAMPLES AND APPLICATIONS 9
Swoogle- architecture, usage and examples-FOAF: Friend of a Friend-Basic FOAF
vocabulary and examples-Applications-Information publishing, data integration, knowledge
management, e-learning, web-services.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Understand semantic web basics, architecture and technologies.
Compare conventional web with semantic web.
Able to understand the semantic relationships among the data elements using
Resource Description Framework (RDF)
Able to design and implement real-world applications that “discovers” the data and/or
other web services via the semantic web
REFERENCES:
1. Grigoris Antoniou, Frank Van, “Semantic Web Primer”, MIT Press
2. Karin K. Breitman, Marco Antonio Casanova and Walter Truszowski, “Semantic Web
Concepts: Technologies and Applications”, Springer, 2007
3. LiyangYu , “Introduction to the Semantic Web and Semantic web services” Chapman
& Hall/CRC, Taylor & Francis group, 2007
4. Peter Mika, “Social networks and the SemanticWeb”, Springer, 1st edition 2007.
5. Robert M. Colomb, “Ontology and the Semantic Web”, Volume 156 ,Frontier in
Artificial Intelligence and Applications, IOS Press, 2007
MC5012 SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To learn XML concepts and exposed to build applications based on XML
To gain knowledge about SOAP, HTTP and UDDI to create web services
To understand the SOA architecture and principles of Service Oriented Architecture.
To learn about the role of SOA in J2EE, .NET and web services.
To know about the Cloud Computing architecture and services.
UNIT I XML AND WEB SERVICES 9
XML structure – Elements – Creating Well-formed XML - Name Spaces – Schema Elements,
Types, Attributes – XSL Transformations – Parser – Web Services Overview – Architecture.
UNIT II WSDL, SOAP and UDDI 9
WSDL - Overview Of SOAP – HTTP – XML-RPC – SOAP: Protocol – Message Structure –
Intermediaries – Actors – Design Patterns And Faults – SOAP With Attachments – UDDI.
UNIT III SOA BASICS 9
Roots of SOA – Characteristics of SOA - Comparing SOA to client-server and distributed
internet architectures – Anatomy of SOA- How components in an SOA interrelate - Principles
of service orientation – Service Layers.
67
UNIT IV SOA in J2EE and .NET 9
SOA platform basics – SOA support in J2EE – Java API for XML-based web services (JAX-
WS) - Java architecture for XML binding (JAXB) – Java API for XML Registries (JAXR) - Java
API for XML based RPC (JAX-RPC) – JAX-RS SOA support in .NET – ASP.NET web
services.
UNIT V CLOUD COMPUTING 9
Vision of Cloud computing – Cloud Definition – Characteristics and Benefits – Virtualization –
Cloud computing Architecture – Cloud Reference Model, Types of Clouds – Cloud Platforms
in Industry.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to know the structure of XML and to design and store data in XML
Able to apply SOAP , HTTP and UDDI services in the web applications.
Able to apply SOA architecture and the underlying design principles for the web
projects
Able to understand the role of SOA in J2EE and .NET.
Able to know the cloud computing architecture and the types of clouds
REFERENCES
1. Dan woods and Thomas Mattern, “Enterprise SOA designing IT for Business
Innovation”, O’REILLY, First Edition, 2006.
2. Frank. P. Coyle, “XML, Web Services And The Data Revolution”, Pearson Education,
2002
3. Heather Williamson, “XML, The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
4. Newcomer, Lomow, “Understanding SOA with Web Services”, Pearson Education,
2009.
5. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, S. Thamarai Selvi, “Mastering Cloud
Computing”, McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
6. Sandeep Chatterjee, James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services. An
Architect’s Guide”, Pearson Education, 2009
7. Thomas Erl, “Service-Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology, and Design”,
Pearson Education, 2008.
MC5013 GAME PROGRAMMING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To get subsequent understanding of game design and development, which includes
the processes, mechanics, issues in game design, game engine development,
modeling, techniques, handling situations, and logic.
To create interactive games
UNIT I GRAPHICS FOR GAME PROGRAMMING 9
Coordinate Systems, Ray Tracing, Modeling in Game Production, Vertex Processing,
Rasterization, Fragment Processing and Output Merging, Illumination and Shaders,
Parametric Curves and Surfaces, Shader Models, Image Texturing, Bump Mapping,
Advanced Texturing, Character Animation, Physics-based Simulation.
68
UNIT II GAME DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9
Game Logic, Game AI, Path Finding, Game Theory, Character development, Story Telling,
Narration, Game Balancing, Core mechanics, Principles of level design, Genres of Games,
Collision Detection.
UNIT III GAMING ENGINE DESIGN 9
Renderers, Software Rendering, Hardware Rendering, and Controller based animation,
Spatial Sorting, Level of detail, collision detection, standard objects, and physics.
UNIT IV GAMING PLATFORMS AND FRAMEWORKS 9
Flash, DirectX, OpenGL, Java, Python, XNA with Visual Studio, Mobile Gaming for the
Android, iOS, Game engines - Adventure Game Studio, DX Studio, Unity.
UNIT V GAME DEVELOPMENT 9
Developing 2D and 3D interactive games using OpenGL, DirectX – Isometric and Tile Based
Games, Puzzle games, Single Player games, Multi Player games.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Illustrate an understanding of the concepts behind game programming techniques.
Implement game programming techniques to solve game development tasks.
Construct a basic game engine using open-source programming libraries.
REFERENCES:
1. Andy Harris, “Beginning Flash Game Programming For Dummies”, For Dummies;
Updated Edition, 2005.
2. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design, Second Edition: A Practical Approach to
Real-Time Computer Graphics” Morgan Kaufmann, 2nd Edition, 2006
3. Dino Dini, “Essential 3D Game Programming”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1st Edition, 2012
4. Ernest Adams and Andrew Rollings, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Prentice Hall
1st Edition,2006
5. Eric Lengyel, “Mathematics for 3D Game Programming and Computer Graphics”, 3rd
Edition, Course Technology PTR, 2011
6. Jason Gregory, “Game Engine Architecture”, A K Peters, 2009.
7. JungHyun Han, “3D Graphics for Game Programming”, Chapman and Hall/CRC, 1st
Edition, 2011
8. Mike McShaffrfy, “Game Coding Complete”, 3rd Edition, Charles River Media, 2009.
9. Jonathan S. Harbour, “Beginning Game Programming”, Course Technology PTR, 3rd
Edition, 2009
10. Jeannie Novak, “Game Development Essentials”, 3rd Edition, Delmar Cengage
Learning, 2011.
11. John Hattan, “Beginning Game Programming: A GameDev.net Collection”, Course
Technology PTR, 1st Edition, 2009
12. Jim Thompson, Barnaby Berbank-Green, and Nic Cusworth, “Game Design:
Principles, Practice, and Techniques - The Ultimate Guide for the Aspiring Game
Designer”, 1st Edition, Wiley, 2007.
13. Roger E. Pedersen, “Game Design Foundations”, Edition 2, Jones & Bartlett
Learning, 2009.
14. Scott Rogers, “Level Up!: The Guide to Great Video Game Design”, Wiley, 1st
Edition, 2010.
69
MC5014 COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand the fundamentals of computational intelligence
To know about the various knowledge representation methods
To understand the features of neural network and its implementation
To study about various data clustering methods
To gain knowledge in evolutionary computation and neuro – fuzzy systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Evolution of Computing – Introduction to Artificial Intelligence –– Turing test - Prepositional
and Predicate Calculus - Expert system – Introduction – MYCIN – PROSPECTOR – Robotics
– From Conventional AI to Computational Intelligence – Issues in Artificial Intelligence -
Machine Learning Basics – Intelligence of ants - Artificial Life – BOTS – Comparison of
various expert systems
UNIT II KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION METHODS 9
Introduction – rough sets – set approximation – analysis of decision tables – Application of
LERS software – Type – 1 fuzzy sets – definition – basic operations on fuzzy sets – The
extension principle – Triangular norms and negations – Fuzzy Relations – Approximate
reasoning – fuzzy Inference systems – Application of fuzzy sets – Type – 2 fuzzy sets –
Footprint of uncertainty – basic operations on fuzzy sets – Type – 2 fuzzy relations – Type
reduction – type 2 fuzzy Inference systems – Comparison of Fuzzy Inference systems.
UNIT III NEURAL NETWORKS AND LEARNING ALGORITHMS 9
Machine learning using Neural Network, Adaptive Networks – Feed Forward Networks
Defuzzification – Supervised Learning Neural Networks – backpropagation Algorithm –
Levenberg- Marquardt algorithm – Recurrent neural networks – BAM networks - Radial Basis
Function Networks - Reinforcement Learning – Unsupervised Learning Neural Networks –
Adaptive Resonance Architectures – Case Study : Neural Network explanation facility.
UNIT IV DATA CLUSTERING METHODS AND ALGORITHMS 9
Introduction – Hard and fuzzy partitions – Distance Measures – Hard C- Means algorithm –
Fuzzy C- Means algorithm – Possibilistic C- Means algorithm - Fuzzy Maximum Likelihood
Estimates (FMLE) algorithm – Neuro Fuzzy systems - Mamdani Fuzzy Model – modelling
problems - - Logical type - Takagi – Sugeno- Kang Fuzzy Model – comparison of neuro –
fuzzy systems – Model evaluation criteria, complexity. Fuzzy Expert Systems – Fuzzy
Decision Making – Case study: EEG spike detection.
UNIT V EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION AND NEURO-FUZZY SYSTEMS 9
Evolutionary computation – GA – Particle Swarm Optimization – Ant colony Optimization –
Artificial Immune Systems – Honey- Bee Optimization – Memetic Algorithms - Optimization
problems – TSP, JSSP - evolutionary algorithms – Flexible neuro – fuzzy systems –
Introduction – soft triangular norms – Parameterized triangular norms – Adjustable triangular
norms – Flexible systems – Learning algorithms – Simulation examples –Hybrid Techniques -
Neuro-Fuzzy Control – Case study : Evolutionary medical diagnosis
A simple project using any one of the above domains with tools like MATLAB, Python 2 and
Weka tool 3.7 .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
70
OUTCOMES:
Implement computational intelligence through applications
Understand knowledge representation methods and apply approximate reasoning
Apply evolutionary algorithm to solve the optimization problem
Gain research Knowledge to develop applications using hybrid systems
Able to Model Flexible Fuzzy Inference systems for dynamic nonlinear data sets
REFERENCES:
1. A.E. Eiben and J.E. Smith “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing” Springer, 2003
2. Andries Engelbrecht, Computational Intelligence: An Introduction, 2007
3. Amos Gilat, “ MATLAB : “An introduction with applications”, John Wiley & Sons Inc,
2011.
4. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine
Learning”, Addison Wesley, 2007
5. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, Shiva Shankar B. Nair, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata
McGraw hill Ltd, 2008.
6. E. Sanchez, T. Shibata, and L. A. Zadeh, Eds., "Genetic Algorithms and Fuzzy Logic
Systems: Soft Computing Perspectives, Advances in Fuzzy Systems - Applications
and Theory", Vol. 7, River Edge, World Scientific, 1997.
7. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, “Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and Applications”,
Prentice Hall, 1995
8. Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft
Computing”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2003
9. Kwang H.Lee, “First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications”, Springer–Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg, 2005
10. Kaluza, B. INSTANT Weka How-to, Packt Publishing, 2013.
11. Leszek Rutkowski, “ Computational Intelligence – Methods and Techniques”,
Springer, 2008.
12. Mitsuo Gen and Runwei Cheng,”Genetic Algorithms and Engineering Optimization”,
Wiley, Publishers 2000.
13. Mitchell Melanie, “An Introduction to Genetic Algorithm”, Prentice Hall, 1998
14. Ross Timothy J, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Wiley India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi, 2010.
15. S.N.Sivanandam, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, Springer, 2007.
MC5015 PRINCIPLES OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To understand and describe syntax and semantics of programming languages.
To understand Data, Data types, and Bindings.
To learn the concepts of functional and logical programming.
To explore the knowledge about concurrent Programming paradigms.
71
UNIT I ELEMENTS OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES 9
Reasons for studying, concepts of programming languages, Language Evaluation Criteria,
influences on Language design, Language categories. Programming Language
Implementation – Compilation, Hybrid Implementation, Pure Interpretation and Virtual
Machines. Describing Syntax and Semantics -Introduction - The General Problem of
Describing Syntax-Formal Methods of Describing Syntax - Attribute Grammars - Describing
the Meanings of Programs: Dynamic Semantics.
UNIT II DATA TYPES-ABSTRACTION 9
Introduction - Primitive Data Types- Character String Types- User-Defined Ordinal Types-
Array types- Associative Arrays-Record Types- Tuple Types-List Types -Union Types -
Pointer and Reference Types -Type Checking- Strong Typing -Type Equivalence - Theory
and Data Types-Variables-The Concept of Binding -Scope - Scope and Lifetime -
Referencing Environments - Named Constants- The Concept of Abstraction- Parameterized
Abstract Data Types- Encapsulation Constructs- Naming Encapsulations
UNIT III FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMING 9
Introduction- Mathematical Functions- Fundamentals of Functional Programming
Languages- The First Functional Programming Language: LISP- An Introduction to Scheme-
Common LISP- Haskell-F# - ML : Implicit Types- Data Types- Exception Handling in ML.
Functional Programming with Lists- Scheme, a Dialect of Lisp- The Structure of Lists- List
Manipulation- A Motivating Example: Differentiation- Simplification of Expressions- Storage
Allocation for Lists.
UNIT IV LOGIC PROGRAMMING 9
Relational Logic Programming- Syntax- Basics- Facts- Rules- Syntax- Operational
Semantics- Relational logic programs and SQL operations- Logic Programming- Syntax-
Operational semantics- Data Structures-Meta-tools: Backtracking optimization (cuts); Unify;
Meta-circular interpreters- The Origins of Prolog- Elements- of Prolog-Deficiencies of Prolog-
Applications of Logic Programming.
UNIT V CONCURRENT PROGRAMMING 9
Parallelism in Hardware- Streams: Implicit Synchronization-Concurrency as Interleaving-
Liveness Properties- Safe Access to Shared Data- Concurrency in Ada- Synchronized
Access to Shared Variables- Synthesized Attributes- Attribute Grammars- Natural
Semantics- Denotational Semantics -A Calculator in Scheme-Lexically Scoped Lambda
Expressions- An Interpreter-Recursive Functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Describe syntax and semantics of programming languages
Explain data, data types, and basic statements of programming languages
Design and implement subprogram constructs, Apply object - oriented, concurrency,
pro
and event handling programming constructs
Develop programs in LISP, ML, and Prolog.
72
REFERENCES:
1. Ghezzi, “Programming Languages”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley, 2008
2. John C. Mitchell, “Concepts in Programming Languages”, Cambridge University
Press, 2004.
3. Louden, “Programming Languages”, 3rd Edition, 2012.
4. Ravi Sethi, “Programming Languages: Concepts and Constructs”, 2nd Edition,
Addison Wesley, 1996.
5. Robert .W. Sebesta, “Concepts of Programming Languages”, 10th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2002.
73
You might also like
- Anna University, Chennai Affiliated Institutions B.E. Mechatronics Engineeering Regulations - 2017 Choice Based Credit SystemNo ratings yetAnna University, Chennai Affiliated Institutions B.E. Mechatronics Engineeering Regulations - 2017 Choice Based Credit System112 pages
- Mechanical Engineering - Anna Univ Syllabus 2017 RegNo ratings yetMechanical Engineering - Anna Univ Syllabus 2017 Reg113 pages
- Manufacturing Engineering - Anna Univ Syllabus 2017 RegNo ratings yetManufacturing Engineering - Anna Univ Syllabus 2017 Reg102 pages
- B.E.Civil Engineering 2017 Regulation SyllabusNo ratings yetB.E.Civil Engineering 2017 Regulation Syllabus119 pages
- Anna University, Chennai Affiliated Institutions B.E. Instrumentation and Control Engineering Regulations - 2017 Choice Based Credit SystemNo ratings yetAnna University, Chennai Affiliated Institutions B.E. Instrumentation and Control Engineering Regulations - 2017 Choice Based Credit System125 pages
- Metrology and Measurements - ME3592 - Lesson Plan-1No ratings yetMetrology and Measurements - ME3592 - Lesson Plan-16 pages
- Carbon Nanotube Devices: Properties, Modeling, Integration and ApplicationsFrom EverandCarbon Nanotube Devices: Properties, Modeling, Integration and ApplicationsNo ratings yet
- Busseri2011 - A Review of The Tripartite Structure of SWB100% (1)Busseri2011 - A Review of The Tripartite Structure of SWB26 pages
- Download Human Mosaic A Cultural Approach to Human Geography 12th Edition by Mona Domosh The ebook All Chapters PDF100% (4)Download Human Mosaic A Cultural Approach to Human Geography 12th Edition by Mona Domosh The ebook All Chapters PDF34 pages
- Cisco Powervu Network Center Data Backup/Restore (Pncbmenu) User GuideNo ratings yetCisco Powervu Network Center Data Backup/Restore (Pncbmenu) User Guide22 pages
- Diagnostic Cytopathology - 2024 - Layfield - World Health Organization Reporting System for Soft Tissue Cytopathology RiskNo ratings yetDiagnostic Cytopathology - 2024 - Layfield - World Health Organization Reporting System for Soft Tissue Cytopathology Risk5 pages
- Bac 3 - Practice Career Professionalism Notes0% (1)Bac 3 - Practice Career Professionalism Notes13 pages
- Mathématiques Les Exercices Incontournables MPSINo ratings yetMathématiques Les Exercices Incontournables MPSI4 pages
- Original Article: Clinical Correlation of Acute Appendicitis With Ultrasound Examination and Histopathology of AppendixNo ratings yetOriginal Article: Clinical Correlation of Acute Appendicitis With Ultrasound Examination and Histopathology of Appendix9 pages
- Simple Harmonic Motion by Edward AbellaNo ratings yetSimple Harmonic Motion by Edward Abella50 pages
